U.S. patent application number 15/245621 was filed with the patent office on 2017-02-23 for detection method of life activity, measuring device of life activity, transmission method of life activity detection signal, or service based on life activity information.
The applicant listed for this patent is Hideo Ando. Invention is credited to Hideo Ando.
Application Number | 20170049407 15/245621 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 51847714 |
Filed Date | 2017-02-23 |
United States Patent
Application |
20170049407 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Ando; Hideo |
February 23, 2017 |
DETECTION METHOD OF LIFE ACTIVITY, MEASURING DEVICE OF LIFE
ACTIVITY, TRANSMISSION METHOD OF LIFE ACTIVITY DETECTION SIGNAL, OR
SERVICE BASED ON LIFE ACTIVITY INFORMATION
Abstract
According to a measuring method or a control method of life
activity, a life object is illuminated with an electromagnetic wave
including a wavelength in a designated waveband, and a
characteristic in a local area of the life object is detected, or a
life activity thereof is controlled. The "designated waveband" is
defined based on phenomena used for detecting or controlling an
activity state of the life object or a change of the state. This
"local area" is an area constituted by one or more cells.
Inventors: |
Ando; Hideo; (Tokyo,
JP) |
|
Applicant: |
Name |
City |
State |
Country |
Type |
Ando; Hideo |
Tokyo |
|
JP |
|
|
Family ID: |
51847714 |
Appl. No.: |
15/245621 |
Filed: |
August 24, 2016 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
14270610 |
May 6, 2014 |
9456776 |
|
|
15245621 |
|
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
1/1 |
Current CPC
Class: |
A61B 5/055 20130101;
A61B 5/4041 20130101; G16H 40/67 20180101; A61B 5/14551 20130101;
A61B 5/0042 20130101; A61B 5/0022 20130101; A61B 5/14546 20130101;
A61B 5/7228 20130101; A61B 5/165 20130101; A61B 5/4519 20130101;
A61B 5/0062 20130101; A61B 5/0082 20130101; A61N 5/0622 20130101;
A61B 5/4064 20130101; A61B 2562/0233 20130101; A61B 5/7435
20130101; A61B 5/0068 20130101; G01R 33/4806 20130101 |
International
Class: |
A61B 5/00 20060101
A61B005/00; A61B 5/145 20060101 A61B005/145; A61B 5/055 20060101
A61B005/055; A61B 5/1455 20060101 A61B005/1455 |
Foreign Application Data
Date |
Code |
Application Number |
May 7, 2013 |
JP |
2013-097947 |
Mar 20, 2014 |
JP |
2014-059230 |
Claims
1. A user interface terminal, comprising: a network control
section; a display control section; and a user input section,
wherein the display control section is configured to perform a
first interface relating to inquiry for a user about whether or not
to execute a service based on collected information related to the
user, the user input section is configured to perform a second
interface relating to a service execution acknowledgement from the
user, and the service is executed to the user.
2. A user interface terminal comprising: a network control section;
a display control section; and a user input section, wherein the
display control section is configured to perform a first interface
relating to presenting a service candidate based on collected
information related to a user, the user input section is configured
to perform a second interface relating to a service request from
the user, and the service is executed to the user.
3. A device for providing an interface, the interface comprising: a
first interface for outputting an inquiry for a user about whether
or not to execute a service based on collected information related
to the user; a second interface allowing the user to input a
service execution acknowledgement; and a third interface for
executing the service to the user corresponding to the service
execution acknowledgement.
4. A device for providing an interface, the interface comprising: a
first interface for outputting at least one service candidate based
on collected information related to a user; a second interface
allowing the user to input a service request; and a third interface
for executing the service to the user corresponding to the service
request.
Description
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0001] 1. Field of the Invention
[0002] The present invention relates to, a measuring method or a
control method for measuring (in vivo measurement) or controlling,
in a living state, dynamical life activities changing at high speed
in a life object such as an animal including a human or a plant or
changes thereof by a non-contact and noninvasive method.
[0003] 2. Description of the Related Art
[0004] An example of dynamical life activities changing at high
speed in a life object is activities of the nervous system. Methods
for measuring an intracerebral activity include a blood oxygen
analyzing of blood with near infrared light (hereinafter referred
to as "Conventional Technique 1") and oxygen analyzing of blood
with a functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI) method
(hereinafter referred to as "Conventional Technique 2"), which are
representative examples of conventional techniques.
[0005] According to Conventional Technique 1, the oxygen
concentration in blood is measured by use of a change of a near
infrared light absorbing spectrum of oxyhemoglobin and
deoxyhemoglobin (see Non Patent Document 1). That is, the
oxyhemoglobin which is a particular hemoglobin bonding to an oxygen
molecule has a maximum absorption at a wavelength of 930 nm, and
the deoxyhemoglobin which is other particular hemoglobin separated
from an oxygen molecule has maximum absorption at wavelengths of
760 nm and 905 nm. A head is illuminated with each light of 780 nm,
805 nm, and 830 nm as a light source (a semiconductor laser) for
measurement, and changes in intensity of respective beams of
transmitted light are measured. Signals relating to cortex areas of
the brain at 3 to 4 cm in depth are hereby obtained from a surface
of the head.
[0006] Except the method using near infrared light, there is a
method using Nuclear Magnetic Resonance to perform the measurement
of the oxygen concentration in blood. That is, when adsorption of
oxygen molecules is switched to release of oxygen molecules,
electron orbitals in hemoglobin molecules are changed, which
changes magnetic susceptibility and shortens T2 relaxation time of
MR.
[0007] According to Conventional Technique 2, a location
(activation area) where an oxygen consumption rate has increased in
the nervous system is estimated by use of this phenomenon (see Non
Patent Documents 2 and 3). When this method is used, a measurement
result can be obtained by a computer process and the oxygen
concentration distribution in blood in the head can be exhibited in
a three-dimensional manner.
[0008] Meanwhile, as a method for controlling dynamical life
activities in a life object, there has been known medical
treatment.
CITATION LIST
Non-Patent Documents
[0009] Non Patent Document 1: Yukihiro Ozaki/Satoshi Kawata:
Kinsekigaibunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996) Section 4.6
[0010] Non Patent Document 2: Takashi Tachibana: Nou Wo Kiwameru
Noukenkyu Saizensen (Asahi Shimbun Publishing, 2001) p. 197 [0011]
Non Patent Document 3: Masahiko Watanabe: Nou Shinkei Kagaku Nyumon
Koza Gekan (Yodosha, 2002) p. 188
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Problem to be Solved by the Invention
[0012] However, according to Conventional Techniques 1 and 2, a
temporal resolution and a spatial resolution for the active state
measurement of the neuron are low.
[0013] In order to facilitate the understanding of the problem, the
following initially explains that the oxygen analyzing of blood is
indirect measurement. The measurement of the oxygen concentration
in blood is based on a tacit hypothesis that "when a neuron is
activated, hemoglobin should be deoxygenated to supply its activity
energy."
[0014] However, as described in Chapter 4 of the B. Alberts et. al:
Essential Cell Biology (Garland Publishing, Inc., 1998), energy
caused at the time of hydrolysis from ATP (Adenosine triphosphate)
to ADP (Adenosine diphosphate) is used for the activity energy of
the neuron.
[0015] The ADP is generated in the course of an oxidation process
of Acetyl CoA occurring in Mitochondria existing in the neuron.
Further, the neuron does not contact with blood vessels directly,
and oxygen molecules are transmitted into the neuron via glial
cells intervening between the neuron and the blood vessels. The
transmission of the oxygen molecules is involved with the activity
in the neuron via such a complicated course.
[0016] Accordingly, it is considered that a phenomenon that the
oxygen concentration in blood is changed (decreased) occurs only
around a local area where a large amount of cells are activated in
the nervous system at the same time. For this reason, it is
difficult, in Conventional Techniques 1 and 2, to observe instant
changes of a few cells in the nervous system, such as short-term
action potentials from a few neurons. That is, since only a local
area where a large amount of cells are activated at the same time
can be detected, it is theoretically difficult to raise the spatial
resolution. As such, in Conventional Techniques 1 and 2, the
activity of the neuron is observed not directly but indirectly, so
that the measurement accuracy is poor.
[0017] (Regarding Temporal Resolution)
[0018] According to the report of Nikkei Electronics (Nikkei BP),
p. 44, published on May 3, 2010, a hemoglobin level in blood which
changes about 5 s after a neuron became active is detected in
accordance with Conventional Technique 1. Therefore, in the
detection based on Conventional Technique 1, a large delay occurs
from initiation of the activity of the neuron.
[0019] Further, according to Conventional Technique 2, the use of a
BOLD (Blood Oxygenation Level Dependent) effect causes a similar
situation to the above. The BOLD effect is as follows: when a
neuronal activity increases due to a brain activity, an oxygen
consumption increases at first. As a result, a deoxyhemoglobin
concentration slightly increases, and several seconds later, a
cerebral blood flow in capillaries in vicinal areas increases
rapidly, thereby causing a supply of a large amount of oxygen which
greatly exceeds the oxygen consumption. This rapidly increases the
oxyhemoglobin concentration, and consequently, fMRI signals are
enhanced and relaxation time thereof is made longer. That is, even
in Conventional Technique 2, the detection of the increase in the
oxyhemoglobin concentration requires several seconds after the
activity of the neuron has started due to the brain activity, and
thus, Conventional Technique 2 also causes a delay of several
seconds for the detection, similarly to Conventional Technique
1.
[0020] As such, as long as Conventional Techniques 1 and 2 measure
the oxygen concentration in blood, there is a delay for the
hemoglobin level in blood to change after the initiation of the
activity of the neuron. In view of this, the temporal resolution in
either of Conventional Techniques 1 and 2 is about 5 s, which is
very low.
[0021] (Regarding Spatial Resolution)
[0022] The spatial resolution of Conventional Technique 1 is
determined by a distance between a light source and a photodetector
for measuring an intensity change of light passing through the head
(See p. 43 of Nikkei Electronics (Nikkei BP) published on May 3,
2010). As the distance between the light source and the
photodetector becomes smaller, a penetration depth of a measuring
beam into the head becomes shallower.
[0023] Accordingly, if the distance between the light source and
the photodetector is shortened to raise the spatial resolution, it
becomes impossible to measure the nervous system in the head. As
described earlier, in a case where measurement is performed on an
area inside the head which is at a depth of 3 to 4 cm from a
surface of the head, the light source should be placed so as to be
distanced from the photodetector by about 3 cm, and thus, the
spatial resolution is about 3 cm.
[0024] On the other hand, the spatial resolution in the case of
Conventional Technique 2 is determined by a wavelength of a
detecting transaction magnetic field (an electromagnetic wave)
according to a diffraction theory of the electromagnetic wave, and
the wavelength of this detecting transaction magnetic field is
determined by a DC magnetic field intensity to be applied. Even if
the DC magnetic field intensity is raised using a super conductive
magnet, there is a theoretical upper limit of the spatial
resolution due to a technical limitation. According to p. 42 of
Nikkei Electronics (Nikkei BP) published on May 3, 2010, which is
mentioned above, the spatial resolution is a few mm at best, even
in an fMRI device having the highest spatial resolution.
[0025] The following describes a penetration depth into a life
object regarding Conventional Technique 1. As apparent from the
skin color of a human, visible light is easy to be reflected
diffusely on a surface of a life object and is hard to penetrate
the life object. In the examples described above, light of 780 nm,
light of 805 nm, and light of 830 nm are used as measuring beams.
The light of 830 nm, which has the longest wavelength among them,
is near infrared light, but is close to a visible light area.
Therefore, the penetration depth thereof into the life object is
also short. As a result, only a signal relating to the cortex area
in the brain located at a depth of 3 to 4 cm from the surface of
the head can be measured at best, as previously described.
[0026] In view of this, it is an object of the present invention to
provide a method and the like which can measure an active state in
a life object while attempting to enhance the spatial resolution
and the temporal resolution.
[0027] Meanwhile, in the medical treatment, which is known as a
method for controlling life activities, it is difficult to
effectively control only a particular region in a life object. This
is because a medicine given by mouth or by injection circulates
through the body and spreads over the body. Therefore, even
medication for a therapeutic purpose, for example, not only causes
a relative decrease in a medicine amount working on a target part
to be cured (controlled), but also side effects due to other drug
actions to other parts except the target part to be cured
(controlled).
[0028] In view of this, the present invention is also intended to
provide a method and the like for effectively controlling an active
state of only a particular region (an area constituted by one cell
or a group of a plurality of cells) in a life object.
Means for Solving the Problem
[0029] A measuring method of life activity or a control method of
life activity according to the first aspect of the present
invention is a measuring method of life activity or a control
method of life activity for measuring or controlling an active
state of a life object including an animal and a plant or a change
thereof, including: an illumination step of illuminating the life
object with an electromagnetic wave of which a wavelength is
included in a designated waveband; and a detection step of
detecting a characteristic associated with the electromagnetic wave
in a local area constituted by one or more cells in the life
object, or a control step of controlling the active state by use of
the characteristic associated with the electromagnetic wave,
wherein any of the following phenomena is used for detecting or
controlling the active state of the life object or a change
thereof:
[0030] [1] transition energy between a ground state of a vibration
mode newly occurring between atoms in a constituent molecule of a
cell membrane and a plurality of excited states;
[0031] [2] transition energy between vibration modes occurring
between specific atoms in a molecule corresponding to the activity
of the life object or the change thereof and
[0032] [3] a specific chemical shift value in Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance, and the designated waveband is determined on the basis
of any of the phenomena.
[0033] The measuring method of life activity according to one
exemplary embodiment of the present invention is such that the
designated waveband is determined under such a condition that the
potential change of the cell membrane is accompanied with a
phenomenon in which a specific ion is attached to or detached from
a specific substance in the local area.
[0034] The measuring method of life activity according to a first
aspect of the present invention is such that the designated
waveband is determined under such a condition that the specific
substance and the specific ion is at least one of a combination of
Phosphatidylcholine or Sphingomyelin and a chlorine ion, a
combination of Phosphatidylserine and a sodium ion or a potassium
ion, and a combination of Glycolipid and a sodium ion.
[0035] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention is such that: the designated
waveband according to attachment or detachment of the chlorine ion
with respect to the Phosphatidylcholine is determined on the basis
of a wavenumber of 2480 cm.sup.-1 or a chemical shift value from
.delta.2.49 to .delta.2.87 ppm or a chemical shift value related to
.delta.3.43 ppm to .delta.3.55 ppm; the designated waveband
according to attachment or detachment of the chlorine ion with
respect to the Sphingomyelin is determined on the basis of a
wavenumber of 2450 cm.sup.-1 or a chemical shift value from
.delta.2.49 to .delta.2.87 ppm or a chemical shift value related to
.delta.3.43 ppm to .delta.3.55 ppm; the designated waveband
according to attachment or detachment of the sodium ion with
respect to the Phosphatidyl serine is determined on the basis of a
wavenumber of 429 cm.sup.-1; the designated waveband according to
attachment or detachment of the potassium ion with respect to the
Phosphatidylserine is determined on the basis of a wavenumber of
118 cm.sup.-1 or 1570 cm.sup.-1; and the designated waveband
according to attachment or detachment of the sodium ion with
respect to the Glycolipid is determined on the basis of a
wavenumber of 260 to 291 cm.sup.-1.
[0036] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention is such that the designated
waveband is determined so that at least a part of a waveband
corresponding to a wavenumber range having a margin of 10 to 20%
with respect to a wavenumber to be the basis or a range of a
chemical shift value having a margin of 0.45 ppm to 0.49 ppm with
respect to a chemical shift value to be the basis is included
therein.
[0037] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention is such that the designated
waveband is determined such that wavebands of electromagnetic waves
absorbed by other substances including at least water constituting
the life object are removed.
[0038] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention is such that the designated
phenomenon is a phenomenon to occur within a designated response
time in a range of 4 to 200 ms after the active state of the life
object has changed.
[0039] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention is such that the detection step is
a step of detecting an absorption characteristic of the
electromagnetic wave in the local area at any cross section in the
life object by using a confocal system.
[0040] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention further includes: a step of
acquiring, by the illumination step and the detection step,
designated information representing a spatial distribution aspect
and an aspect of a time dependent variation of the absorption
characteristic of the electromagnetic wave in the life object; and
a step of specifying life activity information of the life object
or environmental information defining an environment surrounding
the life object, by referring to a data base in which to store a
relationship between the life activity information or the
environmental information and the designated information, based on
the acquired designated information.
[0041] The measuring method of life activity according to the first
aspect of the present invention further includes: a step of
recognizing the life activity information or environmental
information of the life object; and a step of setting or correcting
the relationship between them to be stored in the data base, based
on the recognized life activity information or environmental
information and the acquired designated information.
[0042] A measuring method of life activity according to a second
aspect of the present invention is such that a dynamical activity
of a life object is detected by use of a characteristic in a local
area corresponding to an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength
of not less than 0.84 .mu.m but not more than 110 .mu.m or a
characteristic in a local area corresponding to an electromagnetic
wave associated with a chemical shift value in a range of not less
than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than .delta.4.5 ppm.
[0043] The measuring method of life activity according to one
exemplary embodiment of the present invention is such that a time
dependent variation of the characteristic in the local area of the
life object is measured.
[0044] The measuring method of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention is such that at least a part
of the life object is illuminated with a modulated electromagnetic
wave having a basic frequency in a range of 0.2 Hz to 500 kHz.
[0045] The measuring method of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention is such that a time
dependent variation of the characteristic in one fixed local area
in the life object is detected or a set of individual time
dependent variations related to the characteristic in a plurality
of local areas fixed to different positions in the life object are
detected.
[0046] The measuring method of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention at least one of the fixed
local areas corresponds to one cell or a part of the cell and is
illuminated with a modulated electromagnetic wave having a basic
frequency in a range of 0.2 Hz to 500 kHz.
[0047] The measuring method of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention is such that the local area
corresponds to one cell or a part of the one cell, and a change of
the characteristic to occur according to a potential change of a
cell membrane constituting the cell is detected.
[0048] The measuring method of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention is such that the life object
is illuminated with electromagnetic waves including electromagnetic
waves having a plurality of different wavelengths or
electromagnetic waves having a plurality of different frequencies
so as to detect characteristics in the local area of the life
object corresponding to the electromagnetic waves having the
plurality of wavelengths or the electromagnetic waves having the
plurality of frequencies.
[0049] The measuring method of life activity according to one
exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes: a
generation step of generating dynamical life activity information
from the obtained detection signal.
[0050] A measuring device of life activity according to a first
aspect of the present invention is a measuring device of life
activity for measuring an active state of a life object including
an animal and a plant, including: an illuminator for illuminating
the life object with an electromagnetic wave of which a wavelength
is included in a designated waveband; and a detector for detecting
a characteristic associated with the electromagnetic wave in a
local area constituted by one or more cells in the life object,
wherein: any of the following phenomena is used for detecting or
controlling the active state of the life object or a change
thereof:
[0051] [1] transition energy between a ground state of a vibration
mode newly occurring between atoms in a constituent molecule of a
cell membrane and a plurality of excited states;
[0052] [2] transition energy between vibration modes occurring
between specific atoms in a molecule corresponding to the activity
of the life object or the change thereof; and
[0053] [3] a specific chemical shift value in Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance, and the designated waveband is determined on the basis
of any of the phenomena.
[0054] A measuring device of life activity, according to a second
aspect of the present invention, having a detecting section for
life activity and performing a predetermined process based on a
detection signal related to a life activity obtained from the
detecting section for life activity is such that: the detecting
section for life activity is constituted by a light emitting
section and a signal detecting section; the light emitting section
generates electromagnetic waves illuminated to a life object; the
electromagnetic waves include an electromagnetic wave having a
wavelength of not less than 0.84 .mu.m but not more than 110 .mu.m
or an electromagnetic wave associated with a chemical shift value
in a range of not less than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than
.delta.4.5 ppm; and the signal detecting section detects an
electromagnetic wave including the detection signal related to the
activity of the life object obtained as a result of the
illumination of the electromagnetic waves.
[0055] The measuring device of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention is such that the local area
corresponds to one cell or a part of the one cell, and a change of
the characteristic to occur according to a potential change of a
cell membrane constituting the cell is detected.
[0056] The measuring device of life activity according to the
second aspect of the present invention is such that the light
emitting section generates electromagnetic waves including
electromagnetic waves having a plurality of different wavelengths
or electromagnetic waves having a plurality of different
frequencies.
[0057] A transmission method of a life activity detection signal is
such that: a life object is illuminated with electromagnetic waves
including an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of not less
than 0.84 .mu.m but not more than 110 .mu.m or an electromagnetic
wave associated with a chemical shift value in a range of not less
than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than .delta.4.5 ppm; a life
activity detection signal related to a characteristic in a local
area of the life object is detected; and the life activity
detection signal is transmitted.
[0058] The transmission method of a life activity detection signal
according to one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is
such that: the local area corresponds to one cell or a part of the
one cell; and a change of the characteristic to occur due to a
potential change of a cell membrane constituting the cell is
detected.
[0059] A transmission method of life activity information according
to one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is such that a
life object is illuminated with an electromagnetic wave having a
wavelength of not less than 0.84 .mu.m but not more than 110 .mu.m
or an electromagnetic wave associated with a chemical shift value
in a range of not less than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than
.delta.4.5 ppm, so as to obtain a life activity detection signal
related to a local area of the life object, life activity
information is generated from the obtained life activity detection
signal, and the life activity information is transmitted.
[0060] The transmission method of a life activity detection signal
according to one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is
such that: life activity detection signals related to respective
characteristics in a local area of the life object corresponding to
electromagnetic waves having a plurality of wavelengths in a range
of not less than 0.84 .mu.m but not more than 110 .mu.m or
electromagnetic waves associated with a plurality of chemical shift
values in a range of not less than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than
.delta.4.5 ppm are detected; and the life activity detection
signals related to the respective wavelengths or the respective
frequencies are transmitted.
[0061] A service based on life activity information according to
one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is such that: a
life object is illuminated with electromagnetic waves including an
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of not less than 0.84
.mu.m but not more than 110 .mu.m or an electromagnetic wave
associated with a chemical shift value in a range of not less than
.delta.1.7 ppm but not more than .delta.4.5 ppm; a life activity
detection signal related to a characteristic in a local area of the
life object is detected; and based on a result of generating life
activity information from the life activity detection signal, a
service corresponding to the life activity information is provided,
or the life object is illuminated with the electromagnetic wave to
provide a service corresponding to control of the life
activity.
[0062] A service based on life activity information according to
one embodiment of the present invention is such that a service is
provided based on detection or measurement results, or control of a
life activity occurring in the local area constituted by one or
more cells.
Effects of the Invention
[0063] According to the measuring method of life activity or the
control method of life activity of the present invention, a life
object is illuminated with an electromagnetic wave of which a
wavelength is included in a designated waveband, and a
characteristic in a local area of the life object corresponding to
the electromagnetic wave or a change thereof is detected or
controlled. The "designated waveband" is a waveband determined on
the basis of transition energy between vibration modes formed
between specific atoms in a local area which can occur associated
with an active state of a life object or a change thereof or on the
basis of a specific chemical shift value. A "local area" is an area
constituted by one or more cells.
[0064] Consequently, according to the present invention,
characteristics associated with electromagnetic waves and appearing
rapidly or in a very short time according to changes of an active
state of a life object can be detected. That is, it is possible to
measure an active state of a life object while attempting to
enhance the temporal resolution. Further, according to one
embodiment of the present invention, since only a minute local area
is illuminated with the electromagnetic wave by use of convergence
properties of the electromagnetic wave, not only the spatial
resolution for the detection or measurement of the life activity is
improved, but also the life activity is controllable only in a
minute local area. Further, if this control method or this
detection result is used, the recognition accuracy for an active
state of a life object can be improved and an appropriate service
can be provided to the life object or a person concerned.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0065] FIG. 1 is a general explanatory view of a signal
transmission pathway in a nervous system.
[0066] FIG. 2 is a general explanatory view illustrating signal
transmission in an axon.
[0067] FIG. 3 is an explanatory view illustrating changing states
of a neuronal membrane potential and a muscular membrane potential
in case of an action potential.
[0068] FIG. 4 illustrates a charging model on both surfaces of a
neuronal membrane in case of action and resting potentials.
[0069] FIG. 5 is an estimated molecular structure of PCLN in case
of Cl.sup.- ion attachment and detachment.
[0070] FIG. 6 illustrates infrared spectral characteristics
estimation of PCLN in case of Cl.sup.- ion attachment and
detachment
[0071] FIG. 7 is an explanatory view of a part of GD1a structure
used for calculating infrared spectral characteristics.
[0072] FIG. 8 is a flow chart used for originally calculating near
infrared spectral characteristics based on anharmonic
vibrations.
[0073] FIG. 9 is an explanatory view of a charged particle movement
in electric field having specific direction.
[0074] FIG. 10 is an explanatory view of position vectors pointing
to carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses which together make
asymmetrical stretching of C--H--Cl.sup.-.
[0075] FIG. 11 illustrates a relative static molecule energy vs.
distance deviation between carbon and hydrogen atomic
nucleuses.
[0076] FIG. 12 is an explanatory view of Cl.sup.- position
fluctuation dependent on distance deviation between carbon and
hydrogen atomic nucleuses.
[0077] FIG. 13 illustrates amplitude distributions of wave
functions |m> regarding anharmonic vibrations.
[0078] FIG. 14 illustrates net atomic charges vs. distance
deviations between carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses.
[0079] FIG. 15 illustrates amplitude distributions of molecular
orbitals whose eigen values of energy correspond to HOMO and the
minimum.
[0080] FIG. 16 illustrates electric dipole moments vs. distance
deviations between carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses.
[0081] FIG. 17 illustrates a comparison in spatial resolution
between membrane potential changing detection and oxygen
concentration change detection in blood.
[0082] FIG. 18 illustrates a comparison in temporal resolution
between membrane potential changing detection and oxygen
concentration change detection in blood.
[0083] FIG. 19 is an explanatory view of comparison in detection
accuracy between membrane potential changing detection and oxygen
concentration change detection in blood.
[0084] FIG. 20 is an explanatory view of a first principle of a
monitoring method of a detected point for life activity.
[0085] FIG. 21 is an explanatory view of a first principle of
monitoring method of a pattern of a detected point for life
activity in a depth direction.
[0086] FIG. 22 is an explanatory view of a second principle of a
monitoring method of a marked position on a life-object
surface.
[0087] FIG. 23 is an explanatory view of a principle (using a
confocal system) of a first exemplary embodiment regarding an
optical system for life activity detection.
[0088] FIG. 24 is an explanatory view of an operation principle of
the first exemplary embodiment regarding the optical system for
life activity detection.
[0089] FIG. 25 shows a relationship between a liquid crystal
shutter pattern and a photo detecting cell in the first exemplary
embodiment of the optical system for life activity detection.
[0090] FIG. 26 is an explanatory view of an operation principle
regarding an applied embodiment of the optical system for life
activity detection.
[0091] FIG. 27 is an explanatory view of a configuration of a
photodetector in the applied embodiment of the optical system for
life activity detection.
[0092] FIG. 28 is an explanatory view of a detailed optical
arrangement regarding the applied embodiment of the optical system
for life activity detection.
[0093] FIG. 29 is an explanatory view illustrating a method for
detecting a local change of a Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property
in a life object at high speed.
[0094] FIG. 30 is an explanatory view regarding a method for
detecting a location where the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property
changes.
[0095] FIG. 31 is an explanatory view of a configuration of a
detecting section for life activity.
[0096] FIG. 32 is an explanatory view of a configuration of another
exemplary embodiment of a detecting section for life activity.
[0097] FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of a configuration of a front
part of a life activity detecting circuit.
[0098] FIG. 34 is an explanatory view of a configuration of a rear
part of a life activity detecting circuit.
[0099] FIG. 35 is an explanatory view of a configuration of a
transmitting section of a life activity detection signal.
[0100] FIG. 36 is a general explanatory view illustrating a content
of a life activity detection signal.
[0101] FIG. 37 is a general explanatory view illustrating an
example of life activity information (a measurement result
regarding a specific measuring item).
[0102] FIG. 38 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of a
data base construction related to life activity interpretation.
[0103] FIG. 39 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of
life activity interpretation.
[0104] FIG. 40 is an explanatory view illustrating an applied
embodiment of life activity interpretation.
[0105] FIG. 41 is an explanatory view illustrating a relationship
between facial expression and emotional reaction.
[0106] FIG. 42 is an explanatory view of a method for obtaining
life activity information from movement of a facial muscle.
[0107] FIG. 43 is an explanatory view of a method for selecting an
optimum process/operation method based on life activity
information.
[0108] FIG. 44 is an explanatory view of an overview of a network
system using a detecting section for life activity.
[0109] FIG. 45 is a whole explanatory view of an example of a
service based on life activity measurement.
[0110] FIG. 46 is an explanatory view of a content of an activation
process in a service based on life activity measurement.
[0111] FIG. 47 is a detailed explanatory view of a method of
interface correspondence in the present exemplary embodiment.
[0112] FIG. 48 is an explanatory view (1) of a communication
protocol of a life activity detection signal with event
information.
[0113] FIG. 49 is an explanatory view (2) of a communication
protocol of a life activity detection signal with event
information.
[0114] FIG. 50 is an explanatory view (1) of a communication
protocol of life activity information with event information.
[0115] FIG. 51 is an explanatory view (2) of a communication
protocol of life activity information with event information.
[0116] FIG. 52 is an explanatory view of an example of detecting a
signal transmission pathway through which pain of the tip of a foot
reaches the brain.
[0117] FIG. 53 is an explanatory view of an example of detecting a
signal transmission pathway through which pain reaches the brain of
a patient of spinal canal stenosis.
[0118] FIG. 54 is an explanatory view of an applied embodiment in
which membrane potential changing and oxygen concentration change
in blood are detected at the same time.
[0119] FIG. 55 is an explanatory view of a light emitting pattern
of illuminating light for life activity detection in detection of
life activity.
[0120] FIG. 56 is an explanatory view of an appropriate wavelength
range for detection/control of life activity in the present
exemplary embodiment/applied embodiment.
[0121] FIG. 57 illustrates interpretation of quantum chemistry
regarding catalysis by enzyme.
[0122] FIG. 58 is an explanatory view of a mechanism for ATP
hydrolysis by Myosin ATPase.
[0123] FIG. 59 is an explanatory view of a reason why an absorption
band wavelength varies depending on to which a residue of Lysine is
hydrogen bonded.
[0124] FIG. 60 is an explanatory view of a relationship between a
hydrogen-bonding partner and an anharmonic vibration potential
property.
[0125] FIG. 61 is an explanatory view of an exemplary detection
signal related to a movement of a mimetic muscle.
[0126] FIG. 62 is an explanatory view of a relationship between a
location of a mimetic muscle which contracts on a face and a facial
expression.
[0127] FIG. 63 is an explanatory view of a positional relationship
between a detectable range and a detection target by a detecting
section for life activity.
[0128] FIG. 64 is an explanatory view of a measuring method 1 of
life activity in the applied embodiment.
[0129] FIG. 65 is an explanatory view of a measuring method 2 of
life activity in the applied embodiment.
[0130] FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of a configuration in a life
activity control device in the present exemplary embodiment.
[0131] FIG. 67 is an explanatory view of an applied embodiment of
the life activity control device.
[0132] FIG. 68 is an explanatory view of a gating mechanism of a
voltage-gated ion channel and a control method from its
outside.
[0133] FIG. 69 is an explanatory view of a state of an
intracellular life activity chain.
[0134] FIG. 70 is a mechanism model in which a memory action and an
obliteration action occur in a pyramidal cell.
[0135] FIG. 71 is an explanatory view of long-term memory formation
and a control method related to long-term obliteration.
[0136] FIG. 72 is an explanatory view of a mechanism model of a
phosphorylation process occurring in an active site in PKA.
[0137] FIG. 73 is an explanatory view of a size of a detected area
and a change of a detection signal obtained from the area.
[0138] FIG. 74 is an explanatory view of a relationship between a
detection pattern and a detection target area at an image forming
position.
[0139] FIG. 75 is an explanatory view of a configuration of another
exemplary embodiment in a signal detecting section.
[0140] FIG. 76 is an explanatory view of a principle of a present
exemplary embodiment using coherent anti-Stokes Raman
scattering.
[0141] FIG. 77 is an explanatory view of a configuration in a light
emitting section in another exemplary embodiment.
[0142] FIG. 78 is an explanatory view of a combination of
properties of a composite color filter in another exemplary
embodiment.
[0143] FIG. 79 is an explanatory view of a principle of a detection
method of an amount of wavefront aberration occurring h; a life
object.
[0144] FIG. 80 is an explanatory view of a relationship between
pulsed Stokes light and a detection signal.
[0145] FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of a molecular structure
model representing a hydrogen bonding state between Lysine in a
protein and a .gamma. phosphoryl.
[0146] FIG. 82 is an explanatory view of a molecular structure
model representing a hydrogen bonding state between a residue of
Lysine and acetic acid.
[0147] FIG. 83 is an explanatory view of a simplified .beta. sheet
molecular structure model.
[0148] FIG. 84 illustrates a comparison in potential property
depending on whether or not a chlorine ion is hydrogen bonded to a
choline cation.
[0149] FIG. 85 illustrates a comparison in potential property
depending on whether or not a chlorine ion is hydrogen bonded to a
primary amine.
[0150] FIG. 86 is an explanatory view of a potential property
change corresponding to a hydrogen bonding partner of an amine.
[0151] FIG. 87 illustrates a potential property when a primary
amine is hydrogen bonded to a .gamma. phosphoryl.
[0152] FIG. 88 illustrates an absorption spectrum property of
choline bromide in a dry solid state.
[0153] FIG. 89 illustrates a comparison in absorption spectrum
between choline chloride and choline bromide in a 1st overtone
region.
[0154] FIG. 90 illustrates a change in 1st overtone absorption band
spectrum between 5 M and 0.2 M as a choline chloride aqueous
solution concentration.
[0155] FIG. 91 illustrates a change in 1st overtone absorption band
spectrum between 1 M and 0.2 M as a choline chloride aqueous
solution concentration.
[0156] FIG. 92 illustrates a relationship between a rate of
decrease of a 1st overtone absorption peak height of water on a
logarithmic scale and an aqueous solution concentration.
[0157] FIG. 93 illustrates a relationship between a choline
chloride aqueous solution concentration and a spectrum change in a
1st overtone region of water.
[0158] FIG. 94 illustrates a spectrum change in a 1st overtone
region of water when the choline chloride aqueous solution
concentration is 1 M.
[0159] FIG. 95 illustrates aqueous solution concentration
dependence of an absolute difference from an absorbance property in
a pure water state.
[0160] FIG. 96 is an explanatory view of an example of a water
molecular arrangement around a choline chloride pair.
[0161] FIG. 97 illustrates a 1st overtone absorption band property
when a primary amine is hydrogen bonded to an anion.
[0162] FIG. 98 illustrates a relationship between an ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution concentration and a 1st
overtone absorption band change.
[0163] FIG. 99 illustrates a molecular structure model representing
a fatigue accumulation state used in the present exemplary
embodiment.
[0164] FIG. 100 is an explanatory view of basic features of life
activity detection based on plural wavelength property.
[0165] FIG. 101 is an explanatory view of a method of detecting a
life activity while time-varying an illuminating light wavelength
(wavenumber).
[0166] FIG. 102 is an explanatory view of a configuration in a
light emitting component.
[0167] FIG. 103 is an explanatory view of a wavelength property of
an electromagnetic wave for detection/control of life activity
emitted from a light emitting component.
[0168] FIG. 104 is an explanatory view of a searching method for a
detected point for life activity.
[0169] FIG. 105 is an explanatory view of a life activity detection
method at a predetermined part of each organism.
[0170] FIG. 106 is an explanatory view of a multipoint simultaneous
life activity control method.
[0171] FIG. 107 is an explanatory view of a multipoint life
activity control method.
[0172] FIG. 108 is an explanatory view of a system model using
detection/control of life activity.
[0173] FIG. 109 is an explanatory view of a processing method from
a life activity detection result to execution of a service.
[0174] FIG. 110 is an explanatory view of a notification process
according to a life activity detection result.
[0175] FIG. 111 is an explanatory view of a method of communicating
a life activity detection result.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
[0176] A table of contents which provides an outline of the
embodiments described below is listed before the embodiment
descriptions. In addition, the embodiments described later relate
to a measuring method of life activity, a measuring device of life
activity, a transmission method of life activity detection signal,
or a service based on life action information.
1] Outline of Activity of Nervous System
[0177] 1.1) Signal transmission pathway in nervous system of
animals
[0178] 1.2) Signal transmission in axon
[0179] 1.3) Signal occurrence/transmission mechanism in nervous
system and membrane potential changing in action potential
2] Action Potential Model regarding Neuron
[0180] 2.1) Structural peculiarity of neuronal membrane based on
background information
[0181] 2.2) Electromagnetical analysis regarding action
potential
[0182] 2.3) Charging model on both surfaces of neuronal membrane in
case of action and resting potentials
[0183] 2.4) Ion concentrations in cytoplasm and extracellular fluid
which are described in background information
[0184] 2.5) Molecular structures of Phospholipids and ion
attachment locations in Phospholipids
[0185] 2.6) Probability comparison between ion attachment and
detachment phenomena in extracellular fluid side regarding action
potential
3] Infrared Spectral Characteristics Estimation based on Action
Potential Model
[0186] 3.1) Calculation method with quantum chemistry simulation
program
[0187] 3.2) Attachment model of Cl.sup.- ion to
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group and wave number estimation of
corresponding absorption band
[0188] 3.3) Detachment model of Na.sup.+ ion from Ganglioside type
D1a and wave number estimation of corresponding absorption band
[0189] 3.4) Attachment model of Na.sup.+ ion to Carboxyl group of
Phosphatidyl serine and wave number estimation of corresponding
absorption band
[0190] 3.5) Infrared Spectrum changing based on attachment model of
K.sup.+ ion to Phospholipid
[0191] 3.6) Infrared Spectrum changing based on another attachment
model of ion to neuronal membrane
[0192] 3.7) Overview of infrared spectrum changing based on action
potential Model
4] Near Infrared Spectral Characteristics Estimation based on
Action Potential Model
[0193] 4.1) Requirement for establishing original calculation
method regarding Near Infrared Spectral Characteristics
[0194] 4.2) Describing outline of original calculation method based
on anharmonic vibrations
[0195] 4.3) Schrodinger equation indicating particular normal
vibration
[0196] 4.4) Formulae relating to wave functions of harmonic
vibrations
[0197] 4.5) Obtaining Einstein's transition probability
[0198] 4.6) Substituting estimation results from quantum chemistry
simulation program [0199] 4.6.1) Numerical analysis method with
quantum chemistry simulation program [0200] 4.6.2) Estimating
anharmonic potential [0201] 4.6.3) Estimating dipole moment
characteristics [0202] 4.6.4) Light absorption wavelengths and
light absorbances of corresponding absorption bands
[0203] 4.7) Discussion about detectable range in present exemplary
embodiment
[0204] 4.8) Applied embodiment adopting CARS microspectroscopy
5] NMR Spectral Characteristics Estimation based on Action
Potential Model
[0205] 5.1) NMR Spectral Characteristic changing and estimated
chemical shift values regarding action potential [0206] 5.1.1)
Prospect for changing NMR Spectral Characteristics regarding action
potential [0207] 5.1.2) Calculation method with another quantum
chemistry simulation program [0208] 5.1.3) Estimating chemical
shift values in NMR Spectral Characteristics
[0209] 5.2) Discussion about measurable range in present exemplary
embodiment
6] Technical Features of Detection/Control Method of Life Activity
and Measuring Method of Life Activity in Present Exemplary
Embodiment
[0210] 6.1) Content of life activity to be measured and features of
detection/control method of life activity [0211] 6.1.1) Life
activity in various meanings to be taken as detection target in
present exemplary embodiment [0212] 6.1.2) Various detection
methods to be applied to detection method of life activity in
present exemplary embodiment [0213] 6.1.3) Life activity in life
object from surface area to very deep area to be taken as
detection/control target [0214] 6.1.4) Generation of life activity
information from detection signal [0215] 6.1.5) Complicated
activity calculable from relatively simple detection signal using
association between life activities
[0216] 6.2) Alignment and preservation method of
detected/controlled point for life activity [0217] 6.2.1) Method
for setting detection position by detecting cross-sectional image
including detected/controlled point [0218] 6.2.2) Method for
estimating and setting position of detected point by detecting
specific position on life-object surface
[0219] 6.3) Photoelectric conversion method for detection of life
activity [0220] 6.3.1) Utilization of confocal system [0221] 6.3.2)
Extraction of spatial variations and time dependent variations by
imaging optical system [0222] 6.3.3) Method for detecting
high-speed change of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property [0223]
6.3.4) Method for reducing interference from other adjacent life
activity detection systems [0224] 6.3.5) Optical system employed
when performing life activity detection using CARS light
[0225] 6.4) Life activity detection circuit [0226] 6.4.1)
Configuration of detecting section for life activity. [0227] 6.4.2)
Configuration of life activity detection circuit [0228] 6.4.3)
Configuration of transmitting section of life activity detection
signal
[0229] 6.5) Measuring method of life activity [0230] 6.5.1)
Overview of information obtained from life activity detection
signal [0231] 6.5.2) Content of life activity information [0232]
6.5.3) Interpretation method of life activity [0233] 6.5.3.1)
Feature of life activity interpretation [0234] 6.5.3.2) Exemplary
construction of data base related to interpretation of life
activity [0235] 6.5.3.3) Data content stored in data base [0236]
6.5.3.4) Exemplary Embodiment regarding interpretation of life
activity and feedback to data base [0237] 6.5.3.5) Applied
Embodiment of interpretation of life activity using life activity
detection signal in data base [0238] 6.5.4) Other measuring methods
of life activity 7] Device or System with Detecting Section for
Life Activity Incorporated therein
[0239] 7.1) Packaged device with detecting section for life
activity incorporated therein [0240] 7.1.1) Feature of packaged
device with detecting section for life activity incorporated
therein [0241] 7.1.2) Exemplary Embodiment of packaged device with
combination of detecting section for life activity and driving
section [0242] 7.1.3) Exemplary Embodiment of packaged device with
combination of detecting section for life activity and information
providing section [0243] 7.1.4) Exemplary Embodiment of selection
of optimum process or operation method based on life activity
information
[0244] 7.2) Network system and business model using detecting
section for life activity. [0245] 7.2.1) Outline of whole network
system using detecting section for life activity [0246] 7.2.2)
User-side front end [0247] 7.2.2.1) Role of user-side front end
[0248] 7.2.2.2) Detailed function of user-side front end [0249]
7.2.2.3) Exemplary Embodiment of integration of life detecting
division and applied embodiment using the same [0250] 7.2.3) Mind
communication provider [0251] 7.2.3.1) Role of mind communication
provider [0252] 7.2.3.2) Mechanism to prevail Internet service
using life activity information [0253] 7.2.3.3) Business model of
mind communication provider [0254] 7.2.4) Mind service distributor
[0255] 7.2.4.1) Role of mind service distributor [0256] 7.2.4.2)
Business model of mind service distributor [0257] 7.2.4.3)
Exemplary service of mind service distributor
8] Communicating Protocols for Life Activity Detection Signal and
Life Activity Information
[0258] 8.1) Feature of common parts of communication protocols for
life activity detection signal and life activity information
[0259] 8.2) Communication protocol for life activity detection
signal
[0260] 8.3) Communication protocol for life activity
information
[0261] 8.4) Exemplary new command used for Web API
9] Applied Embodiment using Detection or Measurement of Biosis
Activity
[0262] 9.1) Feature of Applied Embodiment of biosis activity
measurement and new feasible unique function
[0263] 9.2) Expansion of Applied Embodiment using measurement of
biosis activity
[0264] 9.3) Applied Embodiment of detection of life activity to
medical diagnosis [0265] 9.3.1) Exemplary search of neural
transmission pathway in life object [0266] 9.3.2) Exemplary
diagnosis with combination of detection of membrane potential
changing and detection of oxygen concentration change in blood 10]
Abuse Prevention Method using Measurement Technique of Biosis
Activity
[0267] 10.1) Notes for use of objective technique of present
exemplary embodiment
[0268] 10.2) Encryption processing method of transfer
signal/information
[0269] 10.3) Other abuse prevention methods
11] Other Applied Embodiments regarding Detection/Control of Life
Activity
[0270] 11.1) Other life activity phenomena of which contracted and
relaxed states of skeletal muscle are to be detected/controlled
[0271] 11.2) Basic thought regarding biocatalyst action by
enzyme
[0272] 11.3) Movement mechanism of Myosin ATPase
[0273] 11.4) Characteristics of detection/control of life
activity
[0274] 11.5) Features of detection method of life activity
12] Control Method of Life Activity
[0275] 12.1) Outline of basic control method of life activity
[0276] 12.2) Outline of basic principle used for control of life
activity
[0277] 12.3) Molecular structure of ion channel and gating control
method
[0278] 12.4) Characteristic of control of life activity
[0279] 12.5) Suppression control of neuronal action potential
13] Detection and Control of Intracellular Life Activity
[0280] 13.1) General view of intracellular life activity
[0281] 13.2) Thought of control method for contradicting life
activities
[0282] 13.3) Memory and obliteration mechanism models in pyramidal
cell
[0283] 13.4) Reaction process of Phosphoenzyme (kinase)
[0284] 13.5) Reaction process of Calcineurin
[0285] 13.6) Characteristics of detection and control of
intracellular life activity
14] Common characteristics of the Present. Embodiment
[0286] 14.1) Characteristics of life activity control method
[0287] 14.2) Characteristics of hie activity detection/measurement
method
[0288] 14.3) Characteristics common to the hie activity
detection/measurement method and control method
[0289] 14.4) Characteristics of life activity detection signal and
detection method of the signal
15] Detailed Study of Basic Principle relating to Present Exemplary
Embodiment
[0290] 15.1) Improved computer simulation method and molecular
structure model used in simulation
[0291] 15.2) Comparison between simulation result and model
experimental result
[0292] 15.3) Experimental result regarding choline chloride
[0293] 15.4) Influence of choline chloride pair in water on
surrounding water molecules
[0294] 15.5) Experimental result regarding ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate
[0295] 15.6) Study of principle of detecting fatigue state in life
object
[0296] 15.7) Detection of other enzyme catalysis
[0297] 15.8) Detection range or control range of life activity in
present exemplary embodiment
[0298] 15.9) Application range of description method/processing
method relating to life activity detection and service using life
activity information
16] Life Activity Detection Method based on Plural Wavelength
Property
[0299] 16.1) Basic principle of life activity detection based on
plural wavelength property
[0300] 16.2) Optical property change in present exemplary
embodiment
[0301] 16.3) Method of detecting life activity while changing
detection light wavelength through time
[0302] 16.4) Searching method for life activity detection target
part
17] Method of Controlling a Plurality of Parts in Life Object at
one time 18] System Model and Service Provision Method using
Detection/Control of Life Activity
[0303] 18.1) System model using detection/control of life
activity
[0304] 18.2) Service provision method using detection/control of
life activity
1] Overview of Activity of Nervous System
1.1) Signal Transmission Pathway in Nervous System of Animals
[0305] Initially explained is an overview of a signal transmission
pathway in a nervous system of an animal with reference to FIG. 1.
FIG. 1 is based on the content of F. H. Netter: The Netter
Collection of Medical Illustrations Vol. 1 Nervous System, Part 1,
Anatomy and Physiology (Elsevier, Inc., 2003) Section 8.
[0306] In general, a neuron is constituted by neuron cell bodies 1
(see black circles), axons 2 (see bold lines), and numerous boutons
(synaptic knobs) 3, and a signal is transmitted via the axon 2 in
the neuron.
[0307] As an input section of information from an outside thereof,
FIG. 1 shows only a signal detection area (ending) 4 of a sensory
neuron, but this area may be replaced with another detection area,
such as a visual sense, an auditory sense, a gustatory sense, or a
sense of smell. Further, the nervous system leads to contraction of
a muscle cell 6 via a neuromuscular junction 5, conclusively.
[0308] The nervous system has a large characteristic in that "a
signal transmission pathway constitutes a parallel circuit."
[0309] A reflex pathway layer 9 is formed in a lower layer of this
parallel circuit, so as to perform a process of the most primitive
reflection reaction such as a spinal reflex. In an upper layer
thereof, a nervous relay pathway layer 8 including a thalamus, a
cerebellum or a reticular formation is formed. This nervous relay
pathway layer 8 not only relays signal transmission between a
cerebral cortex and the input section (the signal detection area
(ending) 4 of the sensory neuron and the like) of information from
the outside or the muscle cell 6, but also performs simple
information processing inside the nervous relay pathway layer 8.
Advanced information processing is performed by a central nervous
system layer (cerebral cortex layer) 7.
[0310] As such, the signal transmission pathway constitutes a
parallel circuit, thereby resulting in that relatively easy
information processing can be performed without intention while the
central nervous system layer (cerebral cortex layer) 7 does not
"realize" it. In addition, if activities in the reflex pathway
layer 9 including the neuromuscular junction 5 are observed, it is
possible to estimate activities of the upper nervous relay pathway
layer 8 and the central nervous system layer 7 to some extent.
1.2) Signal Transmission in Axon
[0311] The following describes a mechanism of how a signal is
transmitted in the axon, with reference to FIG. 2.
[0312] The axon 2 is surrounded by a myelin sheath 12, so that an
axoplasm 14 in the axon 2 is isolated from an outside extracellular
fluid 13. Na.sup.+ ions and Cl.sup.- ions are abundantly
distributed over the extracellular fluid 13. Further, nodes 15 of
Ranvier where the thickness of the myelin sheath 12 becomes thin
are formed partially along a direction where the axon 2 extends,
and voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channels 11 are placed at the nodes
15 of Ranvier.
[0313] During a normal resting term (when no signal is transmitted
in the axon 2), as shown on the right side of FIG. 2, a cover
(gate) of a voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11 is closed, so
that inflow of Na.sup.+ ions into the axoplasm 14 from the
extracellular fluid 13 is prevented. At this time, positive
electric charges gather on an outside layer (facing the
extracellular fluid 13) of the myelin sheath 12, while negative
electric charges gather on an inside layer (facing the axoplasm 14)
of the myelin sheath 12. As a result, the axoplasm 14 has a
"negative potential."
[0314] Due to an electrostatic force of such positive and negative
charges gathering on the surfaces of the myelin sheath 12, a
positive electric charge section of the voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion
channel 11 (a part corresponding to a circled "+" mark in FIG. 2)
is pushed toward the axoplasm 14 during the resting term. In the
meantime, it is considered that a very weak force toward a
direction of the extracellular fluid 13 works at this positive
electric charge section.
[0315] When the potential in the axoplasm 14 rises to a positive
potential on the left side of FIG. 2 during signal transmission in
the axon 2 and thereby amounts of positive and negative charges
gathering on the surfaces of the myelin sheath 12 are decreased,
the above weak force works and moves the positive electric charge
section of the voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11 toward a
direction of the extracellular fluid 13. This accordingly causes
the cover (gate) to be opened, thereby initiating the inflow of
Na.sup.+ ions into the axoplasm 14 from the extracellular fluid 13.
As a result, the negative electric charges gather on the outside
layer (facing the extracellular fluid 13) of the myelin sheath 12
and the positive electric charges gather on the inside layer
(facing the axoplasm 14) of the myelin sheath 12, thereby
temporarily changing the axoplasm 14 into the "positive potential."
As such, an area to become a positive potential temporarily in the
axoplasm 14 moves along a signal transmission direction 16 in the
axon, thereby transmitting the signal through the axon.
1.3) Signal Occurrence/Transmission Mechanism in Nervous System and
Membrane Potential Changing in Action Potential
[0316] Section 1.3 explains about a signal generation mechanism in
the nervous system illustrated in FIG. 1 and a signal transmission
mechanism between neurons. Further, as a part of the explanation, a
changing state of a neuronal membrane voltage during an action
potential is explained.
[0317] The signal detection area (ending) 4 of the sensory neuron
in FIG. 1 detects pain, temperature, mediating tactile, pressure,
kinesthetic sensation or the like. As illustrated in FIG. 3, a
membrane potential 20 of the ending 4 of the sensory neuron during
a resting term 25 before detecting such a variety of sensations is
a resting membrane potential 21, which is a negative potential.
According to Masahiko Watanabe: Nou Shinkei Kagaku Nyumon Koza
Gekan (Yodosha, 2002), p. 112, pH decreases when an inflammation or
ischemia to cause pain occurs, and at least either one of Na.sup.+
ions and Ca.sup.2+ ions flow into the cytoplasm due to an action of
a proton-activated cation channel.
[0318] At this time, "depolarization" occurs in the ending 4 of the
sensory neuron, so that the membrane potential 20 rises to a
depolarization potential 22. This causes the cover (gate) of the
voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11 (see FIG. 2) distributed in a
cell membrane of the signal detection area (ending) 4 of the
sensory neuron to be opened, and a large amount of Na.sup.+ ions
existing in the extracellular fluid 13 flow into the cytoplasm. As
a result, the membrane potential 20 rises to an action potential
23, which is a positive potential, as shown by membrane potential
changing 26 of a neuron.
[0319] The action potential 23 occurring in the signal detection
area (ending) 4 of the sensory neuron is transmitted as a signal
through the axon 2 according to the mechanism as described in
section 1.2.
[0320] When this signal is transmitted to the numerous bouton
(synaptic knob) 3, a transmitter substance is released to a
synaptic cleft between this numerous bouton (synaptic knob) 3 and a
neuron cell body 1 at a rear side of the numerous bouton 3 or a
dendrite (not shown). Then, this transmitter substance bonds to the
neuron cell body 1 or a ligand-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel
distributed over a surface of the dendrite.
[0321] A neuronal membrane potential 20 of a neuron on the surface
of this rear-side neuron cell body 1 is a resting membrane
potential 21 during a resting term 25 as shown in FIG. 3. This
resting membrane potential 21 is generally kept at about -60 mV to
-80 mV. When the transmitter substance bonds to the neuron cell
body 1 or a ligand-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel, a gate of the
ligand-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel is opened, so that Na.sup.+ ions
in the extracellular fluid 13 flow into neuronal cytoplasm. This
results in that the membrane potential 20 rises to the
depolarization potential 22, which is about -40 mV.
[0322] When the membrane potential 20 rises to the depolarization
potential 22 as such, a cover (gate) of a voltage-gated Na.sup.+
ion channel 11 is opened according to the mechanism as described in
section 1.2 and a large amount of Na.sup.+ ions flow into the
axoplasm 14, thereby causing an action potential phenomenon. The
membrane potential during the action potential rises to an action
potential 23 in a range from about +20 mV to +40 mV as shown in the
membrane potential changing 26 of a neuron. When the membrane
potential 20 reaches the action potential 23 at once, the cover
(gate) of the voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11 is closed, and
the membrane potential 20 falls to the resting membrane potential
21.
[0323] A term 24 of this nerve impulse continues from about 0.5 ms
to 2 ms in most cases. Although the term 24 of nerve impulse varies
to some extent depending on neuron types, the term 24 of nerve
impulse is 4 ms or less in most cases. Accordingly, it may be said
that the term 24 of nerve impulse in neurons is generally in a
range of 0.5 to 4 ms.
[0324] A detection signal occurring in the signal detection area
(ending) 4 of the sensory neuron reaches a neuromuscular junction 5
via the complicated pathways as shown in FIG. 1 in most cases. It
is said that a resting membrane potential 21 indicating a membrane
potential 20 of a muscle cell 6 during the resting term 25 is
nearly -80 mV. When the neuromuscular junction 5 is activated,
Acetylcholine is often released as a transmitter substance between
this neuromuscular junction 5 and the muscle cell 6.
[0325] In view of this, when this Acetylcholine bonds to the
ligand-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel and a ligand-gated K.sup.+ ion
channel distributed over surfaces of a muscular membrane of the
muscle cell 6, their gates are opened, thereby improving muscular
membrane transmitting properties for Na.sup.+ ions and the K.sup.+
ions. As a result, the membrane potential 20 rises to the
depolarization potential 22 as illustrated by a curve of a
potential changing 27 of a muscle fiber membrane. It is said that
the depolarization potential 22 at this time is nearly -15 mV. When
the potential changing 27 of a muscle fiber membrane is close to
the depolarization potential 22 as such, Ca.sup.2+ ions in a
sarcoplasmic reticulum inside the muscle cell 6 are released,
thereby causing muscle contraction.
2] Action Potential Model Regarding Neuron
[0326] First of all, sections 2.1 and 2.4 describe well-known
information regarding the structure of a neuronal membrane and
environmental conditions thereof. Subsequently, section 2.2
describes an electromagnetical analysis regarding a widely known
part of action potential phenomenon. Then sections 2.3 and 2.5
describe a neuronal action potential model which is originally
proposed.
[0327] This neuronal action potential model is based on a concept
of charging model proposed in section 2.3.
2.1) Structural Peculiarity of Neuronal Membrane Based on
Background Information
[0328] First of all, structural peculiarities of a neuronal
membrane which are well-known are described. The neuron has a
common membrane which can be included in another kind of cell
except the neuron, and the common membrane comprises:
Phospholipids; Glycolipids; Cholesterol; and Membrane proteins
including ion channels.
[0329] Lipid bilayer, which comprises the Phospholipids, the
Glycolipids, and the Cholesterol, is configured to be split into an
outside layer facing an extracellular fluid and an inside layer
facing a cytoplasm. The outside layer includes particular molecules
which belong to the Phospholipids, and the particular molecules are
rarely included in the inside layer. FIG. 4 (a) shows what kind of
molecules belonging to the Phospholipids or the Glycolipids are
located in the outside and inside layers. The outside layer
principally comprises Phosphatidylcholine PCLN, Sphingomyelin SMLN,
and the Glycolipids, and the inside layer principally comprises
Phosphatidylserine PSRN, Phosphatidylethanolamine PEAM, and
Phosphatidylinositol PINT (a content by percentage of PINT is
relatively small). According to FIG. 4, the double lines indicate
Fatty acid parts which are packed into the Lipid bilayer.
[0330] Ganglioside belongs to the Glycolipids and particularly has
a negative electric charge, and a content of it is biggest in any
kinds of molecules belonging to the Glycolipids. It is said that
total weight of Gangliosides in the neuronal membrane is 5% to 10%
of total weight of Lipids. Therefore, the Ganglioside can be seemed
to represent the Glycolipids in this embodiment. Moreover, it is
reported that a content by percentage of Ganglioside type D1a
(GD1a) is biggest in the neuronal membrane of Mammalia (H. Rahmann
et. al.: Trends in Glycoscience and Glycotechnology Vol. 10, No. 56
(1998) p. 423), so that GD1a can represent all kinds of
Gangliosides in this explanation. And another kind of molecule
belonging to Glycolipids can fit into descriptions mentioned
later.
2.2) Electromagnetical Analysis Regarding Action Potential
[0331] A voltage in cytoplasm is kept to be negative in case of a
resting membrane potential, and the voltage changes to be positive
in case of an action potential. It is known that a plurality of
positive electric charges gather on a surface of the inside layer
facing the cytoplasm when the action potential occurs (B. Alberts
et. al.: Molecular Biology of the Cell 4th edition (Garland
Science, 2002) Chapter 10).
[0332] Lipid bilayer can be presumed to function as an
electrostatic capacity in case of action and resting potentials
because an electrical resistance value of Lipid bilayer is very big
and is bigger than 100 giga-ohms, and the electrostatic capacity
value is approximately 1.0 micro-farad cm.sup.2 (M. Sugawara:
Bionics vol. 3, No. 7 (2006) p. 38-p. 39 [in Japanese]).
[0333] Electrostatic Capacity Theory of Electromagnetics teaches us
that a plurality of negative electric charges must gather on a
surface of the outside layer facing the extracellular fluid in case
of an action potential when a plurality of positive electric
charges gather on a surface of the inside layer facing the
cytoplasm, and an absolute value of the negative electric charges
must be equal to the positive electric charge value.
TABLE-US-00001 TABLE 1 Functional groups of Phospholipids relating
to ion attachment or detachment in case of action potential.
Outside layer of membrane Inside layer of membrane Negative ion
Positive ion Positive ion Negative ion attachment detachment
attachment detachment possibility possibility possibility
possibility Phosphatidylcholine --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3
>PO.sub.2.sup.- (PCLN) Sphingomyelin --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3
>PO.sub.2.sup.- (SMLN) Ganglioside type D1a (GD1a) ##STR00001##
Phosphatidylserine (PSRN) ##STR00002## --NH.sub.3.sup.+
Phosphatidylethanolamine >PO.sub.2.sup.- --NH.sub.3.sup.+ (PEAM)
Phosphatidylinositol >PO.sub.2.sup.- (PINT)
2.3) Charging Model on Both Surfaces of Neuronal Membrane in Case
of Action and Resting Potentials
[0334] Section 2.3 describes an originally proposed charging model
on both surfaces of the neuronal membrane in case of action and
resting potentials, and this charging model was thought out by
applying the electromagnetical analysis mentioned in section 2.2 to
the membrane structure explained in section 2.1.
[0335] Table 1 lists functional groups of Phospholipids which a
plurality of ions can be attached to or detached from when the
action potential occurs, and Table 1 shows that the outside layer
principally comprises PCLN, SMLN, and GD1a and the inside layer
principally comprises PSRN, PEAM, and PINT, as described in section
2.1.
[0336] PSRN under water tends to have "-1" charges because PSRN
comprises two functional groups >PO.sub.2.sup.- &
--CO.sub.2.sup.- which respectively tend to have negative electric
charges and one functional group --NH.sub.3.sup.+ which tends to
have a positive electric charge.
[0337] PINT under water also tends to have "-1" charges because
PINT comprises only one functional group >PO.sub.2.sup.- which
tends to have a negative electric charge. According to FIG. 4 (a),
the "-1" charges generate a negative charge domain on the surface
of the neuronal membrane, and "Minus mark" represents this negative
charge domain.
[0338] Electrostatic attraction makes positive electric charges
gather on the outside layer of Lipid bilayer when the negative
charge domains are generated on the inside layer in case of a
resting membrane potential. Therefore, positive charge domains,
which are represented by "Plus marks" in FIG. 4(a), may be
generated on hydrophilic head parts of PCLNs and SMLNs.
[0339] In case of an action potential, a plurality of negative
charge domains may be generated on not only the hydrophilic head
parts of PCLNs and SMLNs but also GD1a, when positive electric
charges gather on the inside layer and a plurality of positive
charge domains are generated on hydrophilic head parts of PEAMs and
PSRNs (FIG. 4 (b)).
[0340] In conclusion of this section, it is presumed that a
reversible formation of positive and negative charge domains on
both surfaces of membrane changes the neuronal membrane
voltage.
2.4) Ion Concentrations in Cytoplasm and Extracellular Fluid which
are Described in Background Information
TABLE-US-00002 TABLE 2 Ion concentrations in cytoplasm and
extracellular fluid. Ion symbol Extracellular fluid (milli-mol/l)
Cytoplasm (milli-mol/l) Na.sup.+ 145 5-15 K.sup.+ 5 140 H.sup.+ 4
.times. 10.sup.-5 (pH 7.4) 7 .times. 10.sup.-5 (pH 7.2) Cl.sup.-
110 5~15
[0341] This section discusses concrete carriers which generate the
reversible formation of positive and negative charge domains.
[0342] As shown in Table 2, Alberts teaches the ion concentrations
in a cytoplasm and an extracellular fluid of a general Mammalia (B.
Alberts et. al.: Molecular Biology of the Cell 4th edition (Garland
Science, 2002) Chapter 11, Table 11-1). The majority ions are
Na.sup.+ and Cl.sup.- in the extracellular fluid and K.sup.+ in the
cytoplasm. And it is known that Na.sup.+ ions flow from the
extracellular portion into the cytoplasm when the action potential
occurs. Therefore, it can be presumed that the majority carriers
which generate the reversible formation of positive and negative
charge domains are Na.sup.+ or Cl.sup.- ion attachments or
detachments on the outside layer and K.sup.+ or Na.sup.+ ion
attachments or detachments on the inside layer.
[0343] According to Table 2, it seems that H.sup.+ ion (Hydronium
ion) and OH.sup.- ion have less influence on the action potential
because concentrations of these ions are relatively small.
2.5) Molecular Structures of Phospholipids and Ion Attachment
Locations in Phospholipids
[0344] This section discusses detailed structures and locations of
the positive and negative charge domains on both surfaces of the
neuronal membrane by combining the charging model considered in
section 2.3 with the carrier model described in section 2.4.
[0345] When the resting membrane potential continues and the
negative charge domains are generated on the inside layer facing
the cytoplasm, Na.sup.+ ion may be attracted to the surface of
outside layer and ionically bonds to >PO.sub.2.sup.- groups to
locally form a neutral salt >PO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ in PCLN or
SMLN. According to Table 1, both PCLN and SMLN under water comprise
functional groups of >PO.sub.2.sup.- and
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3. Therefore, when PCLN or SMLN has the
neutral part >PO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+, the remaining positive
group --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 can generate a positive charge
domain in PCLN or SMLN.
[0346] Table 1 also shows that GD1a under water hardly forms a
positive charge domain because it comprises no positive group.
GD1as comprise only functional groups --CO.sub.2.sup.- which
usually have negative electric charges. It is considered that a
plurality of GD1as include neutral salts --CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+
and generate no charge domain when the resting membrane potential
continues.
[0347] According to this originally proposed charging model, it is
presumed that the Na.sup.+ or K.sup.+ ion may ionically bond to the
>PO.sub.2.sup.- group of one of PEAM, PSRN, and PINT or to
--CO.sub.2.sup.- group of PSRN in case of an action potential.
Furthermore, when the Na.sup.+ or K.sup.+ ion newly forms a neutral
salt, the remaining functional group --NH.sub.3.sup.+, which
usually has "+1" charge under water, generates a positive charge
domain on a hydrophilic head part of PEAM or PSRN.
[0348] When the positive charge domains are generated on the inside
layer facing the cytoplasm, an electrostatic repulsion may make
Na.sup.+ ions be detached from neutral salts
>PO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ of PCLNs and SMLNs and
--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ of GD1 as on the outside layer. This
Na.sup.+ ion detachment may newly generates a negative charge
domain on GD1a because the --CO.sub.2.sup.- group which has "-1"
charges remains in GD1a.
[0349] Moreover, an electrostatic attraction of the positive charge
domains on the inside layer attracts Cl.sup.- ions to the surface
of the outside layer, and these Cl.sup.- ions may be combined with
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 groups of PCLNs or SMLNs to form hydrogen
(or ionic) bonds. These newly created neutral salts
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.- may generate negative charge
domains on hydrophilic head parts of PCLNs or SMLNs in case of an
action potential when PCLNs or SMLNs have both the neutral salts
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.- and the negative groups
>PO.sub.2.sup.- from which Na.sup.+ ions were detached.
[0350] This charging model can be applied not only to the action
potential of neuron mentioned above but also to a signal
transmission through axon 5 of neuron and a somatic neuromuscular
transmission passing through a neuromuscular junction 5, as shown
FIG. 1.
[0351] FIG. 2 shows that the axon 5 is covered with a myelin sheath
12 which is extremely thicker than the neuronal membrane.
Electrostatic Capacity Theory of Electromagnetics teaches us that
an electrostatic capacity value is inversely proportional to the
thickness of the myelin sheath 12, so that the density of the
charged domains on a surface of myelin sheath 12 falls down.
Therefore, a life activity detecting method should be devised when
the signal transmission through the axon 5 of a neuron is detected.
This life activity detecting method will be explained later.
[0352] Netter (F. H. Netter: The Netter Collection of Medical
Illustrations Vol. 1 Nervous System Part 1 Anatomy and Physiology
(Elsevier, Inc., 1983) p. 162) teaches us that the membrane
potential of a muscular membrane changes when a somatic
neuromuscular signal passes through the neuromuscular junction 5,
so that the muscular membrane potential can be detected with this
embodiment.
2.6) Probability Comparison Between Ion Attachment and Detachment
Phenomena in Extracellular Fluid Side Regarding Action
Potential
[0353] The discussion result mentioned in section 2.5 indicates
that the following phenomena may occur on the surface of the
outside layer in case of an action potential:
A] Na.sup.+ ion detachment from --CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ of GD1a;
B] Cl.sup.- ion attachment to --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 of PCLN or
SMLN to form --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.-.
[0354] It is considered that a probability of Cl.sup.- ion
attachment is relatively bigger than a probability of Na.sup.+ ion
detachment because of the following reasons;
1. Na.sup.+ ion detachment from --CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ hardly
have enough response speed, and it is hardly adapted to a rapid
voltage transition at a start timing of an action potential; [0355]
The bonding strength of an ionic bond forming the salt
--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ is bigger than the bonding strength of a
hydrogen bond forming --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.-. Therefore,
it is predicted that Na.sup.+ ion detachment does not quickly occur
relatively. 2. A probability of Na.sup.+ ion detachment
substantially decreases because Na.sup.+ ion concentration is high
in an extracellular fluid; 3. Cage effect under water reduces an
influence of Na.sup.+ ion detachment; [0356] Cage effect under
water (W. J. Moore: Physical Chemistry 4th Edition (Prentice-Hall,
Inc., 1972) Chapter 9, Section 38) may make the Na.sup.+ ion stay
near the --CO.sub.2.sup.- group for a long time after the
detachment (from >PO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ of PCLN or SMLN). And
because this Na.sup.+ ion staying corresponds to be electrically
neutral and substantially generates no negative charge domain, this
Na.sup.+ ion staying makes the Cl.sup.- ion be attracted to the
surface of outside layer. Therefore, Cl.sup.- ion attachment tends
to occur before the Na.sup.+ ion detached goes away from the
outside layer. 4. The Cl.sup.- ion is easily attached to the
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group because there are plenty of
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 groups in case of a resting membrane
potential; [0357] In case of resting membrane potential, the
surface of outside layer must have plenty of positive charge
domains corresponding to --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 groups of PCLNs
or SMLNs (Table 1) which will make Cl.sup.+ ion attachment in case
of an action potential. 5. The --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group
increases a probability of Cl.sup.- ion attachment because 9
hydrogen atoms of the --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group can similarly
bond to the Cl.sup.- ion; 6. A high density of the Cl.sup.- ion in
extracellular fluid (Table 2) increases a probability of Cl.sup.-
ion attachment.
3] Infrared Spectral Characteristics Estimation Based on Action
Potential Model
[0358] Chapter 3 describes Infrared Spectral Characteristics based
on the Action Potential Model proposed in Chapter 2, and the
Infrared Spectral Characteristics result from computer simulations
of quantum chemistry simulation program.
3.1) Calculation Method with Quantum Chemistry Simulation
Program
[0359] In Chapters 3 and 4, an author used "SCIGRESS MO Compact
Version 1 Pro" for a quantum chemistry simulation program. This
quantum chemistry simulation program is sold by Fujitsu
Corporation, and "SCIGRESS" is a registered trademark. This quantum
chemistry simulation program uses a semiempirical molecular orbital
method.
[0360] This calculation method comprises two calculation steps to
keep high calculation accuracy. A first calculation step is to
optimize a molecular structure, and a second calculation step is to
analyze vibration modes.
[0361] Some keywords of optimization are "PM3 EF PRECISE EPS=78.4
GNORM=0.00001 LET DDMIN=0.00001 PULAY SAFE SHIFT=1.00", wherein
"PM3 EPS=78.4" means the optimization under water, "PM3" means an
approximation method of Hamiltonian, and other keywords mean a
setting calculation accuracy or convergent conditions of
calculation. Furthermore, some keywords of vibration analysis are
"FORCE ISOTOPE EPS=78.4 PM3", wherein "FORCE ISOTOPE" means the
vibration analysis.
[0362] Table 3 shows the calculation results, and each calculation
result is fully described after this section.
TABLE-US-00003 TABLE 3 Calculation results regarding Infrared
Spectral Characteristics Phospholipid/ Glycolipids Wave Relative
light Neutral salt part of including functional number absorbance
functional group groups (cm.sup.-1) (a.u.)
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.- Phosphatidylcholine 2480 41.0
Sphingomyelin ##STR00003## Ganglioside type D1a 276 5.24
##STR00004## Phosphatidylserine 429 20.3 ##STR00005##
Phosphatidylserine 118 2.89
3.2) Attachment Model of Cl.sup.- Ion to --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3
Group and Wave Number Estimation of Corresponding Absorption
Band
[0363] This section describes a newly generated absorption band
estimated by the computer simulation when a Cl.sup.- ion is
attached to the --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group of PCLN. A
molecular structure represented by Chemical formula 1 is used for
this computer simulation.
Chemical Formula 1
[0364] A molecular structure used for computer simulation when the
Cl.sup.- ion is attached to the --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group of
PCLN
##STR00006##
[0365] FIG. 5 shows structures optimized by computer simulation.
FIG. 5 (a) illustrates a Cl.sup.- ion attachment state, and FIG. 5
(b) illustrates a Cl.sup.- ion detachment state. As shown in FIG. 5
(a), A Cl.sup.- ion is attached to a hydrogen atom located at the
most far position from a phosphorus atom, and the Cl.sup.- ion and
the hydrogen atom form a hydrogen (or ionic) bond. Of course, the
Cl.sup.- ion can be attached to one of 8 hydrogen atoms not located
at the most far position from the phosphorus atom.
[0366] FIG. 6 shows absorption spectrums estimated by the computer
simulation, and resolution is set to 5 cm.sup.-1. The upper part of
FIG. 6 shows a Cl.sup.- ion attachment state, and the lower part of
FIG. 6 showing a Cl.sup.- ion detachment state illustrates an
absorption spectrum of a single PCLN. A particular absorption band
marked with an arrow appears in the upper part of FIG. 6, but it
does not appear in the lower part. Moreover, the particular
absorption band results from an asymmetrical stretching of
C--H--Cl.sup.-. According to Table 3, a wave number value of this
particular absorption band is 2480 cm.sup.-1, and a relative light
absorbance value of it is 41.0.
[0367] Another absorption spectrum is estimated when a Cl.sup.- ion
is attached to the --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group of SMLN. A
result of the another estimation shows that a wave number value of
a similar absorption band is 2450 cm.sup.-1 and that a relative
light absorbance value of the similar absorption band is 41.0.
Therefore, it is confirmed that the Cl.sup.- ion attachment states
of both PCLN and SMLN similarly generate the particular absorption
bands.
[0368] As shown in the upper part of FIG. 6, the particular
absorption band marked with the arrow has a big light absorbance. A
reason of this phenomenon should be considered.
[0369] Table 4 shows net atomic charges calculated with Mulliken's
population analysis (Y. Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry)
vol. 2 (Shyoukabou, 2007) Chapter 18, Section 18.cndot.6, p. 163
[in Japanese]) in case of Cl.sup.- ion attachment and detachment,
and each position of the carbon atom C, the hydrogen atom H, and
the chlorine ion Cl.sup.- is shown in FIG. 5 (a). And these carbon
and hydrogen atoms, and this chlorine ion together contribute to an
asymmetrical stretching of C--H--Cl.sup.-.
TABLE-US-00004 TABLE 4 Net atomic charges in case of Cl.sup.- ion
attachment and detachment Carbon atom C Hydrogen atom H Chlorine
ion Cl.sup.- Cl.sup.- ion -0.434 0.230 -0.920 attachment state
Cl.sup.- ion -0.251 0.109 -1.00 detachment state
[0370] Table 4 shows that the net charge of a carbon atom C
dynamically decreases and the net charge of a hydrogen atom H
obviously increases when the Cl.sup.- ion attaches to the
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group. It is considered that molecular
orbitals flow to the carbon atom C and are repelled from the
hydrogen atom H in case of Cl.sup.- ion attachment, and a reason of
these phenomena will be fully described in section 4.6.3. And the
variation of net atomic charges makes an electric dipole moment j,
increase to raise the light absorbance.
3.3) Detachment Model of Na.sup.+ Ion from Ganglioside Type D1a and
Wave Number Estimation of Corresponding Absorption Band
[0371] This section describes a newly generated absorption band
estimated by the computer simulation when a Na.sup.+ ion is
attached to the --CO.sub.2 group of GD1a in case of the resting
membrane potential.
[0372] As shown in FIG. 7, a "part" of GD1a structure is used for
the computer simulation because a full molecular structure of GD1a
is too complex to be used for the computer simulation.
[0373] Some skeletal vibrations of --CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+
generate some absorption bands whose wave number values are 260
cm.sup.-1-291 cm.sup.-1 and relative light absorbance values are
3.50-7.62. Moreover, Table 3 shows the mean values: the wave number
value is 276 cm.sup.-1 and the relative light absorbance value is
5.24. It is anticipated that another kind of Glycolipid which has a
similar structure can newly generate similar absorption bands when
a Na.sup.+ ion is attached to the --CO.sub.2 group in case of the
resting membrane potential.
3.4) Attachment Model of Na.sup.+ Ion to Carboxyl Group of
Phosphatidylserine and Wave Number Estimation of Corresponding
Absorption Band
[0374] This section describes a newly generated absorption band
estimated by the computer simulation when a Na.sup.+ ion is
attached to the --CO.sub.2.sup.- group of PSRN in case of the
action potential.
[0375] Table 3 shows that a skeletal vibration of
--C--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ generates a new absorption band whose
wave number value is 429 cm.sup.-1 and relative light absorbance
value is 20.3.
[0376] This section describes different values regarding the
absorption band from those described in section 3.3 even though
Na.sup.+ ion attached PSRN and GD1a have the same structure of
--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+, because a part of molecular structure
directly bonding to --CO.sub.2.sup.- group of PSRN is different
from a corresponding structure directly bonding to --CO.sub.2.sup.-
group of GD1a.
[0377] According to the computer simulation, an optimized molecular
structure of Na.sup.+ ion attached PSRN provides a specific
Na.sup.+ ion position indicating that an interatomic distance
between Na.sup.+ ion and an oxygen atom of the --CO.sub.2.sup.-
group is similar to an interatomic distance between the Na.sup.+
ion and another oxygen atom of the --CO.sub.2.sup.- group.
3.5) Infrared Spectrum Changing Based on Attachment Model of
K.sup.+ Ion to Phospholipid
[0378] This section describes generated and suppressed absorption
bands estimated by the computer simulation when a K.sup.+ ion is
attached to the --CO.sub.2.sup.- group of PSRN in case of the
action potential. A molecular structure represented by Chemical
formula 2 is used for this computer simulation.
Chemical Formula 2
[0379] A molecular structure used for computer simulation when the
K.sup.+ ion is attached to --CO.sub.2.sup.- group of PSRN
##STR00007##
[0380] According to the computer simulation, an optimized molecular
structure of K.sup.+ ion attached PSRN indicates that the K.sup.+
ion is located near only one oxygen atom of the --CO.sub.2.sup.-
group, and this location is different from a location described in
section 3.4. It seems that this difference of the ionic location
results from the K.sup.+ ionic radius which is bigger than the
Na.sup.+ ionic radius.
[0381] Table 3 shows that a skeletal vibration of
--C--CO.sub.2.sup.-K.sup.+ generates a new absorption band whose
wave number value is 118 cm.sup.-1 and a relative light absorbance
value is 2.89 which is very smaller than the corresponding value
regarding Na.sup.+ ion 20.3. It seems that this small value 2.89
results from the K.sup.+ ionic radius which is bigger than the
Na.sup.+ ionic radius. Moreover, a computer simulation generates no
new absorption band when the K.sup.+ ion is attached to the
>PO.sub.2.sup.- group of PSRN shown in Table 1.
[0382] According to the computer simulation, K.sup.+ ion attachment
to the --CO.sub.2.sup.- group has a distinguishing characteristic
of absorption spectrum which suppresses a symmetrical stretching of
Carboxyl group and drastically reduces a corresponding relative
light absorbance value from 98.0 to 15.2, and a wave number value
of the symmetrical stretching is 1570 cm.sup.-1. It is considered
that the K.sup.+ ion located near one oxygen atom of the
--CO.sub.2.sup.- group may strongly obstruct the symmetrical
stretching of the Carboxyl group.
3.6) Infrared Spectrum Changing Based on Another Attachment Model
of Ion to Neuronal Membrane
[0383] Table 1 and section 2.5 indicate that the Na.sup.+ ion may
be attached to the >PO.sub.2.sup.- group on the inside layer
when the action potential occurs. But all result of computer
simulation does not provide any obvious absorption band when the
Na.sup.+ ion is attached to the >PO.sub.2.sup.- group of all
kind of Phospholipid.
[0384] Moreover, the Na.sup.+ ion attachment to the
>PO.sub.2.sup.- group on the inside layer and the Na.sup.+ ion
detachment from the >PO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ on the outside layer
may simultaneously occur in case of an action potential, and
opposite phenomena may occur in case of a resting membrane
potential. Therefore, even if the Na.sup.+ ion attachment to the
>PO.sub.2.sup.- group generates an obvious absorption band, a
light absorbance value of this absorption band hardly vary to be
used for detecting the action potential.
3.7) Overview of Infrared Spectrum Changing Based on Action
Potential Model
[0385] According to Table 3 and section 3.5, it is predicted that
the action potential newly generates absorption bands whose wave
numbers are 2480 cm.sup.-1, 429 cm.sup.-1, and 118 cm.sup.-1, and
it is also predicted that the action potential reduces light
absorbances of absorption bands whose wave numbers are 1570
cm.sup.-1 and 276 cm.sup.-1.
4] Near Infrared Spectral Characteristics Estimation Based on
Action Potential Model
4.1) Requirement for Establishing Original Calculation Method
Regarding Near Infrared Spectral Characteristics
[0386] Infrared Spectral Characteristics can be easily estimated
with a quantum chemistry simulation program using a molecular
orbital calculation method, because each absorption band in
Infrared Spectrum corresponds to each normal vibration which is
generated by atomic nucleuses composing one molecule.
[0387] Near Infrared light has a wavelength of 800 nm-2500 nm. At
the present time, Near Infrared Spectral Characteristics are hardly
estimated with the general quantum chemistry simulation program,
because absorption bands in Near Infrared Spectrum complicatedly
relate to overtones and combinations. As known by an author, only
an "Anharmonic command" belonging to vibrational analysis of
"Gaussian 09" can estimate wavelength values regarding a first
overtone and combinations. But it does not give us information on
each light absorbance of each absorption band, and a user has to
calculate particular conversions if he wants to know wavelength
values regarding second or more overtones.
[0388] In the meantime, the Near Infrared light easily passes
through life bodies, and it is called "Window of Life". Thereby,
dynamical life activities can be detected with no contact and no
encroachment by a cheap and simple apparatus which uses the Near
Infrared light.
[0389] Therefore, a newly proposed original calculation method
which can estimate Infrared Spectral Characteristics is required.
This calculation method might theoretically predict influences of
Infrared Spectral Characteristic based on life activities, and it
can be used for quantitatively estimating a detecting sensitivity
required to directly detect life activities.
4.2) Describing Outline of Original Calculation Method Based on
Anharmonic Vibrations this Newly Proposed Original Calculation
Method Regarding Infrared Spectral Characteristics has the
Following Peculiarities: 1. Using a perturbation theory of quantum
mechanics, relational formulae for the n-th overtone wavelength and
Einstein's transition probability are obtained from Schrodinger
equation; 2. Using a quantum chemistry simulation program, an
anharmonic potential property and an electric dipole moment
property are calculated to substitute these properties for the
relational formulae mentioned in 1; 3. Combining the properties
with the relational formulae, wavelength values of the n-th
overtone and corresponding light absorbances are estimated.
[0390] According to FIG. 8, an outline of the calculation method is
described below.
[0391] Using a quantum chemistry simulation program, a vibrational
analysis for a specific macromolecule is executed to find out a
particular normal vibration corresponding to a harmonic vibration
(S3). In the meantime, The Schrodinger equation including an
electro-magnetic field interaction within the specific
macromolecule is set (S1). Then, using Born-Oppenheimer
approximation, an atomic interaction part is extracted from the
Schrodinger equation (S2). After Step 2 and Step 3 executions, a
particular atomic interaction regarding the particular normal
vibration is selected on the basis of S3 (S4). In this Step 4, all
influence of other atomic interactions which were not selected is
substituted for the anharmonic potential property.
[0392] Total static molecule energy values can be numerically
calculated by using the quantum chemistry simulation program (S6).
In this Step 6, the molecular structure is repetitively optimized
to estimate one of the total static molecule energy values whenever
a distance deviation between two atomic nucleuses is set to every
incremental value, and the two atomic nucleuses relate to the
particular atomic interaction selected in Step 4. In Steps 5-7, a
substitution of the total static molecule energy values based on
the quantum chemistry simulation program for the anharmonic
potential property based on Quantum Mechanics combines the
numerical analysis of computer simulations with the relational
formulae based on the Quantum Mechanics. After Step 6, the electric
dipole moment property is estimated by using the quantum chemistry
simulation program (S10), and this electric dipole moment property
is used for Step 11 execution.
[0393] An equation obtained in Step 4 includes the anharmonic
potential property which contains the 4th-order coefficient
.kappa..sub.4 and 3rd-order coefficient .kappa..sub.3 (anharmonic
terms), and 2nd-order coefficient .kappa..sub.2 (harmonic term). At
first, a specific equation in which both .kappa..sub.4 and
.kappa..sub.3 of the equation are set to "0" is solved to obtain
wave functions of harmonic vibration, and these wave functions of
harmonic vibration correspond to a series of basic functions.
Further, using the basic functions and a time independent
perturbation theory, the equation including .kappa..sub.4 and
.kappa..sub.3 is solved to obtain wave functions of anharmonic
vibration (S5).
[0394] In Step 7, wavelength values of absorption band belonging to
Near Infrared light are calculated with subtracting a wave
function's eigen value of energy from another wave function's eigen
value of energy.
[0395] Using a time dependent perturbation theory and the wave
functions of anharmonic vibration, simultaneous equations regarding
a time dependent amplitude variation of each anharmonic vibration
mode are formulated (S8). And then the simultaneous equations are
solved to obtain relational formulae of Einstein's transition
probability (S9), and a light absorbance comparison between
absorption bands can be achieved from the Einstein's transition
probabilities (S11).
[0396] This embodiment shows an estimation method regarding a
series of wavelength values and corresponding light absorbances of
n-th overtones, and the n-th overtones relate to an anharmonically
asymmetrical stretching of covalent and hydrogen bonds
C--H--Cl.sup.-. This estimation method can be extended to estimate
deformations or some kinds of combinations between deformations and
asymmetrical stretchings if new wave functions are obtained to
multiply wave functions indicating asymmetrical stretching by wave
functions indicating deformation.
4.3) Schrodinger Equation Indicating Particular Normal
Vibration
[0397] According to Step 1 of FIG. 8, this section 4.3, at first,
describes the Schrodinger equation of a macromolecule which
interacts with an electro-magnetic field.
[0398] FIG. 9 shows that a charged particle which has an atomic
charge value Q is located on the X axis, and ex represents a unit
vector of X axis. When the charged particle moves with a distance
of X along the X axis whose direction is against an external
electric field Ee.sup.-i2.pi..nu.t, a generated work is:
Formula 1
U=-.intg..sub.0.sup.XQ(Ee.sub.x)exp(-i2.pi..nu.t)dr=-Q(EX)exp(-i2.pi..nu-
.t). (A.cndot.1)
In eq. (A.cndot.1), (EX) represents an inner product of E vector
and X vector. Moore teaches us that eq. (A.cndot.1) represents a
perturbation term when the macromolecule interacts with the
external electric field (W. J. Moore: Physical Chemistry 4th
Edition (Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1972) Chapter 17, Section 4). And eq.
(A.cndot.1) is allowed not to include the external magnetic field
because Harada says that an interaction with external magnetic
field is extremely smaller than the external electric field and it
is negligible (Y. Harada: Ryoushi Kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 1
(Syoukabou, 2007) Chapter 9, Section 9-9, p. 190 [in
Japanese]).
[0399] Using eq. (A.cndot.1), the following Schrodinger equations
are obtained when a macromolecule corresponding to Cl.sup.-
attached PCLN or SMLN interacts with the external electric
field:
Formula 2 i .differential. .differential. t .PSI. ( , ri , ,
.sigma. i , , Ra , , t ) = { H nucl + H el } .PSI. ( , ri , ,
.sigma. i , , Ra , , t ) ; ( A 2 ) Formula 3 H nucl .ident. - a = 1
N 2 2 Ma .DELTA. a + e 0 2 4 .pi. 0 a > b N Za Zb Ra - Rb - a =
1 N Qa ( E Ra ) exp ( - i 2 .pi. vt ) ; ( A 3 ) Formula 4 H el
.ident. - i = 1 n 2 2 me .DELTA. i - e 0 2 4 .pi. 0 i , = 1 n a = 1
N Za ri - Ra + H eladd ; and ( A 4 ) Formula 5 H eladd .ident. e 0
2 4 .pi. 0 i > j n 1 ri - rj + i = 1 n e 0 ( E ri ) exp ( - i 2
.pi. vt ) . ( A 5 ) ##EQU00001##
[0400] In above formulae, is [Planck's constant]/2.pi., e.sub.0 is
the quantum of electricity, me is the mass of an electron, N is the
total number of atomic nucleuses composing the macromolecule, n is
the total number of electrons composing the macromolecule, t is
time, Ma is the mass of an a-th atomic nucleus, Ra is the position
vector of the a-th atomic nucleus, Qa is a net atomic charge
regarding an a-th atomic nucleus which is based on Mulliken's
population analysis (Y. Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry)
vol. 2 (Shyoukabou, 2007) Chapter 18, Section 18-6, p. 163 [in
Japanese]), ri is the position vector of an i-th electron, and
.sigma.i is the spin coordinate of the i-th electron.
[0401] And then the Born-Oppenheimer approximation described in
Step 2 of FIG. 8 selects atomic interaction factors from eqs.
(A.cndot.2)-(A.cndot.5). The Born-Oppenheimer approximation (Y.
Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 2 (Shyoukabou,
2007) Chapter 16, Section 16-1, p. 33 [in Japanese]) presumes
Formula 6
.PSI..apprxeq..PSI..sub.nucl(R.sub.1, . . . ,Ra, . . .
,R.sub.N,t).PSI..sub.el( . . . ,ri, . . . ,.sigma.i, . . . ,Ra, . .
. ,t). (A.cndot.6)
[0402] Using eq. (A.cndot.6), eq. (A.cndot.2) can be transformed
to
Formula 7 { i .differential. .differential. t - H nucl } .PSI. nucl
.PSI. nucl = - { i .differential. .differential. t - H el } .PSI.
el .PSI. el = W ( R 1 , , R N , t ) and ( A 7 ) Formula 8 i
.differential. .differential. t .PSI. nucl ( R 1 , , R N , t ) = {
H nucl + W } .PSI. nucl ( R 1 , , R N , t ) . ( A 8 )
##EQU00002##
[0403] Here, W(R.sub.1, - - - ,R.sub.N,t) includes all influence of
optimized molecular orbitals.
[0404] As has been described in section 3.2, a Cl.sup.- ion and the
nearest hydrogen atom form a hydrogen (or ionic) bond when the
Cl.sup.- ion is attached to the --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 group of
PCLN or SMLN in case of an action potential. Further, a combination
of C--H--Cl.sup.- makes an asymmetrical stretching corresponding to
the particular normal vibration in Step 3 of FIG. 8. Relating to
Step 3 of FIG. 8, some analytical results of computer simulation
taught that this asymmetrical stretching has the following special
characteristics regarding a vibration of classical mechanics:
A] The Cl.sup.- ion hardly moves and is almost fixed because the
Cl.sup.- ion is relatively heavy; B] Movement directions of both
carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses are substantially parallel to
a covalent bond direction between carbon and hydrogen atoms; C] The
hydrogen atomic nucleus widely moves than the carbon atomic nucleus
because the hydrogen atomic nucleus is the lightest.
[0405] Using the above-mentioned special characteristics, Step 4 of
FIG. 8 selects a particular atomic interaction, as described
below.
[0406] FIG. 10 shows locations of the carbon atomic nucleus,
hydrogen atomic nucleus, and Cl.sup.- ion which relate to the
asymmetrical stretching. R.sub.C is the position vector of the
carbon atomic nucleus based on the center position of gravity of
PCLN or SMLN, and R.sub.H is the position vector of the hydrogen
atomic nucleus based on the center position of gravity, R.sub.CH is
the position vector of the center of gravity of carbon and hydrogen
atomic nucleuses, M.sub.C is the mass of the carbon atomic nucleus,
and M.sub.H is the mass of the hydrogen atomic nucleus. And a
formula of R.sub.CH is
Formula 9 R CH = M H R H + M C R C M H + M C ( A 9 )
##EQU00003##
[0407] This section defines X as:
Formula 10
X.ident.R.sub.H-R.sub.C. (A.cndot.10)
[0408] Using eqs. (A.cndot.9) and (A.cndot.10), the following
equations are obtained:
Formula 11 X H .ident. R H - R CH = M C M H + M C X ; and ( A 11 )
Formula 12 X C .ident. R C - R CH = - M H M H + M C X . ( A 12 )
##EQU00004##
[0409] When Q.sub.C and Q.sub.H represent net atomic charges of
carbon and hydrogen atoms based on Mulliken's population analysis,
an electric dipole moment comprising a pair of the carbon and
hydrogen atomic nucleuses is
Formula 13
.mu.=Q.sub.HX.sub.H+Q.sub.CX.sub.C. (A.cndot.13)
[0410] Further, using eq. (A.cndot.13), the 3rd-term in the
right-hand side of eq. (A.cndot..cndot.3) is transformed to
Formula 14
{Q.sub.H(ER.sub.H)+Q.sub.C(ER.sub.C)}exp(-i2.pi..nu.t)=(E.mu.)exp(-i2.pi-
..nu.t)+{Q.sub.H+Q.sub.C}(ER.sub.CH)exp(-i2.pi..nu.t).
(A.cndot.14)
[0411] Classical mechanics says that the total kinetic energy of
the carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses is
Formula 15 T = M H 2 [ R H t ] 2 + M C 2 [ R C t ] 2 = M H + M C 2
[ R CH t ] 2 + M X 2 [ X t ] 2 , wherein ( A 15 ) Formula 16 M X
.ident. M H M C M H + M C . ( A 16 ) ##EQU00005##
[0412] M.sub.X is a reduced mass regarding a relative motion
between the carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses in eq.
(A.cndot.16). And according to Harada's method (Y. Harada: Ryoushi
kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 2 (Shyoukabou, 2007) Appendix 2,
Section A2-3, p. 405 [in Japanese]) and eqs. (A.cndot.15) and
(A.cndot.16), a part of the 1st-term in the right-hand side of eq.
(A.cndot.3) regarding the carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses is
transformed to
Formula 17 - 2 2 M H .DELTA. RH - 2 2 M C .DELTA. RC = - 2 2 ( M H
+ M C ) .DELTA. RCH - 2 2 M X { .differential. 2 .differential. X 2
+ .differential. 2 .differential. Y 2 + .differential. 2
.differential. Z 2 } . ( A 17 ) ##EQU00006##
[0413] Here, the X axis is parallel to the covalent bond direction
between the carbon and hydrogen atoms, and the Y and Z axes are
perpendicular to the covalent bond direction in eq. (A.cndot.17).
If it is presumed that a potential factor W.sub.X(X) regarding the
asymmetrical stretching of C--H--Cl.sup.- can be selected from
W(R.sub.1, - - - ,R.sub.N,t) described in eq. (A8), W(R.sub.1, - -
- ,R.sub.N,t) can be approximated to:
W(R.sub.1, . . .
,R.sub.N,t).apprxeq.W.sub.X(X)+W.sub.OTHER(R.sub.1, . . .
,R.sub.N-2,R.sub.CH,X,Y,Z,t). (A.cndot.18)
[0414] Therefore, the Hamiltonian shown in the right-hand side of
eq. (A.cndot.8) can be changed to the following formulae when eqs.
(A.cndot.14), (A.cndot.17), and (A.cndot.18) are substituted for
eq. (A.cndot.8):
Formula 19 H nucl + W ( R 1 , , R N , t ) .apprxeq. H X + H OTHER ;
( A 19 ) Formula 20 H X = - 2 2 M X .differential. 2 .differential.
X 2 + e 0 2 Z H Z C 4 .pi. 0 X + W X ( X ) - ( E .mu. ) exp ( - i 2
.pi. vt ) ; and ( A 20 ) Formula 21 H OTHER = - a = 1 N - 2 2 2 M a
.DELTA. a + e 0 2 4 .pi. 0 Ra - Rb .noteq. X N - 1 Za Zb Ra - Rb -
a = 1 N Qa ( E Ra ) exp ( - i 2 .pi. vt ) - 2 2 ( M H + M C )
.DELTA. RCH - 2 2 M X [ .differential. 2 .differential. Y 2 +
.differential. 2 .differential. Z 2 ] + W OTHER - ( Q H + Q C ) ( E
R CH ) exp ( - i 2 .pi. vt ) . ( A 21 ) ##EQU00007##
[0415] Because the special characteristic [B] mentioned above
indicates that the X axis corresponds to a normal coordinate of the
particular normal vibration described in Step 3 of FIG. 8,
.PSI.nucl shown in eq. (A.cndot.8) can be approximated to
Formula 22
.PSI..sub.nucl(R.sub.1, . . .
,R.sub.N,t).apprxeq..phi..sub.X(X,t).phi..sub.OTHER(R.sub.1, . . .
,R.sub.N-2,R.sub.CH,Y,Z,t). (A.cndot.22)
[0416] When eqs. (A.cndot.19)-(A.cndot.22) are substituted for eq.
(A8),
Formula 23 { i .differential. .differential. t - H X } .phi. X ( X
, t ) .phi. X ( X , t ) = - { i .differential. .differential. t - H
OTHER } .phi. OTHER .phi. OTHER = W * ( X ) ( A 23 )
##EQU00008##
can be obtained.
[0417] Relating to eqs. (A.cndot.20) and (A.cndot.23), this section
defines V(X) as
Formula 24 V ( X ) .ident. e 0 2 Z H Z C 4 .pi. 0 X + W X ( X ) + W
* ( X ) , ( A 24 ) ##EQU00009##
and presumes that V(X) has the minimum value V(X.sub.0)=0 when
X=X.sub.0. With the Taylor expansion method near X=X.sub.0, V(X) is
approximated to
Formula 25
V(X).apprxeq..kappa..sub.2(X-X.sub.0).sup.2+.kappa..sub.3(X-X.sub.0).sup-
.3+.kappa..sub.4(X-X.sub.0).sup.4. (A.cndot.25)
[0418] And this section defines x as
Formula 26
x.ident.X-X.sub.0. (A.cndot.26)
[0419] Substituting eqs. (A.cndot.20) and (A.cndot.24)-(A.cndot.26)
for eq. (A.cndot.23), the following equation can be obtained:
Formula 27 i .differential. .differential. t .phi. X = { - 2 2 M X
.differential. 2 .differential. x 2 + .kappa. 2 x 2 + .kappa. 3 x 3
+ .kappa. 4 x 4 - ( E .mu. ) exp ( - i 2 .pi. vt ) } .phi. X ( A 27
) ##EQU00010##
[0420] Equation (A.cndot.27) shows an interaction between an
external electromagnetic wave and an anharmonic oscillator based on
the reduced mass.
4.4) Formulae Relating to Wave Functions of Harmonic Vibrations
[0421] It is presumed that, in case of
.kappa..sub.2=.kappa..sub.3=0, wave functions .phi.x(x,t) of eq.
(A.cndot.27) are
Formula 28
.phi..sub.X(x,t)=exp(-{right arrow over (.epsilon..sub.m)}t/
)|m>. (A.cndot.28)
[0422] And eq. (A.cndot.27) satisfies the following equation when
.kappa..sub.2=.kappa..sub.3=E=0:
Formula 29 { - 2 2 M X .differential. 2 .differential. x 2 +
.kappa. 2 x 2 } m _ >= m _ m _ > . ( A 29 ) ##EQU00011##
[0423] Harada (Y. Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 1
(Shyoukabou, 2007) Chapter 3, Section 3-6, p. 60 [in Japanese])
teaches us that a series of solutions of eq. (A.cndot.29) |m>
are
Formula 30 m _ >= ( .beta. .pi. ) 1 / 4 ( 2 .beta. ) m m ! exp [
- .beta. 2 x 2 ] 0 .ltoreq. 2 J .ltoreq. m [ - 1 4 .beta. ] J x m -
2 J J ! ( m - 2 J ) ! , ( A 30 ) Formula 31 m _ = ( 2 .kappa. 2
.beta. ) ( m + 1 2 ) , and ( A 31 ) Formula 32 .beta. .ident. 2 M X
.kappa. 2 / . ( A 32 ) ##EQU00012##
[0424] And a series of solutions |m> satisfies the following
normalized orthogonal system:
Formula 33
<l|m>=.delta..sub.lm. (A.cndot.33)
[0425] Meanwhile, when "m" is an integer value, the formula
(A.cndot.30) can be transformed to
Formula 34 m _ >= ( 2 .beta. ) m m ! 0 _ > 0 .ltoreq. 2 J
.ltoreq. m [ - 1 4 .beta. ] J x m - 2 J J ! ( m - 2 J ) ! , ( A 34
) Formula 35 x m 0 _ >= m ! ( 2 .beta. ) m / 2 0 .ltoreq. 2 J
.ltoreq. m | m - 2 J _ > 2 J J ! ( m - 2 J ) ! , ( A 35 )
Formula 36 < 0 _ x 2 m + 1 0 _ >= 0 , or ( A 36 ) Formula 37
< 0 _ x 2 m 0 _ >= ( 2 m ) ! ( 4 .beta. ) m m ! . ( A 37 )
##EQU00013##
4.5) Obtaining Einstein's Transition Probability
[0426] According to Step 5 of FIG. 8, this section solves eq.
(A.cndot.27) to obtain wave functions of anharmonic vibration when
E=0. Here, Step 5 of FIG. 8 utilizes time independent perturbation
theory (Y. Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 1
(Shyoukabou, 2007) Chapter 9, Section 9-1, p. 161 [in Japanese])
which regards the 3rd and 4th terms
.kappa..sub.3x.sup.3+.kappa..sub.4x.sup.4 in the right-hand side of
eq. (A.cndot.27) as perturbed terms and obtains approximate
solutions based on formulae (A.cndot.30). Therefore, referring to
formulae (A.cndot.31), (A.cndot.34), (A.cndot.36), (A.cndot.37),
and Koide's formula (S. Koide: Ryoushi rikigaku (Quantum Mechanics)
vol. 1 (Shyoukabou, 1969) Chapter 7, Section 7-3, p. 174 [in
Japanese]), eigen values of energy .epsilon..sub.m for anharmonic
vibration are
Formula 38 m .apprxeq. m _ + < m _ .kappa. 3 x 3 + .kappa. 4 x 4
m _ >= 2 .kappa. 2 .beta. ( m + 1 2 ) + 3 .kappa. 4 4 .beta. 2 (
2 m 2 + 2 m + 1 ) ( A 38 ) ##EQU00014##
Formula (A.cndot.38) shows that eigen values of energy
.epsilon..sub.m for anharmonic vibration depend on
.kappa..sub.4x.sup.4 term described in eq. (A.cndot.27) and are
independent of .kappa..sub.3x.sup.3 term approximately.
[0427] And the time independent perturbation theory teaches us that
wave functions |m> of anharmonic vibration are
Formula 39 m _ > .apprxeq. u g mu u > , wherein ( A 39 )
Formula 40 g mu = < u _ .kappa. 3 x 3 + .kappa. 4 x 4 m _ > m
_ - u _ , ( u .noteq. m ) and ( A 40 ) Formula 41 g mu = 1. ( A 41
) ##EQU00015##
[0428] Therefore, substituting formulae (A.cndot.31) and
(A.cndot.33)-(A.cndot.35) for (A.cndot.40), formula (A.cndot.39)
can be transformed to
Formula 42 m > .apprxeq. m _ > - .kappa. 3 .kappa. 2 .beta. G
m 3 - .kappa. 4 .kappa. 2 .beta. G m 4 , and ( A 42 ) Formula 43 G
03 = 3 12 3 _ > + 3 2 8 1 _ > , G 04 = 6 16 4 _ > + 3 2 8
2 _ > , G 13 = 3 6 4 _ > + 3 2 2 _ > - 3 2 8 0 _ > , G
14 = 30 16 5 _ > + 5 6 8 3 _ > , G 23 = 30 12 5 _ > + 9 6
8 3 _ > - 3 2 1 _ > , G 24 = 3 10 16 6 _ > + 7 3 4 4 _
> - 3 2 8 0 _ > , G 33 = 15 6 6 _ > + 3 2 4 _ - 9 6 8 2 _
> - 3 12 0 _ > , G 34 = 210 16 7 _ > + 9 5 4 5 _ > - 5
6 8 1 _ > , G 43 = 105 12 7 _ > + 15 10 8 5 _ > - 3 2 3 _
> - 3 6 1 _ > , G 44 = 105 8 8 _ > + 11 30 8 6 _ > - 7
3 4 2 _ > - 6 16 0 _ > , ( A 43 ) ##EQU00016##
[0429] When an external electromagnetic wave of wavelength
.lamda..sub.m excites a wave function having an eigen value of
energy so to a wave function having .epsilon..sub.m, the following
relational equation is satisfied:
Formula 44 m - 0 = hc .lamda. m . ( A 44 ) ##EQU00017##
[0430] Here, .lamda..sub.m is the wavelength, "c" is the light
speed, and "h" is the Planck's constant.
[0431] And then according to Steps 8 and 9 of FIG. 8, this section
generates a formula representing Einstein's transition probability
on the basis of time dependent perturbation theory (Y Harada:
Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 1 (Shyoukabou, 2007)
Chapter 9, Section 9-8, p. 188 [in Japanese]). Using eqs.
(A.cndot.28) and (A.cndot.39), a solution of eq. (A.cndot.27)
is
Formula 45 .phi. X ( x , t ) .apprxeq. m .eta. m ( t ) exp ( - m t
) m > . ( A 45 ) ##EQU00018##
[0432] And the following equation can be obtained when the formula
(A.cndot.45) is substituted for eq. (A.cndot.27):
Formula 46 m .differential. .eta. m ( t ) .differential. t exp ( -
m t ) m > .apprxeq. - m .eta. m ( t ) exp ( - 2.pi. ( v + m h )
t ) ( E .mu. ) m > . ( A 46 ) ##EQU00019##
[0433] If the formula (A.cndot.45) satisfies .phi.x(x,0)=|0>
which indicates an initial state, .eta..sub.m(t) described in eq.
(A.cndot.46) can be approximated to
Formula 47
.eta..sub.0(t).apprxeq.1, (when t.apprxeq.0) and
.eta..sub.m(t).apprxeq.0 (when m.noteq.0,t.apprxeq.0).
(A.cndot.47)
[0434] Moreover, this section presumes the following condition when
"m" is more than and equal to 5:
Formula 48 .differential. .eta. m ( t ) .differential. t .apprxeq.
0 ( m .gtoreq. 5 ) . ( A 48 ) ##EQU00020##
[0435] Using formulae (A47) and (A48), eq. (A.cndot.46) is
transformed to
Formula 49 0 .ltoreq. m .ltoreq. 4 .differential. .eta. m ( t )
.differential. t exp ( - m t ) m > .apprxeq. - exp ( - 2.pi. ( v
+ 0 h ) t ) ( E .mu. ) 0 > . ( A 49 ) ##EQU00021##
[0436] Here, this section approximates an electric dipole moment j,
described in formula (A.cndot.13) to
Formula 50
|.mu.|.apprxeq..mu..sub.0+.mu..sub.1x+.mu..sub.2x.sup.2+.mu..sub.3x.sup.-
3, (A.cndot.50)
and FIG. 10 shows that the direction of an electric dipole moment
vector j, is parallel to the X axis. When Ex represents the X
component of an external electric field vector, a part of the
right-hand side of eq. (A.cndot.49) is transformed to
Formula 51 ( E .mu. ) 0 > .apprxeq. E X ( .mu. 0 + .mu. 1 x +
.mu. 2 x 2 + .mu. 3 x 3 ) 0 > .ident. E X u L u u _ > . ( A
51 ) ##EQU00022##
[0437] By using formulae (A.cndot.34), (A.cndot.35), (A.cndot.42),
and (A.cndot.43), the relational expressions of L.sub.u of eq.
(A.cndot.51) are represented by
Formula 52 L 0 = .mu. 0 + .mu. 2 2 .beta. - 3 8 .beta. { .kappa. 3
.kappa. 2 ( .mu. 1 + 11 .mu. 3 6 .beta. ) + .kappa. 4 .mu. 2
.kappa. 2 .beta. } , L 1 = 1 2 .beta. { .mu. 1 + 3 .mu. 2 2 .beta.
- .kappa. 3 .kappa. 2 ( 3 4 .mu. 0 + 11 .mu. 2 8 .beta. ) - .kappa.
4 .kappa. 2 ( 3 .mu. 1 4 .beta. + 21 .mu. 3 8 .beta. 2 ) } , L 2 =
1 2 .beta. { .mu. 2 - .kappa. 3 .kappa. 2 ( .mu. 1 + 27 .mu. 3 8
.beta. ) - .kappa. 4 .kappa. 2 ( 3 .mu. 0 4 .beta. + 9 .mu. 2 4
.beta. ) } , L 3 = 3 2 .beta. 3 / 2 { .mu. 3 - .kappa. 3 .kappa. 2
( .beta. 6 .mu. 0 + 4 .mu. 2 3 ) - .kappa. 4 .kappa. 2 ( .mu. 1 +
39 .mu. 3 8 .beta. ) } , and L 4 = 6 4 .beta. { .kappa. 3 .kappa. 2
( 1 3 .mu. 1 + 7 .mu. 3 2 .beta. ) + .kappa. 4 .kappa. 2 ( 1 4 .mu.
0 + 21 .mu. 2 8 .beta. ) } . ( A 52 ) ##EQU00023##
[0438] Subsequently, eqs. (A.cndot.39) and (A.cndot.51) are
substituted for eq. (A49), the substituted result is multiplied by
<u| from a left side and is integrated, and eq. (A.cndot.33) is
applied to the integrated result to obtain the simultaneous
equations:
Formula 53 0 .ltoreq. m .ltoreq. q g mu .differential. .eta. m ( t
) .differential. t exp ( 2.pi. ( v - m - 0 h ) t ) .apprxeq. - E X
L u , ( 0 .ltoreq. u .ltoreq. 4 ) . ( A 53 ) ##EQU00024##
[0439] The simultaneous equations (A.cndot.53) is described in Step
8 of FIG. 8.
[0440] Step 9 of FIG. 8 solves the simultaneous equations
(A.cndot.53), and the solutions represent
Formula 54 .differential. .eta. m ( t ) .differential. t exp (
2.pi. ( v - m - 0 h ) t ) = - E X P m . ( A 54 ) ##EQU00025##
[0441] When both right-hand and left-hand sides of eq. (A.cndot.54)
are integrated with "t" and
h.nu..noteq..epsilon..sub.m-.epsilon..sub.0, .eta..sub.m(t)=0
because different phase factors in the left-hand side of eq.
(A.cndot.54) each other cancel in case of the integration.
[0442] Meanwhile, the following formula can be obtained when both
right-hand and left-hand sides of eq. (A.cndot.54) are integrated
with "t" and h.nu.=.epsilon..sub.m-.epsilon..sub.0 corresponding to
eq. (A.cndot.44):
Formula 55 .eta. m ( t ) = E X P m t . ( A 55 ) ##EQU00026##
[0443] Furthermore, Moore (W. J. Moore: Physical Chemistry 4th
Edition (Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1972) Chapter 17, Section 5) teaches
us that Einstein's transition probability is
Formula 56 B 0 m = 8 .pi. 3 3 h 2 P m 2 . ( A 56 ) ##EQU00027##
[0444] Therefore, using (simultaneous) equations
(A.cndot.42)-(A.cndot.43) and (A.cndot.52)-(A.cndot.54), Einstein's
transition probability is calculated.
4.6) Substituting Estimation Results from Quantum Chemistry
Simulation Program
[0445] According to FIG. 8, section 4.6 substitutes a few results
of numerical analysis with computer simulations for relational
formulae based on Quantum Mechanics, so that it obtains wavelength
values of absorption bands and corresponding light absorbance
comparison. Further, section 4.6 also describes the numerical
analysis method in detail.
4.6.1) Numerical Analysis Method with Quantum Chemistry Simulation
Program
[0446] This section describes the numerical analysis method with
computer simulations.
[0447] A molecular structure model used for this numerical analysis
is Cl.sup.-(CH.sub.3).sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH under water
which results from the Cl.sup.- attachment to Choline
(CH.sub.3).sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH corresponding to an
ingredient of PCLN or SMLN.
[0448] Whenever a distance deviation between carbon and hydrogen
atomic nucleuses composing the asymmetrical stretching of
Cl.sup.---H--C is set to every incremental value, each molecular
structure is repetitively optimized to estimate one of total static
molecule energies and net atomic charges calculated with Mulliken's
population analysis.
[0449] Some keywords of optimization are "PM3 EF PRECISE EPS=78.4
GNORM=0.00001 LET DDMIN=0.00001 ALLVEC". And this numerical
analysis keeps a high accuracy because a molecular structure of
distance deviation "0" is confirmed to have no negative wave number
value regarding a vibration analysis.
4.6.2) Estimating Anharmonic Potential
[0450] Relating to Step 6 of FIG. 8, FIG. 11 shows relative static
molecule energy vs. distance deviation between carbon and hydrogen
atomic nucleuses composing the asymmetrical stretching of
Cl.sup.---H--C, and the relative static molecule energy means a
shifted value of the total static molecule energy to adjust a
minimum value of the relative static molecule energy to "0". Based
on FIG. 11, parameters in eq. (A.cndot.27) are associated as
follows:
Formula 57
.kappa..sub.2.apprxeq.8.6,.kappa..sub.3.apprxeq.-14.2,.kappa.4.apprxeq.9-
.3 [eV/.ANG..sub.2] (A.cndot.57)
[0451] Substituting formulae (A.cndot.57) for formula (A.cndot.32)
obtains
Formula 58
.beta..apprxeq.62.1 [.ANG..sup.2]. (A.cndot.58)
[0452] FIG. 11 has a seemingly discontinuous point of anharmonic
potential property which occurs between .alpha.-point and
.beta.-point, and this section will describe the cause of seemingly
discontinuous point.
[0453] As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the quantum chemistry simulation
program "SCIGRESS MO Compact Version 1 Pro" provides the optimized
molecular structure of
Cl.sup.-(CH.sub.3).sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH when the value of
distance deviation between carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses is
"0". FIG. 12 (a) shows that Cl.sup.- ion, Hydrogen atomic nucleus
H, and Carbon atomic nucleus C are approximately arranged on a
straight line, so that the Cl.sup.- ion seems to be located below
an extrapolation (an alternate long and short dash line) of bonding
of Nitrogen atomic nucleus N and Carbon atomic nucleus C' located
on the left side of N. This arrangement continues when the distance
between carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses increases. On the
contrary, when the distance deviation exceeds -0.1 angstrom, the
Cl.sup.- ion seems to be moved to a specific position which is
located on the extrapolation (an alternate long and short dash
line) of bonding of N and C', as shown in FIG. 12 (b). This seeming
Cl.sup.- ion movement causes the seemingly discontinuous point.
[0454] FIGS. 11 and 12 are obtained on the basis of a
semi-classical mechanics model which presumes that all atomic
nucleus position is fixed in detail. According to a perfect quantum
mechanics, all atomic nucleus position is not fixed in detail and
is represented by each of the wave functions, and the seemingly
discontinuous point substantially goes out.
[0455] FIG. 13 indicates a proof of above-mentioned explanation.
FIG. 13 shows the wave functions |m> which are obtained by
substituting formula (A.cndot.57) for formula (A.cndot.42), and it
shows that the ground state |0> has an enough existence
probability on the seemingly discontinuous point. This phenomenon
suggests that the position of Cl.sup.- ion has probabilities of
both FIGS. 12 (a) and 12(b) in case of the ground state |0>.
4.6.3) Estimating Dipole Moment Characteristics
[0456] FIG. 14 shows net atomic charges vs. distance deviation
between carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses composing the
asymmetrical stretching of Cl.sup.---H--C, and a unit of the net
atomic charge is a quantum of electricity e.sub.0.
[0457] According to a viewpoint of classical mechanics regarding
atomic nucleus movements composing the asymmetrical stretching of
Cl.sup.---H--C, as shown in [A] and [C] of section 4.3, the
Cl.sup.- ion hardly moves and the Hydrogen atomic nucleus H widely
moves. Therefore, when the distance between the carbon and hydrogen
atomic nucleuses decreases (the left side area in FIG. 14), the
distance between the Cl.sup.- ion and hydrogen atomic nucleus H
increases, and the net atomic charge value of the Cl.sup.- ion
approaches to "-1" and the net atomic charge values of carbon and
hydrogen approach to original values when the Cl.sup.- ion
detaches.
[0458] On the contrary, when the distance between the carbon and
hydrogen atomic nucleuses increases (the right side area in FIG.
14), the distance between the Cl.sup.- ion and hydrogen atomic
nucleus decreases, and the net atomic charge value of carbon
monotonously reduces but the net atomic charge value of the
hydrogen approaches to a saturation value.
[0459] Using results of molecular orbital analysis, reasons of net
atomic charge properties shown in FIG. 14 can be described below.
FIGS. 15 (a) and 15(b) show Highest and Lowest Occupied Molecular
Orbitals.
[0460] The Highest Occupied Molecular Orbital (HOMO) shown in FIG.
15 (a) mainly comprises Atomic Orbitals 3Px of Cl.sup.- ion and 2Px
of carbon atom, and the red-lined and blue-lined orbitals represent
negative and positive amplitudes. Further, FIG. 15 (a) shows that a
boundary position between negative and positive amplitudes, where
an existence probability of HOMO electron is "0", is located on the
right side of the hydrogen atomic nucleus. Therefore, a surrounding
existence probability of HOMO electron decreases and a net atomic
charge value of hydrogen increases when the location of the
hydrogen atomic nucleus is moved toward the right side in FIG. 15
(a) and the distance between the carbon and hydrogen atomic
nucleuses increases. Moreover, the net atomic charge value of
hydrogen approaches to a saturation value when the location of the
hydrogen atomic nucleus substantially arrives at the boundary
position.
[0461] The Lowest Occupied Molecular Orbital shown in FIG. 15 (b)
mainly comprises Atomic Orbitals 3S of Cl.sup.- ion and 1S of
hydrogen atom, and this Molecular Orbital especially extends to the
position of the carbon atomic nucleus. Moreover, the existence
probabilities of molecular orbitals around the Cl.sup.- ion which
relate to not only the Lowest Occupied Molecular Orbital but also
different molecular orbitals tend to flow toward the carbon atom
when the location of the hydrogen atomic nucleus is moved toward
the right side in FIG. 15 (b). Therefore, the net atomic charge
value of carbon decreases when the distance between carbon and
hydrogen atomic nucleuses increases, as shown in FIG. 14.
[0462] FIG. 16 shows electric dipole moments .mu.vs. distance
deviations between carbon and hydrogen atomic nucleuses, and the
electric dipole moment .mu. is obtained by substituting net atomic
charges of carbon and hydrogen for formula (A.cndot.13). According
to FIG. 16, each parameter of formula (A.cndot.50) is as
follows:
Formula 59
.mu..sub.0.apprxeq.0.281,.mu..sub.1.apprxeq.0.635,.mu..sub.2.apprxeq.0.0-
242,.mu..sub.3.apprxeq.-0.272 [e.sub.0.ANG.] (A.cndot.59)
4.6.4) Light Absorption Wavelengths and Light Absorbances of
Corresponding Absorption Bands
[0463] Table 5 shows wave numbers, wavelengths, and transition
probability ratios regarding asymmetrical stretching of
Cl.sup.---H--C, and the transition probability ratio corresponds to
the relative light absorbance value. Using eq. (A.cndot.44), the
wave numbers and the wavelengths can be calculated, and each
.epsilon..sub.m is obtained by substituting values (A.cndot.57) and
(A.cndot.58) for formula (A.cndot.38). In addition, each B.sub.0m
can be calculated by solving the simultaneous eq. (A.cndot.53) and
substituting eqs. (A.cndot.54) and (A.cndot.55) for formula
(A.cndot.56).
TABLE-US-00005 TABLE 5 Wave numbers, wavelengths, and transition
probability ratios regarding asymmetrical stretching of
Cl.sup.---H--C. m 1 2 3 4 Transition mode Fundamental 1st 2nd 3rd
overtone overtone overtone Wave number (cm.sup.-1) 2283 4635 7040
9487 Wavelength .lamda.m (.mu.m) 4.38 2.16 1.42 1.05 Transition
probability 1 1/176 1/3480 1/3030 ratio B.sub.0m/B.sub.01
[0464] Table 5 shows the fundamental wave number is 2283 cm.sup.-1,
and Table 3 shows the corresponding value is 2480 cm.sup.-1. It is
considered that the slight difference between 2283 cm.sup.-1 and
2480 cm.sup.-1 occurs because Table 3 is obtained with a harmonic
vibration approximation and Table 5 is obtained with taking account
of anharmonic vibration terms.
[0465] Table 5 shows that the relative light absorbance value of a
1st overtone (transition probability ratio B.sub.02/B.sub.01) is
very small and the relative light absorbance values of 2nd and 3rd
overtones are smaller.
[0466] If a measuring device of life activity has a particular
contrivance to detect a small signal, as described later, it can
sufficiently detect absorption bands regarding the 2nd and 3rd
overtones.
[0467] Table 5 relates to specific transitions from a ground state
|0> to one of excited states |m>(m.noteq.0). This embodiment,
however, may detect another absorption band regarding another
transition between excited states |m>(m.noteq.0).
4.7) Discussion about Detectable Range in Present Exemplary
Embodiment
[0468] There occur large reading errors when the value obtained in
formula (A 57) is read from FIG. 11 and when the value obtained in
formula (A 59) is read from FIG. 16. In view of this, some
differences are expected between theoretically estimated values as
shown in Table 5 and actual values. The differences in such a case
are generally said to be about .+-.20% (.+-.10% at best).
Accordingly, a lower limit of the near infrared light wavelength
adopted in the present exemplary embodiment is estimated to be
1.05.times.(1-0.1)=0.945 .mu.m, or 1.05.times.(1-0.2)=0.840 .mu.m
with a larger estimated error.
[0469] However, when light of the 3rd overtone shown in Table 5 is
not used for measurement and only light of the 2nd overtone or less
is used for measurement, the lower limit of the near infrared light
wavelength adopted in the present exemplary embodiment is estimated
to be 1.42.times.(1-0.1)=1.278 .mu.m, or 1.42.times.(1-0.2)=1.136
.mu.m with a larger estimated error.
[0470] Further, when light of the 2nd overtone or more shown in
Table 5 is not used for measurement and only light of the 1st
overtone is used for measurement, the lower limit of the near
infrared light wavelength adopted in the present exemplary
embodiment is estimated to be 2.16.times.(1-0.1)=1.944 .mu.m or
2.16.times.(1+0.1)=2.376 .mu.m, or 2.16.times.(1-0.2)=1.728 .mu.m
or 2.16.times.(1+0.2)=2.592 .mu.m with a larger estimated
error.
[0471] An upper limit of the infrared radiation wavelength to be
used in measurement method as shown in the present exemplary
embodiment will be described as follows.
[0472] As for a relationship between a wavelength (wavenumber) of
an absorption band measured by infrared light and an intramolecular
vibration, the following vibrations are caused in order from a
shorter absorption wavelength (in order from a larger wavenumber
value): a local vibration of functional groups, a principal chain
vibration of molecule, a vibration of whole molecule, and a
rotation of whole molecule.
[0473] Accordingly, a high-speed change along with the
afore-mentioned "local state change in a molecule" corresponds to
measurement of the "local vibration" or the "principal chain
vibration of molecule" among them.
[0474] In the meantime, the analysis result of a vibration mode
occurring when a sodium ion is attached to a carboxyl group to form
an ion bond are as follows: [A] according to section 3.3, the
wavenumber values (wavelengths) of the absorption band
corresponding to the skeletal vibration of
>C--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ are 260 to 291 cm.sup.-1 (34.4 to
38.5 .mu.m); and [B] according to section 3.4, the wavenumber value
(wavelength) of the absorption band corresponding to the skeletal
vibration of N.sup.+--C--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ is 429 cm.sup.-1
(23.3 .mu.m).
[0475] Further, the analysis result of a vibration mode occurring
when a potassium ion is attached to a carboxyl group to form an ion
bond is as follows: according to section 3.3, [C] the wavenumber
value (wavelength) of the absorption band corresponding to the
skeletal vibration of C--CO.sub.2.sup.-K.sup.+ is 118 cm.sup.-1
(84.7 .mu.m); and [D] the symmetrically telescopic vibration of the
carboxyl group --CO.sub.2.sup.- at a wavenumber (wavelength) of
1570 cm.sup.-1 (6.37 .mu.m) is largely restricted due to potassium
ion attachment.
[0476] Accordingly, it is necessary to consider the above values as
a part of the application range (detectable range) of the present
exemplary embodiment. However, in advance of this consideration,
[E] according to section 3.2, the wavenumber value (wavelength) of
the absorption band corresponding to the skeletal vibration of
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.- is 2465 cm.sup.-1 (4.06 .mu.m)
(an average of 2480 cm.sup.-1 for PCLN and 2450 cm.sup.-1 for
SMLN), whereas the waveband value is 2283 cm.sup.-1 in section
4.6.4. In view of this, it is necessary to take into consideration
such a slight difference. As have been described in section 4.6.4,
the reason of this slight difference is because "the vibrational
analysis result in section 3.1 is obtained based on a harmonic
vibration approximation," whereas "section 4.6.4 takes account of
anharmonic vibration terms."
[0477] Accordingly, it may be said that the measurement wavelengths
L listed in [A] to [D] can be changed up to (2465/2283).times.L
depending on a computation model. Further, the values exhibited in
[A] to [E] are merely theoretically estimated values, and some
difference up to about .+-.20% with respect to the actual values is
expected, as described earlier. Thus, the lower limit of the
experimental value based on [A] to [E] is estimated as
L.times.(1-0.2) and the upper limit thereof is estimated as
(2465/2283).times.L.times.(1+0.2). In view of this, the application
ranges (detectable ranges) of the present exemplary embodiment to
detect each of the phenomena [A] to [E] in consideration of the
above relational formulae will be as follows:
[A] The skeletal vibration of >C--CO.sub.2Na.sup.+ (section 3.3)
27.5 to 49.9 .mu.m (34.4.times.0.8.apprxeq.27.5,
(2465/2283).times.38.5.times.1.2.apprxeq.49.9); [B] The skeletal
vibration of N.sup.+--C--CO.sub.2.sup.-Na.sup.+ (section 3.4) 18.6
to 30.2 .mu.m; [C] The skeletal vibration of
C--CO.sub.2.sup.-K.sup.+ (section 3.3) 67.8 to 110 .mu.m; [D] The
symmetrically telescopic vibration of --CO.sub.2.sup.- (section
3.3) 5.10 to 8.25 .mu.m; and [E] The skeletal vibration of
--N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.- (section 3.2) 3.25 to 5.26
.mu.m.
[0478] From the overall view of the above, the infrared radiation
wavelength to be used in the measurement method of the present
exemplary embodiment is desirably at least 110 .mu.m or less (a
wavenumber value of 91.1 cm.sup.-1 or more), in view of the upper
limit of [C].
[0479] Accordingly, to summarize the discussion as above is that a
wavelength range of the light to be used in the present exemplary
embodiment are "from 0.840 .mu.m to 110 .mu.m" as the maximum range
and "from 2.592 .mu.m to 110 .mu.m" as the minimum range.
[0480] Subsequently, an influence of absorption wavelengths of
water is added to the summary of the discussion. Most part of a
life object is constituted by water molecules. Therefore, when
electromagnetic waves are illuminated to measure or detect
dynamical life activities in the life object, absorption of the
electromagnetic waves by the water molecules will be a large
problem. Accordingly, the present exemplary embodiment devises to
use a wavelength region where the absorption by the water molecules
is relatively small. According to B. Alberts et. al.: Essential
Cell Biology (Garland Publishing, Inc. 1998), p. 68, FIGS. 2 to 24,
the composition of a chemical compound constituting an animal cell
(including inorganic ions) is occupied by water molecules by 70% by
weight. Further, 15% out of the remaining 30% of the composition is
occupied by proteins, followed by 6% by RNA, 4% by ions/small
molecules, 2% by Polysaccharides, and 2% by Phospholipids.
Meanwhile, the light absorption characteristic of the proteins
varies depending on a tertiary structure in a cell, and therefore,
it is difficult to specify an absorption wavelength region of an
absorption band by general proteins. In view of this, in the
present exemplary embodiment, "the light absorption characteristic
of the water molecule" is focused on because [1] the water
molecules are included in an animal cell overwhelmingly abundantly,
and [2] the light absorption characteristic thereof is determined
due to its stable molecular structure, and a wavelength region with
relatively small light absorption by the water molecule is used for
detection of dynamical life activities in a life object. This
allows relatively stable and accurate measurement or detection
while preventing detection light for life activity from being
absorbed by water molecules along the way. Yukihiro Ozaki/Satoshi
Kawata: Kinsekigai bunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996), p. 12,
p. 120, p. 122 or p. 180 describes the maximum absorption
wavelength of the water molecule, and the present exemplary
embodiment will provide an explanation using the values described
herein.
[0481] Respective center wavelengths of absorption bands of the
water molecule corresponding to a symmetrically telescopic
vibration and an anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration are 2.73
.mu.m and 2.66 .mu.m. Further, in a wavelength region having
wavelengths longer than the above wavelengths, light absorption by
a rotation of a hydrogen molecule occurs. Accordingly, in the
present exemplary embodiment, in order to measure dynamical
activities in a life object, 2.50 .mu.m, which is a wavelength
slightly shorter than 2.66 .mu.m, is taken as a boundary, and the
measurement is performed using electromagnetic waves in a
wavelength region having a wavelength shorter than the boundary
value (more specifically, in a range from 0.840 .mu.m to 2.50 .mu.m
in consideration of the discussion as above).
[0482] On the other hand, in the near-infrared region, an
absorption band corresponding to combinations between the
anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration and deformation vibration
of the water molecule is at a center wavelength of 1.91 .mu.m. In
view of this, other embodiments can use, for measurement,
electromagnetic waves in a wavelength region except for this
absorption band. More specifically, light of the 1 st overtone
(having a wavelength of 2.16 .mu.m) as shown in Table 5 is used for
measurement. However, as having been mentioned above, a reading
error of about .+-.10% to .+-.20% occurs when a value is read from
FIG. 11 or FIG. 1. In consideration of this reading error,
electromagnetic waves of not less than 2.16.times.(1-0.05)=2.05
.mu.m but not more than 2.16.times.(1+0.15)=2.48 .mu.m are used in
another exemplary embodiment.
[0483] Further, an absorption band corresponding to combinations
between the symmetrically telescopic vibration and the
anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration of the water molecule is at
a center wavelength of 1.43 .mu.m. In view of this, for another
applied embodiment, light in a wavelength region between the above
wavelength and 1.9 .mu.m (more specifically, light of not less than
1.5 .mu.m but not more than 1.9 .mu.m to avoid a center wavelength
of the absorption band of the water molecule) may be used, or light
in a wavelength region having a wavelength shorter than 1.43 .mu.m
may be used. As an electromagnetic wave for measurement
corresponding to the latter, light of the 3rd overtone (having a
wavelength of 1.05 .mu.m) as shown in Table 5 is used for
measurement. In consideration of the above reading error, a
specific wavelength to be used in this case is in a range of:
[0484] 1.05.times.(1-0.2)=0.840 .mu.m or more but
1.05.times.(1+0.3)=1.37 .mu.m or less.
[0485] In the meantime, other wavelength ranges may be set as an
applied embodiment, as well as the wavelengths mentioned above.
That is, as described below, the wavelength ranges may be set so as
to avoid a wavelength region absorbed by an "oxygen concentration
indicator" existing in a living tissue. For example, when a palm or
a finger is illuminated with near-infrared light, a pattern of
blood vessels can be observed around a surface thereof. This is
because hemoglobin included in the blood vessels absorbs the
near-infrared light. That is, in a case where a life activity in an
area on a backside of the blood vessels (behind the blood vessels)
placed in vicinity of the surface of the life object is detected,
there is such a risk that detection light may be absorbed by the
blood vessels in the middle of a detection light path and an S/N
ratio of a detection signal may decrease. Besides the hemoglobin,
myoglobin and cytochrome oxidase also have absorption bands in the
near-infrared region, and the absorption spectrum of the
near-infrared region varies between an oxygenation state and a
deoxygenating state. For this reason, these substances are called
an oxygen concentration indicator. Further, according to F. F.
Jobsis: Science vol. 198 (1977), p. 1264-p. 1267, it is said that
the cytochrome oxidase and hemoglobin have a weak absorption band
over wavelengths of 0.780 .mu.m to 0.870 .mu.m. Accordingly, in
consideration of a general range of measurement errors of +0.005
.mu.m, if the detection light to be used in the present exemplary
embodiment or the applied embodiment has a wavelength of 0.875
.mu.m or more, a detection signal of a life activity is stably
obtained without having any influence (light absorption) by the
oxygen concentration indicators. From this viewpoint, the
aforementioned wavelength ranges "from 0.840 .mu.m to 110 .mu.m,"
"from 0.840 .mu.m to 2.50 .mu.m," or "of not less than 0.840 .mu.m
but not more than 1.37 .mu.m" will be assumed as, respectively,
"from 0.875 .mu.m to 110 .mu.m," "from 0.875 .mu.m to 2.50 .mu.m,"
or "of not less than 0.875 .mu.m but not more than 1.37 .mu.m." In
a case where the using wavelengths of detection light or control
light for life activity are determined as such, even if an oxygen
concentration indicator exists in the middle of a detection light
path or a control light path, the detection light or the control
light is not absorbed, so that the S/N ratio of a life activity
detection signal can be secured and stable life activity control
can be performed.
[0486] FIGS. 17, 18, and 19 are images showing qualitative
performance comparisons between membrane potential changing
detection and oxygen concentration change detection in blood from
respective viewpoints of spatial resolution, temporal resolution,
and detection accuracy.
[0487] The feet that the target is completely different between the
oxygen concentration in blood in Conventional Technique 1 and the
detection or control in the present exemplary embodiment or applied
embodiment n: described first, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.
The target area for measuring the oxygen concentration in
Conventional Technique 1 is in blood vessels (in capillaries 28),
as shown in FIG. 17 or 18. Red blood cells indicating a change in
oxygen concentration are constantly moving (circulating) in the
body, and the real measurement target is not fixed at a specific
location in the life object. On the other hand, the present
exemplary embodiment or applied embodiment has a feature in that
the target of detection or control is fixed at a predetermined
location in a non-vascular region 10 in the life object, as shown
in FIG. 17 or 18. In the case of measuring the oxygen concentration
in red blood cells moving (circulating) in the body, the
measurement accuracy is low (because the object of measurement is
moving). In the present exemplary embodiment or applied embodiment,
on the other hand, the predetermined location fixed in the
non-vascular region 10 is detected or controlled. This has an
advantageous effect of improving the accuracy and stability of
detection or control, on the ground that (1) the detection or
control is less susceptible to the influence of blood (in
particular, the influence of light absorption by water molecules in
blood as described in section 11.4) and (2) there is no variation
factor associated with movement because the location of detection
or control is fixed.
[0488] In FIGS. 17 and 18, a pyramidal cell body 17 or a stellate
cell body 18 or its axon is subject to detection or control, and an
action potential state and a signal transmission state thereof are
detected or controlled. However, this is not a limit, and a hie
activity relating to a vital reaction, a chemical reaction, a
biochemical reaction, or a metabolic process in a local area in the
non-vascular region 10 or its resulting physiochemical change may
be detected (and the life activity may be measured based on the
detection result) or controlled.
[0489] Next, as described above, the spatial resolution in
Conventional Technique 1 is of the order of 3 cm (see FIG. 17), and
it is said that the spatial resolution in the case of magnetic
detection using an fMRI device is a few mm order. In this case, as
shown in FIG. 17, a mean value of oxygen concentrations in blood
flowing in a plurality of capillaries 28 in this area is detected.
In comparison with that, in a case where membrane potential
changing is detected, the spatial resolution is of the order of a
wavelength of the detection light described above.
[0490] However, in a case where an action potential of one neuron
is detected as an example of the potential changing detection of a
cell membrane, an average distance between adjacent neurons
corresponds to a substantial spatial resolution. It is said that an
average distance between adjacent neurons in a cerebral cortex of a
human is of the order of 20 .mu.m.
[0491] Thus, there is a difference of 100 times in terms of the
order between these spatial resolutions. An image of the difference
is shown in FIG. 17 in a simulated manner. That is, in a case where
the oxygen concentration change in blood is detected by use of near
infrared light like Conventional Technique 1, a mean value within
an area having a diameter of 3 cm is detected. In contrast, in this
exemplary embodiment, an action potential of each single pyramidal
cell body 17 or stellate cell body 18 in the area can be detected
individually.
[0492] On the other hand, as will be described below in section
6.3.1 or section 9.3.2, in the present exemplary embodiment in
which the membrane potential changing is detected, a size (aperture
size) of a light transmission section 56 in a two-dimensional
liquid crystal shutter 51 as shown in FIG. 24 or 25 can be made
adequate so as to detect activities of a group unit of a plurality
of neurons such as a column unit (a total firing rate of a set of
the plurality of neurons, such as a column). Since the column has a
cylindrical shape (or rectangular solid) with about 0.5 to 1.0 mm
in diameter and almost 2 mm in height, the spatial resolution can
be advantageously changed freely into to the above values (or below
those values) to detect the activities per column unit.
[0493] (Regarding Size Range of Detection Unit)
[0494] As described above, the detection unit in the present
exemplary embodiment can be widely set from one neuron unit (or a
particular region in an axon) or one muscle cell unit (or
neuromuscular junction unit), to a group unit of a plurality of
neurons (or muscle cells). That is, in a detected point for life
activity, a local area constituted by one or more cells is set to a
single unit for detection and a characteristic per detection unit
(in the local area) corresponding to an electromagnetic wave is
detected so as to detect a life activity.
[0495] Further, this electromagnetic wave is near infrared light or
infrared light having a wavelength in a range to be described
herein (section 4.7), or alternatively an electromagnetic wave with
which a detected point for life activity is illuminated to detect a
life activity by use of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance, which will be
explain later in chapter 5. Further, when the life activity is
detected by use of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance, either continuous
wave CW (Continuous wave) spectroscopy or pulse FT (Fourier
Transformation) spectroscopy may be used.
[0496] A size of the detection unit (a local area) in the present
exemplary embodiment is desirably in a range of 1 cm from the
wavelength of an electromagnetic wave used for detection, and
further desirably not less than 10 .mu.m but not more than 3 mm,
for the following reason. If the size is expressed in terms of a
cell number included in this detection unit (the local area), the
cell number is desirably not less than 1 but not more than 100
million, and particularly desirably not less than 1 but not more
than 2 million.
[0497] The following describes the size range of the detection unit
(the local area). An electromagnetic wave is narrowed down to its
wavelength size (diffraction limited) according to a diffraction
theory. Further, it is known that voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion
channels, which greatly relate to a neuronal action potential, are
largely distributed over an axonal root site in a cell body. In
view of this, in a case where an action potential of only one
neuron is detected, detection efficiency is more improved by
condensing light around this axonal root rather by widely
illuminating the whole cell body with detection light.
Consequently, it is desirable that the size of the detection unit
(the local area) in the present exemplary embodiment be larger than
the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave to be used for
detection.
[0498] Next will be described an upper limit of the size of the
detection unit (the local area) in the present exemplary
embodiment. As will be described below in section 6.5.4 with
reference to FIG. 41 or 42, life activity information is obtained
from movement of a facial muscle in an applied embodiment. In this
case, sufficient detection accuracy cannot be obtained by the
spatial resolution (about 3 cm in diameter: see FIG. 17) as
described in Conventional Technique 1. Since the width of an eyelid
or a lip of a human is about 1 cm, it is necessary for the upper
limit of the size of the detection unit (the local area) to be set
to 1 cm so as to obtain detection accuracy to some extent or more.
Further, an average distance between neurons is about 20 .mu.m, and
when a deep part of the brain is measured with a cube 1 cm on a
side as a detection unit,
(10/0.02).times.(10/0.02).times.(10/0.02).apprxeq.100 million
neurons will be included within this detection unit (the local
area).
[0499] The following assumes a case where the detection unit (the
local area) is set to a unit of integral multiple of the
aforementioned column. As described above, since the height of one
column (a thickness of a spinal cord gray matter in a cerebral
cortex) is 2 mm, 2/0.02=100 neurons will be aligned in the
detection unit on the average. When the life activity is detected
in broad perspective, activities of around 10 columns within one
detection unit (local area) may be detected at the same time. In
this case, one side of the length of the detection unit (local
area) is 10.sup.1/2.times.1.apprxeq.3 mm. In view of this,
(3/0.02).times.(3/0.02).times.100.apprxeq.2 million neurons will be
included in this detection unit (local area). Further, when one
side (or a diameter) of the detection unit (local area) is set to
0.5 mm or 1.0 mm, a life activity of one column can be detected as
the detection unit (the local area) (from the viewpoint of the
aforementioned column size). At this time, the number of neurons
included in the detection unit (the local area) will be
(0.5/0.02).times.(0.5/0.02).times.100.apprxeq.60,000 or
(1/0.02).times.(1/0.02).apprxeq.300,000. Accordingly, in a case
where the life activity of one neuron to the life activity of a
column unit are detected, a local area constituted by not less than
1 but not more than 60,000 to 300,000 cells is set as a detection
unit, and a characteristic thereof corresponding to an
electromagnetic wave is detected so as to detect the life
activity.
[0500] (Regarding Temporal Resolution)
[0501] The detection of an oxygen concentration change in blood by
use of near infrared light or fMRI is compared with the detection
of potential changing of a cell membrane by optical or magnetic
means described in the present exemplary embodiment in terms of the
temporal resolution.
[0502] Like Conventional Technique 1, as long as the oxygen
concentration change in blood is detected, a delay of about 5 s is
caused, so that the temporal resolution is restricted essentially.
In comparison with that, as described in section 1.3, in a case of
detecting membrane potential changing, there is a temporal
resolution which allows faithful reproduction of an action
potential pulse waveform of about 0.5 to 4 ms occurring during the
term 24 of nerve impulse as shown in FIG. 3.
[0503] The difference between them is shown by an image of FIG.
18(b). When stellate cell bodies 18 at a position .alpha. and a
position .gamma. or a pyramidal cell body 17 at a position .beta.
fires an action potential and a potential of a cell membrane is
changed, unique vibration modes occur due to ion adsorption (or ion
release), as has been described in chapter 3 or 4 (the present
chapter). Accordingly, when the cell body is illuminated with light
having a wavelength in the aforementioned range, this light is
absorbed and causes transition between the unique vibration
modes.
[0504] As a result, as shown in FIG. 18(b), a reflection light
amount change 401 occurs due to a temporal decrease in the amount
of reflection light. In the example of FIG. 18(b), the stellate
cell body 18 at the position .alpha. starts firing an action
potential at to in a detection time 163, which causes the stellate
cell body 18 at the position .gamma. to start firing an action
potential, followed by causing an action potential of the pyramidal
cell body 17 in the position .beta. with a little delay. Here, one
"whisker" in FIG. 18 (b) indicates "one action potential." Since
the temporal resolution is very high in the present exemplary
embodiment in which the membrane potential changing is detected as
such, each action potential state can be detected per different
neuron.
[0505] Then, at t.sub.B, which is 5 s after t.sub.0 at which the
action potential started in the detection time 163, a reflection
light amount 48 of light having a wavelength of 830 nm and a
reflection light amount 47 of light having a wavelength of 780 nm
start to change slowly.
[0506] It is found that after the neuron fires an action potential,
the oxygen concentration change in blood will not occur if any of
the following phenomena does not continue: (1) lack of ATP in the
cell bodies 17 and 18; (2) lack of oxygen molecules in the cell
bodies 17 and 18; and (3) lack of oxyhemoglobin in the capillary
28. That is, only when action potentials are fired frequently as
shown in FIG. 18(b), the above phenomena from (1) to (3) occur
continuously.
[0507] Therefore, when action potentials are rarely fired as shown
FIG. 19(b), the oxygen concentration in blood does not change
because the phenomena (1) to (3) do not occur. Hence, it is
considered that the method for detecting the oxygen concentration
change in blood has relatively low detection accuracy of the life
activity. In contrast, since the present exemplary embodiment in
which the membrane potential changing is detected can detect only
one action potential as shown in FIG. 19(b), it is advantageously
possible to improve detection accuracy drastically in either of the
optical means (near infrared light) and the magnetic means
(fMRI).
[0508] (Regarding Detection of Weak Signal)
[0509] As can be seen from a value of B.sub.0m/B.sub.01, which is a
transition probability ratio in the reference tone of the
transition probability in the overtone levels described in Table 5,
a very weak changing signal is detected in the present exemplary
embodiment. Therefore, an electromagnetic wave (near infrared
light) to be projected on a life object is modulated in advance in
the present exemplary embodiment as described later.
[0510] Thus, an S/N ratio of a detection signal can be increased by
extracting only a signal component synchronized with a modulation
signal from detection light returning from the life object. If a
modulation cycle thereof is longer than a time interval at which a
measurement subject changes, it is difficult to detect time
dependent variations of the measurement subject. Accordingly, in
order to measure time dependent variations of the measurement
subject stably, it is necessary to set a basic cycle of the
modulating signal to be equal to or less than 1/5 the time interval
at which the measurement subject changes.
[0511] In view of this, one exemplary embodiment has a feature in
that a basic frequency of a modulation signal is set as follows: 1
Hz or more (at least 0.2 Hz or more) for an object changing at an
interval shorter than 5 s; 25 Hz or more (at least 5 Hz or more)
for an object changing at an interval shorter than 200 ms; and 1.25
kHz or more (at least 250 Hz or more) for an object changing at an
interval shorter than 4 ms.
[0512] Next will be described an upper limit of the basic frequency
of the modulation and an interval of time dependent variations in
one exemplary embodiment. Generally, it is known that analog
signals having a signal bandwidth of several hundred kHz work
easily and stably without oscillating a detecting circuit. Further,
at such a signal bandwidth, implementation including how to connect
grounds in a printed circuit or the like is stable even without
careful attention. On the other hand, when the bandwidth of an
operating range exceeds 20 MHz, the detecting circuit is easy to be
oscillated, and considerable technique is necessary for the
implementation in the printed circuit. In a case where an action
potential of about 0.5 to 2 ms is measured in one example of the
present exemplary embodiment, such high-speed signal detection is
not required. Therefore, a detecting signal bandwidth is restrained
to a minimum, so as to stabilize the circuit and reduce costs.
[0513] For the aforementioned reasons, the basic frequency of the
modulation is restrained to 500 kHz or less specifically, in one
example of the present exemplary embodiment, and the interval of
time dependent variations of the measurement subject is set to not
less than 10 ns (at least 2 ns or more).
4.8) Applied Embodiment Adopting CARS Microspectroscopy
[0514] The method of measuring the absorption spectrum in the
infrared region using near infrared light (light whose wavelength
is included in the near infrared region) described in chapter 4 is
called CARS (coherent anti-Stokes Raman scattering)
microspectroscopy, the basic principle of which is described in
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-222531. An applied
embodiment adopting this basic principle is described below. Though
basically any wavelength can be selected for pump light in CARS
microspectroscopy, the present applied embodiment has a feature in
that the wavelength of pump light matches the wavelength of the
absorption band in the near infrared region. This has an
advantageous effect of enhancing die detection efficiency of Stokes
light (CARS light). The following describes the feature of the
present applied embodiment, using the description of FIG. 13 in
section 4.6.2. As shown in FIG. 76, for the transition from the
eigen value of energy so in the ground state |0> to the eigen
value of energy .epsilon..sub.m in the excited state |m> for
anharmonic vibration corresponding to anti-symmetrically telescopic
vibration between a carbon atomic nucleus, a hydrogen atomic
nucleus, and a chlorine ion, an electromagnetic wave (near infrared
light) having a wavelength .lamda..sub.m given by eq. (A.cndot.44)
is applied for use in vibrational excitation 811 by pump light.
Though the transition (2nd overtone) to the eigen value of energy
.epsilon..sub.3 in the exerted state |3> is used for the
vibrational excitation 811 by pump light in FIG. 76, this is not a
limit. For example, the transition (1st overtone) to the eigen
value of energy .epsilon..sub.2 in the excited state |2> or the
transition (3rd overtone) to the eigen value of energy
.epsilon..sub.4 in the excited state |4> may be used. Moreover,
the vibration is not limited to anti-symmetrically telescopic
vibration between a carbon atomic nucleus, a hydrogen atomic
nucleus, and a chlorine ion, and an electromagnetic wave (near
infrared light) having a wavelength .lamda. corresponding to a
combination generated by combining anti-symmetrically telescopic
vibration with symmetrically telescopic vibration or deformation
vibration may be used for pump light. By simultaneously applying,
in coherent state, Stokes light (CARS light) having the same
wavelength as emission light when the above-mentioned excited
vibration mode transitions to the eigen value of energy si in the
excited state |1>, stimulated light emission 812 occurs, and
Stokes light (CARS light) is emitted in large amounts.
[0515] As shown in FIG. 76, there is a transition forbidding
wavelength between vibration modes between a carbon atomic nucleus,
a hydrogen atomic nucleus, and a chlorine ion. In the case where
pump light corresponding to the transition forbidding wavelength is
applied, a vibration mode in a part other than between a carbon
atomic nucleus, a hydrogen atomic nucleus, and a chlorine ion is
excited, which causes a Significant decrease in emission
probability of the stimulated light emission 812 by Stokes light.
Accordingly, in the present applied embodiment, the wavelength of
pump light is set to match the wavelength of the absorption band
(corresponding to the transition between vibration modes between a
carbon atomic nucleus, a hydrogen atomic nucleus, and a chlorine
ion) in the near infrared region. This has an advantageous effect
of increasing the emission amount of Stokes light (CARS light) and
improving the detection accuracy.
[0516] Though the method of detecting action potential of a neuron
or signal transmission in an axon based on the transition between
vibration modes between a carbon atomic nucleus, a hydrogen atomic
nucleus, and a chlorine ion is described here, tins is not a limit.
The present applied embodiment may be applied to detection of a
change in vibration mode involving a predetermined oxygen atom or
hydrogen atom upon a vital reaction (or a biochemical reaction, a
chemical reaction, a physiochemical change, or a metabolic process)
as described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 72. In such a case,
light of a wavelength corresponding to the transition to the
excited state of the vibration mode involving the predetermined
oxygen atom or hydrogen atom when the change occurs is selected as
pump light.
[0517] As described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No
2009-222531 mentioned earlier, the emission of Stokes light (CARS
light) is a nonlinear optical process, so that Stokes light (CARS
light) is emitted only from a part where pump light and Stokes
light are intensely condensed. Therefore, the use of the emission
of Stokes light (CARS light) in the present applied embodiment has
an advantageous effect of accurately extracting a change in
spectral properly or optical property of only a specific local
area.
5] NMR Spectral Characteristics Estimation Based on Action
Potential Model
5.1) NMR Spectral Characteristic Changing and Estimated Chemical
Shift Values Regarding the Action Potential
5.1.1) Prospect for Changing NMR Spectral Characteristics Regarding
Action Potential
[0518] Section 4.7 said that this embodiment shows a new measuring
method of life activity which exposes a life object to an
electromagnetic wave of 0.85 .mu.m-50 .mu.m (or 0.84 .mu.m-2.5
.mu.m) wavelength, and this new measuring method can detect time
dependent variations of the electromagnetic wave indicating a life
activity. And according to the new measuring method, a local
property of life object can be measured in detail, and dynamical
life action information can be obtained by converting the
measurement results.
[0519] This chapter 5 proposes another embodiment which detects
time dependent variations of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property in
a local area of a life object and converts the detection results to
dynamical life action information.
[0520] According to section 3.2, a net charge value regarding a
hydrogen atomic nucleus varies when the Cl.sup.- ion attaches to
the hydrogen atom of --N.sup.+(CH.sub.3).sub.3 belonging to PCLN or
SMLN and forms a hydrogen (or ionic) bond with the hydrogen atom.
This net charge variation means a change of molecular orbitals
located around the hydrogen atomic nucleus. Therefore, it is
predicted that Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property and a
corresponding chemical shift value change when the molecular
orbitals located around hydrogen atomic nucleus change, because the
change of molecular orbitals may make a magnetic shielding effect
for hydrogen atomic nucleus vary.
[0521] This chapter proposes another embodiment which detects time
dependent variations of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property or a
corresponding chemical shift and converts the detection results to
dynamical life action information.
5.1.2) Calculation Method with Another Quantum Chemistry Simulation
Program
[0522] In this chapter 5, Gaussian 09 is used for a quantum
chemistry simulation program, and "Gaussian" belongs to a
registered trademark (Gaussian 09, Revision A. 1, M. J. Frisch, G.
W. Trucks, H. B. Schlegel, G E. Scuseria, M. A. Robb, J. R.
Cheeseman, G Scalmani, V. Barone, B. Mennucci, G A. Petersson, H.
Nakatsuji, M. Caricato, X. Li, H. P. Hratchian, A. F. Izmaylov, J.
Bloino, G. Zheng, J. L. Sonnenberg, M. Hada, M. Ehara, K. Toyota,
R. Fukuda, J. Hasegawa, M. Ishida, T. Nakajima, Y. Honda, O. Kitao,
H. Nakai, T. Vreven, J. A. Montgomery, Jr., J. E. Peralta, F.
Ogliaro, M. Bearpark, J. J. Heyd, E. Brothers, K. N. Kudin, V. N.
Staroverov, R. Kobayashi, J. Normand, K. Raghavachari, A. Rendell,
J. C. Burant, S. S. Iyengar, J. Tomasi, M. Cossi, N. Rega, J. M.
Millam, M. Klene, J. E. Knox, J. B. Cross, V. Bakken, C. Adamo, J.
Jaramillo, R. Gomperts, R. E. Stratmann, O. Yazyev, A. J. Austin,
R. Cammi, C. Pomelli, J. W. Ochterski, R. L. Martin, K. Morokuma,
V. G Zakrzewski, G. A. Voth, P. Salvador, J. J. Dannenberg, S.
Dapprich, A. D. Daniels, O. Farkas, J. B. Foresman, J. V. Ortiz, J.
Cioslowski, and D. J. Fox, -Gaussian, Inc. Wallingford Conn.,
2009).
[0523] A molecular structure
Cl.sup.-(CH.sub.3).sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH is used for this
computer simulation to obtain a short time and simple estimation.
And this calculation method also comprises two calculation steps to
keep high calculation accuracy. The first calculation step is to
optimize a molecular structure and to confirm whether the
optimization is fully finished or not, and the second calculation
step is to analyze Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property.
[0524] Some keywords of optimization are "#P RHF/6-31G(d) Opt Freq
SCRF=(Solvent=Water,PCM)". Here, "RHF/6-31G(d)" means an
approximation method and basic functions used for a series of
calculations, "Opt SCRF=(Solvent=Water,PCM)" means the optimization
under water, and "Freq" is used to confirm the optimized
structure.
[0525] And some keywords of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance analysis are
"#P RHF/6-31G(d) NMR SCRF=(Solvent=Water,PCM)". Here, "NMR" means
the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance analysis for calculating a
corresponding chemical shift value. This chemical shift value is
based on ".delta. scale" which represents a subtraction value
between a corresponding output data and a basic chemical shift of
Tetramethylsilane (TMS) which was previously calculated (R. M.
Silverstein and F. X. Webster: Spectrometric Identification of
Organic Compounds 6th Edition (John Wiley & Sons, 1998) Chapter
4, Section 4.7).
5.1.3) Estimating Chemical Shift Values in NMR Spectral
Characteristics
[0526] At first, Gaussian 09 calculated a chemical shift value
regarding a hydrogen atomic nucleus belonging a methyl group which
is included in a single choline
(CH.sub.3).sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH without Cl.sup.- ion
attachment. And the first calculation results were between
.delta.2.49 ppm and .delta.2.87 ppm.
[0527] Then it calculated a chemical shift value regarding a
hydrogen atomic nucleus which forms a hydrogen (or ionic) bond with
Cl.sup.- ion in a molecule
Cl.sup.-(CH.sub.3).sub.3N.sup.+CH.sub.2CH.sub.2OH, and the next
calculation results are between .delta.3.43 ppm and .delta.3.55
ppm.
[0528] Therefore, these calculation results show an obvious
transition of a chemical shift between Cl.sup.- ion attachment and
detachment.
5.2) Discussion about Measurable Range in Present Exemplary
Embodiment
[0529] If a chlorine ion Cl.sup.- is attached to PCLN or SMLN on an
outside layer of a cell membrane at the time when a neuron fires an
action potential, an NMI spectrum reaches its peak in a range from
.delta.3.43 ppm to .delta.3.55 ppm temporarily (during the action
potential), and a peak area in a range from .delta.2.49 ppm to
.delta.2.87 ppm must be decreased by an amount corresponding to the
peak area in the range from .delta.3.43 ppm to .delta.3.55 ppm.
[0530] Accordingly, in another applied embodiment of the present
exemplary embodiment, a temporary increment of the peak in the
range from .delta.3.43 ppm to .delta.3.55 ppm on the NMI spectrum
or a temporary decrement of the peak in the range from .delta.2.49
ppm to .delta.2.87 ppm on the NMI spectrum is measured so as to
measure an action potential phenomenon.
[0531] A value calculated according to a computer simulation often
has some difference to an actual result of measurement. The
difference is estimated to be about 0.45 to 0.49 ppm. In view of
this, an applied embodiment of the present exemplary embodiment
measures a time dependent variation (a temporary increase and
decrease) of the peak area (or a peak height) in the range from
.delta.2.0 ppm (2.49-0.49) to .delta.4.0 ppm (3.55+0.45) on the NMI
spectrum.
[0532] However, the applied embodiment of the present exemplary
embodiment is not limited to the measurement of a neuronal action
potential, but the present exemplary embodiment is applicable to
measurement of rapid dynamical life activity changing in a life
object by detecting a temporary increase or decrease (a time
dependent variation) of a peak in a particular region on the NMI
spectrum.
[0533] The reason is as follows: judging from the explanation in
section 4.7, a phenomenon that a dynamical life activity in a life
object changes in a short time (a reaction velocity is fast) often
causes a change of a magnetic screening effect due to molecular
orbitals located around the proton change.
[0534] Further, this another applied embodiment has a large feature
in that a change of molecular state in water is detected to measure
life activities. This another applied embodiment has a technical
device to detect a particular change of molecular state under
water, and this technical device is based on detecting spectrum
peaks which are different from specific peaks corresponding to one
or more water molecules in the NMR spectrum.
[0535] It is said that a chemical shift value of a hydrogen nucleus
constituting a single water molecule is in a range from .delta.0.4
ppm to .delta.1.55 ppm, and a chemical shift value due to a
hydrogen bond between water molecules is .delta.4.7 ppm (R. M.
Silvestein & F. M. Webster: Spectrometric Identification of
Organic Compounds, 6th edition (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998)
see Chapter 4).
[0536] An electronegativity of an oxygen atom related to the
hydrogen bond between water molecules is large, which follows
fluorine, according to the calculation result of Pauling. Thus, a
chemical shift value at the time when a hydrogen bond to an atom
except for an oxygen atom (for example, the aforementioned chlorine
ion) is formed is smaller than .delta.4.7 ppm as mentioned above,
and will be .delta.4.5 ppm or less in consideration of a margin of
0.2 ppm.
[0537] On the other hand, an upper limit of the chemical shift
value of the hydrogen nucleus constituting a single water molecule
is .delta.1.55 ppm, but should be set to .delta.1.7 ppm or more, to
which a margin of 0.15 ppm is added, so as to avoid the peak of the
water molecule. In view of the above consideration, this another
applied embodiment measures a dynamical life activity in a life
object by detecting a time dependent variation of the peak area (or
the peak height) in a range of the chemical shift value of not less
than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than .delta.4.5 ppm on the NMR
spectrum.
[0538] In this another applied embodiment, an interval of time
dependent variations to be detected in a case of detecting
dependent variations of the peak area (or the peak height) on the
NMR spectrum is not less than 10 ns (at least 2 ns or more) but not
more than 5 s as has been described in section 4.7. Alternatively,
depending on a measurement subject, the interval may be not less
than 10 ns (at least 2 ns or more) but not more than 200 ms, or not
less than 10 ns (at least 2 ns or more) but not more than 4 ms.
6] Technical Features of Detection/Control Method of Life Activity
and Measuring Method of Life Activity in Present Exemplary
Embodiment
[0539] Chapter 6 explains about basic principles and technical
features of a detection method of life activity and a measuring
method of life activity in the present exemplary embodiment.
Further, this chapter deals with an exemplary embodiment to be
commonly used even in a control method of life activity.
[0540] More specific operation using the basic principles to be
explained herein will be described in or after chapter 7.
6.1) Content of Life Activity to be Measured and Features of
Detection/Control Method of Life Activity
[0541] Table 6 shows a list of exemplary life activities to be
measured in the present exemplary embodiment. The exemplary life
activities are listed in Table 6 in order from a surface area in a
life object to an area deeper inside the life object. Further,
Table 6 also shows a detection signal category to be measured per
life activity, and a physical phenomenon generating a detection
signal and a detection method thereof.
TABLE-US-00006 TABLE 6 Signal generative physical Signal phenomenon
and detection Depth Complexity Life activity Category of detection
signal to be measured method Shallowest Sense on Detection signal
at ending of sensory neuron Membrane potential changing skin
surface (pain, temperature, mediating tactile, pressure) in nervous
system Simple Expansion Indication signal transmission of expansion
Membrane potential changing and and contraction to sweat gland by
autonomic in nervous system .uparw. contraction nervous system | of
sweat Surface temperature change on surface Temperature change by |
gland corresponding to expansion and contraction of thermography |
sweat gland .uparw. | Expansion Indication signal transmission of
expansion Membrane potential changing | | and and contraction to
capillary by autonomic in nervous system | | contraction nervous
system | | of capillary Bloodstream change in blood flowing through
Detection of oxygen | | capillary concentration change in blood | |
Local time dependent variation of capillary Absorption amount
change of | | width near infrared light in blood | | Surface
temperature change on surface Temperature change by | |
corresponding to expansion and contraction of thermography | |
capillary | | Contraction Indication signal of contraction or
relaxation to Membrane potential changing | | and muscle cell in
nervous system | | relaxation of Transmission signal to
neuromuscular junction Membrane potential changing | | skeletal in
nervous system | | muscle Oxygen or nutrition supply state along
with Detection of oxygen | | activity of skeletal muscle
concentration change in blood | | in surrounding areas | | Pyretic
action along with contractile activity of Temperature change by | |
skeletal muscle thermography | | Sense in Detection signal at
ending of sensory neuron Membrane potential changing | | muscle and
(pain, moving amount perception) in nervous system | .dwnarw.
articulation | Most Active state Indication signal transmission of
expansion Membrane potential changing | complicated of visceral and
contraction to visceral organ by autonomic in nervous system |
organ nervous system | Activity in Distribution state of activation
area in cerebral Detection of oxygen | cerebral cortex
concentration change in blood | cortex in surrounding areas |
Detection of oxygen | concentration change by fMRI | .uparw. Signal
transmission or information processing Membrane potential changing
| | activity between neurons existing in cerebral in nervous system
| | cortex Activation neuron distribution | | by fMRI | .dwnarw.
Signal transmission (signal transmission Membrane potential
changing | pathway) transmitted through axon in cerebral in same
axon | cortex | Intraspinal Internuncial signal transmission
(action Membrane potential changing | signal relay potential state)
in spinal cord in nervous system .dwnarw. transmission Signal
transmission (signal transmission Membrane potential changing in
spine pathway) transmitted through axon in spinal in same axon cord
Deepest Activity in Signal transmission or activation state between
Activation neuron distribution basal ganglia neurons existing in
basal ganglia by fMRI or limbic Signal transmission or activation
state between Detection of oxygen system neurons existing in limbic
system concentration change by fMRI Complex Activity in Signal
transmission or activation state between Activation neuron
distribution brainstem neurons existing in brainstem by fMRI
area
[0542] As can be seen from Table 6, life activities to be measure
in the present exemplary embodiment have characteristics as will be
shown in sections 6.1.1 and 6.1.3. Further, in association with
that, features of the measuring method of life activity in the
present exemplary embodiment will be described in sections 6.1.3 to
6.1.5.
6.1.1) Life Activity in Various Meanings to be Taken as Detection
Target in Present Exemplary Embodiment
[0543] The sense on a skin surface indicates pain, temperature,
mediating tactile, pressure, kinesthetic sensation or the like
detected by the signal detection area (ending) 4 of the sensory
neuron in FIG. 1. As has been described in section 1.3, the
membrane potential 20 of the ending 4 of the sensory neuron rises
to the action potential 23 temporarily.
[0544] Further, indication signal transmission from the autonomic
nervous system causes expansion and contraction of at least one of
a sweat gland and capillary. A signal transmission mechanism at
this time is basically the same as the signal transmission from the
neuromuscular junction 5 to the muscle cell 6 as described in
section 1.3 and FIG. 1. At the time of transmitting an indication
signal for expansion or contraction, the membrane potential 20
changes to the depolarization potential 22 (see FIG. 3).
[0545] This accordingly allows detection of the membrane potential
changing can be detected at the time of expansion or contraction of
each of the sweat gland and the capillary. On the other hand, a
body temperature increases locally when the bloodstream in blood
flowing through the capillary increases. The temperature increasing
around the capillary reaches the skin surface, thereby allowing
indirect measurement by a thermography. In addition to that, when
the bloodstream in the capillary changes, an absorption amount of
near infrared light in blood changes or an amount of oxyhemoglobin
or deoxyhemoglobin per unit volume changes, so that the change can
be detected by the near infrared light.
[0546] In the meantime, the thermography herein refers to a method
or a measuring device for measuring an infrared ray emitted from a
skin surface by use of an infrared camera. Here, according to a
principle of black-body radiation, a center wavelength of the
infrared ray emitted from the skin surface varies depending on the
temperature of the skin surface (the center wavelength deviates
toward a shorter-wavelength side as the temperature is higher).
Thus, the temperature of the skin surface can be expected from this
center wavelength of the infrared ray. Then, by use of the
thermography, a two-dimensional distribution of the temperature of
a measurement subject can be measured.
[0547] As shown in Table 6, skeletal muscles are distributed
relatively near the life-object surface. Particularly, facial
muscles exist right under skin. When these skeletal muscles
contract, membrane potential changing occurs (section 1.3). An
electrocardiogram measures potential changing occurring at the time
of contraction and relaxation of a striated muscle in the heart.
Here, the electrocardiogram measures the potential changing in such
a manner that electrodes are directly attached to a skin surface,
whereas the present exemplary embodiment measures the potential
changing in a "non-contact" manner. Further, the use of the
after-mentioned measuring method in the present exemplary
embodiment allows non-contact measurement of the electrocardiogram
(with clothing), which largely reduces a burden on an examinee.
[0548] Further, when such a skeletal muscle is active, a pyretic
action occurs at the same time. This heat is transmitted to the
skin of the life-object surface, so that the activity of the
skeletal muscle can be indirectly measured even by using the
thermography. Further, supply of oxygen and nutrition (energy
source) is necessary for the activity of the skeletal muscle. As a
result, the oxygen concentration change in blood (within the
capillary) around the skeletal muscle also occurs.
[0549] In an area slightly deeper than the position of the skeletal
muscle, pain or a moving amount in a muscle or an articulation is
sensed, which is also detected by the ending 4 of the sensory
neuron in FIG. 1 and causes local potential changing.
[0550] Furthermore, in a further deeper area, activity control of
visceral organs by indication signal transmission from the
autonomous nerve is performed. This is also performed by signal
transmission in the form of membrane potential changing, similarly
to the expansion/contraction control of the sweat gland or
capillary. Here, it is premised that the measurement is performed
by using insertion of an endoscope or a catheter, so that the
visceral organs are described near the surface in Table 6.
[0551] In a signal transmission pathway from a spinal cord to a
cerebral cortex via a brainstem, a limbic system, a basal ganglia
as shown in FIG. 1, a signal transmission state can be measured by
detecting a local change of a membrane potential. Particularly, as
has been described in section 2.5, if a signal path of a signal
transmitted in the axon is traced, a detailed signal transmission
pathway and its function in the body become clear as well as inside
the brain.
6.1.2) Various Detection Methods to be Applied to Detection Method
of Life Activity in Present Exemplary Embodiment
[0552] The method for detecting the change of the membrane
potential 20 (FIG. 3) by use of electromagnetic waves (near
infrared light or infrared light) having the wavelengths described
in chapters 3 and 4 based on the action potential or the signal
transmission mechanism model as described in chapter 2 corresponds
to "Membrane potential change in nervous system" as shown in the
column of "Signal generative physical phenomenon and detection
method" in Table 6.
[0553] Furthermore, the method for detecting the spectrum changing
by Nuclear Magnetic Resonance corresponding to a chemical shift
value in the range described in chapter 5 based on the action
potential or the signal transmission mechanism model as described
in chapter 2 corresponds to the measurement of "Activation neuron
distribution by fMRI" in Table 6.
[0554] The present exemplary embodiment may use other existing
detection methods as well as the detection methods initially
proposed in the explanation of the present exemplary embodiment.
That is, Conventional Technique 1 corresponds to the detection of
"the oxygen concentration change in blood" in Table 6.
[0555] Furthermore, the detection of "Oxygen concentration change
by fMRI" in Table 6 corresponds to Conventional Technique 2.
[0556] Further, "Temperature change by thermography" in Table 6
corresponds to "infrared imaging (including an infrared camera)"
and "Absorption amount change of near infrared light in blood" in
Table 6 corresponds to "near infrared imaging (applications to
authentication using a pattern of blood vessel)."
[0557] The detection methods shown in Table 6 has a tendency as
follows: in a case of detecting life activities at relatively
shallow areas from the surface at least either of the infrared
light and the near infrared light is used, whereas for detection of
life activities at relatively deep areas from the surface, Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance (fMRI) is used. In the meantime, Conventional
Technique 2 has a relatively low spatial resolution. In view of
this, for advanced measurements such as signal transmission between
neurons and information processing activities in deep areas, the
activation neuron distribution by fMRI is suitable in view of its
high temporal resolution and spatial resolution.
6.1.3) Life Activity in Life Object from Surface Area to Very Deep
Area to be Taken as Detection/Control Target
[0558] As shown in Table 6, the present exemplary embodiment
assumes life activities in a life object from a surface area to
very deep positions as detection/control targets. This requires an
extraction technique of a life activity detection signal from a
specific location in a three-dimensional space in the life object
or a selective life activity control technique with respect to a
specific location.
[0559] At a first stage of the present exemplary embodiment to
realize that, in order to perform "alignment of a
detected/controlled point for life activity and preservation
thereof" in the life object, the following operations are
performed: (1) interpretation of an internal configuration in three
dimensions (arrangement of all parts constituting the life object);
and (2) calculation of a position of a measurement subject in three
dimensions and control of the position based on the interpretation
in (1).
[0560] At a second stage, (3) "extraction of a life activity
detection signal" or "control of a local life activity" at the
position specified in (2) is performed. The first stage and the
second stage may be performed in series through time, or may be
performed at the same time.
[0561] Hereinafter, "position detection of a detected/controlled
point for life activity" performed in the operations (1) and (2) is
referred to as a "first detection." In the present exemplary
embodiment, an electromagnetic wave (or light) having a wavelength
described below is used for this first detection (which will be
described in section 6.2, more specifically).
[0562] Furthermore, the operation (3) is hereinafter referred to as
a "second detection." For this second detection, electromagnetic
waves including an electromagnetic wave having a specific
wavelength or an electromagnetic wave corresponding to a specific
chemical shift value are used (which will be described in section
6.3, more specifically).
[0563] In other words, "in the present exemplary embodiment,
detection or control of a life activity in a life object includes
`the first detection of detecting an electromagnetic wave,` and
`the second detection of detecting electromagnetic waves including
an electromagnetic wave having a specific wavelength or an
electromagnetic wave corresponding to a specific chemical shift
value` or `control using electromagnetic waves including an
electromagnetic wave of a specific wavelength,`" and the second
detection or control will be performed based on a result of the
first detection. A specific procedure thereof is performed such
that a position of a measuring/control object in three dimensions
is calculated by the first detection, and a detection signal
related to a life activity is obtained by the second detection from
the internal position thus calculated, or alternatively, the life
activity is controlled locally by illuminating an area at the
position thus calculated with electromagnetic waves including a
specific wavelength. However, the present exemplary embodiment is
not limited to the above, and may be performed such that:
[0564] [1] a position of a measuring/control object in three
dimensions is calculated by the first detection;
[0565] [2] a detection signal related to a life activity is
obtained by the second detection from the internal position thus
calculated; and
[0566] [3] the life activity is controlled locally based on the
detection signal (by changing the intensity of the electromagnetic
wave for illumination).
[0567] Thus, the first detection to perform position detection and
position control of a detected/controlled point for life activity
is combined with the second detection to perform actual detection
of the life activity.
[0568] In the present exemplary embodiment, since the first
detection to perform the position detection and position control of
a detected point for life activity is performed separately from the
second detection to perform detection or control of life activity,
a measurement section for performing the second detection (the
after-mentioned detecting section for life activity) can be fixed
to a location away from a user without directly attachment to the
body of the user. Therefore, the use can move around without being
conscious of the detection of life activity. This largely reduces a
burden on the user and greatly improves convenience.
[0569] Here, the "electromagnetic wave having a specific
wavelength" indicates the "light having a wavelength in the range
from 0.840 .mu.m to 50 .mu.m" for detection of the "membrane
potential changing in nervous system" shown in Table 6, while
indicating the "light having a wavelength in the range from 780 nm
to 805 nm or 830 nm" for detection of "oxygen concentration change
in blood in surrounding areas" in Table 6. Further, the
"electromagnetic wave having a specific wavelength" indicates
"infrared light having a wavelength of around 8.7 .mu.m" for
detection of "temperature change by thermography" in Table 6. The
reason why the wavelength should be 8.7 .mu.m is described below.
The thermography detects black-body radiation released from a
life-object surface, but a largest-intensity wavelength of this
black-body radiation depends on a released surface temperature of
the life object. When the largest-intensity wavelength
corresponding to a human body temperature is calculated, a result
thereof is 8.7 .mu.m, and therefore this value is used herein.
[0570] On the other hand, the "electromagnetic wave corresponding
to a specific chemical shift value" indicates the "electromagnetic
wave corresponding to a chemical shift value in the range of not
less than .delta.1.7 ppm but not more than .delta.4.5 ppm" as
described in section 5.2 for detection of "activation neuron
distribution by fMRI" shown in Table 6, while indicating the
"electromagnetic wave corresponding to a chemical shift value
corresponding to the change of the magnetic susceptibility" for
detection of "oxygen concentration change by fMRI" shown in Table
6.
[0571] In the meantime, in the present exemplary embodiment, the
electromagnetic wave having a specific wavelength may be detected
from electromagnetic waves released naturally from a life object.
However, since the electromagnetic waves thus naturally released
have a low intensity, it is difficult to have a large S/N ratio for
a detection signal. In order to handle this, in the present
exemplary embodiment, a life object is illuminated with the
electromagnetic waves including the electromagnetic wave having a
specific wavelength or the electromagnetic wave corresponding to a
specific chemical shift value, and the illuminating light obtained
from the life object is detected, so as to perform the second
detection. This can improve detection accuracy of a detection
signal. Further, as has been described in section 4.7, the
electromagnetic waves for illumination to the life object may be
modulated by a basic frequency in a range of not less than 0.2 Hz
but not more than 500 kHz so as to further improve the accuracy of
the detection signal.
[0572] Meanwhile, a wavelength of the electromagnetic wave used for
the first detection to set a detected point or controlled point for
life activity in the life object so as to obtain a life activity
detection signal by the second detection may be harmonized with a
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave used in the second
detection. However, in the present exemplary embodiment, the
wavelength range of both electromagnetic waves are set to different
values (that is, the largest-intensity wavelength of the
electromagnetic wave in the frequency distribution used for the
first detection is set to be different from the specific wavelength
or the specific chemical shift value included in the
electromagnetic waves for the second detection), so as to remove
interference between the electromagnetic wave used for the first
detection and the electromagnetic waves used for the second
detection or the control. In this case, color filters for blocking
light of specific wavelengths are disposed at first and second
detection openings (an entry port of the signal detecting section),
so as to prevent the electromagnetic wave used for the first
detection from entering into to the second detection side and vice
versa.
[0573] A specific method in the present exemplary embodiment in
which the electromagnetic waves for the first detection and the
second detection or control are set to have different wavelengths
is such that: a position of a measurement subject in three
dimensions is detected by use of a camera having sensitivity for
visible light; by use of the aforementioned infrared radiation or
near infrared light, a water concentration distribution in a life
object subjected to life activity detection is measured by MRI, or
the position of the measurement subject is determined by use of a
CT scan; the water concentration distribution in the life object
for which a detection signal related to a life activity at the
position is detected by fMRI is measured by MRI or the position of
the measurement subject is determined by use of a CT scan; and by
use of infrared light or near infrared light, the detection or
control of a detection signal related to the life activity at the
position is performed.
[0574] Here, the terms to be used for future explanations of the
exemplary embodiments are defined as below. The same terms will be
used according to the following definitions hereinafter. Initially,
an operation of obtaining information (e.g., intensity, change in
intensity, phase amount, phase shift, frequency value or frequency
change) related to a certain electromagnetic wave is defined as
"detection." In the explanation, as described earlier, this
"detection" has two definitions, "the first detection" and "the
second detection." Further, this second detection is referred to as
"detection of life activity" in a narrow sense. However, in some
cases, the first detection and the second detection may be
generally referred to as "detection of life activity." An obtained
signal as a result of detection is referred to as a "detection
signal" and a signal obtained as a result of detection of life
activity is referred to as a "life activity detection signal" in
the present specification.
[0575] Accordingly, a signal directly obtained from a physical
phenomenon shown in the column of "signal generative physical
phenomenon and detection method" in Table 6 corresponds to "a
detection signal obtained as a result of the second detection," but
if there occurs no confusion for the interpretation of the terms
hereinafter, that signal may be generally referred to as a
"detection signal."
[0576] As described above, among all biosis activities, a biosis
activity of which a state can change over time along with a
particularly physicochemical phenomenon is included in the "life
activity." Table 6 gives an explanation focusing on the activity of
the nervous system as an example of the life activity, but the
present exemplary embodiment is not limited to that, as described
above, and all detection of activities corresponding to the
aforementioned life activities will be included in the scope of the
present exemplary embodiment. Alternatively, in the present
exemplary embodiment, "a state or a change of the state (a time
dependent variation or a spatial variation) of a life object which
is detectable by an electromagnetic wave in a non-contact manner"
may be defined as the life activity.
[0577] In the meantime, examples of the life activity focusing on
the activity of the nervous system as shown in Table 6 encompass
"signal transmission (a transmission path or a transmission state)
in the nervous system," "reflection reaction," "unconscious
activity," "cognitive reaction," "recognition/discrimination
reaction," "emotional reaction," "information processing,"
"thought/contemplation process," and the like. These certain types
of "controlled life activities of a higher degree" are defined as
"life activity information" (the symptom of a schizophrenia patient
is partially controlled to some extent, and therefore included in
the controlled life activity of higher degree).
[0578] Alternatively, "interpretable or distinguishable information
about a composite action which causes an activity (for example,
between cells)" can be also defined as the "life activity
information." Even if plant or microbial activities include some
sort of controlled composite action, the activities are also
included in the life activity information. In order to obtain this
life activity information, it is necessary to interpret a life
activity detection signal including a signal of a dynamical life
activity in the life object and to generate life activity
information. A process to generate the life activity information
from this life activity detection signal is referred to as
"interpretation of life activity." Further, a process ranging from
the acquisition of a life activity detection signal to the
generation of life activity information may be referred to as
"biosis activity measurement."
[0579] Furthermore, a part which receives light including light
having a specific wavelength with a signal associated with a life
activity or electromagnetic waves including an electromagnetic wave
corresponding to a specific chemical shift value with a signal
associated with a life activity and detects a life activity
detection signal therefrom is referred to as a "signal detecting
section." Moreover, a part in the signal detection section which
receives the light or the electromagnetic waves and converts it
into an electric signal is referred to as a "photo detecting
section of life activity" in a wide sense, and a method for
receiving the light or the electromagnetic waves and converting it
into an electric signal is referred to as a "photo detecting method
of life activity." Further, an electric detecting section including
amplification to signal processing of an electric signal obtained
by the photo detecting section in the signal detecting section is
referred to as a "life activity detection circuit."
[0580] In the photo detecting section of life activity having a
configuration as shown in section 6.3.3 section as one exemplary
embodiment, a detecting coil 84 detects an electromagnetic wave
corresponding to a specific chemical shift value (the detecting
coil 84 converts it into an electric signal). On the other hand, in
another exemplary embodiment, the photo detecting section of life
activity having a configuration as shown in section 6.3.1 or
section 6.3.2 photoelectrically converts light having a specific
wavelength (near infrared light or infrared light). In the
exemplary embodiments of the photo detecting section of life
activity, an optical system used for photoelectric conversion of
light including the aforementioned light having a specific
wavelength (and placed as a front part of the photoelectric
conversion) is referred to as an "optical system for life activity
detection."
[0581] Meanwhile, since the life activity detection signal has a
large S/N ratio in the present exemplary embodiment, there may be
used such a method in which an electromagnetic wave having a
specific wavelength (or corresponding to a specific chemical shift
value) is modulated by a predetermined basic frequency so that a
life object as a measurement subject (or a detection target) is
illuminated with the modulated electromagnetic wave. A section
which generates at least the electromagnetic wave (or light) having
the specific wavelength (or corresponding to a specific chemical
shift value) in this case is referred to as a "light emitting
section." A whole section constituted by the signal detecting
section and the light emitting section is referred to as a
"detecting section for life activity." Here, in exemplary
embodiments which do not have the light emitting section, the
detecting section for life activity corresponds to the signal
detecting section. The relationship between these terms described
so far is illustrated in FIG. 31. Specific operations and functions
of each section in the detecting section for life activity will be
described later in section 6.4.1.
[0582] On the other hand, a section which aligns a detected point
for life activity and performs the first detection to preserve the
position therein as described above is referred to as a "position
monitoring section regarding a detected point for life activity" or
just referred to as a "position monitoring section." A whole
section constituted by the "detecting section for life activity"
and the "position monitoring section regarding a detected point for
life activity" is referred to as a "life detecting section." A
signal is transmitted between the position monitoring section
regarding a detected point for life activity and the detecting
section for life activity in this life detecting section. That is,
as has been described in the beginning of this section, detection
of life activity is performed by the detecting section for life
activity based on a result of position detection by the position
monitoring section.
6.1.4) Generation of Life Activity Information from Detection
Signal
[0583] A detection signal of a dynamical life activity is obtained
by the method described in section 6.1.3. However, in order to
obtain life activity information from the detection signal, an
interpretation process of the detection signal is required. The
detection signal is compared with an accumulated data base, and
life activity information is generated accordingly.
6.1.5) Complicated Activity Calculable from Relatively Simple
Detection Signal Using Association Between Life Activities
[0584] The complexity of a detection signal of each life activity
as a measurement subject is shown in Table 6. A life activity at a
position closer to a surface of the life object corresponds to a
relatively simple detection signal, and it is presumed that life
activity information can be generated relatively easily from the
detection signal. In contrast, a detection signal obtained from an
area such as the limbic system, the basal ganglia, and the cerebral
cortex, which detection signal is transmitted from the spinal cord
via the brainstem, is complicated, and generation of life activity
information is accompanied with technical difficulty. Meanwhile, a
life activity at a shallow position is associated with a life
activity in a deep position as shown in FIG. 1. In the present
exemplary embodiment, this association is used to estimate life
activity information at a deep position from a detection signal
related to a life activity in a relatively shallow position.
[0585] As a specific example, there is a method for estimating life
activity information of a central nervous system layer 7 (FIG. 1)
from detection signals indicative of activities of the capillary
and the muscle (particularly facial muscle) shown in Table 6 (which
will be described later in section 6.5.4).
6.2) Alignment and Preservation Method of Detected/Controlled Point
for Life Activity
[0586] By use of the first detection method as described in section
6.1.3, the following describes a method in which a spatial
arrangement in three dimensions in (1) is grasped, and based on the
result, a detected point for life activity or a controlled point
for life activity (a position of a measurement subject) is
calculated in three dimensions and position control is performed in
(2).
6.2.1) Method for Setting Detection Position by Detecting
Cross-Sectional Image Including Detected/Controlled Point
[0587] The following describes a basic principle to detect a
cross-sectional image including a detected point, which is used in
the position monitoring section regarding a detected point for life
activity in the present exemplary embodiment, with reference to
FIG. 20. Note that detected points 30 for life activity described
in FIGS. 20, 21, 23, 24, 26, and 28 correspond to a target area for
life activity control to be locally affected in a life object in
the present exemplary embodiment. Light (or electromagnetic waves)
is projected via an objective lens 31 toward a wide area around a
detected point 30 for life activity, like a reflection-type light
microscope, which is omitted in FIG. 20. Then, the light (or the
electromagnetic waves) thus projected is reflected diffusely on the
detected point 30 for life activity constituted by a
two-dimensional plane including respective points .alpha., .beta.,
and .gamma., and its peripheral area. By use of this phenomenon,
the diffused reflection light on the two-dimensional plane (the
detected point 30 for life activity) including the respective
points .alpha., .beta., and .gamma. is used as detection light with
respect to the detected point for life activity.
[0588] In the meantime, in order to find (detect) a point from
which a life activity detection signal in the life object is
obtained or a point where the life activity is controlled (i.e.,
the detected point 30 for life activity), it is necessary to
interpret an internal structure on the two-dimensional plane
including the respective points .alpha., .beta., and .gamma.
(interpretation of each part constituting the life object and grasp
of an arrangement thereof) in regard to (1) in section 6.1.3.
Similarly to detection of an intensity change of light reflected
diffusely on a surface when a surface structure is grasped by a
conventional light microscope, an intensity change of the diffused
reflection light at each point on the two-dimensional plane is
measured.
[0589] However, in the present exemplary embodiment, it is
necessary to detect an image (a detection signal pattern) in a
specific cross section in the life object, which is different from
the conventional light microscope. Therefore, the present exemplary
embodiment uses a feature of a confocal system to detect the cross
section in the life object.
[0590] That is, a pinhole 35 is disposed at a rear focus position
of a detection lens 32, so that only detection light passing
through this pinhole is detected by the photodetector 36. The light
reflected diffusely on points except for the detected point 30 for
life activity and passing through the objective lens 31 becomes
non-parallel beams in the middle of an optical path 33 of the
detection light and forms a very wide spot cross section (a very
large spot diameter) at the pinhole 35, so that most of the light
cannot pass through the pinhole 35.
[0591] Accordingly, since the photodetector 36 can detect only
parallel detection light in the optical path 33 for the detection
light between the objective lens 31 and the detection lens 32, only
detection light emitted from a position of an anterior focal plane
of the objective lens 31 can be detected. Thus, by synchronizing
the detected point 30 for life activity with the position of the
anterior focal plane of the objective lens 31, a detection signal
obtained only from the detected point 30 for life activity can be
detected by the photodetector 36.
[0592] Here, a reflecting mirror (a galvanometer mirror) 34 which
can be inclined in two axial directions is disposed between the
objective lens 31 and the detection lens 32. Before the reflecting
mirror (galvanometer mirror) 34 is inclined, only detection light
emitted from the position .alpha. on the detected point 30 for life
activity can be detected by the photodetector 36. Further, when the
reflecting mirror (galvanometer mirror) 34 is inclined to the right
side, only detection light emitted from the position .gamma. can be
detected, and when the reflecting mirror 34 is inclined to the left
side, only detection light emitted from the position .beta. can be
detected.
[0593] FIG. 20 shows a case where the reflection mirror 34 is
inclined in a crosswise direction, but the present exemplary
embodiment is not limited to this, and when the reflecting mirror
34 is inclined in a front-back direction, detection light emitted
from a position deviated in a direction perpendicular to the page
space can be detected. As such, when the reflecting mirror
(galvanometer mirror) 34 performs scanning in the biaxial
directions and a light amount detected by the photodetector 36 is
monitored through time in sync with the inclination, a
two-dimensional detection signal pattern can be obtained from the
light reflected diffusely on the detected point 30 for life
activity.
[0594] In regard to (2) of section 6.1.3, the following describes a
detection method and a correction method (an alignment method) of a
displacement direction and a displacement amount of a current
detection position for the detected point 30 for life activity in a
two-dimensional direction at right angles to an optical axis of the
objective lens 31. Although not illustrated in the optical system
described in FIG. 20, a member having elasticity such as a leaf
spring or a wire is disposed between the objective lens 31 and a
fixing member so that the objective lens 31 can move in triaxial
directions. Further, three voice coils are connected with the
objective lens, and the three voice coils are partially disposed in
a DC magnetic field generated by a fixed magnet (not illustrated).
Accordingly, when a current flows in each of the voice coils, the
objective lens can move in an individual direction of corresponding
one of the three axes due to an effect of an electromagnetic
force.
[0595] In the present exemplary embodiment, the detected point 30
for life activity to become a target for extraction of a life
activity detection signal ((3) as described in section 6.1.3) is
predetermined, and a detection signal pattern obtained therefrom is
stored in advance. This detection signal pattern indicates
two-dimensional image information which is obtained as a detection
signal from the photodetector 36 synchronized with the scanning in
biaxial directions of the reflecting mirror (galvanometer mirror)
34 and which is indicative of a distribution of diffused reflection
light amount at the detected point 30 for life activity. The
objective lens 31 is disposed at a suitable location close to the
detected point 30 for life activity, and a two-dimensional signal
detection pattern (a monitoring signal) obtained from the
photodetector 36 synchronized with a biaxial-direction inclination
of the reflecting mirror (galvanometer mirror) 34 obtained at this
time is compared with the aforementioned detection signal pattern
stored in advance.
[0596] At this time, by use of a pattern matching method, a
displacement direction and a displacement amount of a detection
position between two-dimensional image information indicated by the
currently obtained detection signal pattern and an ideal position
in a direction at right angles to the optical axis of the objective
lens 31 (a center position of an image in the two-dimensional image
information indicated by the detection signal pattern stored in
advance) are calculated.
[0597] When the displacement direction and the displacement amount
in the direction at right angles to the optical axis of the
objective lens 31 are obtained as such, a current is flowed into
the voice coils integrated with the objective lens 31, so as to
align the detected point 30 for life activity by moving the
objective lens 31 in the biaxial directions at right angles to the
its optical axis. Such electric feedback is performed continually
during a detection period, and the objective lens is held at a
predetermined position (where the detected point 30 for life
activity can be measured).
[0598] Next will be described a monitor detection method of a
detected point for life activity in a direction along the optical
axis of the objective lens 31 (operations of (1) and (2) in section
6.1.3). A basic principle is such that: cross-sectional images in a
plurality of areas having different depths in a life object are
extracted by use of the feature of the confocal (imaging) system; a
pattern equivalent level with respect to cross-sectional image
information stored in advance is calculated, and a current position
in a direction along the optical axis of the objective lens 31 is
detected. A detailed explanation thereof is given below.
[0599] First discussed is a case where light emitted from the
position .alpha. in the detected point 30 for life activity is
condensed at the pinhole 35-1 as shown in FIG. 21. Light emitted
from a position .delta. which is deeper than the position .alpha.
is condensed at a pinhole 35-3 placed ahead of the pinhole 35-1,
and detected by a photodetector 36-3. Similarly, light emitted from
a position s which is shallower than the position .alpha. is
condensed at a pinhole 35-2 placed behind the pinhole 35-1, and
detected by a photodetector 36-2. A grating 37 is disposed in the
detection system in FIG. 21 to incline the optical axis so that the
placement position can be changed from the pinhole 35-1 to the
pinhole 35-3 in a direction at right angles to the optical axis. In
such an optical arrangement, when the reflecting mirror
(galvanometer mirror) performs scanning in the biaxial directions,
a detection signal pattern on a plane at right angles to the
optical axis of the objective lens 31 and including the position
.delta. is obtained from the photodetector 36-3. Similarly, a
detection signal pattern on a plane at right angles to the optical
axis of the objective lens 31 and including the position s is
obtained from the photodetector 36-2.
[0600] Meanwhile, detection signal patterns obtained from the
detected point 30 for life activity and areas at a shallower side
and a deeper side of the detected point 30 for life activity are
stored in advance. At this time, not only the detection signal
patterns on the plane including the position .delta. and the
position s obtained when the objective lens is placed at an ideal
position (where the detected point 30 for life activity can be
measured), but also detection signal patterns obtained from
positions greatly displaced toward the shallower side or the deeper
side of the detected point 30 for life activity are stored at this
time.
[0601] Then, these detection signal patterns stored in advance are
compared with detection signal patterns obtained from the
photodetectors 36-1 to 36-3 (pattern matching in consideration of a
displacement amount in the two-dimensional direction at right
angles to the optical axis of the objective lens 31), it is
possible to judge whether the objective lens 31 is currently
positioned at the shallower side or the deeper side of a designated
position in the optical axial direction.
[0602] In this pattern matching process, equivalent levels of the
respective detection signal patterns currently obtained from the
photodetectors 36-3, 36-1, and 36-2 with respect to detection
signal patterns at corresponding positions stored in advance are
calculated, and it is estimated that the objective lens 31 is
located at a place where the equivalent level is the highest.
[0603] For example, assume a case where as a result of calculating
the equivalent levels with detection signal patterns stored in
advance, a detection signal pattern corresponding to a
two-dimensional surface currently obtained from the photodetector
36-2 in synch with the biaxial-direction scanning of the reflecting
mirror (galvanometer mirror) 34 has the highest equivalent level
with respect to a detection signal pattern obtained from the
detected point 30 for life activity stored in advance.
[0604] In that case, it is found from FIG. 21 that a current
location of the objective lens 31 is too near to the detected point
30 for life activity. In the detection result as such, a current is
flowed into the voice coils integrated with the objective lens 31,
so as to move the objective lens backward along the optical axis.
When the objective lens 31 is set at a position most suitable for
the measurement of the detected point 30 for life activity, a
detection signal pattern obtained from the photodetector 36-1 in
synch with the biaxial-direction scanning of the reflecting mirror
(galvanometer mirror) 34 is matched with the detection signal
pattern obtained from the detected point 30 for life activity
stored in advance.
[0605] Even in a case where the objective lens 31 is largely
displaced from a measurement location of the detected point 30 for
life activity, if signal patterns of the objective lens 31 in case
of large displacement are stored as described above, then it is
possible to estimate a displacement direction and a displacement
amount of the objective lens 31 by performing the pattern matching
with a current signal pattern (calculating an equivalent level
between the patterns).
6.2.2) Method for Estimating and Setting Position of Detected Point
by Detecting Specific Position on Life-Object Surface
[0606] In the method described in section 6.2.1, a cross-sectional
pattern including the detected point 30 for life activity is
directly detected to find a position of the detected point. Another
embodiment proposes a method in which when a depth from a
life-object surface to the detected point is found in advance, a
position of the life-object surface in three dimensions is detected
and the position of the detected point is automatically
estimated.
[0607] With reference to FIG. 22, the following will explain a
method for detecting a relative position of a marked position 40 on
a life-object surface from the detecting section for life activity,
which is newly proposed as another exemplary embodiment (a second
principle) related to the position monitoring section 46 regarding
a detected point for life activity. It is assumed that a
life-object surface is illuminated by an illumination lamp for
general household use and light reflected diffusely on the
life-object surface 41 is used for detection. However, another
present exemplary embodiment is not limited to this, and may
include a specific light source to illuminate the life-object
surface 41.
[0608] The second principle to detect a position of a detected
point, which is shown in this exemplary embodiment, uses a
principle of the "trigonometry." That is, in the another exemplary
embodiment shown in FIG. 22, the detecting section for life
activity is provided with a plurality of camera lenses 42, and a
plurality of two-dimensional photodetectors 43 (CCD sensors)
disposed behind the plurality of camera lenses 42 and which can
detect a two-dimensional image. Light emitted from the marked
position 40 on the life-object surface (reflected diffusely from
the marked position 40 of the life-object surface) is condensed at
one point on a two-dimensional photodetector 43-1 due to the action
of a camera lens 42-1. Similarly, light is condensed at one point
on a two-dimensional photodetector 43-2 by the action of a camera
lens 42-2. Accordingly, based on projected locations of the marked
position 40 on the life-object surface, which are on the
two-dimensional photodetectors 43-1 and 43-2 and on which images
are formed, a distance 44 from surface points of an area where the
detecting section for life activity is disposed to the life-object
surface 41 and positions of the marked position 40 on the
life-object surface in a lateral direction and a depth direction
are calculated by use of the trigonometry.
[0609] Further, an exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 22 has a
feature in that the position monitoring section 46 regarding a
detected point for life activity and the detecting section 101 for
life activity are provided in an integrated manner. As a result of
such an integrated provision, if the depth of the detected point 30
for life activity from the life-object surface is found in advance,
a distance from the surface points 45 of an area where the
detecting section for life activity is disposed to the detected
point 30 for life activity can be estimated.
6.3) Photoelectric Conversion Method for Detection of Life
Activity
[0610] The following describes a basic principle of the method (the
second detection method) in (3) for extracting a life activity
detection signal from a specified position in a life object by use
of the second detection method described in section 6.1.3.
6.3.1) Utilization of Confocal System
[0611] As a first exemplary embodiment, a method using the confocal
system as well as the technical device described in section 6.2.1
is described. A basic principle of this exemplary embodiment has a
feature in that an optical principle that `light emitted from one
point in a life object to every direction is condensed again on one
point at a confocal position or an image forming position` is
applied and `only the light condensed on the one point at the
confocal position or the image forming position is extracted so as
to detect light emitted from a corresponding point in the life
object.`
[0612] One exemplary embodiment of an optical system for life
activity detection in a signal detecting section configured to
detect a life activity detection signal from a specific position in
a life object based on this basic principle is shown in FIG. 23.
Further, a theory of the optical system for life activity detection
of FIG. 23 is shown in FIGS. 24 and 25.
[0613] The exemplary embodiment in FIG. 23 shows an optical system
which can simultaneously measure life activities on three planar
regions (.delta., .alpha., .epsilon.) having different depths in a
life object. That is, in an optical system constituted by an
objective lens 31 and a detection lens 32, a two-dimensional liquid
crystal shutter 51-1 is disposed at a position of an image forming
surface corresponding to a planar region including a detected point
30.alpha. for life activity in the life object. In the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51-1, a pinhole-shaped light
transmission section 56 can be set partially as shown in FIG.
25(a).
[0614] Accordingly, among light beams passing through the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51-1, only a light beam
passing through this light transmission section 56 is
transmittable. As a result, only light emitted (reflected
diffusely) from one point at the detected point 30.alpha. for life
activity in a confocal relationship (image-forming relationship)
with this light transmission section 56 can reach a lateral
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 54-1 and a
longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell
55-2.
[0615] Accordingly, a life activity detection signal detected from
the detected point 30.alpha. for life activity constituted by a
two-dimensional plane including a point .alpha. is directly
detected by the lateral one-dimensional alignment photo detecting
cell 54-1 and the longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo
detecting cell 55-2 (the details thereof will be described later).
On the other hand, a two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51-3 is
disposed on an image forming surface corresponding to a detected
point 30.delta. for life activity which is located deeper than the
detected point 30.alpha. for life activity and which is constituted
by a planar region including a point .delta.. Hereby, a life
activity detection signal in two dimensions detected from the
detected point 30.delta. is detected by a lateral one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cell 54-3 and a longitudinal
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 55-3.
[0616] Further, a two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51-2 is
disposed on an image forming surface corresponding to a detected
point 30.epsilon. for life activity which is located shallower than
the detected point 30.alpha. for life activity and which is
constituted by a planar region including a point s. Hereby, a life
activity detection signal in two dimensions detected from the
detected point 30.epsilon. is detected by a lateral one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cell 54-2 and a longitudinal
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 55-2.
[0617] In FIG. 23, the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51
capable of automatically opening and shutting a particular region
is used for extraction of light (or an electromagnetic wave)
obtained from the detected point 30 for life activity. However, the
present exemplary embodiment is not limited to that, and a
two-dimensional modulation element using EO (Electrical Optics) or
AO (Acoustic Optics) may be used as the optical component capable
of automatically opening and shutting a particular region. Still
further, a fixed-type mechanical pinhole or slit incapable of
automatically opening and shutting a particular region, or a very
small refractor or diffraction element may be also usable.
[0618] In the meantime, as the detection and position control
methods of a location to obtain a life activity detection signal in
a life object (the operations (1) and (2) described in section
6.1.3), which methods are used together with the detecting section
for life activity (see section 6.1.3 for the definition of the
term) including an optical system for life activity detection shown
in FIG. 23, a method for "detecting a cross-sectional image in an
life object" shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 and described in section
6.2.1 is adopted.
[0619] If a two-dimensional changing pattern of diffused reflection
light amount is detected from a specific cross section in this life
object, then it is possible to find not only positions of a neuron
cell body 1 and an axon 2 in a neuron and a position of a
neuromuscular junction 5 (see FIG. 1) on the specific cross
section, but also an arrangement of a muscle cell 6 and a glial
cell (Astrocyte).
[0620] In view of this, light (or an electromagnetic wave) emitted
(reflected diffusely) from a location where a life activity is
desired to be detected on a specific cross section as a measurement
subject (e.g., a specific position in a neuron cell body or an
axon) is condensed by the objective lens 31 and the detection lens
32, and the light is extracted at a condensed position (an image
forming position or a confocal position for the detected point 30
for life activity).
[0621] A principle to detect a life activity detection signal from
a specific position in the life object by use of the optical system
for life activity detection as illustrated in FIG. 23 will be
described here with reference to FIG. 24 in detail. In FIG. 24,
light emitted (reflected diffusely) from the detected point
30.alpha. for life activity is condensed (imaged) at a spot J, on
the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51. Therefore, the
liquid crystal shutter is locally opened only at this spot so as to
form a light transmission section 56.mu. in the two-dimensional
liquid crystal shutter. Similarly, a spot .zeta. on which light
emitted (reflected diffusely) from the detected point 30.beta. for
life activity is condensed (imaged) is taken as a light
transmission section 56.zeta. in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter.
[0622] In the meantime, light emitted (reflected diffusely) from a
position .eta. different from the above spots (see the optical
paths 33 of detection light shown in a "wavy line" in FIG. 24)
spreads out greatly over the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter
51, and therefore, most of the light is blocked by the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51. Thus, only a very slight
amount of the light passes through the light transmission section
56.mu. in the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter, but the
amount of the light passing therethrough is very small. As a
result, the light is buried among noise components on the
longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 55.
[0623] As described above, by "selectively extracting light or an
electromagnetic wave passing through a particular region" in an
image forming surface or at a confocal position corresponding to a
particular cross section in a life object, it is possible to
selectively extract a life activity detection signal from a
particular position in the life object. In view of this, by
changing the arrangement of an optical element for selectively
extracting light or an electromagnetic wave via the particular
region, it is possible to simultaneously detect life activities in
a plurality of regions at different positions along a depth
direction in a life object.
[0624] In that case, the light or electromagnetic wave obtained
from the life object is split into a plurality of light beams or
electromagnetic waves by light amount, and optical elements for
selectively extracting light or an electromagnetic wave passing
through a particular region are placed on respective image forming
surfaces (confocal positions) of the plurality of light beams
(electromagnetic waves) thus split.
[0625] In FIG. 23, the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51-1
is disposed on an image forming surface corresponding to the
detected point 30.alpha. for life activity and the two-dimensional
liquid crystal shutters 51-3 and 51-2 are disposed on respective
image forming surfaces corresponding to the detected points
30.delta. and 30.epsilon. for life activity.
[0626] In the meantime, in FIG. 23, the light or electromagnetic
wave obtained from the life object is split by a grating 37 into
light beams (electromagnetic waves) traveling in three directions,
but this is not limited in particular. The light or electromagnetic
wave obtained from the life object can be split into light beams
(electromagnetic waves) traveling in five directions or light beams
(electromagnetic waves) traveling in seven directions by changing
the design of the grating 37. Further, as light amount splitting
means for splitting the light or electromagnetic wave obtained from
the life object, a half mirror, a half prism, or a polarizing
mirror or prism may be used.
[0627] The following describes a method for directly obtaining a
life activity detection signal. As shown in FIG. 24, after only the
light or electromagnetic wave obtained from a particular detected
point 30 for life activity in the life object is extracted by use
of the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51, a photodetector
is disposed on a condensed plane (a re-imaging surface) constituted
by a condensing lens 52, and a life activity detection signal is
obtained by use of photoelectric conversion. Alternatively, a
two-dimensional light detecting element (light sensing array) such
as a CCD sensor may be disposed here.
[0628] However, in a case of attempting to detect a dynamical life
activity rapidly changing in the life object (e.g., "to
simultaneously trace respective action potential changes in a
plurality of neurons through time") as the detection of membrane
potential changing in a nervous system as shown in Table 6, for
example, the CCD sensor cannot achieve a sufficient response
speed.
[0629] In contrast, in exemplary embodiments shown in FIGS. 23 to
25, one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cells 54 and 55
capable of tracing high-speed changes through time are combined in
a matrix manner so that the high-speed changes on a two-dimensional
surface can be detected at the same time and in real time. More
specifically, light or an electromagnetic wave passing through the
condensing lens 52 is split into pieces by light amount, and
respective beams (electromagnetic waves) are directed toward the
lateral one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 54 and
toward the longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting
cell 55. In FIG. 23, for splitting, by light amount, of the light
passing through the condensing lens 52, a grating 53 for light
distribution in which a 0th-order light transmittance is
approximately 0% and a ratio of a +1st-order light transmittance to
-1st-order light transmittance is approximately 1:1 is used.
However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to this,
and a half mirror, a half prism, or a polarizing mirror or prism
may be used as the light amount splitting means.
[0630] The following explains about a method for obtaining a life
activity detection signal by combining a lateral one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cell 54 and longitudinal one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cell 55 having alignment directions
inclined to each other, with reference to FIG. 25.
[0631] Photo detecting cells a to j are arranged in a
one-dimensional direction (lateral direction), and respective
signal of the photo detection cells a to j can be detected
independently at the same time. Although not illustrated here,
respective preamps and signal processing circuits are connected to
the photo detecting cells a to j independently, so that respective
high-speed changes of detection light amounts of the photo
detecting cells a to j can be monitored in parallel through time.
Since the changes of the detection light amounts of the respective
photo detecting cells a to j can be detected in parallel, it is
possible to detect a very rapid and slight change occurring at only
one place without overlooking.
[0632] Further, in the lateral one-dimensional alignment photo
detecting cells shown in FIG. 25(b), the parallel changes of the
detection light amounts in the one-dimensional direction can be
detected through time. Still further, a change of a detection light
amount at one point in a two-dimensional plane can be extracted in
combination with pieces of information on changes of detection
light amounts obtained from longitudinal one-dimensional alignment
photo detecting cells k to t, which are aligned in an alignment
direction inclined toward that of the lateral one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cells (in a non-parallel
relationship).
[0633] That is, "a plurality of photo detecting cell groups capable
of independently detecting signals at the same time (the lateral
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 54 and the
longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 55) are
disposed so that respective alignment directions of the photo
detecting cells are inclined to each other (not in parallel), and a
plurality of detection signals obtained from the respective photo
detecting cell groups (detection signals obtained from the photo
detecting cells a to j and the photo detecting cells k to t in the
respective groups) are combined in a matrix manner." Accordingly, a
high-speed change of a detection signal obtained only from a
specific spot within the detected point 30 for life activity
configured in two dimensions can be detected independently and
continuously through time. This is a feature of the present
exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 25.
[0634] In the meantime, the alignment directions of the photo
detecting cells in the respective photo detecting cell groups are
set at right angles to each other in (b) and (c) of FIG. 25, but
the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to this, and an
angle of inclination between the alignment directions of the photo
detecting cells may largely differ from 90 degree, as long as the
arrangement directions of the photo detecting cells are not in
parallel.
[0635] The following describes this more specifically, with
reference to FIG. 25. At first, it is assumed that five neuron cell
bodies are found in a detected point 30 for life activity as a
result of analysis of an internal structure as described in (1) of
section 6.1.3 performed with the use of the optical system (see
section 6.2.1 illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21. Then, the position
control described in (2) of section 6.1.3 is performed, and even if
a life object (e.g., an examinee) for measurement moves to some
extent, the objective lens 31 is also moved in conjunction with the
movement of the life object so that a location subjected to the
detection of life activity is fixed relatively.
[0636] Subsequently, as the extract operation of a life activity
signal shown in (3) of section 6.1.3, shutters are opened locally
at image forming positions on the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter 51 corresponding to the locations of the five neuron cell
bodies in the detected point 30 for life activity, so as to form
light transmission sections 56.zeta., .theta., .lamda., .mu. and
.xi. in the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter.
[0637] Then, due to the operation of the condensing lens 52,
respective light beams passing through the light transmission
sections 56.zeta., .theta., .lamda., .mu. and .xi. in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter are condensed at a point
.zeta.' in the photo detecting cell b, a point .theta.' in the
photo detecting cell d, a point .lamda.' in the photo detecting
cell f, a point .mu.' in the photo detecting cell h, and a point
.xi.' in the photo detecting cell j on the lateral one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cell 54. Similarly, respective light
beams passing through the light transmission sections 56.lamda.,
.xi., .theta., .mu., and .xi. in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter are condensed at a point .lamda.' in the photo detecting
cell l, a point .xi.' in the photo detecting cell n, a point
.theta.' in the photo detecting cell p, a point .mu.' in the photo
detecting cell r, and a point .zeta.' in the photo detecting cell t
on the longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell
55.
[0638] For example, when a neuron having an image-forming
relationship with the light transmission section 56.mu. in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter fires an action potential,
intensity of convergence light at the position .mu.' changes
instantly in response to the action potential. As a result,
detection signals having a waveform similar to that in FIG. 3 is
obtained from the photo detecting cells h and r. As such, by
knowing from which photo detecting cells in the lateral
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 54 and in the
longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 55,
detection signals having a waveform similar to that in FIG. 3 can
be obtained, it is found which neuron in the detected point 30 for
life activity fires an action potential.
[0639] Then, as will be described later, pulse counting is
performed in the life activity detection circuit and the number of
action potentials in a specific time per neuron is calculated to
detect an activation state.
[0640] The above explanation deals with the action potential of the
neuron (corresponding to the "membrane potential changing in
nervous system" in Table 6) as an example of the detection of life
activity. However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited
to this, and if a path of the axon 2, the neuromuscular junction 5,
or the muscle cell 6 is set so as to correspond to an image forming
position on the light transmission section 56 in two-dimensional
liquid crystal shutter, a signal transmission state in the axon 2
or a signal transmission state to the muscle can be measured.
[0641] In the exemplary embodiment described above, respective
sizes (aperture sizes) of the light transmission sections 56.zeta.,
.theta., .lamda., .mu. and .xi. in the two-dimensional liquid
crystal shutter are set relatively small, and a life activity per
small region on the detected point 30 for life activity such as one
neuron cell body 1 in the neuron or one muscle cell 8, axon 2 or
neuromuscular junction 5 is detected. Other applied embodiments of
this exemplary embodiment are as follows: (1) in FIG. 23, all
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutters 51-1, 51-2, 51-3 may be
disposed only at confocal positions or image forming positions
corresponding to locations having the same depth (e.g., at the
detected point 30.alpha. for life activity), so as to detect life
activities in a two-dimensional direction corresponding to fixed
locations having a specific depth; and (2) in FIG. 25, respective
sizes (aperture sizes) of the light transmission sections 56.zeta.,
.theta., .lamda., .mu. and .xi.' in the two-dimensional liquid
crystal shutter may be made larger, so that life activities in a
relatively large range on the detected point 30.alpha. for life
activity are detected. In this case, every one of the condensed
spots .zeta.', .theta.', .lamda.', .mu.', and .xi.' in FIGS. 25 (b)
and (c) includes activity signals related to a plurality of neurons
in the detected point 30.alpha. for life activity. Therefore, even
if a pulsed signal corresponding to one action potential is
detected at one of the condensed spots, a single neuron firing the
action potential cannot be specified. However, by detecting the
occurrence frequency of the pulsed signal corresponding to the
action potential in the condensed spot, an activation state in a
particular region constituted by a plurality of neurons in the
detected point 30.alpha. for life activity can be detected.
[0642] This applied embodiment makes it possible to grasp life
activities slightly in broad perspective (as compared with an
activity per neuron). An example of a specific purpose of this
detection method is activity detection per column in the cerebral
cortex.
[0643] When the respective sizes (aperture sizes) of the light
transmission sections 56.zeta., .theta., .lamda., .mu. and .xi. in
the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter are made larger, action
potential signals from neurons at positions having different depths
leak easily. Here, a thickness of the cerebral cortex in a human is
slightly smaller than 2 mm, so that there is a low possibility that
an action potential signal is obtained from a position at a
shallower side or a deeper side than the cerebral cortex in a depth
direction. Accordingly, if activities of neurons within 2 mm, which
is a thickness of the cerebral cortex, are detected in a mass in
this applied embodiment, the problem that action potential signals
leak out from the positions having different depths beyond the
range will be solved (because no action potential signal occur at
the shallower side or the deeper side than that).
[0644] Further, the cerebral cortex is constituted by columns of
about 0.5 to 1.0 mm in width, and it is said that there is
relatively a little signal transmission between adjacent columns.
Accordingly, when the respective sizes (aperture sizes) of the
light transmission sections 56.zeta., .theta., .lamda., .mu. and
.xi. in the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter are set
according to one column size (about 0.5 to 1.0 mm), an activation
state per column (e.g., an action-potential detection-frequency
characteristic per column unit) can be detected.
[0645] On the other hand, in the cerebral cortex, there are many
parts in which information processing is performed per column unit.
In view of this, the present exemplary embodiment can effectively
solve how the information processing is performed per column unit
and find its details for the first time. In addition to the
detection method as described above, the present exemplary
embodiment has such a technical device that: (3) one
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51 blocks light at an image
forming position of a column adjacent to a target column located at
a light transmission section 56 in the two-dimensional liquid
crystal shutter, so as to prevent detection of an action potential
signal from the adjacent column, and "another light transmission
section 56 in another two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51" is
disposed at the image forming position of the adjacent column, so
that an action potential signal from the adjacent column is
detected by another photo detecting cells 54 and 55; and (4) by use
of action potential signals obtained from columns adjacent to each
other by different photo detecting cells 54 and 55 in (3), cross
talk (leak of a detection signal) from the adjacent column is
removed by computing process of the signal. This yields an effect
of improving signal detection accuracy per column unit by removing
cross talk from an adjacent column.
[0646] The above explanation deals with the detection method in
which a detection range of a measurement subject is about 10 to
1000 .mu.m, which is relatively narrow area, at a corresponding
image forming position of the light transmission section 56 in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter. In contrast, in a case
where the oxygen concentration change in blood in surrounding areas
in Table 6 is detected by use of the optical system for life
activity detection as illustrated in FIG. 23, it is necessary to
set the detection range more widely. In addition, it is necessary
to further broaden the respective sizes (aperture sizes) of the
light transmission sections 56.zeta., .theta., .lamda., .mu. and
.xi.' in the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter in conformity
with the detection area thus set widely. In this case, although not
illustrated in FIG. 23, a plurality of optical systems for life
activity detection shown in FIG. 23 are provided, and color filters
for selectively transmitting light having wavelengths of 780 nm,
805 nm, and 830 nm, respectively, are also disposed in the middle
of the optical paths 33 of the detection light. Then, light beams
having respective wavelengths of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm are
detected separately, and a ratio between them in terms of detection
light amount is calculated. A detection method of life activity in
this case is performed (1) according to a time dependent variation
of the ratio in terms of detection light amount between the
detection light beams having respective wavelengths of 780 nm, 805
nm, and 830 nm, or (2) by comparing values obtained during the
detection with preliminary measured values (reference values) of
the ratio in detection light amount between the detection light
beams having respective wavelengths of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830
nm.
[0647] The above describes that the range of the simultaneously
detectable area can be freely changed from "per neuron" to "per
column" by changing the aperture sizes of the light transmission
sections 56.zeta., .theta., .lamda., .mu. and .xi. in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter. A change and common
property of a detection signal obtained when changing the
detectable area range in this way are described below.
[0648] The foregoing section 1.3 describes that "one pulse is
generated upon action potential of a neuron" with reference to FIG.
3, and the foregoing section 4.7 shows the example of the action
potential state of each of the individual neurons .alpha., .beta.,
and .gamma. with reference to FIG. 18. FIG. 73(a) shows a state in
which the action potential pulses generated for each individual
neuron shown in FIG. 18(b) are superimposed on the same line. That
is, FIG. 73(a) shows a detection signal obtained when the aperture
sizes of the light transmission sections 56.zeta., .theta.,
.lamda., .mu. and .xi. in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter are smallest. When the aperture sizes of the light
transmission sections 56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter are gradually increased, the detection signal changes as
shown in FIG. 73(b) because action potential pulses generated in
different neurons partially overlap. When the aperture sizes of the
light transmission sections 56 in the two-dimensional liquid
crystal shutter are further increased, the degree of overlap
between individual action potential pulses increases, and the
detection signal changes as shown in FIG. 73(c).
[0649] The following describes the common property of the detection
signals in FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c). Upon action potential of a neuron,
the vibration mode prior to chlorine ion attachment changes and the
anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration mode by a carbon atomic
nucleus, a hydrogen atomic nucleus, and a chlorine ion newly takes
place. As a result, a new absorption hand is generated at the
position described in sections 3.2 and 4.6.4. When an
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength included in this
absorption band is applied, the electromagnetic wave is absorbed
and the detection light amount decreases. Thus, the detection
signal changes in the detection light amount decrease direction as
shown in FIG. 73(a), in correspondence with one action potential
pulse. The detection signal obtained by combining (overlapping)
such detection signals also appears in the detection light amount
decrease direction, as shown in FIGS. 73(b) and 73(c). Since the
detection signal is very weak, the S/N ratio of the detection
signal is low. However; the use of the above-mentioned common
property can enhance the signal detection reliability. In detail,
since a detection signal associated with action potential of a
neuron always appears in the "detection light amount decrease
direction," the reliability of the detection signal (whether or not
a neuron actually fires an action potential) can be checked by
detecting the signal direction.
[0650] The detection signal amount after the combination (overlap)
in FIG. 73(b) or 73(c) changes according to the frequency of the
action potential pulse (the density of action potential pulses on
the axis of detection time t) shown in FIG. 73(a). That is, the
absolute value of the detection signal amount after the combination
(overlap) is small in a time period in which the frequency of the
action potential pulse is low, and large in a time period in which
the frequency of the action potential pulse is high. In the case of
a weak life activity in a local detection area such as a specific
column (the frequency of the action potential pulse is low as a
whole), the density of action potential pulses is low. In a local
detection area (e.g. column) with an intense hie activity (the
frequency of the action potential pulse Is high as a whole), on the
other hand, the density of action potential pulses is high, and so
the amount of change of the detection signal after the combination
(overlap) is lame. Hence, by detecting the amplitude representing
the change of the detection signal in a short time as shown in FIG.
73(b) or 73(c), h is possible to evaluate the life activity state
(activity level) in the local detection area (e.g. column).
[0651] Such "signal direction detection" or "amplitude detection"
of the detection signal has an advantageous effect of improving the
accuracy and reliability of life activity detection.
[0652] Though the above describes a detection signal obtained upon
action potential of a neuron as an example of a vital reaction, a
chemical reaction, a biochemical reaction, or a metabolic process
or its resulting physiochemical change, this is not a limit. A
detection signal similar to that described with reference to FIG.
73 is often obtained upon any type of vital reaction, chemical
reaction, biochemical reaction, or metabolic process or its
resulting physiochemical change, such as a phenomenon of
contraction/relaxation of a muscle cell (chapter 11) or a
phosphorylation process or a dephosphorylation process and its
resulting phenomenon of memory/obliteration (chapter 13)
6.3.2) Extraction of Spatial Variations and Time Dependent
Variations by Imaging Optical System
[0653] As another applied embodiment with respect to the method
described in section 6.3.1, the following describes an optical
system for life activity detection which does not require such a
high spatial resolution and which is suitable for a case of easily
(generally) detecting a life activity at a low cost by use of a
simplified optical system for life activity detection.
[0654] In the applied embodiment of the optical system for life
activity detection described below, a photodetector 36 is disposed
at an image forming position corresponding to a detected point 30
for life activity in a life object (at a location where a photo
detecting cell corresponding to a detecting section thereof is
placed), as shown in FIG. 26. An imaging lens 57 is automatically
moved in an optical axial direction in accordance with movement of
the life object (an examinee) so that the photodetector 36 always
comes at the image forming position corresponding to the detected
point 30 for life activity even if the life object (the examinee)
moves.
[0655] More specifically, when the life object (the examinee) moves
and the photodetector 36 comes off from the image forming position,
a direction and a moving amount of the life object (the examinee)
are estimated (the alignment operation corresponding to (1) and
(2), partially) by use of the method described in section 6.2.2 and
FIG. 22. If a necessary correction amount is found as a result of
that, the imaging lens 57 is moved in the optical axial direction
automatically to be corrected, as position control corresponding to
the remaining operation of (2) in section 6.1.3.
[0656] In an exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 26, the imaging
lens 57 works in conjunction with a forwarding motor (not
illustrated in the figure), and the imaging lens 57 moves along the
optical axial direction in accordance with the drive operation of
the forwarding motor.
[0657] Here, the position detection of a measurement subject as
described in FIG. 22 uses general visible light. On the other hand,
the optical system for life activity detection uses near infrared
light (or infrared light). In view of this, a color filter 60 is
disposed in the middle of the optical paths 33 of the detection
light so that the visible light used for the position detection of
the measurement subject is not mixed into the optical system for
life activity detection as noise components.
[0658] Here, assume a case where a neuron fires an action potential
at the detected point 30.alpha. for life activity. When the neuron
fires an action potential to change the membrane potential 20 as
shown in FIG. 3, light absorption in the wavelengths of near
infrared light (or infrared light) described in section 4.7 occurs
for a short time. As a result, diffused reflection intensity (or
transmitted light intensity) of light having the corresponding
wavelength at the position .alpha. decreases. As shown in FIG.
26(a), when the photodetector 36 is disposed at an image forming
position corresponding to the detected point 30 for life activity,
a life activity detection signal 58 corresponding to the detected
point 30 appears only at a photo detecting cell W located at the
confocal (imaging forming) position corresponding to the position
.alpha. in the photodetector 36.
[0659] If a neuron fires an action potential at a position .delta.
away from the detected point for life activity (e.g., a location
deeper than the detected point 30 for life activity viewed from the
life-object surface 41), the optical paths 33 of the detection
light reflected diffusely at the position .delta. (or passing
through the position .delta.) is once condensed at a position ahead
of the photodetector 36, and then large-sized detection light
having a cross-sectional spot size is projected over a wide area on
the photodetector 36. As a result, not only life activity detection
signals 58 are detected in a large range from photo detecting cells
U to X in the photodetector 36, but also the detection signal
amplitude of a life activity detection signal 58 detected from one
photo detecting cell is largely reduced in comparison with FIG.
26(a).
[0660] In view of this, only when a large life activity detection
signal 58 having a large detection signal amplitude is obtained
only from one photo detecting cell, it is judged that a life
activity on the detected point 30 for life activity is detected,
and the life activity detection signal 58 is extracted.
[0661] On the other hand, if action potentials are fired at
non-image forming positions like FIG. 26(b), the life activity
detection signals 58 detected in the respective photo detecting
cells U to X have a very small detection signal amplitude in most
cases, so that they cannot be detected and are buried among noise
components.
[0662] The above explanation deals with a case where the membrane
potential changing in the nervous system in Table 6 is detected as
the life activity detection signal 58. The present exemplary
embodiment is not limited to this, and in a case where the oxygen
concentration change in blood in surrounding areas in Table 6 is
detected, it is necessary that a plurality of optical systems for
life activity detection shown in FIG. 26 be disposed, and color
filters 60 for selectively transmitting light having wavelengths of
780 nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm, respectively, be disposed in the middle
of the optical paths 33 of the detection light. Then, light beams
having respective wavelengths of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm are
detected separately, and a ratio between them in detection light
amount is calculated per photo detecting cell.
[0663] When a life activity detection signal 58 is obtained from
the detected point 30 for life activity located at an image forming
position corresponding to the photodetector 36 as shown in FIG.
26(a), a ratio of a detection light amount from a specific photo
detecting cell changes prominently. Therefore, only a detection
signal having a prominent ratio in detection light amount, in
comparison with the other photo detecting cells, is extracted as a
life activity detection signal 58. Adversely, when respective
ratios in detection light amount are not so different between
adjacent photo detecting cells U, V, and W, they may be in the
state of FIG. 26 (b). In view of this, signals of these cells are
not extracted as the life activity detection signal 58.
[0664] Thus, (A) when detection light amounts obtained from
neighboring photo detecting cells are compared with each other and
a value (or a ratio) of a specific photo detecting cell is largely
changed (has a high spatial resolution in the photodetector 36),
only a signal component of the specific photo detecting cell is
extracted as the life activity detection signal 58. Alternatively,
the life activity detection signal 58 may be extracted (B)
according to a time-dependent variation, in each photo detecting
cell, of a ratio in detection light amount between the detection
light beams having respective wavelengths of 780 nm, 805 nm, and
830 nm, or (C) by comparing values obtained during detection with
preliminarily measured values (reference values) of the ratio in
detection light amount of the detection light beams having
respective wavelengths of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm.
[0665] Further, in addition to that, the optical system for life
activity detection as illustrated in FIG. 26 may be applied to the
temperature change measurement by the thermography in Table 6. In
this case, the optical system for position detection as illustrated
in FIG. 22 may be also used together for alignment. That is, as
shown in FIG. 26, when that part inside the life object which is
deeper than the life-object surface 41 is activated, the
bloodstream increases and the temperature of the life-object
surface 41 increases locally. A temperature distribution of the
life-object surface 41 at this time is measured, and an activation
state at the detected point 30 for life activity is measured
indirectly. In this case, the temperature distribution of the
life-object surface 41 is extracted as a life activity detection
signal 58.
[0666] In a case where at least one of the "membrane potential
changing in the nervous system" and the "oxygen concentration
change in blood in surrounding areas" is detected, a CCD sensor can
be generally used as the photodetector 36 of FIG. 26. In a case
where a local high-speed change in the detected point 30 for life
activity is detected continuously (through time), a response speed
of the CCD sensor is not enough for the detection. In this
exemplary embodiment, preamps are provided for respective photo
detecting cells 38-01 to 38-15 disposed in a two-dimensional
manner, so that detection light amounts of the photo detecting
cells 38-01 to 38-15 are detected in parallel at the same time and
a local high-speed change in the detected point 30 for life
activity is detected continuously (through time).
[0667] A configuration on the photodetector 36 in such a case is
shown in FIG. 27. A photo detecting cell group constituted by photo
detecting cells 38-01 to photo detecting cells 38-05 is a
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell, similarly to FIGS.
25(b) and (c). The photo detecting cells 38-01 to 38-05 are
individually and directly connected to respective front parts 85 of
the life activity detection circuit.
[0668] The photo detecting cell 38 and its corresponding front part
85 of the life activity detection circuit are formed in a
monolithic manner on a semiconductor chip of the photodetector 36
(by patterning together on the same semiconductor chip).
Alternatively, the photo detecting cell 38 and its corresponding
front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit may be formed
in a hybrid manner in which they are constituted by separate
semiconductor chips and disposed side by side on a surface of the
photodetector 36.
[0669] The front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit
corresponding to the photo detecting cell 38 includes a preamp and
a simple signal processing circuit (a pulse counting circuit
described in section 6.4) incorporated therein, and its output is
connected to a detection signal line 62 output from a front part
and a rear part of the detecting circuit. Since the photo detecting
cells 38 are connected to their corresponding front parts 85 of the
life activity detection circuit in the photodetector 36, a life
activity detection signal can be extracted stably and accurately
without receiving any influence of disturbance noise even if the
signal is very weak.
[0670] Adjacent to the photo detecting cell group constituted by
the photo detecting cells 38-01 to the photo detecting cells 38-05,
a photo detecting cell group constituted by photo detecting cells
38-11 to photo detecting cells 38-15 is disposed with some space,
and each of the photo detecting cells 38 is connected to its
corresponding front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit.
With the use of the photo detecting cells 38-01 to the photo
detecting cell 38-15 thus disposed in a two-dimensional manner,
each life activity occurring in two dimensions of the detected
point 30 for life activity can be detected independently at high
speed and continuously.
[0671] On the photodetector 36 shown in FIG. 27, the front parts 85
of the life activity detection circuit corresponding to the photo
detecting cells 38 are disposed in a large area. As a technical
device to prevent detection light from the detected point 30 for
life activity from being project on this area, as shown in FIG. 28,
a lenticular lens 68 is disposed in the middles of the optical
paths 33 of the detection light (between the imaging lens 57 and
the photodetector 36). The lenticular lens 68 has a shape in which
a plurality of cylindrical lens (in each of which a lens surface
partially has a column shape) are provided in line, and has a
function to locally change the optical paths 33 of the detection
light.
[0672] Here, in order to simplify the explanation, FIG. 28
illustrates only optical paths of light rays passing through a
center of the imaging lens 57 among the optical paths 33 of
detection light rays emitted (reflected diffusely or transmitted)
from respective spots on the detected point 30 for life activity.
By use of optical refraction by the lenticular lens 68 in FIG. 28,
the detection light rays emitted from the respective spots on the
detected point 30 for life activity reach the photo detecting cells
38-2 to 38-4. However, the front parts 85 of the life activity
detection circuit corresponding to the photo detecting cells 38 are
configured not to be illuminated with these detection light
rays.
[0673] In the meantime, the exemplary embodiment illustrated in
FIG. 28 employs the lenticular lens 68, so that light (or an
electromagnetic wave) from the detected point 30 for life activity
is projected not on a region where the front parts 85 of the life
activity detection circuit corresponding to the photo detecting
cells 38 in the photodetector 36 are provided, but only on a region
where the photo detecting cells 38 are provided.
[0674] However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to
this, and other polarizing elements or partial light-blocking
elements for projecting light only on a particular region in the
photodetector 36 may be disposed on the way of the optical paths 33
of the detection light to the photodetector 36. As an example of
the other polarizing elements mentioned above, a blazed diffraction
element (having an inclination in a specific region) (e.g., a
diffraction grating having a characteristic that the transmittances
of 0th-order light and -1st-order light are almost 0%, and the
transmittance of +1st-order light is almost 100%) can be used.
6.3.3) Method for Detecting High-Speed Change of Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance Property
[0675] As another applied embodiment of this exemplary embodiment,
a method for detecting a high-speed change of a Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance property is described below with reference to FIG. 29 and
FIG. 30.
[0676] When one neuron fires an action potential, its membrane
potential changes temporarily, which causes absorption of
electromagnetic waves in the range of chemical shift values
described in section 5.2 due to Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
(excitation by magnetic resonance in a hydrogen nucleus) and
emission of an electromagnetic wave based on excitation relaxation
occurring just after that.
[0677] On the other hand, when a specific region (a relatively wide
region constituted by a plurality of neurons) in the nervous system
is activated, the plurality of neurons in the specific region
repeats firing of their action potentials in a short time. In view
of this, an activation state in the specific area in the nervous
system can be detected as a life activity detection signal by using
MRI or fMRI not as a single action potential in one neuron, but as
a signal averaged in a specific time range in a specific spatial
region. Accordingly, in an alternative exemplary embodiment of the
embodiment described in section 6.3.1 or 6.3.2, a local change of
the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property in the range of chemical
shift values described in section 5.2 is detected by use of MRI
(Magnetic Resonance Imaging) or fMRI (functional MRI) and thereby a
life activity detection signal corresponding to the membrane
potential changing of the neuron is detected.
[0678] However, in this alternative exemplary embodiment, a
temporal resolution of the life activity detection signal which can
be detected has only a level equal to that of the current MRI or
fMRI. In this regard, since the temporal resolution and the spatial
resolution are low in Conventional Technique 2, a single action
potential of one neuron cannot be detected.
[0679] FIG. 29 shows another applied embodiment which can solve
this problem and detect an internal high-speed change of the
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property. In FIG. 29(a), a plane where a
(superconducting) magnet 73 and a coil 72 for magnetic field
preparation are provided, a plane where an excitation coil 74 is
provided, and a plane on which a two-dimensionally arranged cell
array 71 for detecting a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
property are arranged at right angles to each other. Herein,
similarly to the conventional MRI or fMRI, the (superconducting)
magnet 73 is used for application of a DC magnetic flux density
from the outside. Furthermore, a coil 72 for magnetic field
preparation is disposed for spatial distribution correction of the
magnetic flux density to form a uniform magnetic flux density in a
part 75 of an organism to be detected (the head of an examinee) and
for fine adjustment of a value of the DC magnetic flux density in
accordance with the chemical shift values described in section 5.2.
This coil 72 for magnetic field preparation may be used in the
conventional MRI device or fMRI device in some cases.
[0680] Here, the head of a human body is mainly assumed a target
for the detection of life activity as a target organism for the
measurement in the applied embodiment shown in FIG. 29. However,
the applied embodiment is not limited to this, and the detection of
life activity may be performed on visceral organs such as the heart
in the human body or an inside of limbs. Further, the organism is
not limited to mammals such as dogs or cats, and any organisms
including microorganisms may be set at the part 75 of the organism
to be detected.
[0681] Further, this applied embodiment has a feature that "the
part 75 of an organism to be detected (the head of an examinee) can
be taken in or out through the excitation coil 74." Accordingly, by
increasing the excitation coil 74 in size, the detection of life
activity can be performed on an inside of a large organism like a
human. This also yields such an advantage that a surface to detect
a high-speed change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property (a
plane where the two-dimensionally arranged cell array 71 for
detecting the change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property is
disposed) can be used freely. The following describes this
situation more specifically. In order to detect the life activity,
it is necessary to put a part 75 of the organism to be detected in
or out of a region where respective DC magnetic flux densities
formed by the (superconducting) magnet 73 and the coil 72 for
magnetic field preparation are distributed over, and the following
conditions are required: a) a space to provide the part 75 of the
organism to be detected is secured in the area where the DC
magnetic flux densities are distributed over; and b) a space where
the part 75 of the organism to be detected can be put in and out is
secured.
[0682] These conditions are also required even in the conventional
MRI device or fMRI device. However, in these conventional devices,
the space where the part 75 of the organism to be detected can be
put in and out is often provided at a detecting-coil side (not
illustrated in FIG. 29), which is provided for detection of a
change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property.
[0683] In the meantime, as shown in the applied embodiment of FIG.
29, there is no space where the part 75 of the organism to be
detected can be put in and out, on a plane on a side of the
(superconducting) magnet 73 for generating a DC magnetic flux
density. If the space where the part 75 of the organism to be
detected is put in and out is set at a side of a plane to detect a
change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property (the plane where
the two-dimensionally arranged cell array 71 for detecting a change
of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property is disposed) like in the
conventional MRI device or fMRI device, the physical arrangement on
this plane is largely restricted, thereby largely impairing the
degree of freedom of the detection method of a change of the
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property. In contrast, the arrangement
in FIG. 29 largely improves the degree of freedom of the detection
method of a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property.
[0684] However, since a length (circumference) around the
excitation coil 74 is longer in the arrangement of FIG. 29, a
resistance value in the excitation coil 74 rises, thereby causing a
problem that a frequency characteristic of the excitation coil 74
easily decreases. This applied embodiment has such a technical
device that the cross section of a wire rod constituting the
excitation coil 74 is widened so as to decrease the resistance
value, thereby solving the above problem.
[0685] The applied embodiment illustrated in FIG. 29 has the
following features: a plurality of detection cells 80 for detecting
a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property, each including
a detecting coil 84 for detection of life activity having a
circumference shorter than that of the excitation coil 74, are
disposed two-dimensionally in an array form (see FIG. 29(a)); and
one detection cell 80 for detecting a change of the Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance property is configured to include a front part
85 of the life activity detection circuit, so as to have an
amplification function (a preamp function) of a detection signal
obtained from the detecting coil 84 and a signal processing
function equivalent to a front-part level (see FIG. 29(b)).
[0686] Here, when a single circumference of the detecting coil 84
is set to be shorter than the excitation coil 74, the resistance
value in the detecting coil 84 is reduced and a frequency
characteristic of the signal detection by the detecting coil 84 is
improved. This makes it possible to detect a life activity
detection signal changing at high speed more accurately.
[0687] In the meantime, since a preamp is provided outside a
detecting coil (not illustrated in FIG. 29) in the conventional MRI
device or fMRI device, disturbance noises are mixed in through a
cable between the detecting coil and the preamp. On the other hand,
in this applied embodiment, one detection cell 80 for detecting a
change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property is configured to
have the preamp function to a detection signal obtained from each
detecting coil 84 and the signal processing function equivalent to
the front-part level, so that the mixture of disturbance noises is
reduced and a life activity detection signal can be obtained stably
and accurately.
[0688] This feature is described below, more specifically. As shown
in FIG. 29(a), two-dimensionally arranged cell arrays 71 for
detecting a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property,
which is one type of a life activity detection signal, are disposed
at both of a shallower side (not illustrated) and a deeper side of
a part 75 of an organism to be detected (the head of an examinee),
on the page space. In each of the two-dimensionally arranged cell
arrays 71 for detecting a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
property, detection cells 80 for detecting a change of the Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance property, each having a configuration as
illustrated in FIG. 29(b), are arranged two-dimensionally so as to
form an array configuration.
[0689] Here, as shown in FIG. 29(b), a power line and ground line
81 to be provided in a front part 85 of the life activity detection
circuit and a transmission line 82 for system clock+time stamp
signal are disposed so as to be at right angles to the detecting
coil 84. The reason is as follows: such an arrangement prevents not
only transmission signals (a system clock and a time stamp signal)
flowing through the transmission line 82 for system clock+time
stamp signal from leaking to the detecting coil 84, but also the
power line and ground line 81 from affecting the detecting coil 84
adversely. On the other hand, in this applied embodiment, a timing
of detection of a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property
(detection of life activity) is switched into an output timing of a
life activity detection signal output from the front part 85 of the
life activity detection circuit and vice versa, thereby improving
detection accuracy of the detection of a change of the Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance property (detection of life activity).
Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 29(b), if the output line 83 for a
life activity detection signal is disposed at right angles to the
detecting coil 84, it is possible to prevent an output signal from
the output line 83 for a life activity detection signal from
leaking to the detecting coil 84. This makes it possible to
simultaneously perform the detection of a change of the Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance property (detection of life activity) and the
output of a life activity detection signal, so that the detection
of a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property (detection
of life activity) can be performs over a long period of time.
[0690] When one neuron fires an action potential, its membrane
potential changes temporarily, which causes absorption and emission
of an electromagnetic wave corresponding to the chemical shift
value described in section 5.2. An absorption/emission
characteristic of the electromagnetic wave changes in accordance
with the action potential pattern of FIG. 3, and its change signal
appears in the detecting coil 84.
[0691] Although omitted in FIG. 29(b), an end part of this
detection coil 84 is directly connected to a preamp in the front
part 85 of the life activity detection circuit. Accordingly, when a
life activity detection signal corresponding to the action
potential pattern occurring in one neuron appears in the detecting
coil 84, the life activity detection signal is amplified by the
preamp. The signal thus amplified passes through a band-pass filter
(or a detector circuit) tuned up with electromagnetic wave
frequencies supplied from an excitation coil 74 in the front part
85 of the life activity detection circuit so that only an
electromagnetic wave component corresponding to the chemical shift
value is taken out, and the signal is converted into a digital
signal by an A/D converter (Analog to Digital Converter) and
temporarily stored in a memory section. The S/N ratio of the
detection signal is largely improved due to the operation of the
band-pass filter (or the detector circuit) as such. However, this
detection signal is very weak, and therefore is subjected to signal
processing (front-part processing) to increase the detection
accuracy more in the front part 85 of the life activity detection
circuit.
[0692] That is, since an action potential pattern to occur in a
neuron is determined in advance as shown in FIG. 3, the action
potential pattern corresponding to that is stored in the front part
85 of the life activity detection circuit. Then, a pattern matching
calculation is performed between this detection pattern
corresponding to the action potential stored in advance and a
detection signal temporarily stored in the memory section (note
that standardization processing of an amplitude value is performed
at this time) at different checking timings. When a calculation
result of the pattern matching is larger than a specific value, it
is considered that an action potential of the neuron has occurred,
and a "detection time" and a "detection amplitude value" are
temporarily stored in the memory.
[0693] As has been described in section 1.3, the term 24 of nerve
impulse in FIG. 3 is about 0.5 to 4 ms. Accordingly, in order to
perform the signal processing on this change accurately and
efficiently during the term, it is desirable that a system clock
frequency transmitted in the transmission line 82 for system
clock+time stamp signal in FIG. 29(b) be in a range from 10 kHz to
1 MHz. A time stamp signal is given as a counter value incremented
by 1 per each clock along this system clock frequency ("1" is added
per each system clock). Further, this time stamp signal (this
binary counter value is synchronized with the timing of the system
clock and transferred along NRZI (Non Return to Zero Inverting))
and the system clock repeated specific number of times are arranged
alternately through time and transferred. A time when a top bit of
this time stamp signal has arrived at the front part 85 of the life
activity detection circuit is taken as a "time indicated by the
time stamp signal" and all the detection cells 80 for detecting a
change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property are synchronized
with this time.
[0694] Initially, in the front part 85 of the life activity
detection circuit, the "detection time" and the "detection
amplitude value" of the action potential of the neuron are
temporarily stored in the memory in response to a transmission
signal from the transmission line 82 for system clock+time stamp
signal. The information thus stored in the memory for a specific
period of time is output to the output line 83 for a life activity
detection signal at a timing designated from the outside.
[0695] Here, in the output line 83 for a life activity detection
signal, an output timing is assigned to each detection cell 80 for
detecting a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property, and
the signal temporarily stored in the memory is transmitted over the
output line 83 for a life activity detection signal at the timing
thus designated in advance.
[0696] As such, signals from all the detection cells 80 for
detecting a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property
collected in the output line 83 for a life activity detection
signal are used for: (a) achievement of high accuracy and high
reliability of a detection signal based on a statistic process; and
(b) calculation of an action-potential firing (or activated) area
in a life object. The above (a) and (b) are performed in a rear
part (not illustrated in the figure) of the life activity detection
circuit.
[0697] The following describes the former process at first. Every
signal from all the detection cells 80 for detecting a change of
the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property includes a "detection time"
of an action potential. Accordingly, when an action potential can
be detected precisely, a detection signal of the action potential
is obtained from a neighboring detection cell 80 for detecting a
change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property at the same
timing.
[0698] Therefore, if no detection signal of the action potential is
obtained from the neighboring detection cell 80 for detecting a
change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property at this timing,
it is considered that there occurs "false detection" in a specific
front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit, which is then
removed from detection targets. By performing a comparison process
on signals (detection times of action potentials) obtained from
such a plurality of detection cells 80 for detecting a change of
the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property, higher accuracy and higher
reliability of the detection signal can be achieved.
[0699] With reference to FIG. 30, the following describes a
calculation method of an action-potential firing (or activated)
area in a life object, which calculation method is performed by a
rear part of the life activity detection circuit. When an action
potential is fired by a neuron at a position .alpha. in a part 75
of an organism to be detected (the head of an examinee), a
detection signal can be obtained from each spot within a
two-dimensionally arranged cell array 71 for detecting a change of
the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property. According to the
electromagnetics, a detected amplitude value of the detection
signal obtained from each spot within the two-dimensionally
arranged cell array 71 for detecting a change of the Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance property can correspond to an intensity
distribution of a magnetic field formed by a dipole moment (point
magnetic charge) at the position .alpha..
[0700] That is, the detected amplitude value of the signal obtained
from each spot (.pi., .rho., .sigma., .upsilon., .psi.) within the
two-dimensionally arranged cell array 71 for detecting a change of
the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property is inversely proportional
to a square of a distance (r.sub..pi. r.sub..rho., r.sub..sigma.,
r.sub..upsilon., r.sub..psi.) from each spot to the position
.alpha.. In view of this, after smoothing "detected amplitude
values" at the same "detection time" obtained from respective
detection cells 80 for detecting a change of the Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance property so as to remove spike noise components, the
relationship illustrated in FIG. 30 is used. As a result, it is
possible to estimate an activated area in the part 75 of the
organism to be detected (the head or the like of the examinee).
[0701] The estimation of an activated area corresponds to the
extraction of a life activity detection signal in (3) of section
6.1.3. Accordingly, it is necessary to align an extraction location
of a life activity detection signal or to identify the extraction
location as described in (1) and (2) of section 6.1.3. For this
operation, it is necessary to measure, in advance, an internal
water concentration distribution pattern or an internal fat
concentration distribution pattern according to the conventional
MRI detection method by use of the signal detecting section
described in FIG. 29 or the conventional MRI device. Subsequently,
an image pattern obtained by the conventional MRI detection method
and an extraction result of the life activity detection signal are
combined, and alignment (identification of a location) of an
activated area (or a region where action potentials are fired
frequently) is performed.
[0702] Then, from the rear part of the life activity detection
circuit provided in the signal detecting section (see section 6.1.3
about the definitions of the terms), "a signal of an internal
activated area (a signal of a location and a range of an activated
region)," "a signal of action-potential numbers per area during
each setting term," "an internal signal transmission pathway based
on a firing rate in an activated area," or the like is output as a
life activity detection signal.
6.3.4) Method for Reducing Interference from Other Adjacent Life
Activity Detection Systems
[0703] In the measuring method of life activity in the present
exemplary embodiment, an amount of a life activity detection signal
is very small, and in addition, it is necessary to illuminate a
measurement subject with illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection (see FIG. 31 or FIG. 32). Therefore, in a case where a
plurality of different detecting sections 101 for life activity are
disposed at positions in proximity to each other, there is such a
risk that a detecting section 101 for life activity may be affected
(interfered) by illuminating light 115 for life activity detection
from another detecting section 101 for life activity. In order to
reduce this interference, in this exemplary embodiment, each
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection has
identification information, so that a degree of influence from
other illuminating light 115 for life activity detection is
measurable quantitatively. This makes it possible to offset
interference by a computing process at a detection side (in the
signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part in FIG.
34), thereby yielding an effect that high accuracy for the
detection of life activity can be secured even if there are some
physical interference to each other.
[0704] The following describes the method in which each
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection is configured to
have identification information. As has been described in the
explanation in section 4.7 (about the detection of a weak signal)
and in section 6.4.1 with reference to FIG. 31 or 32, intensity
modulation is performed on the illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection with the use of the modulation signal generator
113 or 118 in advance. The present exemplary embodiment employs, as
the modulation method, a modulation method called MSK (Maximum
Shift Keying) using a (time-serial) combination of only two types
of frequencies, i.e., a basic frequency and a frequency of 1.5
times the basic frequency. FIG. 55(a) shows the method in which
each illuminating light 115 for life activity detection is
configured to have identification information by use of MSK. An
illuminating time of the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection is divided into a term 440 of detection of life activity
and an inherent information expressing term 441 of a detecting
section for life activity. Here, during the term 440 of detection
of life activity, the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection 115 is subjected to intensity modulation with a single
frequency of only a basic frequency and with constant amplitude,
and life activities are detected during this term. Further, in a
case where a life activity is controlled, a measurement subject is
illuminated with strong and continuous illuminating light 115 for
life activity detection (linear illuminating light without
intensity modulation) only for a specific period within in this
term 440 of detection of life activity. On the other hand, during
the inherent information expressing term 441 of a detecting section
for life activity, the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection is modulated based on MSK. Even in a case where a life
activity is controlled, the intensity and the modulation method of
the illuminating light 115 for life activity detection are
maintained to be the same as during the term of detection. Hereby,
the illuminating light 115 for life activity detection can be
stably detected during the inherent information expressing term 441
of detecting section for life activity. Thus, the identification
information of each illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection can be recognized regardless of the detection term or the
control term of life activity.
[0705] A modulation state of the illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection during the inherent information expressing term
441 of a detecting section for life activity is shown in FIG.
55(b). An intensity modulation period at a frequency of 1.5 times
the basic frequency continues during a period of a synchronous
signal 451. Accordingly, a start timing of the inherent information
expressing term 441 of a detecting section for life activity can be
easily found by detecting this synchronous signal 451. After that,
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection is generated
based on an originally combinatorial pattern of: the basic
frequency, which is based on the MSK frequency and corresponds to
ID information 452 for manufacturer identification of the detecting
section for life activity; and a frequency of 1.5 times the basic
frequency. By identifying the ID information 452 for manufacturer
identification of the detecting section for life activity, the
detecting section 101 for life activity can identify a manufacturer
which manufactured a detecting section for life activity disposed
at an adjacent position. Subsequently, an original combinational
pattern of a basic frequency indicative of identification
information 453 of a corresponding detecting section for life
activity and a frequency of 1.5 times the basic frequency appears.
In this exemplary embodiment, a production number of a
corresponding detecting section for life activity is shown as the
identification information 453, but alternatively, if all detecting
sections for life activity have different patterns (information),
the identification information 453 may have other information
except the production number. Original information 454 related to a
manufacture, which can be set by the manufacturer subsequently to
the identification information 453, can be shown by the MSK
modulation.
[0706] Next will be explained a method to remove influence in terms
of signal processing in case where interference occurs between
different detecting sections for life activity. Light emissions are
not synchronized between the different detecting sections for life
activity, and therefore inherent information expressing terms 441
of the detecting sections for life activity come at different
timings. In a term 440 of detection of life activity during which
one detecting section for life activity emits light, an inherent
information expressing term 441 of another detecting section for
life activity in another device may also occur at the same time. In
this case, during the term 440 of detection of life activity during
which the one detecting section for life activity emits light,
modulated light with a frequency of 1.5 times the basic frequency
leaks therein, so that interference of the light can be found
immediately. Further, during a period of a synchronous signal 451,
intensity modulation is continued with the frequency of 1.5 times
the basic frequency, so that a leakage level (interference level)
can be detected accurately by comparing amplitude values at
respective frequencies after the spectrum analysis. A computing
process is performed in a signal processing operation section 143
at a rear part as illustrated in FIG. 34 based on the detection
result, thereby largely removing the influence from other detecting
sections 101 for life activity. Thus, when each illuminating light
115 for life activity detection is configured to have
identification information as illustrated in FIG. 55, the life
activity can be detected stably and highly accurately even if
interference occurs from other detecting sections 101 for life
activity.
6.3.5) Optical System Employed when Performing Life Activity
Detection Using CARS Light
[0707] The foregoing section 4.8 describes that CARS
microspectroscopy can be used as an applied embodiment. The
following describes an optical system employed in such a case. As
described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-222531,
Stokes light (CARS light) used for detection is emitted in a highly
directional beam. Accordingly; a structure in which a signal
detecting section 103 is placed on the opposite side of a part
(e.g. the examinee's head) 600 of an organism to be
detected/controlled to the illuminating light incoming direction is
employed as shown in FIG. 77. An example of a concrete optical
structure in the signal detecting section 103 is the structure
shown in FIG. 23. The above-mentioned optical arrangement enables a
deep location in the part (e.g. the examinee's head) 600 of the
organism to be detected/controlled, to be set as a
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity. In such a case, however, a wavefront aberration occurring
in the part (e.g. the examinee's head) 600 of the organism to be
detected/controlled causes a phenomenon that an electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity is difficult to be
condensed. To solve this problem, a detecting section 842 of the
amount of wavefront aberration occurring in the life object and a
wavefront aberration correcting element 844 are included in the
applied embodiment shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 79 shows a method of
detecting the amount of wavefront aberration in fee detecting
section 842 of the amount of wavefront aberration occurring in the
life object. A part of Stokes light (CARS light) returning after
being reflected at a position .alpha. in the detected/controlled
point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity is
collected by the objective lens 31. After this, only Stokes light
(CARS light) is allowed to pass through while pump light is blocked
by a color filter 851. Only Stokes light (CARS light) from the
position .alpha. is then extracted by a pinhole 853 provided in an
image forming surface corresponding to the position .alpha. formed
by the combination of the objective lens 31 and a condensing lens
852-1. The extracted Stokes light (CARS light) is wavefront-divided
by a had mirror 853-1, and only a center part of a beam cross
section of one wavefront-divided light is extracted by an aperture
854. Since the wavefront is relatively uniform in a small area in
the beam cross section, this light is expanded by a beam expander
856 and used as wavefront reference light. The light is then
synthesized with the other wavefront-divided light by a half mirror
853-2 so that they interfere with each other Here, a mirror 857-2
placed in the optical path of the other light is slightly inclined
to make adjustment for better interference between both light. As a
result, an interference pattern is observed on a CCD camera 858.
The amount of wavefront aberration of Stokes light (CARS light) can
be detected from this interference pattern. The interference
pattern is obtained here, because Stokes light (CARS light) has a
coherent property. In FIG. 79, only the center part of the beam
cross section of the one light wavefront-divided by the half mirror
853-1 is put to use, through the aperture 854. Accordingly, the
ratio of the amount of transmission light and the amount of
reflection light in the half mirrors 853-1 and 853-2 is
appropriately set so that both light are approximately equal in
light amount upon synthesis. In the wavefront aberration correcting
element 844 shown in FIG. 77, liquid crystals are arranged in a
two-dimensional matrix as in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter described with reference to FIG. 25. The liquid-crystal
molecular orientation is controlled by applying an individual
voltage to each cell in the matrix, with it being possible to
correct the wavefront aberration.
[0708] Especially, since the surface of the part (e.g. the
examinee's head) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled has
fine irregularities, not only a particularly large wavefront
aberration occurs when the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity enters this incidence surface
but also a large amount of light of the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity is lost due to light
scattering here. To prevent the wavefront aberration and the light
amount loss here, a member 841 for preventing light scattering on
the surface of the organism is formed on the surface of the pan
(e.g. the examinee's head) 600 of the organism in the present
applied embodiment. For example, the member 841 for preventing
light scattering on the surface of the organism is made of gelatin,
and applied to the surface of the part (e.g. the examinee's head)
600 of the organism in a liquid state and fixed so as to have a
flat surface. The member 841 for preventing light scattering on the
surface of the organism is not limited to gelatin. For instance,
facial masks (which can be easily peeled off after solidification)
used for facials for women may be used
[0709] This optical system for wavefront aberration
detection/correction is not limited to life activity detection
using Stokes light (CARS light), and may be used for, for example,
the optical system for detection/control shown in FIG. 23, 26, 66,
or 67. In such a case, it is desirable to use coherent light such
as laser light as the illuminating light 115 for hie activity
detection or the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity.
[0710] In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-222531,
Stokes light (CARS light) including light of a plurality of
wavelengths is generated using photonic crystal fiber 831. In die
present applied embodiment, on the other hand, only light of two
wavelengths corresponding to pump light and Stokes light shown in
FIG. 76 are applied. This has an advantageous effect of reducing
the total amount of illumination light to reduce any risk of damage
in dm detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for
life activity, and also eliminating any interference or adverse
effect by other unwanted wavelength light to enhance the efficiency
and reliability of detection or control To achieve this, a
composite color filter 835 is placed in the optical path. The
composite color filter 835 has a property shown in FIG. 78(d) by
overlapping color filters having different optical properties
(wavelength dependences of light transmittance 823) shown in FIGS.
78(a) to 78(c), thus allowing only light of two wavelengths
corresponding to pump light and Stokes light to pass through.
[0711] As described in section 4.8, a hie activity of only a
specific local area in the life object can be efficiently and
stably detected through the use of the nonlinear optical property
of the emission of Stokes light (CARS light), in detail, applying
pump light and Stokes light (CARS light) only to a specific neuron
in the brain enables detection of only the neuron's activity
(action potential, etc.). A concrete method is described below,
with reference to FIG. 77. In die two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutters 51-1, 51-2, and 51-3 in FIG. 77, die light transmission
section 56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter can be
formed at an arbitrary position as shown in FIG. 25. Here, the
position of the light transmission section 56 in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter corresponds to, for example,
the position of each predetermined neuron on a plane .alpha. in the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity which is in an image forming (confocal) relationship. The
preset applied embodiment further has a structure capable of
simultaneously detecting the activity (action potential, etc.) of
each neuron situated on a plane .epsilon. and a plane .delta.
different in the depth direction in the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity. That is, lenses
837-1, 837-2, and 837-3 are arranged at different positions in the
optical axis direction in relation to the positions of the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutters 51-1, 51-2, and 51-3, to
enable image formation for each detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity that differs in
the depth direction in the pan (e.g. die examinee's head) 600 of
the organism to be detected/controlled. The signal detecting
section 103 can detect the activity (action potential, etc.) in the
corresponding neuron position, as shown in FIG. 23. Stokes light
(CARS light) reflected at a half mirror 836-2 and passing through
the optical axis center of the lens 837-2 in FIG. 77 is used for
detecting the amount of wavefront aberration. Accordingly, an
opening is formed through the center part of the two-dimensional
liquid crystal shutter 51-2 to always allow the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity to pass through,
and a quarter wave length plate 840 and a polarizing beam splitter
839 are combined so that Stokes light (CARS light) used for
detecting the amount of wavefront aberration efficiently travels to
the detecting section 842 of the amount of wavefront aberration
occurring in the life object.
[0712] Though the structure capable of simultaneously detecting the
hie activities on the planes .epsilon., .alpha., and .delta.
different in the depth direction in the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity by the three
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutters 51-1, 51-2, and 51-3 and
the three lenses 837-1, 837-2, and 837-3 is shown in FIG. 77, this
is not a limit. The life activities on more than three planes can
be simultaneously detected by increasing the number of lenses 837
corresponding to two-dimensional liquid crystal shutters 51.
[0713] The following describes a detection signal obtained from one
photo detecting cell 38 in the signal detecting section 103 in FIG.
77, The light emission in the light emitting component 111 needs to
be not continuous light emission but pulsed light emission, as
described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No 2009-222531.
A raw detection signal obtained from the photo detecting cell 38 as
a result is a pulsed signal as shown in FIG. 80(a). The detection
signal described in section 6.3.1 with reference to FIG. 73 changes
in the detection light amount decrease direction. On the other
hand, the detection signal in FIG. 80(a) changes in the Stokes
light amount (CARS light amount) increase direction. A signal
change direction 863 in FIG. 80(a) is therefore opposite to that in
FIG. 73
[0714] Since this pulsed detection signal changes at very high
speed, it is hard to be handled in signal processing. Hence, in the
present applied embodiment an edge (peak or bottom) detection
circuit 874 shown in FIG. 80(c) converts the detection signal to a
signal (FIG. 80(b)) tracing the lower edges of the pulsed signal.
In the converted signal, too, the reliability of a DC component is
low and an amplitude value 864 changing in a short time range shown
in FIG. 80(b) is most reliable, as described in section 6.3.1 with
reference to FIG. 73. A capacitor 876 accordingly extracts only an
AC component while removing a DC component from the converted
signal as shown in FIG. 80(c), to enhance the accuracy and
reliability of signal detection.
6.4) Detection Circuit of Life Activity
6.4.1) Configuration of Detecting Section for Life Activity.
[0715] Initially explained is a configuration of the detecting
section for life activity (see section 6.1.3 for the definition of
the term) in the present exemplary embodiment, with reference to
FIG. 31. This detecting section 101 for life activity includes a
signal detecting section 103 as has been already described in
section 6.1.3. Further, depending on exemplary embodiments, the
detecting section 101 for life activity may also include a light
emitting section 102 producing illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection to be projected into a life object so as to
obtain a life activity detection signal. Alternatively, a system
clock and modulation signal generating section 104 and a
transmitting section 105 of a life activity detection signal may be
also included in this detecting section 101 for life activity.
[0716] Further, the signal detecting section 103 is constituted by
a photo detecting section 121 of life activity and a life activity
detection circuit 122. Further, the photo detecting section 121 of
life activity includes a plurality of electromagnetic wave
detecting cells (photo detecting cells or detecting coils) 87-1 to
87-5. The life activity detection circuit 122 is segmented into a
front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit and a rear
part 86 of the life activity detection circuit.
[0717] Further, respective electric signals obtained by
photoelectric conversion by the electromagnetic wave detecting
cells (photo detecting cells or detecting coils) 87-1 to 87-5 are
input into respective front parts 85-1 to 85-5 of the life activity
detection circuit. Subsequently, output signals from the respective
front parts 85-1 to 85-5 of the life activity detection circuit are
subjected to a unifying process in the rear part 86 of the life
activity detection circuit.
[0718] Here, in a case where a life activity detection signal is
obtained based on a local change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
property in a life object, the signal detecting section 103 has a
configuration as described in section 6.3.3 and FIG. 29. Further,
in this case, one electromagnetic wave detecting cell (photo
detecting cell or detecting coil) 87 in FIG. 31 corresponds to the
detecting coil 84 in one detection cell 80 for detecting a change
of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property in FIG. 29(b). In FIG.
31, one front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit is
connected to an output section of one electromagnetic wave
detecting cell (photo detecting cell or detecting coil) 87, which
corresponds to the front part 85 of the life activity detection
circuit in the FIG. 29(b).
[0719] In the meantime, in a case where light having a specific
wavelength (near infrared light or infrared light) is
photoelectrically converted by the photo detecting section of life
activity, this photo detecting section of life activity includes
the optical system for life activity detection described in section
6.3.1 or 6.3.2 (as has been described in section 6.1.3). In this
case, one electromagnetic wave detecting cell (photo detecting cell
or detecting coil) 87 in FIG. 31 corresponds to the photo detecting
cell 38 illustrated in FIGS. 27 to 28 or the lateral
one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 54 and the
longitudinal one-dimensional alignment photo detecting cell 55
illustrated in FIGS. 23 to 25. Further, one front part 85 of the
life activity detection circuit in FIG. 31 has the same
requirements as in the front part 85 of the life activity detection
circuit illustrated in FIGS. 27 to 28.
[0720] As for a signal connection method between output signals of
the respective front parts 85-1 to 85-5 of the life activity
detection circuit and inputs to the rear part 86 of the life
activity detection circuit, parallel signal lines may be input into
the rear part 86 of the life activity detection circuit as shown in
FIG. 31. Alternatively, as has been described in section 6.3.3,
such a method may be adopted that each output signal is output at a
different timing, assigned in advance to each of the front parts
85-1 to 85-5 of the life activity detection circuit on the same bus
line in advance, through time (output signals of the front parts
85-1 to 85-5 of the life activity detection circuit are multiplexed
in a time-serial manner on the same bus line).
[0721] The system clock and modulation signal generating section
104 is constituted by a system clock generator 117 and a modulation
signal generator 118. A system clock generated by this system clock
generator 117 has a frequency desirably in a range from 10 kHz to 1
MHz as has been described in section 6.3.3, but the system clock
frequency may be set in a range wider than the above. Then, based
on the system clock generated here, a modulation signal is
generated by the modulation signal generator 118. The system clock
and the modulation signal generated by this system clock and
modulation signal generating section 104 are input to the front
part 85 of the life activity detection circuit and used for
extraction of a life activity detection signal.
[0722] Next will be explained the light emitting section 102. In a
case where a halogen lamp bulb or a xenon lamp is used, for
example, for a light emitting component 111, light having a broad
waveband is emitted from the light emitting component 111.
Accordingly, in order to obtain a life activity detection signal
efficiently, a specific wavelength light beam is extracted
selectively so as to be used for the illuminating light 115 for
life activity detection. In view of this, the specific wavelength
light beam included in the range described in section 4.7 is
extracted from the light emitted from the light emitting component
111 by use of a dichroic band pass filter 116. This dichroic band
pass filter 116 to be used here may be an optical color filter or
an optical band-pass filter (using thin-film multiple beam
interference) to which the specific wavelength light beam to be
extracted is fixed, or alternatively, a spectrometer which can
change the specific wavelength light beam to be extracted (e.g.,
wavelength separation having a changed incident angle to a
diffraction grating, wavelength separation using an acoustic
optical grating, or the like).
[0723] Light passing through the dichroic band pass filter 116 is
optically modulated by the light modulator 112, and the light thus
optically modulated is projected inside a life object as a
detection target, as the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection. Here, an EO modulator (Electro-Optical Modulator) or an
AO modulator (Acousto-Optical Modulator) can be used as this light
modulator 112. Further, a modulation signal obtained from the
modulation signal generator 118 is input into a light modulator
driver for driving this light modulator 112. When the illuminating
light 115 for life activity detection is optically modulated as
such, only a detection signal synchronized with this modulation
signal can be taken out within the front part 85 of the life
activity detection circuit. This largely improves detection
accuracy and reliability of the life activity detection signal
106.
[0724] Further, the output signal from the rear part 86 of the life
activity detection circuit is converted into a predetermined format
in the transmitting section 105 of a life activity detection
signal, and is then output as a life activity detection signal 106
from the detecting section 101 for life activity to the
outside.
[0725] FIG. 32 shows another exemplary embodiment of the detecting
section for life activity. This another exemplary embodiment is
suitable particularly for the detection of oxygen concentration
change in blood in surrounding areas in Table 6. As described
above, in this case, a difference in intensity variations between
transmitted beams in a life object, which correspond to light beams
of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm, is detected. Accordingly, beams of
illuminating light 115-1 to 115-3 for life activity detection
having different wavelengths of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm are
projected inside a life object at the same time. Here,
semiconductor laser elements are used as light emitting components
111-1 to 111-3 for emitting light beams of 780 nm, 805 nm, and 830
nm.
[0726] Further, modulation signals based on respective modulation
rules are input into light emitting component drivers 114-1 to
114-3 for controlling light beams from the light emitting component
111-1 to 111-3. In view of this, the system clock and modulation
signal generating section 104 includes modulation signal generators
118-1 to 118-3 each for outputting such a modulation signal based
on a different modulation rule.
[0727] By using different modulation signals to the respective
beams of illuminating light 115-1 to 115-3 for life activity
detection as such, influence (cross talk) from different-wavelength
light beams is removed electrically, thereby largely improving
detection accuracy and reliability of the life activity detection
signal 106 in the signal detecting section 103.
[0728] In order to detect three different-wavelength light beams in
the signal detecting section 103 separately, three photo detecting
sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life activity are disposed. Here,
similarly to FIG. 31, each of the photo detecting sections 121-1 to
121-3 of life activity includes a plurality of electromagnetic wave
detecting cells 87, which are not illustrated herein to simplify
the explanatory view.
[0729] Further, in order not to detect illuminating light 115 for
life activity detection having different wavelength in each of the
photo detecting sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life activity by
mistake, color filters 60-1 to 60-3 for only transmitting
corresponding wavelength light therethrough are disposed on a light
incidence plane. Further, respective front parts 85-1 to 85-3 of
the life activity detection circuit are individually connected to
the photo detecting sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life activity.
[0730] Next will be explained another applied embodiment using the
detecting section 101 for life activity illustrated in FIG. 32.
Herein, several types of near infrared light beams having different
wavelengths are used at the same time so as to detect the membrane
potential changing in the nervous system accurately. That is, a
detected point 30 for life activity is illuminated with a plurality
of wavelength light beams at the same time so as to individually
detect the plurality of wavelength light beams obtained therefrom,
and the reliability of individual detection results is evaluated by
comparing the individual detection results with each other.
[0731] As shown in Table 4, when a neuron fires an action
potential, a near infrared light beam having a wavelength of about
1.05 .mu.m, which corresponds to the 3rd overtone, and a near
infrared light beam having a wavelength of about 2.16 .mu.m, which
corresponds to the 1st overtone, are absorbed. Accordingly, in
response to that, two wavelength light beams of a near infrared
light beam in the range from 0.840 .mu.m to 1.37 .mu.m and a near
infrared light beam in the range from 2.05 .mu.m to 2.48 .mu.m (see
section 4.7) are projected toward the detected point 30 for life
activity at the same time.
[0732] Subsequently, the near infrared light beam in the range from
0.840 .mu.m to 1.37 .mu.m obtained from the detected point 30 for
life activity, for example, is photoelectrically converted by the
photo detecting section 121-1 of life activity so as to generate an
electric signal, and the near infrared light beam in the range from
2.05 .mu.m to 2.48 .mu.m is photoelectrically converted by the
photo detecting section 121-2 of life activity. Theoretically, when
the neuron fires an action potential, pulse counting is performed
in the front part 85-1 and 85-2 of the life activity detection
circuit at the same time.
[0733] The concurrence of this pulse counting is monitored by the
rear part 86 of the life activity detection circuit. If the pulse
counting is not performed at the same time in the front part 85-1
and 85-2 of the life activity detection circuit, it is estimated
that false detection or omission of detection occurs in either of
the front parts 85. Thus, the monitoring of the concurrence of the
pulse counting in the front part 85-1 and 85-2 of the life activity
detection circuit largely improves detection accuracy and detection
reliability of the detection of life activity (detection of action
potentials in neurons).
[0734] In the above applied embodiment, near infrared light beams
having a plurality of wavelengths are illuminated at the same time,
and the plurality of wavelength light beams are detected
individually to monitor the concurrence detection. Alternatively,
in the present exemplary embodiment, panchromatic near infrared
light including many wavelength light beams may be projected toward
the detected point 30 for life activity at the same time. In this
case, a near infrared light beam in the range from 0.840 .mu.m to
1.37 .mu.m and a near infrared light beam in the range from 2.05
.mu.m to 2.48 .mu.m are detected individually.
[0735] The above applied embodiment is not limited to that, and a
plurality of internal phenomena may be detected by use of a
plurality of wavelength light beams. For example, as further
another applied embodiment, the detected point 30 for life activity
is illuminated with light beams (near infrared light beams) having
different wavelengths, and light beams obtained therefrom are
separately detected according to respective wavelengths. This
allows detection of a transmitter substance released at the time of
signal transmission between neurons as well as action potentials of
neurons, or allows estimation of a neural circuit related to the
transmitter substance.
[0736] For example, a midbrainlimbic DA pathway to transfer a
signal to nucleus accumbens from the tegmentum of midbrain is
called a reward system circuit, and causes an emotional reaction of
pleasant. At this time, dopamine is used for the signal
transmission (Hideho Arita: Nounai busshitsu no sisutemu shinkei
seirigaku--seishin seiki no nyurosaiensu--(Chugai-igakusha, 2006)
p. 104).
[0737] Further, from the same reason as the explanations of
sections 3.2 and 4.6.4, when the dopamine bonds to a receptor in a
synaptic cleft, an original vibration mode occurs, thereby causing
an original absorption band at a specific wavelength. Meanwhile,
the transmitter substances include mono-amines which the dopamine
belongs to, glutamic acid called an excitatory transmitter
substance, and Acetylcholine concerning motor control or an
autonomic nervous system. They have different molecular structures,
so that wavelengths of absorption bands corresponding to vibration
modes occurring at the time of bonding to the receptor are
different.
[0738] Accordingly, if the action potential of the neuron is
detected by use of a specific wavelength light beam among a
plurality of wavelength light beams for detection, and a wavelength
of a light beam which is largely absorbed at the same time as the
action potential or just before or after the action potential is
detected, then it is possible to estimate the detection of a
transmitter substance used for the signal transmission and the
neural circuit thereof.
[0739] In accordance with the explanation in section 5.1.1, the
detection is enabled even by use of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.
That is, when a transmitter substance bonds to a receptor in a
synaptic cleft, a maximum absorption appears at a chemical shift
value corresponding to the bonding. Accordingly, from the chemical
shift value of the maximum absorption newly appearing due to the
bonding between the transmitter substance and the receptor, the
transmitter substance related to the signal transmission and the
neural circuit thereof can be detected.
[0740] In this case, in order to increase the detection accuracy,
the detected point 30 for life activity may be illuminated, at the
same time, with an electromagnetic wave having a frequency
corresponding to the chemical shift value of the action potential
of the neuron and an electromagnetic wave having a frequency
corresponding to the chemical shift value at the time of bonding
between the specific transmitter substance and the receptor.
[0741] Next will be explained further another applied embodiment.
The above explanations mainly deals with the detection of life
activity to increase a life activity level 162 (see FIG. 36) of a
neuronal action potential according to transmission of an
excitatory transmitter substance. As further another applied
embodiment, the following describes a detection method for
detecting an activity to decrease this life activity level 162.
[0742] According to B. Alberts et. al.: Essential Cell Biology
(Garland Publishing, Inc. 1998), Chapter 12, when an inhibitory
transmitter substance such as Glycine or .gamma.-aminobutyric acid
(GABA) is transmitted, chlorine ions Cl.sup.- flow into the inside
layer facing the cytoplasm in the neuron from outside. In the
meantime, as shown in FIG. 3, since the membrane potential 20 is
the negative resting membrane potential 21 during the resting term
25, no electrostatic force works in a direction where chlorine ions
Cl.sup.- flow into the cell body. However, as shown in Table 1,
since a difference in the concentration of chlorine ions Cl.sup.-
is large between the inside and outside of the neuron, chlorine
ions Cl.sup.- are flowed into the inside layer facing the cytoplasm
by an osmotic pressure corresponding to this concentration
difference. Then, a state of hyperpolarization to decrease the
membrane potential 20 to be lower than the resting membrane
potential 21 in FIG. 3 is caused.
[0743] As shown in FIG. 4 and Table 2, PSRN and PEAM including an
amino group (--NH.sub.3.sup.+) are distributed abundantly over the
inside layer facing the cytoplasm in the neuronal membrane.
Accordingly, from the same reason as the speculation in section
2.5, it is considered that the chlorine ion Cl.sup.- flowing into
the inside layer facing the cytoplasm at the time of the
depolarization is ion-bonded or hydrogen-bonded to the amino group
in PSRN or PEAM to form a state of --NH.sub.3.sup.+Cl.sup.-. As a
result of this, as has been described in chapter 4, a new
absorption band based on the anti-symmetrically telescopic
vibration between the N--H--Cl.sup.- occurs, and as has been
described in chapter 5, a new maximum absorption (corresponding to
the specific chemical shift value) according to the Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance property based on a change of an orbital located
around a hydrogen nucleus in N--H--Cl.sup.- occurs.
[0744] Accordingly, an action state and a hyperpolarization state
of the inhibitory transmitter substance can be detected by use of
the absorbing phenomenon of an electromagnetic wave having a
wavelength corresponding to the transition between the 1st/2nd/3rd
overtones of the anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration between
N--H--Cl.sup.- or a frequency corresponding to the maximum
absorption (a chemical shift value) of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
in the hydrogen nucleus in N--H--Cl.sup.-, instead of detecting the
action potential of the neuron using the absorbing phenomenon of an
electromagnetic wave having a frequency corresponding to the
wavelength or the chemical shift value explained in chapters 3 to
5.
[0745] In view of this, by changing a setting value of the
wavelength or the frequency (corresponding to the chemical shift
value) of the electromagnetic wave for a detection target (or
projected for detection), the hyperpolarization state and the
transmission state of the inhibitory transmitter substance can be
detected instead of the action potential state of the neuron.
[0746] The detection of the hyperpolarization state can be
performed by the detection of only an electromagnetic wave of one
specific wavelength or one specific frequency. When an
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of an absorption band
corresponding to a vibration mode occurring at the time when
Glycine or GAB A bonds to a receptor or a frequency corresponding
to a chemical shift value at that time is measured as well as the
electromagnetic wave having the wavelength/frequency, the
hyperpolarization state and the transmission state of the
inhibitory transmitter substance can be measured at the same time.
As a result, the activity mechanism of a very complicated neuron
system can be known more in detail.
[0747] In addition to that, a combination of a plurality of
wavelengths or frequencies to be used for detection (or a
combination of a plurality of wavelengths or frequencies included
in an electromagnetic wave projected to the detected point 30 for
life activity for detection) makes it possible to know, for
example, a relationship between the action potential and the
generation of the hyperpolarization state by transmission of the
inhibitory transmitter substance more in detail, which can largely
contribute to solution of the signal transmission mechanism in the
neural circuit.
6.4.2) Configuration of Detection Circuit of Life Activity
[0748] With reference to FIG. 33, the following describes a
configuration of the front part 85 of the life activity detecting
circuit. An electric signal obtained by photoelectric conversion by
one electromagnetic wave detecting cell (photo detecting cell or
detecting coil) 87 in the photo detecting section 121 of life
activity is subjected to current-voltage conversion by a preamp 131
in the front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit.
[0749] Then, after unnecessary noise components are removed by a
band-pass filter 132 (or a lower-band block filter), the signal is
subjected to synchronous detection in a modulating signal component
extraction section (synchronous detection section) 133. Herein, the
synchronous detection is performed in sync with a modulation signal
obtained from the modulation signal generator 118 in the system
clock and modulation signal generating section 104, and only a
signal component synchronized with the modulation signal is
extracted. After the signal is converted into a digital signal by
the A/D converter 134, the signal is synchronized with a system
clock obtained from the system clock generator 117, and signal data
is accumulated within a memory section 135 in the front part,
sequentially.
[0750] The signal data thus accumulated within the memory section
135 in the front part is subjected to signal processing (described
later) in the signal processing operation section 136 of the front
part, and then stored within the memory section 135 in the front
part, again. A signal transfer section 137 to the rear part reads
the signal data subjected to the signal processing from the memory
section 135 in the front part in response to an instruction from
the signal processing operation section 136 of the front part, and
transfers the signal data to the rear part 86 of the life activity
detection circuit. In the meantime, the signal transfer section 137
to the rear part also has a function to transfer necessary signal
data from the rear part 86 of the life activity detection circuit
to the signal processing operation section 136 of the front
part.
[0751] With reference to FIG. 34, the following describes a
configuration of the rear part 86 of the life activity detecting
circuit. The signal data output from the signal transfer section
137 to the rear part is temporarily stored within a memory section
142 in the rear part via a signal transfer section 141 to the front
part. Although not illustrated in FIG. 34, the memory section 142
in the rear part collectively stores signal data sent from the
front parts 85-1 to 85-5 of the life activity detection circuit
(see FIGS. 31 and 32). In the meantime, the signal transfer section
141 to the rear part also has a function to transfer necessary
signal data from a signal processing operation section 143 of the
rear part to the front part 85 of the life activity detection
circuit.
[0752] Then, the signal processing operation section 143 of the
rear part reads necessary signal data from the memory section 142
in the rear part, and stores again the signal data which has been
subjected to further signal processing in the memory section 142 in
the rear part. One of the further signal processing to be performed
herein is a computing process by use of location information
(information obtained due to the first detection) of the detected
point 30 for life activity, which is obtained from the position
monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for life
activity.
[0753] Further, the signal transfer section 144 to a transmitting
section of a life activity detection signal reads the signal data
subjected to the further signal processing from the memory section
142 in the rear part, in response to an instruction from the signal
processing operation section 143 of the rear part, and then
transfers the signal date to a transmitting section 105 of a life
activity detection signal.
[0754] Here, a series of these processes are performed in
accordance with timings of system clocks generated from the system
clock generator 117.
[0755] In both of FIGS. 33 and 34, a transfer path of signal data
is shown in a "bold full line," while a transfer path of a system
clock or a command is shown in a "narrow full line."
[0756] As the signal processing performed in the signal processing
operation section 136 of the front part and the signal processing
operation section 143 of the rear part, different computing
processes are performed according to types of life activities to be
a detection target. Along with the contents shown in the column of
"signal generative physical phenomenon and detection method" in
Table 6, the following gives an outline of the computing processes
to be performed in each of the signal processing operation sections
136 and 143.
Detection of <Membrane Potential Changing in Nervous
System>
[0757] In this case, a life activity detection signal corresponding
to a change of the membrane potential 20 illustrated in FIG. 3 is
obtained. In view of this, for the life activity detection signal,
"a pulse counting number indicative of how many times the membrane
potential 20 changes in a specific unit time" is important. A life
activity detection signal pattern corresponding to the change of
the membrane potential 20 illustrated in FIG. 3 is stored
beforehand in the signal processing operation section 136 of the
front part (or the memory section 135 in the front part), and a
computing process of "pattern matching" (sequential calculation of
a pattern equivalent level) is performed on a signal data stream
stored in the memory section 135 in the front part.
[0758] When a pattern equivalent level exceeds a specific value, it
is considered that "one action potential occurred," and a pulse
counting number is incremented by 1. Here, there are some cases
where action potentials from a plurality of different neurons may
be detected on one electromagnetic wave detecting cell (photo
detecting cell) 87 at the same time. Accordingly, when it is
presumed that "one action potential occurred," a subtraction
process is performed on a life activity detection signal pattern
component detected in response to one action potential from the
signal data stream stored in the memory section 135 in the front
part, and then, the pattern matching computing is performed again.
By this process, simultaneous action potentials from a plurality of
different neurons can be detected.
[0759] Subsequently, the signal processing operation section 143 of
the rear part can add up a "pulse counting value" per specific unit
time obtained from each electromagnetic wave detecting cell (photo
detecting cell) 87, and output a total sum directly from the signal
transfer section 144 to the transmitting section of a life activity
detection signal. Alternatively, a result of statistical analysis
of a distribution of pulse counting values may be output. Still
further, an area having more pulse counting values is considered as
an "activation area" in the nervous system, so that location
information of the activation area or a time dependent variation in
the activation area (a signal transmission pathway in the nervous
system) may be output.
[0760] Next will be explained a processing method in the signal
processing operation section 143 of the rear part in which the
signal detecting section 103 shown in FIG. 32 is used for detection
of the membrane potential changing in the nervous system and which
uses two wavelength light beams, i.e., a near infrared light beam
in the range from 0.840 .mu.m to 1.37 .mu.m and a near infrared
light beam in the range from 2.05 .mu.m to 2.48 .mu.m. When an
action potential occurs in a neuron, respective pulse counting
values are incremented by 1 in both the front parts 85-1 and 85-2
of the life activity detection circuit at the same time.
[0761] On the other hand, this exemplary embodiment also has such a
risk that because of weak detection signals, only one of the front
parts 85-1 and 85-2 of the life activity detection circuit may be
misdetected as an action potential under the influence of
disturbance noises (a pulse counting value is incremented). Thus,
in a case where only one of the front parts 85-1 and 85-2 of the
life activity detection circuit is (mis)detected as an action
potential (a pulse counting value is incremented), the signal
processing operation section 143 of the rear part determines it as
false detection and performs a process of preventing a
corresponding signal from being output from the rear part 86 of the
life activity detection circuit to the outside (the corresponding
signal is deleted from the life activity detection signal 106). By
detecting multiple action potentials of neurons as such, detection
accuracy and reliability of the life activity detection signal 106
are largely improved.
Detection of <Oxygen Concentration Change in Blood in
Surrounding Areas>
[0762] In this case, a spatial variation amount or a time dependent
variation amount of signal data is important, the following
processes are performed: (1) calculation of a difference value
between pieces of signal data detected from electromagnetic wave
detecting cells (photo detecting cells) 87 corresponding to
adjacent locations (or peripheral locations) on the detected point
30 for life activity; (2) extraction of a time dependent variation
for signal data in the same single electromagnetic wave detecting
cell (photo detecting cell) 87; (3) calculation of a difference
value to signal data stored in advance in the electromagnetic wave
detecting cell (photo detecting cell) 87; (4) calculation of a
value obtained in combination of (1) to (3); and (5) a computing
process of comparison/calculation between pieces of signal data
from the photo detecting sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life activity
corresponding to different wavelength light beams including signals
related to life activities.
[0763] In the calculation (1), the signal processing operation
section 143 of the rear part once receives signal data detected
from each electromagnetic wave detecting cell (photo detecting
cell) 87 and notifies a result thereof to the signal processing
operation section 136 of the front part.
[0764] Further, in the computing process (2), previous signal data
stored within the memory section 135 in the front part is read out
and a difference between the previous signal data and the current
signal data is computed.
[0765] On the other hand, in the computing process (3), signal data
detected in advance from each position on the detected point 30 for
life activity, is stored in the memory section 142 in the rear
part. At the time of detection of life activity, the data is
transferred to a signal processing operation section 136 of the
front part corresponding to each position on the detected point 30
for life activity, and a difference value between the data and the
current signal data is calculated. Further, as shown in (4), a
value (an additional value, a subtracted value, a product value, or
a quotient value) in combination of results obtained by the
computing processes in (1) to (3) is calculated if necessary.
[0766] Thus, data of the "difference value" is collected in the
signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part. Next will
be explained the computing process shown in (5) as above. In a case
where oxygen concentration changes in blood in surrounding areas
are measured using near infrared light, respective pieces of signal
data are separately obtained from three different wavelength light
beams as shown in FIG. 32, in particular.
[0767] As has been described above in regard to the BOLD effect,
when a neuron is activated, an oxyhemoglobin concentration
increases in capillaries around the neuron several seconds later.
Further, the oxyhemoglobin which is a particular hemoglobin bonding
to oxygen molecule has a maximum absorption at a wavelength of 930
nm and the deoxyhemoglobin which is other particular hemoglobin
separated from oxygen molecule has a maximum absorption at
wavelengths of 760 nm and 905 nm.
[0768] Accordingly, several seconds after a neuron is activated,
respective detection light amounts of wavelength light beams of 780
nm, 805 nm, and 830 nm change (e.g., a detection light amount at
780 nm increases and a detection light amount at 830 nm decreases).
In the signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part, a
subtraction process or a division process is performed as
comparison/calculation between pieces of signal data output from
respective front parts 85-1 to 85-3 of the life activity detection
circuit, respectively corresponding to three different wavelength
light beams.
[0769] Although FIG. 32 is simplified, each of the photo detecting
sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life activity includes a plurality of
electromagnetic wave detecting cells (photo detecting cells or
detecting coils) 87-1 to 87-5, and the electromagnetic wave
detecting cells (photo detecting cells or detecting coils) 87-1 to
87-5 are connected respectively to the front parts 85 of the life
activity detection circuit (see FIG. 31). In view of this, the
subtraction process or the division process for the three different
wavelength light beams in the signal processing operation section
143 is performed between pieces of signal data obtained from those
corresponding ones of the electromagnetic wave detecting cells
(photo detecting cells or detecting coils) 87-1 to 87-5 which are
disposed at the same position (or positions related to each other)
with respect to the three different wavelength light beams.
[0770] When the computing process is performed on pieces of signal
data from these photo detecting sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life
activity corresponding to respective wavelength light beams, an S/N
ratio of the signal data is improved, thereby improving reliability
of the life activity detection signal 106. The reason is as
follows. There is such a case where movement of a life object (an
examinee or the like) as a detection target may change a position
of the detected point 30 for life activity relative to the
detecting section 101 for life activity, thereby changing detection
light amounts of the above three wavelength light beams at the same
time.
[0771] The changes of these detection light amounts appear as noise
components in pieces of signal data output from the front parts
85-1 to 85-3 of the life activity detection circuit. However, when
the subtract process or the division process is performed in the
signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part, the
influence by these noise components is largely reduced, thereby
improving the S/N ratio of the signal data.
[0772] Further, another exemplary embodiment about the
comparison/calculation on pieces of signal data from respective
photo detecting sections 121-1 to 121-3 of life activity shown in
(5) is explained. Here, respective pieces of signal data are
compared with each other, so that detection accuracy of the life
activity detection signal 106 is improved. More specifically, the
authenticity of a detection signal is judged from directional
symmetry or directional asymmetry in changes of detection light
amounts occurring in respective pieces of signal data at the same
time. More specifically, as has been mentioned above, when the
oxyhemoglobin concentration increases in a capillariy, the
detection light amount at 780 nm may increase and the detection
light amount at 830 nm may decrease in some cases.
[0773] Accordingly, in this case, signal data output from a front
part 85 of the life activity detection circuit for detection of
light of 780 nm (strictly speaking, a front part 85 of the life
activity detection circuit for processing an electric signal
obtained by photoelectrical conversion by an electromagnetic wave
detecting cell (photo detecting cell or detecting coil) 87 disposed
at an image forming position corresponding to a capillary portion
where the oxyhemoglobin concentration increases) should show
information indicative of an increase in the detection light
amount.
[0774] Meanwhile, signal data output from a front part 85 of the
life activity detection circuit for detection of light of 830 nm
should show information indicative of a decrease in the detection
light amount. The signal processing operation section 143 of the
rear part grasps this simultaneous increase/decrease relationship,
and when either one of the changes does not occur or when the
changes occur toward the same direction, the signal processing
operation section 143 of the rear part judges that "the front part
85 of the life activity detection circuit misdetected" and performs
a process of deleting this change state from the life activity
detection signal 106. On the other hand, when the increase/decrease
relationship occurs at the same time, the signal processing
operation section 143 of the rear part regards "the life activity
detection signal 106 as reliable" and adds this change state to
signal data output from the rear part 86 of the life activity
detection circuit.
Detection of <Temperature Change by Thermography>
[0775] In this case, the same computing process as in the case of
<oxygen concentration changes in blood in surrounding areas>
is performed. Note that it is not necessary to perform the division
process or the subtraction process on pieces of signal data from
three different wavelength light beams.
Detection of <Oxygen Concentration Change by fMRI>
[0776] In this case, in the signal processing operation section 143
of the rear part, estimation computing (detection of an area where
a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property occurs) in an
activated area is performed using the method described in FIG. 30
and section 6.3.3.
[0777] In either of the cases, this exemplary embodiment performs
"a standardization process of a life activity detected area"
(describes later) after performing the computing process in the
signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part.
[0778] The following describes a case using the optical system for
life activity detection shown in FIG. 26. At the time of detection
of life activity, if the detected point 30 for life activity moves,
the imaging lens 57 automatically moves in an optical axial
direction according to a result of the "first detection" (position
detection and position control of a detected point for life
activity) as described above. This results in that an imaging
pattern relative to the detected point 30 for life activity always
appears on the photodetector 36.
[0779] When the detected point 30 for life activity moves in the
optical axial direction of the imaging lens 57, such an optical
phenomenon occurs that a size of the imaging pattern on the
photodetector 36 changes. Further, when the detected point 30 for
life activity moves in a direction perpendicular to the optical
axial direction of the imaging lens 57, the position of the imaging
pattern on the photodetector 36 goes out of alignment. In the
present exemplary embodiment, in order to facilitate the process of
the biosis activity measurement (the process of generating life
activity information from a life activity detection signal) in case
of such phenomena, even if the detected point 30 for life activity
moves, the life activity detection signal 106 is output in the form
that the center position and the size of the imaging pattern on the
photodetector 36 are fixed to the detected point 30 for life
activity.
[0780] For example, in a case where the "first detection" is
performed using the optical system shown in FIG. 22 as a position
monitoring section regarding a detected point for life activity,
not only a distance 44 surface points of an area where the
detecting section for life activity is disposed (at a position of
the detected point 30 for life activity in a direction along the
optical axis of the imaging lens 57 in FIG. 26) but also a marked
position 40 on a life-object surface along a direction at right
angles to the optical axis of the imaging lens 57 can be found from
imaging pattern positions on two-dimensional photodetectors 43-1
and 43-2 relative to the marked position 40 on the life-object
surface.
[0781] When this information is received from the position
monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for life activity,
[A] changing of an imaging pattern size (standardization of the
size) and [B] a displacement process of a center position of the
imaging pattern are performed by the signal processing operation
section 143 of the rear part in FIG. 34.
[0782] That is, as the operation of [A], in a case where the
detected point 30 for life activity is close to the imaging lens 57
as compared with a standard position, a "downsampling process" of
signal data read from the memory section 142 of the rear part is
performed to reduce the imaging pattern in size, and a result
thereof is stored in the memory section 142 of the rear part again.
On the other hand, in a case where the detected point 30 for life
activity is away from the imaging lens 57 as compared with the
standard position, an "interpolation process" of signal data read
from the memory section 142 of the rear part is performed to
enlarge the imaging pattern, and a result thereof is stored in the
memory section 142 of the rear part again. As described in section
6.5.4, as one example thereof, there is a method in which an
imaging pattern size is standardized to a face size of an examinee
(user).
[0783] Subsequently, the operation of [B] is performed according to
the following procedure. When location information of a center of
the imaging pattern is received from the position monitoring
section 46 regarding a detected point for life activity, the
location information of the center is stored in the memory section
142 of the rear part. Then, based on the information, only signal
data with respect to a standardized area (of the imaging pattern)
is output from the signal transfer section 144 to the transmitting
section of a life activity detection signal.
6.4.3) Configuration of Transmitting Section of Life Activity
Detection Signal
[0784] With reference to FIG. 35, the following describes a
configuration of the transmitting section of life activity
detection signal. Similarly to the above, in FIG. 35, a transfer
path of signal data is shown in a "bold full line", while a
transfer path of a system clock or a command is shown in a "narrow
full line."
[0785] The present exemplary embodiment has such a feature that
from the viewpoint of protection of personal data, the life
activity detection signal 106 output from the detecting section 101
for life activity is encrypted.
[0786] In the transmitting section 105 of a life activity detection
signal, the life activity detection signal 106 is transmitted to
the outside via the network control section 158. At this time, the
number of times the life activity detection signal 106 is
transmitted via the network control section 158 (a cumulative
duration time in which the life activity detection signal 106 is
transmitted to the outside) is counted by a counter 151 which
generates incremental counter numbers for transmitting the life
activity detection signal or describes a cumulative duration time
to transmit the life activity detection signal.
[0787] The transmitting section 105 of a life activity detection
signal includes two types of control circuits related to encryption
keys, i.e., a variable key generator 152 and a variable shifting
position generator 153 in an M-serial cyclic circuit. Here, the
variable key generator 152 and the variable shifting position
generator 153 in an M-serial cyclic circuit are both constituted by
an M-serial random number generator. The variable shifting position
generator 153 in an M-serial cyclic circuit is simpler and its
number of output bits and the number of cycles (an M value) are
largely smaller than the variable key generator 152. Initial values
of the variable key generator 152 and the variable shifting
position generator 153 in an M-serial cyclic circuit are set at the
time of manufacturing of the detecting section 101 for life
activity. Although not illustrated here, values of the variable key
generator 152, the variable shifting position generator 153 in a
M-serial cyclic circuit, and a counter 151 which generates
incremental counter numbers for transmitting the life activity
detection signal or describes a cumulative duration time to
transmit the life activity detection signal (hereinafter just
referred to as the "counter 151), can be turned back to respective
initial values by a hidden command.
[0788] When an output value of the variable shifting position
generator 153 (which provides and outputs a variable shifting
number in a M-serial cyclic circuit regarding incremental counter
numbers for transmitting the life activity detection signal or
regarding a cumulative duration time to transmit the life activity
detection signal: (hereinafter just referred to as the "variable
shifting position generator 153 in a M-serial cyclic circuit"))
does not change, an output value (random number) of the variable
key generator 152 (which provides variable keys depending on
incremental counter numbers for transmitting the life activity
detection signal or on a cumulative duration time to transmit the
life activity detection signal (hereinafter just referred to as the
"variable shifting key generator 152")) changes every time the
counter 151 increments the counter number by 1 (or every time the
cumulative duration time during which the life activity detection
signal 106 is supplied (output) to the outside via the network
control section 158 elapses a predetermined period).
[0789] The output value of the variable shifting position generator
153 in a M-serial cyclic circuit changes every time the counter
number of the counter 151 increases by a specific number (for
example, 10 or 100) (that is, every specific number of times the
life activity detection signal 106 is transmitted to the outside or
every time the cumulative duration time in which the life activity
detection signal 106 is output to the outside via the network
control section 158 elapses a specific period).
[0790] At this time, if the output value of the variable shifting
position generator 153 changes at this time, the output value
(random number) of the variable key generator 152 also changes.
Thus, the output value (random number) of the variable key
generator 152 changes depending on a combination of the output
value of the counter 151 and the output value of the variable
shifting position generator 153 in a M-serial cyclic circuit. The
output value of the variable key generator 152 is used as an
encryption key for encryption performed in an encrypter 154.
[0791] Here, the following describes the output value from the
variable key generator 152, more specifically.
[0792] The M-serial random number generator constituting the
variable key generator 152 is a circuit for outputting a random
number varying depending on an input step number "i" and can
generate M pieces of random numbers at the maximum. That is, in
steps from "0" to "M-1," different random numbers (which do not
overlap with numbers which have been already output) are output.
However, when the input step number exceeds "M" (after one cycle),
the random numbers which have been output before are repeatedly
output in the output order.
[0793] In this exemplary embodiment, a timing when the output value
of the counter 151 changes corresponds to a timing when the input
step number "i" changes. That is, every time the incremental
counter number for transmitting the life activity detection signal
106 from the network control section 158 changes (or every time the
cumulative duration time in which the life activity detection
signal 106 is output to the outside via the network control section
158 passes a specific period), the input step number changes from
"i" to "i+1" and the random number output from the variable key
generator 152 changes.
[0794] In the meantime, every time the counter 151 increments the
incremental counter number by a specific number of times (that is,
every specific number of times the life activity detection signal
106 is transmitted to the outside or every time the cumulative
duration time in which the life activity detection signal 106 is
output to the outside via the network control section 158 passes a
specific period), the output value of the variable shifting
position generator 153 in a M-serial cyclic circuit changes. The
output value at this time is assumed "j."
[0795] At this time, the input step number of the variable key
generator 152 varies from "i" to "i+j+1," and a random number
according to the input step number "i+j+1" is output from the
variable key generator 152. That is, only when the output value of
the variable shifting position generator 153 in an M-serial cyclic
circuit has changed, the output value of the variable key generator
152 is changed by just the output value "j" in an M-serial
continuous change.
[0796] As such, when the encryption key is generated by the
combination of the variable shifting position generator 153 in an
M-serial cyclic circuit and the variable key generator 152,
unauthorized decryption of the encryption key is prevented, thereby
ensuring high security at the time of transferring the life
activity detection signal 106 to the outside.
[0797] Signal data transmitted from the life activity detection
circuit 122 via a signal transfer section 155 from the life
activity detection circuit is subjected to an encryption process in
the encrypter 154, and temporarily stored in the memory section 156
in the transmitting section of life activity detection signal.
Here, the present exemplary embodiment has a feature in that the
life activity detection signal 106 is not only encrypted as
described above, but also stored in a communication format in
accordance with IP (Internet Protocol).
[0798] This improves easy transmission of the life activity
detection signal 106 over the Internet. In order to enable this, an
internet protocol forming section which sets the IP address and in
which to store IP address information in advance reads encrypted
signal data from the memory section 156 in the transmitting section
of life activity detection signal, and changes it into the
communication format in accordance with IP (Internet Protocol). The
life activity detection signal 106 generated in a final format by
the internet protocol forming section which sets the IP address is
transferred to the outside via the network control section 158.
6.5) Measuring Method of Life Activity
[0799] As has been described in section 6.3.1, in the present
exemplary embodiment, interpretation of life activity is performed
based on the life activity detection signal obtained from the
detecting section for life activity to obtain life activity
information. A series of these operations are generally referred to
as life activity measurement. This chapter deals with a measuring
method of life activity mainly focusing on the interpretation of
life activity.
6.5.1) Overview of Information Obtained from Life Activity
Detection Signal
[0800] FIG. 36 shows information obtained when the encryption of
the life activity detection signal 106 is decrypted in accordance
with the methods described in sections 6.3 and 6.4. A life activity
detected area 161 shown in FIG. 36 indicates a location of a single
neuron firing an action potential or a location of a particular
region constituted by a plurality of neurons firing action
potentials. Alternatively, the life activity detected area 161 may
indicate a location on a neural transmission pathway in a whole
body or a location of a particular region in a life object which
performs life activities beyond the activities of the nervous
system.
[0801] Further, a life activity level 162 described in FIG. 36
indicates an activated degree of a life activity in each detected
area 161 in the life object. Depending on a detection target, this
life activity level 162 corresponds to a total number of action
potentials (a pulse counting number) in a neuron, an oxyhemoglobin
concentration (or a deoxyhemoglobin concentration) in a capillary,
a distribution of surface temperature (variation) measured by a
thermography, or the like. A distribution characteristic of the
life activity level 162 (a pattern of a characteristic
distribution) illustrated in FIG. 36 changes through a detection
time 163.
[0802] In the meantime, when a transmission state or a
hyperpolarization state of an inhibitory transmitter substance is
detected as has been described in section 6.4.1 instead of
detecting a neuronal action potential by use of near infrared light
or a change of the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property, a value of
the life activity level 162 is decreased in a local area absorbing
an electromagnetic wave having a specific wavelength or a frequency
corresponding to a specific chemical shift value. Accordingly, it
is necessary to pay attention to changes in a direction of the life
activity level 162 according to a phenomenon of a detection
target.
[0803] Accordingly, the "interpretation of life activity," which
will be described later, is performed by using or extracting the
following matters from the life activity detection signal
illustrated in FIG. 36: (1) an activated area (a location where the
value of the life activity level 162 in the life activity detected
area 161 exceeds a designated value); (2) a value of the life
activity level 162 (intensity of activation) in a specific
activated area; (3) a connection pattern of the activated area (an
activation distribution characteristic=the activation
characteristic distribution shown in FIG. 36); (4) a time dependent
connection of the activated area (a signal transmission pathway in
a nerve, and the like); and (5) a characteristic of a time
dependent variation in the activation distribution (a feature that
the activation distribution changes through a detection time 163),
and the like.
6.5.2) Content of Life Activity Information
[0804] In the present exemplary embodiment, an active state in a
life object which can change over time is a target of the life
activity information. Particularly, "information of an active state
in a particular person or a plurality of life objects at the time
of measurement, which information is indicated (expressed or
described) in an interpretable manner (in a judgeable or
distinguishable form) by a human or a machine" is referred to as
"life activity information."
[0805] This life activity information includes information
indicative of (explaining) internal neural activity or mind
activity or a mental status. Further, this mind activity or mental
status may indicate information peculiar to a particular individual
(an examinee or a user), or may indicate a characteristics of a
group (collective entity) constituted by a plurality of members (a
plurality of examinees or users) as well.
[0806] FIG. 37 is a conception diagram of life activity information
obtained by interpretation of life activity in the present
exemplary embodiment.
[0807] In this exemplary embodiment, respective pieces of life
activity information corresponding to a plurality of "measuring
items" can be extracted from the aforementioned life activity
detection signal. Further, one or more "evaluation factors 171" are
defined for each of the measuring items. As a result of
interpretation of life activity, an equivalent level 172 per each
of evaluation factors 171-1 to 171-3 in a specific measuring item
can be expressed along each detection time 163 during which
detection of life activity is performed, as illustrated in FIG.
37(a). In consideration of simple explanation herein, results of
the interpretation of life activity are shown in a form of graph in
FIG. 37.
[0808] Alternatively, the equivalent level 172 of each of the
evaluation factors 171-1 to 171-3 may be expressed in a form of
values or some sort of animation.
[0809] Since the life activity changes from moment to moment, the
equivalent level 172 of each of the evaluation factors 171-1 to
171-3 also changes through the detection time 163. The changing
state is shown in FIG. 37(b).
[0810] An "event 173" shown in FIG. 37(b) is information related to
life activity measurement, and a detection time of the event 173 is
also mapped on a timeline (a coordinate axis indicative of the
detection time 163) in sync with the detection time 163 of the
detection of life activity.
[0811] The event 173 herein mainly includes: (1) an external state
of a life object as a target for biosis activity measurement or an
environment of the life object; (2) an internal state of the life
object; and (3) information such as stimulation given to the life
object from the outside. However, the even 173 is not limited to
the above, and all information which affects the life activity is
included in the event 173.
[0812] The "external state of a life object as a target for biosis
activity measurement or an environment of the life object"
corresponds to "observation of a state of the life object or an
environment of the life object," which will be described later with
reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. Here, the method described in section
6.2.2 with reference to FIG. 22 as one example of the "position
monitoring section regarding a detected point for life activity"
uses a camera lens 42 and a two-dimensional photodetector 43 such
as a CCD sensor disposed behind the camera lens 42.
[0813] In this case, at the time when the position of the detected
point is detected by use of the camera lens 42 and the
two-dimensional photodetector 43 (the first detection to align and
hold the detected point for life activity), the external state of
the life object as a target for biosis activity measurement or the
environment of the life object is measured simultaneously. Concrete
examples of the information on the external state of the life
object or the environment of the life object include information on
"whether the life object is alone during the detection of life
activity or the life object is in company with other people" or
"whether the life object (examinee, or the like) as a target for
biosis activity measurement stays in a small place or in a large
place." Further, in a case where the detecting section 101 for life
activity includes a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor,
temperature/humidity information during the detection of life
activity is also taken as information of the "environment of the
life object."
[0814] The information on the "state in the life object" includes
information such as "regional pain due to a change state of posture
or disease." The change state of posture among them can be
simultaneously measured in the "position monitoring section
regarding a detected point for life activity." On the other hand,
the information such as the regional pain due to disease is input
by an examinee (a user) as a life object to be a target of biosis
activity measurement by other means.
[0815] The "stimulation given from the outside to the life object,"
which is listed last, corresponds to "giving a stimulation from the
outside to the life object (S21)," which will be described later
with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. Concrete examples thereof may be
as follows: causing pain to a limited part of the life object by
use of a needle; causing the life object (examinee) to have a
specific emotion forcibly by displaying a pleasant (or
terrible/sad) image on a display screen; and the like.
[0816] Along such concrete examples, the following explains a
relationship between the event 173 and each of the evaluation
factors 171-1 to 171-3 as shown in FIG. 37(b). When a pleasant
image is displayed for the life object (examinee) as the event
173-1 only for a specific period on the timeline, the equivalent
level 172 of the evaluation factor 171-2 as "pleasant" increases,
whereas the equivalent level 172 of the evaluation factor 171-3 as
"scared" is maintained low. After that, when a terrible image is
displayed as the event 173-2, the equivalent level 172 of the
evaluation factor 171-2 as "pleasant" and the equivalent level 172
of the evaluation factor 171-3 as "scared" are reversed. Further,
the equivalent level 172 of the evaluation factor 171-1 as
"relieved" decreases through the detection time 163.
[0817] Measuring items and evaluation factors corresponding to the
respective measuring items to be set in the present exemplary
embodiment are shown as follows. Here, the evaluation factors are
set in consideration of convenience for applications to the present
exemplary embodiment. Further, an explanation before the mark " . .
. " indicates a "measuring item," and an explanation after " . . .
" indicates an "evaluation factor 171." [0818] Somesthetic system .
. . A part in the body which feels pain. Each part in the body
corresponds to each evaluation factor 171. [0819] Motor component .
. . A part which gives an instruction of which part of the body is
moved or a part to be moved corresponds to each evaluation factor
171. [0820] Control intention (Intention of mechanical operation of
TV games or the like) . . . Movement to up/down/left/right,
aggressive shot, change of color, selection of a specific button
[0821] Autonomic nervous system . . . Sympathetic system per each
inner organ or vessel/sweat gland, and parasympathetic system per
each inner organ or vessel/sweat gland [0822] Awakening/turgescence
. . . Emergency recognition, turgescence, awakening, relaxed state,
drowsiness, REM sleep, non-REM sleep [0823] Attraction . . .
Possession desire, attracted, good feeling, subject of interest,
insensitivity, repulsion, elusive subject [0824] Emotional reaction
. . . Joy, anger, sympathy (sadness), comfort, love, loneliness,
fear, anxiety, relief, etc. [0825] Involuntary decision
(unconscious state) . . . Good feeling, repulsion, conciliation,
escape, aggression, inhibitory activity region [0826] Recognition .
. . Visual sense, auditory sense, gustatory sense, olfaction,
mediating tactile [0827] Visual recognition/identification . . .
Various shapes, color tones, area identification, various
individual discriminations [0828] Audible
recognition/identification . . . Pitch, rhythm, various words,
phrases [0829] Recollection (content intended to be expressed or
occurring image) . . . Various words, various shapes, collaboration
between words [0830] Malfunction detection (of physical condition
or mind activity) . . . Abnormal active site (location),
algogenesia site (location), site (location) where active duration
is too long
[0831] The present exemplary embodiment has a feature in that the
"involuntary decision (unconscious state)" or "malfunction
detection (of physical condition or mind activity)," which is
caused in an examinee without any consciousness, can be measured in
the present exemplary embodiment, and further, the "control
intention (a machine such as a TV game is operated by just
thinking)" and the like can be measured. These items could not be
measured in the conventional techniques.
[0832] In the meantime, in consideration of applications of the
present exemplary embodiment to a "marketing research," the item of
"attraction" is added to the measuring items. Further, the
measurement items "attraction" and "involuntary decision
(unconscious state)" both include the same evaluation elements
"good feeling" and "repulsion." However, they are different in that
the examinee has such feelings under consciousness in the former
item, whereas the examinee has such feelings without any
consciousness in the latter item.
6.5.3) Interpretation Method of Life Activity
6.5.3.1) Feature of Life Activity Interpretation
[0833] As has been described in section 6.1.3, the present
exemplary embodiment requires interpretation of life activity in
order to obtain life activity information from a life activity
detection signal obtained by the detecting section for life
activity. The interpretation of life activity as shown in the
present exemplary embodiment has the following three features.
These features can be performed separately or may be performed in
combination at the same time.
[0834] [A] A specific "stimulation" is given to a life object as a
measurement subject from the outside to detect a life activity
detection signal. The "stimulation" as used herein includes not
only "physical irritation," which is, for example, pain to be given
by partially pricking a life-object surface with a "needle" or by
giving "electrical stimulation," but also "psychological
stimulation" to be given to the examinee by "showing a pleasant
image or a terrible image." In this exemplary embodiment, the
action to "calm a heart" by letting the examinee listen to quiet
music is considered as part of the "psychological stimulation."
[0835] [B] The interpretation based on a life activity detection
signal is performed by referring to a data base.
[0836] (1) Existing information such as well-known documents or Web
information or (2) accumulation of previous life activity detection
signals can be utilized as the data base. The data base in the
present exemplary embodiment is not fixed, and the "data base
contents are kept expanded and improved" based on a "learning
function."
[0837] In order to enhance the data base, the present exemplary
embodiment includes such a mechanism that: (a) a storage location
of the data base is accessible via the network, thereby securing
easiness in changing the content thereof; and (b) an interpretation
result of a life activity obtained with reference to the data base
is fed back. As a reference method of the data base, "equivalent
levels 172" (or pattern matching levels) for the items each listed
with a mark "-" in section 6.5.1 are calculated. The calculation
results can be expressed as in FIG. 37.
[0838] However, the reference method is not limited to the above,
and other reference methods of the data base which may be used
herein are as follows: calculation of a correlation coefficient by
use of a technique of pattern recognition or a statistical analysis
technique used in multivariate analysis; multiple regression
analysis, primary component regression analysis, or partial least
squares regression analysis used in chemometrics; and the like.
[0839] [C] Data which is suitable for a use purpose is extracted
from data accumulated in the data base and new life activity
information is generated from the extracted data. In the present
exemplary embodiment, the interpretation of life activity can be
performed at a different timing from the detection of life
activity. In this case, the interpretation is performed by use of
data of life activity detection signals accumulated in the data
base.
[0840] More specifically, by using event information stored in the
data base, a life activity detection signal suitable for a specific
use purpose and a "measuring item" associated with the purpose are
extracted, and life activity information is generated by use of the
extracted signal.
[0841] The interpretation method of life activity will be explained
more specifically in the following sections by taking as examples
the following cases particularly: [0842] a case where a
"stimulation" is given to the life object from the outside to
interpret a life activity; [0843] a case where life activity
detection signals are accumulated to enhance the content of the
data base which is referred to for interpretation of life activity;
[0844] a case where interpretation of life activity is performed
based on life activity detection signals by referring to the
database; [0845] a case where a feedback is given to the content of
the data base by using a result of the interpretation of life
activity; [0846] a case where an appropriate life activity
detection signal is extracted from the data base by use of event
information; and [0847] a case where interpretation of life
activity is performed based on a life activity detection signal
extracted from the database. The following explanations will be
given with reference to a flowchart of interpretation of life
activity.
6.5.3.2) Exemplary Construction of Data Base Related to
Interpretation of Life Activity
[0848] FIG. 38 shows a procedure of interpretation of life activity
in the following cases as described in section 6.5.3.1: [0849] a
case where a "stimulation" is given to the life object from the
outside to interpret a life activity; and [0850] a case where life
activity detection signals are accumulated to enhance the content
of the data base which referred to for interpretation of life
activity.
[0851] Initially explained is a method to perform "search of an
internal signal transmission pathway" by interpretation of life
activity as an example, more specifically. Since the signal
transmission pathway in the nervous system has complicated paths in
parallel as shown in FIG. 1, it was very difficult to search for a
detailed signal transmission pathway in a state where a life object
is alive, in the conventional techniques.
[0852] However, at the time of transmitting a signal, neuron cell
bodies 1 except a sensory neuron on the signal transmission pathway
fire action potentials by all means. The present exemplary
embodiment uses this feature to search for the signal transmission
pathway by finding locations of the neuron cell bodies 1 which
sequentially fire action potentials. More specifically, when pain
is caused by pricking a part of skin of the life object with a
"needle," the signal detection area (ending) 4 of the sensory
neuron illustrated in FIG. 1 is activated (an action potential
occurs). Subsequently, a signal is transmitted through a signal
transmission pathway. (A specific method of searching for this
internal signal transmission pathway will be described later in
section 9.3.1 with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.)
[0853] This operation to cause pain by pricking a part of skin of
the life object with a needle corresponds to a step (S21) of giving
a stimulation from the outside to the life object as in FIG. 38.
Then, an operation of detection of life activity (S22) is performed
by the method described in sections 6.2 to 6.4. Further, at the
same time, observation of a state of the life object or observation
of an environment surrounding the life object as the measurement
subject (S26) is performed.
[0854] Subsequently, extraction (S23) of a feature portion
corresponding to a life activity detection signal obtained
therefrom and collection/accumulation (S24) of the life activity
detection signal are performed. Here, in the case of this "search
of a signal transmission pathway," a life activity level 162
increases for a short time only in a "place where a neuron cell
body on the signal transmission pathway is located" within the life
activity detected area 161 in FIG. 36. Through the detection time
163, the place where the life activity level 162 increases for a
short time moves along the signal transmission pathway.
[0855] In this case, information indicative of a value (total sum)
to which a value of the life activity level 162 related to the
"place where a neuron cell body on the signal transmission pathway
is located" within the life activity detected area 161 is added
(accumulated) is collected/accumulated as shown in S24. Meanwhile,
as shown in FIG. 36, the content of the life activity detection
signal changes through the detection time 163. At this time, a
process of obtaining information to which a content of a life
activity detection signal is added (accumulated) through the
detection time 163 or a process of sequentially accumulating a
content of a life activity detection signal at each point in the
detection time 163 corresponds to a process (S24) of
collection/accumulation of life activity detection signals. On the
other hand, a feature emerging when the place where the life
activity level 162 increases for a short time moves is extracted as
extraction of a feature portion as shown in S23.
[0856] Then, in a subsequent extraction step (S25) of extracting a
correlation between an external stimulation and a life activity
detection signal, stimulated-part information obtained in S21, and
a collection/accumulation result of life activity detection signals
and a feature extraction result respectively obtained in the steps
of S23 and S24 are combined. As a result, "correlation information
between a stimulated part of the life object and an internal signal
transmission pathway" is obtained (or extracted).
[0857] Then, the information thus obtained (or extracted) is
accumulated sequentially in the data base to enhance the data base
(S27). Further, as this step (S27) of accumulation and enhancement
to the data base, the stimulation content performed on the life
object in step S21 and the observation result of the state of the
life object and the observation result of the environment
surrounding the life object obtained in step S26 are also stored in
the data base as event information. In the above example, pain is
caused by use of a "needle," but the present exemplary embodiment
is not limited to this, and a signal transmission pathway related
to pressure, itch, temperature, visual sense, auditory sense,
gustatory sense, olfaction, and the like can be found in detail in
the same manner.
[0858] The above explanation deals with a data base construction
method mainly based on the "somesthetic system" among the measuring
items shown by the mark "-" in section 6.5.2, but alternatively,
the method in FIG. 38 may be used for construction of the data base
corresponding to the other measuring items or a specific evaluation
factor 171 in them, shown in section 6.5.2. In this case, a
stimulation suitable for the specific evaluation factor 171 is
given from the outside (S21) to perform detection of life activity
(S22), and then the collection/accumulation (S24) of the result or
the feature extraction (S23) is performed.
[0859] As another exemplary embodiment using the method in FIG. 38,
the following explains about a data base construction method for
one evaluation factor in the emotional reaction or for emergency
recognition, which is one of evaluation factors in the
awakening/turgescence. In this case, the aforementioned
"psychological stimulation" will be given as the stimulation from
the outside (S21) shown in FIG. 38. More specifically, detection of
life activity (S22) is performed while an examinee as a life object
is watching a "video just before encountering an accident" or a
"video to make the examinee pleased or sad" on a TV screen. After
that, interpretation of life activity is performed in the same
manner as described above.
6.5.3.3) Data Content Stored in Data Base
[0860] FIG. 38 shows an exemplary data base construction. In the
present exemplary embodiment, three types of data as below are
stored in the data base. A content of each type of data and its
purpose are explained below.
.alpha.) Representative life activity detection signal (indicative
of a feature) for each evaluation factor 171 in each measuring item
and features thereof . . . This corresponds to "data obtained as a
result of giving a stimulation suitable for a specific evaluation
factor 171 from the outside (S21) to perform the detection of life
activity (S22), and then performing the collection/accumulation of
the result (S24) or the feature extraction (S23)" as described in
section 6.5.3.2 with reference to FIG. 38. As will be explained in
section 6.5.3.4 with reference to FIG. 39, the information is used
as reference data to generate life activity information by
interpreting various life activity detection signals obtained for
respective purposes. .beta.) Life activity detection signal to
which event information is added . . . All life activity signals
obtained by the detection of life activity are sequentially stored
in the data base after event information is added thereto. At this
time, all event information described in section 6.5.2 are stored
in the data base together with the life activity detection signals
so that the process contents in step S21 and step S26 in FIG. 38
lead to the accumulation and enhancement step to the data base
(S27).
[0861] As will be explained in section 6.5.3.4 with reference to
FIG. 40, the data stored in the data base is mainly used for
"interpretation of life activity for another purpose by use of life
activity detection signals accumulated in the past."
.gamma.) Life activity information obtained as a result of
interpretation of life activity . . . The life activity information
obtained as a result of the interpretation of life activity is also
stored in the data base sequentially. This information is used when
the content in (.alpha.) as above is modified for generation of
feedback information to the data base (S38) in FIG. 39, for
example. .delta.) Personal information related to internal neural
activity or mind activity per specific user . . . This is personal
information obtained as a result of the interpretation of life
activity as will be described in section 6.5.3.5 with reference to
FIG. 40, and is stored in the data base in an encrypted state for
protection of personal data. Specific examples thereof include
detailed connection in a brain/neural circuit or a place which is
easy to be sick in an internal organ of each specific user or
inclination of a character or a subject of interest of each
specific user.
6.5.3.4) Exemplary Embodiment Regarding Interpretation of Life
Activity and Feedback to Data Base
[0862] FIG. 39 shows a procedure of interpretation of life activity
in a case where the following cases among the description in
section 6.5.3.1 are performed at the same time: [0863] the case
where interpretation of life activity is performed based on life
activity detection signals by referring to the database; and [0864]
the case where a feedback is given to the content of the data base
by using a result of the interpretation of life activity.
[0865] A flow of a right half of FIG. 39 mainly shows the procedure
of: [0866] the case where interpretation of life activity is
performed based on life activity detection signals by referring to
the database; and the flow of a left half of FIG. 39 mainly shows
the procedure of: [0867] the case where a feedback is given to the
content of the data base by using a result of the interpretation of
life activity.
[0868] In the example of the interpretation of life activity shown
in FIG. 39, setting (S31) of a measuring item in accordance with
application using life activity information is performed at first.
The setting (S31) of a measuring item as used herein indicates an
operation of selecting one (or more) measuring item(s) from the
measuring items listed with the mark "-" in section 6.5.2.
[0869] Subsequently, as an applied embodiment using the life
activity information shown in the present exemplary embodiment, in
a case where a real-time correspondence process to a client
including researches, such as a questionnaire survey or a marketing
research or a customer service, is required, the process (S21) of
giving a stimulation from the outside to the life object (or the
examinee) is performed subsequent to the setting (S31) of a
measuring item. Here, a content of the stimulation (S21) given to
the life object (or examinee) is associated with (related to) the
measuring item set in S31. This stimulation (S21) is a
"psychological stimulation" in most cases, and corresponds, more
specifically, to a process of showing a product as a subject of
search to a user who is an examinee or to displaying a screen for
questionnaire, or a process of asking a question to a user (as a
customer service) At the same time, the operation (S22) of
detection of life activity to the user (examinee) is performed.
[0870] On the other hand, in a case where "measurement of life
activity in a present situation" is performed (e.g., finding a
reason why an infant cries or extraction of information which a
person who cannot express his/her will wants to tell), the step of
giving a stimulation from the outside to the life object as shown
in S21 is omitted, and the step (S22) of detection of life activity
is performed immediately after the setting (S31) of a measuring
item.
[0871] A life activity detection signal in the form as shown, for
example, in FIG. 36 which is obtained as a result of the above step
is then subjected to a calculation process with reference to a data
base S30. At this time, reference data in accordance with the
measuring item set in S31 is taken from the data base S30. Further,
this data base S30 is built on a network server, so that reading or
update (writing to the data base S30) of modified data can be
performed via the network. Then, the calculation process performed
in S32 is performed to calculate an equivalent level per evaluation
factor from the viewpoints shown with the marks "-" in section
6.5.2. Alternatively, the calculation process may be performed
using the method explained in [B] of section 6.5.3.1. After that, a
handling process (S34) is performed based on life activity
information obtained therefrom, so as to exhibit the life activity
information to the user or provide an appropriate service for the
user.
[0872] Here, the present exemplary embodiment has a feature in that
at the time of providing a service to the user in S34, an operation
(S35) of the second detection of life activity, a second
calculation process (S37) referring to the data base based on a
result of the second detection, and generation (S37) of life
activity information are performed. As the measuring item set at
this time, the "emotional reaction" or the "involuntary decision
(unconscious state)" is automatically selected from the measuring
items described in section 6.5.2.
[0873] A purpose of the processes from step S34 to S37 is to check
on whether the handling process (provision of a service to the
user) performed in S34 fits to the desire of the user (examinee).
If the handling process (S34) results in dissatisfaction of the
user (examinee), generation (S38) of feedback information to the
data base is performed and then the accumulation and enhancement
(S26) of the data base is performed.
[0874] At the time of the generation (S38) of feedback information
to the data base, not only a reaction of the user to the handling
process (S34) based on the life activity information (a generation
result of second life activity information shown in S38), but also
a state of the life object at the time when the stimulation is
given (S21) or a result of the observation (S26) of the environment
around the life object performed using the position monitoring
section regarding a detected point for life activity (see in
section 6.5.2) are referred to. Furthermore, past life activity
information (see (.gamma.) described in section 6.5.3.3) stored in
the data base S30 is reviewed so as to generate a modified content
with respect to the information described in (.alpha.) in section
6.5.3.3. As a result of this, further accumulation and enhancement
(S27) to the data base are performed, thereby improving accuracy or
reliability of the interpretation of life activity.
[0875] Further, the life activity detection signals obtained by the
first and second detection of life activity (S22, S35) and the
pieces of life activity information obtained by the first and
second interpretation of life activity (S33, S37) are
accumulated/added (S27) in the data base S30 as well as event
information such as results of the stimulation (21) given to the
life object or the observation (S26) of the state of the life
object or the environment around the life object.
6.5.3.5) Applied Embodiment of Interpretation of Life Activity
Using Life Activity Detection Signal in Data Base
[0876] The following describes a procedure of the interpretation of
life activity in each of the following cases among those described
in section 6.5.3.1: the case where an appropriate life activity
detection signal is extracted from the data base by use of event
information; and the case where interpretation of life activity is
performed based on a life activity detection signal extracted from
the database.
[0877] When the interpretation of life activity shown in FIG. 38 or
FIG. 39 is repeated, data such as the life activity detection
signals or life activity information of a specific user (an
individual examinee) are accumulated in the data base S30. Thereby,
necessary information to estimate, by calculation, a subject of
interest of the specific user (a favorite product which the
specific user wants to buy or a hobby of the specific user), an
inclination of a character of the specific user, or an internal
place which is weak (an internal place easy to be sick).
Accordingly, the interpretation of life activity is performed
originally regarding the specific user by use of the life activity
detection signals or life activity information are accumulated in
the data base S30, and personal information related to neural
activity or mental activity, such as the subject of interest or
inclination of the character of the specific user or an internal
site easy to be sick, is calculated, so that an appropriate service
can be proposed to the individual user based on a result thereof
voluntarily (without any request from the user). FIG. 40 shows an
interpretation method of life activity to provide such a voluntary
service to a user.
[0878] At first, it is necessary to set a content of the voluntary
service to be performed on the user (S41). Based on of the service
content thus set, a measuring item on life activity information is
set (S31).
[0879] As has described in section 6.5.3.2 or 6.5.3.4, past life
activity detection signals or life activity information are stored
in the data base S30 together with event information. In view of
this, event information adequate to the service content (S41) or
the measuring item (S31) thus set as above is searched, a life
activity detection signal or life activity information accompanied
by the adequate event information is selected and acquired, and
extraction (S42) of necessary data is performed.
[0880] Then, a calculation process (S32) based on the measuring
item set in step S31 is performed, and generation (S33) of life
activity information is performed. At the same time, generation
(S43) of personal information related to internal neural activity
or mental activity of the specific user to be a target is performed
with reference to the past life activity information extracted from
the data base S30, and voluntary provision of a service to the user
is performed (S44) using the personal information thus generated.
Further, in parallel with that, the life activity information newly
obtained in step 33 or the personal information obtained in step
S43 is stored in the data base S30, and accumulation and
enhancement (S27) of the data base is performed. At this time, the
personal information is encrypted from the viewpoint of protection
of the personal information, and then stored in the data base
S30.
[0881] Exemplary relations between the personal information related
to internal neural activity or mind activity of the specific user
obtained in step S43 and the content of the service (S44) provided
to the user in accordance with the personal information are shown
below. [0882] In a case where the subject of interest of the user
is found, a product which the user wants is introduced via the
Internet and arrangements of purchase are made according to a user
request. [0883] In a case where an internal site which is easy to
be sick is found, the user is notified of the site and advised of
how to improve living habit or eating habit. [0884] In a case where
the inclination of the character of the user is found, the user is
notified of a result of tendency analysis according to the
inclination of the character and advised of how to behave in the
feature.
[0885] Further, an alternative service of the above may be as
follows: [0886] In a case where the inclination of the character of
the user is found, a boyfriend/girlfriend fitting to the character
of the user may be introduced.
[0887] Further, a concrete method of providing a service to the
user performed in step S44 is as follows:
1) the user is asked about necessity of a service like the above;
and 2) a service like the above is performed in response to a user
request.
[0888] Thus, in this exemplary embodiment, since an appropriate
service is provided in accordance with individual characteristics
of a specific user, a user satisfaction level is improved by
providing a meticulous service to each user.
[0889] Further, according to the present exemplary embodiment, not
only the character inclination of the user can be found, but also
early treatment for the user can be attained by automatically
determining an early symptom of depression, an internal disease at
an early stage related to the autonomous nerve, or the like.
[0890] However, since estimation of negative sides such as
psychopath or inclination to commit a crime is also performable,
the personal information thus obtained as a result of the above
exemplary embodiment should be handled with sufficient care.
6.5.4) Other Measuring Methods of Life Activity
[0891] As shown in FIG. 1, the nervous system of a mammalian animal
including a human has a hierarchical structure. In a central
nervous system layer 7 such as the cerebral cortex layer, very
complicated neural circuits are formed, and therefore, it is very
difficult to generate personal information or even life activity
information from a life activity detection signal detected
therefrom.
[0892] However, as shown in FIG. 1, the neural circuits between
layers are connected with each other, so that activities are
performed in cooperation with the respective layers.
[0893] In view of this, another exemplary embodiment has a feature
in that "life activity information is generated from a life
activity detection signal of a lower layer and thereby life
activity information of a higher layer is estimated" as measures to
the difficulty in acquiring life activity information related to
the central nervous system layer 7 including the cerebral cortex
layer or the limbic system.
[0894] It is said that an amygdala takes a central role in regard
to the emotional reaction in the brain of a human or an animal, and
the emotional reaction is expressed in a central amygdaloid nucleus
(Hideho Arita: Nounai busshitsu no sisutemu shinkei seirigaku
(Chugai-igakusha, 2006) p. 105). An output signal from the central
amygdaloid nucleus is directly input into a facial motor nucleus
(Masahiko Watanabe: Nou Shinkei Kagaku Nyumon Koza (Ge) (Yodosha,
2002), p. 222).
[0895] Here, this facial motor nucleus works on a facial muscle to
control a facial expression. Accordingly, the emotional reaction
expressed in the central amygdaloid nucleus appears on the facial
expression directly.
[0896] On the other hand, a neural circuit directly output from the
central amygdaloid nucleus to the cerebral cortex does not exist
remarkably, and an output signal from this central amygdaloid
nucleus reaches a prefrontal area via a medial nucleus in the
amygdala, for example. In addition to that, this medial nucleus
receives signal inputs from other areas in the amygdala, the
thalamus, or the hypothalamus (Masahiko Watanabe: Nou Shinkei
Kagaku Nyumon Koza Gekan (Yodosha, 2002), p. 221).
[0897] When an output signal from the central amygdaloid nucleus
reaches the prefrontal area with some change affected by these
signals, a feeling recognized in the prefrontal area becomes
slightly different from the emotion under subconsciousness
occurring in the central amygdaloid nucleus. This indicates such a
possibility that "a facial expression exhibits an emotion more
accurately than a person is aware of."
[0898] In view of this, another embodiment explained herein has a
feature in that instead of obtaining a life activity detection
signal from the central nervous system layer 7 including the
cerebral cortex layer, movement of a facial muscle formed by an
action from the facial motor nucleus is detected, and life activity
information is generated from the detection signal. Accordingly,
without a need to obtain life activity information from the central
nervous system layer 7 (including the cerebral cortex layer or the
limbic system) for which interpretation of life activity is very
complicated and difficult, information about the emotional reaction
related to the limbic system or the cerebral cortex can be obtained
accurately from a result of "interpretation of the movement of the
facial muscle" for which the interpretation is relatively easy.
[0899] In this case, the marked position 40 on the life-object
surface as shown in FIG. 22 corresponds to a facial position of the
examinee (or user). In the meantime, there have been digital
cameras with a function to automatically detect a facial position
of a subject by use of an image recognition technique in these
days. In view of this, in this another embodiment explained herein,
the position monitoring section regarding a detected point for life
activity (a section for performing the first detection) is
configured to have the image recognition technique, and a detection
signal from the facial position of the examinee (or user) is
assumed as a life activity detection signal.
[0900] Further, in a case where the another exemplary embodiment
described herein is performed, an imaging pattern size is
standardized to a size to show a whole face of the examinee (or
user) and stored in the memory section 142 of the rear part, at a
stage of the process of "A] changing of an imaging pattern size
(standardization of the size)" explained in section 6.4.2. If the
face size of the examinee is standardized to a predetermined size
as such regardless of how small/large the face of the examinee is
or how far a distance between the examinee and the signal detecting
section 103 is, easiness and accuracy of position detection of eyes
or a mouth in the face are improved, thereby making it easy to
generate the life activity information from the life activity
detection signal.
[0901] FIG. 41 shows relationships between a facial expression and
an emotional reaction. FIG. 41(a) shows a facial expression during
rest, FIG. 41(b) shows a facial expression at the time of smiling,
FIG. 41(c) shows a facial expression at the time of getting angry,
and FIG. 41(d) shows a facial expression at a loss (they may be
difficult to be distinguished from each other due to poor drawings,
but intend to show the respective facial expressions). An
expression shows a feeling of the examinee (or user). Muscular
movements on the face at this time are shown with arrows in FIG.
42. At the time of smiling as in FIG. 41(b), outside muscles of
eyebrows and eyes contract downward. Further, outside muscles of a
mouth contract upward and outward. At the time of getting angry as
in FIG. 41(c), outside muscles of eyebrows and upper eyelids
contract upward, and muscles of lower eyelids contract downward. At
the same time, outside muscles of a mouth contract downward and
outward. On the other hand, at the time of being at a loss as shown
in FIG. 41(d), inside muscles under eyebrows contract toward the
inside. Further, at the same time, muscles around lower eyelids
contract to raise lower eyelids upward. As such, the detection
result of contraction and relaxation states of facial muscles is
correlated with life activity information corresponding to the
emotional reaction or the like.
[0902] As has been described in section 1.3 with reference to FIG.
1, when the facial muscle contracts, activation of the
neuromuscular junction 5 (a change of a membrane potential) and
subsequent potential changing 27 of a muscle fiber membrane occur.
Accordingly, the change of the membrane potentials can be detected
by use of the near infrared light/infrared light as shown in
section 4.7 sections or the Nuclear Magnetic Resonance as shown in
section 5.2.
[0903] Further, when the facial muscle contracts, an oxygen
concentration change occurs in capillaries around the facial
muscle, so that the "detection of oxygen concentration change in
blood in surrounding areas" is enabled by use of near infrared
light, as shown in Table 6.
[0904] Moreover, when the facial muscle contracts or repeats
contraction and relaxation, heat generated from the inside of the
muscle reaches a surface of the face, thereby locally increasing
the temperature on the skin surface of the face. Accordingly, even
if the distribution of temperature on the skin surface of the face
is measured using a thermography, the detection of life activity
can be performed in regard to activities of the facial muscle.
7] Device or System with Detecting Section for Life Activity
Incorporated Therein 7.1) Packaged Device with Detecting Section
for Life Activity Incorporated Therein 7.1.1) Feature of Packaged
Device with Detecting Section for Life Activity Incorporated
Therein
[0905] Initially explained are features of exemplary embodiments of
a packaged device with a detecting section 101 for life activity
shown in FIG. 31 or 32 incorporated therein. Common features in the
exemplary embodiments are as follows: [0906] A detecting section
for life activity is incorporated in a packaged device; [0907] A
section for performing position detection (the first detection in
section 6.1.3) of a detected point for life activity is included .
. . An exemplary arrangement relationship between the section for
performing position detection (the first detection in section
6.1.3) and the detecting section for life activity is shown in FIG.
22. As a position detecting principle for a detected point for life
activity, the method described in FIGS. 20 to 22 and section 6.2 is
used. [0908] A result of position detection of the detected point
for life activity is fed back to the detecting section for life
activity . . . More specifically, as has been described in section
6.3, the objective lens 31 or the imaging lens 57 is moved based on
the result of position detection of the detected point for life
activity. The feedback to the detecting section for life activity
is not limited to this and may use other feedback methods. [0909] A
section for interpretation of life activity based on a life
activity detection signal obtained from the detecting section for
life activity is included . . . Specific interpretation of life
activity is performed by the methods shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, for
example. Here, in most cases, the interpretation of life activity
is performed in combination with a memory section and a CPU
(central processing unit). [0910] Based on life activity
information obtained as a result of the interpretation of life
activity, a specific process or operation is performed . . . A
plurality of options corresponding to the specific process or
operation are prepared in advance, and an optimum option is
selected in accordance with the life activity information (details
thereof will be described in section 7.1.4).
[0911] Thus, interpretation of life activity is performed in the
packaged device with a detecting section for life activity
incorporated therein, and an optimum process or operation to the
user is performed based on life activity information obtained
therefrom. However, in parallel with a series of processes as
above, a life activity detection signal or life activity
information obtained in the packaged device and a content of the
process or operation performed on the user may be stored in the
data base S30 (see FIGS. 38 to 40) in a server via networks.
[0912] As has been described in section 6.5, abundant data
accumulation in the data base S30 is necessary to increase accuracy
of the interpretation of life activity. For this purpose, the
packaged device may be connected to the network appropriately to
download software of life activity interpretation (or a part
corresponding to the data base S30 in the software) based on the
updated data base S30. In this case, the present exemplary
embodiment also includes such a business model that a maintenance
contract is made with the user at the time of purchase of the
packaged device, so that charge for the download of the latest
software of life activity interpretation (or a part corresponding
to the data base S30 in the software) is collected from the user.
Further, as a download method of the software of life activity
interpretation, a medium such as CD-ROM (DVD-ROM or BD-ROM) or a
USB memory may be used instead of using the network.
[0913] Further, as the specific process or operation, the present
exemplary embodiment performs: [0914] an operation of the driving
section or [0915] supply of specific information. Alternatively,
other processes or operations may be performed based on the life
activity information.
[0916] As a method for the supply of the specific information to
the user, this exemplary embodiment performs any of the following
methods: [0917] screen display, [0918] audio output, [0919]
printout (a printing process) and [0920] data storage. However, the
method is not limited to them, and other method for the supply of
information may be used. 7.1.2) Exemplary Embodiment of Packaged
Device with Combination of Detecting Section for Life Activity and
Driving Section
[0921] The following describes an exemplary embodiment in which the
packaged device with a detecting section for life activity
incorporated therein performs the operation of the driving section
as the specific process or operation as described in section
7.1.1.
Exemplary Embodiment 1 of Packaged Device with Combination of
Detecting Section for Life Activity and Driving Section
[0922] This exemplary embodiment has a feature in that the
detecting section for life activity is attached to a driving seat
in a vehicle such as an automobile, a train, and an aircraft, and a
risk aversion process is started in a short time at the time of
sensing danger. This consequently improves the safety of the
vehicle by the prevention of danger largely.
[0923] For example, during driving of a car, it will take about 0.1
to 0.4 s for a driver to push a brake pedal after the driver senses
danger. A car movement during this time delay increases the danger
of car crash. Accordingly, if a risk aversion process can be
started without causing this time delay of about 0.1 to 0.4 s, the
safety will be increased. When the driver senses danger and feels
tense, it is estimated that a front part of the cingulate gyrus is
suddenly activated (see Rita Carter: Mapping the Mind (Phoenix,
1998) p. 312). In view of this, such a sudden activation of this
cingulate gyrus is detected by the detecting section for life
activity. A "measuring item" at the time of interpreting a life
activity detection signal output from the detecting section for
life activity corresponds to the "awakening/turgescence" in the
explanation in section 6.5.2, and an equivalent level 172 for the
"emergency recognition" will be evaluated as an evaluation factor
171 in the measuring item. A result of this interpretation of life
activity is output to an engine and a control circuit of brakes.
Just after the sensing of danger (at the time when the equivalent
level 172 for the "emergency recognition" as the evaluation factor
171 exceeds a specific value), a start of a brake operation and
braking of driving by activation of engine braking are performed
automatically. Here, this driving brake operation corresponds to
the concrete example of the "specific process or operation"
described in section 7.1.1.
[0924] As an alternative to the above exemplary embodiment, all
transportation means may include the detecting section for life
activity as an applied embodiment of the packaged device.
Exemplary Embodiment 2 of Packaged Device with Combination of
Detecting Section for Life Activity and Driving Section
[0925] In this exemplary embodiment, the packaged device may be
applied to the field of nursing or assistance or the field of
movement support, thereby yielding an effect that the convenience
of the user is improved by taking advantage of the feature of "the
detection of life activity by a non-contact method."
[0926] For example, a conventional HAL has such a problem that a
burden of attaching measuring sections (18 electrodes in total) to
the body of the user is large. In order to solve the problem, the
detecting section for life activity of the present exemplary
embodiment which can detect life activity in a non-contact manner
is used in substitution for the electrodes.
[0927] This detection of life activity is performed such that
activation of the neuromuscular junction 5 relative to muscles of
legs (the changing of the membrane potential) or a potential
changing 27 of the muscle fiber membrane (FIGS. 1 and 3) which
occurs subsequent to the activation is detected using near infrared
light/infrared light. The "measuring item" set at the time of
interpretation of life activity herein corresponds to the "motor
component" in the explanation in section 6.5.2. A result of this
interpretation is input into the driving section directly. When the
life activity detection signal is processed as such, the following
series of operations are performed: "when a user strains the
muscles of legs, a signal thereof is detected by the detecting
section for life activity and the driving section is controlled to
move the foot." This operation of moving a foot by controlling the
driving section corresponds to another concrete example of the
"specific process or operation" described in section 7.1.1.
[0928] In this exemplary embodiment, this detecting section for
life activity is embedded in a part such as pants for covering up
the legs. Further, instead of fixing reinforcement metal fittings
(supporting metal fittings) to the leg with a belt like the
conventional HAL, the user sits on a part (a stool part)
corresponding to a saddle of a bicycle, so that easiness of
attachment and detachment is enhanced.
[0929] As an alternative to the above exemplary embodiment, the
detecting section for life activity may be provided in any
apparatuses used in the field of nursing or assistance or the field
of movement support as an applied embodiment.
[0930] Further, it is not necessary to limit to the fields as
described in the exemplary embodiments 1 and 2 as above, and the
packaged device can be applied such that the detecting section for
life activity is provided in any apparatuses having a drive
system.
7.1.3) Exemplary Embodiment of Packaged Device with Combination of
Detecting Section for Life Activity and Information Providing
Section
[0931] The following describes an exemplary embodiment in which the
packaged device with a detecting section for life activity
incorporated therein performs the operation of the driving section
as the specific process or operation as described in section
7.1.1.
Exemplary Embodiment 1 of Packaged Device with Combination of
Detecting Section for Life Activity and Information Providing
Section
[0932] If it is possible to provide any communication method for
communicating with a person who has a problem with the throat or a
person who cannot speak because of decreased strength due to
serious illness, that will be a great help to not only the person
himself/herself but also people around him/her. In the exemplary
embodiment explained herein, "an image or language occurring to a
user" is generated from a life activity detection signal obtained
from the detecting section for life activity, and a result thereof
is exhibited to the user or people around the user by an
information providing section. This can provide an unconventional
and new communication method, thereby attaining close communication
between the user and people around the user.
[0933] It is said that a human has a visual area in the occipital
lobe (see F. H. Netter: The Netter Collection of Medical
Illustrations Vol. 1 Nervous System, Part 1, Anatomy and Physiology
(Elsevier, Inc., 2003) Section 8), and a sentence to speak is
assembled in a broca's area in the left brain (see Rita Carter:
Mapping the Mind (Phoenix, 1998) p. 250). In view of this, an
action potential state (an action potential distribution or a time
dependent variation thereof) of a neuron in this visual area or the
broca's area is detected. As a "measuring item" at this time, the
"recollection (content intended to be expressed or occurring
image)" is selected among the explanation in section 6.5.2.
[0934] Further, an evaluation factor 171 in the measuring item
corresponds to a "specific word" occurring to the user,
"collaboration between words (corresponding to a sentence obtained
by joining words), or a "specific shape (image)." Particularly, as
a feature of this exemplary embodiment, it is necessary to generate
two types of life activity information through time as a group of
the evaluation factors 171, i.e., (1) a content of "an image or
language (including a sentence) occurring to the user" and (2)
"determination of right/wrong" ("yes" for confirmation of
correctness or "no" for pointing out an error).
[0935] A specific interpretation method of a life activity
detection signal corresponds to the explanation in section 6.5.3.4
with reference to FIG. 39. Here, the generation of life activity
information performed in step 33 in FIG. 39 corresponds to
generation of (1) a content of "an image or language (including a
sentence) occurring to the user." Further, the "handling process
based on life activity information" shown in step 34 corresponds to
"provision of specific information (=life activity information) to
the user" as shown in section 7.1.1. A concrete method of this is
to exhibit, on a display placed at a location where the user can
see, the content of "an image or language (including a sentence)
occurring to the user" in (1) obtained as a result of
interpretation of life activity. Just after that, the user thinks
of whether the exhibited content is right or not ("yes" or "no") in
head. At that time, the content that the user thinks of in head is
detected again (corresponding to the operation (S35) of the second
detection of life activity in FIG. 39).
[0936] Accordingly, the life activity information generated in step
37 in FIG. 39 indicates a "determination result of right/wrong" in
(2) as above. Here, if the content exhibited on the display is
wrong, the above step is repeated. On the other hand, if the
content exhibited on the display is right, the content exhibited on
this display is then provided to people around the user by use of
an information providing section. The method of providing
information to the people around the user is not limited to the
screen display, but may be an audio output, a printout (a printing
process), or data storage, as shown in section 7.1.1.
Exemplary Embodiment 2 of Packaged Device with Combination of
Detecting Section for Life Activity and Information Providing
Section
[0937] This exemplary embodiment is an applied embodiment of
<Exemplary Embodiment 1 of packaged device with combination of
detecting section for life activity and information providing
section> as described above. This exemplary embodiment is the
same as the above steps to the generation of the content of "an
image or language (including a sentence) occurring to the user" in
(1) by interpreting a life activity detection signal. This
exemplary embodiment (applied embodiment) has a feature in that the
life activity information thus obtained is considered as a "user
request," and a service (correspondence process/operation) in
accordance with the user request is provided to the user. Exemplary
alternatives of this process/operation corresponding to the service
to be provided to the user include, for example, [0938] "drink or
food service" in a case where the life activity information
includes "thirst or hunger of the user," [0939] "assist to the
restroom" in a case where the life activity information includes
"excretion desire of the user," and the like. Further, in this
another exemplary embodiment, "a service content to be provided to
the user" is shown on information providing means (a display placed
so that the user can see)" and the user is asked about "whether
he/she requests the service or not." When the user requests the
service, [0940] in case of a packaged device which does not include
a driving section, the "request content is exhibited" to people
around the user by use of the information providing section, and
[0941] in case of a packaged device including a driving section,
the packaged device "provides the service" requested by the
user.
[0942] Note that it is not necessary to limit the present exemplary
embodiment to the above exemplary embodiments 1 and 2, and such an
applied embodiment is included that the detecting section for life
activity is provided in any apparatus having the information
providing means.
7.1.4) Exemplary Embodiment of Selection of Optimum Process or
Operation Method Based on Life Activity Information
[0943] With reference to FIG. 43 explained is one method for
selecting an optimum process/operation in a case where there are a
plurality of alternatives of the process/operation corresponding to
the service to be provided to the user, as shown in <Exemplary
Embodiment 2 of packaged device with combination of detecting
section for life activity and information providing section>
described above.
[0944] As has been already explained in section 6.5.2 with
reference to FIG. 37, a plurality of evaluation factors 171-1 to
171-N are set in advance for each "measuring item **," and a value
PI indicative of an equivalent level 172 with respect to each
evaluation factor 171-1 is included in life activity information.
In the meantime, assume a case where a plurality of
processes/operations 178-1 to 178-M are predetermined as candidates
of a service to be provided to the user. A weighting value HjI for
each evaluation factor 171-1 per process/operation 178-j is set in
advance with respect to this condition at a device side (FIG.
43(a)).
[0945] Then, .SIGMA.HjiPi (a value obtained by adding results of
multiplying HiI by PI from i=1 to N) is calculated for each
process/operation 178-j in regard to input life activity
information, and a resultant value is assumed a determination value
of the process/operation 178-j (FIG. 43(b)). Then, a
process/operation 178-j indicating a largest determination value is
extracted as an optimum alternative.
[0946] Note that the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to
the method shown in FIG. 43, and an optimum process/operation 178
may be selected from life activity information by use of other
methods.
7.2) Network System and Business Model Using Detecting Section for
Life Activity.
[0947] Section 7.1 has described mainly exemplary embodiments of
the packaged device including a detecting section for life
activity. This section will explain a network system using a
detecting section for life activity and a business model to which
the network system is applied, as another exemplary embodiment.
[0948] The present exemplary embodiment explained herein (section
7.2) has a large feature in that: with regard to a service activity
performed in accordance with a result of biosis activity
measurement (see section 6.1.3 for the definition of the term), the
following layers are separated completely on the network:
[A] a layer to detect a life activity to generate a life activity
detection signal; [B] a layer to analyze the life activity
detection signal to generate life activity information; and [C] a
layer to generate an appropriate service based on the life activity
information, and further, [D] interfacing information between
respective layers is transmittable (in an encrypted state in
consideration of prevention of personal data leak) via the network
(the Internet). As a result of this, it becomes easy for anyone to
newly enter into only a specific layer without a need to know
processing methods in the other layers. As such, a barrier to entry
into each layer is low, and therefore anyone (any company) can
easily obtain a business opportunity on the Internet. Accordingly,
if many people (or suppliers) participate in these layers, very
inexpensive services can be provided to users.
7.2.1) Outline of Whole Network System Using Detecting Section for
Life Activity
[0949] The outline of a whole network system using a detecting
section 101 for life activity in the present exemplary embodiment
is explained with reference to FIG. 44.
[0950] Here, "[A] a layer to detect a life activity to generate a
life activity detection signal" as mentioned above corresponds to a
"user-side front end." This user-side front end is constituted by a
life detecting division 218 including a life detecting section 220,
a user-side control system 217, and a user-side drive system 216.
Further, the life detecting section 220 includes a detecting
section 101 for life activity (see section 6.1.3). However, the
present exemplary embodiment is not limited to the above, and
collecting means of every information related to the user as well
as detection of life activity or every service executing means for
executing a provided service 244 to the user based on life activity
information, and control means related to them may be included in
the user-side front end as constituents.
[0951] The process in "[B] a layer to interpret the life activity
detection signal to generate life activity information" is
performed by a "mind communication provider 211," and a process in
"[C] a layer to generate an appropriate service based on the life
activity information" is performed by a "mind service distributor
212."
[0952] Further, the present exemplary embodiment has a feature in
that an original mind connection layer 202 is structured on a
conventional internet layer 201. This mind connection layer 202
indicates a network environment on software which just uses a
conventional Internet environment on hardware and in which a life
activity detection signal 248 with event information or its related
information is transferred. That is, this can be interpreted as
kind of a community related to biosis activity measurement formed
on the internet layer 201 (an Internet environment), and this layer
can be built in a specific domain in the network environment.
Alternatively, a software network environment in which the life
activity detection signal 248 with event information or its related
information is set to be automatically transferred to an address
designated by a mind communication provider 211 may be called a
"mind connection layer 202 in a narrow sense."
[0953] In order to build this "mind connection layer 202 in a
narrow sense" more specifically, there is a method in which to
embed, in a display screen 250 to a user to form a home page on the
Web that anyone can see, a command (for example, a Send Detection
Signal command described in section 8.3) to:
(1) judge whether a life activity is detected in the user
environment; and (2) when the life activity is detectable, transfer
a life activity detection signal 248 with event information to the
address designated by the mind communication provider 211. In order
to embed the command in the home page on the Web, Web API
(Application Interface) described by JavaScript is usable, for
example.
[0954] Accordingly, a method for building the mind connection layer
202 on the internet layer 201 includes the following processes:
.alpha.) participation members in the mind connection layer 202 are
gathered . . . the participation members will be mind service
distributors 212 including mind communication providers 211 and
users 213 who consent to measurement of biosis activity (to receive
a specific service 244 to be provided); .beta.) various controls
are embedded into a home page (a display screen 250 to a user) on
the Internet that a mind service distributor 212 provides, which
controls include: [0955] moving the life detecting section 220 so
as to perform detection 24 of life activity to a user 213, [0956]
transferring a life activity detection signal 248 with event
information to an address designated by the mind communication
provider 211, and [0957] transmitting life activity information 249
with event information to an address designated by the mind service
distributor 212; .gamma.) the user 213 owns a life detecting
division 218 . . . paid provision from the mind communication
provider 211 to the user 213 based on the contract; and .delta.)
the mind service distributor 212 prepares for an environment which
can provide an optimum service to the user 213 based on the life
activity information 249 with event information.
[0958] The following describes a flow of signal information in the
network system, with reference to FIG. 44.
[0959] The life detecting division 218 in the user-side front end
includes a life detecting section 220, in which the detecting
section 101 for life activity is provided (see section 6.1.3). The
detecting section 101 for life activity, which has been explained
in sections 6.2 to 6.4, performs detection 241 of life activity on
the user 213. A life activity detection signal 248 with event
information is automatically transferred to an address designated
in the command.
[0960] Then, from the life activity detection signal 248 with event
information transferred via the mind connection layer 202 and the
internet layer 201, life activity information 249 with event
information is generated in an interpretation section 277 of life
activity according to the method as described in section 6.5. In
this exemplary embodiment, the life activity information with event
information is transferred to the mind service distributor 212 not
via the mind connection layer 202, but only via the internet layer
201 (a network line used for the normal Internet). Thus, transfer
to the mind service distributor 212 is performed not via the mind
connection layer 202, but only via the internet layer 201, so that
a transfer speed of the life activity information 249 with event
information is increased and the convenience of the mind service
distributor 212 is improved. Then, based on the life activity
information 249 with event information decrypted in the mind
service distributor 212, the user 213 receives an optimum service
244 selected by the method explained in section 7.1.4, for
example.
[0961] When the user 213 receives the service 244, the user 213
makes all payment 252 for the toll, which is a counter value, to
the mind communication provider 211. After that, by an operation in
a charging/profit-sharing processing section 231, profit sharing
253 is automatically made from the mind communication provider 211
to the mind service distributor 212.
[0962] FIG. 44 describes only one user 213 for the whole network
system using the detecting section for life activity. However, the
present exemplary embodiment is not limited to that, and a
community such as chat or a TV conference system may be formed
between a plurality of users 213 located in distinct places via the
mind service distributor 212, for example. In this case, life
activity information 249 of a counterpart is displayed on a part of
the screen, and so that the users can have communication while
understanding an occasional feeling of the counterpart. In a
conventional email environment using texts mainly or a TV
conference, since only a few amount of information is transmitted
to people located at a distant place, misinterpretation or
misunderstanding of feelings have occurred frequently. In contrast,
in the present exemplary embodiment, since the "occasional feeling
information of a counterpart" is sent with an intensity level of
the feeling, the user can immediately know "how much angry the
counterpart is," or the like, so that a smooth human relationship
can be easily established.
[0963] Further, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to
FIG. 44, and includes any system in which information (e.g., the
life activity detection signal 248 or the life activity information
249) related to biosis activity measurement is transmitted via the
network or any device which enables the system. In this case, the
provision of the service 244 to the user 213 is not essential, and
the present exemplary embodiment may be a system to transmit
information related to biosis activity measurement without
providing the service 244 to the user 213 or a device enabling the
system.
7.2.2) User-Side Front End
7.2.2.1) Role of User-Side Front End
[0964] A role of the user-side front end is such that "in
accordance with Web API preset on the display screen 250 to the
user which is formed by the mind service distributor, detection 241
of life activity is performed on the user 213 so as to collect
event information B242 related to an environment surrounding the
user 213, and a result thereof is transferred as a life activity
detection signal 248 with event information to the mind
communication provider 211."
[0965] Then, based on the life activity information 249 with event
information, the mind service distributor 212 provides various
services to the user 213. In the meantime, an "execution of a
service to be performed directly on the user" in accordance with a
content of the service 244 to be provided which is transferred from
the mind service distributor 212 via the network (via the internet
layer 201) is also a large role of the user-side front end.
[0966] As a specific content of this execution of a service to be
performed directly on the user, this exemplary embodiment
performs:
(1) specific information provision 245 to the user 213 by screen
display (or audio output) via a display screen control section 225;
(2) provision of a service 244 to the user 213 by an operation of a
user-side drive system 216 subjected to a remote control 251 via
the internet layer 201 (via network communications); or the like.
Alternatively, in the present exemplary embodiment, this user-side
front end may perform any other service provisions based on the
life activity information obtained from the user.
7.2.2.2) Detailed Function of User-Side Front End
[0967] The user-side front end has a configuration shown in FIG. 44
to perform the roles as described in section 7.2.2.1. However, the
present exemplary embodiment is not limited to the configuration
shown in FIG. 44, but may have any configuration which can perform
some part of the roles explained in section 7.2.2.1.
[0968] Concrete examples of a user-side control system 217 in the
user-side front end include a personal computer, a portable
terminal, a mobile phone, and a display (television) having a
communication function. Alternatively, any apparatus including some
of the requirements shown in FIG. 44 may be considered as the
user-side control system 217.
[0969] The user-side control system 217 is provided with an
internet network control section 223, so that homepage information
on the Internet (Web) can be collected via the network (the
internet layer 201). This collected homepage screen can be
exhibited to the user 213 by the display screen control section
225. A user input section 226 is provided with a keyboard, a touch
panel, or a microphone, so that the user 213 can perform input such
as key-in, a handwriting input, or a voice input.
[0970] In this exemplary embodiment, the homepage screen exhibited
to the user includes a display screen 250 provided to the user by
the mind service distributor 212. As described in section 6.5.3.4
with reference to FIG. 39, event information A243 corresponding to
the stimulation (S21) from the outside to perform the detection
(S22) of life activity is often included in this display screen 250
to the user. Accordingly, the user-side control system 217 includes
an extraction section 224 of event information A. The extraction
section 224 interprets (decodes) a content of the display screen
250 to the user, which is received by the internet network control
section 223, and extracts a content of the event information A243
therefrom and transfers the content to the life detecting division
218.
[0971] In the meantime, the life detecting section 220 of the
user-side front end as shown in FIG. 44 is provided with the
detecting section 101 for life activity (see section 6.1.3 for the
name of each section and the functional relationship), but the
display screen 250 to the user from the mind service distributor
212 can be transmitted to a user environment which is not provided
with the life detecting section 220. Therefore, as has been
described in (1) in section 7.2.1, a command to "judge whether a
life activity can be detected in the user environment" (a Check
Mind Detection command, which will be described later in section
8.3, for example) is set in Web API in the display screen 250 to
the user, in advance.
[0972] Accordingly, the user-side control system 217 checks on
whether the life detecting section 220 is provided in a user-side
front end, in response to the command instruction. In a case where
the life detecting section 220 is not provided, a different
corresponding screen is displayed according to a setting command
(for example, a Change Mindless Display command, which will be
described in section 8.3) within the display screen 250 to the
user. In this case, since only information input by the user 213
via the user input section 226 is transmitted to the mind service
distributor 212, only user input information 254 without a
detection signal will be transmitted to the mind service
distributor 212 from the internet network control section 223.
[0973] On the other hand, in a case where the user-side front end
is provided with the life detecting section 220, a life activity
detection signal 248 with event information output from a
signal/information multiplexing section 222 in the life detecting
division 218 is transmitted to the mind service distributor 212 via
the internet network control section 223.
[0974] The life detecting division 218 can have various
configurations such as: an externally-attachable configuration
connectable with the user-side control system 217 via a connection
terminal such as a USB terminal; and a configuration incorporated
into the user-side control system 217. In addition to the above,
the life detecting division 218 also can have other various
configurations, which will be explained in section 7.2.2.3.
[0975] A role of the life detecting division 218 is such that
"detection 241 of life activity is performed on the user 213, a
state of the user or its environment is observed, and a result
thereof is output to the internet network control section 223 as a
life activity detection signal 248 with event information."
[0976] Here, a result of the observation of the state of a life
object or the environment of the life object, performed in step 26
in FIG. 39, corresponds to the event information B242 described in
FIG. 44. Further, as has been described in section 6.5.2, in a case
where the event information B242 is collected using a part of the
position monitoring section regarding a detected point for life
activity (the camera lens 42 and the two-dimensional photodetector
43 shown in FIG. 22), a part of the detection section 221 of event
information B also serves as the position monitoring section
regarding a detected point for life activity in the life detecting
section 220. Other concrete examples of the detection section 221
of event information B include a temperature sensor and a humidity
sensor, as has been described in section 6.5.2. On the other hand,
the "information related to an internal state, directly input by
the user 213" as described in section 6.5.2 is categorized into
event information A243 here.
[0977] The signal/information multiplexing section 222 multiplexes
(information synthesis) a life activity detection signal output
(encrypted) by the life detecting section 220, event information
B242 output from the detection section 221 of event information B,
and event information A243 output from the extraction section 224
of event information A, so as to generate a life activity detection
signal 248 with event information, and transmits it to the internet
network control section 223. Here, from the viewpoint of protection
of personal data, the event information A243 and the event
information B242 are also encrypted in the life activity detection
signal 248 with event information. In the meantime, in the present
exemplary embodiment, the event information A243, the event
information B242, and the life activity detection signal thus
encrypted are divided into a plurality of packets along the
standard of the Internet Protocol. Accordingly, in the
signal/information multiplexing section 222, the signal and the
information are mixed (synthesized) by multiplexing per packet
unit.
[0978] The user-side drive system indicates "means for providing a
service 244 `by use of a drive system" to the user 213 (a
counterpart intended by the user 213) which service 244 is
performed in accordance with life activity information 249."
Particularly, a "device including a driving section which allows
remote control 251 via the internet layer 201 (the Internet)"
corresponds to the user-side drive system 216. Here, concrete
examples of the user-side drive system 216 include: a simple drive
system which allows remote control 251 such as "on/off of a light
switch in a room which the user uses;" a device having an advanced
driving mechanism as a drive system, such as an "assistance device
including a driving section for an electric wheelchair or a
motorized bed" and a "housekeeping device including a driving
section, such as a cleaning robot;" and a "printer" to tell an
intention of the user 213 to the third person. Alternatively, the
user-side drive system 216 includes any means for providing a
service 244 to the user 213 or a counterpart intended by the user
by use of a drive system.
7.2.2.3) Exemplary Embodiment of Integration of Life Detecting
Division and Applied Embodiment Using the Same
[0979] This section deals with supplemental explanation about the
life detecting division 218 shown in FIG. 44, various
configurations including the life detecting division, and applied
embodiments using the same.
[0980] Although not illustrated herein, the life detecting section
220 included in the life detecting division 218 is constituted by,
as has been described in section 6.5.2, the detecting section 101
for life activity shown in, for example, FIGS. 31 and 32, the
position monitoring section regarding a detected point for life
activity shown in, for example, FIGS. 20 to 22, and a
connection/control section for connecting them to perform control
in a disciplined manner.
[0981] Further, only one life detecting division 218 is described
in FIG. 44, but the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to
this, and a plurality of life detecting divisions 218 having
different configurations can be provided in the user-side front
end, as described later.
[0982] Next will be explained an exemplary product configuration in
which the life detecting division 218 is incorporated and an
applied embodiment using the configuration.
<The Life Detecting Division 218 Having a Configuration of an
Externally-Attaching Device and Connected to the User-Side Control
System 217 Via a Connection Terminal>
[0983] An optical system for life activity detection in the
detecting section 101 for life activity incorporated in the life
detecting section 220 and a photodetector used therein employ the
configurations as illustrated in FIGS. 26 to 28, and detect
movement of face muscles of the user as explained in section 6.5.4,
so as to measure an emotional reaction of the user. At this time,
the position monitoring section regarding a detected point for life
activity uses the principle illustrated in FIG. 22. The marked
position 40 on the life-object surface illustrated in FIG. 22
corresponds to a face position of the user. Accordingly, when the
user 213 operates the user-side control system 217 (e.g., a
personal computer or a portable terminal), it is necessary to
provide the life detecting division 218 so that the face of the
user 213 can be detected with the two-dimensional photodetector
43.
[0984] A measuring item set at the time of interpreting the life
activity detection signal 248 is any of the "emotional reaction,"
the "involuntary decision (unconscious state)," and the
"attraction," in many cases (see section 6.5.2).
[0985] In a case where the "attraction" is set as the measuring
item under the conditions as above, the present exemplary
embodiment can be used for "mail order" or "marketing research."
For example, a mail order program is broadcasted on the display
screen 250 provided to the user by the mind service distributor 212
and the "attraction" is judged every time a new product is
introduced, so that an efficient marketing research can be
performed. Further, a "seriousness level of the user" can be found
when the user 213 makes an inquiry to a specific product, so that
efficient correspondence can be achieved.
[0986] On the other hand, in a case where the "emotional reaction"
or the "involuntary decision (unconscious state)" is set as the
measuring item under the conditions as above, an appropriate
correspondence process according to an occasional feeling of the
user 213, such as guidance or consultation/advice, can be
performed. For example, if it is found that the user 213 is upset
or at a loss because the user 213 does not know how to operate a
homepage which the user 213 sees for the first time, the screen can
be automatically changed into a guidance screen to the user 213.
This will largely improve the convenience to the user 213.
<Baby Crib with the Life Detecting Division 218 Incorporated
Therein>
[0987] Parents having a newborn baby for the first time often have
difficulty dealing with the baby when he/she is crying. At that
time, if the parents know a state of the baby and how to deal with
the baby in real time (immediately), that would be a great help to
the parents, and the parents will have great brief in the mind
service distributor 212. In this exemplary embodiment, when a
newborn baby is laid on a crib with the life detecting division 218
incorporated therein and measurement is requested, the measurement
of biosis activity is performed automatically. As a result of this,
the state of the baby can be estimated, thereby allowing a service
244 of informing the user of the state of the baby and of advising
the user of how to deal with the baby in such a state.
[0988] Even in this case, the optical system for life activity
detection in the detecting section 101 for life activity
incorporated in the life detecting section 220 and the
photodetector used herein employ the configurations as illustrated
in FIGS. 26 to 28. Further, at this time, the position monitoring
section regarding a detected point for life activity uses the
principle illustrated in FIG. 22. The marked position 40 on the
life-object surface illustrated in FIG. 22 corresponds to the head
of the newborn baby. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the life
detecting division 218 so that the head of the newborn baby can be
detected with the two-dimensional photodetector 43 when the baby is
laid on the baby crib.
[0989] Meanwhile, a presumable reason why the newborn cries is as
follows: A) a regional pain due to disease, B) a notification of
excretion, C) a request (dependence) of love (embrace) to a parent,
D) a complaint of hunger or thirst, or the like. Here, when an
internal regional pain or discomfort in the excretion occurs, a
somatosensory area is activated locally (see F. H. Netter: The
Netter Collection of Medical Illustrations Vol. 1 Nervous System,
Part 1, Anatomy and Physiology (Elsevier, Inc., 2003) P. 166).
Accordingly, if correlation data between an activated pattern in
the somatosensory area and a place where pain or discomfort occurs
are accumulated in advance by the method explained in section
6.5.3.2 with reference to FIG. 38, (A) a place of the pain or (B)
an excretion state can be estimated from the activated pattern in
the somesthetic system. As a measuring item in this case, the
"somesthetic system" is set (see section 6.5.2).
[0990] On the other hand, when the emotional reaction of the
newborn baby is measured by the detection movement of face muscles
of a user, as has been explained in section 6.5.4, the request of
love (embrace) to a parent from a feeling of dependence in (C) can
be estimated. Further, as a measuring item in this case, the
"emotional reaction" is set (see section 6.5.2).
[0991] If any of (A) to (C) is not applied, it can be estimated
that the reason for the baby crying is the complaint of hunger or
thirst in (D), as a result of elimination of the other options.
<Pillow or Head Part of Bed in Bedroom with the Life Detecting
Division 218 Incorporated Therein>
[0992] There is a difference in a brain wave between awakening and
sleeping of a human. A sleep state of a user is measured using the
detection method of the present exemplary embodiment which can be
performed in a non-contact manner in substitution for the
electroencephalography, so that a service 244 such as "automatic
turning off of a light and music in the room when the user 213
falls asleep" and "automatic turning on of a light in the room when
the user 213 wakes up."
[0993] Even in this case, the optical system for life activity
detection in the detecting section 101 for life activity
incorporated in the life detecting section 220 and the
photodetector used herein employ the configurations as illustrated
in FIGS. 26 to 28. Further, at this time, the position monitoring
section regarding a detected point for life activity uses the
principle illustrated in FIG. 22. The marked position 40 on the
life-object surface illustrated in FIG. 22 corresponds to the head
of the user 213. Accordingly, it is necessary to provide the life
detecting division 218 so that the head of the user 213 can be
detected with the two-dimensional photodetector 43.
[0994] Further, as a measuring item in this case, the
"awakening/turgescence" is set (see section 6.5.2).
[0995] Judgment on whether a light and music in the room are turned
on or off based on a result of measurement of biosis activity is
performed by the method explained in section 7.1.4 with the use of
FIG. 43.
<Entrance Door or Wall or Window of Entrance Hall with the Life
Detecting Division 218 Incorporated Therein>
[0996] The present exemplary embodiment is usable for security. In
this case, it is necessary to provide the life detecting division
218 so that the face of a person standing at the entrance or the
door of the entrance can be detected with the two-dimensional
photodetector 43. The detection of movement of face muscles of a
user, as described in section 6.5.4, is performed so as to measure
an emotional reaction of the user (the "emotional reaction" is set
as a measuring item). Thereby, it can be estimated whether or not
the person standing at the entrance or the door of the entrance
"has malice" or "is going to harm to people in the house." This
will be useful in terms of security.
<Street Surveillance Camera with the Life Detecting Division 218
Incorporated Therein>
[0997] The above exemplary embodiment is useful for security
measures in a private house. As an applied embodiment of the above
exemplary embodiment, the life detecting division 218 is
incorporated in a surveillance camera provided at a place such as
an intersection where people gather, so that the life detecting
division 218 can be used for crime prevention in the public place.
That is, people having malice aforethought or malice such as
pickpocket/shoplifting are found among people walking on streets
and kept chased with cameras. This makes it possible to prevent
accidents or to record occurrences of accidents. As a result, the
peace and order in the public place are improved.
<Desk or Chair with the Life Detecting Division 218 Incorporated
Therein>
[0998] The above exemplary embodiment is usable for a teacher to
know a degree of learning eagerness of students in school (whether
students listen to what the teacher says), for a boss to evaluate
performance of a subordinate in the company, or the like.
[0999] In this case, it is necessary to provide the life detecting
division 218 so that the face or head of a person sitting in front
of a desk or sitting on a chair can be detected with the
two-dimensional photodetector 43. Further, the optical system for
life activity detection in the detecting section 101 for life
activity incorporated in the life detecting section 220 and the
photodetector used herein employ the configurations as illustrated
in FIGS. 26 to 28. Further, at this time, the position monitoring
section regarding a detected point for life activity uses the
principle illustrated in FIG. 22. As a measuring item, the
"emotional reaction" or the "awakening/turgescence" is set (see
section 6.5.2). In a case of measuring the "emotional reaction,"
the detection of movement of face muscles of a user is performed as
described in section 6.5.4. On the other hand, in a case of
measuring the "awakening/turgescence," the activation level in the
cingulate gyrus is measured as has been explained in <Exemplary
Embodiment 1> of section 7.1.2.
[1000] As shown in the above exemplary embodiments, new applied
embodiments can be provided by incorporating the life detecting
division 218 into various devices (or products). However, the
configuration is not limited to the product configurations shown in
the above exemplary embodiments, and the life detecting division
218 can be provided in "any configuration which can be provided
(also movable) at a place where people or animals can approach or
make contact with so as to measure biosis activity."
7.2.3) Mind Communication Provider
7.2.3.1) Role of Mind Communication Provider
[1001] The following shows roles of the mind communication provider
211. The largest role is:
[A] Interpretation of a life activity detection signal 248 with
event information transmitted via the mind connection layer 202 and
the internet layer 201, and transmission of life activity
information 249 with event information obtained as a result of the
interpretation to the mind service distributor 212 via the internet
layer 201. Other roles except for the above are as follows: [B]
Reception of a payment 252 for the toll from the user 213 and
profit-sharing 253 of a reasonable amount of the payment 252 to the
mind service distributor 212; [C] Technical support for the mind
service distributor 212 to perform the following processes on the
display screen 250 to the user: [1002] a method for performing
detection 241 of life activity on the user 213 and collection of
event information B242 by moving the life detecting section 220 or
the detection section 221 of event information B at the user-side
front end; [1003] a method for transmitting the life activity
detection signal 248 with event information to an address
designated by the mind communication provider 211; and [1004] a
method for forming/providing a display screen 250 to a next user to
whom specific information provision 245 can be performed based on
the life activity information 249 with event information obtained
from the mind communication provider 211, so as to perform an
optimum service 244 to the user 213; [D] Translation, into other
language, of the display screen 250 to the user provided by the
mind service distributor 212 . . . When the display screen 250 to
the user translated into other languages is posted on the Internet,
people around the world can receive the service 244 from the mind
service distributor 212; [E] Technical guidance or technical
support to the mind service distributor 212 as to how to perform
remote control 251 on a drive system to move the user-side drive
system 216; and [F] Maintenance of the mind connection layer.
[1005] The role [A] is executed by the interpretation section 227
of life activity in the mind communication provider 211 and
processed by the method explained in section 6.5, as shown in FIG.
44. At this time, the data base stored in the database storage area
228 is utilized.
[1006] The role [B] is handled by a charging/profit-sharing
processing section 231.
[1007] Further, the roles [C] to [E] are handled by a technical
support processing section 230 with respect to the mind service
distributor. In this case, expenses for the technical support
corresponding to [C] to [E] are collected from the mind service
distributor 212 in a route different from a route of "the payment
252 for the toll from the user 213.fwdarw.the profit-sharing" as
described in [B],
[1008] On the other hand, the role [F] is handled by a maintenance
processing section 229 of the mind connection layer.
7.2.3.2) Mechanism to Prevail Internet Service Using Life Activity
Information
[1009] As has been described in the beginning of section 7.2 before
the explanation of section 7.2.1, it is important to "reduce a
technical burden at the time when the mind service distributor 212
participates in the mind connection layer 202" so as to prevail the
Internet service using life activity information. Therefore, the
mind communication provider 211 performs the interpretation of a
life activity detection signal, which is accompanied with technical
difficulty, on behalf of the mind service distributor 212.
[1010] Further, a full-scale technical support corresponding to [C]
to [E] in section 7.2.3.1 and complicated charging duties
corresponding to [B] are also handled by the mind communication
provider 211.
[1011] As a result, anyone (including corporations) in the world
can participates as the mind service distributor 212 to propose an
original service 244 which users 213 jump at. Further, by setting a
business area on the internet layer 201 which does not require
shipping charges or personnel expenses, it is possible to restrain
service costs very much.
[1012] Further, a user 213 to receive the service 244 (to
participate in the mind connection layer 202) only requires "a
contract with the mind communication provider 211 (including the
setting of a charging method and a purchase contract of the life
detecting division 218)," which can be made on the Internet. This
can largely reduce a burden on the user 213.
[1013] As a result, if the service 244 that the user 213 expects
truly can be provided at a bargain price, the Internet service
using life activity information can be made widely available,
thereby enhancing the mind connection layer.
7.2.3.3) Business Model of Mind Communication Provider
[1014] A business model in the present exemplary embodiment has
such a feature that "based on life activity information 249
obtained as a result of measurement of biosis activity about a user
213 (a plurality of users 213), a payment 252 of the toll is made
in compensation for the service 244 to be provided to the user
213." Further, "the mind communication provider 211 receives the
payment 252 of the toll collectively, and then the mind
communication provider 211 provides profit sharing 253 to the mind
service distributor 212."
[1015] When this business model is adopted, the mind service
distributor 212 is released from the complicated duties of
"collecting payments for the toll from individual users 213," which
allows a large reduction in service charges to the users 213.
[1016] The following explains how a general user 213 participates
in the mind connection layer 202. First of all, a general user 213
makes a contract with the mind communication provider 211 and
determines a charging way (how to make a payment 252) or a service
content related to the mind connection layer 202 (what kind of
service the user 213 wants to receive from the mind service
distributor 212). At this time, the user 213 determines contents of
the life detecting division 218 and the user-side drive system 216
purchased from the mind communication provider 211.
[1017] The contract made between the user 213 and the mind
communication provider 211 or the determination of a life detecting
division 218 and a user-side drive system 216 to purchase from the
mind communication provider 211 is basically performed on the
Internet (using the internet layer 202), but alternatively, a
franchise of the mind communication provider 211 or a general
merchandising store of electric appliance may be used. Further, a
charging contract on the Internet (using the internet layer 202) is
made by a notification of an account number and a password from the
user 213, but alternatively, the user 213 may sign on automatic
debt transfer.
[1018] In the meantime, if a personal computer or a portable
terminal which the user 213 has already is used as the user-side
control system 217, the user 213 purchases only an external life
detecting division 218, connects it to the user-side control system
217 via a connection terminal such as a USB, and installs necessary
software in the personal computer or the portable terminal.
Further, if the user 213 wants to purchase a user-side control
system 217, the user 213 purchases a set of a user-side control
system 217 equipped with a life detecting division 218 and a
user-side drive system 216, which are connected with each
other.
[1019] When the user 213 receives the life detecting division 218
(or the user-side drive system 216) which the user 213 purchased
and necessary settings are completed, the user can use the mind
connection layer 202.
[1020] The payment 252 from the user 213 to the mind communication
provider 211 is made by withdrawal from a debit account number or
automatic withdrawal from an account monthly or every time the user
213 uses the service, based on the charging contract.
7.2.4) Mind Service Distributor
7.2.4.1) Role of Mind Service Distributor
[1021] Roles of the mind service distributor 212 are as follows:
[1022] to determine an optimum service 244 based on life activity
information 249 with event information and to provide the service
244 to the user 213; and [1023] to receive a service request from
the user 213 on the Internet.
[1024] In order to receive a service request from the user 213, a
display screen 250 to a user, which is a homepage screen of the
mind service distributor 212 to be posted on the Internet (the
internet layer 201), is formed. This screen is formed on the
premise of the detection 24 of life activity with respect to the
user 213. Accordingly, when the screen display/change setting
section 232 receives information 254 with no detection signal from
a user 213 who does not have a life detecting division 218, the
screen display/change setting section 232 changes the screen to a
display screen 250 corresponding to the user. In this case, the
screen display/change setting section 232 refuses life activity
information 249 with event information from the mind communication
provider 211, changes the screen to the display screen 250 to the
user corresponding to user input information 254 with no detection
signal input via a user input section 226, and performs specific
information provision 245 as a service 244 to the user 213.
[1025] On the other hand, if the user 213 owns a life detecting
division 218, a method for providing an optimum service 244 is
selected according to the method explained in section 7.1.4 with
reference to FIG. 43, based on life activity information 249 with
event information. There are three types of methods for providing
the service 244 from the mind service distributor 212.
[1026] A first method is such that the screen display/change
setting section 232 changes the display screen 250 to the user, and
performs specific information provision 245 to the user 213.
[1027] A second method is such that the remote control 251 to a
drive system is performed on a user-side drive system 216 by a
function of the remote operation section 233 of the drive system
and provides a service 244 to the user 213.
[1028] A last method is such that the direct-service content
determination section 234 operates to perform a direct service 247
by means of mail or dispatch as the service 244 to be provided to
the user 213. This corresponds to, for example, product delivery in
a case where the user 213 ordered a specific product on a
mail-order video played on the display screen 250 to the user.
Alternatively, this direct service 247 corresponds to a case where
lesion of a user 213 is found by life activity information 249 with
event information and a doctor or a helper is sent to the user
213.
[1029] In this exemplary embodiment, a biosis activity of the user
213 is measured appropriately, and therefore, even if a physical
condition of the user 213 changes, the change can be found
immediately, so that the user 213 can escape death. As such, this
exemplary embodiment can provide a large contribution to life
support. Accordingly, the present exemplary embodiment will be a
great help to health management or security for elderly people who
are living alone.
7.2.4.2) Business Model of Mind Service Distributor
[1030] A business model of the mind service distributor 212 is
"provision of a service 244 by use of measurement of biosis
activity (life activity information 249) and collection of counter
value thereof." Particularly, the mind service distributor 212 can
receive a technical support based on the contract with the mind
communication provider 211, so that the mind service distributor
212 does not need any knowledge about a measuring technique for
biosis activity or Web API, and can conduct business by just
"drafting of a service 244 to make a user 213 happy."
[1031] Further, since the mind communication provider 211 takes
charge of a charging contract with individual users 213, the mind
service distributor 212 can provide a service 244 without being
conscious of individual users 213.
[1032] However, such easiness that anyone can participate in the
mind connection layer 202 as the mind service distributor 212 has a
risk adversely. That is, it is also easy to participate in this
mind connection layer 202 to brew up some mischief. The following
shows an example thereof. Life activity information 249 with event
information is transmitted to the internet layer 201 in an
encrypted state, but is decrypted in the mind service distributor
212. Accordingly, there is such a risk that a heartless mind
service distributor 212 releases personal information of users 213
on the internet layer 201.
[1033] In order to prevent such a risk, it is necessary that even
third party organizations other than the mind communication
provider 211 monitor a utilization state of a life activity
detection signal 248 with event information or life activity
information 249 with event information so as to prevent abuses.
7.2.4.3) Exemplary Service of Mind Service Distributor
[1034] With reference to FIG. 45, the following explains an
exemplary embodiment of the service 244 to be provided to the user
213 from the mind service distributor 212 including an operation of
the life detecting section 220 working behind the scenes or the
mind communication provider 211.
[1035] At the time when the user 213 opens a display screen 250 to
a user formed by the mind service distributor 212 on the Web, or at
the time when the user 213 performs some sort of operation on the
screen 250, a start-up process (S51) is initiated. Just after that,
the life detecting section 220 starts its operation to initiate
detection 214 of life activity 241 with respect to the user 213.
Then, based on life activity information 249 with event information
obtained as a result thereof, an interface correspondence process
(S52) in accordance with a feeling of the user is initiated. After
that, a process of detection of life activity and collection of
event information B (S53) is performed in response to a request
from the user 213. A specific method of detection 241 of life
activity here and a principle thereof are based on the explanation
in sections 6.1 to 6.4. Subsequently, a generation process (S54) of
life activity information is performed in the interpretation
section 227 of life activity of the mind communication provider
211. Here, a generation method of life activity information and a
collection method of event information B are based on the
explanation in section 6.5. Subsequently, as a result thereof,
selection (determination) of a service form which is optimum for a
user and its execution process 1 (S55) are performed in the mind
service distributor 212. Then, at a stage where a service 244 to be
provided to the user 213 is performed, the detection 241 of life
activity is performed with respect to a reaction of the user 213
similarly to FIG. 39 (the operation of the second detection of life
activity (S35)), and an interface correspondence process (S52) in
accordance with a feeling of the user is performed as needed. Then,
a second selection (determination) of a service form which is
optimum for the user and its execution process 2 are performed
(S56) if necessary as a result of S52.
[1036] Next will be explained a detailed content about the
exemplary embodiment of FIG. 45 with regard to a specific applied
embodiment in combination of <Baby crib with the life detecting
division 218 incorporated therein> and <The life detecting
division 218 having a configuration of an externally-attaching
device and connected to the user-side control system 217 via a
connection terminal> as described in section 7.2.2.3.
[1037] As has been described in section 7.2.2.3, assume a case
where a parent having a newborn baby for the first time feels
awkward when the baby cries. This parent has two sets of life
detecting divisions 218 at home, and one of the sets is attached in
a baby crib. The other one of the sets is an externally-attaching
device connected to a personal computer corresponding to the
user-side control system 217 via a connection terminal (a USB
terminal), and is provided so as to be able to detect movement of
face muscles of a user 213 sitting down in front of this personal
computer.
[1038] Here, assume a case where the parent opens a homepage
established by a mind service distributor 212, for the first time,
to know "why the baby cries."
[1039] It is supposed herein that a Check Mind Detection command is
set in a display screen 250 to a user on Web API, and when the
detection of life activity cannot be performed, a Change Mindless
Display command is executed, so that respective commands of Display
Mind Searching, Start Mind Searching, Send Detection Signal, and
Send Mind Information are executed in succession when the detection
of life activity cannot be performed (see section 8.3).
[1040] A specific content of the start-up process (S51) in FIG. 45
is shown in FIG. 46. Initially, in accordance with the Check Mind
Detection command, the user-side control system 217 checks on
whether there is a life detecting division in the user-side front
end (S61). If there is no life detecting division 218 in the
user-side front end, the user-side control system 217 sends
information 254 without a detection signal to the mind service
distributor 212 via the internet network control section 223, and
changes a screen to a display screen which does not perform
detection of life activity, in accordance with the Change Mindless
Display command (S62). The screen thus changed is obtained such
that the display screen 250 to a user changes only in response to
user input information 254 without a detection signal.
[1041] On the other hand, even in a case where there is a life
detecting division 218 in the user-side front end, the user-side
control system 217 notifies, via the internet network control
section 223, the mind service distributor 212 that there is a
detection signal. Then, in accordance with the Check Mind Detection
command, it is determined whether detection of life activity is
performable using the life detecting division 218 (S63). This
indicates determination on whether there is a measuring subject
(user or the like) within a range detectable by the life detecting
section 220 and determination on whether a detection permission is
received from an examinee. As described above, the life detecting
division 218 at the side of the externally-attaching device is
provided so as to be able to detect movement of face muscles of the
user 213 sitting down in front of the user-side control system 217
(personal computer), and the other life detecting division 218 is
provided so that the head of the baby can be detected with a
two-dimensional photodetector 43 when the baby is laid on the baby
crib. However, when the user 213 does not sit down in front of the
user-side control system 217 and the baby is not laid in the baby
crib, life activities cannot be detected. In this exemplary
embodiment, in a case where either one of the life detecting
divisions 218 can operate on the user-side front end, the process
of detection 241 of life activity is initiated. However, if the
detection 241 of life activity cannot be performed in both of the
life detecting divisions 218, the mind service distributor 212 is
notified of information about that via the internet network control
section 223. Thereafter, the user is notified of the state where
the detection of life activity cannot be performed (S64). A
notification method at this time is comment representation or audio
representation on the display screen 250 to the user exhibited by
the mind service distributor 212. Alternatively, the user may be
notified by a representation function of the life detecting
division 218.
[1042] When it is confirmed that the user 213 sits down in front of
the user-side control system 217, the examinee (the user 213 in
this case) is inquired about whether detection of life activity can
be initiated or not. An inquiry method at this time also uses
comment representation or audio representation in the display
screen 250 to the user exhibited by the mind service distributor
212. When a permission for detection of life activity is obtained
from the user 213 as an examinee of the detection of life activity
via a user input section 226, the detection of life activity is
initiated using the life detecting division 218 at the
externally-attaching device side in accordance with the Start Mind
Searching command (S65), and the user is notified of the detection
of the life activity in accordance with the Display Mind Searching
command (S66). A specific method to notify the user (S66) is such
that a screen like "Mind Searching by **" is displayed in a part of
the homepage screen (the display screen 250 to the user) which the
user 213 watches or an audio guidance is performed. Alternatively,
the user may be notified by a representation function of the life
detecting division 218 (e.g., a lamp representation of a specific
color). Like the exemplary embodiment explained herein, in a case
where the user-side front end is provided with a plurality of life
detecting divisions 218, the use 213 can be notified of "which life
detecting division 218 is used for the detection of life activity"
by use of an expression of "**" in "Mind Searching by **."
Meanwhile, the process (S66) of notifying the user of this
detection of life activity is very important from the viewpoint of
protection of personal data or invasion of privacy. This is because
a measurement result of biosis activity (life activity information
249) is very highly confidential personal information and breach of
privacy. Accordingly, by notifying the user (S66) of this, such an
effect is yielded that the user 213 can have options such as
avoidance of biosis activity measurement by moving away (rejection
of collection of personal information of the user 213).
[1043] FIG. 47 shows a specific content of the interface
correspondence process (S52) in accordance with the feeling of the
user in FIG. 45. In this exemplary embodiment, a feeling of the
user 213 which varies every second can be found by biosis activity
measurement appropriately (in real time). Accordingly, the present
exemplary embodiment has a feature in that a user interface matched
with the feeling of the user 213 can be provided by making use of
the above. The following deals with "changing of a display screen"
as an example of this user interface, but any method which makes a
user interface method adequate (change a user interface method) by
use of a measurement result of biosis activity (life activity
information 249), such as "adequacy of music for a user," "adequacy
of an expression method with audio or text," or "adequacy (changing
of sex or age) of people appearing," are also included in the range
of the present exemplary embodiment.
[1044] When the user 213 uses a new machine for the first time or
when the user 213 browses a homepage which the user 213 has never
seen before on the Internet, the user 213 may be puzzled over how
to operate. At that time, there will be no problem if the user 213
learns how to operate while making trial and error. However, if the
user 213 does not know how to operate at all and gets stuck, some
advice will be required. As for how to give an advice, some cases
require just automatic display of a navigation screen showing a
guidance by use of an animation, but some other cases require a
detailed guidance to the user 213 by a technical operator. As an
example of a method for providing a user interface in accordance
with a feeling of the user 213, the following explains the adequacy
of a screen to explain how to operate (changing to an appropriate
screen) with reference to FIG. 47.
[1045] As described in <The life detecting division 218 having a
configuration of an externally-attaching device and connected to
the user-side control system 217 via a connection terminal> in
section 7.2.2.3, if movement of face muscles of the user is
detected and an emotional reaction of the user is measured, the
feeling of the user 213 which varies every second can be
understood. It is determined whether or not the user is used to
operating the screen (S71), regarding the current display screen
250 to the user (a homepage that the user 213 is currently
browsing) provided by the mind service distributor 212. The
determination is performed by use of life activity information 249
with event information related to the emotional reaction, which is
transmitted from the mind communication provider 211. More
specifically, the "emotional reaction" is set as a measuring item
as has been explained in section 6.5.2, and among evaluation
factors included in the measuring item thus set, whether or not a
value of an equivalent level 172 about "anxiety" is equal to or
less than a determination value and whether or not a value of an
equivalent level 172 about "relief" is equal to or more than a
determination value are checked. If the user is used to the
operation of the current screen, the user is allowed to operate the
current display screen (S72). On the other hand, if the user is not
used to the operation of the screen, it is determined whether or
not the user feels anxiety about the operation or handling of the
screen (S73). A specific method thereof is such that the value of
the equivalent level 172 about the evaluation factor, "anxiety," is
checked in detail, similarly to the above. When the equivalent
level 172 about "anxiety" is lower than a standard value, it is
considered that the user does not feel anxiety so much, and a
navigational screen which works automatically is displayed to the
user 213 (S74) so as to explain to the user 213 about how to
operate, by giving a guidance using an animation. The changing to
this navigation screen which works automatically (S74) is executed
by an operation of the screen display/change setting section 232 in
the mind service distributor 212. On the other hand, when the
equivalent level 172 of "anxiety" is higher than the standard
value, it is considered that the user 213 feels strong anxiety, and
a screen on which an operator directly gives a guidance on the Web
is displayed (S75), so that the user 213 can understand how to
operate or handle by directly communicating with the operator at
ease. As such, by providing an interface in accordance with a
feeling of the user 213 (by changing a content or a method of the
interface), the user 213 can feel at ease and use the interface
comfortably.
[1046] At the stage where the user 213 understands how to use, the
user 213 lays his/her baby in the baby crib. The life detecting
division 218 on a baby-crib side accordingly detects a presence of
the baby automatically, which initiates detection of life activity
in accordance with the Display Mind Searching command. After that,
the user is notified of the detection of life activity using the
life detecting division 218 on the baby-crib side in accordance
with the Display Mind Searching command.
[1047] In a case of finding a reason why the baby cries, the
"somesthetic system" and the "emotional reaction" are set as
measuring items as mentioned above. As will be described later in
section 8.3, information of these measuring items is designated as
a parameter in the Send Mind Information command. Here, on the
display screen 250 (homepage on the Web) to the user formed by the
mind service distributor 212, a Send Mind Information command is
set as Web API. When the internet network control section 223
receives this information, the event information extraction section
224 extracts the Send Mind Information command as a part of event
information A243 therefrom. Then, the Send Mind Information command
is multiplexed by the signal/information multiplexing section 222,
and a life activity detection signal detected from the baby and
this Send Mind Information command (or parameter information inside
the command) are transmitted to the mind communication provider 211
as a life activity detection signal 248 with event information
(corresponding to the collection process (S53) of detection of life
activity and event information B of FIG. 45).
[1048] In the generation process of life activity information (S54)
of FIG. 45, the mind communication provider 211 performs
interpretation of the life activity detection signal based on the
measuring items specified in the Send Mind Information command (or
parameter information therein) included in the life activity
detection signal 248 with event information thus transmitted.
[1049] Subsequently, in the selection (determination) of an optimum
service form for the user and its execution process 1 (S55) in FIG.
45, the mind service distributor estimates that the reason why the
baby cries is any of the following reasons as described in <Baby
crib with the life detecting division 218 incorporated therein>
in section 7.2.2.3: A) a regional pain due to disease; B) a
notification of excretion; C) a request (dependence) of love
(embrace) to a parent; and D) a complaint of hunger or thirst. A
result of the estimation is displayed on the display screen 250 to
the user, so as to notify the user 213 of the reason in a form of
provision of specific information 245.
[1050] In a case where the reason why the baby cries is any of the
reasons (B) to (D), the service 244 is completed just by notifying
the user 213 of the reason. On the other hand, in a case where the
reason why the newborn cries is (A), it is necessary to notify the
user 213 of the situation as well as to advise the user of how to
deal with the situation, for example, consultation to a doctor. In
this case, an optimum way to deal with that is selected according
to the method explained in section 7.1.4 with reference to FIG. 43,
and the user 213 is notified of a result thereof.
[1051] If there is a possibility that the baby is sick, the parent
(the user 213) will be upset. As the interface correspondence
process (S52) in accordance with a feeling of the user and the
selection (determination) of an optimum service form for the user
and its execution process 2 (S56) in FIG. 45, the optimum way to
deal with the situation is displayed on the screen first. At the
same time, the way to deal with the situation is made adequate in
accordance with the feeling of the parent (the user 213) as has
been described in FIG. 47. As an option, the way to deal with the
situation may be set to direct consultation with a pediatrician on
the Internet (the internet layer 201) if the user wants. As such,
since the way to deal with the situation is made adequate in
accordance with the feeling of the user 213, not only early
detection of illness is enabled, but also the user can have a large
relief.
8] Communicating Protocols for Life Activity Detection Signal and
Life Activity Information
[1052] As has been described in chapter 7 with reference to FIG.
44, a life activity detection signal 248 with event information and
life activity information 249 with event information are
transferred via the network. This chapter explains communication
protocols to be used in this networking.
[1053] Further, as has been described in chapter 7, in the present
exemplary embodiment, an API command is set on the display screen
250 (a homepage screen on the Internet) to a user. Further, this
chapter also deals with a content of an API command to be used in
the present exemplary embodiment for the first time.
8.1) Feature of Common Parts of Communication Protocols for Life
Activity Detection Signal and Life Activity Information
[1054] First of all, features and effects (described after " . . .
") of common parts of the communication protocols for the life
activity detection signal 248 with event information and the life
activity information 249 with event information are described
below:
(1) The communication protocols for the life activity detection
signal and the life activity information partially have a common
structure to be shared . . . Apart of the communication protocol
included in the life activity detection signal can be diverted as a
part of the life activity information, so that the life activity
information can be generated easily; (2) The life activity
detection signal and the life activity information are made
compatible with an Internet Protocol IP . . . As has been described
in section 7.2.1 with reference to FIG. 44, both the life activity
detection signal 248 and the life activity information 249 are
subjected to communication processing on the internet layer 201
according to the Internet Protocol IP. Thus, since both of them are
configured to have a structure (a communication protocol)
compatible with the Internet Protocol IP in advance, a burden to
the internet network control section 223 in FIG. 44 can be reduced;
(3) A plurality of datagrams per common content are defined and
multiplexed to be sent . . . By employing a method for
fragmentation (multiplexing) of datagrams defined in the Internet
Protocol IP, a plurality of different contents can be communicated
in a mixed form in the life activity detection signal and the life
activity information; (4) A plurality of datagrams collected per
common content are defined so that it is possible to identify which
packet corresponds to which datagram by a corresponding datagram
identification 332 in an Internet header 315 . . . This allows
high-speed determination on which datagram each fragment is
included per packet, thereby making it easy to restructure a
datagram from fragments; (5) An Internet header 315 in each packet
is configured to have a timestamp 339 so that packets can be
synchronized with each other . . . Different datagrams can be
synchronized with each other very easily; and (6) The life activity
detection signal and the life activity information are configured
to have a common structure of an event datagram 302 . . .
Information of the event datagram 302 included in the life activity
detection signal can be just diverted as a part of the life
activity information, so that the life activity information can be
generated easily.
[1055] Next will be explained common parts of the communication
protocols for the life activity detection signal and the life
activity information, more specifically. As shown in FIGS. 48 and
49, [1056] in a life activity detection signal, a detection
condition datagram 301, one or more detection signal datagrams 303,
and one or more event datagrams 302 are defined. Further, as shown
in FIGS. 50 and 51, [1057] in life activity information, an
interpretation condition datagram 305, one or more life activity
datagrams 304, and one or more event datagrams 302 are defined.
[1058] As shown in FIGS. 48 to 51, each datagram is divided into
small fragments 316, 317, 318, and 319, and stored in packets 310,
311, 312, and 313.
[1059] An internet header 315 is placed in a headmost part in each
of the packets 310, 311, 312, and 313. As shown in FIGS. 48 and 50,
the internet header 315 has a structure common in the life activity
detection signal and in the life activity information. Service type
information 331 in the internet header 315 indicates a type
required for packet transmission, for example, whether a packet
included in this internet header 315 "is required to be transmitted
at a high through put (transmission rate)," "is required to be
transmitted with high reliability (with low error occurrences after
the transmission)," "is transmitted with a short allowable delay
time (is not allowed to be transmitted with a large delay)," or the
like. Further, a corresponding datagram identification 332 is
expressed by 16 bits and indicates in which datagram a data
fragment in a corresponding packet is included. More specifically,
upper 3 bits indicate any of a detection condition datagram 301, an
interpretation condition datagram 305, a detection signal datagram
303, a life activity datagram 304, and an event datagram 302. In
the detection signal packet 313, subsequent 2 bits indicate a type
of a detection wavelength .lamda. (in the present exemplary
embodiment, concurrent measurements can be performed with the use
of four types of detection wavelength light beams having different
wavelengths). Further, remaining lower 11 bits indicate to be
included in a detection signal datagram 303 corresponding to the
same detection time. Here, an actual detection time is synchronized
with the timestamp 339, so that if it takes a longer time for
detection and all detection times cannot be shown by 11 bits (i.e.,
overflows), the 11 bits can be repeatedly used in a cyclic
manner.
[1060] On the other hand, in the life activity information packet
314, subsequent 2 bits indicate identification information of a
measuring item (in the present exemplary embodiment, pieces of life
activity information about 4 different measuring items can be
extracted at the same time). Then, remaining lower 11 bits indicate
to be included in a life activity datagram 303 corresponding to the
same detection time. Here, an actual measurement time is
synchronized with the timestamp 339, so that if it takes a longer
time for measurement and all measurement times cannot be shown by
11 bits (i.e., overflows), the 11 bits can be repeatedly used in a
cyclic manner.
[1061] A various control 333 of fragment and a fragment offset 334
indicate where data fragments 315, 316, 317, 318, 319 placed just
after their corresponding internet header 315 are located in a
single datagram 301, 302, 303, 304, 305. More specifically, the
various control 333 of fragment is constituted by 3 bits, and a
first bit is set to "0." When a subsequent bit is "0," which
indicates that fragmentation is performed, a plurality of data
fragments 315, 316, 317, 318, 319 are included in a single datagram
301, 302, 303, 304, 305. When this bit is "1," the bit indicates
that fragmentation is not performed. Another subsequent bit has
location information in the single datagram 301, 302, 303, 304,
305. That is, when this bit is "0," this bit indicates a last
fragment in the single datagram 301, 302, 303, 304, 305. On the
other hand, when this bit is "1," the bit indicates other occasions
except the above. The fragment offset 334 indicates to which
fragment in the single datagram 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, the data
fragment 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, which is placed just after a
corresponding internet header 315, corresponds. More specifically,
in a case of a first data fragment 315, 316, 317, 318, 319 in the
single datagram 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, a value of a corresponding
fragment offset 334 is set to "0." In a case of a subsequent data
fragment 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, a value of a corresponding
fragment offset 334 is set to "1." Thus, the value in the fragment
offset 334 is increased sequentially.
[1062] Further, a source address 335 and a destination address 336
indicate IP (Internet protocol) addresses of a source and a
destination in a case of communication via the internet layer 201
(see FIG. 44). Further, the internet header 315 has identification
information of a life detection section or peculiar address
information 338 of the life detecting section. The life detecting
section 220 shown in FIG. 44 is configured to have unique
identification information or peculiar address information for each
model. This information may correspond to a production number per
model. This information is stored within the internet header 315,
and is used in common in the life activity detection signal 248
with event information and the life activity information 249 with
event information (in a case where detection is performed in the
same model and measurement is performed based on a result thereof).
This allows long-term history management of the life activity
detection signals 248 with event information and the life activity
information 249 with event information.
[1063] In the present exemplary embodiment, the internet header 315
is configured to have a timestamp 339. This makes it possible to
synchronize respective datagrams 301, 302, 303, 304, 305 (to have
the same timing). This timestamp 339 is constituted by 32 bits, and
indicated by a counting number of a system clock which assumes 1
clock interval as 1 ms. When the counting number overflows, a
counting value starts from "0" again. As such, the counting value
is cyclic, but an absolute time can be calculated by combining this
time stamp 339 with detection start time information 352 shown in
the detection condition datagram 301 in FIG. 49 or the
interpretation condition datagram 305 in FIG. 51. As information
indicating that this timestamp 339 is included in the internet
header 315, a value of option-type information 337 is set to
"68."
[1064] As shown in FIG. 49 or 51, an event datagram 302-1 which
varies depending on even information is stored. One event datagram
302 is divided into pieces, each of which is placed dispersedly
within an event data fragment 317 in an event packet 312. Further,
a content of each event is placed within a corresponding event
datagram 302 as an event content 348. In a single event datagram
302, an event continuation time 347 is stored just before the event
content 348. Here, an event start time per event is prescribed by
the timestamp 339 described above, and an ending time of the event
is calculated by a combination of this timestamp 339 and
information of the event continuation time 347. Further, just
before this event continuation time 347, an event category 346 is
stored. Examples of the event in the present exemplary embodiment
encompass:
(A) event information A243 which is a content of the display screen
250 (a content of a homepage on the Web) to a user shown in FIG. 44
and extracted by the extraction section 224 of event information A;
(B) event information 242 extracted by the extraction section 221
of event information B shown in FIG. 44 . . . An environment
surrounding a user 213 (an examinee) at the time of detection of
life activity based on temperature/humidity conditions during
detection (e.g., whether the user stays alone or with other
people); and the like. This event category 346 indicates which
category the event content 348 belongs to. Thus, since the event
category 346 is included in the event datagram 302, there will be
an effect that selection and extraction of the event content 348
per event category can be performed easily afterwards.
[1065] Further, as shown in FIG. 49 or 51, common information
between different events is included in an event datagram #0 302-0
and is placed at a headmost part of event datagrams #1 302-1 . . .
each including an event content 348. This event datagram #0
includes number information 342 of events occurring in detection
term, event source address information 341, and the like. Here, in
the event source address information 341, a URL of a display screen
and the like are stored. Still further, in a case where an API
command is set on a display screen (a homepage screen on the Web)
designated by the URL, this information is stored in an API command
343 set in the display screen.
8.2) Communication Protocol for Life Activity Detection Signal
[1066] Features of the communication protocol for the life activity
detection signal 248 with event information are explained with
reference to FIGS. 48 and 49.
[1067] A source address 335 in the internet header 315 corresponds
to an IP address of the user-side control system 217 (a personal
computer, a portable terminal, a mobile phone, or the like) in FIG.
44. On the other hand, a destination address 336 is an IP address
designated by the mind communication provider 211 in FIG. 44 and is
determined in advance. In most cases, an IP address of a place
where the interpretation section 227 of life activity is placed is
set as the destination address 336.
[1068] In the communication protocol for the life activity
detection signal 248 with event information, a detection condition
datagram 301 and a detection signal datagram 303 are defined. Here,
a life activity detection signal detected by the life detecting
section 220 of FIG. 44 is stored in the aforementioned one or more
detection signal datagrams 303 and then transferred. This detection
signal datagram 303 is divided into pieces, which are dispersedly
placed in corresponding detection signal data fragments 318 in
respective detection signal packets 313. On the other hand, the
detection condition datagram 301 is divided into pieces, which are
dispersedly placed in corresponding detection condition data
fragments 316 in the detection condition packet 311.
[1069] In the detection of life activity in the present exemplary
embodiment, locations of individual detected points are different
depending on detection types of life activity (detection targets),
e.g., an intracerebral neuronal arrangement, an arrangement of face
muscles, or the like. In view of this, location information 326 of
each detected point is defined in a detection signal datagram #0
303-0 placed at a headmost part in a plurality of detection signal
datagrams 303. More specifically, three-dimensional location
information of a first detected point is described first, and
three-dimensional location information of a second detected point
is described next, for example. Thus, three-dimensional location
information for all detected points is predefined.
[1070] In subsequent detection signal datagrams 303, a value of a
detection signal of each detected point for which a
three-dimensional location is defined (e.g., a value of a pulse
counting number of an action potential, a reflection light amount
of light of 780 nm/830 nm, a surface temperature measured by a
thermography, or a peak area (or a peak height) by Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance) is stored as a life activity distribution map 327, 328
per detected point.
[1071] In this exemplary embodiment, a detection signal datagram
303 relating to a different detection wave length .lamda. is
defined per wavelength of light to be used for detection and per
measured time T1, T2.
[1072] As shown in FIG. 49, the detection condition datagram 301 is
configured to include identification information 351 of a user (an
examinee). This makes it possible to individually manage detection
signals of different users (examinees). The usage of the detection
start time information 352 has been already explained in section
8.1. This detection start time information 352 includes time
information in a form of year/month/day/time/second/subsecond (a
unit of 0.1 sec). Further, a system clock cycle of the timestamp
339 is 1 ms as described in section 8.1. Alternatively, a basic
frequency of a timestamp can be reset in a column for a basic
frequency 353 of a timestamp in the detection condition datagram
301. Hereby, in a case where the detection signal changes at high
speed, the basic frequency is raised so as to increase detection
accuracy, and in a case where the detection signal changes very
slowly, the basic frequency is lowered so as to facilitate
long-term measurement. Thus, flexible setting in accordance with
characteristics (a time dependent variation) of the detection
signal is attainable. A subsequent measuring item 354 corresponds
to a measuring item described in section 6.5.2. When this measuring
item 354 is included in the detection condition datagram 301, the
convenience in interpretation by the interpretation section 227 of
life activity (FIG. 44) in the mind communication provider 211 is
improved. Further, the detection method 355 indicates the detection
method shown in Table 6. Further, a detection signal category 356
indicates which part in a life object is detected and what
detection method is used for the detection specifically. A
subsequent location information of detected area and location rule
of detected points 357 indicates what kind of method is employed as
a position monitoring method of a detected point 30 for life
activity, more specifically (e.g., whether the method described in
section 6.2.1 is used, the method described in section 6.2.2 is
used, and the like). On the other hand, a detecting resolution 358
of detected area, an expressed bit number 359 of quantized
detection signal, and a sampling frequency or sampling interval 360
of detection signal indicates detection accuracy of the detection
signal. Further, the number of detection signal datagrams 303
relating to the detection wave length .lamda. can be estimated from
number information 361 of wavelengths used for detection. This
improves the convenience in interpretation by the interpretation
section 227 of life activity (FIG. 44) in the mind communication
provider 211. Furthermore, as will be describe in section 10.2, the
mind communication provider 211 can be notified of a timing for
purchasing new key information with respect to an encryption key
generator by use of accumulated number information 362 of detection
signal sending. Accordingly, when this accumulated number
information 362 of detection signal sending is included in the
detection condition datagram 301, the mind communication provider
211 can acquire key information at an appropriate timing, so that
even if life activity detection signals 248 with event information
are transferred a number of times, the interpretation section 227
of life activity can stably perform interpretation (see FIG.
44).
8.3) Communication Protocol for Life Activity Information
[1073] As shown in FIG. 44, the source address 335 in the internet
header 315 in the communication protocol for the life activity
information indicates an IP address of the interpretation section
227 of life activity in the mind communication provider 211. On the
other hand, the destination address 336 is an IP address of the
mind service distributor 212.
[1074] In the communication protocol for the life activity
information, an interpretation condition datagram 305 and one or
more life activity datagrams 304 are defined. A result of
interpretation by the interpretation section 227 of life activity
in FIG. 44 is divided into pieces, which are respectively stored in
the one or more life activity datagrams 304. Further, as shown in
FIG. 50, one life activity datagram 304 is divided into pieces,
which are dispersedly placed in respective life activity
information fragments 318 in life activity information packets
314.
[1075] On the other hand, common information at the time of
interpretation performed in the interpretation section 227 of life
activity is stored in the interpretation condition datagram 305. As
shown in FIG. 51, the interpretation condition datagram 305 is
divided into pieces, which are dispersedly placed in respective
interpretation condition data fragments 319 in the interpretation
condition packet 310.
[1076] As shown in FIG. 50, a different life activity datagram 304
is set per measuring item as described in section 6.5.2, and
different life activity datagrams 304 are respectively set for
times T1 and T2. In a single life activity datagram 304, an
equivalent level indicative of an interpretation result for each
evaluation factor (see section 6.5.2) at the same time is recorded
as equivalent level values 377, 378 of evaluation factors included
in a measuring item A measured at time T*. Further, a life activity
datagram #0 304-0 placed before those single life activity
datagrams 304 includes information about interpretation of a life
activity detection signal, which is common to the equivalent level
values 377 and 378 of evaluation factors. That is, number
information 371 of measuring items is specified first, and then
information related to measuring items A, B, . . . are sequentially
described in accordance with the number information 371. More
specifically, number information 372, 374 of evaluation factors
included in each measuring item and an evaluation factor list 373,
375 based on the number information are described. Here, in a case
where a measuring item A is the "awakening/turgescence" as
described in section 6.5.2, for example, the evaluation factor list
373 relating to the measuring item A indicates "emergency
recognition, turgescence, awakening, relaxed state, drowsiness, REM
sleep, non-REM sleep."
[1077] Specific contents and effects from user identification,
detected person identification, or detected object (member)
identification 351 to accumulated number information 362 of
detection signal sending, which are included within the
interpretation condition datagram 305, are the same as the contents
in the detection condition datagram 301 which has been already
explained. In the meantime, interpretation software or a data base
used for interpretation of a life activity detection signal to
obtain life activity information is kept improved (upgraded) every
day. In view of this, if the interpretation condition datagram 305
further includes a version number 363 of interpretation soft and a
data base version number or last modified time 364 of a data base
used for interpretation, it is found with which grade the
interpretation is performed. If the interpretation is performed
with a very low grade, it is possible to perform interpretation
with the use of the latest interpretation software or data base
again and to update the data base. Accordingly, with the use of
this version number 363 of interpretation soft or the data base
version number or last modified time 364 of a data base used for
interpretation, the life activity information in the data base can
be kept updated to a maximum level.
8.4) Exemplary New Command Used for Web API
[1078] The following explains examples of a new command to be used
for Web API in the present exemplary embodiment.
[1079] Check Mind Detection . . . Regarding the detection of life
activity, it is determined (1) whether or not a life detecting
division 218 is provided at a use side, and (2) whether there is a
measuring subject (user or the like) within a range detectable by
the life detecting section 220, and results thereof are transmitted
to an address designated by a parameter in this command.
[1080] Change Mindless Display . . . A display screen is
automatically changed to a display screen which does not require
measurement of biosis activity. A URL of a corresponding screen is
designated by a parameter in this command.
[1081] Start Mind Searching . . . Detection of the life activity is
started.
[1082] Display Mind Searching . . . A message indicative of
detection of life activity is displayed to the user. A display size
or a display range is designated by a parameter in this
command.
[1083] Send Detection Signal . . . A life activity detection signal
is transferred to an address designated by a parameter in this
command.
[1084] Send Mind Information . . . Life activity information after
interpretation is transferred to an address designated by a
parameter in this command. Further, a "measuring item" for the
interpretation is designated by a parameter in this command.
[1085] Display Mind Information . . . Life activity information
after the interpretation is displayed to the user. Further, a
"measuring item" for the interpretation, a display form of the life
activity information to a user, or a display area/display size is
also designated by a parameter in this command.
[1086] Start Navigation Display . . . A screen on which a navigator
(an animation) gives a guidance is displayed.
[1087] Start Human Interface . . . An interpersonal correspondence
screen is displayed, and a direct face to face correspondence by a
technical operator is started.
[1088] Start Mind Connection . . . A connection to other people (TV
telephone) is established, and life activity information of a
counterpart is displayed thereon.
[1089] Further, a "measuring item" for the interpretation, a
display form of the life activity information to a user, or a
display area/display size is also designated by a parameter in this
command.
9] Applied Embodiment Using Detection or Measurement of Biosis
Activity
[1090] Chapter 9 explains an applied embodiment using detection or
measurement of biosis activity explained from chapters 2 to 6.
First of all, an outline of the fields to which the present
invention can be applied is given, and then, exemplary embodiments
in which biosis activity detection is used in diagnosis as
application to the medical field, which is one of the fields of
application, are explained.
9.1) Feature of Applied Embodiment of Biosis Activity Measurement
and New Feasible Unique Function
[1091] A field of application in which a computer, consumer
electronics, or a robot is operated using information obtained from
brain measurement by electroencephalographs or the like is
generally called BMI (Brain machine interface), conventionally (See
p. 33 of Nikkei Electronics (Nikkei BP) published on May 3, 2010).
In the measuring method of life activity in the present exemplary
embodiment, not only an activity (action potential or contraction)
of one neuron or one muscle cell can be detected, but also a mutual
network connection therebetween can be detected. Accordingly,
detection accuracy is drastically improved in comparison with the
electroencephalograph as mentioned above. In view of this, this
field of application using the detection method of life activity is
referred to as NEI (Neuron electronics interface), including the
meaning that features or functions different from the BMI can be
provided. Further, the detection method of life activity to be used
in NEI is not limited to the detection of membrane potential
changing, and other detection methods shown in Table 6 may be used
as well.
[1092] The example of <Baby crib with the life detecting
division 218 incorporated therein> in section 7.2.2.3 and the
service example in section 7.2.4.3 have explained the method to
understand the feeling of a "newborn baby who is crying." Further,
in <Exemplary Embodiment 1 of packaged device with combination
of detecting section for life activity and information providing
section>, the provision of the communication method with "a
person who has a problem the throat or a person who cannot speak
because of decreased strength due to serious illness" has been
explained. Further, in the service examples in sections 6.5.4 and
7.2.4.3, the method to understand the feeling (emotion) of people
from movement of facial muscles has been explained. As such, the
NEI (the field of application in which the present applied
embodiment is included) has a large feature that "new communication
environments" which have been unrealizable in the past can be
provided.
[1093] The achievement of "information sharing in a group for
problem solving by use of a communication method" is considered to
greatly contribute to "development of humankind" on earth. The
communication method in the history of humankind was developed in
order of occurrence of words, invention of letters, invention of
printing techniques, and then construction of Internet
infrastructure. Further, tradition of the art including painting or
music, which has occurred in parallel with a series of development
progresses, is also considered as one of the communication methods.
Culture or civilization has changed in accordance with the
development of new communication methods. Here, the NEI is
positioned on an extension line of the development of the
communication methods.
[1094] More specifically, the inventor of the present invention
eagerly hopes that the society would get rid of conventional "deep
attachment to products (possession) at hand" or "mammonism" and
would shift to a society which "is interested in the heart of
people" by spread of the NEI. The development of the Internet has
caused the whole world to shift to a global society, thereby making
it possible to easily contact with people around the world. In the
meantime, it is extremely difficult to "estimate feelings of a
counterpart" between people who grew up in totally different
environments. Therefore, they are prone to insist what they want or
express their ego to each other, which tends to decrease harmony.
In contrast, if they can receive an interpretation result of the
feeling (emotion) of a counterpart based on movement of facial
muscles at once (during conversation) by the NEI, then they can
make adequate how to deal with the counterpart by referring to the
interpretation result. This may result in that the NEI can
contribute to harmonization or correction of differences in the
whole society.
[1095] Further, as section 6.5.4 has described that "a facial
expression could exhibit an emotion more accurately than a person
is aware of," the person can know what you are under his/her
subconsciousness which he/she is not aware of. As a result, the NEI
can be used as an assistant to "understand oneself deeply."
[1096] However, if the interpretation result about the feelings of
other people thus obtained is relied on too much, there may be such
a possibility that "an opportunity to improve characters by
distress or mature consideration to understand the feelings of
people" would be lost. Accordingly, "the NEI should be used as an
assistant."
[1097] The following describes original functions to be
demonstrated only in accordance with this applied embodiment (NEI)
of the biosis activity measurement (i.e., the functions
unrealizable in the past).
New communication methods . . . See the above explanation. This
will allow the user to understand feelings of dementia elderly
people or to communicate with animals. Securing of safety by risk
aversion in case of emergency . . . As described in <Exemplary
Embodiment 1 of packaged device with combination of detecting
section for life activity and driving section> in section 7.1.2,
at the moment when a brain senses risk (before moving hands and
feet), the user can shift to a risk aversion operation
automatically. This will be advantageous in a case where "speed is
important" to avoid risk. Clarification of high-speed neural
activity of a human [the examinee can check] . . . Since the will
or thought of a measurement subject could not be checked in
conventional animal experiments using needle electrodes, validation
of analysis of experimental findings were poor. Further, the
temporal resolution is low in the detection method of oxygen
concentration changes in blood (see section 4.7). In view of this,
in this applied embodiment using the detection of membrane
potential changing as in the example of section 9.3, high-speed
neural activities can be detected and the validation can be
performed in the communication with the examinee, so that
measurement accuracy is improved. Completely non-contact interface
which reduces a burden on the user . . . Since it is not necessary
to attach electrodes like the electroencephalograph, the burden on
the user is largely reduced. As another applied embodiment, this
interface may be used for detection of cardiac muscular movement so
as to measure the electrocardiogram in a non-contact manner. Since
keyboard operation, pen-based input, or voice input is unnecessary
for input, movement of limbs or a vocal band is not regulated at
the time of the input to a device. Accordingly, the operation can
be performed while "talking" or "moving a hand."
Expansion/development facilitating function for new applied
development or new service development . . . As has been described
in section 7.2 with reference to FIG. 44, a domain (mind connection
layer 202) can be established on an open world of the internet
layer 201. Accordingly, in this case, new applied development or
new service development can be made thereon very easily, and thus,
this feature is excellent in extensibility or expandability.
9.2) Expansion of Applied Embodiment Using Measurement of Biosis
Activity
[1098] The fields of application (a range of the NEI) using the
life activity measurement, which have been explained in the present
exemplary embodiment, are summarized as follows: [1099] Basic
research of medical science . . . Mechanism analysis of image
recognition, language process, thought, emotion, or memory.
Explication of internal information network path (see section
9.3.1). Particularly, this is suitable for studies which make use
of a feature (section 9.1) that "high-speed neural activities can
be detected while checking to an examinee." Concrete examples
encompass studies at a neuron network level of human language
processing. Since hominoidea (apes) does not have a language that
people have (Atsushi Iriki: Gengo to shiko wo umu nou--Shirizu
nokagaku (3)--(University of Tokyo Press, 2008) P. 170), the human
language processing can be researched only by a non-contact and
noninvasive method to human. Further, since the temporal resolution
is low in the detection of oxygen concentration changes in blood, a
high-speed process such as the language process cannot be traced in
detail. Accordingly, a study using the detection of membrane
potential changing in the above field will make a significant
contribution.
[1100] In addition to that, the life activity measurement can be
applied to tracing of time dependent variations in human
recognition or thinking/recollection process. [1101] Determination
of life and death [1102] Medical diagnosis (including action for
disease prevention) . . . See examples of section 9.3. In this
applied embodiment, an abnormality of the autonomic nervous system
is easy to be found at an early stage. [1103] Medical treatment . .
. See examples in section 9.3.2. [1104] Care support or aiding
support, mobile suit . . . See the explanation in <Exemplary
Embodiment 2 of packaged device with combination of detecting
section for life activity and driving section> in section 7.1.2.
[1105] Communication method . . . Corresponding to the explanation
in section 9.1. [1106] Management/supervision . . . See the
explanation in <Desk or chair with the life detecting division
218 incorporated therein> in section 7.2.2.3.
[1107] The detecting section 101 for life activity shown in FIG. 31
is attached to a driving seat of a car, so that a process of waking
up a driver or the like process may be performed by sensing that
the driver feels sleepy. [1108] Security or authorization process .
. . See the explanation in <Street surveillance camera with the
life detecting division 218 incorporated therein> or
<Entrance door or wall or window of entrance hall where with the
life detecting division 218 incorporated therein> in section
7.2.2.3. Further, the life activity measurement is usable as
validation information of a "lie detector." [1109] High-speed input
process . . . As described in <Exemplary Embodiment 1 of
packaged device with combination of detecting section for life
activity and information providing section> in section 7.1.3,
documentation or drawing input may be performed at high speed
without performing voice inputting or key-in. [1110] Entertainment
game . . . As described in <Exemplary Embodiment 1 of packaged
device with combination of detecting section for life activity and
driving section> in section 7.1.2, a high-speed response can be
achieved without moving hands and feet. Thus, the life activity
measurement is suitable for a competition game or an operation
simulation game of a high-speed mobile object (a car or an
airplane).
[1111] Further, a service of character judgment or affinity
diagnosis may be provided. [1112] Vicarious operation . . . See the
explanation of <Exemplary Embodiment 2 of packaged device with
combination of detecting section for life activity and information
providing section> in section 7.1.3, and <Pillow or head part
of bed in bedroom with the life detecting division 218 incorporated
therein> in section 7.2.2.3.
9.3) Applied Embodiment of Detection of Life Activity to Medical
Diagnosis
[1113] The detection method of life activity of the present
exemplary embodiment to detect membrane potential changing in a
non-contact and noninvasive manner using the principle explained
from chapters 2 to 5 can yield a very high temporal resolution and
spatial resolution. In view of this, when an action potential state
of a neuron or contractile activity of a muscle cell is detected,
for example, by use of the detection of life activity, abnormality
(malfunction) can be found highly precisely per single cellular
unit.
[1114] Accordingly, if the detection method of life activity or the
measuring method of life activity of the present exemplary
embodiment is applied to the medical field, it is possible to
progress the advanced study greatly and to make a highly accurate
diagnosis.
[1115] The following describes two examples in which this detection
method of life activity is applied to medical diagnosis.
9.3.1) Exemplary Search of Neural Transmission Pathway in Life
Object
[1116] Section 6.5.3.2 has already described a method in which a
part of skin of a life object is pricked with a "needle" to cause
pain so that a signal detection area (ending) of a sensory neuron
is activated (an action potential occurs), and a path through which
the signal is transmitted is searched to be used for a data base
construction for interpretation of life activity. A diagnosis
method of a medical treatment using this internal neural
transmission pathway search is explained below by taking, as an
example, "diagnosis of spinal canal stenosis."
[1117] In most vertebrates, signal transmission is performed
between a brain and a somatic end via a spinal cord. This spinal
cord is placed in a space referred to as a vertebral canal in a
backbone. A patient suffering from spinal canal stenosis feels pain
in lower limbs because a part of a narrowed vertebral canal presses
a part of the spinal cord. However, a diseased part is located
inside the vertebral canal, and the lower limbs where the patient
feels pain are actually not a diseased part.
[1118] In conventional techniques, it is possible to find a
narrowed area in the vertebral canal by MRI (Magnetic Resonance
Imaging) or CT scanning (Computer Tomography Scanning), but it is
impossible to specify neurons involved with the actual pain
occurrence. This applied embodiment makes it possible to specify a
single neuron which causes the pain, thereby yielding an effect
that diagnosis accuracy is improved drastically. Further, since a
diseased part can be specified in more detail, medical treatment
can be performed more easily in comparison with the conventional
techniques. Further, even if surgery is necessary for the
treatment, since the diseased part can be specified beforehand in
detail (a single neuron unit), a physical burden on the patient
during surgery can be reduced at the minimum.
[1119] With reference to FIGS. 52 and 53, the following describes
the diagnosis method of this applied embodiment. Here, in FIGS. 52
and 53, (a) shows a path through which a signal of pain is
transmitted in the body, and (b) shows a cross-sectional view
around the spinal cord in the lumbar part. Further, (c) shows an
example of a life activity detection signal detected according to
this applied embodiment.
[1120] Initially, examples of a factor and symptom of the spinal
canal stenosis are shown in FIG. 52(b) and FIG. 53(b). That is, a
part of the lamina placed in the rear of the backbone comes in
contact with the spinal cord at a position .beta., and a neuron
.beta. in a spinal cord gray matter 416 is pressed, thereby causing
a false signal of pain. The following takes, as an example, a case
where this false signal causes a patient to feel pain in the tip of
a foot.
[1121] There is such a feature of the patient of the spinal canal
stenosis that a pain level in the lower limbs changes depending on
a posture. Here, in most cases, when the patient "straightens
himself/herself," the pain level increases, whereas when the
patient "bends down (slouches forward)," the pain tends to be
relaxed. This phenomenon is caused presumably because when the
patient "straightens himself/herself," the spinal cord 413 comes
toward the lamina 415 so that the pressure at the position .beta.
is increased, and when the patient "bends down (slouches forward)",
the spinal cord 413 is distanced from the lamina 415. This feature
is used for diagnosis.
[1122] That is, as a first step of diagnosis is to let a patient of
spinal canal stenosis "bend down (slouch forward)," so as to cause
a state in which the pain of the lower limbs (the patient thinks)
is relaxed. While keeping this state, an intraneural transmission
path of a pain signal at the time when the patient really feels
pain in the tip of a foot is searched. At the beginning of this
search, a part where the patient feels pain (a position .alpha. in
the tip of a foot, in this example) is stimulated with a "needle."
As shown in FIG. 52(a), there is a signal detection area (ending) 4
of a sensory neuron on a surface part (the position .alpha. in the
tip of a foot) thus stimulated with the needle, and a pain signal
is generated here. The pain signal generated here is transmitted to
a neuron .theta. in a postcentral cerebral cortex 411 via a neuron
.delta. in a spinal cord gray matter 416 and a neuron .eta. in a
thalamus 412 (see FIG. 52(a)(b)).
[1123] At this time, respective spots .alpha., .delta., .eta., and
.theta. are illuminated with light having a wavelength in the range
specified in section 4.7 so as to detect reflection light amount
changes 401 along a detection time 163. Results thereof are shown
in FIG. 52(c).
[1124] As has been already described in section 1.3, when a
stimulation is given locally with a needle, pH decreases due to an
inflammation or ischemia to cause pain, and Na.sup.+ ions or
Ca.sup.2+ ions flow into a cytoplasm due to an action of a
proton-activated cation channel. As a result, "depolarization"
occurs in the ending 4 of the sensory neuron, and a membrane
potential rises to a depolarization potential. According to the
speculation in section 2.2, it is considered that a negative charge
domain is formed outside the cell membrane constituting the signal
detection area (ending) 4 of the sensory neuron during this
depolarization.
[1125] From the reason explained in chapters 3 and 4, a reflection
light amount from the negative charge domain thus formed outside
the cell membrane decreases locally. In this applied embodiment,
this reflection light amount change 401 is detected as a pain
signal (=a life activity detection signal) to be transmitted in the
body. The pain signal generated in the signal detection area
(ending) 4 of the sensory neuron is not generated continuously, but
is an intermittent pulse-like signal as shown in FIG. 52(c). In the
example of FIG. 52(c), pulse-like pain signals generated in the
signal detection area (ending) 4 of the sensory neuron at the
position .alpha. occur at times t.sub.1 and t.sub.5 along the
detection time 163.
[1126] In the spinal cord gray matter 416 including a neuronal cell
body 8 which relays a pain signal generated in the signal detection
area (ending) 4 of the sensory neuron, many other neuronal cell
bodies are also concentrated therein. In view of this, since the
detection technique using a conventional non-contact method or
noninvasive method has a low spatial resolution, it was very
difficult to specify a location of one neuron which relays a pain
signal. In contrast, the detection of life activity in this applied
embodiment has a high spatial resolution, so that a location of one
neuron which relays a pain signal can be specified for the first
time.
[1127] This applied embodiment uses a phenomenon that "a neuron
fires an action potential when it relays a pain signal." When the
neuron fires an action potential, the reflection light amount
decreases locally (at a place where a neuron cell body relaying a
pain signal is located), from the same principle as above. In view
of this, by searching a place where the reflection light amount
change 401 occurs when the pain signal is transmitted, a neuron (a
location of cytoplasm) .delta. relaying a pain signal can be
detected.
[1128] Here, for detection of a place where an action potential
occurs, the method explained in section 6.3.1 with reference to
FIGS. 23 to 25 is employed. Further, at the same time, a detected
point 30 for life activity is monitored by the method explained in
section 6.2.1 with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. Then, the position
of the objective lens 31 is automatically corrected based on a
result thereof (a servo for misalignment correction is applied),
thereby resulting in that the detection of life activity can be
continued even if the examinee moves to some extent during the
detection and the detected point 30 for life activity is
displaced.
[1129] More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) and (b), for
example, .gamma., .delta., .epsilon., and .zeta. are temporarily
set as candidates of a neuron (a position where its cytoplasm is
located) relaying pain signals, and reflection light amount changes
401 are detected at respective positions along the detection time
163.
[1130] As a result, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), decreases of the
reflection light amount can be detected at the position .delta. at
times t.sub.2 and t.sub.6 slightly delayed from times t.sub.1 and
t.sub.5 at which pain signals are generated in the signal detection
area (ending) 4 of the sensory neuron 4 located at the position
.alpha.. In contrast, no reflection light amount is detected at
respective positions .gamma., .epsilon., and .zeta., as shown in
FIG. 52(c), it can be estimated that the neuron (the position of
the cytoplasm) relaying pain signals is located at the position
.delta..
[1131] When a neuron .delta. fires an action potential, a pain
signal thereof is transmitted through the spinal cord 413 and
relayed in the thalamus 412. Then, a neuron .eta. in the thalamus
412 fires action potentials at times t.sub.3 and t.sub.7, which are
delayed from times t.sub.2 and t.sub.6, and then a neuron .theta.
in the postcentral cerebral cortex 411 fires action potentials at
times t.sub.4 and t.sub.8, which are a little delayed further.
Respective timings of the action potentials are detected as the
reflection light amount changes 401 as shown in FIG. 52(c).
[1132] In this way, an intraneural transmission path of a pain
signal at the time when the patient really feels pain in the tip of
a foot is searched. The applied embodiment shown in FIG. 52 detects
a position of "a neuron cell body by use of an action potential
phenomenon." Alternatively, this applied embodiment is applicable
to other methods to detect the membrane potential changing by a
non-contact method or a noninvasive method, and "an axonal path at
the time when a signal is transmitted" may be detected, for
example. That is, when a signal is transmitted through an axon in a
neuron cell body, a membrane potential in the axon changes locally,
so that the change can be detected as the reflection light change
amount 401.
[1133] Subsequently, a second step of diagnosis is to let the
patient of spinal canal stenosis "straighten himself/herself" so as
to increase the pain of the lower limbs (the patient thinks). At
this time, assume a case where a neuron (cell body) .beta. in the
spinal cord gray matter 416 is pressed by a part of the lamina 415
(FIG. 53(b)), so as to generate a false signal (fire an action
potential) at a time t.sub.11 (FIG. 53(c)). It is assumed herein
that no pain signal is detected in the signal detection area
(ending) 4 of the sensory neuron at the position .alpha. at this
time, but a reflection light amount temporarily decreases in the
neuron (a position of cytoplasm) .beta., which is detected in the
first step, at a time t.sub.12 which is right after the time
t.sub.11 along the detection time 163, and the patient expresses
pain (FIG. 53(c)). From an obtained detection signal of the
reflection light amount change 401 in FIG. 53(c), such a correct
diagnosis can be made that a false signal generated in the neuron
.beta. due to the pressure from a part of the lamina 415 is
transmitted to the neuron .delta., and the signal is transmitted to
the brain, thereby causing the patient to misunderstand that he/she
"feels pain in the tip of a foot" (see FIG. 53(a)(b)).
[1134] If a location of a diseased part can be found precisely
(with the accuracy of one cell unit) as such, the most appropriate
treatment including surgery can be performed on the patient.
[1135] This section has dealt with the "diagnosis of the spinal
canal stenosis" as one of the applied embodiments of the present
exemplary embodiment. Alternatively, the search of an internal
neural transmission pathway using the detection of life activity
may be applied to other medical studies or medical diagnosis or
treatment.
9.3.2) Exemplary Diagnosis with Combination of Detection of
Membrane Potential Changing and Detection of Oxygen Concentration
Change in Blood
[1136] When a plurality of "signal generative physical phenomena
and detection methods" used in the detection of life activity in
the present exemplary embodiment as described in sections 6.1.1 to
6.1.2 with reference to Table 6 are combined, more advanced and
more accurate diagnosis can be performed. Section 9.3.2 deals with,
as one of the applied embodiments of the combination, a method in
which "detection and diagnosis of early-stage dementia" is
performed with a "combination of detection of membrane potential
changing and detection of an oxygen concentration change in blood."
Alternatively, a plurality of "signal generative physical phenomena
and detection methods" described in Table 6 may be combined in
other methods to perform detection of life activity, so as to be
used for other diagnoses or studies in the medical field or the
field of brain science.
[1137] It is said that a main factor for an elderly to suffer from
dementia is:
[A] extinction of neurons (Alzheimer type); or [B] reduction in
intracerebral bloodstream. As for [A], in particular, it is
considered that either of the following phenomena promotes the
extinction of neurons: [1138] a phenomenon that amyloid .beta.
proteins are attached to an outside layer of a neuron; and [1139] a
phenomenon that tau proteins are attached to an inside layer of a
neuron.
[1140] For current diagnoses of dementia, the factors [A] and [B]
are checked by different measurement methods.
[1141] That is, for the diagnosis of the factor [A], an occupied
capacity of neurons in the head is examined by use of MRI (Magnetic
Resonance Imaging) or CT scanning (Computer Tomography Scanning).
If it is found that atrophy of the brain occurs as a result of the
examination, it is judged that the dementia of the Alzheimer type
progresses. However, this method can obtain a diagnosis only after
atrophy of the brain has really occurred, and therefore it is
difficult to detect the disease at an early stage.
[1142] On the other hand, for the diagnosis of the factor [B], a
contrast agent is mixed into blood in the body by injection, and a
radiological distribution emitted from the contrast agent is
visualized so as to examine the intracerebral bloodstream. In this
method, the patient feels pain at the time of injection to
introduce the contrast agent in a blood vessel, so that the burden
on the patient is large at the time of diagnosis.
[1143] Further, since these two types of inspection are necessary
for diagnosis, the burden on the patient becomes large.
[1144] In order to solve these problems, in this applied
embodiment, membrane potential changing of a neuron and an oxygen
concentration change in blood are detected at the same time by a
device shown in FIG. 54, so as to perform the diagnoses about the
factors [A] and [B] at the same time.
[1145] First of all, the following explains a configuration of the
device shown in FIG. 54 and a detection principle to be adopted
herein.
[1146] In FIG. 54, when an optical axis of an objective lens 31
used for detection of the membrane potential changing (an action
potential phenomenon or a firing rate) of a neuron is assumed a
Z-axis 423, a light source 424 for detecting a wavelength of 780
nm, a color filter 425 passing light having a wavelength of 780 nm,
and a photodetector 426 for light having a wavelength of 780 nm are
provided on a Y-axis 422 orthogonal to the Z-axis 423. Further, a
light source 427 for detecting a wavelength of 830 nm, a color
filter 428 passing light having a wavelength of 830 nm, and a
photodetector 429 for light having a wavelength of 830 nm are
provided on an X-axis 421. Accordingly, a single detected point 30
for life activity in the brain is illuminated with light having a
wavelength of 780 nm and light having a wavelength of 830 nm
emitted from a light emitting section 102 at the same time, and
respective light beams obtained from the single detected point 30
for life activity can be detected individually.
[1147] That is, the light having a wavelength of 780 nm emitted
from the light source 424 for detecting a wavelength of 780 nm,
provided on the Y-axis 422, is reflected in a capillary 28 in the
detected point 30 for life activity, and its light amount is
detected by the photodetector 426 for light having a wavelength of
780 nm, similarly provided on the Y-axis 422. Thus, a relative
light absorption amount of the light having a wavelength of 780 nm
by blood flowing through the capillary 28 is hereby found. In the
meantime, in order not to detect other wavelength light beams by
the photodetector 426 for light having a wavelength of 780 nm, the
color filter 425 passing only light having a wavelength of 780 nm
by blocking other wavelength light beams is provided just before
the photodetector 426. Similarly, with a combination of the light
source 427 for detecting a wavelength of 830 nm and the
photodetector 429 for light having a wavelength of 830 nm provided
on the X-axis 421, a reflection light amount in the capillary 28 in
the detected point 30 for life activity (and a relative light
absorption amount of the light having a wavelength of 830 nm to be
absorbed by blood flowing through the capillary 28, based on the
reflection light amount) is detected. In the meantime, in order not
to detect other wavelength light beams by the photodetector 429 for
light having a wavelength of 830 nm, the color filter 428 passing
only light having a wavelength of 830 nm by blocking other
wavelength light beams is provided just before the photodetector
429.
[1148] Then, detection signals from the photodetector 426 for light
having a wavelength of 780 nm and the photodetector 429 for light
having a wavelength of 830 nm are compared with each other so as to
detect an oxygen concentration in blood flowing through the
capillary 28. In this applied embodiment, in order to increase
detection accuracy by removing external noise components, light
amounts of the light emitted by the light source 424 for detecting
a wavelength of 780 nm and the light emitted by the light source
427 for detecting a wavelength of 830 nm are modulated by different
methods. Then, the detection signals obtained from the
photodetector 426 for light having a wavelength of 780 nm and the
photodetector 429 for light having a wavelength of 830 nm are
passed through a circuit such as the modulating signal component
extraction section (synchronous detection section) 133 in FIG. 33
so that synchronous detection or extraction of only a modulation
signal component is performed.
[1149] In the range shown in FIG. 54, a detection system except the
detection system for detecting an oxygen concentration in blood as
described above is used for the detection of the membrane potential
changing of a neuron (an action potential phenomenon or a firing
rate in the neuron).
[1150] The illuminating light 115 for life activity detection which
has a wavelength in the range explained in section 4.7 is emitted
from the light emitting section 102. This light emitting section
102 has a configuration shown in FIG. 31, and the illuminating
light 115 for life activity detection is optically modulated by the
light modulator 112. In the applied embodiment shown in FIG. 54,
this illuminating light 115 for life activity detection is linearly
polarized light having a polarized light component to be "S-wave"
with respect to a polarized light separation element 438.
[1151] The illuminating light 115 for life activity detection is
reflected in the polarized light separation element 438, and then
becomes circularly polarized light after passing through the
quarter wave length plate 437. Here, the photosynthesis element 434
having color filter characteristics has optical properties to cause
the wavelength of the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection to travel straight. Thereafter, the illuminating light
115 for life activity detection is condensed around the detected
point 30 for life activity by the objective lens 31. Although not
illustrated in FIG. 54, this illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection is condensed at a position slightly deeper than
the detected point 30 for life activity.
[1152] This light-condensed location is set so as to correspond to
a surface of the capillary 28 or a surface of a glial cell, which
is a relatively flat boundary surface where the light is easy to be
reflected diffusely in broad perspective. This allows the
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection which is
reflected diffusely on this boundary surface to pass through the
detected point 30 for life activity from its backside, mainly.
[1153] Accordingly, from the detected point 30 for life activity
which is circled on the right side in FIG. 54, a transmitted light
component of the illuminating light 115 for life activity detection
projected from the backside is detected like a transmission-type
light microscope.
[1154] Further, as described above, instead of condensing the
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection at a position
slightly deeper than the detected point 30 for life activity so as
to be a small spot size, such another illumination method may be
used that a random phase shifter (having a characteristic to change
phases at different positions in a beam cross section in the
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection) may be disposed
within the light emitting section 102 so as to form a converging
ray of a large spot size at the detected point 30 for life
activity. In this case, a relatively wide area in the detected
point 30 for life activity is illuminated with the illuminating
light 115 for life activity detection, so that reflection light
components can be detected in various positions in the detected
point 30 for life activity.
[1155] The reflection light thus obtained from the detected point
30 for life activity passes through the objective lens 31 and the
photosynthesis element 434 having color filter characteristics, and
then passes through the quarter wave length plate 437 again so as
to be converted into linearly polarized light having a polarized
light component to be "P-wave" with respect to the polarized light
separation element 438. As a result, the reflection light travels
straight in the polarized light separation element 438, and enters
the signal detecting section 103.
[1156] The signal detecting section 103 in this applied embodiment
has a configuration shown in FIG. 31. Further, as a detection
principle at this time, the method explained in section 6.3.1 with
reference to FIGS. 23 to 25 is employed. This makes it possible to
individually detect respective action potential states of pyramidal
cell bodies 17 or stellate cell bodies 18 in the detected point 30
for life activity, which is circled on the right side of FIG. 54.
Alternatively, as has been described in section 6.3.1, a size
(aperture size) of the light transmission section 56 in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter 51 may be made adequate so
as to detect activities of a group unit of a plurality of neurons
such as a column unit (a total firing rate of a set of the
plurality of neurons, such as a column).
[1157] Further, in the present exemplary embodiment, the objective
lens 31 is configured to move automatically for collection so that
the detected point 30 for life activity does not change even if the
examinee (patient) moves to some extent. A relative moving amount
and a relative direction of the movement of the examinee (patient)
at this time are detected by the position detecting monitor section
432 of the detected point for life activity. A wavelength of light
439 for monitoring used for this detection is set to a value
different from the wavelength of the illuminating light 115 for
life activity detection, 780 nm, or 830 nm described above, so that
interference (cross talk) between different detection light beams
are prevented by use of color filters. After the light 439 for
monitoring is emitted from the position detecting light source 431
of the detected point for life activity and passes through a beam
splitter 433, the light 439 for monitoring is reflected by the
photosynthesis element 434 having color filter characteristics, and
condensed by the objective lens 31 around the detected point 30 for
life activity.
[1158] The light 439 for monitoring thus reflected here passes
through the objective lens 31 and then is reflected by the
photosynthesis element 434 having color filter characteristics
again. After the light 439 for monitoring is reflected by the beam
splitter 433, the relative moving amount and the relative direction
of the movement of the examinee (patient) are detected by the
position detecting monitor section 432 of the detected point for
life activity. In the meantime, this position detecting monitor
section 432 of the detected point for life activity adopts the
configuration explained in section 6.2.1 with reference to FIGS. 20
and 21. The photosynthesis element 434 having color filter
characteristics in FIG. 54 doubles as the reflecting mirror
(galvanometer mirror) 34 explained in section 6.2.1. That is, the
photosynthesis element 434 having color filter characteristics has
a configuration in which the photosynthesis element 434 can be
inclined in the biaxial directions. As such, one photosynthesis
element 434 having color filter characteristics is configured to
perform:
(1) two-dimensional direction scanning of the light 439 for
monitoring condensed at the detected point 30 for life activity;
and (2) synthetic operation and separation operation between the
light 439 for monitoring and the illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection. This accordingly attains downsizing and
simplification of the optical system shown in FIG. 54 and achieves
cost reduction by reduction in the number of optical
components.
[1159] Next will be explained the dementia diagnosis method using
the device of FIG. 54 explained as above.
[1160] First explained is a case where a physically unimpaired
person is examined by use of the device of FIG. 54. An examinee (a
physically unimpaired person in this case) is asked questions
first, so as to promote a cerebral activation. In the present
diagnosis of dementia, the following method has been known. That
is, the examinee is asked 30 questions at first. Examples of the
questions are as follows:
"Please tell a name of a prefecture where you live (even in the
case of Tokyo, the term "prefecture" is used on purpose);" "What is
obtained by subtracting 7 from 100?;" "What is obtained by
subtracting 7 from the number obtained above?," and the like. Then,
it is judged whether the examinee is dementia or not based on the
number of correct answers (if the examinee answered correctly more
than 20 questions, the examinee is considered to be a physically
unimpaired person). The use of these questions is effective to make
diagnosis of the dementia from various perspectives. Alternatively,
the cerebrum may be stimulated by other methods to promote the
activation thereof.
[1161] When the cerebrum is activated, action potentials occur in
the pyramidal cell body 17 or stellate cell body 18 in the detected
point 30 for life activity frequently. This action potential
phenomenon is detected by the signal detecting section 103 in FIG.
54. Here, this signal detecting section 103 detects action
potentials of the neurons one by one. Alternatively, as described
above, the size (aperture size) of the light transmission section
56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter may be broadened,
so as to detect an activated state (a total firing rate) per set of
a plurality of neurons, such as a column unit.
[1162] As such, the oxygen concentration in blood flowing through
the capillary 28 changes about 5 s after the neuron is activated
(see the explanation in section 4.7 with reference to FIG. 17).
This oxygen concentration change in blood is detected by the
photodetector 426 for light having a wavelength of 780 nm and the
photodetector 429 for light having a wavelength of 830 nm.
[1163] Next will be explained a case where the above method is used
for the diagnosis of dementia. While questions are given to the
examinee to promote a cerebral activation as described above, the
activity in the detected point 30 for life activity is
detected.
[1164] If the oxygen concentration in blood flowing through the
capillary 28 does not change even after 5 or more s have passed
since action potentials occur in the pyramidal cell body 17 or
stellate cell body 18 by answering the questions, there is a
possibility that the aforementioned "B] reduction in intracerebral
bloodstream" may occur. In a case where the number of correct
answers out of the 30 questions used for the diagnosis of dementia
is far below 20, the examinee is suspicious of "B] development of
dementia based on the reduction in intracerebral bloodstream."
[1165] In a case where no action potential of a specific pyramidal
cell 17 or stellate cell 18 is observed even though the change of
the oxygen concentration in blood occurs while the examinee is
considering answers (or in a case where a firing rate as the whole
of a plurality of neurons included in a particular region including
the specific column is extremely low), there is a possibility of
"A] deterioration of a specific neuron." In a case where the number
of correct answers out of the 30 questions is far below 20, the
examinee is suspicious of "A] development of Alzheimer type
dementia."
[1166] Especially in a case where a specific neuron does not fire
an action potential at all even though the oxygen concentration in
blood has changed and the number of the correct answers to the
questions has exceeded 20 (or in a case where a firing rate as the
whole of a plurality of neurons included in a particular region
such as a specific column is extremely low), the examinee is
suspicious of such a state that "a specific neuron (or a plurality
of neurons included in the particular region) may be deteriorated
and dementia may be developed in the future." In this case,
"disease prevention measures" can be performed, for example, an
improvement of a life environment or cerebral training not to
develop dementia in the future, or medication in accordance with
necessity.
[1167] Further, in a case where the number of correct answers to
the questions is far below 20, all neurons in the detected point 30
for life activity do not fire action potentials and the oxygen
concentration in blood in the capillary 28 does not change, the
examinee is suspicious of "A] development of Alzheimer type
dementia." The reason is because the oxygen concentration change in
blood does not occur until neighboring neurons are activated, and
therefore, an inactive state of the neurons is suspicious as a
factor at first.
[1168] As has been described above, when the combination of the
detection of a firing rate of a neuron based on membrane potential
changing and the detection of an oxygen concentration change in
blood is used for the diagnosis of dementia, such a great effect
can be yielded that early diagnosis before dementia is developed
can be made, thereby attaining disease prevention measures at an
early stage. Further, in comparison with the conventional
techniques in which it is necessary to inject a contrast agent into
a blood vessel so as to check the "B] reduction in intracerebral
bloodstream," the present exemplary embodiment is a non-contact and
noninvasive method, thereby yielding such an effect that a patient
is easy to have a medical examination because the patient does not
feel pain in diagnosis. Further, since measurements are performed
on the same location at the same time, not only a diseased part can
be specified more specifically and accurately, but also the mental
strain of the patient is decreased by large reduction in diagnosis
time.
[1169] This applied embodiment is not limited to the configuration
of the detection device as shown in FIG. 54 as long as the membrane
potential change and the oxygen concentration change in blood are
detected at the same time, and may be configured as a detection
device employing other configurations or principles.
10] Abuse Prevention Method Using Measurement Technique of Biosis
Activity
10.1) Notes for Use of Objective Technique of Present Exemplary
Embodiment
[1170] The application (NEI) of life activity measurement performed
in a "non-contact" manner by use of the detection method described
in Table 6 brings "a new value (a new function or an original
effect)" as has been described in chapter 9, and has a wide
applicable range. However, the NEI also has a risk of invasion of
privacy and a threat of lack of privacy protection. Further, as
shown in section 9.1, excessive dependence on this would lead to
obstruction of character enhancement. Accordingly, it is desirable
that this applied embodiment (NEI) is used to aim at "a common
profit for users, humankind, and the earth."
10.2) Encryption Processing Method of Transfer
Signal/Information
[1171] A most effective method which prevents invasion of privacy
and protects personal information is to encrypt a life activity
detection signal 248 with event information and life activity
information 249 with event information in FIG. 44.
[1172] A third party, which is different from the mind
communication provider 211 and the mind service distributor 212,
serves as an encryption key generator (not shown in FIG. 44) and
manages an encryption key.
[1173] Here, the present exemplary embodiment has a feature that
the encryption key is constituted by two types of keys, i.e., "a
key to be supplied first" and "a key to be required when
incremental counter numbers (or a duration time) for transmission
increase." Only the encryption method about the life activity
detection signal 248 with event information is described in section
6.4.3 with reference to FIG. 35, but the same encryption method is
adopted for the life activity information 249 with event
information.
[1174] Similarly to the explanation in section 6.4.3 with reference
to FIG. 35, the mind communication provider 211 is notified of
first encryption key information for the life activity information
249 with event information and "an initial value key to set to a
variable shifting position generator 153 which provides and outputs
a variable shifting number in a M-serial cyclic circuit regarding
incremental counter numbers for transmitting the life activity
detection signal or regarding a cumulative duration time to
transmit the life activity detection signal." On the other hand,
the mind communication provider 211 is notified, from the
encryption key generator, of only first encryption key information
for the life activity detection signal 248 with event information,
while the mind service distributor 212 is notified, from the
encryption key generator, of only first encryption key information
for the life activity information 249 with event information. In
view of this, every time the incremental counter numbers (or a
duration time) exceed a specific number (time), the mind
communication provider 211 needs to buy new key information from
the encryption key generator so as to decrypt an encrypted life
activity detection signal 248 with event information.
[1175] Similarly, every time the incremental counter numbers (or a
duration time) exceed a specific number (time), the mind service
distributor 212 needs to buy new key information from the
encryption key generator so as to decrypt encrypted life activity
information 249 with event information.
[1176] With the use of this mechanism, the encryption key generator
can monitor a frequency of usage per each life detecting division
218 shown in FIG. 44, sequentially. Thus, with the combination of
the "key to be supplied first" and the "key to be required when
incremental counter numbers (or a duration time) for transmission
increase," prevention of invasion of privacy and protection of
personal information can be performed more firmly.
10.3) Other Abuse Prevention Methods
[1177] In order that various applications (NEI) using the
measurement technique of biosis activity are used in a right manner
while preventing abuses, it is desirable to perform "publication of
the purpose of use."
[1178] With the use of the method in section 10.1, the encryption
key generator can grasp a frequency of use per application. At the
time of buying "a key to be required when incremental counter
numbers (or a duration time) for transmission increase" from the
encryption key generator, an object of the application should be
self-reported by a buyer. Then, the object of the application and
its frequency of use which the encryption key generator could know
are posted on the Web, so that anyone can see the object and
frequency of use. Thus, unauthorized use can be easily found from
this Web page by people around the world. If an unfavorable
application is performed, a request to prohibit the use is sent to
a corresponding mind communication provider 211 or mind service
distributor 212.
[1179] Thus, it is eagerly desired that this applied embodiment
(NEI) be used for good purposes.
11) Other Applied Embodiments Regarding Detection/Control of Life
Activity
[1180] 11.1) Other Life Activity Phenomena of which Contracted and
Relaxed States of Skeletal Muscle are to be Detected/Controlled
[1181] As examples of dynamical life activities occurring in a life
object, chapters 1 to 5 mainly dealt with methods for detecting an
action potential state and a signal transmission state of the
nervous system. However, the present exemplary embodiment is not
limited to them, and as shown in section 6.1 and Table 6, every
"detection, measurement, or control of dynamical life activities in
a life object by a non-contact method" will be included in the
present exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiments. In the
explanation of section 6.1.1 with reference to Table 6 and the
explanation of section 6.5.4 with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, the
detection of a signal transmission state to the neuromuscular
junction (an activation of the neuromuscular junction 5) is used
for the detection of contraction and relaxation states of a
skeletal muscle. As an applied embodiment of the above exemplary
embodiment, chapter 11 explains a method for directly detecting an
actual contraction state and an actual relaxation state of a
skeletal muscle, and a principle thereof. Further, a method for
controlling contraction/relaxation of a skeletal muscle by use of
the detection principle is also explained herein.
[1182] According to B. Alberts et. al.: Molecular Biology of the
Cell, 4th Edi. (Garland Science, 2002) Chap. 16, a process of
contraction of a skeletal muscle is mainly constituted by the
following two steps:
a] control to enable contraction of the skeletal muscle by release
of calcium ions into a muscle cell; and b] contraction of the
skeletal muscle by migration of Myosin to actin filaments in the
muscle cell.
[1183] Meanwhile, the "signal transmission to the neuromuscular
junction (the activation of the neuromuscular junction 5)"
explained in sections 6.1.1 and 6.5.4 occurs as a front step right
before the above step [a].
[1184] In the contraction step of the skeletal muscle in [b],
"deformation of Myosin," "attachment of a Myosin head to actin
filaments," "restoration of a Myosinshape in a contact state," and
"detachment of the Myosin head from the actin filaments" are
repeated. Here, the "deformation of Myosin" occurs by using
hydrolysis of ATP (Adenosine triphosphate). That is, a part of the
Myosin includes a specific enzyme called Myosin ATPase, and when
ATP in which three phosphoryls are connected in series bonds
thereto, one neighboring water molecule is incorporated therein and
one of the phosphoryls is removed from the bond.
[1185] Thus, the contraction of the skeletal muscle requires
"attachment of a Myosin head to actin filaments." However, in
relaxation of the skeletal muscle, Tropomyosin occupies this
bonding site, and obstructs the "attachment of a Myosin head to
actin filaments." Meanwhile, when the "signal transmission to the
neuromuscular junction (the activation of the neuromuscular
junction 5)" explained in sections 6.1.1 and 6.5.4 occurs, a large
quantity of calcium ions flow into this site as the step [a]. When
the calcium ion thus flowing in at this time bonds to Troponin,
Tropomyosin connected to the Troponin is displaced, and the
"attachment of a Myosin head to actin filaments" is enabled. When
this calcium ion bonds to the Troponin, it is estimated that an
ionic bond is formed between a residue of Aspartate included in the
Troponin or a carboxyl group constituting a part of a residue of
Glutamate, and the calcium ion Ca.sup.2+.
11.2) Basic Thought Regarding Biocatalyst Action by Enzyme
[1186] The following section 11.3 will explain a mechanism for ATP
hydrolysis by Myosin ATPase, but before that, this section explains
a quantum-chemical thought regarding biocatalyst action by
enzyme.
[1187] FIG. 57 (a) shows an electron cloud density distribution of
a bonding orbital while an atom A and an atom B are
covalently-bonded. According to the electrostatic theorem of
Hellmann-Feynman (see Y. Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry)
vol. 2 (Shyoukabou, 2007) p. 55), a force to work on one atomic
nucleus A in a molecule is expressed by a sum of coulomb attraction
from an electron probability (electron cloud density) constituting
the bonding orbital and coulomb repulsion from another atomic
nucleus B. That is, the electron cloud density distributed between
the atomic nuclei A and B and an electrostatic attraction between
the atomic nuclei A and B having positive electric charge work to
form a bond between the atomic nuclei A and B.
[1188] FIG. 57(b) shows an electron cloud density of a bonding
orbital when a quaternized amino group --NH.sub.3.sup.+ included in
a residue of Lysine is hydrogen-bonded to the atomic nucleus A.
Since a nitrogen atom in the quaternized amino group has positive
electric charge, an electron cloud located around the atomic
nucleus A is affected by an electrostatic attraction and is
unevenly distributed on a side of the quaternized amino group. As
shown in FIG. 15(b), the molecular orbital at this time reaches
around a nitrogen atomic nucleus. As a result, the electron cloud
density distributed between the atomic nuclei A and B decreases.
This decreases a bonding strength between the atomic nuclei A and
B, thereby resulting in that a distance between the atomic nuclei A
and B is expanded due to electrostatic repulsion between the atomic
nuclei A and B.
[1189] FIG. 57(c) shows an electron cloud density distribution of a
bonding orbital in a case where the atomic nucleus B comes toward
an atom C relatively charged with positive electricity, as a result
of the expansion of the distance between the atomic nuclei A and B.
At this time, the electron cloud located around the atomic nucleus
B is unevenly distributed on a side of the atom C due to an
electrostatic attraction. When the amount of uneven distribution
becomes large and causes an area where the electron cloud density
becomes "0" between the atomic nuclei A and B, the bonding between
the atomic nuclei A and B is cleaved due to the electrostatic
repulsion between the atomic nuclei A and B. The molecular orbital
at this time is an antibonding orbital to the atomic nuclei A and B
(Y. Harada: Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 1 (Shyoukabou,
2007), p. 263 and p. 290).
11.3) Movement Mechanism of Myosin ATPase
[1190] A partial molecular structure where ATP bonds to an active
site having a function of Myosin ATPase in Myosin is described on
p. 15850 in I. Rayment: Journal of Biological Chemistry vol. 271
(1996), and an extract of its principal part is shown in FIG. 58.
In FIG. 58, a bold solid line indicates a covalent bond, a bold
wavy line indicates an ionic bond, and a vertical line made up of
lateral continuous lines indicates a hydrogen bond. Further, an
arrow of a fine solid line indicates a biased direction of an
electron probability distribution of a bonding orbital (an electron
cloud density distribution). Here, ATP has a molecular structure in
which three phosphoryls are connected to adenosine in series, but
in FIG. 58, a state where one phosphoryl is connected to the
adenosine is collectively described as AMP (Adenosine
monophosphate). It is said that a magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ plays an
important part in hydrolysis of ATP, and a water molecule activated
by the action of the magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ directly works on a
bonding site between two phosphoryls to cleave the bonding.
Further, an active site having a function of Myosin ATPase in
Myosin includes Lysine Lys185 and Asparagine Asn235. Here, the
number in FIG. 58 indicates a sequential identification number of
amino acid in Myosin, which is a protein.
[1191] When ATP bonds to the active site having a function of
Myosin ATPase, oxygen atoms O5.sup.- and O2 therein are
hydrogen-bonded to a part of a residue of Lysine Lys185 and a part
of a residue of Asparagine Asn235. Further, a hydrogen atom H1 in a
water molecule around ATP is hydrogen-bonded to an oxygen atom O2
in ATP. On the other hand, a magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ forms a weak
ionic bond to an oxygen atom O1 in the water molecule, thereby
activating the water molecule.
[1192] In addition, it is also considered that the magnesium ion
Mg.sup.2+ also forms a weak ionic bond to an oxygen atom O9 in
another water molecule, as well as forming weak ionic bonds to two
oxygen atoms O3.sup.- and O.sub.8.sup.- in ATP. It is said that in
a water environment in a life object (about pH 7), ATP is charged
with negative electricity, and a .gamma. phosphoryl and a .beta.
phosphoryl therein correspond to two negative electric charges and
one negative electric charge, respectively.
[1193] In FIG. 58, for the convenience of explanation, it is
assumed that O3.sup.-, O5.sup.- and O8.sup.- are each charged with
one negative electric charge. When a residue of Lysine Lys185 and a
divalent magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+, which are charged with positive
electric charge in the waters environment in a life object (about
pH 7), bond to them, an electrically neutralized state is formed as
a whole. When each molecule is placed three-dimensionally to form
various bonds as such, an electron existence probability (a density
distribution of an electron cloud) around the oxygen atom O5.sup.-
in ATP makes a movement .alpha. toward a nitrogen atom N1.sup.+
charged with positive electricity, via a hydrogen atom H2 in the
residue of Lysine Lys185, as has been described in FIG. 57(b).
Then, in order to make up for the decrease of the electron cloud
density around the oxygen atom O5.sup.-, a part of the electron
probability of a bonding orbital between a phosphorus atom P1 and
an oxygen atom O2 moves in a direction .beta..
[1194] On the other hand, since the oxygen atom O2 bonding two
phosphoryls in ATP forms is hydrogen-bonded to a hydrogen atom H6
in a residue of Asparagine Asn235, a part of the electron cloud
density distribution located around the oxygen atom O2 slightly
moves toward a nitrogen atom N2 via the hydrogen atom H6 as shown
by an arrow .gamma.. Further, in order to make up for an
overwhelming lack of the electron cloud density around the
magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ having two positive electric charges, the
electron cloud density distribution makes a movement .delta. from
the vicinity of the oxygen atom O2 via a phosphorus atom P2 and an
oxygen atom O8.sup.-.
[1195] As a result, the electron cloud density around the oxygen
atom O2 largely decreases, but since this oxygen atom O2 forms a
hydrogen bond to a hydrogen atom H1 in the water molecule, the
decrease of the electron cloud density is prevented by use of this
hydrogen bonding path. More specifically, the electron probability
of a bonding orbital between the oxygen atom O1 and the hydrogen
atom H1 in the water molecule decreases as shown by an arrow
.epsilon., and the electron existence probability of the hydrogen
bond increases. The electrons thus increased work as a bonding
orbital between the hydrogen atom H1 and the oxygen atom O2,
thereby forming a covalent bond between the hydrogen atom H1 and
the oxygen atom O2. Further, the magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ draws a
peripheral electron cloud density toward its circumference, so that
the electron cloud flows in a direction of an arrow .zeta..
[1196] As a result of this, the electron existence probability of
the bonding orbital between the oxygen atom O1 and the hydrogen
atom H1 in the water molecule decreases and the covalent bond is
changed into a hydrogen bond. In accordance with this change, a
distance between the oxygen atom O1 and the hydrogen atom H1 is
broadened, but the description about the distance change is omitted
in FIG. 58. When the bias of the electron cloud density occurs in
the directions shown by the arrows .epsilon. and .zeta. as such,
the electron cloud density around the oxygen atom O1 largely
decreases, and the water molecule is activated. This causes the
oxygen atom O1 to take the electron cloud density around the
phosphorus atom P1 adjacent to the oxygen atom O1 so as to make up
for the depressed electron cloud density around the oxygen atom O1
(.eta.).
[1197] This results in that the electron cloud density increases
between the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O1, and the
electron existence probability works as a bonding orbital between
the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O1. This forms a
covalent bond between the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom
O1. On the other hand, the magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ draws a
peripheral electron cloud density thereof toward its circumference,
so that the electron cloud further flows in a direction shown by an
arrow .theta.. Then, the electron cloud density moves in the
directions shown by the arrows .beta., .gamma., .delta., .eta., and
.theta., which largely reduces the electron existence probability
of the bonding orbital between the phosphorus atom P1 and the
oxygen atom O2. When an area having an electron existence
probability of "0" occurs between the phosphorus atom P1 and the
oxygen atom O2 as shown in FIG. 57(c) as a result thereof, the
bonding orbital between the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom
O2 changes into an antibonding orbital and the bonding between the
phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O2 is cleaved.
[1198] When the hydrolysis mechanism of ATP is summarized, the
following things can be said as shown in FIG. 58 (b). [1199] The
covalent bond between the oxygen atom O1 and the hydrogen atom H1
in the water molecule changes into a hydrogen bond, and the
hydrogen bond between the oxygen atom O2 and the hydrogen atom H1
in ATP changes into a covalent bond. [1200] In FIG. 58(b), a
.gamma. phosphoryl and a .beta. phosphoryl having a phosphorus atom
P1 and a phosphorus atom P2 in a center each have a hydroxyl group
--OH just after hydrolysis of the ATP in an area where a bond
between the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O2 changes into
a bond between the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O1, but a
bond between OH is cleaved immediately in the water environment (pH
7) in the body.
[1201] The hydrolysis reaction of ATP has a large feature that "a
.gamma. phosphoryl (an oxygen atom O5 therein)/a .beta. phosphoryl
(oxygen atoms O2 and O6 therein) are respectively hydrogen-bonded
to a residue of Lysine Lys185/a residue of Asparagine Asn235" over
the reaction.
11.4) Characteristics of Detection/Control of Life Activity
[1202] Section 11.4 relates to an appropriate wavelength range of
an electromagnetic wave (light) to be used at the time of optically
detecting/measuring or controlling contracted and relaxed states of
a skeletal muscle and performs examination from a wide viewpoint.
The appropriate wavelength range at the time of detecting or
measuring an action potential state of a neuron has been already
explained in section 4.7. This section first discusses the
explanation in section 4.7 more specifically, and then discusses a
suitable wavelength range of an electromagnetic wave (light) to be
used for the detection/measurement or control by a non-contact
method with respect to more general dynamical activities occurring
"in a life object," as well as the action potential state of a
neuron and the contracted and relaxed states of a skeletal muscle.
Subsequently, based on general results of the consideration, an
appropriate wavelength range of an electromagnetic wave (light) to
be used at the time of detecting or controlling the contracted and
relaxed states of a skeletal muscle is discussed.
[1203] The present exemplary embodiment or its applied embodiment
has a large feature in that:
[1] detection/measurement or control is performed on dynamical life
activities occurring "in a life object." A more specific feature
thereof is such that: in order to embody the detection/measurement
or control, [2] detection/measurement or control is performed by
use of a transition of a vibration mode according to an interaction
of an external electromagnetic field (an electromagnetic wave) with
a vibration mode which occurs during an activity in the life object
or when the activity changes and which is caused by two or more
specific atoms in a molecule at that time.
[1204] Further, near infrared light is suitable for the
electromagnetic wave which can pass through the "life object," and
particularly, has a feature that:
[3] a transition between vibration modes which a hydrogen atom
(forming a hydrogen bond) involves is easy to interact with near
infrared light. This is because a hydrogen atom is the most
lightweight among other atoms and therefore is easy to oscillate at
high speed (at high frequencies) (in view of classical physics).
Accordingly, in an exemplary embodiment or its applied embodiment
having the feature [3], absorption changes of near infrared light
at a shorter wavelength (high frequency) which is less absorbed by
water molecules can be easily detected/measured, which allows
detection/measurement or control of life activity in a relatively
deep area in the life object.
[1205] With regard to the wavelengths which meet the above features
in the present exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment, the
following first discusses [1] a range in which
detection/measurement or control can be easily performed "in a life
object." Visible light does not pass through a human skin and
therefore an inside of the human body cannot be observed. In
general, visible light having a wavelength of 0.8 .mu.m or less can
hardly pass through the life object. In the meantime, when a palm
is held against sunlight while fingers are closed, red light can be
seen from the gap between the fingers. From such a phenomenon, it
can be understood that light having a wevelength longer than red
light passes through a life object to some extent. More
specifically, it is demonstrated by experiments that light having a
wavelength of 0.84 .mu.m or more passes through skin on a
life-object surface to enter the life object easily. On the other
hand, as has been described in section 4.7, since infrared light
having a wavelength of more than 2.5 .mu.m is easily absorbed by
water molecules in a life object (as excitation energy of a
symmetrically telescopic vibration, an anti-symmetrically
telescopic vibration, and a rotation of water molecules), it is
difficult to transmit electromagnetic waves therethrough due to
light attenuation. As has been described in section 4.7, water
molecules occupy 70% (by weight) of chemical compounds constituting
an animal cell, so that a wavelength light beam with a little light
attenuation due to absorption by water molecules can pass through a
life object. Accordingly, in a case where detection/measurement or
control of life activity is performed using an electromagnetic wave
which "passes through a life object," it is desirable to use near
infrared light having a wavelength in a range from 0.84 .mu.m (or
0.875 .mu.m) to 2.5 .mu.m.
[1206] The following discusses [1] a range in which
detection/measurement or control can be easily performed "in a life
object," more specifically. As has been already described in
section 4.7, there are absorption bands corresponding to
combinations of a water molecule around center wavelengths of 1.91
.mu.m and 1.43 .mu.m. Further, there is another absorption band
around a center wavelength of 0.97 .mu.m, though light absorption
is small. Here, the following discusses in detail near infrared
absorption spectra of water which is shown in FIG. 2.1.1 on page 12
and FIG. 4.6.1 on page 180 of Yukihiro Ozaki/Satoshi Kawata:
Kinsekigai bunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996), which is
referred to for the above absorption bands. As a result, it is
found that wavelength ranges indicative of half values of
absorbances at the largest absorption wavelengths of 0.97 .mu.m,
1.43 .mu.m, and 1.91 .mu.m are given in ranges from 0.943 to 1.028
.mu.m, from 1.394 to 1.523 .mu.m, and from 1.894 to 2.061 .mu.m, as
shown in FIG. 56. That is, light absorption by water is large in
these wavelength regions. Accordingly, in the wavelength ranges
from 0.84 .mu.m to 2.5 .mu.m, a wavelength region except for the
above ranges corresponds to a region where the light absorption by
water is small. That is, in the present exemplary embodiment or the
applied embodiment, when light absorption is considered to be small
in the absorption band around a center wavelength of 0.97 .mu.m
(there is little influence of the light absorption), it is
desirable to use, for detection/measurement or control of life
activity, electromagnetic waves including an electromagnetic wave
having a wavelength within any of a first applicable wavelength
range I from 2.061 .mu.m to 2.5 .mu.m, a second applicable
wavelength range II from 1.523 .mu.m to 1.894 .mu.m, and a third
applicable wavelength range III from 0.84 .mu.m to 1.394 .mu.m, as
shown in FIG. 56. In the meantime, in a case where the influence
(light absorption) by an oxygen concentration indicator in a living
tissue is desired to be removed at the time of detection or control
of life activity (see section 4.7), the third applicable wavelength
range III will be from 0.875 .mu.m to 1.394 .mu.m. By setting the
third applicable wavelength range III as such, even if the oxygen
concentration indicator exists in the middle of a detection light
path, the detection light is not absorbed, so that the S/N ratio of
a life activity detection signal can be secured. Further, in order
to prevent light absorption in the absorption band having a center
wavelength of 0.97 .mu.m, it is desirable to use electromagnetic
waves including an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength within
any of a fourth applicable wavelength range IV from 1.028 .mu.m to
1.394 .mu.m and a fifth applicable wavelength range V from 0.84
.mu.m to 0.943 .mu.m (or from 0.875 .mu.m to 0.943 .mu.m) in
addition to the above ranges.
[1207] Naturally, the desirable wavelength range of the
electromagnetic wave for the detection/measurement or control of
life activity is applied to the detection or measurement of an
action potential state of a neuron explained in section 4.7.
Subsequently, in regard to a result of the above consideration,
[2] the detection or measurement of an action potential state of a
neuron is discussed in consideration of the feature of the present
exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment that
detection/measurement or control is performed by use of an
interaction of an external electromagnetic field with a transition
between vibration modes occurring between two or more specific
atoms in a molecule during activity in a life object or when the
activity changes. At the time of detection/measurement of an action
potential state of a neuron, a using wavelength corresponding to
the 1st overtone for transition between anti-symmetrically
telescopic vibration modes mainly caused by C--H--Cl.sup.- is in a
range from 2.05 to 2.48 .mu.m, according to section 4.7. However,
this wavelength range overlaps with the wavelength region of 2.05
to 2.061 .mu.m where water absorbs light greatly. Accordingly, it
is desired that the electromagnetic waves corresponding to the 1st
overtone and used for the detection/measurement include an
electromagnetic wavelength within a wavelength range of 2.061 to
2.48 .mu.m so that the above overlapping range can be avoided. In
the meantime, in a case where the light absorption by water in the
absorption band having a center wavelength of 0.97 .mu.m causes any
problem, it is desirable that the electromagnetic waves
corresponding to the 3rd overtone of the transition between
anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration modes and used for the
detection/measurement include an electromagnetic wavelength within
a wavelength range of 0.840 to 1.37 .mu.m according to section 4.7.
Further, in order to remove the influence by the oxygen
concentration indicator as described above, it is desirable that
the electromagnetic waves corresponding to the 3rd overtone and
used for the detection/measurement include an electromagnetic
wavelength within a wavelength range of 0.875 to 1.37 .mu.m.
However, in order to avoid the influence of light absorption by
water in the absorption band having a center wavelength of 0.97
.mu.m so as to obtain highly accurate detection/measurement, it is
preferable to use electromagnetic waves including an
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength in either range from 0.840
.mu.m to 0.943 .mu.m (or 0.875 .mu.m to 0.943 .mu.m) or from 1.028
.mu.m to 1.37 .mu.m for the detection/measurement of an action
potential state of a neuron.
[1208] In consideration of the feature of [1] detection/measurement
or control in a life object and the feature of [2] interaction of a
transition between vibration modes with an external electromagnetic
field (an electromagnetic wave) as well, the following describes a
case of performing detection/measure or control of contracted and
relaxed states of a skeletal muscle. As has been described in
section 11.1, a contraction/relaxation motion of a skeletal muscle
is constituted by two steps:
a] control to enable contraction of the skeletal muscle by release
of calcium ions into a muscle cell; and b] contractile function of
the skeletal muscle. Accordingly, the detection/measurement or
control can be performed on each of the two steps,
independently.
[1209] Initially explained is a detection/measurement method or a
control method related to the step [a]. As described in section
11.1, in the step (a), it is expected that an ionic bond between a
carboxyl group and a calcium ion Ca.sup.2+ occurs. In this case, as
described in section 3.5, it is considered that a relative light
absorbance of the absorption band corresponding to a symmetrically
telescopic vibration mode of a single carboxyl group largely
decreases. Accordingly, in this exemplary embodiment, [1210] the
change (rapid decrease) of the relative light absorbance of the
absorption band corresponding to the symmetrically telescopic
vibration mode of the carboxyl group is detected so as to
detect/measure whether or not the skeletal muscle is in a
contractable state, or alternatively, [1211] excitation light in a
vibration mode is projected to increase an energy level of the
symmetrically telescopic vibration mode of the carboxyl group, so
that a bond of a calcium ion Ca.sup.2+ to the carboxyl group is
prevented and the contraction/relaxation action of the skeletal
muscle is controlled. The symmetrically telescopic vibration mode
of the carboxyl group is generally a ground state (a vibration
state in which the energy level is the lowest). When it is
illuminated with excitation light corresponding to the nth
overtone, the energy level of the symmetrically telescopic
vibration mode of the carboxyl group rises. In a case where a
vibration of the carboxyl group is small (the energy level is low),
a calcium ion Ca.sup.2+ easily bonds to the carboxyl group. On the
other hand, in a case where the energy level of the vibration mode
rises, even if the calcium ion Ca.sup.2+ bond thereto temporarily,
it is highly probable that the calcium ion Ca.sup.2+ is thrown off
(separated) due to the high energy. That is, by illumination with
excitation light corresponding to the nth overtone, the calcium ion
Ca.sup.2+ is hard to bond to the carboxyl group, so that
contraction control of the skeletal muscle is obstructed and a
relaxed state of the skeletal muscle continues.
[1212] Since section 3.5 only shows a wavenumber value of a
reference tone exciting the symmetrically telescopic vibration mode
of the carboxyl group, the following explains a wavelength
corresponding to excitation light of the nth overtone. The
following explanation is not limited to the control of
contraction/relaxation of the skeletal muscle, but can be applied
commonly to every exemplary embodiment or applied embodiment
described in section 11.4, in which [2] detection/measurement or
control is performed by use of a transition of a vibration mode
according to an interaction of an external electromagnetic field
(an electromagnetic wave) with a vibration mode which occurs during
activity in the life object or when the activity changes and which
is caused by two or more specific atoms in a molecule at that
time.
[1213] Initially, by use of the following formula (A 38) as
described in section 4.5:
Formula 38 m .apprxeq. m _ + < m _ .kappa. 3 x 3 + .kappa. 4 x 4
m _ >= 2 .kappa. 2 .beta. ( m + 1 2 ) + 3 .kappa. 4 4 .beta. 2 (
2 m 2 + 2 m + 1 ) , ( A 38 ) ##EQU00028##
a necessary amount h.nu..sub.m of energy at the time when an energy
level .epsilon..sub.0 is shifted to .epsilon..sub.m is expressed
by:
Formula 60 hv m = m - 0 = 2 .kappa. 2 .beta. m + 3 .kappa. 2 2
.beta. 2 ( m 2 + m ) . ( A 60 ) ##EQU00029##
[1214] Accordingly, from formula (A 60), where frequencies of the
reference tone, the 1st overtone, and the 2nd overtone are assumed
.nu..sub.1, .nu..sub.2 and .nu..sub.3, the following relations are
established:
Formula 61 2 .kappa. 2 .beta. h = 2 v 2 - v 3 = 2 v 1 - v 3 3 ; and
( A 61 ) Formula 62 3 .kappa. 4 2 .beta. 2 h = v 3 3 - v 2 2 = v 3
6 - v 1 2 . ( A 62 ) ##EQU00030##
With the use of formulae (A 60) to (A 62) thus obtained, a value of
a wavelength .lamda.m (a frequency .nu..sub.m) of a (m-1)th
overtone can be estimated from the frequencies .nu..sub.1,
.nu..sub.2, and .nu..sub.3 of the reference tone, the 1st overtone,
and the 2nd overtone based on the anharmonic vibration.
[1215] Based on the reference documents, wavelengths .lamda.m of
the reference tone and the (m-1)th overtones estimated by
calculation using formulae (A 60) to (A 62) are shown in Table 7.
Among the values shown in Table 7, a value to which (1) is attached
is referred from Yukihiro Ozaki/Satoshi Kawata: Kinsekigai
bunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996) P. 218 to P. 219. On the
other hand, a value to which (2) is attached is obtained by
combining the calculation result in section 3.5 with a reference
from R. M. Silverstein and F. X. Webster: Spectrometric
Identification of Organic Compounds 6th Edit. (John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 1998) Chapter 3, Section 3-6. Further, a wavelength of
the (m-1)th overtone of a symmetrically telescopic vibration of an
ionic carboxylic acid group --COO.sup.- is calculated by
extrapolation of a calculated value of a vibration of C.dbd.O of
carboxylic acid --COOH by use of a value of the wavelength of the
reference tone.
TABLE-US-00007 TABLE 7 Reference 1st overtone 2nd overtone 3rd
overtone 4th overtone tone (.mu.m) (.mu.m) (.mu.m) (.mu.m) (.mu.m)
Intermolecular 3.19-3.21 1.60-1.62 1.07-1.09 0.81-0.83 0.65-0.67
hydrogen bonding in (calculation Reference Reference (calculation
(calculation primary amide --CONH.sub.2 result) (1) (1) result)
result) Vibration of hydrogen 3.02-3.32 1.53-1.67 1.04-1.12
0.79-0.85 0.64-0.68 bonding part in (calculation Reference
Reference (calculation (calculation secondary amide result) (1) (1)
result) result) --CONH.sup.- Vibration between C.dbd.O 5.68
2.84-2.86 1.89-1.92 1.42-1.45 1.13-1.17 of carboxylic acid
Reference (calculation Reference (calculation (calculation --COOH
(2) result) (1) result) result) Symmetrically 6.25-6.37 3.12-3.21
2.08-2.15 1.56-1.63 1.24-1.31 telescopic vibration of Reference
(calculation (calculation (calculation (calculation ionic
carboxylic acid (2) result) result) result) result) group
--COO.sup.- Intermolecular 2.90-3.25 1.50-1.60 1.04-1.05 0.80-0.77
0.67-0.61 hydrogen bonding in (calculation Reference Reference
(calculation (calculation associated --OH alcohol result) (1) (1)
result) result)
[1216] Most carboxyl groups are in a state of an ionic carboxylic
acid group --COO.sup.- in a water environment (pH=around 7) in a
life object. Accordingly, the excitation light of the nth overtone
with respect to a symmetrically telescopic vibration mode of the
carboxyl group in the present exemplary embodiment basically
corresponds to a row of "Symmetrically telescopic vibration of
ionic carboxylic acid group --COO.sup.-" in Table 7. However, even
under this water environment, there is a probability that some
carboxyl groups keep a state of a carboxylic acid --COOH, and a
calcium ion Ca.sup.2+ bonds to this C.dbd.O site. Accordingly, in
a] control to enable contraction of the skeletal muscle by release
of calcium ions into a muscle cell, in the present exemplary
embodiment, both wavelengths are combined and assumed as follows:
[1217] a wavelength range corresponding to the 2nd overtone is
assumed 1.89 to 2.15 .mu.m, [1218] a wavelength range corresponding
to the 3rd overtone is assumed 1.42 to 1.63 .mu.m, and [1219] a
wavelength range corresponding to the 4th overtone is assumed 1.13
to 1.31 .mu.m. Further, similarly to section 4.7, measurement
errors to these values are expected by about 10%. In view of this,
respective lower limits of the above ranges are
1.89.times.(1-0.05)=1.80, 1.42.times.(1-0.05)=1.35, and
1.13.times.(1-0.05)=1.07. Similarly, respective upper limits
thereof are 2.15.times.(1+0.05)=2.26, 1.63.times.(1+0.05)=1.71, and
1.31.times.(1+0.05)=1.38. Thus, the wavelength ranges including
measurement errors of .+-.5% are as follows: [1220] the wavelength
corresponding to the 2nd overtone is assumed 1.80 to 2.26 .mu.m,
[1221] the wavelength corresponding to the 3rd overtone is assumed
1.35 to 1.71 .mu.m, and [1222] the wavelength range corresponding
to the 4th overtone is assumed 1.07 to 1.38 .mu.m. In consideration
of overlapping parts, it is concluded that "a wavelength range
suitable for detection/measurement or control is in a range from
1.07 to 1.71 .mu.m and in a range from 1.80 .mu.m to 2.26 .mu.m."
Further, by excluding, from this range, the wavelength range in
which light is largely absorbed by water molecules, as shown in
FIG. 56, the wavelength range suitable for [a]
detection/measurement or control to a bond between Ca.sup.+ and a
carboxyl group --COO.sup.- is 1.07 to 1.39 .mu.m, 1.52 to 1.71
.mu.m, and 2.06 to 2.26 .mu.m. This wavelength range is shown in
FIG. 56.
[1223] In a case where a life object is illuminated with
electromagnetic waves including an electromagnetic wave having a
wavelength in the range explained as above, in the present
exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment, measurement/control
is performed as follows: [1224] A signal related to a life activity
is detected by an absorption amount or an absorption change of the
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength in the above range in a
life object, and the detection signal is processed to measure a
life activity state; and [1225] An illumination amount of the
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength in the above range is
increased in the life object (temporarily) so as to control the
life activity. That is, a light amount of the electromagnetic wave
projected to the body for detection of life activity is very small,
so that a ratio of carboxyl groups in which a vibration mode is
excited in a skeletal muscle is small and the life activity itself
is not affected. However, when the light amount of the
electromagnetic wave thus projected is increased, most of the
carboxyl groups in the skeletal muscle are excited to cause
vibrations, thereby resulting in that bonding of calcium ions
Ca.sup.2+ thereto is obstructed and contraction of the skeletal
muscle becomes impossible.
[1226] Further, in the present exemplary embodiment or the applied
embodiment, detection/measurement and control related to life
activity may be performed at the same time. In this case, while an
illumination amount of the electromagnetic wave having a wavelength
in the above range is decreased to detect/measure a life activity
and check an active state thereof, the control of life activity is
performed (by increasing the illuminating light amount
sometimes).
[1227] Next will be explained a feature of an activity at a
molecular level to be used for detection/measurement or control in
the present exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment, that
is,
[3] a case where the transition between vibration modes which a
hydrogen atom (forming a hydrogen bond) involves (which has been
already explained in this section) is used.
[1228] As shown in FIG. 58, in a hydrolysis reaction of ATP in a
skeletal muscle, hydrogen bonds to a part of a residue of Lysine
Lys185 and a part of a residue of Asparagine Asn235 are formed. In
order to cause a hydrolysis reaction stably by a neutralization
effect of local charges, "a hydrogen bond between a residue of
amino acid having positive electric charge and ATP having negative
electric charge" is required. Therefore, in the hydrolysis of ATP,
hydrogen bonds to residues of Lysine Lys185 are also formed in
other areas in addition to the skeletal muscle very often. That is,
as described in section 11.3, since ATP has negative electric
charge in the water environment of pH 7, local bonds to a magnesium
ion Mg.sup.2+ and a residue of amino acid having positive electric
charge is necessary for electrical neutralization. A residue of
amino acid having positive electric charge is included in only the
residue of Arginine except for the residue of Lysine Lys185, and in
either case, a hydrogen atom is placed outside the positively
charged part. Accordingly, in an electrically neutralized state, it
is highly probable that a hydrogen bond is formed between this
hydrogen atom and an oxygen atom in the ATP. Further, since the
hydrogen atom itself, which is involved with this hydrogen bond, is
more lightweight than other atoms, the use of this transition
between vibration modes makes it easy to perform
detection/measurement or control of life activity in a relatively
deep region in a life object, as described earlier.
[1229] Only small part of a residue of Lysine and a residue of
Arginine is hydrogen-bonded to a water molecule (an oxygen atom
thereof), but an absorption band occurring in ATP hydrolysis and an
absorption band deriving from the hydrogen bond to the water
molecule have different values of center wavelengths for the
following reason. FIG. 59(a) shows a case where a part of the
residue of Lysine Lys185 is hydrogen-bonded to an oxygen atom in
ATP, and FIG. 59(b) shows a case where a part of the residue of
Lysine Lys185 is hydrogen-bonded to an oxygen atom in a water
molecule. When a distance between a hydrogen atom H2 involved with
hydrogen bonding and an oxygen atom O5 or O10 becomes smaller than
an optimal value, the water molecule is fixed not lightly and
therefore relative arrangements between the oxygen atom O10 and
hydrogen atoms H9/H10 do not change. In contrast, when the distance
between the hydrogen atom H2 and the oxygen atom O5 becomes smaller
than the optimal value, distortion occurs in ATP and intramolecular
energy in ATP and the whole Lysine Lys185 forming a hydrogen bond
increases, as shown in FIG. 59(b).
[1230] As a result, an increasing amount of the energy of the whole
molecule at the time when the distance between the hydrogen atom H2
and the oxygen atom O5/O10 becomes smaller than the optimal value
is larger in the case of hydrogen bonding to a part in ATP than in
the case of hydrogen bonding to a water molecule.
[1231] FIG. 60 shows an influence to an anharmonic vibration
potential property due to a difference in a molecular structure
involved with a hydrogen bond. A distance between two atoms forming
an electric dipole moment, indicated by a lateral axis in FIG. 60,
represents a distance between the hydrogen atom H2 in the residue
of Lysine Lys185 and the oxygen atom O5/O10 of a hydrogen-bonding
partner in the example of FIG. 59. The property of FIG. 59(a)
corresponds to an alternating long and short dash line in FIG. 60,
while the property of FIG. 59(b) corresponds to a broken line in
FIG. 60. It is considered that a potential property in a direction
in which two hydrogen-bonded atoms are distanced away from each
other (a direction in which the distance between the hydrogen atom
H2 and the oxygen atom O5/O10 becomes larger than the optimal
value) is not affected by a molecular structure involved with the
hydrogen bond that much. On the other hand, when the two
hydrogen-bonded atoms come closer (the distance between the
hydrogen atom H2 and the oxygen atom O5/O10 becomes smaller than
the optimal magnitude), distortion occurs in a molecular structure
in ATP in a direction in which the distance between the two atoms
increases as shown in FIG. 59(a), thereby resulting in that a
difference value of total energy increases (which is indicated by
the property of the dash line of FIG. 60).
[1232] Further, as the difference value of total energy increases
when the two hydrogen-bonded atoms come closer, coefficient values
of .kappa..sub.2 and .kappa..sub.4 both increase as shown in FIG.
60. Consequently, as shown in formula (A 60), the frequency of the
absorption band increases (the wavelength decreases). For this
reason, depending on whether a hydrogen-bonding partner to which a
part of the residue of Lysine Lys185 is hydrogen-bonded is ATP or a
water molecule, the wavelength of the absorption band varies.
Further, as shown in the explanation above, depending on a
difference in a residue of amino acid involved with a hydrogen bond
(e.g., whether the residue of amino acid is a residue of Lysine
Lys185, a residue of Arginine, or a residue of Asparagine Asn235),
a wavelength value of the absorption band varies.
[1233] In this way, the present exemplary embodiment or the applied
embodiment has such an effect that a difference of molecules
involved with bonding is estimated from a wavelength value of the
absorption band which varies (temporarily) during life activities,
so that a difference between detailed life activities (internal
reactions) can be identified. Further, this feature and effect are
not limited to the contraction/relaxation in a skeletal muscle and
hydrogen bonding, but also applicable to any life activities
(internal reactions) accompanied with (temporal) variations in a
vibration mode of a specific atom. Further, when this wavelength
selectivity by the molecular difference involved with bonding is
used for life activity control to be explained in chapter 12, it is
possible to perform control according to the difference of an
appropriate wavelength so that other life activities are less
affected. This yields such an effect that side effects caused
unnecessarily due to the life activity control can be reduced.
[1234] On the other hand, from a combination of the explanations in
chapters 4 and 5, when an anharmonic vibration potential property
changes as shown in FIG. 60, a distribution characteristic of
electrons located around a hydrogen atom involved with a hydrogen
bond changes. In view of this, the detection or measurement of any
life activities (internal reactions) accompanied with (temporal)
variations in a vibration mode of a specific atom may be performed
by use of not only the difference in the wavelength value of the
absorption band, but also the difference in the chemical shift
value at the time of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (see chapter
5).
[1235] A detailed correspondence between a wavelength value of the
absorption band corresponding to hydrogen bonding occurring in a
life activity (internal reaction) and a combination of molecules
involved with the hydrogen bond requires data filing of theoretical
calculation and experimental values. In the present specification,
instead of explaining strict values, an outline of the wavelength
range of the absorption band which takes into account measurement
errors and differences of detection values caused due to a
measurement environment is explained. The transition between
vibration modes corresponding to hydrogen bonding occurring in
hydrolysis of ATP structurally has a characteristic close to the
row of "Intermolecular hydrogen bonding of primary amide
--CONH.sub.2" in Table 7. The hydrogen bonding in the ATP
hydrolysis corresponding to the contraction of a skeletal muscle is
related to a residue of Lysine Lys185 and a residue of Asparagine
Asn235 (FIG. 58), but a variation of the center wavelength of the
absorption band depending on the difference of the residue of amino
acid is considered to be relatively small. The wavelength ranges of
respective absorption bands are explained below together. As
described in section 4.7, when a variation range considering the
difference in a detection value caused by measurement errors or
measurement environments is estimated as .+-.15%, the variation
ranges are as follows: 1.60.times.(1-0.15)=1.36,
1.62.times.(1+0.15)=1.86, 1.07.times.(1-0.15)=0.91, and
1.09.times.(1+0.15)=1.25. Accordingly, when the values are
summarized, the following ranges can be obtained: [1236] a
wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to the 1st
overtone is from 1.36 .mu.m to 1.86 .mu.m; and [1237] a wavelength
range of an absorption band corresponding to the 2nd overtone is
from 0.91 .mu.m to 1.25 .mu.m. With respect to the ranges thus
obtained, remaining ranges obtained by excluding the wavelength
ranges greatly absorbed by the water molecule shown in FIG. 56 are
as follows: [1238] the wavelength range of the absorption band
corresponding to the 2nd overtone is from 1.03 .mu.m to 1.25 .mu.m;
and [1239] the wavelength range of the absorption band
corresponding to the 1st overtone is from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.86 .mu.m,
as shown in FIG. 56.
[1240] However, the ranges show only a detection range of the nth
overtone to the last. Further, an absorption band corresponding to
combinations is also included in the near-infrared region. In view
of this, when the wavelength range to detect combinations is also
taken into account, the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth
wavelength ranges I to V with less absorption by water shown in
FIG. 56 can be taken as target ranges. Alternatively, if an
absorption amount in the absorption band for the combinations is
large and is not affected by the absorption by water very much, a
desirable wavelength range will be in a range from 0.84 .mu.m (or
0.875 .mu.m) to 2.50 .mu.m as shown in section 4.7. Further,
similarly to the above as for the hydrolysis of ATP, the following
can be performed: [1241] Detection of a signal related to a life
activity based on an absorption amount or an absorption change of
the electromagnetic wave having a wavelength in the above range in
a life object, and measurement of a life activity state by
processing the detection signal; and [1242] Control of the life
activity by increasing (temporarily) an illumination amount of the
electromagnetic wave having a wavelength in the above range in the
life object (note that detection/measurement and control may be
performed in parallel). That is, in order to contract a skeletal
muscle, oxygen atoms O2, O6, and O5.sup.- in ATP are
hydrogen-bonded to a part of a residue of Lysine Lys185 and a part
of a residue of Asparagine Asn235 just before a hydrolysis reaction
of ATP (FIG. 58). At this time, a high-intensity electromagnetic
wave is projected so that vibration modes of most of the hydrogen
atoms H6, H5, and H2 related to hydrogen bonding are excited. This
causes the hydrogen atoms H6, H5 and H2 to vibrate in an excited
state, thereby cleaving the hydrogen bonds by the energy. This
causes ATP not to have a molecular arrangement in which hydrolysis
can be performed as shown in FIG. 58, thereby resulting in that the
hydrolysis reaction of ATP is obstructed, so that the skeletal
muscle does not contract and its relaxed state continues.
[1243] The above explanation mainly deals with
detection/measurement or control for contraction/relaxation of a
skeletal muscle as an example, but the present exemplary embodiment
is also applicable to detection/measurement or control for any
activities in a life object related to the "hydrolysis of ATP" as
an applied embodiment. For example, the detection/measurement or
control by the aforementioned method is applicable to an ion pump
function to pump a specific ion out of a cell to the outside or
carbon fixation during photosynthesis as an operation using the
hydrolysis of ATP. Further, according to B. Alberts et. al.:
Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th Edi. (Garland Science, 2002)
Chap. 16, motor protein is used for substance transport in a cell
including substance transport in a neuronal axon, but the
hydrolysis of ATP is also used for movement of this motor protein.
Accordingly, the detection/measurement or control by the
aforementioned method is applicable to this substance transport in
a cell as one example of life activities.
11.5) Features of Detection Method of Life Activity
[1244] This section explains characteristics of a life activity
detection signal obtained by using a hydrolysis reaction of ATP for
muscular contraction detection and a measurement method related to
it. However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to the
above, and a phenomenon of a] control to enable contraction of a
skeletal muscle by release of calcium ions into a muscle cell, as
described in the above section, may be used for detection of
muscle. Initially, as premise for the detection of life activity, a
muscle portion is illuminated with an electromagnetic wave (light)
including a center wavelength of the absorption band which occurs
when a part of a residue of Lysine Lys185 is hydrogen-bonded to an
oxygen atom in ATP, as described in the previous section (section
11.4), so as to detect an absorbing state of the electromagnetic
wave (light). FIG. 61 shows a difference in absorption change of an
electromagnetic wave (light) before initiation of a muscular
contraction activity 511 and during a muscular contraction activity
512. Before initiation of the muscular contraction activity 511, no
hydrogen bonding occurs between a part of a residue of Lysine
Lys185 and an oxygen atom in ATP, so that an absorption band
corresponding to that is not caused and a light absorption amount
at a center wavelength thereof is small. After that, during the
muscular contraction activity 512, a hydrolysis reaction of ATP
occurs asynchronously, so that an absorption amount of the
electromagnetic wave fluctuates greatly along a detection time.
That is, a very large number of Myosins exist in a muscle cell, and
timings to cause the hydrolysis reaction of ATP are different
between individual Myosins. At the moment when many Myosins cause
the hydrolysis reaction of ATP at the same time, the absorption
amount of the electromagnetic wave (light) increases, but on the
other hand, at the moment when only a few Myosins cause the
hydrolysis reaction of ATP, the absorption amount of the
electromagnetic wave (light) decreases. Thai, is, in one hydrolysis
reaction of ATP in a skeletal muscle cell, one pulse waveform is
obtained as a detection signal as in FIG. 73(a). Since a very large
number of hydrolysis reactions of ATP occur in one skeletal muscle
cell, each pulse waveform generated per hydrolysis reach on of ATP
is combined (overlapped) together, as a result of which a detection
signal waveform similar to those in FIGS. 73(b) and 73(c) is
obtained. Therefore, in the present exemplary embodiment, the
muscular contraction activity is evaluated based on an amplitude
value 513 of the absorption change amount of the electromagnetic
wave (light), for the detection signal property shown in FIG. 61.
However, this is not a limit, and the amount of muscular
contraction activity may be evaluated using a maximum value 513-1
of the absorption change amount of dm electromagnetic wave (light)
in a specific time range or an amplitude value 513-2 or 513-3 of
the detection signal changing in a short time range. In such a
case, too, detecting the signal direction or the amplitude value
513 of the detection signal has an advantageous effect of improving
the accuracy and reliability of signal detection, as described in
section 6.3.1 with reference to FIG. 73.
[1245] In the present exemplary embodiment, a "contraction state of
facial muscles of a human" is detected so as to measure an
emotional reaction of an examinee as described in section 6.5.4, as
a method for measuring a life activity by detecting the "muscular
contractile activity" as a detection subject of life activity. J.
H. Warfel: The Extremities 6th edition (Lea & Febiger, 1993)
describes a relationship between contraction of an expression
muscle on a face and an expression, and an extract therefrom is
shown in FIG. 62. When a person is surprised, an epicranius 501
contracts, and when a person feels pain, a corrugator 502
contracts. This corresponds to phenomena that the eyebrows are
raised when a person is surprised and that the forehead is wrinkled
when a person feels pain. Further, cheeks rise with the smile,
which indicates a state where a zygomaticus 503 contracts when
smiling. On the other hand, when a person feels sorrow, a depressor
anguli oris 505 contracts, so that the mouth stretches and the
outside of the mouth turns down. In the meantime, when a person
wants to say something or to express feelings such as
dissatisfaction, the person sometimes shoots out the lips. When a
person wants to represent facial expression, an orbicularis oris
504 contracts. On the other hand, when a person is expressionless,
a depressor labii inferioris 506 tends to contract. When a person
has some doubt and shows disdain, a mentalis 507 contracts and a
center of the mouth turns down.
[1246] A relationship between a location of a mimetic muscle which
contracts on a face and a facial expression suggests that "what
emotional reaction is expressed can be found according to which
mimetic muscle contracts." The present exemplary embodiment has
such a feature that an emotional reaction or a feeling of an
examinee is measured in real time to find which muscle contracts
and how strong the contraction is by use of this phenomenon. There
has been conventionally known a technique in which a feeling of the
examinee is estimated from geometric information such as a
placement, a shape, or a time dependent variation of constituent
parts (eyes and a mouth) on the face. However, this method has such
a problem that an original facial structure of the examinee and a
facial angle in measurement largely affect the measurement, so that
measurement accuracy is poor and the measurement takes time. In
contrast, in this exemplary embodiment, since the emotional
reaction or the feeling is measured according to a location or
strength of a mimetic muscle to contract, highly accurate
measurement can be performed instantly. Further, since the
measurement is a non-contact method, the measurement can be
advantageously performed on the examinee in a natural state without
imposing a burden on the examinee.
[1247] Further, not only the present exemplary embodiment can
perform measurement in a non-contact manner, but also the present
exemplary embodiment has such a device that the measurement can be
performed stably even if the examinee moves around freely. In a
case where the examinee moves around freely during the measurement,
a position 522 of a detection subject of life activity (that is,
the examinee) may move toward a corner of a detectable range 521 in
the detecting section for life activity in some cases, as shown in
FIG. 63, for example. In such a case, the present exemplary
embodiment utilizes a signal obtained from the position monitoring
section 46 regarding a detected point for life activity so as to
detect a life activity. As has been already described in section
6.1.3, [1248] the present exemplary embodiment has a large feature
that the second detection is performed based on the first
detection. The "first detection" as used herein indicates "position
detection of a detected point for life activity" as defined in
section 6.1.3, and the "position monitoring section 46 regarding a
detected point for life activity" shown in FIG. 22, for example,
performs the detection. Further, the "second detection" indicates
"detection of life activity" and the "detecting section 47 for life
activity" shown in FIG. 22, for example, performs the
detection.
[1249] In the meantime, the present exemplary embodiment also has
such a feature that in order to attain the feature, an operation
check (S101) of the detecting section 101 for life activity and the
position monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for life
activity is performed in advance, as shown in FIG. 64 or 65, and
[1250] when at least either one of position detection (the first
detection) of a detected point for life activity and detection of
life activity (the second detection) is not performable (S102),
such a process is performed that a life activity detection signal
106 (see FIG. 31, 32, or 35) is not output (S103).
[1251] For example, as shown in FIG. 63, if the position 522 of the
detection subject of life activity (for example, the examinee) is
within the detectable range 521 in the detecting section for life
activity, the detection of life activity (the second detection) can
be performed. However, if the position 522 of the detection subject
of life activity (for example, the examinee) is out of the
detectable range 521 in the detecting section for life activity,
the detection of life activity (the second detection) cannot be
performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, reflection light
obtained by illuminating the detection subject of life activity
(e.g., the examinee) with the illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection is detected, but if light is blocked on a part
of the optical path, the detection of life activity (the second
detection) cannot be performed. Similarly, a case where position
detection by the position monitoring section 46 regarding a
detected point for life activity shown in S102 of FIG. 64 or 65
cannot be performed corresponds to a case where the detection
subject of life activity (e.g., the examinee) moves outside the
range where the position detection by the position monitoring
section 46 regarding a detected point for life activity is
performable or a case where light is blocked on a part of the
detection light path.
[1252] Further, as described above, in a case where at least either
of the first and second detections is not performable, a specific
value such as "0" may be output, for example, as shown in S103 of
FIG. 64 or 65, instead of stopping the output of the life activity
detection signal 106. At the same time, the user may be notified of
the state where the detection of life activity is not performable,
by means of a "screen display" or "audio" (S103).
[1253] On the other hand, section 6.1.3 describes that a position
of a measurement subject in three dimensions is calculated by
position detection of a detected point for life activity (the first
detection) and a signal of detection (the second detection) related
to the life activity is obtained from the calculated position in a
life object. This specific content thereof will be explained, more
specifically. The meaning of "based on the first detection" in the
above feature is that: [1254] a position in a depth direction of
the detected point 30 for life activity is detected based on the
position detection (the first detection) of the detected point for
life activity. This corresponds to the step of S104 in FIG. 64 or
65 (detection by the position monitoring section 46 regarding a
detected point for life activity). The principle of "trigonometry"
is used as a specific method thereof as described in section 6.2.2
with reference to FIG. 22. Subsequently, based on "positional
information in the depth direction of the detected point 30 for
life activity" obtained as a result of the detection in S104
(corresponding to the distance 44 surface points of an area where
the detecting section for life activity is disposed in FIG. 22),
the objective lens 31 (FIG. 23 or 24) provided in the detecting
section 101 for life activity is displaced in the optical axial
direction so as to be moved to a position optimum for detection of
life activity. This corresponds to controlling of an operation of
the detecting section 101 for life activity as described in S105.
In the meantime, the camera lens 42 is also provided in the
position monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for life
activity as shown in FIG. 22, and the camera lens 42 is optimized
in accordance with the position in the depth direction of the
detected point 30 for life activity obtained in S104. As a result,
a clear imaging pattern of the life-object surface 41 is obtained
on the two-dimensional photodetector 43 provided in the position
monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for life activity.
Thus, only after the clear imaging pattern is obtained in the
position monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for life
activity, an efficient life activity detection signal 106
specialized in the measurement of life activity (described later)
is obtained.
[1255] The explanation with reference to FIG. 62 has described that
"when a location of a muscle to contract in mimetic muscles is
found, it is easy to find a corresponding emotional reaction." That
is, all life activity detection signals indicative of muscular
contraction amounts over the region in the detectable range 521 in
the detecting section for life activity as shown in FIG. 63 are not
output, but "a location of a muscle related to the emotional
reaction" (or expression) is extracted from the detectable range
521 in the detecting section for life activity and only a
contraction state of the muscle is output as the life activity
detection signal 106 (FIG. 31, 32, or 35). This makes it easy to
perform interpretation using the life activity detection signal 106
(that is, life activity measurement). Accordingly, the present
exemplary embodiment has a large feature in that: [1256] life
activity detection signal 106 is output based on position detection
(the first detection) of a detected point for life activity. Then,
if a relationship between the position 522 of the detection subject
of life activity (a relative position of the detected point 30 for
life activity in FIG. 23, 24, or 26 to the position monitoring
section 46 regarding a detected point for life activity shown in
FIG. 22) and the life activity detection signal 106 is examined, it
can be easily determined whether or not this feature is performed.
That is, even in a case where the examinee keeping the same feeling
(emotion) moves, if the life activity detection signal 106 is
output continuously and stably, it can be determined that a
position of a specific muscle is followed and a contraction state
of the muscle is output as the life activity detection signal 106,
based on the position detection (the first detection) of the
detected points for life activity (the feature is performed). On
the other hand, in a case where light is blocked on a part of the
detection light path of the position monitoring section 46
regarding a detected point for life activity, and even after a
while (in consideration of a buffer process in the life activity
detection signal 106), a reliable life activity detection signal
106 is still kept output, it is estimated that the feature is not
performed.
[1257] Before "a location of a muscle related to an emotional
reaction (or expression)" is extracted from the detectable range
521 in the detecting section for life activity, it is necessary to
extract a position 522 of a detection subject of life activity in
the detectable range 521 in the detecting section for life activity
in the position monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point
for life activity. This position extraction process uses, for
example, a "face recognition technique" and a "facial angle
extraction technique" used in digital cameras or the like. In this
face recognition technique, positions of eyes, a mouth, a nose, and
ears having shapes peculiar to a human face are extracted by a
pattern matching so as to find a "place thought to be a face."
After the "place thought to be a face" is found as such, positions
of eyes, a mouth, a nose, and ears in the place are searched, and a
facial angle is estimated.
[1258] Here, "positions of various mimetic muscles related to an
emotional reaction (expression)" can be deduced from the positions
of the eyes and the mouth as shown in FIG. 62. An operation to
deduce the "positions of various mimetic muscles related to the
emotional reaction (or expressiveness)" from the imaging pattern in
two dimensions on the two-dimensional photodetector 43 corresponds
to the method for detecting a position in two dimensions on a
planer orientation of the detected point 30 for life activity by
the position monitoring section 46 regarding a detected point for
life activity, in step 106 described in FIG. 64 or 65. Meanwhile,
this section 11.5 explains the detection of contracted states of
various mimetic muscles as exemplary detection of life activity.
However, the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 64 or 65 is not
limited to that, and is applicable to detection or measurement of
any life activities, for example, extraction of a place where a
neuron fires an action potential as described in chapter 4,
extraction of a position of an activated cell based on a
phosphorylation activity as will be described later in chapter 13,
and the like.
[1259] There are two methods as a method for leading a detection
result obtained in step 106 in FIG. 64 or 65 to a life activity
detection signal 106. First of all, in the present exemplary
embodiment shown in FIG. 64, a detection location in the detecting
section 101 for life activity is controlled based on the detection
result of step 106 (S107). In this step, the control is performed
so as to obtain a life activity detection signal only from the
"positions of various mimetic muscles related to an emotional
reaction (expression)" in the detectable range 521 in the detecting
section for life activity. That is, locations corresponding to the
"positions of various mimetic muscles related to an emotional
reaction (expression)" obtained in step 106 are set as light
transmission sections 56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter of FIGS. 24 and 25 (see section 6.3.1).
[1260] As a result, in the longitudinal one-dimensional alignment
photo detecting cell 55 in FIG. 24, only a life activity detection
signal 106 associated with muscular contraction (an ATP hydrolysis
reaction) of a corresponding mimetic muscle is obtained. Then, the
life activity detection signal 106 (FIG. 31, 32, or 34) obtained
here is output as it is (S108). In this exemplary embodiment, since
the extracting method of the life activity detection signal 106 is
very simple, it is advantageously possible to manufacture the
detecting section 101 for life activity at low cost and to obtain a
highly precise detection signal.
[1261] On the other hand, in the applied embodiment shown in FIG.
65, life activities are detected in the whole detection region (all
regions in the detectable range 521 in the detecting section for
life activity shown in FIG. 63) in the detecting section 101 for
life activity, as shown in S111. Further, in this case, as the
detecting section for life activity, the method explained in
section 6.3.2 with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 28 is used. In the
signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part shown in
FIG. 34 in the rear part 86 of the life activity detection circuit,
a necessary detection signal is extracted from the life activity
detection signals obtained in Sill by use of detection information
of S106 (S112), and is output as a necessary life activity
detection signal 106 (see FIG. 31 or 32) (S113). In a case where
this method is adopted, contraction information of other face
muscles except the "mimetic muscles related to the emotional
reaction (or expression)" illustrated in FIG. 62 is also obtained
as a detection signal, thereby making it possible to perform
advanced signal processing with the use of those detection signals
in the signal processing operation section 143 of the rear part in
FIG. 34. Accordingly, with the use of the method shown in this
applied embodiment, it is possible to more highly precisely measure
life activities.
[1262] As a method of selectively extracting and outputting only
the necessary life activity detection signal 106 based on the
position detection of the detected point for life activity (first
detection), the above describes the two types of methods:
[1263] A] a method of selectively extracting only detection light
including the necessary life activity detection signal 106
beforehand, in which only detection light obtained from a
predetermined position is selectively extracted in the light
transmission section 56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter: and
[1264] B] a method of selectively extracting only the necessary
life activity detection Signal 106 by signal processing operation
in a rear part, in which detection light not including the
necessary life activity detection signal 106 is also detected by
the photodetector 36 simultaneously.
The following further describes
[1265] C] a method of selectively extracting and adding each life
activity detection signal component of the same type and outputting
the result as a method of selectively extracting only the necessary
life activity detection signal 106. FIG. 74 shows an example of an
image forming pattern of a detection subject (e.g. examinee)
projected on a plane of a set of photo detecting cells arranged in
a two-dimensional matrix. In the example in FIG. 74, a life
activity detection signal component related to the contraction of
the zygomaticus 503 is detected only in each of photo detecting
cells G11, H11, H12, H13, I11, I12, I13, J12, L12, M11, M12, M11,
M12, M13, N11, N12, N13, and O11. Only the detection signals
obtained from the photo detecting cells 38 each detecting the same
type of life activity detection signal component (e.g. the life
activity detection signal component related to the contraction of
the zygomaticus 503) are selectively extracted and added by
switches 802 and adders 803 disposed in the front part 85 of the
life activity detection circuit shown in FIG. 75, and the result is
output to the detection signal line 62 output from the front part
of the detection circuit. By selectively extracting and adding the
life activity detection signal components of the same type in the
front part 85 of the life activity detection circuit in this way,
it is possible to prevent any unwanted noise component from
entering in the process of signal processing. The reliability of
the detection signal can tints be enhanced.
[1266] Even when the life activity detection signal components of
the same type are added in the from part 85 of the life activity
detection circuit in this way, the detection signal obtained in the
present exemplary embodiment or applied embodiment is very weak,
and so further improvements in accuracy and reliability of the
detection signal are desired. In particular, in the present
exemplary embodiment or applied embodiment, a change in spectral
property or optical property in a local area caused by a vital
reaction, a biochemical reaction, a chemical reaction, or a
metabolic process in an organism or its resulting physiochemical
change is detected. Therefore, the change of the detection Signal
or the amount of change of the detection signal constitutes
important information. In life activity detection, the amplitude
value 513 or 864 in the detection signal is important, as shown in
FIGS. 61, 73, and 80. Meanwhile, information of the DC component of
the detection signal lacks reliability, because of its
susceptibility to the influence of noise such as temperature drift.
In view of this, the capacitor 876 is disposed in the signal
processing path (e.g. an output part of a preamplifier 801) to
remove the DC component in the detection signal and stably extract
the AC component including information of the amplitude value 513
or 864, as shown in FIG. 75. This has an advantageous effect of
improving the S/N ratio after the extraction of the change part
(change amount) of the detection signal which is important in the
present exemplary embodiment or applied embodiment. Though the
capacitor 876 is shown only in FIG. 75, this is not a limit, and
the process of removing the DC component and extracting only the AC
component in the detection signal may equally be performed in, for
example, FIGS. 27, 28, 31, 32, 33, 34, etc.
[1267] The above exemplary embodiment in which a location of a
mimetic muscle contracting on a face and its contraction amount are
detected to measure an emotional reaction (or emotional movement)
of an examinee can be applied to prevention of depression, or early
detection or diagnosis thereof. The following explains this applied
embodiment. Most people do not laugh when feeling depressed, and
the number of active expressions tends to decrease. Accordingly, as
described above with reference to FIG. 62, when even a physically
unimpaired person feels depressed, it is estimated that the number
of contractions of the zygomaticus 503 and the orbicularis oris 504
decreases. When the person feels further depressed or feels sad
triggered by the depression, it is considered that the frequency of
slight contraction of the depressor anguli oris 505 increases. When
the depression further progresses, the person laughs less and grows
expressionless. In this case, it is very likely that the
zygomaticus 503 and the orbicularis oris 504 are relaxed while the
depressor labii inferioris 506 is kept strained. In view of this,
by detecting a location of a mimetic muscle to contract and an
amount of the contraction, how deep the depressed feeling is at
that point can be estimated (measured). Further, the frequency of a
depressed feeling through time (e.g., how long the depressed
feeling continues or how often the depressed feeling occurs in a
day or week) or a time dependent variation of the occurrence
frequency of the depressed feeling (whether or not the person
forget the feeling and gets well soon, or whether or not the
depressed state progresses as time passes) will also be a problem.
As such,
1] if the progress of the depression of the examinee can be
measured over time, it will be useful for early detection or
medical examination of the depression. In addition to that, the use
of this applied embodiment enables 2] prevention of the depression
according to mental inclination of the examinee. That is, people
who are apt to think relatively seriously and sober people tend to
develop depression more easily. Accordingly, by monitoring a facial
expression and grasping mental inclination of the examinee,
precautionary measures to depression can be performed according to
the mental inclination of the examinee. Concrete methods are
explained below. As described above, a location of a mimetic muscle
contracting on a face and its contraction amount are detected, and
how deep the depressed feeling of the examinee is (progress in view
of depression) at that point is expressed with a value. Then, if
the measurement can be performed continuously over time by means of
the life detecting division 218 described in section 7.2.2.3 with
reference to FIG. 44, a time dependent variation of the level of
the depressed feeling thus expressed with a value is examined. This
allows easy judgment on which level the examinee is at, for
example, "healthy," "feeling blue," "caution needed for mental
health," "brief depression (=continuous examination required),"
"treatment required," or "very serious," and timely treatment by a
psychiatrist is enabled.
[1268] Conventionally, such an attempt has been made that oxygen
analyzing in blood with a brain wave or near infrared light is used
for diagnosis of depression. However, it is necessary that a
measuring apparatus be made contact with a patient in the above
method, thereby causing such a problem that a large burden is
imposed on a patient and continuous measurement for a long period
is difficult. In contrast, this applied embodiment is measurement
in a completely non-contact manner, so that continuous measurement
for a long period can be performed easily without imposing a burden
on the examinee.
[1269] The following describes prophylaxis and a diagnosis method
for depression by use of the life detecting division 218 explained
in chapter 7 with reference to FIG. 44.
<Method in which Life Detecting Division is Provided in
Consulting Room of Psychiatrist>
[1270] This is a method to utilize the life detecting division 218
as a diagnosis device and corresponds to the packaged device as
described in section 7.1. When an ambulatory patient sits down
before this life activity control device, a progression level of
depression appears in the form of a numerical value sequentially.
By use of this value, a psychiatrist can grasp therapeutic effects
numerically.
<Method in which Life Detecting Division is Provided Around Body
of Patient and Time Dependent Change of Feeling of Patient is
Grasped Through Time>
[1271] Assume a case where the life detecting division 218 is
provided on a desk or adjacent to a television or a personal
computer as described in section 7.2.2.3. In this applied
embodiment, the life detecting division 218 can be provided in a
non-contact manner to an examinee. Further, in a case where the
method explained with reference to FIG. 64 or 65 is used, even if
the examinee moves, the movement can be followed automatically.
Accordingly, this makes it possible to grab a change of the feeling
of the patient for an extended period through time. Then, as
described in section 7.2 with reference to FIG. 44, a life activity
detection signal 248 or life activity information 249 obtained by
the life detecting division 218 is transferred to a psychiatrist or
an administrator of a company via the network in real time. This
allows the psychiatrist or the administrator of the company to
perform early preventive treatment or early detection to
depression.
[1272] If such early detection to depression is enabled based on
the above technique, a corresponding early treatment is also
performable. Further, an applied embodiment which will be described
in section 13.2 can contribute to this treatment of depression.
12] Control Method of Life Activity
[1273] This exemplary embodiment has a feature in that:
[1] an inside of a life object is illuminated with an
electromagnetic wave from its outside; 2] a state in the life
object is locally changed; and [3] a life activity is controlled in
a non-contact manner.
[1274] The following describes a configuration of a life activity
control device for performing the control, a basic principle used
for the control of life activity, and the like.
12.1) Outline of Basic Control Method of Life Activity
[1275] FIG. 66 shows an example of the life activity control device
to be used in the present exemplary embodiment. The life activity
control device to be used in the present exemplary embodiment has
the following features: [1276] An electromagnetic wave having a
relatively high intensity is projected to an inside of a life
object from its outside so as to be used as control light; [1277]
An electromagnetic wave having a wavelength in a range of not less
than 0.84 .mu.m but not more than 2.5 .mu.m is used as the control
light; [1278] The control light is condensed on a specific location
in the life object; [1279] The control of life activity and the
detection of life activity may be performed in parallel [1280] The
control is performed after an active state is detected at the
location to be controlled in the life object, or the control is
performed while the detection is performed; and [1281] A specific
voltage from the exterior can be applied at the same time as
irradiation of the control light.
[1282] In the measuring method of life activity in the present
exemplary embodiment, it is necessary to set a location to be a
control object in a life object at first. A part 600 of an organism
to be detected/controlled, which is taken as the control object, is
assumed the head of an examinee in FIG. 66 for convenience sake,
and the present exemplary embodiment takes, as an example, an
action potential control in a neuron. However, the present
exemplary embodiment is not limited to that, and any location in
the life object including a hand, a foot, and a waist may be taken
as the part 600 of an organism to be detected/controlled, and the
organism herein may be plants, bacteria, and microorganisms besides
animals.
[1283] This life activity control device is provided with a
position detecting monitor section 432 of a detected point for life
activity to monitor the location of the part 600 of an organism to
be detected/controlled. This position detecting monitor section 432
of the detected point for life activity performs monitoring
according to the method explained in section 6.2 with reference to
FIGS. 20 and 22. Further, in a case where the examinee is an
animal, it may move slightly during detection or control. In case
of such slight movement, the objective lens 31 is moved in three
axial directions to follow the detected point 30 for life
activity.
[1284] More specifically, when the part 600 of an organism to be
detected/controlled moves after the position detecting monitor
section 432 of the detected point for life activity initially sets
a position of the detected point 30 for life activity, the position
detecting monitor section 432 of detected point for life activity
automatically detects a displacement amount thereof, and the
objective lens 31 is moved by an operation of an objective lens
driving circuit 605 according to the displacement amount thus
detected, thereby mechanically correcting the displacement amount.
In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 66, a position detecting
light source 431 of the detected point for life activity is
provided as a different member from a light source for light
(electromagnetic wave) to be used for detection or control of life
activity, and projects light to the same location as the detected
point 30 for life activity where the detection or control of life
activity is performed or to its neighboring region (a slightly wide
region including the detected point 30 for life activity).
Alternatively, the position detection of a detected point for life
activity may be performed using the same light source as the light
source to be used for the detection or control of life
activity.
[1285] An electromagnetic wave (light) 608 for detection/control of
life activity emitted from a light emitting component 111 is
converted into parallel light by a collimating lens 606, and then
condensed by the objective lens 31 on a detected point 30 for life
activity in the part 600 of an organism to be detected/controlled.
By condensing the electromagnetic wave (light) 608 for
detection/control of life activity as such, the following effects
are yielded: (1) a life activity only at a local specific location
in a life object can be controlled; and (2) the energy of the
electromagnetic wave (light) 608 for detection/control of life
activity can be used effectively.
[1286] FIG. 66 shows a configuration having only one light emitting
component 111, but alternatively, a plurality of light emitting
components 111 may be provided. If the electromagnetic wave (light)
608 for detection/control of life activity emitted from the
plurality of emitting components 111 is passed through the same
objective lens 31, light can be condensed at a plurality of spots
in the part 600 of an organism to be detected/controlled at the
same time, so that life activities in a plurality of different
detected points 30 for life activity can be controlled at the same
time. Further, by independently controlling respective light
emissions from the plurality of light emitting components 111,
respective timings of the control of life activity in a plurality
of different detected points 30 for life activity can be changed,
independently.
[1287] Further, the detecting section 101 for life activity is
provided in the life activity control device shown in FIG. 66, and
detection of life activity can be performed in parallel with the
control of life activity. This yields the following effects of the
present exemplary embodiment: (1) the control of life activity can
be performed after checking a necessity of the control at the
detected point 30 for life activity by detecting a life activity
state thereof, so that efficiency of the control of life activity
increases; and (2) the detection of life activity can be performed
while the life activity is controlled, so that effects of the
control of life activity can be checked in real time and
effectiveness of the control of life activity is increased. Note
that the detecting section 101 for life activity in FIG. 66 uses
the principle explained in section 6.3 with reference to FIGS. 23
to 28 and has the configuration explained in section 6.4 with
reference to FIGS. 31 to 35.
[1288] Meanwhile, in the life activity control device shown in FIG.
66, a single light source (the light emitting section 111) is used
for the detection and the control of life activity. This yields the
following effects: (1) the number of necessary components can be
reduced, so that downsizing and cost reduction of the life activity
control device can be achieved; and (2) it is not necessary to
align the optical systems (optical adjustment) separately for the
detection and the control of life activity and assembling of the
life activity control device is simplified, so that cost reduction
and high reliability of the life activity control device can be
achieved. In the case of this method, the light amount of the
electromagnetic wave (light) emitted from the light emitting
component 111 is changed through time, so as to switch between the
detection and the control to the life activity through time. That
is, the light amount of the electromagnetic wave (light) emitted
from the light emitting component 111 is reduced at the time of the
detection of life activity, and in the meantime, the light amount
of the electromagnetic wave (light) emitted from the light emitting
component 111 is increased at the time of the control of life
activity performed intermittently. The changing of the light
emission amount at this time is controlled by a modulation signal
generator 118 based on an instruction from a control section 603.
Then, a light emitting component driver 114 changes the amount of a
current to be supplied to the light emitting component 111 in
accordance with an output signal from this modulation signal
generator 118.
[1289] Alternatively, different light sources may be provided for
the detection and the control of life activity. In that case, there
is such an advantage that (1) the control and the detection of life
activity can be performed at the same time zone, so that accuracy
of the detection of life activity is improved and the effectiveness
of the control of life activity is more improved. As shown in FIG.
56, appropriate wavelengths for the detection and the control of
life activity are separated in a plurality of regions (ranges), in
general. Accordingly, in a case where different light sources are
used for the detection and the control of life activity, it is
desirable to select light sources for emitting respective
electromagnetic waves (light) having wavelengths included in
different wavelength ranges (regions) from each other.
[1290] Further, the life activity control device shown in FIG. 66
has feature in that irradiation of the electromagnetic wave (light)
608 for detection/control of life activity to the detected point 30
for life activity and application of a specific voltage from the
outside can be performed at the same time. When the application of
a specific voltage is performed at the same time as such, the
control of life activity can be performed more effectively. Here, a
control section 603 performs a synchronous control of a timing to
increase a light emission amount of the light emitting component
111 and a timing to apply a specific voltage at the time of the
control of life activity. That is, when a command signal is output
from the control section 603, the modulation signal generator 604
operates a power supply 602 for high voltage and high frequency
generation so as to generate a high voltage temporarily. This high
voltage is applied to electrode terminals (plates) 601-1 and 601-2,
so that a strong electric field occurs between the electrode
terminal (plate) 601-1 and the electrode terminal (plate) 601-2. An
effect of this strong electric field occurring between the
electrode terminal (plate) 601-1 and the electrode terminal (plate)
601-2 is similar to AED (Automated External Defibrillator) used for
heart resuscitation.
[1291] Meanwhile, an arrangement of the two electrode terminals
(plates) 601-1 and 601-2 is fixed in the life activity control
device shown in FIG. 66, and the part 600 of an organism to be
detected/controlled (the head or the like of the examinee) is to be
inserted therebetween. However, the arrangement is not limited to
that, and the electrode terminal (plate) 601-1 and the electrode
terminal (plate) 601-2 may be directly attached (or temporarily
adhere) to a surface of the part 600 of an organism to be
detected/controlled (the head or the like of the examinee).
[1292] Further, FIG. 67 shows an applied embodiment of the life
activity control device shown in FIG. 66. FIG. 67 has a feature in
that an electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity is led to an optical waveguide 609, so that an inside of a
life object is illuminated with the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity like an endoscope and a
catheter. Further, in this case, a signal obtained from the
position detecting monitor section 432 of a detected point for life
activity is transmitted to an optical waveguide driving circuit 610
so as to control a position of the objective lens 31 provided at a
tip of the optical waveguide 609. As shown in FIG. 67, when the
optical waveguide 609 is used, the control of life activity can be
performed even at a location deep in an organism to be a
detection/control object by illuminating the location with the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity,
thereby drastically improving a controllable range.
[1293] Further, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to
the configuration, and the light emitting component driver 114, the
light emitting component 111, and the detecting section 101 for
life activity may be housed in one small capsule. In this case, the
capsule is introduced into a body in such a manner that an examinee
shallows the capsule, for example, and a position of the capsule is
controlled from the outside by wirelessly communicating with a
control section provided outside the body. In the applied
embodiment in FIG. 67, the examinee has a burden at the time of
introducing the optical waveguide 609 into the body. In contrast,
if the capsule is used, not only the burden on the examinee can be
largely reduced, but also the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity can be continuously projected
for a long time, so that the efficiency of the control of life
activity (e.g., treatment efficiency) can be largely improved.
12.2) Outline of Basic Principle Used for Control of Life
Activity
[1294] First explained is a basic principle used for the control of
life activity by using the life activity control device shown in
FIG. 66 or the applied embodiment shown in FIG. 67.
[1295] A basic principle to be common in all of the present
exemplary embodiment and applied embodiments has a large feature in
that:
A] an electromagnetic wave related to a specific life activity is
projected to control the life activity. Here, the wording "related
to a specific life activity" indicates "an absorption band related
to the specific life activity" occurring in a life object, and in
the present exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment, the
life activity is controlled by illuminating an inside of the life
object with an electromagnetic wave (light) including a wavelength
of the absorption band. Further, the "absorption band" as used
herein indicates an absorption band occurring when the specific
life activity occurs inside the life object, and relates to a
vibration (or excitation of a vibration mode) of a specific atom at
the time of the specific life activity. Then, the life activity is
controlled by a combination of the above feature [A] and any one or
more of the following features. B] A temperature of a particular
region in the life object is locally increased so as to promote a
vital reaction including internal catalysis. [1296] A reaction
velocity of the vital reaction including internal catalysis tends
to improve according to the increase of an environmental
temperature.
[1297] A conventional therapeutic method of warming or cooling a
whole body and conventional medication expanding in the whole body
may cause side effects, because a undesirable vital reaction is
also promoted at the same time while a desirable vital reaction is
promoted. In contrast, in this exemplary embodiment/applied
embodiment, the electromagnetic wave (light) 608 for
detection/control of life activity is condensed, and therefore "a
temperature of only a very narrow region is locally increased."
This hardly promotes undesirable vital reactions, thereby yielding
such an effect that side effects hardly occur.
[1298] In this method, in order to locally increase the temperature
of a particular region, it is most efficient that "water molecules
are vibrated." In view of this, as a wavelength of the illuminating
light when this method is used, it is desirable to select "a
wavelength easily absorbed by water molecules." That is, as shown
in FIG. 56, desirable wavelengths in this case are as follows:
[1299] a range of not less than 0.943 .mu.m but not more than 1.028
.mu.m; [1300] a range of not less than 1.394 .mu.m but not more
than 1.523 .mu.m; and [1301] a range of not less than 1.894 .mu.m
but not more than 2.061 .mu.m.
[1302] Not only water molecules are caused to absorb heat as
described above, but also "heat may be absorbed by a site causing a
specific life activity, selectively," as will be explained later in
section 13.2.
C] A specific vital reaction including internal catalysis is
obstructed, so that the life activity is controlled. [1303] The
case where "contraction motion of a skeletal muscle is obstructed
to maintain a relaxed state of the skeletal muscle" as described in
section 11.4 is an example using this feature. D] A temporary
intermolecular bond occurring in a life object is obstructed to
block a chemical signal transmission pathway. [1304] More
specifically, a temporary bond between a ligand of a signal
transmitter and a receptor is obstructed to block a chemical signal
transmission pathway in the life object.
[1305] As a specific example, the following explains a method for
"relieving a pollen disease" by the control of life activity.
[1306] When pollen attaches to a mucosal bleeding cell of the nose,
histamine, which is a ligand, is released from the mucosal bleeding
cell, and the histamine thus released bonds to a histamine receptor
in another cell surface, which develops various symptoms of the
pollen disease. Here, it is considered that a hydrogen bond is
formed between N--H . . . O when the histamine bonds to the
histamine receptor. In view of this, as described in section 11.4,
by projecting light exciting a vibration mode occurring at the time
of forming the hydrogen bond (more specifically, by providing, in a
face mask, a light-emitting diode which emits light having a
wavelength of this excitation light), the bond between the
histamine and the histamine receptor is obstructed, thereby
relieving the pollen disease.
[1307] As another applied embodiment, there is such a method in
which Acetylcholine, which is one of ligands, is prevented from
bonding to choline-esterase having an inhibitory effect to the
Acetylcholine by use of the principle explained in chapter 4,
thereby improving an effect of the Acetylcholine in the body.
E] One of reactions antagonistic to each other in a life object
(two reactions to work in an opposite direction to each other) is
obstructed or promoted. [1308] A method which uses this feature
mainly will be explained in chapter 13. F] A property of a
molecular structure constituting a life object is changed. [1309]
The "property" to be changed as used herein indicates a change of
any of the following properties:
[1310] F1) the intensity of the molecular structure; F2) the shape
of the molecular structure; and F3) a local configuration
(including destruction) of the molecular structure.
[1311] In regard to "F2) the shape of the molecular structure," the
catalysis of an enzyme is switched between an active state and an
inactive state by changing a tertiary structure of the enzyme by
illumination of a specific wavelength light beam.
[1312] Further, an example of "F3) a local configuration (including
destruction) of the molecular structure" is as follows: after a
connection of an internal neural network is grasped by the method
explained in section 9.3 with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53, the
electromagnetic wave (light) 608 for detection/control of life
activity is condensed on a part of an axon forming an unnecessary
neural circuit, so that the axon can be burned out by heat
generated as above.
[1313] The fMRI device conventionally used for the detection of
life activity is very expensive, and it is difficult to perform
detection/measurement easily. In contrast, a device necessary to
"A] vibrate (or excite a vibration mode of) a specific atom in a
life object by illumination of an electromagnetic wave (light)" can
be manufactured at very low cost as shown in FIG. 66, and therefore
anyone can easily perform detection/measurement and control of life
activity. Particularly, the present exemplary embodiment or the
applied embodiment has such a technical significance that not only
"a life activity only at a local specific location in a life object
can be controlled with a high spatial resolution by condensing the
electromagnetic wave (light) 608 for detection/control of life
activity on the location," but also "only a specific life activity
can be controlled selectively" by use of selectivity of a
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave (light) to be projected.
Particularly, as described in section 11.4, since a difference in a
wavelength value of an absorption band occurring (temporarily) in a
life activity causes a difference in a molecule involved with
bonding (occurring temporarily) at the time when a reaction is
caused in the life object (it occurs temporarily), the selectivity
of a wavelength to a life activity to be a control object is very
high. Accordingly, there is little influence to other life
activities, thereby yielding such an effect that side effects due
to the control are hardly caused.
[1314] In regard to this technical significance, the following
explains an example of controlling "F3) a local configuration
(including destruction) of the molecular structure." According to
B. Alberts et. al.: Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th Edi.
(Garland Science, 2002) Chap. 5 and 17, a DNAligase acts in gene
transcription, and active chromosome movement occurs in mitosis. It
is considered that in the movement of this DNA ligase and the
chromosome movement, the hydrolysis reaction of ATP as described in
section 11.3 occurs, and light absorption at a wavelength explained
in section 11.4 is caused at this time. Particularly, the DNAligase
movement and the chromosome movement actively occur in a cancer
cell, and therefore, the light (electromagnetic wave) having a
center wavelength of the absorption band corresponding to the ATP
hydrolysis is absorbed particularly abundantly, in comparison with
other cells. Accordingly, when the light (electromagnetic wave)
having this wavelength is strongly projected, only the cancer cell
absorbs this light (electromagnetic wave) particularly abundantly
in comparison with neighboring normal cells, so that only the
cancer cell is selectively hot and broken. Here, if the body is
illuminated with strong light (electromagnetic wave), the skeletal
muscle contracting might be broken in particular. However, the life
activity control device shown in FIG. 66 can illuminate only a
local area with a very high spatial resolution, and therefore, has
no danger to break an unnecessary site by mistake. A method in
which this method is used in combination with drug administration
will be described later in section 13.2.
[1315] In the meantime, as a specific method for controlling a life
activity by changing "F1) the intensity of the molecular
structure," the next chapter deals with gating control of a
voltage-gated ion channel.
12.3) Molecular Structure of Ion Channel and Gating Control
Method
[1316] It is said that the voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channels 11
shown in FIG. 2 exist in the neuron cell body 1 in FIG. 1, and many
of them are distributed near the root of the axon 2 in the neuron
cell body 1, in particular. Section 1.2 uses a plain analogy to
explain a function of the voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11,
and therefore the view in FIG. 2 does not necessarily indicate an
actual configuration of the voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11.
In B. HiIle: Ion Channels of Excitable Membranes 3rd Edition
(Sinauer Associates, Inc., 2001) p. 110, Plate 7, a model of the
voltage-gated ion channel is described, and a simplified
conformation of an extract of the model is shown in FIG. 68(a).
Here, the "cover (gate)" and the "positively charged part" of the
voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel 11 explained in section 1.2 with
reference to FIG. 2 correspond to a gate 615 and a charged part 616
in FIG. 68(a), respectively.
[1317] Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 68(a), an ion channel is
embedded in a cell membrane 613 which separates an inside layer 612
facing the cytoplasm in a neuron and an outside layer 611 of the
cell membrane located outside the neuron. This ion channel is made
from a protein constituted by amino acids connected to each other.
As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the protein, an atomic arrangement
constituted by two carbon atoms C and one nitrogen atom is repeated
to form a principal chain 623 of the amino acid. Particularly, a
hydrogen bonding part 621 is formed between an oxygen atom
double-bonded to a carbon atom C on one principal chain 623 of the
amino acid and a hydrogen atom covalently bonded to a nitrogen atom
on an adjacent principal chain 623 of the amino acid, which may
result in that a part of the protein has an .alpha. helix
conformation in which the principal chain 623 of the amino acid has
a spiral tertiary structure.
[1318] Here, a residue of amino acid is expressed with "R" in FIG.
68 (b). In FIGS. 68(a), (c), and (d), a part in the protein which
has this .alpha. helix conformation is expressed with a shape of a
"cylinder," and respective cylindrical parts are expressed with
.alpha., .beta., .gamma., and .delta.. In the meantime, the bonding
strength of one hydrogen bonding part 621 itself is not so strong,
but there are many hydrogen bonding parts 621 in the .alpha. helix
conformation, so that the overall bonding strength becomes strong.
Accordingly, a cylindrical part having an .alpha. helix
conformation has a very strong mechanical strength (bending
stress).
[1319] As shown in FIG. 68(a), ends of the cylindrical parts
.alpha. and .beta. are closed during a resting term, so that a gate
615 is closed. Even during this resting term, ions having positive
electric charge is going to enter the inside layer 612 facing the
cytoplasm, because [1] the outside layer 611 of the cell membrane
is much higher in ion concentration than the inside layer 612
facing the cytoplasm, and [2] there occurs a potential gradient (an
arrow in wavy line) in the cell membrane 613. However, the
mechanical strengths of the cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta.
prevent incoming forces of the positive ions. Further, inside each
of the cylindrical parts .gamma. and .delta. respectively connected
to the cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta., a residue having
"positive electric charge" is bonded to a residue 622 of amino
acid, thereby forming a charged part 616. This residue having
positive electric charge is presumably a residue of Lysine or a
residue of Arginine. Since an amount of positive electric charges
in a residue of Histidine is very small in a water environment
(about pH 7) in a life object, it is not assumed that the residue
of Histidine contributes to that.
[1320] Further, during the resting term, due to an electrostatic
force from an electric field occurring by the potential gradient
indicated by the arrow in wavy line in the cell membrane 613, this
charged part 616 moves to a location closest to the inside layer
612 facing the cytoplasm most. The movement of the charged part 616
causes the cylindrical parts .gamma. and .delta. to be twisted, so
that a space of a crack 614 is expanded. It is considered that an
expanding force of this crack 614 reaches the cylindrical parts
.alpha. and .beta. and works as a force closing the gate 615. Here,
a state in which positive electric charges gather on a surface of
the outside layer 611 of the cell membrane 613 and negative
electric charges gather on the inside layer 612 facing the
cytoplasm, thereby causing a potential gradient called a "polarized
state."
[1321] On the other hand, when a depolarized state is caused as
shown in FIG. 68(c) and the potential gradient decreases, a force
to bring the charged part 616 closer to the inside layer 612 facing
the cytoplasm by the electrostatic force weakens. This weakens a
twisting force of the cylindrical parts .gamma. and .delta., so
that the charged part 616 is brought back to a regular position and
the space in the crack 614 is shortened. Accordingly, the
cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta. open the gate 615 in
conjunction with each other. When the gate 615 is opened, Na.sup.+
ions flow into the inside layer 612 facing the cytoplasm from the
outside layer 611 of the cell membrane and a "neuronal action
potential" or "impulse propagation along axon fiber" occurs. The
explanation so far has been known conventionally.
[1322] In this regard, this exemplary embodiment has a feature in
that during the resting term, "this ion channel is illuminated with
electromagnetic waves (light) including an electromagnetic wave
(light) having a specific wavelength, so that the mechanical
strengths of the cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta. are changed
so as to control opening and closing of the gate 615." As described
in section 12.2, the present exemplary embodiment has the following
effects: [1] since the life activity control device is inexpensive,
anyone can easily perform detection/measurement and control of life
activity; [2] because of a high spatial resolution, adverse effects
hardly occur in places other than a target part to be a controlled;
and [3] because of selectivity of wavelength, adverse effects
hardly occur in other life activities.
[1323] As described above, the mechanical strengths of the
cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta., which are indispensable to
surely perform the opening and closing of the gate 615, are
maintained by the bonding strength of the hydrogen bond shown in
FIG. 68(b). The present exemplary embodiment has a feature in that
an electromagnetic wave (light) exciting a vibration mode occurring
in this hydrogen bond of C.dbd.O . . . H--N is projected. Due to a
very high vibrational energy of the excited state, in the hydrogen
bonding part 621 in the excited state, [1] a hydrogen bonding
strength is largely weakened, or [2] a phenomenon that the hydrogen
bond is cleaved occurs. As a result, the mechanical strengths of
the cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta. largely decrease and the
incoming force of positive ions toward the inside layer 612 facing
the cytoplasm cannot be restrained, thereby resulting in that the
gate 615 is opened as shown in FIG. 68(d).
[1324] The explanation so far dealt with a method in which a
neuronal action potential is accelerated only by illumination of an
electromagnetic field (light) without a combination of an external
electric field. As another applied embodiment, the neuronal action
potential and the impulse propagation along an axon fiber can be
controlled finely with higher accuracy by support of the external
electric field application to be used together with the
illumination of the electromagnetic field (light). That is, the
gate 615 of the ion channel is closed in a polarized state of FIG.
68(a), while the gate 615 of the ion channel is opened in a
depolarized state of FIG. 68(c). In this regard, a specific ion
channel is set to be in an intermediate state between the
polarization and the depolarization (a field strength caused just
before the gate 615 is opened) by applying a strong electric field
thereto from the outside. Accordingly, in an ion channel in this
intermediate state, its gate 615 is opened due to slight changes in
the mechanical strengths (deterioration of strength) of the
cylindrical parts .alpha. and .beta..
[1325] A method to give a strong electric field from the outside is
such that a high voltage is temporarily applied between the
electrode terminals (plates) 601-1 and 601-2 by driving the power
supply 602 for high voltage and high frequency generation in the
life activity control device shown in FIG. 66. Since a light amount
of an electromagnetic field (light) to be projected can be largely
decreased by the support of the external electric field
application, not only occurrences of side effects caused due to the
control of life activity can be further reduced, but also a
destruction risk of ion channels due to the illumination of a
strong electromagnetic field (light) can be reduced. This yields
such an effect that the support of the external electric field
application can largely improve safety during the control of life
activity.
12.4) Characteristic of Control of Life Activity
[1326] A wavelength suitable for the electromagnetic field (light)
to be projected for neuronal action potential control by opening
and closing of the gate 615 of the ion channel or impulse
propagation along axon fiber control will be explained below. As
described in section 12.3, it is necessary to excite a vibration
mode caused in the hydrogen bond of C.dbd.O . . . H--N, in this
case. The excitation of the vibration mode of this type has a
feature relatively near to the row of the "Vibration of hydrogen
bonding part of secondary amide --CONH--" in Table 7. Thus, as
shown in section 4.7 or 11.4, when a variation range considering
the difference in a detection value caused by measurement errors or
measurement environments is estimated as .+-.15%, the variation
ranges are as follows:
1.53.times.(1-0.15)=1.30, 1.67.times.(1+0.15)=1.92, and
1.04.times.(1-0.15)=0.88, 1.12.times.(1+0.15)=1.29. Accordingly,
when these values are summarized, the following ranges can be
obtained: [1327] a wavelength range of an absorption band
corresponding to the 1st overtone is from 1.30 .mu.m to 1.92 .mu.m;
and [1328] a wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding
to the 2nd overtone is from 0.88 .mu.m to 1.29 .mu.m. With respect
to the ranges thus obtained, remaining ranges obtained by excluding
the wavelength ranges greatly absorbed by the water molecule shown
in FIG. 56 are as follows: [1329] the wavelength range of an
absorption band corresponding to the 2nd overtone is from 0.88
.mu.m to 0.94 .mu.m and 1.03 .mu.m to 1.29 .mu.m, [1330] the
wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to the 1st
overtone is from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.89 .mu.m, as shown in FIG. 56.
However, the ranges show only a detection range of the nth overtone
to the last. An absorption band corresponding to the combinations
is also included in the near-infrared region. In view of this, when
the wavelength range to detect combinations is also taken into
account, the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth wavelength
ranges I to V with less absorption by water shown in FIG. 56 can be
taken as target ranges. Alternatively, if an absorption amount in
the absorption band for the combinations is large and is not
affected by the absorption by water very much, a desirable
wavelength range will be in a range from 0.84 .mu.m (or 0.875
.mu.m) to 2.50 .mu.m as shown in section 4.7.
[1331] As a concrete example to control a life activity by
decreasing the mechanical strength of an .alpha. helix, section
12.3 has described the gating control in the ion channel.
Alternatively, a life activity may be controlled by decreasing a
mechanical strength of other .alpha. helices, as another exemplary
embodiment. For example, as described in section 11.1, Myosin is
included in a skeletal muscle. An .alpha. helix is included in a
tertiary structure of this Myosin so as to secure a mechanical
strength at the time the skeletal muscle contracts. In view of
this, when the skeletal muscle contracts, the skeletal muscle may
be illuminated with light having a wavelength within the above
range to decrease the mechanical strength of the .alpha. helix, so
that a muscular contractive force is weakened.
12.5) Suppression Control of Neuronal Action Potential
[1332] Section 12.3 has described the method in which an action
potential is accelerated only by opening the gate 615 of the
voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel in a depolarized state. On the
other hand, this section explains a control method in which a
neuronal action potential is restrained. As described in section
1.3, when a transmitter substance is released in a synaptic cleft,
a gate of a ligand-gated Na.sup.+ ion channel is opened and a
depolarization potential 22 is attained. This causes a cover (gate)
of a voltage-gated Na+ ion channel 11 to open, thereby causing an
action potential phenomenon.
[1333] The transmitter substance which accelerates the action
potential as such is called an excitatory transmitter substance,
which corresponds to Glutamic acid or Acetylcholine as specific
substances. On the other hand, a transmitter substance which
suppresses the action potential is called an inhibitory transmitter
substance, which corresponds to .gamma.-aminobutyric acid and
Glycine. Further, an ion channel which receives this inhibitory
transmitter substance corresponds to a ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion
channel, and when .gamma.-aminobutyric acid or Glycine bonds to
this, a gate thereof which allows chlorine ions Cl.sup.- to pass
therethrough is opened. When the Cl.sup.- ions flow into the inside
layer 612 facing the cytoplasm, a hyperpolarization state in which
the potential gradient in the cell membrane 613 increases occurs.
Since the potential gradient in the cell membrane 613 increases in
this hyperpolarization state, the gate 615 of the voltage-gated
Na.sup.+ ion channel is difficult to open.
[1334] Accordingly, this applied embodiment has a large feature in
that (in a state where no inhibitory transmitter substance is
released) only the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel is illuminated
with an electromagnetic wave (light) including a specific
wavelength to open the gate for Cl.sup.- ions and form a
hyperpolarization state, thereby suppressing a neuronal action
potential.
[1335] The ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel has a conformation
largely different from the conformation of the voltage-gated
Na.sup.+ ion channel 11 explained in section 12.3. However, for the
purpose of simplification of the explanation, only an image of an
operating principle of this applied embodiment is explained with
reference to FIG. 68. An image of a basic motion of the
ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel is as follows. That is, when
inhibitory transmitter substances bond to parts of the cylindrical
parts .gamma. and .delta. facing the outside layer 611 of the cell
membrane, the arrangement of the cylindrical parts .alpha. and
.beta. is changed triggered by the changes in the conformations of
the cylindrical parts .gamma. and .delta., and the gate 615 is
opened. Accordingly, in conventional techniques, if no inhibitory
transmitter substance bonds thereto, the gate 615 is not opened and
Cl.sup.- ions do not inflow therein.
[1336] On the other hand, in this applied embodiment, the gate 615
can be opened without any bonding of the inhibitory transmitter
substance. That is, in this applied embodiment, when only the
ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel is illuminated with an
electromagnetic wave (light) including a specific wavelength, the
mechanical strengths of the cylindrical parts .alpha. to .delta.
decrease as described in section 12.3 with reference to FIG. 68(b).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 68(d), Cl.sup.- ions can flow into
the inside layer 612 facing the cytoplasm by use of an inflow
pressure of the Cl.sup.- ions.
[1337] Here, as shown in FIG. 66, in the life activity control
device realizing this applied embodiment, since the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity can be condensed,
by use of the objective lens 31, on one detected point 30 for life
activity in the part 600 of an organism to be detected/controlled,
only the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel can be illuminated with
the electromagnetic wave (light) including a specific wavelength
(the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity). The life activity control device shown in FIG. 66 has a
high spatial resolution as such, and therefore, high control
accuracy to control only the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel and
high reliability can be secured.
[1338] Meanwhile, in this applied embodiment, an identification
operation of a location of the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel is
required before control. For the identification operation,
preliminary operation of detection of life activity is performed
before the control. The identification operation of the location of
the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel to be performed in advance in
this applied embodiment is performed by either of the following
operations:
(1) search for a neuron to release an inhibitory transmitter
substance from a neuron formation; and (2) search for a signal
transmission pathway in a neuronal network to search for the
location of the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel.
[1339] First of all, a preliminary searching method related to (1)
is explained. The aforementioned excitatory transmitter substance
is often released mainly from a pyramidal cell (a neuron which has
a relatively large cytoplasm and has a pyramid shape), while the
inhibitory transmitter substance is often released from a stellate
cell (a neuron which has a relatively small cytoplasm and in which
a dendrite extends in a relatively uniform radical manner), such as
a granule cell. Accordingly, a suppressor cell to be a signal
source is searched by use of the position detecting monitor section
432 of the detected point for life activity as shown in FIG. 66 and
a state in which an axon extends therefrom is traced, so that the
location of the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel can be
searched.
[1340] Next explained is a preliminary searching method related to
(2). Initially, under a specific consciousness condition of an
examinee, a signal transmission pathway in a neural transmission
network is searched by the method explained in section 9.3.1 with
reference to FIGS. 52 and 53, and a position of a numerous bouton
(synaptic knob) which restrainingly works as consciousness is
extracted. Then, it is assumed that a large number of ligand-gated
Cl.sup.- ion channels are distributed over at a position of the
corresponding numerous bouton (synaptic knob).
[1341] This applied embodiment can be applied to dementia measures
for elderly people. The pyramidal cell is large in cytoplasm size,
and is easy to live under a relatively terrible environment. In
contrast, the stellate cell such as a granule cell is relatively
small in cytoplasm size, and is easy to perish under a terrible
environment. Therefore, a dementia disorder such as rudeness is
easy to be developed when people reach an advanced age. Another
applied embodiment of this has a feature in that "a stellate cell
is activated to live longer by stimulating a ligand-gated Cl.sup.-
ion channel, thereby suppressing progression of dementia."
[1342] According to Teiichi Furuichi: Noukagaku 5 Bunshi, saibou,
sinapusu karamiru nou (University of Tokyo Press, 2008) p. 215,
FIG. 7.7, when a receptor side such as the ligand-gated Cl.sup.-
ion channel is activated (performs a specific operation), a
transmitter substance (such as eCB (endocannabinoid)) is
transmitted from a postsynaptic cell of the reception side (such as
a stellate cell) in an opposite direction toward a presynaptic
cell. Then, triggered by the reception of this transmitter
substance in the opposite direction, the stellate cell is activated
to live longer. Thus, according to this another applied embodiment,
the gate of the ligand-gated Cl.sup.- ion channel is opened
frequently by the above method, thereby activating the stellate
cell so as to live longer. This yields such an effect that the
progression of dementia is suppressed.
13] Detection and Control of Intracellular Life Activity
13.1) General View of Intracellular Life Activity
[1343] In regard to the detection, measurement, or control method
to dynamical life activities in a life object by a non-contact
method, chapters 1 to 5, 11, and 12 have mainly explained about
detection/measurement and control of an activity of a whole cell or
activities in a local area constituted by a plurality of cells.
Chapter 13 will explain about detection/measurement and control to
a life activity in one cell.
[1344] Based on a diagram of an intracellular signal transmission
pathway described in B. Alberts et. al.: Molecular Biology of the
Cell, 4th Edi. (Garland Science, 2002) Chap. 15, FIGS. 15 to 16,
FIG. 69 shows an explanatory view of a state of an intracellular
life activity chain within one cell, focusing on signal
transmission. A signal transmission pathway in an actual cell is
very complicated, but this view is largely simplified for
explanation. On a surface of one cell (on a cell membrane 613),
various receptors A701 and B702 for receiving signal transmitters
transmitting signals from the outside are located. Depending on to
which receptor (either of the receptor A701 and the receptor B702)
a signal transmitter from the outside bonds to, a different
intracellular signal transmission cascade A703/B704 occurs in the
cell. A tip of the intracellular signal transmission cascade A
often leads to a phosphorylation cascade 711, which indicates a
reaction chain to phosphorylate a macromolecule (mainly a protein)
existing in a cell.
[1345] However, in some cases, a bond of a signal transmitter from
the outside to the receptor A701 may directly lead to the
phosphorylation process cascade 711. In the meantime, a
dephosphorylation process 712, which takes a phosphoryl from a
phosphorylated macromolecule (mainly a protein), also exists in the
cell, and as a result, this dephosphorylation process 712 may cause
an inhibitory action 713 to the phosphorylation process cascade 711
mentioned above. Here, besides a case where the dephosphorylation
process 712 occurs spontaneously, the dephosphorylation process 712
may be activated due to an occurrence of an intracellular signal
transmission cascade B704. Due to the occurrence of this
phosphorylation process cascade 711, secretion of a new signal
transmitter to the outside of the cell, apoptosis which means cell
division/cell death, or exhibition 723 of a specific cellular
function of changing a cell shape may be caused in some cases.
Further, as another process different from that, the
phosphorylation process cascade 711 may cause transcription from a
gene in the cell, which is a gene expression 721, to a messenger
ribonucleic acid (mRNA). Then, a protein synthesis 722 is generated
by information translation from the mRNA thus transcribed, so that
an exhibition 723 of a specific cellular function may be caused as
a result of this.
[1346] In either of the processes, the phosphorylation process
cascade 711 often causes the exhibition 723 of a specific cellular
function, and there is a relative correlation between activation of
an intercellular activity and the frequency of the "phosphorylation
process." In view of this, there is such a thought that the
frequency of an intracellular phosphorylation process is considered
as one index to attain an intracellular activation. Section 13.1
has given an outline of a chain of a life activity in one cell,
which has been well known, but the following explains the present
exemplary embodiment including more specific contents thereof.
13.2) Thought of Detection Method and Control Method for
Contradicting Life Activities
[1347] As described in section 12.2, the large feature of the
control method of life activity in the present exemplary embodiment
is:
A] an electromagnetic wave related to a specific life activity is
projected to control the life activity. A method to apply this
basic feature to detection and control of intracellular life
activity is such that: [1348] electromagnetic waves including an
electromagnetic wave having a specific wavelength is projected and
some activities in a life activity chain in a life object are
detected; and [1349] electromagnetic waves including an
electromagnetic wave having a specific wavelength is projected and
some activity levels or efficiency in a chain reaction of a life
activity chain in a life object is changed to control an
intracellular life activity. A target portion to be detected or
controlled in the present exemplary embodiment or its applied
embodiment is explained more specifically with reference to FIG.
69. First of all, there is a method to detect or control some
reaction of the intracellular signal transmission cascade
A703/B704.
[1350] Further, as will be described later in sections 13.4 and
13.6, an activation state of a corresponding cell can be evaluated
(digitized) by detecting some phosphorylation process of the
phosphorylation process cascade 711. Further, the efficiency of the
phosphorylation process can be changed using an electromagnetic
wave (light) including the same wavelength. That is, in the present
exemplary embodiment, the efficiency of the phosphorylation process
is reduced by a method to be described later in section 13.6 so as
to obstruct activation of an intracellular activity. On the other
hand, as will be described later in sections 13.5 and 13.6, an
activation suppression level in a cell can be also evaluated
(digitalized) by detecting the frequency of the dephosphorylation
process 712. Further, if an electromagnetic wave (light) including
a specific wavelength is projected to decrease the efficiency of
the dephosphorylation process 712 and thereby suppress the
inhibitory action 713 of the phosphorylation process cascade 711,
it is also possible to activate the phosphorylation process cascade
711 and thereby promote activation of an intracellular
activity.
[1351] As a detection or control object of the other reactions,
some reaction of protein synthesis (translation of mRNA) 722 may be
detected or controlled. As described in B. Alberts et. al.:
Molecular Biology of the Cell, 4th Edi. (Garland Science, 2002)
Chap. 6, FIGS. 15 to 16, at an end of the mRNA formed by
transcription of genetic information due to the reaction of gene
expression 721 in FIG. 69, a "cap" constituted by 7-Methylguanosine
nucleotide having positive electric charges is formed. Then, a
small subunit of a ribosome bonding to a transfer ribonucleic acid
and an initiation factorsoid detects this cap position and the
protein synthesis (translation of mRNA) 722 starts.
[1352] It is expected that, in order to detect a start position of
the protein synthesis (translation of mRNA) 722, a methyl group in
the cap is temporarily hydrogen-bonded to the small subunit side.
It is expected that a hydrogen bond configuration at this time is
--N(CH.sub.3).sub.3O.sup.-OC--, which is obtained by substituting a
Cl.sup.- portion of the hydrogen bonding part
--N(CH.sub.3).sub.3Cl.sup.- as described in section 3.2 for a
carboxyl group, and thus is a unique hydrogen bond configuration.
In view of this, for the reason explained in section 11.4, a
peculiar absorption band corresponding to the unique hydrogen bond
configuration is caused. Accordingly, by detecting a change of an
absorption amount of an electromagnetic wave (light) at a
wavelength in the peculiar absorption band, a start reaction of the
protein synthesis (translation of mRNA) 722 can be detected.
Further, it is expected that, upon illumination of light having a
wavelength corresponding to excitation light of a vibration mode of
a constituent atom (mainly a hydrogen atom) corresponding to this
unique hydrogen bond configuration, the detection of a start
position of the protein synthesis (translation of mRNA) 722 is
obstructed by photoexcitation. Accordingly, the protein synthesis
722 (translation of mRNA) can be controlled to stop while the
illumination of the excitation light continues.
[1353] With reference to FIG. 69, the above has described how the
receptor A701/B702 receives a signal transmitter which transmits a
signal from the outside. Among the signal transmitters which
transmit a signal from the outside, a signal transmitter which is
small in size and highly hydrophobic, such as steroid hormone,
thyroid hormone, retin, and vitamin D, is scattered in the cell
membrane 613 to go into the cell, thereby directly affecting the
intracellular life activity shown in FIG. 69. However, most of the
signal transmitters are hydrophilic, and therefore are blocked off
by the cell membrane 613 and cannot go into the cell, directly.
[1354] Accordingly, in the case of a drug administration for the
purpose of a treatment which is one of the conventional controls of
life activity, a most part of an administered medicinal substance
cannot pass through the cell membrane 613 and directly go into the
cell, but works on the receptor A701/B702 to accelerate/suppress
the intracellular life activity. Therefore, there is not only a
limitation in the control of life activity in most medical
therapies, but also a large risk to generate side effects as a
result of causing unexpected life activities.
[1355] In contrast, in the present exemplary embodiment or the
applied embodiment, an electromagnetic wave (light) (such as near
infrared light) not only can pass through the cell membrane 613 and
directly go into the cell, but also can work on or detect a
specific life activity by use of the selectivity of wavelength. In
view of this, the present exemplary embodiment or the applied
embodiment yields such an effect that control efficiency of life
activity is improved in comparison with the conventional medical
therapies.
[1356] Further, in this exemplary embodiment, a life activity state
can be detected in real time and fed back to control (that is, a
life activity can be controlled while an effect of the control of
the life activity is checked in real time). As a result, the
control efficiency is increased by using the detection of life
activity together.
[1357] However, the applied embodiment thereof is not limited to
the control of life activity only by the illumination of an
electromagnetic wave including a specific wavelength, but a drug
administration may be used together so as to improve the effect of
the control of life activity and improve its safety. The following
explains this applied embodiment. In recent years, the use of a
molecular target drug has achieved an effect for cancer therapy.
There is a receptor tyrosine kinase, which is one of receptors
called "enzyme-linked receptor," which is one type of the
aforementioned receptor A701. When a growth factor or the like of a
signal transmitter which transmits a signal from the outside bonds
to this receptor, autophosphorylation corresponding to the start
process of the phosphorylation process cascade 711 occurs. As a
result, a cell proliferation function, which is one form of the
exhibition 723 of a specific cellular function is accelerated.
[1358] It is said that at the same time, a reaction of the
phosphorylation process cascade 711 is activated, which leads to an
activation of an intranuclear transcription factor, thereby
promoting actions such as proliferation/invasion/metastasis of a
cancer cell. Further, the aforementioned molecular target drug
bonds to this receptor tyrosine kinase, and obstructs the activity
of the phosphorylation process cascade 711. Further, in a case
where monoclonal antibodies are used as this molecular target drug,
the molecular target drug has such effects of automatically
recognizing this cancer cell and performing phagocytosis on this
cancer cell. However, this molecular target drug cannot directly go
into a cell, as described above, so that there is no other way
except working on the receptor tyrosine kinase existing on a cell
membrane surface. Of course, this receptor tyrosine kinase does not
exist just to "make a cancer cell." Therefore, if the activity of
the receptor tyrosine kinase is obstructed, unnecessary side
effects are caused as well. In order to solve such present
problems, if this applied embodiment is used together, it is
possible to "make the molecular target drug work on only the cancer
cell." In this case, the autophosphorylation process of the
receptor tyrosine kinase may be detected similarly to the molecular
target drug, so as to be used for the "identification of the cancer
cell". At this time, as will be described later in sections 13.4
and 13.6, a unique absorption band occurring during the
phosphorylation process is detected. On the other hand, instead of
detecting the location of this phosphorylation process, "the
hydrolysis reaction of ATP activated particularly in a cancer cell
may be used for the identification of the cancer cell," as
described in sections 11.3, 11.4, and 12.2. In either of the above
methods to be used for the identification of the cancer cell, the
cancer cell particularly absorbs a wavelength light beam
corresponding to its life activity, as described in section 12.2.
As a result, only the cancer cell selectively becomes hot in
comparison with neighboring normal cells. There is such a feature
that most vital reactions including antibody responses are
activated according to an increase in temperature in a surrounding
environment.
[1359] Therefore, if an antibody response (fressreflex) of the
aforementioned molecular target drug is accelerated in a hot
environment, the molecular target drug will intensively work on the
cancer cell which becomes hot. In view of this, with the use of
this applied embodiment together with the molecular target drug,
the molecular target drug can be caused to work on the cancer cell
selectively, which not only can improve therapeutic effects, but
also can provide a safe therapeutic method in which side effects
are reduced because an administration amount of the molecular
target drug can be reduced.
[1360] In addition to that, the combination of this applied
embodiment and the medical therapy also promises an effect for the
treatment of depression. For the treatment of depression, SSRI
having a work mechanism to obstruct reuptake of Serotonin is used.
However, SSRI has delayed-acting, and therefore, it is difficult to
explain its effect only by an inhibition mechanism of reuptake of
Serotonin.
[1361] On the other hand, in view of the measure in FIG. 69, if it
is considered that some sort of gene expression 721 or protein
synthesis 722 is promoted triggered by bonding of Serotonin to the
receptor A701 and thereby advances a long-term intraneuronal
activation, the delayed-acting of SSRI can be explained.
Accordingly, when SSRI is administered to a melancholiac, bonding
persistency between Serotonin and a Serotonin receptor A701 is
maintained, and an intracellular signal transmission cascade A703
and a phosphorylation process cascade 711 according to it are
continued for a long period. However, in a case of only a drug
(SSRI) administration, a dephosphorylation process 712 occurs in
parallel and works as an inhibitory action 713 to the
phosphorylation process cascade 711. In view of this, it is
presumed that an intraneuronal activation only by SSRI has
limitations.
[1362] In order to solve this problem, in this applied embodiment,
the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(FIG. 66) which obstructs the dephosphorylation process 712 is
projected in parallel with the drug (SSRI) administration. The
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
projected at this time should include a wavelength light beam which
will be described later in sections 13.5 and 13.6. This accordingly
obstructs the dephosphorylation process 712 having an inhibitory
action 713 to the phosphorylation process cascade 711 and activates
the phosphorylation process cascade, so that the intracellular
activation is accelerated for a long period. Since the medical
treatment to depression can be supported according to this applied
embodiment as such, therapeutic effects to the depression are
improved.
13.3) Memory and Obliteration Mechanism Models in Pyramidal
Cell
[1363] A chain path of a life activity in one cell is very
complicated in a practical sense, and therefore, FIG. 69 shows it
in an extremely simplified manner. Therefore, the explanation may
lack concreteness. In view of this, as a specific applied
embodiment section 13.3 explains a control method of memory and
obliteration in a pyramidal cell. FIG. 70 provides a little more
detailed illustration than FIG. 69. However, an actual activity in
a life object is much more complicated, and therefore, the
explanation even in this section is considerably simplified and
roughened.
[1364] First of all, the description of Teiichi Furuichi: Noukagaku
5 Bunshi, saibou, sinapusu karamiru nou (University of Tokyo Press,
2008) P. 46, FIG. 3.2, and P. 219 to P. 224, is simplified, and the
following explains long-term potentiation and long-term depression
mechanisms about memory in a pyramidal cell, which has been known
currently. As shown in FIG. 70, there is a synaptic cleft 731
between a presynaptic cell and a postsynaptic cell. In a part of a
pyramidal cell which corresponds to the postsynaptic cell and faces
the synaptic cleft 731, a spine 735 having a dendrite surface is
formed. Various types of receptors exist on this spine as the
receptor A701, but FIG. 70 only deals with a metabotropic glutamate
(mGluR) receptor 741, an N-methyl-D-aspartate-type ionotropic
glutamate (NMDA) receptor 742, and
.alpha.-amino-3-hydroxy-5-methyl-4-issoxazol propionate (AMPA)
receptor 743.
[1365] The AMPA receptor 743 is one type of the
transmitter-dependent ion channel described in section 12.5, and
when Glutamic acid released from the presynaptic cell to the
synaptic cleft 731 forms a bond 734 to this, a gate 615 thereof is
opened to cause inflow 752 of Na.sup.+ ions towards a cytoplasm
612, thereby promoting depolarization in a neuron. Accordingly, it
is said that a long-term potentiation of the pyramidal cell about
memory is related to an increase of the AMPA receptor 743 in the
spine 735, while the long-term depression is related to a decrease
of the AMPA receptor 743. On the other hand, when a glutamic acid
bond 733 to the MNDA receptor 742 is formed at the same time as the
occurrence of the depolarization by the AMPA receptor 743,
Mg.sup.2+ ions which block the inside of the MNDA receptor 742 come
off toward the side of the synaptic cleft 731 and the gate 615 is
opened, thereby causing inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions towards the
cytoplasm 612 (in the neuron).
[1366] In a case 748 where a concentration of the Ca.sup.2+ ions to
flow is low, activation 761 of Calcineurin occurs to cause
dephosphorylation 762 of an inhibiter 1. This consequently causes
activation 763 of a protein phosphatase enzyme 1 from a suppressed
state, and an uptake reaction 764 of the AMPA receptor from the
spine 735 occurs. This uptake reaction 764 of the AMPA receptor
from the spine 735 is involved with a long-term obliteration action
772 in the pyramidal cell.
[1367] On the other hand, in a case 747 where the concentration of
Ca.sup.2+ ions to flow is high, generation 755 of mRNA is caused by
gene expression 754 in a cell nucleus triggered by phosphorylation
753 of CaM-kinase. Here, since Calcineurin originally has a high
reaction sensitivity to Ca.sup.2+ ions, a chain reaction leading to
the activation 763 of the protein phosphatase enzyme 1 is caused
even by slight inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions. However, the frequency
of this chain reaction is relatively low. On the other hand, a
reaction sensitivity of the phosphorylation 753 of CaM-kinase to
Ca.sup.2+ ions is low, but once the reaction starts, the reaction
frequency is high, and therefore, the signal transmission pathway
seems to vary depending on the differences 747/748 in the
concentration of Ca.sup.2+ ions.
[1368] Subsequently, when a glutamic acid bond 732 to the mGluR
receptor 741 is formed, activation 758 of a protein kinase B is
caused through a phosphorylation cascade 758, triggered by
generation 750 of PI(3, 4, 5)P.sub.3. Due to the activation 758 of
this protein kinase, translation 756 of mRNA starts, and an AMPA
receptor 743 is generated. Then, an insertion 757 of the generated
AMPA receptor 743 onto the spine 735 is performed, which
contributes to the memory action 771 of the pyramidal cell.
[1369] In regard to the well-known mechanism model, in this
exemplary embodiment, the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity is locally projected using the
life activity control device shown in FIG. 66 and an electric field
is applied from the outside (by high-voltage application), so as to
perform control for the long-term memory or the long-term
obliteration. As a control object 724 in the present exemplary
embodiment, the NMDA receptor 742 is subjected to the operation
from the outside in common with the mechanism models of the memory
action and the obliteration action shown in FIG. 70. In regard to
the long-term memory control of the present exemplary embodiment,
the activation 761 of Calcineurin is obstructed.
[1370] On the other hand, in regard to the long-term obliteration
control of the present exemplary embodiment, a phosphorylation
process is prevented to stop any of phosphorylation 753 of
CaM-kinase, phosphorylation cascade 758, and activation 759 of
protein kinase B. At first, a specific long-term memory control
method is shown in FIG. 71(a). For the convenience of explanation,
the method is shown in order from S81 to S84, but alternatively,
S81 to S84 may be performed at the same time. Initially, in a
formation process S81 of an external electric field, a high voltage
is applied between the electrode terminals (plates) 601-1 and 601-2
by driving the power supply 602 for high voltage and high frequency
generation shown in FIG. 66, so as to apply an external electric
field to a part 600 of an organism to be detected/controlled (the
head or the like of an examinee). This causes the NMDA receptor 74
in FIG. 70 to be in a depolarized state. Subsequently, in an input
S82 of memory information, the examinee watches a video, listens to
voice, or reads texts, so that information to be memorized is input
to the examinee. This operation temporarily activates a part of a
neural network in the examinee. As a result, glutamic acid is
released in a synaptic cleft 731 related to long-term memory, and
the glutamic acid forms a bond 733 to the NMDA receptor 742. In a
case where a sufficiently large electric field is applied to the
NMDA receptor 74, detachment of Mg.sup.2+ ions can be caused in all
NMDA receptors 74 in the neuron related to the memory information
input as above.
[1371] However, in some cases, glutamic acid may be released even
in paths except the neuron related to the memory at the time of the
input S82 of the memory information. In view of this, in this
exemplary embodiment, in order to perform the long-term memory
control only in a necessary neuron to a minimum, inflow 751 of
Ca.sup.+ ions is caused only in a specific NMDA receptor 74 by
combining the formation of the external electric field and the
illumination of the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control
of life activity. That is, a value of the high voltage to be
applied between the electrode terminals (plates) 601-1 and 601-2 is
restrained to be low so as not to cause the detachment of Mg.sup.2+
ions in the NMDA receptor 74 even if the formation S81 of the
external electric field and the input S82 of the memory information
occur at the same time. While this state is maintained, only an
intended neuron to be subjected to the long-term memory control is
selectively illuminated with the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity (FIG. 66). As described in
section 12.3, 12.4, or 12.5 with reference to FIG. 68(d), it is
necessary for the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity to include an electromagnetic wave (near infrared
light) having an appropriate wavelength to cause a reduction S83 in
the mechanical strength of an .alpha. helix in the NMDA receptor
742. As a subsequent step, obstruction S84 to the dephosphorylation
path is performed so that the memory control can be stably
performed even in a case 748 where the amount of the inflow 751 of
Ca.sup.2+ is small at this time. In the obstruction S84, the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
including a wavelength light beam described later in sections 13.5
and 13.6 is projected to obstruct the activation 761 of Calcineurin
shown in FIG. 70.
[1372] Here, only one light emitting component 111 is described in
the life activity control device shown in the FIG. 66, but the life
activity control device corresponding to the present exemplary
embodiment has a plurality of light emitting components 111, so
that a single detected point 30 for life activity can be
illuminated with a plurality of light beams at the same time.
Further, since a glutamic acid bond 732 is formed even in the mGluR
receptor 741 related to an intended neuron to be subjected to
memory control by the above input S82 of the memory information,
translation 756 of mRNA related to the AMPA receptor 743 in FIG. 70
is performed. After long-term memory is formed in such a manner, an
experiment of confirmation S85 is performed on the examinee. Then,
if the long-term memory is not formed, a setting condition is
changed, and the operations from S81 to S85 are repeated.
[1373] Next will be shown a specific long-term obliteration control
method in FIG. 71(b). For the convenience of explanation, the
method is shown in order from S91 to S94, but alternatively, S91 to
S94 may be performed at the same time. As shown in FIG. 70, it is
necessary to cause inflow 751 of Ca.sup.+ ions in a pyramidal cell
so as to cause an oblivion action 772 in the pyramidal cell. In
view of this, in a formation process S91 of an external electric
field, which is a first step, a high voltage is applied between the
electrode terminals (plates) 601-1 and 601-2 by driving the power
supply 602 for high voltage and high frequency generation shown in
FIG. 66, so as to apply an external electric field to a part 600 of
an organism to be detected/controlled (the head or the like of an
examinee). This causes the NMDA receptor 74 in FIG. 70 to be
slightly in a depolarized state.
[1374] In a subsequent step of recollection S92 of memory
information, the examinee recalls a memory which the examinee wants
to delete (or forget for a long term) again. Hereby, a neuron on a
neural transmission pathway related to the memory which the
examinee wants to forget is activated. In a case where the
intensity of the external electric field to be applied in the
formation process S91 of the external electric field is strong, a
sufficiently large depolarization potential will be provided to the
NMDA receptor 74. Therefore, if the recollection S92 of memory
information is performed in this state, a glutamic acid bond 733
(FIG. 70) is formed in the NMDA receptor 742 in the neuron related
to the recollection of memory information in a neuronal information
transmission network, thereby resulting in that the inflow 751 of
Ca.sup.2+ ions is caused by the detachment of Mg.sup.2+ ions in the
NMDA receptor 742. If the inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions into all
pyramidal cells related to the recollection S92 of memory
information is caused, a risk of erasing even important memories
which the examinee should not forget rises, in particular.
[1375] Accordingly, in order to prevent the oblivion control with
respect to an unnecessary part (a signal transmission pathway which
should not be forgotten), the intensity of the external electric
field to be applied in the formation process S91 of the external
electric field is set weak, in this applied embodiment. Then, the
NMDA receptor 74 is controlled not to be in a largely depolarized
state only in this formation process S91 of the external electric
field, so that the inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions due to the
detachment of Mg.sup.2+ ions in the NMDA receptor 742 is prevented
even if the recollection S92 of memory information occurs. In this
state, only an intended neuron to be subjected to the long-term
obliteration control is selectively illuminated with the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
shown in FIG. 66.
[1376] As a result, as described in section 12.3, 12.4, or 12.5
with reference to FIG. 68(d), reduction S93 of the mechanical
strength of an .alpha. helix is performed only on a specific NMDA
receptor 742. As such, the inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions (FIG. 70)
is caused only in a specific neuron. In order to perform the
obliteration control even in a case 747 where a concentration of
Ca.sup.2+ ions thus flowed at this time is high, the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
including a wavelength which will be described later in sections
13.4 and 13.6 (FIG. 66) is projected at the same time. This hereby
causes the obstruction S94 of a phosphorylation path (any path of
the phosphorylation cascade 758, the activation 759 of protein
kinase B, and the phosphorylation 753 of CaM-kinase in FIG. 70),
and the long-term obliteration control is performed stably.
[1377] As described above, the life activity control device (see
FIG. 66) to be used in this applied embodiment is provided with two
types of light emitting components 111, i.e., a light emitting
component 111 of an electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control
of life activity including a wavelength for use in the reduction
S93 of the mechanical strength of the .alpha. helix in the NMDA
receptor 742, and a light emitting component 111 of an
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
including a wavelength for use in the obstruction S94 to the
phosphorylation path, so that these electromagnetic waves can be
condensed on a single detected point 30 for life activity in an
overlapping manner. Then, at a stage where a series of the
operations from S91 to S94 for the obliteration control are
completed, an obliteration state is checked as shown in S95. This
operation uses oral examination to the examinee. If the
obliteration control is not stably performed at this stage, the
control from S91 to S95 is performed again.
[1378] Particularly for "students troubled with poor memory,"
"elderly people who feel a failure of memory," or "people who are
bothered by getting stuck with some problems," for example, the
technique of "controlling a memory from the outside" may seem to be
the good news. Also, a "mental inclination" to tend to interpret
anything pessimistically/positively can be expected to have some
relevance with selection inclination of a signal transmission
pathway in a neural network. Accordingly, the memory control could
cause an influence on the mental inclination. It is preferable that
this technique be used for treatment and rehabilitation of illness,
and it is not preferable that "a physically unimpaired person
depend on this technique easily." There is danger to advance the
physically unimpaired person to the way to a corruption if he/she
excessively depends on this technique routinely. In fact, everyone
possesses an "ability to control a memory" which far exceeds this
technique. Therefore, the inventor of this technique hopes that
everyone utilizes his/her natural abilities rather than depending
on this technique. A specific method thereof will be described
below with reference to FIG. 70. However, FIG. 70 only extracts a
part of the activity of a pyramidal cell. There exists a much more
complicated signal transmission pathway in a practical sense.
Further, there are various neurons in the brain besides the
pyramidal cell, and in view of this, it should be noted that the
following methods are merely reference information.
<Method to Reinforce Memory>
[1379] To memorize repeatedly [1380] Repetition gradually increases
the amounts of AMPA receptors 743 on the spine 735. [1381] To
memorize in connected with other contents [1382] Like an
association memory technique, memorize intended information to
remember together with information related to the information
(e.g., ambient environment at the time to memorize the information,
factor information of the intended information, a play on words).
Due to a conscious stimulation of the related information, Glutamic
acid is released to another synaptic cleft 731 in the same neuron
to cause depolarization, which may cause Mg.sup.2+ ions in the NMDA
receptor 742 to easily detach therefrom. A method in which intended
information to remember is converted into an image and the
information is memorized with the image can be expected to yield a
similar effect. [1383] To handle information with interest and
impression [1384] By taking an interest or being impressed,
Glutamic acid is released to another synaptic cleft 731 in the same
neuron to cause partial depolarization, and its depolarization
potential is propagated. As a result, a membrane potential around
the NMDA receptor 742 related to the intended information to
remember nears the depolarization potential, which may cause
Mg.sup.2+ ions in the NMDA receptor 742 to easily detach therefrom.
[1385] To concentrate to memorize/Not to try to remember
unwillingly [1386] When an "attention is distracted" at the moment
of remembering, a decrease 748 of the inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions
occurs, which may cause a danger that the oblivion action 772 may
work conversely. Further, when the "attention is directed to a
feeling of repulsion" by having the feeling of repulsion with
respect to the memory operation itself (by trying to remember
unwillingly), the oblivion action 772 may work. [1387] To do
something different only after checking a memorized content once to
be retained [1388] If an attention is distracted just after
starting some action, an object of the action may be forgotten in
some cases. This is presumably because "a neural circuit for being
conscious of an object of an action" is switched to "a neural
circuit for controlling an action" and the oblivion action 772
works on the consciousness of the object of the action. A little
time to "check a memorized content once" causes an increase 747 of
the inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions, and the memory action 771 works.
[1389] Not to distract the attention even when a memorized content
is recalled [1390] A state at the time when information memorized
in the past is recalled is important. When another piece of
information pops out at the moment when a memorized content is
recalled, an intraneuronal signal transmission circuit is switched
into another one, which causes the decrease 748 of the inflow 751
of Ca.sup.2+ ions. This situation may accordingly cause the
oblivion action 772 to work, which may become a trigger to forget
the content, adversely. In view of this, when the memorized content
is recalled, "the memory thus recalled should be checked," so that
the memory action 771 is reinforced, and the oblivion action 772 is
hard to occur.
<Method for Deleting a Memory Desired to be Forgotten>
[1390] [1391] To distract the attention on purpose at the moment
when a memory desired to be forgotten comes into the head [1392] A
method to distract the attention may be, for example: "to think
about other things strongly," "to start irrelevant actions," or "to
watch or listen to irrelevant information (to watch TV)." If a
neural circuit is switched instantly before the increase 747 of the
inflow 751 of Ca.sup.2+ ions, the oblivion action 772 works. [1393]
Not to direct the attention to a memory desired to be forgotten
when it comes into the head [1394] A consciousness to pay attention
to a memory desired to be forgotten or to try to "forcibly forget"
the memory works as the memory action 771.
13.4) Reaction Process of Phosphoenzyme (Kinase)
[1395] On explaining a center wavelength of an absorption band
originally occurring in a process to cause an intracellular
phosphorylation process which is in one form of the life activity,
a mechanism model of the phosphorylation process is described first
with reference to FIG. 72. There are various phosphoenzymes
(kinase) which work as catalysis in the phosphorylation process in
a cell, and they have slightly different mechanisms of the
phosphorylation process. Here, a mechanism model of a
phosphorylation process of PKA (Protein Kinase A) is described as a
typical example, and common characteristics will be extracted
therefrom for different phosphoenzymes (kinase). A part of a
conformation of PKA and a part of phosphorylation actions described
in J. A. Adams: Chemical Reviews vol. 101 (2001) p. 2274-p. 2282
are extracted, and a further simplified view thereof is shown in
FIG. 72. When the hydrolysis reaction of ATP as described in
section 11.3 with reference to FIG. 58 is compared with the
phosphorylation process, they are in common in that: [1396] a bond
between a .gamma. phosphoryl and a .beta. phosphoryl is cleaved
after the reaction. However, they are basically different in that:
[1397] the .gamma. phosphoryl after the reaction bonds to a part of
an activated water molecule in the hydrolysis reaction of ATP,
whereas the .gamma. phosphoryl bonds to a part of an activated
hydroxyl group on a substrate in the phosphorylation process.
Further,
[1397] [1398] a magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ relates to the activation
of the water molecule in the hydrolysis reaction of ATP, whereas a
carboxyl group in the phosphoenzyme (kinase) constituted by
proteins is involved with the activation of the hydroxyl group in
the phosphorylation process. More specifically, an oxygen atom O12-
in a carboxyl group which is a part of a residue of Aspartate
Asp166 in FIG. 72(b) is hydrogen-bonded to a hydrogen atom H1 in a
hydroxyl group belonging to a part of the substrate. Meanwhile, in
comparison with the mechanism model of the hydrolysis reaction of
ATP, it seems that "the activation of the hydroxyl group" is
essential for stabilization of the phosphorylation process.
Accordingly, even in phosphorylation processes by most of the other
kinases (phosphoenzymes) except PKA, it is estimated that a
hydroxyl group to be phosphorylated is activated in advance, in
connection with a carboxyl group. Accordingly, in the present
exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment, as will be
described later in section 13.6, an absorption band corresponding
to a hydrogen bond between a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group,
which absorption band occurs temporarily in a phosphorylation
process, is used for detection/measurement or control of a life
activity (the phosphorylation process in this case).
[1399] Further, a common characteristic between the hydrolysis
reaction of ATP and the phosphorylation process is that "a
magnesium ion Mg.sup.2+ and a residue of Lysine relate to the
reaction." In a water environment (about pH 7) in a life object, a
.gamma. phosphoryl in an ATP state (having a phosphorus atom P1 in
its center) has a negative electric charge of "-2" and a .beta.
phosphoryl (having a phosphorus atom P2 in its center) has a
negative electric charge of "-1." Accordingly, in order to
stabilize the phosphorylation process, "electric neutralization by
a metal ion or a residue of amino acid having positive electric
charge" is required.
[1400] In the meantime, as described in section 11.3, it is said
that among three types of amino acids which can have positive
electric charge, Histidine has a very small amount of positive
electric charge in a water environment (about pH 7) in a life
object. Accordingly, it is very likely that a residue of Lysine or
a residue of Arginine is involved with the phosphorylation process.
In a case where they are involved with this reaction, it is highly
likely that a part of the residue of Lysine or the residue of
Arginine (a hydrogen atom placed at an outermost side) is
hydrogen-bonded to an oxygen atom in ATP. In view of this, in the
present exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment, an
absorption band occurring due to the hydrogen bonding between a
part of the residue of Lysine/residue of Arginine and the oxygen
atom in ATP can be also used for detection/measurement or control
of a life activity (the phosphorylation process in this case). In
the phosphorylation process according to PKA shown in FIG. 72, in
particular, an oxygen atom O4.sup.- in the .gamma. phosphoryl is
hydrogen bonded to a hydrogen atom H2 in the residue of Lysine
Lys168.
[1401] A large feature of the phosphorylation process as compared
to the hydrolysis reaction of ATP is that "a magnesium ion
Mg.sup.2+ does not activate a water molecule." If an activated
water molecule exists around ATP, a .gamma. phosphoryl just
detached from the bonding to a .beta. phosphoryl bonds to this
water molecule, and there will be no bond binding to a hydroxyl
group of a part of the substrate. In the meantime, a magnesium ion
Mg.sup.2+ tends to interact with four atoms (relatively charged
negatively) around it underwater. Accordingly, if four atoms except
constituent atoms of the water molecule are arranged around the
magnesium ion Mg1.sup.2+, the magnesium ion Mg1.sup.2+ cannot
activate the water molecule. In view of this, in the mechanism
model of the phosphorylation process shown in FIG. 72, the
magnesium ion Mg1.sup.2+ interacts with two oxygen atoms O3.sup.-
and O8.sup.- belonging to a .gamma./.beta. phosphoryl arranged
around the magnesium ion Mg1.sup.2+ and two oxygen atoms O9.sup.-
and O10 belonging a residue of Aspartate Asp184.
[1402] As shown in FIG. 72(a), when ATP bonds to an active site in
PKA, it is considered that an oxygen atom O4.sup.- in the .gamma.
phosphoryl (having a phosphorus atom P1 in its center) of ATP is
hydrogen-bonded to a hydrogen atom H2 in a residue of Lysine
Lys168. As explained in section 4.6.3 with reference to FIG. 15, an
electron existence probability (electron cloud) moves between atoms
involved with a hydrogen bond via a hydrogen atom located midway.
That is, in the example of FIG. 72(a), since a nitrogen atom
N1.sup.+ in the residue of Lysine Lys168 is charged with positive
electricity, an electron existence probability (electron cloud)
around an oxygen atom O4.sup.- moves in a direction .alpha. via an
intermediate hydrogen atom H2. As a result, in order to make up for
a decrease in the electron existence probability (electron cloud)
in a peripheral area, the oxygen atom O4.sup.- takes an electron
existence probability (electron cloud) from around a phosphorus
atom P1 as shown by .beta..
[1403] On the other hand, since the magnesium ion Mg1.sup.2+ "has a
positive electric charge of +2" (=an electron existence probability
is overwhelmingly insufficient in its periphery), an electron
existence probability (electron cloud) of a bonding orbital between
the phosphorus atom P1 and an oxygen atom O2 drifts toward a
direction of the magnesium ion Mg1.sup.2+ (.gamma. and .delta.) via
oxygen atoms O3.sup.- and O8.sup.- forming an ionic bond. However,
only by this movement of the electron cloud, a considerable amount
of the electron existence probability (electron cloud) of the
bonding orbital between the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom
O2 still remains, and therefore, the phosphoryl bond between
.gamma. and .beta. is not cleaved. In view of this, in order to
promote the phosphorylation process (cleavage of the phosphoryl
bonding between .gamma. and .beta.), PKA further uses a magnesium
ion Mg2.sup.2+.
[1404] Meanwhile, the magnesium ion Mg2.sup.2+ interacts with not
only an oxygen atom O5 in the .gamma. phosphoryl and an oxygen atom
O1 of a residue of Asparagine Asn171 shown in FIG. 72, but also an
oxygen atom O9.sup.- in a residue of Aspartate Asp184 and an oxygen
atom in a residue of an .alpha. phosphoryl, which has not been
explained here. This magnesium ion Mg2.sup.2+ takes an electron
existence probability (electron cloud) of a bonding orbital between
the phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O2 via the oxygen atom
O5, as shown by .epsilon.. As a result, the electron existence
probability of the bonding orbital between the phosphorus atom P1
and the oxygen atom O2 changes from a state in FIG. 57(a) to a
state in FIG. 57(b), so that a distance between the phosphorus atom
P1 and the oxygen atom O2 is broadened. Then, as shown in FIG. 72,
the .gamma. phosphoryl nears a substrate 780 to be
phosphorylated.
[1405] On the other hand, as described above, the hydrogen atom H1
in the hydroxyl group of the substrate 780 is hydrogen-bonded to
the oxygen atom O12.sup.- in Aspartate Asp166 in advance. In the
meantime, since the oxygen atom O12.sup.- in Aspartate Asp166 is
charged with negative electricity in the water environment (about
pH 7) in the life object (a surplus electron cloud density is
located around the oxygen atom O12.sup.-), the surplus electron
cloud moves toward a side of the oxygen atom O11 via the hydrogen
atom H1 involved with the hydrogen bond, as shown by .zeta..
[1406] As a result, the hydroxyl group in the substrate 780 is
"activated" and the surplus electron cloud is located around this
oxygen atom O11. On the other hand, as described above, since the
electron existence probability (electron cloud) largely decreases
around the phosphorus atom P1, the surplus electron cloud located
around this oxygen atom O11 is drawn toward the phosphorus atom P1
(in a direction .eta.). This electron existence probability works
as a bonding orbital between the oxygen atom O1 and the phosphorus
atom P1, and a phosphorylation process which causes the .gamma.
phosphoryl to bond to the substrate 780 occurs. Further, triggered
by this, the electron existence probability existing between the
phosphorus atom P1 and the oxygen atom O2 changes from the state in
FIG. 57(b) into an antibonding orbital as shown in FIG. 57(c), the
bonding between the .gamma. phosphoryl and the .beta. phosphoryl is
cleaved.
[1407] A series of steps in the above phosphorylation process can
be summarized as shown in FIG. 72(c). That is, from the viewpoint
of the phosphorus atom P1, a bond binding to the oxygen atom O2
moves to a bond at a side of the substrate 780 (an oxygen atom O11
therein). On the other hand, from the viewpoint of the hydrogen
atom H1 in the hydroxyl group of the substrate 780, a covalent bond
to the oxygen atom 11 which has constituted a hydroxyl group
together with the hydrogen atom H1 is changed to a hydrogen bond to
the oxygen atom O12.sup.- of the residue of Aspartate Asp166.
[1408] When the phosphorylation process of PKA occurs, it is found
from FIG. 72 that a "O11-H1-O12.sup.- hydrogen bond" formed between
the oxygen atom O12.sup.- in Aspartate Asp166 and the hydroxyl
group at the side of the substrate 780 and a "N1.sup.+-H2-O4.sup.-
hydrogen bond" formed between a part of the residue of Lysine
Lys168 and the oxygen atom O4.sup.- in the .gamma. phosphoryl occur
temporarily. Accordingly, by detecting absorption changes in light
(electromagnetic wave) at respective center wavelengths of
absorption bands occurring at the time when the respective hydrogen
bonds occur, it is possible to estimate what kind of life activity
(phosphorylation process) occurs. The present exemplary embodiment
is not limited to the phosphorylation process of PKA, and life
activities in other cells (or related to a whole cell) are also
detectable. For example, as another configuration of the
phosphorylation process which is different from PKA, there is an
activation of Ca.sup.2+/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase. That
is, when a Ca.sup.2+ ion flows into a cell, calmodulin bonding to
the Ca.sup.2+ ion bonds to the Ca.sup.2+/calmodulin-dependent
protein kinase (hereinafter, referred to as CaM-kinase), in
response to the intracellular signal transfer cascade A703 in FIG.
69.
[1409] In the meantime, this CaM-kinase has an autophosphorylation
effect and phosphorylates the CaM-kinase itself to be activated.
This autophosphorylation process corresponds to an initial stage of
the phosphorylation process cascade 711 in FIG. 69. At a subsequent
stage of the phosphorylation process cascade 711, this activated
CaM-kinase phosphorylates a gene regulatory protein such as CREB
(Cyclic AMP response element binding protein). Then, this gene
regulatory protein thus activated by phosphorylation works to start
gene expression 721 in FIG. 69.
[1410] In the meantime, it is said that the calmodulin is closely
related with Troponin C described in section 11.1. It is said that
when a Ca.sup.2+ ion bonds to the calmodulin, an ionic bond is
formed between a residue of Glutamate in this calmodulin and a
residue of Aspartate. Accordingly, from the content explained in
section 11.1 and [a] of section 11.4, it is expected that when a
Ca.sup.2+ ion bonds to calmodulin, a change (rapid decrease) of
relative light absorbance of an absorption band corresponding to
the symmetrically telescopic vibration mode of the carboxyl group
occurs. On the other hand, as described in the first half of this
chapter, since the activation of a hydroxyl group in the substrate
is essential for the phosphorylation process, an occurrence of an
absorption band corresponding to a hydrogen bond between a hydroxyl
group and a carboxyl group is also detected. Accordingly, in a case
where [1] absorption in light (electromagnetic wave) at a
wavelength of the absorption band corresponding to the hydrogen
bond between a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group increases, and
[2] absorption in light (electromagnetic wave) at a wavelength of
the absorption band corresponding to the symmetrically telescopic
vibration mode of the carboxyl group decreases, an occurrence of
the life activity related to the "calmodulin.fwdarw.CaM-kinase" is
detected.
13.5) Reaction Process of Calcineurin
[1411] As shown in FIG. 70, it is said that the activation 761 of
Calcineurin is involved with the oblivion action 772 in the
pyramidal cell. Section 13.5 describes a wavelength range that can
be detected as a center wavelength of an absorption band newly
occurring during the activation 761 of Calcineurin. F. Rusnak and
P. Merts: Physiol. Rev. vol. 80 (2000) p. 1483-p. 1521 describes a
conformation of Calcineurin and a mechanism model of a
dephosphorylation process in an active site thereof. Here, it is
shown that in the dephosphorylation process, a residue of Arginine,
which is a part of Calcineurin, is hydrogen-bonded to an oxygen
atom included in a phosphoryl. On the other hand, as described in
section 11.4, the value of the center wavelength of the
corresponding absorption band varies depending on whether a
hydrogen-bonding partner to an oxygen atom included in the
phosphoryl is a residue of Lysine or a residue of Arginine. In view
of this, in a case where the value of the center wavelength of the
absorption band occurring during the life activity is detected, if
a hydrogen bond to the residue of Arginine is detected, the
oblivion action 772 due to the activation 761 of Calcineurin may be
caused.
13.6) Characteristics of Detection and Control of Intracellular
Life Activity
[1412] As shown in FIG. 72, when a phosphoenzyme (kinase) is
activated to cause a phosphorylation process, it is estimated that
a hydroxyl group of the substrate 780 is hydrogen bonded to a
carboxyl group. In the meantime, this "O11-H1-O12.sup.- hydrogen
bond" is "a hydrogen bond between oxygen atoms across a hydrogen
atom," which is locally similar to a structure of the hydrogen bond
between water molecules. However, while molecules forming the
hydrogen bond between the water molecules are water molecules,
molecules forming the hydrogen bond in the phosphorylation process
are different from them (i.e., a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl
group). In view of this, as explained in section 11.4 with
reference to 59 and 60, an absorption band corresponding to the
phosphorylation process occurs in a wave range different from that
for the hydrogen bond between water molecules. This absorption band
resembles an absorption band occurring at the time when
"intermolecular hydrogen bonding in associated --OH alcohol" in
Table 7 has occurred. As described in sections 4.7 and 11.4, when a
variation range considering the difference in a detection value
caused by measurement errors or measurement environments is
estimated as .+-.15%, the variation ranges are as follows:
1.04.times.(1-0.15)=0.88, 1.05.times.(1+0.15)=1.21,
1.50.times.(1-0.15)=1.28, and 1.60.times.(1+0.15)=1.84, that is,
[1413] a wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to
the 2nd overtone is from 0.88 .mu.m to 1.21 .mu.m, and [1414] a
wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to the 1 st
overtone is from 1.28 .mu.m to 1.84 .mu.m. With respect to the
ranges thus obtained, remaining ranges obtained by excluding the
wavelength ranges greatly absorbed by the water molecule shown in
FIG. 56 are as follows: [1415] the wavelength range of an
absorption band corresponding to the 2nd overtone is from 0.88
.mu.m to 0.94 .mu.m and 1.03 .mu.m to 1.21 .mu.m; and [1416] the
wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to the 2nd
overtone is from 1.28 .mu.m to 1.39 .mu.m and 1.52 .mu.m to 1.84
.mu.m. A difference between 1.21 .mu.m and 1.28 .mu.m is very
small, so that these ranges can be connected as one wavelength
range. In view of this, as shown in FIG. 56, a wavelength range of
an absorption band which can be detected when a hydroxyl group is
hydrogen-bonded to a carboxyl group is as follows: [1417] a range
from 0.88 .mu.m to 0.94 .mu.m, [1418] a range from 1.03 .mu.m to
1.39 .mu.m, and [1419] a range from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.84 .mu.m.
[1420] However, the ranges show only a detection range of the nth
overtone to the last. Further, an absorption band corresponding to
combinations is also included in the near-infrared region. In view
of this, when the wavelength range to detect the combinations is
also taken into account, the first, second, third, fourth, and
fifth wavelength ranges I to V with less absorption by water shown
in FIG. 56 can be taken as target ranges. Alternatively, if an
absorption amount in the absorption band for the combinations is
large and is not affected by the absorption by water very much, a
desirable wavelength range will be in a range from 0.84 .mu.m (or
0.875 .mu.m) to 2.50 .mu.m as shown in section 4.7.
[1421] On the other hand, in the phosphorylation process related to
PKA, a "N1.sup.+-H2-O4.sup.- hydrogen bond" temporarily occurs
between an oxygen atom in the .gamma. phosphoryl and a part of the
residue of Lysine, as explained in section 13.4. This type of
hydrogen bond resembles a vibration mode of the "intermolecular
hydrogen bonding of primary amide --CONH.sub.2" in Table 7.
Accordingly, similarly to the explanation in section 11.4, a range
where a center wavelength of an absorption band occurring in this
case is detected will be as follows: [1422] a wavelength range of
an absorption band corresponding to the 2nd overtone is from 1.03
.mu.m to 1.25 .mu.m; and [1423] a wavelength range of an absorption
band corresponding to the 1st overtone is from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.86
.mu.m. However, when a center wavelength of an absorption band
corresponding to combinations is also taken into account, a
desirable wavelength range will be in a range from 0.84 .mu.m (or
0.875 .mu.m) to 2.50 .mu.m as shown in section 4.7.
[1424] On the other hand, it is suggested that when a
dephosphorylation process due to Calcineurin occurs, a hydrogen
bond is formed between an oxygen atom in a phosphoryl and a part of
a residue of Arginine. As described in section 11.4 with reference
to FIGS. 59 and 60, the value of a center wavelength of an
absorption band to occur varies depending on whether a
hydrogen-bonding partner is a residue of Lysine or a residue of
Arginine. However, when a "range where a center wavelength of an
absorption band can be detected" is taken into account, their
ranges are substantially identical with each other, and correspond
to a vibration mode of the "intermolecular hydrogen bonding of
primary amide --CONH.sub.2" in Table 7. In view of this, similarly
to the above, the range where the center wavelength of the
absorption band to occur at the time when the dephosphorylation
process due to Calcineurin occurs can be detected is as follows:
[1425] a wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to
the 2nd overtone is from 1.03 .mu.m to 1.25 .mu.m; and [1426] a
wavelength range of an absorption band corresponding to the 1st
overtone is from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.86 .mu.m. However, when a center
wavelength of an absorption band corresponding to combinations is
also taken into account, a desirable wavelength range will be in a
range from 0.84 .mu.m (0.875 .mu.m) to 2.50 .mu.m.
[1427] A technical subject of the present exemplary embodiment or
the applied embodiment is to perform "detection or measurement of
life activity by means of illumination of an electromagnetic wave
including a predetermined wavelength." In view of this, the present
exemplary embodiment or the applied embodiment is not limited to
the detection of an absorption change of an electromagnetic wave
related to an absorption band occurring in response to a life
activity, and other methods may be usable. As another applied
embodiment, for example, the life activity may be detected or
measured by use of fMRI. That is, in response to a phosphorylation
process, a hydroxyl group of the substrate 780 is hydrogen-bonded
to a carboxyl group, thereby temporarily forming an
"O11-H1-O12.sup.- hydrogen bond." An electron existence probability
(an electron cloud density) around a hydrogen atom H1 at a center
of this bond at this time is different from an electron existence
probability around a hydrogen atom of a hydrogen bond formed
between water molecules.
[1428] In the meantime, since the electronic existence probability
around the hydrogen atom H1 has a magnetic shielding effect with
respect to the external magnetic field in the Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance (see chapter 5), a unique "chemical shift value"
corresponding to the phosphorylation process is detected. Further,
when a dephosphorylation process occurs, a maximum absorption
occurs at a unique chemical shift value, similarly. By measuring an
absorption change at this unique chemical shift value thus
detected, the phosphorylation process or the dephosphorylation
process can be detected or measured.
[1429] The explanation of section 13.2 with reference to FIG. 69
shows a method in which some activity of the phosphorylation
process cascade 711 is obstructed by illumination of an
electromagnetic wave (light) to decrease the efficiency of the
phosphorylation process, or a method in which the efficiency of the
dephosphorylation process 712 is decreased to activate the
phosphorylation process cascade 711. Further, as a specific example
thereof, section 13.3 has described a method to promote the memory
action 111 or the oblivion action 772 in a pyramidal cell by
similar control. Here, a more detailed mechanism about the control
method in the present exemplary embodiment or the applied
embodiment is described as below.
[1430] In order to stably cause a process such as the
phosphorylation process cascade 711 in FIG. 69, or the
phosphorylation cascade 758 or the phosphorylation 753 of
CaM-kinase in FIG. 70, the "activation of a hydroxyl group in the
substrate 780" is essential as described in section 13.4. Further,
the activation requires hydrogen bonding between the hydroxyl group
and a carboxyl group. Even if a slight amount of an electromagnetic
wave (light) is projected to detect an "absorption band occurring
at the time when the hydroxyl group is hydrogen-bonded to the
carboxyl group," the phosphorylation process is hardly affected.
However, if a large amount of an electromagnetic wave (light)
corresponding to the above absorption band and included in the
aforementioned wavelength ranges: [1431] a range from 0.88 .mu.m
(or 0.875 .mu.m) to 0.94 .mu.m; [1432] a range from 1.03 .mu.m to
1.39 .mu.m; and [1433] a range from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.84 .mu.m, are
projected, all vibration modes in hydrogen bonds between hydroxyl
groups and carboxyl groups are activated. Since the vibration modes
in this excited state have high energy, most of the hydrogen bonds
are cleaved triggered by that. As a result, the "activation of the
hydroxyl group in the substrate 780" is obstructed, so that the
efficiency of the phosphorylation process can be largely decreased.
In view of this, by illumination of a large amount of the
electromagnetic wave (light) having a wavelength corresponding to
the absorption band occurring when the hydroxyl group is
hydrogen-bonded to the carboxyl group, the phosphorylation process
cascade 711 (FIG. 69) is obstructed, so that the activity level of
a cell can be decreased, or the memory action 771 (FIG. 70) is
obstructed, so that the oblivion action 772 can be accelerated.
[1434] Meanwhile, in the present exemplary embodiment or the
applied embodiment, the catalytic efficiency of Calcineurin of a
dephosphorylation enzyme can be decreased. As described previously,
when a dephosphorylation process due to Calsineurin occurs, it is
suggested that a hydrogen bond is formed between an oxygen atom in
a phosphoryl and a part of a residue of Arginine. Even if a small
amount of an electromagnetic wave (light) is projected to detect
presence of an absorption band associated with the hydrogen bond
with which the residue of Arginine is involved, life activities are
hardly affected.
[1435] However, if a large amount of an electromagnetic wave
(light) having a center wavelength of an absorption band
corresponding to the hydrogen bond with which the residue of
Arginine is involved and included in the following wavelength
ranges: [1436] a wavelength range from 1.03 .mu.m to 1.25 .mu.m, or
[1437] a wavelength range from 1.52 .mu.m to 1.86 .mu.m, most of
the vibration modes in hydrogen bonds with which residues of
Arginine are involved are changed into an excited state. Further,
since the energy of the excited state is high, most of the hydrogen
bonds with which residues of Arginine are involved are cleaved, and
the dephosphorylation process due to Calsineurin is obstructed. As
a result, when a large amount of the electromagnetic wave (light)
including the above wavelength is projected, the following control
can be performed: the dephosphorylation process 712 (FIG. 69) is
obstructed, so that the phosphorylation process cascade 711 is
accelerated to activate a cell; or the oblivion action 772 (FIG.
70) is obstructed, so that the memory action 771 is
accelerated.
[1438] The above exemplary embodiment has explained a
detection/measurement method or a control method of life activity
by taking, as an example, the phosphorylation process and the
dephosphorylation process with respect to intracellular life
activities. However, the present exemplary embodiment or the
applied embodiment is not limited to that, and is applicable to
other detection/measurement methods and control methods of life
activity performed using an electromagnetic wave (light)
corresponding to an absorption band associated with an
intracellular or extracellular life activity.
14] Common Characteristics of the Present Embodiment
[1439] Lastly, the characteristics common to the detection or
measuring method and control method of the life activity explained
in the aforementioned embodiment is summarized.
14.1) Characteristics of Life Activity Control Method
[1440] As shown in FIG. 66, FIG. 67, and FIG. 77 and also explained
in section 12.1 and 12.2, the main character related to the control
method of life activity in the present embodiment is that the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity is
condensed with respect to one point or a plurality of points in the
a detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for
life activity from outside the organism (examinee) 600 as the
object to be detected/controlled. As a result, it is able to
control the life activity of only a local specific place inside the
organism with a high space resolution (section 12.2).
[1441] By the way, generally, it is difficult to condense light to
a specific place due to the minute asperity shapes existing on the
surface (surface skin) of the organism (examinee) or due to the
occurrence of wavefront aberration caused by local refractive index
difference according to the place inside the organism. In the
present embodiment, in order to avoid such problem, the wavefront
aberration mside the organism (examinee) 600 is corrected by
operating a wavefront aberration correction element 844 (refer to
FIG. 77) according to a wavefront aberration amount detected by the
method shown in FIG. 79, Then, a member of preventing light
scattering 841 at the surface of the organism is arranged on the
surface of a part of the organism (head portion of the examinee, or
the like) 600
as the object of detection/control on the way of the light path
which the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of lift;
activity passes (refer to FIG. 77), in order to prevent the
increase of wavefront aberration by the minute asperity shape of
the surface (skin surface) of the organism (examinee)
[1442] Moreover, since the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity is condensed inside the
non-vascular region 10 indicated in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, it is
necessary to prevent the inhibition of light condensing by the
electromagnetic wave being absorbed by the capillary 28 existing
along the way of light path. As a countermeasure, as explained in
section 11.4 and 13.6 using FIG. 56, a wavelength avoiding
absorption of water molecule winch takes up a large part of the
blood, is selected.
[1443] As described in section 12.2 [F], the present embodiment is
also characterized in that the life activity is controlled by
changing the property of molecule configuration. In the light
treatment method conducted for the purpose of healing acceleration
in fee medical field, the near-infrared light in a diverging light
state is irradiated to the affected area. The functional mechanism
of this light treatment can be conceived feat the activation level
or immune strength is increased by raising the temperature in the
vicinity of the skin surface which has absorbed near-infrared
light. Compared to such conventional light treatment which
indirectly increases the therapy effect by raising the temperature,
the present embodiment which directly controls the molecular
configuration property control or biological reaction (chemical
reaction) described later, or fee metabolic process has high
control efficiency.
[1444] Moreover; as explained in section 12.1, the present
embodiment is also characterized in that accuracy of living
activity control is enhanced while enabling to concurrently (in
combination) performing life activity control and life activity
detection or measurement. Especially, the device is simplified by
using the same light source for the life activity control and life
activity detection/measurement (section 12.1).
14.2) Characteristics of Life Activity Detection/Measurement
Method
[1445] The common character of the present embodiment and applied
embodiments related to the method of life activity
detection/measurement lies in the point that the change of spectral
characteristic or optical characteristic of a local area inside fee
organism is detected or that the life activity is measured based on
the detection signal thereof, by irradiating irradiation light or
electromagnetic light for detecting life activity to fee inside of
the living body and using electromagnetic wave obtained from the
irradiated region (local area which is irradiated).
[1446] Here, the above spectral characteristic includes die
infrared spectroscopic characteristic explained in chapter 3,
near-infrared spectroscopic characteristic explained in chapter 4,
and CARS microspectroscopic characteristic explained in section
4.8, and spectral characteristic of nuclear magnetic resonance
(NMR, MRI or fMRI) explained in chapter 5 However it is not limited
thereto, and may detect change of other spectral characteristic
(such as far-infrared spectroscopic characteristic, spectral
characteristic in the visible light region or the ultraviolet light
region).
Moreover, the above spectral characteristic includes any of the
spectral characteristic of the absorption characteristic shown in
FIG. 6, reflection characteristic shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, or
transmission characteristic detected using FIG. 77.
[1447] Here, the wording "change" related to the spectral
characteristic or optical characteristic as the object to be
detected of above means a characteristic change according to the
elapsed time (that is, the temporal change), and more specifically
a phenomenon in which the spectral characteristic or the optical
characteristic rapidly changes in a time interval shorter than 5
[s] (or 200 [ms] or 4 [ms]) as explained in section 4.7, is the
detection object narrowly defined in the present embodiment. But it
is not limited thereto, and if other conditions described in the
present chapter (chapter 14) is satisfied, detection with respect
to slow temporal change is also an object of the present embodiment
or its applied embodiments.
[1448] A method for monitoring life activity such as cell division
using optical microscope or confocal microscope has been
conventionally known. Moreover, Japanese Patent Laid-Open
Publication No 2009-222531 discloses the monitoring of cell
division of yeast cells using CARS light. Each of these
conventional examples monitors "physical change" such as minute
change of the place of arrangement inside the organism, change of
shape, or change of size. In such conventional methods monitoring
the physical change, it is difficult to reveal the "underlying
cause inducing the physical change or the physical physicochemical
mechanism", and there was a limitation of deep elucidation and
analysis of the living activity. Compared to this, the present
embodiment/applied embodiments enable to know deeply the
physicochemical mechanism (biological reaction or physicochemical
reaction, detailed metabolism mechanism or the like) shown in FIG.
4, FIG. 58, and FIG. 72, since the change of spectral
characteristic or optical characteristic occurred in accordance to
the physicochemical change is detected.
[1449] As a method of detecting (or controlling) the change of
spectral characteristic or optical characteristic in a local area
of an inner portion of the organism, electromagnetic wave including
a predetermined frequency (wavelength) is irradiated in the present
embodiment or the present applied embodiments. When light of a
plurality of wavelength (electromagnetic wave including a plurality
of different frequency) such as a conventional spectrometer are
irradiated at the same time, the irradiated light amount
substantially increases. Especially, when it is irradiated by
condensing to one point of the object to be measured (such as
optical microscope and confocal microscope), there is a fear of
destroying the object to be measured locally by the heat energy
given by the irradiation light. Compared to such case, in the
present embodiment/present applied embodiments, electromagnetic
wave including only the predetermined frequency (wave length) is
irradiated, and therefore decreases the risk of destroying the
object to be measured and also improves the detection efficiency of
the life activity.
[1450] The electromagnetic wave of a predetermined frequency (wave
length) irradiated inside the organism of above includes the
following. [1451] Light of wave length included in the absorption
band (temporally occurred) at the time of vibration mode change in
which a predetermined atom is involved in a case of detecting
change of infrared spectral characteristic (chapter 4) or infrared
spectral characteristic (chapter 3). [1452] Electromagnetic wave
corresponding to the pump light wave length 821 and the Stokes
light wave length 822, in a case of detecting change of CARS
microscope spectral characteristic (FIG. 76, FIG. 78 and section
4.8). [1453] Electromagnetic wave corresponding to the swept
frequency for excitation in the continuous wave (CW) spectroscopy,
or RF pulse electromagnetic wave in the pulse FT spectroscopy.
However, it is not limited to the above and all kinds of
electromagnetic waves irradiated inside the organism for detecting
the change of spectral characteristic or optical characteristic in
the local area inside the organism can be applied.
[1454] On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave obtained from
the irradiated region (local area which is irradiated) used for
detecting the life activity of above includes the following. [1455]
Light of wave length included in the absorption band (temporally
occurred) at the time of vibration mode change in which a
predetermined atom is involved in a ease of detecting change of
infrared spectral characteristic (chapter 4) or infrared spectral
characteristic (chapter 3), and reflected light or transmitted
light from the local area of the inner portion of the organism.
[1456] Electromagnetic wave corresponding to the Stokes light wave
length 822 in a case of detecting change of CARS microscope
spectral characteristic (FIG. 76, FIG. 78, and section 4.8). [1457]
Relaxation-emitting electromagnetic wave in the continuous wave
(CW) spectroscopy, or free induction decay electromagnetic wave in
the pulse FT spectroscopy in a case of detecting change of spectral
characteristic of nuclear magnetic resonance. However, it is not
limited to the above and all kinds of electromagnetic waves emitted
or reflected, transmitted at the local area inside the organism for
detecting the change of spectral characteristic or optical
characteristic in the local area inside the organism can be
applied.
14.3) Characteristics Common to the Life Activity
Detection/Measurement Method and Control Method
[1458] Next, the common characteristic of the detection/measurement
method and control method of life activity related to the present
embodiment and the present applied embodiments will be
explained.
[1459] The change of spectral characteristic or the optical
characteristic of the local area inside the organism is detected as
described in section 14.2. However; it is not limited thereto and
it is able to control the living activity in the local area inside
the organism in the present embodiment and the present applied
embodiments. Here, the local area inside the organism means a part
inside the non-vascular region 10 avoiding blood vessel (capillary
28) as shown in FIG. 17 or FIG. 18, Especially, the non-vascular
region 10 does not move repeatedly inside the living body like
blood (white blood corpuscle, red blood corpuscle, platelet, or the
like) but means a predetermined "`fixed region" inside the living
body. As a specific region indicating a local area inside the
non-vascular region 10 (including the neighboring portion), one
cell or inside the cell (cell inner portion), or an aggregate
configured of a plurality of cells corresponds. That is, with
respect to one cell (including the neighboring portion),
explanation of one neuron cell 1 (and its neighboring portion)
which fires or axis cylinder 2 (and its neighboring portion) which
transmits signal was given in chapter 2 and chapter 12, and the
activity of skeleton muscle cell (contract and laxity) was
explained in chapter 11. Moreover, regarding inside the cell was
explained in chapter 13. Moreover; aggregate configured by a
plurality of cells also corresponds to the local area inside the
non-vascular region 10 as can be understood from the explanation
given in section 6.3.1 using FIG. 25 (in a case where the size
(opening diameter) of the light transmission section 56 in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter is expanded) or from the
explanation of FIG. 73.
[1460] Compared to the conventional method of monitoring the
"physical change" such as minute change of the arrangement place
inside the organism, change in shape, or change in size or the like
using the optical microscope or confocal microscope, which is a
macro monitoring seen from a cell level, the detection in the cell
level according to the present embodiment and the present applied
embodiments enables high space resolution and temporal resolution
and more accurate detection or measurement.
[1461] Explanation of method of detection or control was given for
each of ion bonding reaction or hydrogen bonding reaction which
temporarily occurs at the time of desorption of various types of
ions generated at the time of action potential in chapter 2 and
chapter 12, hydrolysis reaction of ATP in chapter 11,
phosphorylation reaction or dephosphorylation reaction in chapter
13. As a generic name to indicate the above mentioned series of
reaction, "vital reaction" was used in section 12.2 [C], as an
alternative name, biochemical reaction, or chemical reaction, or
metabolic process, or physicochemical reaction which occurs based
on the above may be used. That is, the present embodiment and
present applied embodiments are characterized in detecting or
controlling vital reaction, biochemical reaction, chemical reaction
or metabolic process, or physicochemical reaction which occurs
based on these reactions which occurs in the local area in the
organism (which corresponds to the non-vascular region) by
irradiating electromagnetic wave including predetermined frequency
(or wave length).
[1462] By the way, according to Y. Huang et al. (Y Huang, T.
Karashima, M. Yamamoto, T Ogura, and H. Hamaguchi. J Raman
Spectrosc. Vol. 35 (2004) p. 525-526), absorption band appeal's at
a position 1602 [cm.sup.-1] during life activity of yeast cells.
However, according to the above literature, die occurrence
mechanism of this absorption band is not disclosed. On the other
hand, according to R. M. Silverstein and F. X.
Webster.cndot.Spectrometry Identification of Organic Compounds
6.sup.th Edition (Tokyo Kagaku Dojin 1999) P. 108 (R. M.
Silverstein and F. X. Webster: Spectrometric Identification of
Organic Compounds 6.sup.th Edition (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
1998) Chapter 3), it is known that absorption band attribute to
carboxylic acid ion group of amino acid appears in the vicinity of
1590 to 1600 [cm.sup.-1]. Therefore the absorption band at 1602
[cm.sup.-1] which appears during the life activity of yeast cells
expresses large quantity distribution of unimolecular amino acid
before the peptide bond, and can be interpreted as indicating a
state that "the preparation before protein synthesis is ready (a
lame amount of material exists). Therefore, the above literature
cannot be necessarily said to be indicating a vital reaction
process. On the other band, detection or control of the vital
reaction (or biochemical reaction, chemical reaction or metabolic
process, or physicochemical reaction which occurs based on these
reactions) which are actually occurring in dm organism is possible
by detecting or controlling the expression of absorption band at
the place recited in the present embodiment and the present applied
embodiments. As such, by detecting or controlling specific
individual vital reaction (or biochemical reaction, chemical
reaction or metabolic process, or physicochemical reaction which
occurs based on these reactions), it is possible to detect
(recognize in details) the content of the life activity at a high
accuracy or perform precise control.
[1463] A predetermined atom temporarily relates to chemical bond of
ion bonding or hydrogen bonding (refer to section 2.5) as a
reaction intermediate during the vital reaction (or biochemical
reaction, chemical reaction or metabolic process, or
physicochemical reaction which occurs based on these reactions)
(refer to FIG. 5, FIG. 12, FIG. 58 and FIG. 72), and the spectral
characteristic change or optical characteristic change at the local
area corresponding to the change of vibration mode which the
predetermined atom relates, is detected (and measured based on the
detection) or controlled. This is also a characteristic common to
the present embodiment and present applied embodiments.
[1464] As described in FIG. 5, FIG. 12, FIG. 58, FIG. 72 and
section 13.4, oxygen atom or hydrogen atom is involved as the
predetermined atom in the changing vibration mode Here, since the
vibration mode change which the oxygen atom is involved obtains a
lame detection signal, and also the vibration mode change which the
hydrogen atom is involved avoids the absorption of water molecule
since the wave length of the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detecting/controlling life activity is short, there is an effect
that detection/control inside of the organism becomes easier. That
is, since the electronegativity of the oxygen atom is high and the
attracting force of electron clouds in the periphery at the time of
chemical bonding is strong, the value of electric dipole moment
.mu. shown in (A.cndot.13) equation becomes large. As a result, the
absorption amount of the electromagnetic wave increases as shown in
(A.cndot.49) equation and the detected signal amount increases. On
the other hand, since the mass of atomic nucleus of hydrogen is
small, the vibration frequency involved becomes high. As explained
in section 11.4, infrared light having low frequency is absorbed in
the water molecule in the organism and therefore cannot enter into
the inside of the organism. Therefore, since the light which
detects or controls the vibration mode change in which the hydrogen
atom is involved can enter into the inside of the organism while
avoiding the absorption of water molecule, directs to the
detection/control of life activity inside the organism.
[1465] In the example (a conventional example) of oxygen
concentration measuring method in blood explained in the background
art, the detection sensor portion contacts the head of the examinee
and is fixed. In the conventional method of monitoring living
activity by an optical microscope or confocal microscope, the
object to be measured is fixed on the stage of the microscope.
Since both of these conventional monitoring methods largely
restrict the movement of the examinee, it is a heavy burden for the
examinee. Compared to this, the following are realized in the
present embodiment or the present applied embodiments;
A] the life detecting section 220 (FIG. 44) and the life activity
control device (FIG. 66), and the examinee is not in contact: B]
automatic correction with respect to minute position deviation of
the examinee. As a result, there is an effect of largely reducing
the burden of the examinee.
[1466] Furthermore, in order to enable the above, in the present
embodiment and the present applied embodiments, a first detection
unit for detecting position of the place of detection/control of
life activity is provided in addition to the second
detection/control unit for detecting/controlling the life activity,
and based on the detection result of the first detection unit, feed
backs to the second detection/control unit as explained in section
6.1,
14.4) Characteristics of Life Activity Detection Signal and
Detection Method of the Signal
[1467] The life activity detection method shown in the present
embodiment and present applied embodiments is characterized in that
the detection signal is selectively extracted by using the
detection result of the position detection unit of the
detection/control place of the life activity (the first detection
unit) as described above. The specific method of selectively
extracting the detection signal is respectively recited in the
explanation of section 6.3.1 using FIG. 23, section 11.5 using FIG.
62, and the explanation of FIG. 75. By selectively extracting the
detection signal of life activity using the position detection
result of the detection/control place of the life activity as such,
electrical burden for detecting life activity is reduced, and as a
result, the effect of enabling the detection of life activity
rapidly is obtained
[1468] Moreover, as a detection method of life activity detection
signal, as explained in FIG. 61, FIG. 73, and FIG. 80, the
reliability of the detection signal is enhanced by signal direction
detection 863 or detection of amplitude values 513, 864.
[1469] Moreover, aiming to effectively detect the above mentioned
amplitude values 513, 864, by removing direct current component on
the way of signal processing and extracting only the alternate
current as shown in FIG. 75, minute signal change can be stably
detected thereby enhancing the reliability of signal detection.
[1470] Moreover, as recited in "(detection of faint signal)" in
section 4.7, the electromagnetic wave (near-infrared light) which
is irradiated to the Irving body is modulated in advance and the
S/N ratio of the detection signal is increased.
15] Detailed Study of Basic Principle Relating to Present Exemplary
Embodiment the Basic Principle Newly Devised in Relation to the
Present Exemplary embodiment has been described in chapter 4 and
section 11.4. The following proposes an improved computer
simulation method for higher analysis accuracy, as application of
the basic idea. Comparison with model experimental results is then
given to determine estimation accuracy of calculation results
obtained by the improved simulation method. Other applied
development based on the basic idea and the improved simulation
method is also described.
15.1) Improved Computer Simulation Method and Molecular Structure
Model Used in Simulation
[1471] In the computer simulation method according to the
theoretical calculation model described earlier in section 4.6.1,
there is a need to perform "structural optimization of a whole
molecule whenever the distance between hydrogen and carbon atomic
nuclei is changed", where the hydrogen and carbon atomic nuclei are
covalently bonded. This causes inconvenience such as a change in
molecular structure (chlorine ion position fluctuation) between
.alpha. and .gamma. in FIG. 11. In the paper by Trott et al. (G. F.
Trott et al.: Carbohydrate Research, Vol. 27 (1973) p. 415), on the
other hand, "energy when only the position of a hydrogen atom
changes while the arrangement of all other atoms in a molecule is
fixed" is described as a potential property relating to the
hydrogen atom movement, without structural optimization being
performed whenever the hydrogen atom position changes (though no
computer simulation as described in the exemplary embodiment in
this chapter is conducted in the paper). Hence, in the "improved
simulation method" described in this section, an improvement is
added only to the method of "calculating the potential property of
the particular normal vibration from the computer simulation" shown
in Step 6 (S6) in FIG. 8. That is, the energy value of the whole
molecule when only the position of a hydrogen atomic nucleus is
changed while the arrangement of all other atomic nuclei in the
molecule is fixed is simulated based on the concept by Trott et al.
The difference V(x) from the energy value of the whole molecule for
the displacement amount x of the hydrogen atomic nucleus when the
energy value of the whole molecule in a state where the hydrogen
atomic nucleus is optimally arranged is set as reference (the
origin is shifted so that the total energy value is "0") represents
the above-mentioned "potential property of the particular normal
vibration", and can be approximately expressed by eq.
(A.cndot.25).
[1472] In this chapter as in chapters 3 and 4, computer simulation
is performed using, as a quantum chemistry simulation program,
SCIGRESS MO Compact Version 1 Pro manufactured by Fujitsu
Corporation ("SCIGRESS" is a registered trademark). The molecular
structure is optimized beforehand. After this, each time the
position of the hydrogen atomic nucleus is changed, SCF
(self-consistent field) calculation is performed only once, to
calculate the energy value of the whole molecule. Accordingly, a
keyword of calculation is set to "PM3 EPS=78.4 1SCF" (in a solvent
having water permittivity of 78.4, PM3 is selected as Hamiltonian,
and SCF calculation is performed only once). Moreover, for each
central atom (e.g. carbon atom, nitrogen atom, or oxygen atom) of
functional group included in the molecule to be calculated, the
reduced mass Mx is re-calculated using eq. (A.cndot.16), and the
calculation result is substituted into eq. (A.cndot.32) to obtain
the value of .beta.. The other calculations are the same as those
in sections 4.2 and 4.6. As in section 4.6.2, the values of the
coefficients .kappa..sub.2 and .kappa..sub.4 when the potential
property obtained as a result of simulation is approximated by eq.
(A.cndot.25) are substituted into eq. (A.cndot.60) to calculate the
wavenumber or wavelength of the center part of the light absorption
band.
[1473] The following describes a molecular structure model used to
calculate the "potential property of the particular normal
vibration" using the above-mentioned improved simulation
method.
[1474] As described earlier in section 2.5, upon action potential
in the neuron cell body 1 of a neuron, signal transmission in the
axon 2, or signal transmission for flexor activation in the
neuromuscular junction 5, a chlorine ion is expected to be
temporarily hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to a choline
group in PCLN or SMLN. Therefore, simulation is also performed
again in this example using the molecular structure model
illustrated in FIG. 12(a) as in chapter 4, and the result is
compared with the calculation result obtained in section 4.6.4.
[1475] As described earlier in section 11.3 with reference to FIG.
58(b) or section 13.4 with reference to FIG. 72(c), upon
contraction of a skeletal muscle (striated muscle) (hydrolysis of
ATP) or in a final stage of a phosphorylation process, a .gamma.
phosphoryl is expected to be hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded)
to a residue of Lysine Lys185, Lys168. A desirable molecular
structure model representing this state is a molecular structure in
which "a residue of Lysine in a protein is hydrogen bonded to a
.gamma. phosphoryl". The simplest molecular structure representing
the state in which Lysine forms a peptide bond in a protein is a
state in which one Lysine forms a peptide bond between two Glycine
as illustrated in FIG. 81. The state in FIG. 81 in which a primary
amine group ionized at the tip of the residue of Lysine is hydrogen
bonded to the .gamma. phosphoryl is employed in the molecular
structure model for simulation. Since the .gamma. phosphoryl has a
negative charge "-2", computer simulation is performed in a state
where the whole molecule in FIG. 81 has a negative charge "-1".
Furthermore, to determine the difference depending on whether or
not the primary amine group is hydrogen bonded (or ionically
bonded) to the .gamma. phosphoryl, the difference in potential
property depending on whether or not there is the .gamma.
phosphoryl in the molecular structure model in FIG. 81 is
simulated.
[1476] According to F. H. Netter (F. H. Netter: The Netter
collection of medical illustrations Volume 1 Nervous system, Part 1
Anatomy and physiology (Elsevier, Inc., Philadelphia, 1983) p.
154), the following is expected: when a signal is transmitted from
an inhibitory neuron, a ligand-gated Cl.sup.- channel is opened and
chlorine ions flow from outside (extracellular fluid 13 side) of
the membrane of the neuron toward the cytoplasm, and as a result
the inflow chlorine ions are hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded)
to ionized primary amine groups in PEAM or PSRN (see Table 1 and
FIG. 4) located on the cytoplasm side. To theoretically estimate an
optical property change occurring at this time, a molecular
structure model in which a chlorine ion is hydrogen bonded (or
ionically bonded) to an ionized primary amine group is used to
simulate a potential property that depends on a hydrogen atomic
nucleus position. Though it is desirable to use PEAM or PSRN as the
molecular structure model, for comparison with a potential property
when a residue of Lysine in a protein is hydrogen bonded to a
.gamma. phosphoryl, a molecular structure model obtained by
replacing the .gamma. phosphoryl in the molecular structure model
in FIG. 81 with the chlorine ion and optimizing the structure is
used here. In this molecular structure model, the amount of charge
of the whole molecule is neutral at "0".
[1477] Noradrenaline, Dopamine, Serotonin, Histamine, and the like
that belong to amines among transmitter substances commonly have a
functional group of a primary amine (--NH.sub.2, --N.sup.+H.sub.3
when ionized) in their molecular structures. Likewise, glutamic
acid, .gamma.-aminobutyric acid (GABA), and Glycine that belong to
amino acids in a broad sense among transmitter substances commonly
have a functional group of a primary amine in their molecular
structures. The primary amine is known to be mostly ionized in a
life object. According to Suzuki et al. (Keiichiro Suzuki et al.
(Ed.): Kara Irasuto De Manabu Shuchu Kougi Sei-kagaku (Medical View
Co., Ltd., 2011) p. 112), amino groups (primary amines) exist in
water in an ionized state (--N.sup.+H.sub.3) and a non-ionized
state (--NH.sub.2) with the same probability when the pH value is
9.6, and almost all amino groups (primary amines) are ionized
(--N.sup.+H.sub.3) in water when the pH value is 8.0 or less. Since
the pH value of most water included in a life object is about 7,
most primary amines in the life object are ionized
(--N.sup.+H.sub.3). Hence, when any of the above-mentioned
transmitter substances is temporarily bonded to a receptor, the
ionized primary amine group in the transmitter substance is
temporarily hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to a specific
atom in the receptor. The receptor is mainly composed of a protein
including a chain of amino acids. Only amino acids that have, in a
residue, a negative charge which electrostatically attracts the
positively ionized primary amine in the above-mentioned transmitter
substance and that can form a protein are Aspartate or glutamic
acid having a carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-). Therefore, in the case
where the above-mentioned transmitter substance is temporarily
bonded to the receptor in the process of intracerebral signal
transmission, the primary amine is expected to be hydrogen bonded
(or ionically bonded) to the carboxyl group. This enables
theoretical estimation that, if the optical property when there is
the single primary amine group ionized in water and the optical
property when the primary amine is hydrogen bonded (or ionically
bonded) to the carboxyl group are different, a change in optical
property occurs when the transmitter substance is temporarily
bonded to the receptor. To express the hydrogen bonding (or ionic
bonding) state between the primary amine and the carboxyl group in
a versatile manner by simplifying the molecular structure, a
molecular structure model in which acetic acid is hydrogen bonded
(or ionically bonded) to a residue of Lysine as illustrated in FIG.
82 is set, and the potential property with respect to the position
of a hydrogen atomic nucleus involved in the hydrogen bonding is
simulated.
[1478] A method of controlling a life activity from outside by
illuminating a ".alpha. helix conformation" which is one form of
protein tertiary structure with specific wavelength light to excite
vibration of hydrogen atoms constituting the .alpha. helix and
decrease the mechanical strength of the .alpha. helix has been
described in section 12.3 with reference to FIG. 68(b). In this
case, there is a need to minimize the influence of the specific
wavelength light, which is applied for predetermined control, on
other life activities. If the potential property of the hydrogen
atoms constituting the .alpha. helix is different from the
potential property when other vital reactions or physiochemical
changes mentioned above occur, it can be considered that the
specific wavelength light applied into the life object acts only to
"decrease the mechanical strength of the .alpha. helix" and has
little influence on other life activities. Here, for the quantum
chemistry simulation program, the .alpha. helix conformation is not
used as the molecular structure model but a simplified .beta. sheet
conformation made up of four Glycine as illustrated in FIG. 83 is
set as the molecular structure model, to simulate the potential
property. In FIG. 83, a part that is hydrogen bonded in the
simplified .beta. sheet conformation is designated by the dotted
line. As illustrated in FIG. 83, a hydrogen atom included in the
.beta. sheet conformation constitutes a part of a secondary amine
structure (>N--H). Adrenaline that belongs to amines among
transmitter substances has a functional group of a secondary amine
(>N--H) in its molecular structure. It is therefore expected
that the potential property of a hydrogen atom involved in hydrogen
bonding when the adrenaline is temporarily bonded to a receptor is
similar to the potential property in the .beta. sheet
conformation.
15.2) Comparison Between Simulation Result and Model Experimental
Result
[1479] FIG. 84 illustrates a change in potential property between
when a choline cation exists in water as a single substance and
when a choline cation is hydrogen bonded to a chlorine ion to form
a choline chloride pair. In FIG. 84, the horizontal axis represents
the distance between a carbon atomic nucleus located at a center
part of a methyl group included in the choline cation and a
hydrogen atomic nucleus involved in the hydrogen bonding, and the
vertical axis represents the amount of change (difference) of total
energy of the whole molecule when the distance between them
changes. A state in which the molecular structure of the single
choline cation or the choline chloride pair is optimized is set as
the origin of the horizontal and vertical axes in FIG. 84. A
property obtained by expressing, by approximation based on eq.
(A.cndot.25), the potential property resulting from computer
simulation is designated by the dotted line in FIG. 84. Comparison
between the approximation illustrated in FIG. 84 and eq.
(A.cndot.25) shows the following. When the single choline cation
exists in water, the approximation is .kappa..sub.2.apprxeq.16.1,
.kappa..sub.4.apprxeq.23.5. When the choline chloride pair is
formed in water, the approximation is .kappa..sub.2.apprxeq.10.9,
.kappa..sub.4.apprxeq.17.7. This result is substituted into eq.
(A.cndot.60), to examine a change in property of light absorbed
upon excitation of the vibration mode. The value of .nu..sub.m is
smaller when the choline chloride pair is formed than when the
single choline cation exists in water, indicating that the
absorption wavelength is longer (the wavenumber is smaller) in both
reference tone and overtone. Hence, it is theoretically estimated
that the optical property changes (wavelength shift (wavenumber
change) of the absorption band relating to hydrogen atom vibration
in absorption property) when the choline cation is hydrogen bonded
to the chlorine ion to form the choline chloride pair, as compared
with when the single choline cation exists in water.
[1480] FIG. 85 illustrates a change in potential property before
and after a chlorine ion is bonded to an ionized primary amine at
the tip of a residue of Lysine constituting a protein in water. A
property obtained by expressing, by approximation based on eq.
(A.cndot.25), the potential property resulting from computer
simulation is designated by the dotted line in FIG. 85, as in FIG.
84. Comparison between the approximation illustrated in FIG. 85 and
eq. (A.cndot.25) shows the following. In the single ionized primary
amine at the tip of the residue of Lysine constituting the protein
in water, the approximation is .kappa..sub.2.apprxeq.20.0,
.kappa..sub.4.apprxeq.19.5. When the chlorine ion is hydrogen
bonded (or ionically bonded) to the tip, the approximation is
.kappa..sub.2.apprxeq.12.3, .kappa..sub.4.apprxeq.22.5. That is,
the value of .kappa..sub.2 decreases. This indicates that the
optical property changes (wavelength shift (wavenumber change) of
the absorption band) when the chlorine ion is hydrogen bonded (or
ionically bonded) to the ionized primary amine at the tip of the
residue of Lysine constituting the protein. Lysine in a protein and
PEAM or PSRN significantly differ in molecular structure, but are
common in that [1] they have a primary amine which ionizes in water
(see Table 1) and [2] they form a hydrogen bond in the form of N--H
. . . Cl.sup.- with a chlorine ion through a hydrogen atom in the
ionized primary amine. Accordingly, a group vibration mode change
depending on whether there is a hydrogen bond with the chlorine ion
in the ionized primary amine in PEAM or PSRN is expected to be
similar in property to that in FIG. 85. This enables theoretical
estimation that, when chlorine ions flow from outside
(extracellular fluid 13 side) of the membrane of the neuron toward
the cytoplasm in response to signal transmission from the
inhibitory neuron, the optical property in the membrane of the
neuron changes (wavelength shift (wavenumber change) of the
absorption band).
[1481] Table 8 shows comparison between the wavenumber (wavelength)
at the peak position of the absorption band in each of the
reference tone, the 1st overtone, and the 2nd overtone derived from
the above-mentioned computer simulation and the measurement result
by experiment. It is hard to immediately conduct an experiment for
reproducing "attachment of a chlorine ion to PCLN or SMLN" as
described in chapter 3 or "hydrolysis of ATP to Lysine in a
protein" as described in section 11.4. Accordingly, "optical
property change when there is a chemical or physiochemical change
(hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding) between an anion-cation pair in
water" is measured instead in a simple model experiment. If the
optical property change in the choline chloride appears as the
change in the anion-cation pair, the experimental result indicates
"temporary optical property change upon attachment of a chlorine
ion to PCLN or SMLN". If the optical property change in the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate in water appears as the change in the
anion-cation pair, the experimental result indicates "optical
property change upon hydrolysis of ATP". The experiment is also
conducted using choline bromide and ammonium chloride, for
comparison of experimental results. These samples used in the
experiment are bought from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. and
Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. A measuring device has a
wavenumber resolution of 4 cm.sup.-1, and an integration result
after repeated measurement of the order of 1000 times at 23.degree.
C. is set as experimental data. In "dry solid" in Table 8, the
sample is ground into a powder using a mortar and pestle in a glove
box under a nitrogen atmosphere, and sandwiched by CaF.sub.2
(aperture plates). The absorption spectrum is then measured by a
transmission method. Since the number of types of experimental data
is small here, the contents of the book by R. M. Silverstein and F.
X. Webster (R. M. Silverstein and F. X. Webster: Spectrometric
Identification of Organic Compounds 6th Edition (John Wiley &
Sons Inc., 1998)) and the contents of the book edited by Ozaki and
Kawata (Yukihiro Ozaki and Satoshi Kawata (Ed.): Kinsekigai
bunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996)) are added in Table 8 for
reference. When the theoretically estimated value and the
experimental result (and the reference document information) are
compared in Table 8, in group vibration of the single functional
group without hydrogen bonding, the wavenumber is larger
(wavelength is shorter) in the theoretically estimated value than
in the actual value. In hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding) with
the chlorine ion, on the other hand, the wavenumber is smaller
(wavelength is longer) in the theoretically estimated value than in
the actual value. This discrepancy between the theoretically
estimated value and the experimental result may be attributed to
the fact that the target molecule alone is simulated while
excluding interaction with surrounding molecules, in order to
simplify the molecular structure model. In detail, a hydrogen
atomic nucleus in Lysine sandwiched between two Glycine or a
choline cation in an aqueous solution state is limited in vibration
due to influence from surrounding water molecules. Hence, a
decrease in wavenumber (increase in wavelength) from the
theoretically estimated value is expected even with the molecule
alone, like when it forms a very weak hydrogen bond with a
surrounding water molecule. Besides, though the interaction between
the chlorine ion involved in the hydrogen bonding and the
surrounding water molecules is ignored in the molecular structure
model for calculation, in actuality a part of "negative charge" of
the chlorine ion in water flows toward the surrounding water
molecules, so that an increase in wavenumber (decrease in
wavelength) from the theoretically estimated value is expected
(this will be described in detail later).
[1482] In other aspects, however, the error between the
theoretically estimated result and the experimental result (and the
reference document information) is .+-.20% or less in most data.
The theoretical estimation accuracy is thus significantly improved
when compared with the result of Table 5 obtained by the simulation
method described in chapter 4. In particular, the following
substantial properties are indicated as the theoretically estimated
result: [1483] the wavenumber of the absorption band is smaller
(the wavelength is longer) in each of the reference tone, the 1 st
overtone, and the 2nd overtone in the hydrogen bonding (or ionic
bonding) with the chlorine ion than in the group vibration of the
single functional group without hydrogen bonding; and [1484] the
wavenumber of the absorption band is smaller (the wavelength is
longer) in each of the reference tone, the 1 st overtone, and the
2nd overtone when the central atom of the functional group is a
carbon atom than when the central atom of the functional group is a
nitrogen atom, regardless of whether or not there is hydrogen
bonding (or ionic bonding) with the chlorine ion. Thus, a certain
level of reliability of the theoretically estimated result using
the improved simulation method described in chapter 15 is confirmed
as a result of the experiment. Accordingly, in the subsequent
description, actual phenomena can be analyzed to some extent merely
by showing theoretically estimated results, with there being no
need to present individual experimental results in detail.
TABLE-US-00008 [1484] TABLE 8 Reference Name and document state of
Experimental result Theoretical estimation information target Peak
Peak Wavenumber Wavelength Peak functional Sample Excitation
wavenumber wavelength theoretical theoretical wavenumber group
Sample name form mode Vibration mode (cm.sup.-1) (.mu.m) value
(cm.sup.-1) value (.mu.m) (cm.sup.-1) Methyl Saturated Solid
Reference Symmetrically -- -- 3145 3.18 2872 group hydrocarbon tone
telescopic vibration Single Anti-symmetrically 2962 telescopic
vibration Choline cation Aqueous 1st Symmetrically 5883 1.700 6369
1.57 5600 to 5650 solution overtone telescopic vibration
Anti-symmetrically 6024 1.660 5780 to 5850 telescopic vibration
Sample Solid 2nd Symmetrically -- -- 9672 1.03 8330 to 8400 having
methyl overtone telescopic vibration group Anti-symmetrically 8580
to 8700 telescopic vibration Methyl salt Choline Aqueous 1st
Symmetrically 5881 1.700 5309 1.88 -- Hydrogen chloride solution
overtone telescopic vibration bonding Dry solid 5975 1.674 Aqueous
Anti-symmetrically 6008 1.664 solution telescopic vibration Dry
solid 6188 1.616 2nd Telescopic 8523 1.173 8096 1.24 overtone
vibration Primary Ammonium Aqueous Reference Telescopic -- -- 3451
2.90 3030 to 3300 amine ion solution tone vibration Single Primary
amine Solid 1st Symmetrically -- -- 6954 1.44 6490 to 6580 sample
overtone telescopic vibration Anti-symmetrically 6580 to 6670
telescopic vibration Primary amine Solid 2nd Symmetrically -- --
10509 0.95 9620 to 9800 sample overtone telescopic vibration
Anti-symmetrically 9800 to 10000 telescopic vibration Amine salt
Primary amine Solid Reference Telescopic -- -- 2763 3.62 2800 to
3000 Hydrogen salt tone vibration bonding Ammonium Dry solid 1st
Symmetrically 5969 1.675 5624 1.78 -- chloride overtone telescopic
vibration Anti-symmetrically 6238 1.603 telescopic vibration
[1485] FIG. 86 illustrates a change in potential property when an
amine included in a macromolecule in water is temporarily hydrogen
bonded (or ionically bonded) to another atom. In FIG. 86, the
horizontal axis represents the deviation, from the optimal
structure, of the distance between a nitrogen atomic nucleus
located at a center part of the amine and a hydrogen atomic nucleus
involved in the hydrogen bonding. Moreover, the potential property
obtained when changing the hydrogen bonding partner of the amine is
added in FIG. 86, based on the molecular structure model described
in section 15.1. As mentioned earlier, after each potential
property curve is approximated by eq. (A.cndot.25), the value of
peak wavenumber (or wavelength at the peak position) of the
absorption band generated in the hydrogen bonding part (or ionic
bonding part) is theoretically estimated by eq. (A.cndot.60). In
the case where curves of different potential properties completely
overlap in FIG. 86, absorption bands overlap at the same wavenumber
position (or wavelength position) in the obtained light absorption
property, and so it is difficult to detect them separately. In the
case where all potential property curves are different as
illustrated in FIG. 86, on the other hand, each absorption band
generated according to the corresponding hydrogen bonding (or ionic
bonding) state appears at a different wavenumber position (or
wavelength position). Hence, by detecting the wavenumber value (or
wavelength position) at which the absorption band appears, it is
possible to estimate to some extent what kind of reaction or change
temporarily occurs in the life object in the process of vital
reaction or chemical or physiochemical change in the life object.
In FIG. 86, all potential properties have different curves, despite
that the amine is commonly used and the hydrogen bond (or ionic
bond) of the same "N--H . . . O type" is formed except when the
hydrogen bonding partner is the chlorine ion. This enables various
vital reactions or chemical or physiochemical changes to be
specified with high sensitivity, through position detection of the
absorption band (temporarily) generated in the life object.
[1486] The following describes a qualitative estimation method for
the wavenumber value (or wavelength position) at which the
absorption band generated based on the hydrogen bonding (or ionic
bonding) appears, with reference to FIG. 86 and Table 8. In the
right side of eq. (A.cndot.60), the contribution of the first term
is dominant, and the influence of the second term is not
significant. Accordingly, the substantial wavenumber value (or
wavelength position) can be estimated merely based on the magnitude
of the coefficient value of .kappa..sub.2 in eq. (A.cndot.60). As
is clear from eq. (A.cndot.25), the coefficient value of
.kappa..sub.2 is smaller and the wavenumber value of the absorption
band is smaller (the wavelength is larger) when the concave curve
expands more widely upward (the curvature radius near the origin is
larger) in FIG. 86. The upper part of the curve is narrowest in a
state where the ionized primary amine at the tip of Lysine
(surrounded by two Glycine) in the protein exists as a single
substance without hydrogen bonding, as illustrated in FIG. 86. The
center wavenumber (or wavelength) of the absorption band in each of
the reference tone, the 1st overtone, and the 2nd overtone at this
time is known from Table 8 (i.e. experimental result and reference
document information in Table 8). Accordingly, the wavenumber of
the absorption band generated upon hydrogen bonding (or ionic
bonding) with another atom is estimated to be smaller than this
value (the wavelength is longer). With reference to FIG. 86, the
center wavenumber of the absorption band in each of the reference
tone, the 1st overtone, and the 2nd overtone decreases (the
wavelength increases) in order of, as the hydrogen bonding partner
of the amine, an oxygen atom in a secondary amide --CONH.sup.-
forming the .beta. sheet, an oxygen atom in a carboxyl group, and a
chlorine ion.
[1487] The potential property when the ionized primary amine at the
tip of Lysine (surrounded by two Glycine) in the protein is
hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to .gamma. phosphoryl takes a
negative value if the distance between the hydrogen and nitrogen
atomic nuclei deviates from the optimal state by 0.47 .ANG. or
more, as illustrated in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 illustrates a result of
computer simulation of a potential property when the distance
between the hydrogen and nitrogen atomic nuclei is further widened.
It can be understood from FIG. 87 that the potential (total energy
difference) takes a minimum value at the position where the
distance between the hydrogen and nitrogen atomic nuclei is further
widened. In FIG. 87, this position is set as the origin of the
horizontal axis. At this position, the hydrogen atomic nucleus is
closer to the oxygen atomic nucleus in the .gamma. phosphoryl than
the nitrogen atomic nucleus located at the center of the primary
amine. That is, when the hydrogen atom exists near a minimum point
on the left of FIG. 87, the primary amine at the tip of Lysine is
ionized (--N.sup.+H.sub.3). When the hydrogen atom moves to near a
minimum point on the right of FIG. 87, the primary amine at the tip
of Lysine is non-ionized (--NH.sub.2) and forms a hydroxyl group
(--OH) in the .gamma. phosphoryl. An example where a plurality of
minimum points are included in a potential property is disclosed in
the paper by Trott et al. (G. F. Trott et al.: Carbohydrate
Research, Vol. 27 (1973) p. 415), too. It is thus considered that
the phenomenon in FIG. 87 can actually occur. The energy level in
the ground state when the hydrogen atom exists near the minimum
point on the left of FIG. 87 is lower than a potential barrier,
indicating the location near the left minimum point. Once the
vibration mode of the hydrogen atom changes to an excitation level,
however, the potential barrier is exceeded easily. Accordingly, in
the range of the potential property when the primary amine is
hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to the .gamma. phosphoryl as
illustrated in FIG. 87, light absorption in a state where the
hydrogen atomic nucleus stays near the oxygen atomic nucleus in the
.gamma. phosphoryl appears to be more frequent than light
absorption in a state where the hydrogen atomic nucleus stays near
the nitrogen atomic nucleus. Despite this, an experimental result
suggesting vibration mode excitation corresponding to the 1st
overtone while the hydrogen atomic nucleus stays near the nitrogen
atomic nucleus is obtained as described later in section 15.5. This
inconsistency between the theoretical estimation and the
experimental result may be attributed to the exclusion of the
influence of interaction with surrounding molecules (e.g. water
molecules) in the molecular structure model illustrated in FIG. 81.
A future challenge is to find a versatile water molecule
arrangement method to improve the calculated estimation accuracy,
as in the use of a molecular structure model illustrated in FIG. 96
in the study in chapter 15.4.
[1488] The following explains the reason why the potential property
significantly varies depending on the partner to which the same
primary amine is hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded). According
to the description in section 11.4 with reference to FIG. 59, the
potential property varies according to the difference in molecular
structure of the hydrogen bonding partner. As a result of detailed
analysis/study, however, it is revealed that the potential property
varies according to "the net atomic charge of the hydrogen bonding
partner atom" and "the distance between the hydrogen atom and the
partner atom in the optimal structure". For example, the net atomic
charge mentioned here means a charge calculated for each atom in a
molecule based on Mulliken's population analysis (Y. Harada:
Ryoushi kagaku (Quantum Chemistry) vol. 2 (Shyoukabou, 2007), p.
163). Since a hydrogen atom is lower in electronegativity than
carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen atoms, the net atomic charge of the
hydrogen atom often becomes "positive" in the molecule. For
illustrative purposes, parameter values of each hydrogen bonding
(or ionic bonding)-involved part in the optimal structure are shown
in FIG. 86. The net atomic charge of the oxygen atom in the
secondary amide --CONH.sup.- which is the hydrogen bonding partner
in the .beta. sheet is -0.490 which is relatively large, and so the
force of attracting the hydrogen atom is weak. Hence, the H--O
distance is long, i.e. 1.856 .ANG., whereas the N--H distance is
short, i.e. 1.012 .ANG.. Since this state is similar to that of the
single ionized primary amide without hydrogen bonding, a value
close to the wavenumber (or wavelength) of the absorption band
corresponding to group vibration in the primary amide is exhibited.
In the computer simulation result illustrated in FIG. 86, the
molecular structure model of the simplified .beta. sheet
illustrated in FIG. 83 is used, which differs from the .alpha.
helix conformation described in section 12.3 with reference to FIG.
68(b). However, the .beta. sheet and the .alpha. helix are common
in the part that forms the hydrogen bond in the form of C.dbd.O . .
. H--N with the secondary amide --CONH.sup.- constituting a peptide
bond. It is therefore assumed that the wavelength (or wavenumber)
of the electromagnetic field (light) used in illumination for life
activity control described in section 12.4 is approximately equal
to the value estimated with reference to FIG. 86. The net atomic
charge of the oxygen atom in the carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-)
ionized in water is -0.690 which is a little smaller, and so the
force of attracting the hydrogen atom is relatively strong. Hence,
the H--O distance is shorter, i.e. 1.732 .ANG., whereas the N--H
distance is longer, i.e. 1.031 .ANG.. The wavenumber of the
absorption band generated in correspondence with this hydrogen bond
(or ionic bond) is smaller than that of the hydrogen bond in the
.beta. sheet, and the wavelength is longer. In the molecular
structure model described in section 15.1, the hydrogen bonding (or
ionic bonding) partner of the oxygen atom in the carboxyl group
(--COO.sup.-) is the primary amine (--N.sup.+H.sub.3) ionized in
water. However, this is not a limit, and the wavenumber
(wavelength) of the absorption band is expected to be substantially
equal even when the hydrogen bonding partner of the oxygen atom in
the carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-) is the secondary amine (>N--H).
The net atomic charge of the chlorine ion as the hydrogen bonding
partner is smaller, i.e. -0.898, and so the force of attracting the
hydrogen atom is stronger. Hence, the N--H distance is longer, i.e.
1.056 .ANG.. Thus, in the part where the deviation x from the
optimal position of the distance between the hydrogen and nitrogen
atomic nuclei is negative in FIG. 86, if the N--H distance in the
optimal structure is long, the structural distortion of the primary
amine as a whole is small even when the distance between the
hydrogen and nitrogen atomic nuclei decreases to some extent (even
when the deviation xi decreases to negative), which contributes to
a smaller increase in total energy difference V. Typically, a
chlorine atom and a hydrogen atom do not form a covalent bond (form
an ionic bond in many cases). If a chlorine atomic nucleus and a
hydrogen atomic nucleus are too close to each other, the total
energy difference V increases due to repulsion. In the case of
hydrogen bonding to the chlorine ion, in the part where the
deviation x from the optimal position of the distance between the
hydrogen and nitrogen atomic nuclei is positive, the total energy
difference V monotonically increases as the deviation x increases.
In the case of hydrogen bonding to the .gamma. phosphoryl or the
carboxyl group, on the other hand, in the part where there is a
significant deviation in the direction in which the deviation x
from the optimal position of the distance between the hydrogen and
nitrogen atomic nuclei is positive in FIG. 86, the total energy
difference V decreases. This can be explained as follows. As shown
in the table in FIG. 86, the net atomic charge of the oxygen atom
in the .gamma. phosphoryl upon hydrogen bonding is -1.079 which is
lowest, and the force of attracting the hydrogen atom is strong.
Hence, the H--O distance is shortest, 1.675 .ANG., whereas the N--H
distance is longer, 1.044 .ANG.. Since the force of attracting the
hydrogen atom is too strong in the oxygen atom in the .gamma.
phosphoryl, if the hydrogen atom locally exists near the oxygen
atom (FIG. 87), the total energy of the constituent molecule
decreases. At the minimum position in FIG. 87, the hydrogen atom
and the oxygen atom are covalently bonded to form the hydroxyl
group (--OH group).
[1489] This argument is also applicable to the methyl group in the
choline group illustrated in FIG. 84. In the case where the
molecular structure model illustrated in FIG. 12(a) is used in
computer simulation, the net atomic charge of the chlorine ion is
-0.916, the Cl.sup.---H distance is 1.78 .ANG., and the H--C
distance is 1.16 .ANG.. In the case where part of the interaction
with the surrounding water molecules is taken into account as in
the molecular structure model illustrated in FIG. 96, on the other
hand, part of the negative charge of the chlorine ion is supplied
to an oxygen atom via a hydrogen atom in a water molecule.
Accordingly, the net atomic charge of the chlorine ion
significantly increases to -0.809, and the force of attracting the
hydrogen atomic nucleus in the choline group weakens. As a result,
the Cl.sup.---H distance increases to 1.80 .ANG., while the H--C
distance decreases to 1.15 .ANG.. When the interaction with the
water molecules is taken into account, the hydrogen bonding force
with the chlorine ion weakens, and the wavenumber of the
corresponding absorption band increases (the wavelength decreases).
From such argument, it is possible to explain the reason why the
wavenumber of the absorption band generated in the chlorine choline
in the aqueous solution is smaller (the wavelength is longer) than
that in the experimental result in the case of theoretical
estimation that ignores the interaction with surrounding water
molecules as in Table 8. In addition to the chlorine ion
illustrated in FIG. 84, there are a bromine ion and an iodine ion
as halogen ions. The bromine ion or the iodine ion is larger in ion
radius than the chlorine ion, and so the force of attracting the
hydrogen atom in the methyl group upon hydrogen bonding (or ionic
bonding) is relatively weak. Accordingly, the potential property of
the hydrogen atom corresponding to a choline bromide or a choline
iodide is estimated to be close to the potential property in the
single choline cation. This suggests that the wavenumber or
wavelength of the absorption band corresponding to a choline
bromide pair or a choline iodide pair is close to that in the
single choline cation. Acetylcholine is known as a transmitter
substance other than those described in section 15.1. The
above-mentioned choline group is included in the molecular
structure of the Acetylcholine. It is therefore expected that, when
the Acetylcholine is temporarily bonded to a receptor, a hydrogen
bond (or ionic bond) is formed between a methyl group in the
choline group and an oxygen atom included in a carboxyl group
(--COO.sup.-) in the receptor. Combining the description in FIG. 84
with the description in FIG. 86 enables estimation of the
wavenumber (or wavelength) of the absorption band generated when
the Acetylcholine is hydrogen bonded to the receptor. That is, it
is expected that the net atomic charge of the oxygen atom in the
carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-) upon hydrogen bonding is larger than
that of the chlorine ion, and the force of attracting the hydrogen
atom is relatively weak. The potential property in this case passes
between the two curves illustrated in FIG. 84. It is thus expected
that the relationship 10.9<.kappa..sub.2<16.1 is satisfied in
the potential approximation when the Acetylcholine is temporarily
hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to the receptor. Adding the
contents of Table 8 to this result leads to estimation that the
wavenumber (or wavelength) of the absorption band generated when
the Acetylcholine is temporarily hydrogen bonded to the receptor is
in the range of 5600 to 6188 cm.sup.-1 (1.700 to 1.616 (.mu.m) in
the 1st overtone and in the range of 8330 to 8700 cm.sup.-1 in the
2nd overtone. Here, one point needs to be noted when considering
the potential property. The primary amine (--N.sup.+H.sub.3)
ionized in water can be changed to the non-ionized state
(--NH.sub.2) when one hydrogen atom is taken away from it, so that
the decrease of the total energy difference V on the right side
(x>0 side) of FIG. 86 is permitted. On the other hand, it is
difficult to take one hydrogen atom far away from the methyl group,
and therefore the total energy difference V does not decrease on
the right side (x>0 side) of FIG. 84.
[1490] To conclude section 15.2, the remaining answers to the
problems presented in section 15.1 are summarized lastly. When a
hydrogen bond (or ionic bond) is formed between the transmitter
substance having the functional group of the primary amine or the
secondary amine or the transmitter substance such as Acetylcholine
and the receptor, an optical property change (wavelength shift or
wavelength change of absorption band) occurs locally. In principle,
it is possible to detect, as part of life activities, the temporary
bonding state between the transmitter substance and the receptor.
Moreover, the absorption wavelength (or absorption wavenumber) of
the electromagnetic wave differs for each vital reaction or
chemical or physiochemical change in the life object, as
illustrated in FIG. 86. Accordingly, by applying narrow-band light
such as monochromatic light from outside, it is possible to control
(e.g. promotion of action potential with the mechanical strength of
the .alpha. helix being changed, phosphorylation/dephosphorylation
control described in chapter 13, etc.) life activities without
affecting other vital reactions or chemical or physiochemical
changes in the life object.
[1491] This section shows part of the experimental result in the
form of being compared with the theoretically property estimation
obtained by computer simulation based on various molecular
structure models. From the next section, each individual model
experimental result is described in detail. All experiments are
conducted in cooperation with Toray Research Center, Inc. All
experiments are commonly executed in an environment where the
temperature is fixed at 23.degree. C.
15.3) Experimental Result Regarding Choline Chloride
[1492] To determine whether or not a life activity actually
occurring in a life object can be detected from outside, the
molecular structure model is set in section 15.1, and computer
simulation is performed in section 15.2. As a result, the
possibility of detecting the life activity occurring in the life
object from outside can be theoretically estimated. The following
determines the possibility of detecting a life activity (relating
to a biochemical reaction, a chemical/physiochemical change, a
tertiary structure change in molecule, a metabolic activity, etc.)
from outside, by a simple model experiment. First, a simple model
experiment for action potential or signal transmission related to a
neuron is conducted in this section 15.3. As described earlier in
section 2.5, upon action potential in the neuron cell body 1 of a
neuron, signal transmission in the axon 2, or signal transmission
for flexor activation in the neuromuscular junction 5, a chlorine
ion is expected to be temporarily hydrogen bonded (or ionically
bonded) to a choline group in PCLN or SMLN. Accordingly, as a
simple model experiment for the above-mentioned action potential or
signal transmission, an optical property change relating to the
hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding) part of the choline chloride is
experimentally determined.
[1493] As described in section 15.2, the bromine ion is larger in
ion radius than the chlorine ion, so that the hydrogen bonding
force between the hydrogen atom and the bromine atom in the choline
bromide is relatively small. It is therefore expected that the
absorption spectrum of the choline bromide is close to the
absorption spectrum of the single choline cation, as compared with
the choline chloride. This suggests that the part where the
difference in absorption spectrum between the choline bromide and
the choline chloride appears represents the absorption band
generated due to the hydrogen bonding part in the choline chloride
(or the ionic bonding part between the chlorine ion and the
hydrogen atom in the methyl group). FIG. 88 illustrates a result of
measuring the absorption spectrum of the choline bromide in the dry
solid state, which is created by the method described in section
15.2. Note that all samples in the solid state are measured using a
light transmission device (IFS125HR manufactured by Bruker Optics)
with a wavenumber resolution of 4 cm.sup.-1, and an integration
value after repetition 4096 times is set as the experimental
result. The property illustrated in FIG. 88 appears to be similar
to the absorption spectrum of the methyl group. The absorption
spectrum illustrated in FIG. 88 can be interpreted as follows. A
plurality of absorption bands around 3000 cm.sup.-1 indicate a
property in a reference tone region 901, where a smaller wavenumber
represents group vibration corresponding to symmetrically
telescopic vibration 904-1 of the methyl group, and a larger
wavenumber represents group vibration corresponding to
anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration 905-1 of the methyl group.
Meanwhile, the region around 4300 cm.sup.-1 corresponds to a
combination region 902, and the region around 6000 cm.sup.-1
corresponds to a 1 st overtone region 903. Given that a plurality
of absorption band patterns in the 1st overtone region 903 are
substantially similar to the absorption band pattern in the
reference tone region 901, it is expected that the absorption band
on the smaller wavenumber side in the 1st overtone region 903
represents group vibration corresponding to symmetrically
telescopic vibration 904-3 of the methyl group, and the absorption
band on the larger wavenumber side represents group vibration
corresponding to anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration 905-3 of
the methyl group.
[1494] FIG. 89 illustrates a result of comparison in absorption
spectrum property between the choline chloride and the choline
bromide in the dry solid state in the 1st overtone region 903. To
facilitate the comparison between them, the baseline of each
absorption spectrum is subtracted first, and then their absorption
peak intensities on a logarithmic scale representing absorbance are
brought into agreement. The results are overlaid in the lower part
of FIG. 89, and the difference property is shown in the upper part
of FIG. 89. In FIG. 89, the absorption band of 6235 cm.sup.-1 that
is likely to correspond to anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration
906-3 in the choline bromide is shifted to 6188 cm.sup.-1 in the
choline chloride. Meanwhile, the wavenumber of the maximum
absorption peak in the 1st overtone region 903 is near 5982
cm.sup.-1, which is approximately the same between the choline
bromide and the choline chloride. The absorption peak is therefore
estimated to correspond to group vibration of the single methyl
group. On the other hand, the absorption band of 5819 cm.sup.-1
which appears in the choline bromide disappears in the choline
chloride. This difference in absorption spectrum is more evident
when taking their difference. In FIG. 89, the absorbance is
indicated on the logarithmic scale, and so the upper part of FIG.
89 represents the difference on the logarithmic scale. When the
difference property is examined from larger to smaller wavenumbers,
the difference has a minimum value at 6279 cm.sup.-1, and a maximum
value at 6178 cm.sup.-1 and 6111 cm.sup.-1. Since the chlorine ion
is hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to part of the hydrogen
atom constituting the methyl group in the choline chloride, the
number of methyl groups in a free state without hydrogen bonding
decreases relatively. Suppose the absorption spectrum of the
choline bromide is similar to the absorption spectrum of the single
choline cation. Then, FIG. 89 illustrates that the number of methyl
groups in the non-hydrogen bonding state which appear around 6279
cm.sup.-1 due to the anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration 905-3
as the group vibration form. On the other hand, the absorption band
newly generated as a result of hydrogen bonding to the chlorine ion
appears around 6178 cm.sup.-1 and 6111 cm.sup.-1. The
above-mentioned anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration 905-3 is
also referred to as "degeneracy stretching", and has a feature
that, when the distance between one hydrogen atomic nucleus of
three hydrogen atoms constituting the methyl group and the central
carbon atomic nucleus increases, the distance between each of the
remaining two hydrogen atomic nuclei and the central carbon atomic
nucleus simultaneously decreases (degeneracy). When the probability
of the hydrogen bonding partner of the chlorine ion is taken into
account, there is a possibility that the absorption band around
6178 cm.sup.-1 corresponds to the case where the one hydrogen atom
with the increased distance and the chlorine ion are hydrogen
bonded, and the absorption band around 6111 cm.sup.-1 corresponds
to the case where one of the two hydrogen atoms with the
simultaneously decreased distance and the chlorine ion are hydrogen
bonded. Likewise, the absorption band appearing around 5969
cm.sup.-1 represents the state where the chlorine ion is hydrogen
bonded to the methyl group with the symmetrically telescopic
vibration 904-3.
[1495] In the next experiment, the change in absorption spectrum in
the 1st overtone region is measured while changing the aqueous
solution concentration of the choline chloride dissolved in pure
water. In this aqueous solution experiment, a light transmission
device (IFS125HR manufactured by Bruker Optics) with an optical
length of 1 mm and a wavenumber resolution of 4 cm.sup.-1 is used,
and an integration value after repetition 128 times is set as the
experimental result. Prior to the experiment, the concentration
dependence of the ionization degree of the choline chloride in the
aqueous solution is checked by another method. The following
phenomena are found as a result. [1496] Visually, the choline
chloride is dissolved in pure water at 5 M. [1497] In the aqueous
solution of 5 M, the ionization degree is low, and many choline
chloride pairs remain in water..fwdarw.In the aqueous solution of 5
M, many hydrogen bonds between chlorine ions and choline groups
exist. [1498] In the aqueous solution of 1 M, the ionization degree
increases considerably, but choline chloride pairs remain in water
to some extent..fwdarw.In the aqueous solution of 1 M, hydrogen
bonds between chlorine ions and choline groups decrease but exist
to some extent. [1499] In the aqueous solution of 0.2 M, the
ionization degree increases further, and most choline chloride
pairs are separated into chlorine ions and choline
cations..fwdarw.In the aqueous solution of 0.2 M, the proportion of
hydrogen bonds between chlorine ions and choline groups is very
low. These results are used to describe the aqueous solution
concentration change of the absorption spectrum of the choline
chloride.
[1500] This experiment is conducted in an environment of 23.degree.
C. In FIGS. 90 and 91 as in FIG. 89, to facilitate the comparison
between the spectra at the different aqueous solution
concentrations, the baseline of each absorption spectrum is
subtracted first, and then their maximum absorption intensities on
a logarithmic scale representing absorbance are brought into
agreement. The results are overlaid in the lower part of each of
FIGS. 90 and 91, and the difference property is shown in the upper
part of each of FIGS. 90 and 91. The absorbance property in the
lower part is indicated on the logarithmic scale, and so the
property in the upper part represents the difference on the
logarithmic scale. FIG. 90 illustrates a change in spectrum of the
absorption band generated in the 1st overtone region 903 between 5
M and 0.2 M as the choline chloride aqueous solution concentration.
This result is compared with the result in FIG. 89. The wavenumber
where the absorption band appears decreases by about 100 to 200
cm.sup.-1 in water, as compared with the case of the dry solid
state. This difference in wavenumber where the absorption band
appears depending on the surrounding environment can be attributed
to the following. In the case where the dry solid state is created
using the method described in section 15.2, there is a possibility
that the state is relatively porous (state in which the average
distance between adjacent choline chloride molecules is slightly
wider) when the choline chloride sample is ground into a powder
using a mortar and pestle in a glove box under a nitrogen
atmosphere. On the other hand, in the case where the sample is
dissolved in pure water, the sample is surrounded by dense water
molecules, so that the group vibration of the methyl group is
influenced by the surrounding water molecules and the absorption
band wavenumber decreases (wavelength increases). When the
difference property (spectrum) between 5 M and 0.2 M in the upper
part of FIG. 90 is compared with the corresponding property in FIG.
89, the difference property in FIG. 90 is the same as the
corresponding property in FIG. 89 in, for example, the following
features: [1501] maximum points appear in a plurality of positions,
i.e. 5999 cm.sup.-1 and 5868 cm.sup.-1 (the maximum wavenumber
positions in FIG. 89 are 6111 cm.sup.-1 and 5969 cm.sup.-1); and
[1502] the outside (6026 cm.sup.-1 and 5837 cm.sup.-1) of the above
range are minimum points (the minimum wavenumber position in FIG.
89 is 6279 cm.sup.-1). These features are considered to derive from
the absorption band corresponding to the hydrogen bonding part (or
ionic bonding part) where the choline chloride pair is formed. For
ease of explanation, the expression "a chlorine ion and a choline
cation are hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) to form a choline
chloride pair" is used here. Actually, the chlorine ion and the
choline cation constantly move in water, and therefore it is hard
to maintain the choline chloride pair for a long time, as described
in detail later in section 15.6. However, the above-mentioned
optical property occurs at the instant when the chlorine ion and
the choline cation become proximate to each other for a short time
(temporarily). If the proximity frequency increases, the noticeable
optical property change mentioned above is detected as a
"macroscopic state". Hence, rather than the above-mentioned
expression for ease of explanation, the expression "an increase in
proximity frequency between a chlorine ion and a choline cation can
be detected as the above-mentioned optical property change" more
precisely represents the natural phenomenon. The minimum point at
6076 cm.sup.-1 in FIG. 90 is not seen in FIG. 89, indicating a
unique feature in the aqueous solution. FIG. 91 illustrates a
change in spectrum of the absorption band generated in the 1st
overtone region 903 between the aqueous solution of 0.2 M and the
aqueous solution of 1 M in which choline chloride pairs are
slightly formed by hydrogen bonds (or ionic bonds). As mentioned
earlier, the ionization degree of the choline chloride is high both
at 1 M and 0.2 M as the choline chloride aqueous solution
concentration, and most parts are ionized into chlorine ions and
choline cations. Accordingly, there is little difference between
the absorption spectra in the lower part of FIG. 91. In the case of
0.2 M, the concentration is very low, so that the curve is not
smooth due to a large noise ratio of measurement data. However,
taking the difference between 1 M and 0.2 M as in the upper part of
FIG. 91 clearly reveals a slight difference. As a result of
comparing the wavenumber positions where different property maximum
and minimum points appear in the upper part of FIG. 91 with the
result in FIG. 90, the following are observed: [1503] 6076
cm.sup.-1 and 6026 cm.sup.-1 where the minimum points of the
difference property appear in FIG. 91 completely match the
corresponding 6076 cm.sup.-1 and 6026 cm.sup.-1 in FIG. 90; and
[1504] 6002 cm.sup.-1 where the maximum point of the difference
property appears in FIG. 91 approximately matches 5999 cm.sup.-1 in
FIG. 90.
[1505] These results demonstrate the following features: [1506]
even in the case where the frequency of hydrogen bonding in the
choline chloride pair is low, the maximum and minimum points of the
difference property in the absorption band in the 1st overtone
region 903 appear (detectable); and [1507] the maximum and minimum
points of the difference property in the absorption band in the 1st
overtone region 903 appear at the same wavenumber positions
(wavelength positions), regardless of the frequency of hydrogen
bonding in the choline chloride pair. That is, if hydrogen atoms
and chlorine ions in the methyl group are hydrogen bonded (or
ionically bonded) even slightly, the unique absorption band appears
around 5999 cm.sup.-1, while the absorption intensity of the
absorption band around 6026 cm.sup.-1 corresponding to the group
vibration (anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration) of the methyl
group in the non-hydrogen bonding state (free state) decreases. In
the case where the frequency of hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding)
of the chlorine ion is low, the absorption spectrum change is small
as in the lower part of FIG. 91. In the case where the frequency is
high, on the other hand, the absorption spectrum change is large as
in the lower part of FIG. 90. The result of the above embodiment
suggests the following possibility: by extracting, from outside, an
optical property change that occurs upon action potential in the
neuron cell body 1 of a neuron, signal transmission in the axon 2,
or signal transmission for flexor activation in the neuromuscular
junction 5, the action potential or signal transmission state
relating to the neuron can be detected.
15.4) Influence of Choline Chloride Pair in Water on Surrounding
Water Molecules
[1508] Sections 15.2 and 15.3 describe that the wavenumber position
(wavelength position 9 of the absorption band generated as a result
of hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding) in the choline chloride pair
is influenced by the surrounding water molecules. The following
describes the result of experiment concerning the influence on the
surrounding water molecules when the choline chloride pair is
generated in water. In this experiment of the water molecule state,
too, a light transmission device (IFS125HR manufactured by Bruker
Optics) with an optical length of 1 mm and a wavenumber resolution
of 4 cm.sup.-1 is used, and an integration value after repetition
128 times is set as the experimental result.
[1509] From this experiment, the following phenomenon is found: the
absorption intensity of water in the 1st overtone region 903
decreases when the aqueous solution concentration is increased,
regardless of whether choline chloride or ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate is used as the sample dissolved in pure water. FIG. 92
illustrates this phenomenon. In FIG. 92, "rate of decrease of 1 st
overtone peak height of water on logarithmic scale" indicates the
rate of decrease from 100% at each aqueous solution concentration,
where the difference from the baseline at the center maximum
intensity (maximum absorbance) of the absorption band generated in
the 1st overtone region 903 in pure water is set as 100%. Since the
light absorption amount is defined on the logarithmic scale, the
absorbance is expressed here in percentage on the logarithmic
scale. Ammonium dihydrogen phosphate is poorly soluble in water
and, when viewed with the naked eye, is not completely dissolved at
the aqueous solution concentration of 5 M. Accordingly, the maximum
concentration of the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution
is set to 2.5 M in FIG. 92. It can be understood from FIG. 92 that
the rate of decrease of the 1st overtone absorption peak height of
water increases in proportion to the aqueous solution
concentration, regardless of the type of the sample dissolved. As
described in section 15.3, the ionization degree in the aqueous
solution significantly differs between 5 M, 1 M, and 0.2 M as the
choline chloride aqueous solution concentration. In the case where
the absorption peak intensity decreases depending on the pair
formation amount (i.e. the bonding state of molecules) due to
hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding) between anions and cations in
the aqueous solution, a linear property as in FIG. 92 would not be
exhibited. Hence, the state where "the absorption peak height
decreases in proportion to the anion and cation concentration in
water regardless of the type or (bonding) state of anions and
cations in water" is illustrated in FIG. 92.
[1510] FIG. 93 illustrates a result of absorption spectrum change
in the 1st overtone region 903 of water when the choline chloride
aqueous solution concentration is changed. As in section 15.3, a
light transmission device with an optical length of 1 mm and a
wavenumber resolution of 4 cm.sup.-1 is used, and an integration
value after repetition 128 times is set as the experimental result.
The baseline of each absorption spectrum of the experimental result
is subtracted, and normalization is performed so that their maximum
absorption intensities on a logarithmic scale representing
absorbance are in agreement. These results are shown in the lower
part of FIG. 93. The difference (difference on the logarithmic
scale representing absorbance) in absorbance between the property
in the choline chloride aqueous solution concentration of each of 1
M and 5 M and the property in pure water normalized in the same way
as above is shown in the upper part of FIG. 93. In FIG. 93 which
illustrates the absorption band corresponding to water and not the
absorption band corresponding to choline chloride as in FIG. 90,
too, the spectrum property changes significantly. The peak
wavenumber of the absorption band (the wavelength at the maximum
intensity) clearly shifts when the aqueous solution concentration
is 5 M, as compared with the pure water state. As a result, the
difference between the aqueous solution concentration of 5 M and
the pure water state significantly decreases at a position .alpha.
(7092 cm.sup.-1), but increases at two positions .beta. (6744
cm.sup.-1) and .gamma. (6404 cm.sup.-1). Since the difference
property between the aqueous solution concentration of 1 M and the
pure water state is not clear on the scale in FIG. 93, FIG. 94
enlarges the difference property between the aqueous solution
concentration of 1 M and the pure water state. When FIGS. 93 and 94
are compared with each other, there is a tendency that the
wavenumber at each position of .alpha., .beta., and .gamma. is
slightly larger in magnitude in the aqueous solution concentration
of 1 M than in the aqueous solution concentration of 5 M. However,
the property in the aqueous solution concentration of 1 M shares
the following tendency with the property in the aqueous solution
concentration of 5 M: the difference from the pure water state
relatively decreases significantly at the position .alpha. (7122
cm.sup.-1) but increases at the two positions .beta. (6788
cm.sup.-1) and .gamma. (6434 cm.sup.-1). This tendency is common
regardless of the aqueous solution concentration. That is, if
choline chloride pairs are included even in a small amount, the
light absorption decreases at the position .alpha. and increases at
the positions .beta. and .gamma. in the absorption band spectrum in
the 1st overtone region 903 of water. When choline chloride pairs
in water increase significantly, the absorption spectrum of water
in the 1st overtone region 903 changes noticeably as in FIG.
93.
[1511] FIG. 95 illustrates choline chloride aqueous solution
concentration dependence of the absolute value of the difference
from the pure water state at each position of .alpha., .beta., and
.gamma. in FIGS. 93 and 94. As is clear from FIG. 95, the aqueous
solution concentration dependence commonly deviates from a straight
line in all positions .alpha., .beta., and .gamma.. As mentioned
earlier, if the difference property from pure water depends on the
amount of anions and cations in water, the property would be linear
as in FIG. 92. The ionization degree of the choline chloride in the
aqueous solution is very low at 5 M, significantly increases at 1
M, and is very high at 0.2 M, as described in section 15.3. This
property appears to be reflected in FIG. 95. In detail, when the
choline chloride aqueous solution concentration is 5 M, chlorine
ions and choline groups are hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded)
in a large amount to form choline chloride pairs, so that the
difference from the pure water state at the positions .alpha.,
.beta., and .gamma. is large. Meanwhile, when the aqueous solution
concentration decreases to 1 M and to 0.2 M, the ionization degree
increases and the proportion of hydrogen bond (or ionic bond)
between chlorine ions and choline groups decreases, so that the
difference in spectrum from the pure water state is smaller.
Therefore, from the nonlinear property in FIG. 95, it is considered
that the absorption spectrum change in the 1st overtone region 903
of water is "caused by hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding) between
chlorine ions and choline groups".
[1512] These results can be summarized as follows. In the
absorption spectrum of water in the 1st overtone region 903: [1513]
the decrease of the center intensity (maximum absorbance) relates
to the amount of anions and cations in water; and [1514] the change
in shape of the whole absorption spectrum relates to the amount of
bond between chlorine ions and choline cations (or the proximity
frequency between chlorine ions and choline cations). This leads to
the conclusion that hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding, or increase
in proximity frequency) between chlorine ions and choline cations
in water influences the state of surrounding water molecules.
[1515] FIG. 96 illustrates a result of computer simulation on how
hydrogen bonding (or ionic bonding) between chlorine ions and
choline cations in water influences surrounding water molecules. A
molecular structure in which a choline cation and a chlorine ion Cl
are hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded) in water via a hydrogen
atom 1H in the choline cation to form a choline chloride pair is
illustrated in FIG. 96. FIG. 96(a) is a front view, and FIG. 96(b)
is a side view. From the result in FIG. 96, the following
phenomenon is expected: [1516] the hydrogen bonding part in the
choline chloride pair serves as a "template" to promote hydrogen
bonding between surrounding water molecules, and also the hydrogen
bonded water molecules serve as a "nucleus (=a type of template)"
to promote hydrogen bonding between surrounding water molecules.
This being so, when hydrogen bonding between chlorine ions and
choline cations frequently occurs, hydrogen bonding between
surrounding water molecules is promoted. This explains the shape
change of the water molecule absorption spectrum in the 1st
overtone region 903 in FIGS. 93 and 94. A mechanism of this
phenomenon is described in detail below. FIG. 96 illustrates an
example of molecular arrangement after structural optimization by
adding four water molecules to the molecular structure in which the
choline cation and the chlorine ion Cl are hydrogen bonded to form
the choline chloride pair as mentioned above. As in section 15.1,
SCIGRESS MO Compact Version 1 Pro manufactured by Fujitsu
Corporation ("SCIGRESS" is a registered trademark) is used as a
quantum chemistry simulation program, and a keyword "PM3 EF PRECISE
EPS=78.4 LET DDMIN=0.00001" (in a solvent having water permittivity
of 78.4, PM3 is selected as Hamiltonian, and high-precision
structural optimization is performed) is set to perform structural
optimization. When the temperature of the experimental environment
is 23.degree. C., the water molecules constantly flow and are not
fixed. However, since the molecular arrangement in FIG. 96 obtained
as a result of structural optimization is energetically stable (the
total molecular structure energy including the water molecules has
a minimum value), there is a high possibility that the water
molecules are temporarily arranged as in FIG. 96. FIG. 96 also
illustrates the computer simulation result of the net atomic charge
of each atom at this time. For the reason described in section
4.6.3 with reference to FIG. 15, the net atomic charge of the
hydrogen atom 1H involved in the hydrogen bonding to the chlorine
ion Cl is high, i.e. +0.217. The high net atomic charge of the
hydrogen atom 1H is evident, when compared with the net atomic
charges+0.123 and +0.122 of respective hydrogen atoms 2H and 3H
constituting the methyl group not involved in the hydrogen bonding.
As a result, oxygen atoms 3O and 4O in surrounding water molecules
are attracted by electrostatic attraction. The hydrogen atoms 2H
and 3H whose net atomic charges are positive also contribute to the
attraction of the oxygen atoms 3O and 4O. Meanwhile, the net atomic
charge of the chlorine ion Cl is sufficiently low, i.e. -0.809, and
thus attracts hydrogen atoms 4H and 5H in surrounding water
molecules. At the instant when the four water molecules are
arranged as in FIG. 96, "hydrogen bonding" (designated by the thick
dotted line in FIG. 96) occurs simultaneously at a total of four
positions, namely, "between the chlorine ion Cl and the hydrogen
atom 4H", "between the chlorine ion Cl and the hydrogen atom 5H",
"between the oxygen atom 3O and the hydrogen atom 6H", and "between
the oxygen atom 4O and the hydrogen atom 7H". In particular,
electron orbital sharing illustrated in FIG. 15 occurs in
"Cl-4H-1O" and "Cl-5H-2O". As a result, part of the electron
distribution around the chlorine ion Cl passes through the hydrogen
atoms 4H and 5H and flow to around the oxygen atoms 1O and 2O,
causing the net atomic charges of the oxygen atoms and 2O to
decrease to -0.564 (both have the same value), and at the same time
causing the net atomic charges of the hydrogen atoms 4H and 5H to
increase to +0.262 (both have the same value). For reference, the
net atomic charges of an oxygen atom and a hydrogen atom
constituting a single water molecule in water are calculated using
the same quantum chemistry simulation program and the same
Hamiltonian (PM3). The net atomic charges calculated as a result
are -0.432 and +0.216. This indicates that the changes in net
atomic charge of the oxygen atoms 1O and 2O and the hydrogen atoms
4H and 5H are large. When the net atomic charges of the oxygen
atoms 1O and 2O decrease significantly and also the net atomic
charges of the hydrogen atoms 4H and 5H increase in this way, the
possibility that the oxygen atoms 1O and 2O and the hydrogen atoms
4H and 5H further attract surrounding water molecules to induce new
hydrogen bonding is higher. Thus, the arrangement of the water
molecules illustrated in FIG. 96 induces hydrogen bonding between
water molecules, which serves as a nucleus to further promote
hydrogen bonding between surrounding water molecules.
[1517] The following describes the peak shift of the absorption
band when hydrogen bonding between water molecules occurs, with
reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.
[1518] FIG. 84 illustrates an example of a methyl group, and FIG.
85 illustrates an example of a primary amine. In both cases, in the
potential property in the concave shape, the upper aperture is
small (the value of .kappa..sub.2 is large) before hydrogen bonding
(or ionic bonding). Upon hydrogen bonding to another ion (or atom),
the upper aperture increases (the value of .kappa..sub.2
decreases). It can be easily expected that this tendency is also
seen in water molecules. In the state where water molecules are not
hydrogen bonded in water, the upper aperture of the corresponding
potential property in the concave shape is small and the value of
.kappa..sub.2 is large, and so the center wavenumber of the
absorption band increases (the wavelength decreases) according to
eq. (A.cndot.60). When the frequency of hydrogen bonding between
water molecules in water increases, the upper aperture of the
potential property increases and the value of .kappa..sub.2
decreases as in FIGS. 84 and 85, and so the center wavenumber of
the absorption band decreases (the wavelength increases) according
to eq. (A.cndot.60). As a result, the light absorption amount in
the region a decreases and instead the light absorption amount in
the regions .beta. and .gamma. increases as compared with the pure
water state as in FIG. 93. The feature that the light absorption
amount increases in two regions, i.e. .beta. and .gamma., is seen
in the absorption band of water in the choline chloride aqueous
solution, when compared with the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate
aqueous solution described later. This feature that the light
absorption amount increase region is separated into two regions
.beta. and .gamma. is estimated to relate to the "hydrogen bonding
form between water molecules" from the property in FIG. 95.
However, this feature is not explainable within the range of
consideration presented above, and further experiments and analysis
will be required in the future.
[1519] The above experimental results are summarized as follows.
Upon action potential in the neuron cell body 1 of a neuron, signal
transmission in the axon 2, or signal transmission for flexor
activation in the neuromuscular junction 5, the optical property of
surrounding water changes, too. By detecting this optical property
change of water from outside, it is possible to detect the action
potential or signal transmission relating to the neuron. As the
method of detection from outside, the method described in section
6.3 with reference to FIG. 24 or 26 or the method described in
section 12.1 with reference to FIG. 66 or 67 is available.
15.5) Experimental Result Regarding Ammonium Dihydrogen
Phosphate
[1520] In this section 15.5, a simple model experiment concerning
contraction and relaxation of a muscle cell or a phosphorylation
process is conducted. In the foregoing section 15.1, as a molecular
structure model for theoretically studying whether or not there is
an optical property change upon contraction of a skeletal muscle
(striated muscle) (hydrolysis of ATP) or in a final stage of a
phosphorylation process, computer simulation is performed on the
state (FIG. 81) in which a primary amine group ionized at the tip
of one Lysine sandwiched between (peptide bonded to each of) two
Glycine is bonded to a .gamma. phosphoryl. A molecular structure
that further simplifies the above-mentioned molecular structure
model includes a bonding state between a .gamma. phosphoryl and a
first primary amine group ionized in water. As a molecule closest
to this structure, ammonium dihydrogen phosphate is commercially
available. Hence, whether or not the optical property changes
between a bonding state and a dissociation state (state of
separation between dihydrogen phosphate anion and ammonium cation)
of ammonium dihydrogen phosphate in water is examined as a simple
model experiment concerning contraction and relaxation of a muscle
cell or a phosphorylation process.
[1521] The center wavenumber of the 1st overtone absorption band
corresponding to the group vibration of the methyl group described
in section 15.4 is very different from the corresponding center
wavenumber of water. Accordingly, they are relatively easily
distinguished on the absorption spectra. On the other hand, the
center wavenumber of the 1 st overtone absorption band
corresponding to the group vibration of the primary amine is
relatively close to the corresponding center wavenumber of water.
To prevent an experimental result interpretation error, it is
desirable to take into account the relationship with the absorption
band of water when measuring the 1st overtone absorption band
property corresponding to the group vibration of the primary amine.
An absorption spectrum experiment in a wet solid state described
below is conducted to enable recognition of the positional
relationship in absorption spectrum between the absorption band
corresponding to the primary amine and the absorption band
corresponding to water. In detail, the sample is ground into a
powder using a mortar and pestle in a glove box under a nitrogen
atmosphere, and then a few drops of pure water is placed to create
a wet solid state. The resulting sample is sandwiched between two
aperture plates made of CaF.sub.2, and the absorption spectrum is
measured by a light transmission method. Since the ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate sample has very poor affinity for water, only
a few drops of pure water does not dissolve the ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate sample, and the hydrogen bonding state in the ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate sample is maintained. The wavenumber
resolution of the measuring device here is 4 cm.sup.-1, and an
integration value after 4096 times is set as the measurement
result. For comparison with the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate
property, the ammonium chloride property is measured, too. FIG. 97
illustrates both absorption spectrum properties in the 1st overtone
region 903 obtained as a result. In FIGS. 89 to 94, the
normalization process is performed so that the center intensities
of the absorption bands after the baseband components are removed
are in agreement. In FIG. 97, however, the raw measurement result
is shown without such a preliminary process. By presenting the raw
measurement result, it is possible to clarify the positional
relationship in absorption spectrum between the absorption band
corresponding to the primary amine and the absorption band
corresponding to water. In FIG. 97, the region is successfully
separated in such a manner that the region of the wavenumber not
less than 6600 cm.sup.-1 corresponds to a water 1st overtone region
903-1 and the region of the wavenumber less than 6600 cm.sup.-1
corresponds to the absorption band region of the 1st overtone
relating to the primary amine. The absorption band peak wavenumber
in the 1st overtone region 903 corresponding to the group vibration
of the primary amine cation hydrogen bonded (or ionically bonded)
to the chlorine ion is 6248 cm.sup.-1, and the absorption band peak
wavenumber in the 1st overtone region 903 corresponding to the
group vibration of the primary amine cation hydrogen bonded (or
ionically bonded) to the dihydrogen phosphate anion (pseudo .gamma.
phosphoryl in the description in section 15.1) is 6314 cm.sup.-1,
as illustrated in FIG. 97. Applying the consideration in section
15.2 to this phenomenon reveals that the dihydrogen phosphate anion
has a weaker hydrogen bonding force with the primary amine cation
than the chlorine ion, and the upper aperture of the potential
property in the concave shape (FIG. 86) is narrower and the value
of .kappa..sub.2 is larger. It can be understood from the
experimental result in FIG. 97 that a unique absorption band
corresponding to the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate appears. The
experimental result in FIG. 97 thus suggests that "the optical
property changes upon contraction and relaxation of a muscle cell
or a phosphorylation process, and the contraction/relaxation of the
muscle cell or the phosphorylation process can be detected from
outside by extracting the optical property change".
[1522] FIG. 98 illustrates the absorption spectrum property in the
1st overtone region 903 when the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate is
dissolved in water. As mentioned earlier in section 15.4, the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate is poorly soluble in water and, when
viewed with the naked eye, is not completely dissolved at the
aqueous solution concentration of 5 M. Accordingly, the maximum
concentration of the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution
is decreased to 2.5 M. Other experimental results indicate that the
ionization degree is very low (i.e. the frequency of hydrogen
bonding to the primary amine cation is very high) when the ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution concentration is 2.5 M and
0.5 M. In this light absorption property experiment for the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate, transmitted light with an optical
length of 910 .mu.m is measured by a device (IFS125HR manufactured
by Bruker Optics) with a wavenumber resolution of 4 cm.sup.-1 in an
environment of 23.degree. C., and an integration value after 1024
times is set as the experimental result. After the baseline
component is removed from the experimental result (raw absorption
spectrum), each absorption spectrum is normalized at its center
intensity to facilitate comparison in shape between absorption
spectra. The absorption spectrum of the absorption band in the 1st
overtone region 903 in each of the pure water state and 0.5 M and
2.5 M as the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution
concentration processed in the above-mentioned manner is shown in
the lower part of FIG. 98. The difference property on a logarithmic
scale between the absorption spectrum in the ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate aqueous solution concentration of each of 0.5 M and 2.5 M
and the absorption spectrum in the pure water state, which is
calculated based on the above-mentioned absorption spectra, is
shown in the upper part of FIG. 98. As repeatedly mentioned, since
the absorbance is displayed on the logarithmic scale, the
calculation of the difference between the absorbance properties is
a division operation on a linear scale. When the absorption band
peak position (wavenumber when the light absorption is largest) of
the choline chloride in the dry solid state in FIG. 89 is compared
with the absorption band peak position (wavenumber when the light
absorption is largest) of the choline chloride in the aqueous
solution in FIG. 90, there is a tendency that the wavenumber is
smaller in the absorption band in the aqueous solution. Applying
this tendency to the absorption band of the ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate in the wet solid state in FIG. 97 leads to expectation
that the absorption band corresponding to the ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate would appear at a position slightly smaller in wavenumber
than 6314 cm.sup.-1 in the aqueous solution. However, no unique
absorption band is found at such a position in FIG. 98. This is
probably because the absorption band corresponding to the ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate is hidden within the foot of the large
absorption band of water. In the wet solid state illustrated in
FIG. 97, the water molecule content in the sample is small, so that
the influence of the absorption band (appearing only from 6600
cm.sup.-1 onward) in the water 1st overtone region 903-1 is
limited. On the other hand, since a large number of water molecules
exist in the aqueous solution, the foot of the absorption band
corresponding to water expands to 6100 cm.sup.-1 as in FIG. 98,
within which the absorption band corresponding to the ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate is hidden. To separately detect the absorption
band corresponding to the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate and the
absorption band corresponding to water as in the choline chloride
aqueous solution, it is necessary to measure the absorption band in
"the 2nd overtone region or more" where the separation between the
two absorption bands increases. In this experiment, the absorption
band in "the 2nd overtone region or more" cannot be accurately
measured due to the set optical length. Improved experiments in the
future are therefore desired.
[1523] As illustrated in FIG. 98, the shape of the absorption
spectrum in the 1st overtone region 903 changes according to the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution concentration.
Moreover, the maximum light absorption intensity (1st overtone peak
height) of the absorption spectrum also changes according to the
aqueous solution concentration, as described above with reference
to FIG. 92. Based on the consideration in section 15.4, it can be
expected that this absorption spectrum shape change reflects "the
hydrogen bonding state between water molecules caused by the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate". There is, however, a difference in
absorption spectrum shape change state between FIGS. 98 and 93. In
FIG. 93, the light absorption amount increases in two separate
regions .beta. and .gamma.. In FIG. 98, on the other hand, the
light absorption increases in a wide area from 6888 cm.sup.-1 to
6100 cm.sup.-1 in wavenumber, both when the ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate aqueous solution concentration is 2.5 M and when the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution concentration is 0.5
M. The shape when the height direction of the absorption spectrum
shape in the pure water state in the lower part of FIG. 98 is
compressed to about 1/14 and the position of the center wavenumber
is entirely translated (shifted) from 6888 cm.sup.-1 to 6560
cm.sup.-1 is designated by the dotted line in FIG. 98, for
reference. The difference property shape in the range from 6888
cm.sup.-1 to 6100 cm.sup.-1 in wavenumber in the upper part of FIG.
98 is similar to the property designated by the dotted line,
irrespective of whether the difference property is between 2.5 M
and the pure water state or between 0.5 M and the pure water state.
When this result is combined with the consideration in section
15.4, the following phenomena appear to take place.
[1524] [1] When the dihydrogen phosphate anion and the ammonium
cation are bonded (hydrogen bond or ionic bond, or increase in
proximity frequency) in water, surrounding water molecules are
hydrogen bonded.
[1525] [2]. The center wavelength of the absorption band formed by
the hydrogen bonded water molecules shifts from 6888 cm.sup.-1 to
6560 cm.sup.-1.
[1526] [3] The absorption band component formed by the hydrogen
bonded water molecules is added to the previous absorption band
corresponding to water before the hydrogen bond.
Meanwhile, in FIG. 98, the light absorption amount decreases at
around 7172 cm.sup.-1 when the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate
aqueous solution concentration is 2.5 M, and the light absorption
amount decreases at around 7177 cm.sup.-1 when the ammonium
dihydrogen phosphate aqueous solution concentration is 0.5 M. This
property matches the property in the choline chloride aqueous
solution illustrated in FIG. 93 or 94. From these results, it is
estimated that, when the dihydrogen phosphate anion and the
ammonium cation are bonded (hydrogen bond or ionic bond, or
increase in proximity frequency) in water, the optical property of
the surrounding water itself changes. In other words, the hydrogen
bonding between the surrounding water molecules is promoted when
the dihydrogen phosphate anion and the ammonium cation are bonded
(hydrogen bond or ionic bond, or increase in proximity frequency)
in water. Accordingly, the optical property of water changes as in
FIG. 98, upon contraction and relaxation of a muscle cell or a
phosphorylation process. Thus, the experimental results demonstrate
that the contraction/relaxation of the muscle cell or the
phosphorylation process can be detected by examining the optical
property change of water. The experimental result in FIG. 98 is not
limited to "bonding/dissociation between a residue of Lysine and a
.gamma. phosphoryl" but can be extended to the influence on the
optical property of water from biochemical reactions (or
chemical/physiochemical changes) in other parts. In hydrolysis of
ATP occurring upon contraction of a skeletal muscle (striated
muscle), various biochemical reactions (or chemical/physiochemical
changes) also occur in addition to "hydrogen bonding between a
residue of Lysine and a .gamma. phosphoryl", as illustrated in FIG.
58. For example, apart from hydrogen bonding between a residue of
Lysine and a .gamma. phosphoryl, temporary biochemical reactions
(or chemical/physiochemical changes) that also occur simultaneously
in the model of the ATP hydrolysis mechanism in FIG. 58 include:
[1527] temporary bonding (or proximity arrangement) between
Asparagine Asn253 and a .beta. phosphoryl; [1528] temporary bonding
(or proximity arrangement) between a water molecule and a .beta.
phosphoryl; [1529] temporary bonding (or proximity arrangement)
between a magnesium ion and a .beta. phosphoryl or a .gamma.
phosphoryl; and [1530] temporary bonding (or proximity arrangement)
between a magnesium ion and a water molecule. The occurrence of any
one of these temporary biochemical reactions (or
chemical/physiochemical changes) also influences the state of
surrounding water molecules for the same reason as described in
section 15.4 with reference to FIG. 96, causing a change in optical
property of water. Therefore, even if temporary bonding between a
residue of Lysine and a .gamma. phosphoryl does not occur, the
contraction/relaxation of the muscle cell or the phosphorylation
process can be detected by examining the optical property change of
water from outside. As the method of detection from outside, the
method described in section 6.3 with reference to FIG. 24 or 26 or
the method described in section 12.1 with reference to FIG. 66 or
67 is available.
[1531] In this section 15.5, the optical property of water changes
by bonding and dissociation between a dihydrogen phosphate anion
and an ammonium cation (or increase and decrease in proximity
frequency between them) in water. In section 15.4, the optical
property of water changes in a different manner from above by
bonding and dissociation between a chlorine ion and a choline
cation (or increase and decrease in proximity frequency between
them). However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited to
the above-mentioned combinations, and any exemplary embodiment in
which the optical property of water changes by bonding and
dissociation between an anion (including a halogen ion) and a
cation (or increase and decrease in proximity frequency between
them) in water is also included in the scope of the present
exemplary embodiment, for the reason described in section 15.4 with
reference to FIG. 96 (i.e. the phenomenon that a bonding part (or a
proximity arrangement state) between an anion and a cation serves
as a "template" to promote hydrogen bonding between surrounding
water molecules, and the hydrogen bonded water molecules serve as a
"nucleus (=a type of template)" to further promote hydrogen bonding
between surrounding water molecules). The optical property change
of water occurring in relation to temporary hydrogen bonding or
ionic bonding is also included in the scope of the present
exemplary embodiment. Given that the property in FIG. 93 or 94
described in section 15.4 and the property in FIG. 98 described in
section 15.5 are different, there is the following tendency: [1532]
the shape change state of the absorption spectrum corresponding to
water differs depending on the type of the anion and the cation
dissolved in water.
[1533] Furthermore, when the results of FIGS. 98, 93, and 94 and
the result of FIG. 95 relating to the ionization degree of the
anion and the cation in water are summarized, there are the
following features: [1534] when the frequency of bonding and
dissociation between the anion and the cation in water changes, the
absorption spectrum corresponding to water changes; and [1535] the
form of change of the absorption spectrum corresponding to water
differs depending on the type of the anion and the cation bonded or
dissociated in water. Accordingly, by compiling the relationships
between the anion-cation combinations and the absorption spectrum
change forms corresponding to water in a table (database) through
experiment beforehand, it is possible to estimate "which anion and
cation are frequently bonded or dissociated". A biochemical
reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical change, a
proximity frequency change between specific molecules (atoms), or a
temporary structural change of a life object constituent molecule
in a life object often relates to bonding or dissociation between
an anion and a cation in water in the life object. (Though the
expression "bonding" between the anion and the cation is used here,
actually the anion and the cation constantly move in water, and
accordingly the expression "the anion and the cation are proximate
to each other" in water may be more realistic than the expression
"bonding". This will be described in detail in section 15.6.) In
the case where a change in hydrogen bonding proportion in water
molecules occurs as mentioned earlier as one factor of change in
absorption spectrum corresponding to water, a change may also occur
in spectral property (magnetic property) of nuclear magnetic
resonance described in chapter 5. The present exemplary embodiment
thus has a feature that a life activity is detected using an
optical property change or a magnetic property change relating to
water. Besides, as is clear from comparison between each of FIGS.
93 and 94 and FIG. 98, the type or details (e.g. whether action
potential of a neuron or contraction of a muscle cell) of a life
activity can be identified according to how a change in optical
property or magnetic property relating to water appears. The type
or details of the life activity can be identified as a result of
operation in a signal operation section 925 in FIG. 100, as
described in detail in section 16.1. The expression "relating to
water" is used here, for the following reason. As is clear from
comparison between FIGS. 97 and 98, in the absorption property
(absorption spectrum) obtained from the ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate aqueous solution, the absorption band of the 1st overtone
corresponding to the ammonium dihydrogen phosphate is included in
the absorption band corresponding to the 1st overtone according to
telescopic vibration of water. This situation commonly occurs
regardless of whether the state between the dihydrogen phosphate
anion and the ammonium cation is bonding or dissociation (or
whether the proximity frequency between them is high or low). Since
the optical property change of water alone is not separately
extracted, the expression "relating to water" is used to take into
account "optical property change in which an optical property
change (absorption band state change) corresponding to another
molecule or atom is mixed in the above-mentioned optical property
change". In FIG. 98, the absorption band corresponding to the
ammonium dihydrogen phosphate is not apparent as it is hidden in
the absorption band corresponding to water alone. However, this is
not a limit. For example, a situation in which an absorption band
formed by another molecule, ion, or atom or an assembly thereof
noticeably appears in the formation range (the range from 7500
cm.sup.-1 to 6100 cm.sup.-1 in the example in FIG. 98) of the
absorption band corresponding to water alone is also included in
the scope of "optical property change relating to water" in the
present exemplary embodiment. Furthermore, an optical property
change relating to an absorption band formed not only in the 1st
overtone of water illustrated in FIG. 98 but also the 2nd overtone,
the 3rd or subsequent overtone, or the combination corresponding to
water is also included in the scope of the present exemplary
embodiment. An electromagnetic wave or light having a wavelength
(or wavenumber) included in the wavelength band (or wavenumber
band) of the absorption band relating to water has a feature of
"being absorbed in a water molecule to easily cause a local
temperature increase". Therefore, an electromagnetic wave or light
having a wavelength (or wavenumber) included in the wavelength band
(or wavenumber band) of the absorption band relating to water is
applied to cause a local temperature increase in the life object,
thus further exercising life activity control by the method
described in chapter 12 or 13 or section 14.1 or 14.3. As the
method of detecting or controlling the "optical property change
relating to water", the method described in section 6.3 with
reference to FIGS. 23 to 30, the method described in section 12.1
with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, or the method described in
chapter 16 with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103 is available. At the
same time, the method described in section 6.2 with reference to
FIGS. 20 to 22 may be used as the method of alignment in the life
object. By implementing the above-mentioned features, it is
possible to detect or control, from an optical property change or a
magnetic property change relating to water in the life object, a
biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical
change, a proximity frequency change between specific molecules
(atoms), a temporary structural change of a life object constituent
molecule, or a metabolic activity in the life object. Since a life
object including a human is composed of a wide variety of
macromolecules, the amount of optical property change or magnetic
property change in the part where a biochemical reaction, a
temporary chemical change or physiochemical change, a proximity
frequency change between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary
structural change of a life object constituent molecule, or a
metabolic activity in the life object occurs is very small. To
directly detect this, a detector with very high sensitivity is
required, leading to a higher price of life activity detection
device. On the other hand, in the case where "a biochemical
reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical change, a
proximity frequency change between specific molecules (atoms), a
temporary structural change of a life object constituent molecule,
or a metabolic activity in the life object causes a change in
surrounding water molecule state (e.g. hydrogen bonding state) or
water property" and "induces a unique (i.e. different in property)
optical property change or magnetic property change according to
the change of the water molecule state or the water property", a
very large optical property change or magnetic property change
occurs because a large amount of water molecules are included in
the life object. This has an advantageous effect that the optical
property change or magnetic property change relating to water can
be accurately and stably detected by a photodetector with
relatively low sensitivity (low price). Regarding a method of
detecting an optical property relating to water and measuring a
state about a life object, there is a report from Tsenkova (U.S.
Pat. No. 7,570,357 B2 and Japanese Patent No. 4,710,012). In this
report, however, the method is used only for static analysis
(determination or property measurement of each component that does
not change with time) such as estimation of component concentration
in milk, determination of coffee or sugar granule diameter, or
identification of a metal molecule in a prion protein. The present
exemplary embodiment is significantly different from the cited
document in that "detection of a life activity that changes with
time" such as a biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical change
or physiochemical change, a proximity frequency change between
specific molecules (atoms), or a temporary structural change of a
life object constituent molecule is performed. In the cited
document, a perturbation for activating water is provided from
outside such as by "applying a voltage of 10 V from outside" or
"repeatedly applying light from outside a plurality of times". The
present exemplary embodiment is also different from the cited
document in that an optical property change caused by a spontaneous
activity in the life object is passively detected without applying
an active operation for activating water from outside. The present
exemplary embodiment also differs from the cited document in that
the detection target is a fixed specific position (e.g. in a cell)
such as a neuron or a striated muscle cell in a life object, while
the detection target is a fluid such as milk, coffee, or sugar in
the known technique in the cited document. In particular, the
present exemplary embodiment has a unique feature of detecting a
biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical
change, a proximity frequency change between specific molecules
(atoms), a temporary structural change of a life object constituent
molecule, or the like based on a temporal change of a bonding or
dissociation state between molecules in the life object (including
an anion or a cation such as a chlorine ion) or a temporal change
of macroscopic bonding frequency or dissociation frequency such as
a change in ionization degree.
[1536] The following describes the range of "optimal property
relating to water". As illustrated in the example in FIG. 98, the
absorption band corresponding to ammonium dihydrogen phosphate and
the absorption band corresponding to water overlap around the
wavenumber of 6314 cm.sup.-1. In the present exemplary embodiment,
there is a need to clarify whether or not this overlapping region
is included in the "range of optical property relating to water"
(in conclusion, the region is included in the "range of optical
property relating to water"). From the reference tone of
deformation vibration of water to the high-order overtones or
combinations, absorption bands corresponding to water are scattered
over a wide range from 1595 cm.sup.-1 to 11032 cm.sup.-1.
Typically, in the range of the 1st overtone or more of telescopic
vibration, there is a large vibration frequency shift of hydrogen
bonded molecular species with respect to non-hydrogen bonded
molecular species. For resolution, the above-mentioned range is
considered to be quantitatively excellent for detection (Yukihiro
Ozaki and Satoshi Kawata (Ed.): Kinsekigai bunkouhou (Gakkai
Shuppan Center, 1996), p. 128 and p. 112). As illustrated in FIGS.
93, 94, and 98, the absorption band corresponding to the 1st
overtone of water molecule telescopic vibration extends to about
6100 cm.sup.-1. In summary, in the present exemplary embodiment,
the "range of optical property relating to water" in a broad sense
is a signal detection range obtained by near infrared light
included in the range of the wavenumber band from 6100 cm.sup.-1 to
11032 cm.sup.-1 (the wavelength band from 1.64 to 0.906 .mu.m). An
absorption band of a combination where telescopic vibration and
deformation vibration of water are complicatedly combined is also
included in the above-mentioned range. In the case of checking the
state of hydrogen bonding between water molecules, detection can be
more easily performed by using not the absorption band of
deformation vibration but the change in absorption band
corresponding to simple combination (including the nth overtone) of
only telescopic vibration with a large molar absorption
coefficient. As illustrated in FIGS. 93, 94, and 98, in the
absorption band range corresponding to the 1st overtone of water
molecule telescopic vibration, a detection signal is easily
obtained using near infrared light included in the range of the
wavenumber band from 6100 cm.sup.-1 to 7500 cm.sup.-1 (the
wavelength band from 1.64 to 1.33 .mu.m). Regarding the absorption
spectrum described in the document by Ozaki et al. (Yukihiro Ozaki
and Satoshi Kawata (Ed.): Kinsekigai bunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan
Center, 1996), p. 193 and p. 217), the absorption band range
corresponding to the 2nd overtone of water molecule telescopic
vibration is from 9000 cm.sup.-1 to 11400 cm.sup.-1 (the wavelength
range from 1.11 to 0.877 .mu.m). Hence, in the present exemplary
embodiment, the "range of optical property relating to water" in a
narrow sense may be a signal detection range obtained by near
infrared light included in the range of the wavenumber band from
6100 cm.sup.-1 to 7500 cm.sup.-1 (the wavelength band from 1.64 to
1.33 .mu.m) or the range of the wavenumber band from 9000 cm.sup.-1
to 11400 cm.sup.-1 (the wavelength band from 1.11 to 0.877 .mu.m).
The above-mentioned narrow range indicates a range including the
foot part of the absorption band corresponding to water. Especially
in FIG. 98, the light absorption property significantly changes in
the foot part of the absorption band corresponding to water,
indicating that the above-mentioned range setting is appropriate.
However, only the model experimental results using very simple
samples are illustrated in FIGS. 93, 94, and 98, and in actuality
absorption bands corresponding to various functional groups
included in the life object are detected in an overlapping manner.
For accurate detection by reducing the influence of absorption
bands corresponding to other functional groups, there are cases
where only the part in which the absorption intensity is high is
used in detection without using the foot part of the absorption
band corresponding to water. In such cases, the "range of optical
property relating to water" may be a signal detection range
obtained by near infrared light included in the range of the
wavelength band from 1.523 to 1.394 .mu.m (the wavenumber range
from 6566 cm.sup.-1 to 7174 cm.sup.-1) or the range of the
wavelength band from 1.028 to 0.943 .mu.m (the wavenumber range
from 9728 cm.sup.-1 to 10604 cm.sup.-1), as described in section
11.4 with reference to FIG. 56.
15.6) Study of Principle of Detecting Fatigue State in Life
Object
[1537] For example, the degree of fatigue such as "stiff shoulder"
is qualitatively determined by massage or finger pressure. Muscle
fatigue of the limbs or muscle fatigue of the viscera, on the other
hand, is hard to be quantitatively measured from outside. This can
lead to a situation where a person overuses muscles and damages his
or her health without noticing a serious fatigue state. In the case
where muscle fatigue is excessive, the person does not have
strength in the muscles despite his or her intention, which could
result in an unexpected accident. If the degree of muscle fatigue
can be measured contactlessly and easily and the result can be
appropriately recognized by the person or a related party, health
management and prevention of serious accidents can be achieved. In
particular, an athlete (sports person) is in elevated mood before a
game, and hardly notices muscle fatigue. There is a high
possibility of losing the game due to this fatigue. If the athlete
(sports person) or his or her manager or coach is able to
quantitatively determine the fatigue part or the fatigue state
before the game, the fatigue can be addressed beforehand, enabling
the athlete to show his or her full strength in the game. Thus, the
capability of quantitative determination of the fatigue part or the
fatigue state greatly benefits the athlete (sports person) and his
or her manager or coach. Regarding the muscle fatigue, it is
conventionally known that "fatigue results when a large amount of
lactic acid remains without being released", where the lactic acid
is an end product in the glycolytic system necessary for ATP
supplement in cells. Though many theories that deny this are
presented recently, the lactic acid is used here as a "fatigue
causative substance" to propose a fatigue detection model (through
description of another exemplary embodiment). Even in the case
where the lactic acid is not the "fatigue causative substance", if
another "fatigue causative substance" stays in a cell for a long
time without being released and causes fatigue, the fatigue
position and degree can be quantitatively detected based on the
principle (present exemplary embodiment) described below.
[1538] A "mechanism that the lactic acid (or fatigue causative
substance) can stay in a cell for a long time" is considered here.
A continuation time of bonding (hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding)
between an anion (in the case where a halogen ion such as a
chlorine ion is included in an anion in a broad sense) and a cation
in water as described so far in this chapter 15 is very short, and
the anion and the cation dissociate immediately. This "short-time
bonding" is implied by the expression "temporary
chemical/physiochemical change, temporary structural change, or
biochemical reaction" in the description of the present exemplary
embodiment. A numeric example of the continuation time is given
below. In relation to the series of experiments described in
sections 15.2 to 15.5, the duration of the bonding state of choline
chloride in water is measured in cooperation with Toray Research
Center, Inc. An NMR measurement method is used in this experiment.
As a result, the duration in which the choline chloride maintains
the bonding state in water is "not more than the order of
microseconds". Thus, though the expression "bonding (hydrogen
bonding or ionic bonding) between an anion (in the case where a
halogen ion such as a chlorine ion is included in an anion in a
broad sense) and a cation" is used in the description of sections
15.2 to 15.5, the bonding does not continue for a long time, and so
an alternative expression "the frequency of bonding between an
anion and a cation is high" or "the frequency of proximity between
an anion and a cation to change the optical property is high" may
be more precise. In detail, a chlorine ion and a choline cation
constantly move in water and repeatedly approach to or separate
away from each other. When the chlorine ion and the choline cation
are closest to each other, the absorption spectrum (optical
property) changes as illustrated in FIGS. 90 and 91. Accordingly,
the explanation "the state in which the chlorine ion and the
choline cation are closest to each other in water is referred to as
the bonding between the anion and the cation for convenience's
sake" may be more realistic. Moreover, as with the definition of
the ionization degree in water, it may be more precise to use the
expression "high or low frequency (probability) of the state where
the chlorine ion and the choline cation are closest to each other
in water to change the optical property", and refer to the state of
the high frequency as "the bonding state between the anion and the
cation in water" and the state of the low frequency as "the
separation (dissociation) state between the anion and the cation in
water" for convenience's sake. As a concrete example where the most
proximate state (temporary bonding state) occurs between an ionized
primary amine (--N.sup.+H.sub.3) and a carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-)
in water, temporary bonding between Serotonin and its receptor is
described in section 15.1. This type of most proximate state
(temporary bonding state) is also known to have a very short
continuation time. An action mechanism of a drug called SSRI
(selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor) famous in the field of
psychiatry lies in that Serotonin which has moved away from a
receptor is prevented from re-bonding in order to prolong the
substantial bonding time between the Serotonin and the receptor.
The need of such an action mechanism also demonstrates that the
bonding time (most proximate state continuation time) between
Serotonin and its receptor is short.
[1539] As illustrated in FIG. 99, the lactic acid includes a
carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-). It is estimated that, since this part
is trapped, the lactic acid stays in the cell for a long time
without being released to outside. Most parts of a muscle cell are
occupied by a protein, and so there is a high possibility that the
carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-) is trapped in some part of the protein
for a long time. However, even if Lysine temporarily traps the
lactic acid, the lactic acid soon dissociates because the
continuation time of bonding (the duration of the closest distance)
between the ionized primary amine (--N.sup.+H.sub.3) in the Lysine
and the carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-) is very short. Thus, in the
bonding (most proximate state) between the lactic acid and the
Lysine, it is difficult to keep the lactic acid in the cell for a
long time. Arginine is the only amino acid that constitutes a
protein and has a larger positive charge than Lysine, and there is
a possibility that the bonding (hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding,
or continuous most proximate state) between the lactic acid (or
other fatigue causative substance) and the Arginine relates to
fatigue. FIG. 99 illustrates a molecular structure model of a part
where the lactic acid is trapped, based on this assumption. In FIG.
99, a lactic acid 912 indicates the molecular structure of the
lactic acid, and an Arginine 913 indicates the molecular structure
of the Arginine. In the model illustrated in FIG. 99, a hydrogen
bond (an ionic bond or a state of maintaining the closest distance)
to the carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-) in the lactic acid 912 is
formed at the tip of the Arginine 913. A primary amine (charged
amino group) is attached to the tip of the Arginine 913, as with
the Lysine. Since a double bond (designated by the mark "=") is
formed between a nitrogen atom in the primary amine and its
adjacent carbon atom, the positive charge is stabilized by
resonance, and the positive charge amount is very high. When this
situation is applied to the table in FIG. 86, it is estimated that
the N--H distance is much shorter than 1.031 .ANG. and the H--O
distance is longer than 1.732 .ANG. because the net atomic charge
of the nitrogen atom is very high. As a result, in the molecular
structure model illustrated in FIG. 99, the upper aperture of the
concave shape as the potential property indicating the total energy
difference V of the whole molecule with respect to a positional
change of a hydrogen atom in a hydrogen bonding part 911 is narrow,
and the value of .kappa..sub.2 is relatively large. Thus, in the
case where the situation of the molecular structure model
illustrated in FIG. 99 occurs, the center position (maximum light
absorption wavenumber or corresponding wavelength) of the
absorption band generated responsively is expected to have a unique
value different from other situations (i.e. the state illustrated
in FIG. 99 can be independently detected from the light absorption
spectrum). This value is larger than the maximum light absorption
wavenumber (longer in wavelength) of the absorption band generated
when the ionized primary amine (--N.sup.+H.sub.3) at the tip of the
Lysine and the carboxyl group (--COO.sup.-) are temporarily bonded
(hydrogen bond or ionic bond, or most proximate arrangement).
Therefore, a part in the life object where many absorption bands
having the above-mentioned maximum light absorption wavenumber
appear can be determined as seriously fatigued, and the degree of
fatigue can be quantitatively estimated by measuring the light
absorption amount of the absorption bands.
[1540] The following describes a control method concerning recovery
from fatigue in the present applied embodiment. Provided that the
situation where the lactic acid 912 (or the fatigue causative
substance) is trapped in the cell without being released relates to
fatigue as described above, control for recovery from fatigue may
be performed by releasing the trapped lactic acid 912 (or fatigue
causative substance) by operation from outside. A concrete method
is described below. When the hydrogen bonding part 911 between the
lactic acid 912 (or fatigue causative substance) and the tip of the
Arginine residue 913 illustrated in FIG. 99 is illuminated with
near infrared light having an intrinsic wavelength corresponding to
the 1st overtone or more, the hydrogen atom H in the hydrogen
bonding part 911 absorbs energy of the near infrared light and
vibrates significantly. This decreases the bonding force of the
hydrogen bonding part 911, thus facilitating dissociation between
the lactic acid 912 and the Arginine 913. The lactic acid 912
dissociated from the Arginine 913 and cleared from the trap is
released from the cell, as a result of which fatigue is cured. To
facilitate dissociation of the lactic acid 912 from the Arginine
913, it is necessary to apply sufficiently large energy to the
hydrogen bonding part 911 from outside. As is clear from eq.
(A.cndot.60), the intrinsic wavelength (specific wavelength) light
applied to the hydrogen bonding part 911 from outside is desirably
the 1 st overtone (m=2) higher in supplied energy than the
reference tone (m=1), the 2nd overtone or more (m.gtoreq.3) even
higher in energy, or a combination. Applying the intrinsic
wavelength light (or light having an intrinsic wavenumber)
corresponding to the absorption band corresponding to the hydrogen
bonding part 911 in this way enables external control for recovery
from fatigue. The important point here lies in that the absorption
band corresponding to the hydrogen bonding part 911 has a unique
intrinsic wavenumber (or intrinsic wavelength) different from other
absorption bands (see the description in section 15.2 with
reference to FIG. 86). This reduces the risk that the intrinsic
wavelength light applied to the inside of the life object is
absorbed by other life activity portions and affects other life
activities (since the center wavenumber/center wavelength of the
absorption band generated in relation to any other life activity is
different from the wavenumber/wavelength of light applied for
control for recovery from fatigue, the light is not absorbed in the
absorption band corresponding to the other life activity (=function
selectivity of intrinsic wavelength light or wavenumber light)). In
addition, the light applied for control for recovery from fatigue
is selectively absorbed only by the hydrogen bonding part 911 and
is not absorbed by the lactic acid 912 and the Arginine 913 (action
location selectivity). Therefore, the risk that the lactic acid 912
and the Arginine 913 are damaged (e.g. the molecular structure is
destroyed) by illumination with the intrinsic wavelength light is
low. Thus, the intrinsic wavelength light (or light having the
intrinsic wavenumber) applied for control for recovery from fatigue
has the action location selectivity and the function selectivity in
the life object. This has an advantageous effect of performing
control for recovery from fatigue without affecting other life
activities.
15.7) Detection of Other Enzyme Catalysis
[1541] The occurrence of an optical property change (generation of
an absorption band having a unique wavenumber or wavelength or a
resulting absorption spectrum change of water) caused by temporary
bonding (hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding, or state of maintaining
the closest distance) between Lysine in a protein and the tip of
Arginine has been described up to section 15.6. The following
describes that, in relation to detection of other enzyme catalysis,
temporary bonding (hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding, or state of
maintaining the closest distance) also occurs in Histidine in a
protein and as a result the optical property changes.
[1542] According to the report by Taylor et al. (P. Taylor: Journal
of Biological chemistry Vol. 266 (1991) p. 4025-4028 & P.
Taylor and Z. Radic: Annual Review of Pharmacology Vol. 34 (1994)
p. 281-320) and the report by Sussman et al. (J. L. Sussman et.
al.: Science Vol. 253 (1991) p. 872-879), serine exists in an
active site of Acetylcholine-esterase which is an
Acetylcholine-degrading enzyme and, when the serine is bonded to
the acetyl group of the Acetylcholine, the Acetylcholine is
degraded into acetic acid and choline. According to the reports,
Histidine and glutamic acid are also arranged in the active site of
the Acetylcholine-esterase in addition to the serine. When the
charge (whether positive or negative charge) of each part is taken
into account, it is assumed that, when the acetyl group in the
Acetylcholine is bonded to the serine, the choline group in the
Acetylcholine is simultaneously bonded to the glutamic acid. Given
that [1] the Histidine is positioned between the serine and the
glutamic acid in the active site of the Acetylcholine-esterase and
[2] the process of the Acetylcholine degrading into the acetic acid
and the choline is "hydrolysis reaction" (one water molecule is
newly added to generate the acetic acid and the choline), the
Histidine is estimated to play the role of attracting one water
molecule and degrading the Acetylcholine into the acetic acid and
the choline. According to the description of the ATP hydrolysis
mechanism in section 11.3 with reference to FIG. 58 and the
description of the PKA phosphorylation reaction mechanism in
section 13.4 with reference to FIG. 72, when the Histidine plays
the above-mentioned role, the Histidine is directly bonded
(hydrogen bonded) to the water molecule (oxygen atom in the water
molecule) or a specific atom (e.g. oxygen atom forming the skeleton
of the Acetylcholine) in the Acetylcholine. When the Histidine is
bonded (hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding, or state of maintaining
the closest distance) to another atom, an absorption band having an
intrinsic center wavenumber (wavelength) is expected to be
generated temporarily. By detecting this absorption band, the
enzyme reaction (catalysis) of the Acetylcholine-esterase can be
determined. At around pH7 in the life object, a residue of
Histidine is only slightly positively charged, and so the
electrostatic attraction for attracting other atoms is not very
strong. Moreover, the hydrogen bonding-involved part in the residue
of Histidine is a secondary amine (>N--H). However, in the
hydrogen bonding part of the Histidine, the "distance between the
hydrogen atomic nucleus and the oxygen atomic nucleus" is likely to
be shorter than that in the hydrogen bonding part in the .alpha.
helix and the .beta. sheet. Accordingly, the center wavenumber
(wavelength) of the absorption band temporarily generated when the
Histidine is bonded (hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding, or state of
maintaining the closest distance) to another atom is approximately
close to or slightly smaller (longer in wavelength) than the center
wavenumber (wavelength) of the absorption band corresponding to the
hydrogen bonding part in the .alpha. helix and the .beta.
sheet.
15.8) Detection Range or Control Range of Life Activity in Present
Exemplary Embodiment
[1543] The following describes a method of detecting or controlling
a secretory activity of an intercellular signal transmitter, as
another applied embodiment not described so far. According to Fujii
et al. (Hiroyuki Fujii & Masahiro Hayashi: Chozai to Joho, Vol.
16, No. 7 (2010) p. 59-64), upon insulin secretion from a
pancreatic .beta. cell, the pancreatic .beta. cell is temporarily
depolarized. That is, when the ATP concentration increases in the
pancreatic .beta. cell, the gate of an ATP-sensing K.sup.+ channel
is opened to create the depolarization state. As a result, the gate
of a voltage-gated Ca.sup.2+ channel arranged in the pancreatic
.beta. cell membrane is opened, causing Ca.sup.2+ ion influx from
outside the pancreatic .beta. cell. Concurrently, when the cAMP
(cyclic-adenosine monophosphate) concentration increases in the
pancreatic .beta. cell, insulin is secreted from inside the
pancreatic .beta. cell to outside. Upon depolarization, a chlorine
ion is attached (hydrogen bonded) to PCLN or SMLN and becomes
detectable from outside, as described earlier in section 3.2 with
reference to FIG. 4. Furthermore, the secretion of the
intercellular signal transmitter (e.g. insulin) can be promoted or
inhibited using the method described in section 12.3 with reference
to FIG. 68.
[1544] The above describes the exemplary embodiment of detection
and control concerning, for example: enzyme catalysis (action of
choline-esterase or kinase); release of an intercellular
transmitter such as hormone; light emission involving a neuron or
signal transmission (through an axon); neuron suppression (chlorine
ion influx); muscle contraction and relaxation; temporary bonding
between a transmitter substance and a receptor; protein tertiary
structural change (increase/decrease of .alpha. helix and .beta.
sheet conformation); memory and obliteration; intracellular signal
transmission cascade; protein synthesis; gene expression; and
fatigue. However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited
to such, and detection or control for any phenomenon in which an
optical property change or a magnetic property change such as a
nuclear magnetic resonance or an electromagnetic property change
occurs in relation to a biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical
change or physiochemical change, a proximity frequency change
between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary structural change
of a life object constituent molecule, or a metabolic activity in a
life object is also included in the scope of the present exemplary
embodiment. In particular, detection or control for any phenomenon
relating to temporary bonding (or a state of being in proximity to
each other) and separation (or a state of being away from each
other) between an ion such as an anion or a cation and a molecule
or between molecules as a biochemical reaction, a temporary
chemical change or physiochemical change, a proximity frequency
change between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary structural
change of a life object constituent molecule, or a metabolic
activity in a life object is included in the scope of the present
exemplary embodiment. Detection or control for any phenomenon in
which an optical property change or a magnetic property change such
as a nuclear magnetic resonance or an electromagnetic property
change occurs between the above-mentioned two states (bonding and
separation, or proximity and dissociation) is also included in the
scope of the present exemplary embodiment. As the method of life
activity detection or control, the method described in section 6.3
with reference to FIG. 24 or 26, the method described in section
6.3.3 with reference to FIG. 30, or the method described in section
12.1 with reference to FIG. 66 or 67 is available.
15.9) Application Range of Description Method/Processing Method
Relating to Life Activity Detection and Service Using Life Activity
Information
[1545] This specification mainly includes the following two types
of exemplary embodiments: [1546] life activity detection and life
activity control, including life activity measurement for obtaining
life activity information by analyzing data obtained as a result of
the life activity detection; and [1547] service provision method,
signal transfer (information communication) method, notification
method, processing method, description method, program, display
method, etc. indicating processes or activities utilizing the
result of life activity detection/measurement or the contents of
life activity control. The scope of the present exemplary
embodiment regarding the former "life activity
detection/measurement and life activity control" has been described
in section 15.8. Section 15.9 describes the scope of the present
exemplary embodiment regarding the latter aspect.
[1548] The contents of application (or relevant contents) of the
life activity detection/measurement and life activity control
included in the scope described in section 15.8 are all included in
the scope of the present exemplary embodiment, regardless of
whether a service provision method, a signal transfer (information
communication) method, a notification method, a processing method,
a description method, a program, or a display method is used. This
is not a limit, and any process or activity (e.g. a service
provision method, a signal transfer (information communication)
method, a notification method, a processing method, a description
method, a program, a display method, etc.) using (or relating to) a
surface temperature of a life object obtained by a temperature
measurement device such as a thermography or a body temperature in
the life object obtained by a thermometer, a potential change in
the life object measurable by an electroencephalograph, an
electrocardiogram, or the like, a composition (relative content)
analysis result or component analysis result for each constituent
molecule in the life object such as an oxygen concentration change
in blood or a blood sugar level, or a magnetic property in the life
object such as fMRI as described in section 6.1 with reference to
Table 6 is also included in the scope of the present exemplary
embodiment regarding the latter aspect. In addition, any process or
activity (e.g. a service provision method, a signal transfer
(information communication) method, a notification method, a
processing method, a description method, a program, a display
method, etc.) using (or relating to) information of a heart rate, a
pulse rate, a respiration rate, the number of steps (pedometer), or
the like obtained as a result of life activity detection is also
included in the scope of the present exemplary embodiment regarding
the latter aspect.
16] Life Activity Detection Method Based on Plural Wavelength
Property
16.1) Basic Principle of Life Activity Detection Based on Plural
Wavelength Property
[1549] The life activity detection (or control) method has been
described in each of section 6.3.1 with reference to FIG. 23,
section 6.3.2 with reference to FIG. 26, and section 12.1 with
reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. In these methods, life activity
detection (or control) can be performed using monochromatic light
(light including only a single specific wavelength). The
relationships between such methods and a biochemical reaction, a
temporary chemical change or physiochemical change, a proximity
frequency change between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary
structural change of a life object constituent molecule, or a
metabolic activity in the life object are described first. As
described in chapters 4, 5, 11, 12, 13, and 15, an optical property
change or a magnetic property change such as a nuclear magnetic
resonance or an electromagnetic property change occurs in the life
object, in relation to part of a biochemical reaction, a temporary
chemical change or physiochemical change, a proximity frequency
change between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary structural
change of a life object constituent molecule, or a metabolic
activity in the life object. An example of this is described below,
with reference to FIG. 90. When the frequency of bonding (or
proximity) between a chlorine ion and a choline cation in water
increases temporarily, the absorption amount of near infrared light
around 5999 cm.sup.-1 (1.667 .mu.m in wavelength) increases, as
illustrated in FIG. 90. Accordingly, if a local area in the life
object to be detected is illuminated with monochromatic light
around a wavelength of 1.67 .mu.m, a large amount of light is
absorbed in the choline chloride pair, as a result of which the
amount of reflection light or transmission light decreases
temporarily. Thus, the change in amount (temporal change) of
reflection light or transmission light around a wavelength of 1.667
.mu.m can be detected by the above-mentioned method. (Moreover,
life activity control can be performed by using center wavelength
light of an absorption band corresponding to a hydrogen bonding
part in an .alpha. helix as described in section 12.3 with
reference to FIG. 68 and section 13.3 with reference to FIG. 71,
instead of using an absorption band corresponding to a hydrogen
bonding part in the choline chloride pair.) In the case of life
activity detection using only monochromatic light around a
wavelength of 1.67 .mu.m, however, there is a risk of a detection
error due to spike noise mixed in from outside, because the signal
change direction 863 is always the same as described with reference
to FIG. 80. As illustrated in FIG. 90, when the frequency of
bonding (or proximity) between the chlorine ion and the choline
cation in water increases temporarily, the absorption amount of
near infrared light around 6026 cm.sup.-1 (1.659 .mu.m in
wavelength) decreases. There is a typical tendency that, when the
frequency of bonding (or proximity) between an anion and a cation
in water increases, the center wavenumber (or wavelength) of the
corresponding absorption band shifts from the absorption band
corresponding to the functional group before the bonding (during
separation). When a biochemical reaction, a chemical/physiochemical
change, metabolism, or a proximity frequency change between
specific molecules (atoms) in the life object temporarily occurs in
this way, a new absorption band appears at a position shifted from
an absorption band before the reaction or change, as a result of
which a wavenumber range (wavelength range) where light absorption
increases and a wavenumber range (wavelength range) where light
absorption decreases always appear simultaneously in the difference
property between the two absorption spectra. This typical tendency
is also commonly seen in FIGS. 89, 91, 93, 94, and 98. Therefore,
by detecting the change in amount (temporal change) of reflection
light or transmission light around a wavelength of 1.659 .mu.m
(6026 cm.sup.-1 in wavenumber) simultaneously with a wavelength of
1.667 .mu.m mentioned above, the detection accuracy and the
detection reliability can be remarkably improved. This method of
detecting changes in amount of reflection light or transmission
light of different wavenumber ranges (wavelength ranges), which are
obtained from a fixed local area in a life object, is referred to
as "life activity detection based on plural wavelength property" in
the present exemplary embodiment. In the present exemplary
embodiment, the fixed local area in the life object is often made
up of one or more cells. These cells may be limited to neurons,
muscle cells, and the like.
[1550] The life activity detection method based on plural
wavelength property described in this chapter 16 is not an
exemplary embodiment completely different from the exemplary
embodiments described earlier with reference to FIGS. 23, 26, 66,
and 67 but is a more detailed embodiment or an embodiment of small
improvement based on the foregoing exemplary embodiments. In
detail, in the exemplary embodiments described with reference to
FIGS. 23, 26, 66, and 67, light of a plurality of wavenumbers
(wavelengths) may be included in the optical path 33 of the
detection light or the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity, where the photo detecting cell
54 or 55, the photodetector 36, or the detecting section 101 for
life activity detects the light of the different wavenumber ranges
(wavelength ranges) separately. As a method of separately detecting
the light of the different wavenumber ranges (wavelength ranges),
the wavelength dependence of the diffraction angle of a grating 53
may be used as described in detail in section 16.3, or detection
signals may be synchronized while time-varying the wavenumber
(wavelength) in the optical path 33 of the detection light or the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(periodically varying the wavenumber (wavelength) on a time axis)
as described in detail in section 16.4. Thus, the method described
in section 6.2 is available as an alignment and preservation method
of detected/controlled point for life activity which is executed
concurrently with the life activity detection based on plural
wavelength property described in this chapter 16. Even in the case
where the life activity detection method based on plural wavelength
property described in chapter 16 is used, the detecting section 101
for life activity or its relevant circuit and the transmitting
section of a life activity detection signal illustrated in FIGS. 31
to 35 are equally used. Analysis, information transfer, services,
etc. utilizing the life activity detection result described with
reference to FIG. 23, 26, 66, or 67 have been described earlier,
and the detection result obtained by the life activity detection
method based on plural wavelength property described in chapter 16
may be used in such analysis, information transfer, services,
etc.
[1551] Basic features of the "life activity detection method based
on plural wavelength property" which is also applicable in the
exemplary embodiment described with reference to FIG. 23, 26, 66,
or 67 are described below, with reference to FIG. 100. The "life
activity detection method based on plural wavelength property" has
the following three main features:
[1552] [1] a detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point)
845 for life activity in a life object is illuminated with light of
a plurality of different wavelengths;
[1553] [2] the photodetector 36 separately detects the light of the
plurality of different wavelengths obtained from the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity in the life object; and
[1554] [3] individual detection signals obtained from the light of
the plurality of different wavelengths detected by the
photodetector 36 are subjected to a computing process.
Regarding [1], the light of the plurality of wavelengths may be
simultaneously included in the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity that is applied to the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity in the life object as described here with reference to
FIG. 100, or the light of the plurality of different wavelengths
may be sequentially applied through time though only short
wavelength light (or narrow-band wavelength light) is included at
one time (corresponding to the description in section 16.3).
Regarding [2], the photodetector 36 may simultaneously detect the
light of the plurality of different wavelengths as described here
with reference to FIG. 100, or the photodetector 36 may detect only
short wavelength light (or narrow-band wavelength light) at one
time and sequentially detect the light of the plurality of
different wavelengths through time (corresponding to the
description in section 16.3). The method described here with
reference to FIG. 100 corresponds to the former method, where
different photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. to 38-.epsilon. in the
photodetector 36 simultaneously detect the light of the different
wavelengths separately.
[1555] Other features of the "life activity detection method based
on plural wavelength property" are described below, with reference
to FIG. 100. The light emitting component 111 illustrated in FIG.
100 simultaneously emits light of a plurality of different
wavelengths, and only light included in a specific wavelength range
is selected by a color filter 851 and used as the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity. This specific
wavelength range is appropriately set according to the purpose of
life activity detection or life activity control. As an example, in
the case of detecting an action potential phenomenon or a signal
transmission state relating to a neuron, the specific wavelength
range may be set to a range from 6200 cm.sup.-1 to 5600 cm.sup.-1
(1.61 .mu.m to 1.79 .mu.m in wavelength) as illustrated in FIG. 90
or 91, allowing only light in this wavelength range to pass through
the color filter 851. As another example, in the case of detecting,
from an optical property change of water, a biochemical reaction, a
temporary chemical change or physiochemical change, a proximity
frequency change between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary
structural change of a life object constituent molecule, or a
metabolic activity in the life object, the specific wavelength
range is: [1556] a range from 7500 cm.sup.-1 to 6100 cm.sup.-1
(1.33 .mu.m to 1.64 .mu.m in wavelength) as illustrated in FIG. 93,
94, or 98, in the case of using an absorption band corresponding to
the 1 st overtone of water; and [1557] a range from 9000 cm.sup.-1
to 11400 cm.sup.-1 (1.11 .mu.m to 0.877 .mu.m in wavelength) as
described in section 15.5, in the case of using an absorption band
corresponding to the 2nd overtone of water, allowing only light in
this wavelength range to pass through the color filter 851.
Limiting the wavelength range included in the electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity by the color filter 851
in this way has an advantageous effect of improving the accuracy
and reliability of life activity detection or life activity
control. Here, in the case of performing only life activity
detection, the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity which is applied to the part (e.g. the examinee's
head or chest) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled may be
diverging light (does not necessarily need to be converging light
or diverging light) as illustrated in FIG. 100. In the case of
performing life activity control concurrently with life activity
detection, on the other hand, it is desirable to concentrate the
light at the detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point)
845 for life activity and also intermittently increase the light
emission amount as illustrated in FIG. 66 or 67.
[1558] The detection system also has a feature that a pinhole 853
as a member for extracting only the specific electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity is placed at an image
forming point (confocal position), through the objective lens 31,
of the detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845
for life activity in the part (e.g. the examinee's head or chest)
600 of the organism to be detected/controlled. Such placement of
the member for extracting only the specific electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity at the image forming
point (confocal position) with respect to the detected/controlled
point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity where the
life activity detection target exists has an advantageous effect of
efficiently detecting life activity in the fixed specific position
(the detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for
life activity) in the life object (inside the part (e.g. the
examinee's head or chest) 600 of the organism). Besides, since the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
which is not subjected to detection is blocked by the extraction
member (the pinhole 853), an unwanted signal not to be detected can
be removed, which has an advantageous effect of improving the S/N
ratio of the life activity detection signal and enabling accurate
and stable life activity detection. The electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity which has passed through the
extraction member (the pinhole 853) is converted to parallel light
by a condensing lens 852-1. The electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity is then wavelength-separated by
a Fresnel grating 922. Here, the conversion to parallel light by
the converging lens 852-1 has an advantageous effect of improving
the wavelength separation efficiency.
[1559] The electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity which is applied to the part (e.g. the examinee's head or
chest) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled is limited in
wavelength range by the color filter 851. However, in the case
where life activity detection or life activity control is performed
not in a dark room but in a bright place, surrounding light passes
through the objective lens 31, and a small part of the surrounding
light passes through the pinhole 853 and adversely affects life
activity detection as disturbance light. To remove this adverse
effect, only light in a specific wavelength range is allowed to
pass through by a band-pass filter 921. The specific wavelength
range allowed to pass through by the band-pass filter 921 may be
similar to the property of the color filter 851 mentioned above.
That is, the specific wavelength range is appropriately set
according to the purpose of life activity detection or life
activity control. As an example, in the case of detecting an action
potential phenomenon or a signal transmission state relating to a
neuron, the specific wavelength range may be set to a range from
6200 cm.sup.-1 to 5600 cm.sup.-1 (1.61 .mu.m to 1.79 .mu.m in
wavelength) as illustrated in FIG. 90 or 91, allowing only light in
this wavelength range to pass through the band-pass filter 921. As
another example, in the case of detecting, from an optical property
change of water, a biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical
change or physiochemical change, a proximity frequency change
between specific molecules (atoms), a temporary structural change
of a life object constituent molecule, or a metabolic activity in
the life object, the specific wavelength range is: [1560] a range
from 7500 cm.sup.-1 to 6100 cm.sup.-1 (1.33 itn to 1.64 .mu.m in
wavelength) as illustrated in FIG. 93, 94, or 98, in the case of
using an absorption band corresponding to the 1st overtone of
telescopic vibration of water; and [1561] a range from 9000
cm.sup.-1 to 11400 cm.sup.-1 (1.11 .mu.m to 0.877 .mu.m in
wavelength) as described in section 15.5, in the case of using an
absorption band corresponding to the 2nd overtone of telescopic
vibration of water, allowing only light in this wavelength range to
pass through the band-pass filter 921. Setting the wavelength range
of light allowed to pass through the band-pass filter 921 in this
way removes the adverse effect of disturbance light, and has an
advantageous effect of increasing the S/N ratio of the life
activity detection signal and improving the accuracy and stability
of life activity detection. In the above-mentioned example, there
is also a feature that only a near infrared range is set as the
specific wavelength range. In view of operational convenience
(operation is easier in a bright place than in a dark room) and
psychological stress on the examinee, it is desirable to perform
life activity detection or life activity control in a bright place
than in a dark room. Near infrared light corresponding to the
specific wavelength range is not visible to the operator and the
examinee. Accordingly, in the location where life activity
detection or life activity control is performed, a lighting system
that "applies only visible light and blocks near infrared light"
may be used, with only near infrared light being allowed to pass
through the band-pass filter 921. This enhances the advantageous
effect of increasing the S/N ratio of the life activity detection
signal and improving the accuracy and stability of life activity
detection. There is also a feature that the width of the wavelength
range allowed to pass through the band-pass filter 921 is very
narrow. In the above-mentioned examples, the width of wavelength
range is less than or equal to 0.31 .mu.m in all cases, i.e. 1.79
.mu.m-1.61 .mu.m=0.18 .mu.m, 1.64 .mu.m-1.33 .mu.m=0.31 .mu.m, and
1.11 .mu.m-0.877 .mu.m=0.23 .mu.m. Moreover, for example in the
case of simultaneously measuring absorption bands corresponding to
the 1st overtone to the 2nd overtone of water (or in the case of,
concurrently with this, measuring an absorption band of the 2nd
overtone corresponding to telescopic vibration of a functional
group (including a hydrogen bonding or ionic bonding state) other
than water which appears between absorption bands corresponding to
the 1st overtone to the 2nd overtone of water in the wavelength
range), there is a need to set the width of the wavelength range to
less than or equal to "1.64 .mu.m-0.877 .mu.m=0.76 .mu.m". In FIG.
100, the Fresnel grating 922 is used to disperse
(wavelength-separate) the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity. The grating 922 disperses
(wavelength-separates) the light through the use of the effect of
interference of light (Bragg's condition). This being so, if light
of a very wide wavelength range (light included in a wide
wavelength range) is incident on the grating 922, light of a
plurality of wavelengths very different from each other are
reflected in the same direction. This causes a problem that
disturbance noise is mixed in life activity detection. In the case
where, for example, an optical member with large chromatic
dispersion is used as spectroscopic (wavelength separation) means
other than the grating 922, too, there is a problem that widely
deviated light is reflected in an unexpected area and mixes in as
disturbance light. By disposing a wavelength range limiting member
(e.g. the band-pass filter 921) so that only the specific
wavelength range is dispersed (wavelength-separated) or detected as
illustrated in FIG. 100, disturbance light greatly deviated in
wavelength is prevented from mixing in, which has an advantageous
effect of increasing the S/N ratio of the life activity detection
signal and improving the accuracy and stability of life activity
detection. The wavelength range limiting member is not limited to
the band-pass filter 921, and any member (e.g. hologram, grating)
for selectively extracting only light in the specific wavelength
range achieves the same advantageous effects. The width of the
wavelength range limited by the wavelength range limiting member
may be set to less than or equal to 0.76 .mu.m (desirably, less
than or equal to 0.31 .mu.m or less than or equal to 0.23 .mu.m),
as described above. The position of the wavelength range limiting
member is not limited to the position illustrated in FIG. 100.
Basically, the wavelength range limiting member may be disposed at
any position between the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity and the
photodetector 36, though the position is desirably before the
dispersion (wavelength separation) of the Fresnel grating 922 or
the like.
[1562] As described in one of the basic features of the "life
activity detection method based on plural wavelength property":
[1563] [1] a detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point)
845 for life activity in the life object is illuminated with light
of a plurality of different wavelengths, the light of the plurality
of wavelengths (light having a plurality of different wavenumbers)
are included in the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control
of life activity which has passed through the band-pass filter 921.
To achieve another one of the basic features:
[1564] [2] the photodetector 36 separately detects the light of the
plurality of different wavelengths obtained from the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity in the life object,
an optical member for separately extracting light of each
individual wavelength (wavenumber) region from the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity which has passed
through the band-pass filter 921 is needed. Hence, the Fresnel
grating 922 is disposed in the optical path of the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity in FIG. 100. The
Fresnel grating 922 has a structure in which narrow rectangular
reflection plates are arranged at regular intervals with a specific
inclination. The electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity is reflected on the Fresnel grating 922. The
reflected electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity interferes due to this regular-interval structure, and
travels in the direction according to Bragg's condition for each
wavelength included therein. In a typical grating, the direction
according to Bragg's condition is .+-.1st-order light direction,
.+-.2nd-order light direction, or the like, where an approximately
equal amount of light travels in two symmetrical plus and minus
directions as interference light. On the other hand, the
rectangular reflection plates are inclined at a specific angle to
cause interference light to travel mainly in only one of the plus
and minus directions. This has an advantageous effect of obtaining
a large detection signal.
[1565] The following describes the third feature of the life
activity detection method based on plural wavelength property,
i.e.
[1566] [3] individual detection signals obtained from the light of
the plurality of different wavelengths detected by the
photodetector 36 are subjected to a computing process,
in detail. The photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. to 38-.epsilon.
having a photoelectric conversion function are arranged in the
photodetector 36. When the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity reaches any of these photo
detecting cells 38, the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity is photoelectrically converted
in the photo detecting cell 38, and a detection signal (electric
signal) generated as a result is transmitted to the signal
operation section 925. As mentioned above, the light of different
wavelengths included in the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity are reflected on the Fresnel
grating 922 in different directions. The photo detecting cells
38-.alpha. to 38-.epsilon. each have a predetermined width in the
photodetector 36, so that light included in a specific wavelength
range (wavenumber range) is simultaneously detected
(photoelectrically converted) in one photo detecting cell 38.
Though the five photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. to 38-.epsilon.
are arranged in the photodetector 36 at equal intervals, this is
not a limit, and the number of photo detecting cells 38 arranged in
the photodetector 36 may be more than or less than 5. The case
where the 1st overtone property of ammonium dihydrogen phosphate
illustrated in FIG. 97 is obtained as an optical property from the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity is described as an example below, for convenience's sake.
As illustrated in the upper right part of FIG. 100, suppose the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
included in a wavelength range (wavenumber range) .alpha. in the
detected absorption spectrum (absorbance) property is applied to
the photo detecting cell 38-.alpha., and components included in
wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges) .beta., .gamma., .delta., and
.epsilon. are respectively applied to the photo detecting cells
38-.beta., 38-.gamma., 38-.delta., and 38-.epsilon.. In the case
where an optical property change relating to a life activity
occurs, the optical property tends to change significantly in a
mid-slope part of a unique absorption band as illustrated in FIG.
91, 94, or 98. Hence, the following description is based on an
assumption that, in the case where a life activity is detected,
mainly the detection light amount in the wavelength ranges
(wavenumber ranges) designated as .beta. and .delta. in the
absorption spectrum (absorbance) property illustrated in the upper
light part of FIG. 100 changes significantly. Particularly as
mentioned earlier in this section 16.1, there is a tendency that an
absorption band observed when a life activity (such as a
biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical
change, a proximity frequency change between specific molecules
(atoms), a temporary structural change of a life object constituent
molecule, or a metabolic activity in the life object) occurs is
shifted in position on a wavenumber (or wavelength) axis from an
absorption band observed before the life activity occurs.
Accordingly, a wavelength range (wavenumber range) where light
absorption increases and a wavelength range (wavenumber range)
where light absorption decreases tend to appear simultaneously in
the difference property between the two absorption spectra. There
is thus a feature that the increase/decrease in detection light
amount is likely to be reversed between different wavelength ranges
(wavenumber ranges), e.g. the detection light amount increases in
the photo detecting cell 38-.beta. while the detection light amount
decreases in the photo detecting cell 38-.delta. in the case where
the life activity occurs. Based on this feature of appearance of
optical property change upon light activity occurrence, the
difference between both detection signals may be taken as an
exemplary signal operation method in the signal operation section
925. In this signal operation method, a life activity-related
detection signal is obtained from the difference between a first
detection signal obtained (by the photo detecting cell 38-.beta.)
from an electromagnetic wave included in a first wavelength range
(wavenumber range) in the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity and a second detection signal
obtained (by the photo detecting cell 38-.delta.) from an
electromagnetic wave included in a second wavelength range
(wavenumber range) different from the first wavelength range
(wavenumber range). This has an advantageous effect of increasing
the amount of life activity detection signal and removing common
mode noise. This advantageous effect is described in detail below.
Signals detected by the photo detecting cells 38-.beta. and
38-.delta. in a resting state before the life activity starts are
respectively denoted by S.sub.r.beta. and S.sub.r.delta.. Consider
the case where, when the life activity occurs (action state), the
detection light amount increases by .DELTA.S.sub..beta. in the
photo detecting cell 38-.beta. and the detection light amount
decreases by .DELTA.S.sub..delta. in the photo detecting cell
38-.delta.. Here, due to addition of disturbance noise, the
detection signals of the photo detecting cells 38-.beta. and
38-.delta. both decrease by N. Then, the detection signal of the
photo detecting cell 38-.beta. is given by
Formula 63
S.sub.a.beta.=S.sub.r.beta.+.DELTA.S.sub..beta.-N (A.cndot.63),
and the detection signal of the photo detecting cell 38-.delta. is
given by
Formula 64
S.sub.a.delta.=S.sub.r.delta.-.DELTA.S.sub..delta.-N
(A.cndot.64).
Taking the difference between the two detection signals yields the
following difference detection signal from eqs. (A.cndot.63) and
(A.cndot.64):
Formula 65
S.sub.a.beta.-S.sub.a.delta.=(S.sub.r.beta.-S.sub.r.delta.)+(.DELTA.S.su-
b..beta.+.DELTA.S.delta.) (A.cndot.65).
In eq. (A.cndot.65), the disturbance noise component N has been
canceled out and so is not present. Thus, taking the difference
between the two detection signals has an advantageous effect of
removing the common mode noise N mixed in from outside. There is
also an advantageous effect of increasing the life activity
detection signal component in eq. (A.cndot.65) to
".DELTA.S.sub..beta.+.DELTA.S.sub..delta.". Here, the relationship
between the absorbance property illustrated in the upper right part
of FIG. 100 and the detection signal obtained by the photo
detecting cell 38-.beta. or 38-.delta. needs to be taken into
account. The absorbance represents, on a logarithmic scale, the
degree to which light is absorbed in the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity. In the
wavelength range (wavenumber range) .gamma. with high absorbance, a
large amount of light are absorbed, so that a detection signal
obtained by reflection or transmission (transmission light is
mainly detected in FIG. 100) is smaller than those in the other
wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges). Though the difference
between detection signals from electromagnetic waves included in
two different wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges) is obtained in
the above-mentioned signal operation method, this is not a limit,
and detection signals obtained from electromagnetic waves included
in more wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges) may be subjected to
the computing process. For example, when a chlorine ion and a
choline cation are bonded (or the proximity frequency between them
increases) in a choline chloride aqueous solution, the absorbance
around 7122 to 7092 cm.sup.-1 decreases (the amount of detection
light reflected or transmitted increases) whereas the absorbance
around 6788 to 6744 cm.sup.-1 and around 6434 to 6404 cm.sup.-1
increases (the amount of detection light reflected or transmitted
decreases), as illustrated in FIGS. 93 and 94. Detection signals in
the case where electromagnetic waves included in these wavelength
ranges (wavenumber ranges) are respectively detected by three photo
detecting cells 38 are
Formula 66
S.sub.a7092=Sr.sub.7092+.DELTA.S.sub.7092-N (A.cndot.66)
Formula 67
S.sub.a6744=S.sub.r6744-.DELTA.S.sub.6744-N (A.cndot.67)
Formula 68
S.sub.a6404=S.sub.r6404-.DELTA.S.sub.6404-N (A.cndot.68).
Accordingly, by the computing process
Formula 69
2S.sub.a7092-S.sub.a6744-2S.sub.a6404=(2S.sub.r7092-S.sub.r6744-2r.sub.6-
404)+(2.DELTA.S.sub.7092+.DELTA.S.sub.6744+.DELTA.S.sub.6404)
(A.cndot.69),
the common mode noise N mixed in from outside can be removed, and
the detection signal component can be increased. Thus, in a
biochemical reaction or a chemical/physiochemical change of choline
chloride in water, a large detection signal is obtained by eq.
(A.cndot.69), but a large detection signal cannot be obtained by
eq. (A.cndot.65). On the other hand, in a biochemical reaction or a
chemical/physiochemical change of ammonium dihydrogen phosphate in
water, a large detection signal cannot be obtained by eq.
(A.cndot.69) because the optical change illustrated in FIG. 98
occurs. For instance, a plurality of different computing processes
such as eqs. (A.cndot.65) and (A.cndot.69) are performed, and which
computing process produces a largest life activity-related
detection signal is determined. In so doing, the type and details
of life activity can be identified. Not only such comparison of
mathematic operation results but also all other computing processes
are included in the scope of the computing process regarding the
"life activity detection based on plural wavelength property". For
example, the type and details of life activity may be identified
using chemometrics that uses a statistical technique such as
multiple regression analysis, regression analysis of partial least
squares, or principal component analysis in multivariate analysis
methods, as a more advanced computing process.
[1567] A method of analyzing components in an organism or the like
using chemometrics for near infrared spectra is already known (e.g.
Yukihiro Ozaki and Satoshi Kawata (Ed.): Kinsekigai bunkouhou
(Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996), p. 109). However, the conventional
technique is limited to analysis of a static state (which does not
change in a short time) such as component analysis, blood sugar
level estimation, or blood oxygen concentration estimation. The
"life activity detection based on plural wavelength property"
described in this section 16.1 differs from such a conventional
technique in that it is used to detect an optical property change
or a magnetic property change in a part where a biochemical
reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical change, a
proximity frequency change between specific molecules (atoms), a
temporary structural change of a life object constituent molecule,
or a metabolic activity in the life object occurs. Besides, a life
activity to be detected in section 16.1 is different from the
conventional detection target. That is, a life activity which
changes in a short time or a life activity in a specific (fixed)
cell or an assembly of a plurality of cells is to be detected as
mentioned in section 4.7 and chapter 14. There is a feature that
the computing process executed in the signal operation section 925
is significantly reduced in time, in order to enable detection of a
biochemical reaction, a temporary chemical change or physiochemical
change, a proximity frequency change between specific molecules
(atoms), a temporary structural change of a life object constituent
molecule, or a metabolic activity in a life object that changes in
a short time. As a method of reducing the computing process time,
"a circuit or a semiconductor device capable of high-speed
processing with fast system clock is used", and also "the number of
detection signals simultaneously input to the signal operation
section 925 is substantially reduced". A smaller number of signals
simultaneously input to the signal operation section 925
contributes to a much shorter computing process time. A method of
reducing the number of signals input to the signal operation
section 925 includes:
[1568] [A] limiting the used wavelength range of the detection
light (the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity) used for life activity detection to a narrow range;
and
[1569] [B] performing detection collectively for each specific
wavelength range (wavenumber range).
This feature is described below, using concrete numeric ranges. In
many cases, a typical transmission infrared spectrometer has a
measurement wavenumber range of 7000 to 1200 cm.sup.-1 (the width
of the wavenumber range is 5800 cm.sup.-1), and a typical
transmission near infrared spectrometer has a measurement
wavenumber range of 10000 to 2000 cm.sup.-1 (the width of the
wavenumber range is 8000 cm.sup.-1). The wavenumber resolution of a
transmission infrared spectrometer or transmission near infrared
spectrometer with relatively high performance is 4 cm.sup.-1.
Accordingly, when measurement data is extracted from a transmission
near infrared spectrometer per wavenumber resolution, data of
"8000/4=2000" points are obtained at one time. In the case where
measurement data in a transmission infrared spectrometer or
transmission near infrared spectrometer with relatively high
performance is extracted as digital data, data of measurement
points per 1 cm.sup.-1 can be extracted. Note that the
measurement/analysis results illustrated in FIGS. 88 to 91, 93, 94,
97, and 98 are based on digital data extracted from measurement
points per 1 cm.sup.-1. When extracted from measurement points per
1 cm.sup.-1 in this way, data of "8000/1=8000" points are obtained
at one time. In the conventional analysis technique using
chemometrics mentioned above, there is a need to multivariate
analyze data of 2000 to 8000 points, which requires an enormous
amount of processing time. In the case where the above-mentioned
measure [A] is applied, on the other hand, the wavelength range
(wavenumber range) of near infrared light used for life activity
detection is significantly limited by the band-pass filter 921
beforehand. Therefore, the used wavelength range of the detection
light (the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity) limited in [A] matches the wavelength range allowed to
pass through the band-pass filter 921. Since the maximum width of
the wavelength range allowed to pass through the band-pass filter
921 is from 1.64 .mu.m (6100 cm.sup.-1 in wavenumber) to 0.877
.mu.m (11400 cm.sup.-1 in wavenumber), the width of the wavenumber
is calculated at 11400-6100=5300 cm.sup.-1. This value is much
smaller than 8000 cm.sup.-1 which is the width of the measurement
wavenumber range of the transmission near infrared spectrometer.
Thus, the computing process time in the signal operation section
925 is reduced. The above-mentioned measure [B] is described next,
using concrete numeric ranges. As can be seen from comparison
between FIG. 100 described here and foregoing FIG. 97, the
detection light (the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control
of life activity) in a range from about 6600 cm.sup.-1 to 6000
cm.sup.-1 with a wavenumber range width of 600 cm.sup.-1 are
grouped into just 5 wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges) from
.alpha. to .epsilon.. The detection signals simultaneously input to
the signal operation section 925 are just 2 input signals (2
points) in the case of using eq. (A.cndot.65), and just 3 input
signals (3 points) in the case of using eq. (A.cndot.69). Thus, the
computing process time can be significantly reduced when compared
with the conventional technique of multivariate analyzing data of
2000 to 8000 points as mentioned above. Moreover, when one photo
detecting cell 38 collectively detects detection light (the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity)
for a wavelength range (wavenumber range) of a specific width, the
amount of detection light detected by one photo detecting cell 38
increases. This has an advantageous effect of increasing the S/N
ratio of the detection signal to stabilize life activity detection
and also improve the detection accuracy. The following describes
the width of the wavelength range (wavenumber range) collectively
detected by one photo detecting cell 38 in the exemplary embodiment
illustrated in FIG. 100. As mentioned above, the detection light
(the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity) with a wavenumber range width of 600 cm.sup.-1 are
grouped into 5 wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges). Accordingly,
the width of the wavelength range (wavenumber range) collectively
detected by one photo detecting cell 38 is 600/5=120 cm.sup.-1. If
the detection light (the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity) with this wavenumber range
width of 600 cm.sup.-1 are divided more finely than by 5 (the width
of the wavelength range (wavenumber range) detected by one photo
detecting cell 38 is reduced) to perform a finer computing process,
a more accurate life activity detection signal is obtained. Even
when the number of divisions for attaining a more accurate life
activity detection signal is increased, however, the number of
divisions that can produce such an advantageous effect is limited.
For example, dividing the range of the wavenumber range width of
600 cm.sup.-1 into more than 50 produces little detection accuracy
improvement effect. This demonstrates that at least it is
sufficient to set the width of the wavelength range (wavenumber
range) collectively detected (by one photo detecting cell 38) to
greater than or equal to "600/50=12 cm.sup.-1". Moreover, dividing
the detection light (the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity) with the wavenumber range width
of 600 cm.sup.-1 into 20 causes no problem in the computing
process. Hence, the width of the wavelength range (wavenumber
range) collectively detected (by one photo detecting cell 38) may
be greater than or equal to "600/20=30 cm.sup.-1". This can be
summarized as follows. In the case of performing detection
collectively (by one photo detecting cell 38) for a specific
wavelength range (wavenumber range) in the method [B] for the
purpose of detecting a temporary optical property change to detect
a life activity in the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity, the minimum
width of the wavelength range (wavenumber range) is desirably
greater than or equal to 12 cm.sup.-1, and more desirably greater
than or equal to 30 cm.sup.-1. Even when the minimum width of the
wavelength range (wavenumber range) is set to greater than or equal
to 120 cm.sup.-1, life activity detection is still possible. Here,
the condition of setting the minimum width of the wavelength range
(wavenumber range) is based on the fact that the absorption band
corresponding to ammonium dihydrogen phosphate in the wet solid
state and corresponding to the 1st overtone is included in the
range of the wavenumber range width of 600 cm.sup.-1. However, the
wavenumber range width of 600 cm.sup.-1 is not limited to the
above-mentioned condition, and may provide an indication of a range
in which a unique type of absorption band (absorption band
corresponding to unique vibration of a specific functional group or
unique group vibration occurring when the functional group is
(hydrogen) bonded to another molecule or ion) is included,
regardless of the measurement state (solid state or in an aqueous
solution), the combination of anion and cation to be measured, or
the type of absorption band (reference tone, nth overtone, or
combination). This is because the absorption band corresponding to
the 1st overtone of telescopic vibration of the choline chloride
pair in the choline chloride aqueous solution is also included in
the range of the wavenumber range width of 600 cm.sup.-1 from the
wavenumber of 6200 cm.sup.-1 to the wavenumber of 5600 cm.sup.-1 as
illustrated in FIGS. 90 and 91.
[1570] The following describes a concrete method of simultaneously
and collectively detecting the detection light (the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity) included in the
above-mentioned wavelength range (wavenumber range) by each photo
detecting cell 38. The wavelength range (wavenumber range) of
detection light detected by one photo detecting cell 38 is denoted
by .delta..lamda.. In the Fresnel grating 922 illustrated in FIG.
100, the reflection angle changes depending on the wavelength (or
wavenumber) of detection light, according to Bragg's condition. For
the wavelength range (wavenumber range) .delta..lamda., a
reflection angle spread range .delta..theta. is provided,
.delta..lamda. and .delta..theta. are approximately proportional.
Regarding a pitch Pg (distance between adjacent ones of narrow
rectangular reflection plates arranged at regular intervals with a
specific inclination) of the Fresnel Grating 922, the following
relationship approximately exists:
Formula 70
.delta..theta..varies..delta..lamda./Pg(".varies." denotes
proportionality) (A.cndot.70).
The electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
which has been reflected on the Fresnel grating 922 in a parallel
light state is concentrated onto the surface of the photodetector
36 by a condensing lens 852-2. Let the focal length of the
condensing lens 852-2 be F, and the width of one photo detecting
cell 38 be W. The following relationship approximately holds:
Formula 71
W.apprxeq.F.times..delta..theta. (A.cndot.71).
Based on the relationship between eqs. (A.cndot.70) and
(A.cndot.71), the pitch Pg of the Fresnel grating 922, the focal
length F of the condensing lens 852-2, and the width W of the photo
detecting cell 38 can be appropriately set so that the wavelength
range (wavenumber range) .delta..lamda. of detection light detected
by one photo detecting cell 38 satisfies the above-mentioned
condition.
[1571] The description now returns to the other computing process
methods in the signal operation section 925. As mentioned above,
not only the difference operation but also any other computing
process is included in the scope of the present exemplary
embodiment so long as the process: [1572] reduces the influence of
disturbance noise; and [1573] enables more accurate and stable
signal detection. Examples of computing process methods other than
that described above include: performing "division operation" on
the detection signals of the photo detecting cells 38-.beta. and
38-.delta.; and performing the computing process after converting
the detection signals to logarithmic values. It is particularly
desirable to reduce, by the computing process, the adverse effect
of the spectral property change of the detection system itself on
life activity detection. The spectral property (spectral
characteristics) is described below, using functional
representation with the vibration frequency .nu. of the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
being set as a variable. The wavelength property (spectral
property) of light emitted from the light emitting component 111 is
denoted by L(.nu.), and the optical transmission factor from the
light emitting component 111 to the photodetector 36 is denoted by
T(.nu.). T(.nu.) includes not only the influence of light
absorption property and the like of each optical component disposed
in the optical path but also the influence of optical property
change occurring in the part (e.g. the examinee's head or chest)
600 of the organism to be detected/controlled other than the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity. As described earlier with reference to FIG. 100, the
pinhole 853 is placed at the image forming position (confocal
position) of the detected/controlled point (measured/controlled
point) 845 for life activity, to reduce the influence of optical
property change occurring in the part (e.g. the examinee's head or
chest) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled. However, in
the part (e.g. the examinee's head or chest) 600 of the organism to
be detected/controlled, there is the influence of the optical
property change on the optical path of the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity. In T(.nu.), the light
absorption property of each optical component disposed in the
optical path rarely changes with time, but the optical property in
the part (e.g. the examinee's head or chest) 600 of the organism to
be detected/controlled changes with time, causing a decrease in
life activity detection accuracy. Besides, the property L(.nu.) of
the light emitting component 111 can easily change with time.
Accordingly, if life activity detection is continuously performed
for a long time, the change of L(.nu.) causes a decrease in life
activity detection accuracy. The material of resting state before
the life activity occurs in the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity is denoted by
Mr(.nu.), and the optical property difference component when the
life activity occurs is denoted by .DELTA.M(.nu.). Here,
.DELTA.M(.nu.) corresponds to the "difference property" illustrated
in the upper part of each of FIGS. 90, 91, 93, 94, and 98. (Note
that the dynamics are reversed between the absorbance and the
transmission light amount, and also there is a difference between
logarithmic representation and linear representation). This being
the case, the optical property when the life activity occurs in the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity can be expressed as Ma(.nu.)=Mr(.nu.)+.DELTA.M(.nu.).
Hence, a detection signal Sr(.nu.) of the photodetector 36 before
the life activity occurs is
[1573] Formula 72
Sr(.nu.)=L(.nu.).times.T(.nu.).times.Mr(.nu.) (A.cndot.72),
and a detection signal Sa(.nu.) of the photodetector 36 when the
life activity occurs (action state) is
Formula 73
Sa(.nu.)=L(.nu.).times.T(.nu.).times.{Mr(.nu.)+.DELTA.M(.nu.)}
(A.cndot.73).
When eqs. (A.cndot.63) and (A.cndot.64) and eqs. (A.cndot.72) and
(A.cndot.73) are compared, there are relationships:
S.sub.a.beta..apprxeq.Sa(.nu..apprxeq..beta.) (the vibration
frequency .nu. is near .beta.); and
S.sub.a.delta..apprxeq.Sa(.nu..apprxeq..delta.) (the vibration
frequency .nu. is near .delta.). Especially in the case where the
properties L(.nu.) and T(.nu.) hardly change in a short time and
only .DELTA.M(.nu.) appears or disappears in a short time, taking
the difference between them on the logarithmic scale yields
Formula 74
log.sub.10 Sa(.nu.)-log.sub.10
Sr(.nu.)=log.sub.10{1+.DELTA.M(.nu.)/Mr(.nu.)} (A.cndot.74).
Thus, the influence of variation of the property L(.nu.) of the
light emitting component 111 and the influence of variation of the
optical transmission property T(.nu.) can be removed. The signal
operation section 925 logarithmically converts (on scale) the
signals obtained from the photo detecting cells 38-.beta. and
38-.delta. and then performs the difference operation to generate a
life activity detection signal. The advantageous effect of
improving detection signal accuracy and stability can be achieved
in this way. The left side of eq. (A.cndot.74) is
Formula 75
log.sub.10 Sa(.nu.)-log.sub.10
Sr(.nu.)=log.sub.10{Sa(.nu.)/Sr(.nu.)} (A.cndot.75).
The right side of eq. (A.cndot.75) includes the division operation.
Thus, the same advantageous effect as above can be achieved even
when the signal operation section 925 performs the division
operation on the signals obtained from the photo detecting cells
38-.beta. and 38-.delta..
[1574] Though the above describes the computing method for the
detection signals of the photo detecting cells 38-.beta. and
38-.delta., this is not a limit, and any of the detection signals
of the other photo detecting cells 38-.alpha., 38-.gamma., and
38-.epsilon. may be used in the computing process. For example,
there is a method of adding the detection signals of the photo
detecting cells 38-.alpha. and 38-.epsilon. in the computing
process to improve the detection signal accuracy and stability. It
is commonly known that, in the case of conducting component
analysis using the absorption spectrum property, due to the
influence of baseline the analysis accuracy decreases (unless the
influence of baseline is removed upon analysis). The influence of
baseline is especially high in the foot part of the absorption
band. As can be easily seen from the comparison between the 1st
overtone property of ammonium dihydrogen phosphate illustrated in
FIG. 97 and the property illustrated in the upper right part of
FIG. 100, the detection signals of the photo detecting cells
38-.alpha. and 38-.epsilon. are mostly dependent on the baseline
property. Hence, based on an assumption that the detection signals
of the photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. and 38-.epsilon. mostly
represent the baseline property, the signals obtained from the
photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. and 38-.epsilon. are used for
interpolation by straight-line approximation or least square
method, as result of which the amount of baseline in the wavelength
ranges (wavenumber ranges) indicated by .beta., .gamma., and
.delta. can be estimated. The signal operation section 925 then
performs the difference operation between the obtained baseline
estimates (logarithmic values thereof) and the detection signals
(logarithmic values thereof) of the photo detecting cells 38-.beta.
and 38-.delta., to calculate the "net" light absorption property
while removing the influence of baseline. The detection accuracy
and stability of the life activity-related detection signal can be
improved in this way. Moreover, by performing the same process on
the detection signal of the photo detecting cell 38-.gamma., it is
possible to calculate more accurate absorbance (or light absorption
amount or light absorption intensity) at the center part (maximum
absorption wavelength position) of the absorption band (after
removing the influence of baseline). Once the absorbance at the
center part after removing the influence of baseline is obtained,
the obtained value can be used to appropriately perform
normalization on the light absorption property or the optical
property. An advantageous effect of appropriately performing
normalization on the light absorption property or the optical
property in the signal operation section 925 is described below.
Suppose, at the instant when a life activity occurs, the part (e.g.
the examinee's head or chest) 600 of the organism to be
detected/controlled moves and as a result the amount of detection
signal decreases temporarily. An example of the life activity form
is "contraction and relaxation of a muscle", as mentioned earlier.
It is well assumed that, when a muscle contracts or relaxes, the
surface shape of the part (e.g. the examinee's head or chest) 600
of the organism to be detected/controlled is altered and the travel
direction of the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity changes temporarily, and as a result the amount of
detection signal decreases. When the change rate of the amount of
detection signal is denoted by N (0.ltoreq.N.ltoreq.1), eq.
(A.cndot.73) is transformed into
Formula 76
Sa(.nu.)=L(.nu.).times.T(.nu.).times.N.times.{Mr(.nu.)+.DELTA.M(.nu.)}
(A.cndot.16).
As a result, the following equation corresponds to eq.
(A.cndot.74):
Formula 77
log.sub.10 Sa(.nu.)-log.sub.10
Sr(.nu.)=log.sub.10{N+N.times..DELTA.M(.nu.)/Mr(.nu.)}
(A.cndot.77).
The influence of N directly appears in the life activity detection
signal, which can lead to a decrease in detection accuracy or
reliability. In such a case, however, by performing normalization
on the light absorption property or the optical property by the
above-mentioned method, it is possible to remove the influence of N
in eq. (A.cndot.16) and restore the property of eq. (A.cndot.74)
(the influence of the change rate N of the amount of detection
signal appearing in eq. (A.cndot.77) can be removed as in eq.
(A.cndot.74)). This produces an advantageous effect of improving
the detection accuracy, reliability, and stability. An important
point here lies in that the baseline property in the light
absorption property is extracted using the detection signals of the
photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. and 38-.epsilon., and the use of
this information and the detection signal of the photo detecting
cell 38-.gamma. enables appropriate normalization on the light
absorption property or the optical property. Thus, improved
detection accuracy, reliability, and stability can be attained by
using not only the detection signals of the photo detecting cells
38-.beta. and 38-.delta. which contribute most to life activity
detection but also detection signals obtained from detection light
(the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity) included in their neighboring wavelength ranges (or
wavenumber ranges).
[1575] The above describes, as the method
[1576] [1] the detected/controlled point (measured/controlled
point) 845 for life activity in the life object is illuminated with
light of a plurality of different wavelengths, that the light of
the plurality of different wavelengths are simultaneously included
in the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity emitted from one light emitting component 111, with
reference to FIG. 100. However, this is not a limit, and the beams
of illuminating light 115-1, 115-2, and 115-3 for life activity
detection having different wavelengths may be emitted respectively
from the different light emitting components 111-1, 111-2, and
111-3 as illustrated in FIG. 32 as an example. In addition, for the
method
[1577] [2] the photodetector 36 separately detects the light of the
plurality of different wavelengths obtained from the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity in the life object,
the spectroscopic (wavelength separation) means such as the Fresnel
grating 922 is disposed in the detection optical system, as an
optical member for separately extracting light of each individual
wavelength (wavenumber) region. However, this is not a limit, and
the color filters 60-1, 60-2, and 60-3 illustrated in FIG. 32 may
be used instead of the spectroscopic (wavelength separation) means
as an optical member for separately extracting light of each
individual wavelength (wavenumber) region. A concrete method in
this case is described below, taking an example where, upon muscle
contraction as one form of life activity, the proximity frequency
of .gamma. phosphoryl to a primary amine group ionized in water
increases temporarily by hydrolysis of ATP. It is expected that,
immediately after hydrolysis of ATP, the amount of detection light
around 7172 cm.sup.-1 increases (decrease in absorbance) and the
amount of detection light around 6560 cm.sup.-1 decreases (increase
in absorbance) in the absorption band corresponding to the 1st
overtone of telescopic vibration of water with an absorption peak
wavenumber of 6888 cm.sup.-1 as illustrated in FIG. 98.
Accordingly, the beam of illuminating light 115-1 for life activity
detection emitted from the light emitting component 111-1 in FIG.
32 is set to include light around a wavenumber of 6560 cm.sup.-1,
and the color filter 60-1 having an optical property of allowing
only light around a wavenumber of 6560 cm.sup.-1 to pass through is
disposed. Moreover, the beam of illuminating light 115-2 for life
activity detection emitted from the light emitting component 111-2
is set to include light around a wavenumber of 6888 cm.sup.-1, and
the color filter 60-2 having an optical property of allowing only
light around a wavenumber of 6888 cm.sup.-1 to pass through is
disposed. Further, the beam of illuminating light 115-3 for life
activity detection emitted from the light emitting component 111-3
is set to include light around a wavenumber of 7172 cm.sup.-1, and
the color filter 60-3 having an optical property of allowing only
light around a wavenumber of 7172 cm.sup.-1 to pass through is
disposed. As a result of taking the difference between the
detection signals of the photo detecting sections 121-1 and 121-3
of life activity, the same life activity detection signal as the
operation result of eq. (A.cndot.65) is obtained.
[1578] The life activity detection method based on plural
wavelength property has a feature that the wavelength range
(wavenumber range) to be detected can be appropriately changed
according to a state change in the life object to be detected or a
change in an environment surrounding the life object. Life activity
detection can be flexibly performed always under an optimal
condition even when a state change in the life object or an
environmental change occurs. This has an advantageous effect of
enabling always stable and accurate life activity detection,
regardless of a state change in the life object or a change in the
external environment. The following describes this feature.
According to Ozaki et al. (Yukihiro Ozaki and Satoshi Kawata (Ed.):
Kinsekigai bunkouhou (Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996), p. 102), the
center wavenumber (maximum intensity wavelength) of the absorption
band corresponding to water changes very sensitively according to
the ambient temperature (linearly shifts toward the shorter
wavelength side as the temperature increases). In detail, at
60.degree. C., the absorption peak wavelength of water is
approximately 1.435 .mu.m (6969 cm.sup.-1 in wavenumber). At
20.degree. C., on the other hand, the absorption peak wavelength of
water changes to approximately 1.453 .mu.m (6882 cm.sup.-1 in
wavenumber) (the amount of change in wavenumber is 6969-6882=87
cm.sup.-1). Therefore, especially in the case of detecting an
optical property change relating to the absorption band
corresponding to water (see section 15.4 or 15.5), the influence of
the ambient temperature environment needs to be taken into account.
When the detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845
for life activity as the target point of life activity detection is
situated in a deep area inside a life object of a homeotherm, the
point is kept at a constant temperature in the life object and so
causes no significant problem. However, especially in the case of
detecting contraction and relaxation of a mimetic muscle for life
activity detection as described in section 6.5.4 with reference to
FIGS. 41 and 42 and section 11.5 with reference to FIG. 62, the
influence of the ambient temperature environment is significant.
This is because the mimetic muscle is situated near the surface,
and so the temperature of the mimetic muscle changes sensitively to
the influence of the external temperature. To prevent a decrease in
life activity detection accuracy caused by this influence, the life
activity detection method based on plural wavelength property is
capable of appropriately changing the wavelength range (wavenumber
range) to be detected. This has an advantageous effect of enabling
stable life activity detection even when the center wavenumber
(maximum intensity wavelength) of the absorption band where the
optical property temporarily changes according to the life activity
shifts slightly. The following describes a method of changing the
wavelength range (wavenumber range) to be detected. FIG. 98
illustrates the light absorption property of the absorption band
corresponding to the 1st overtone of telescopic vibration of water
including the absorption band of ammonium dihydrogen phosphate. The
absorption peak wavenumber at 23.degree. C. is 6888 cm.sup.-1.
Suppose, at 23.degree. C., the photo detecting cell 38-.beta.
detects detection light (the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity) around 7172 cm.sup.-1 and the
photo detecting cell 38-.delta. detects detection light (the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity)
around 6560 cm.sup.-1 in FIG. 100, in accordance with this property
in FIG. 98. Also suppose the outside air temperature then decreases
and the mimetic muscle temperature immediately under the surface
responsively decreases, as a result of which the absorption peak
wavenumber of water included in the mimetic muscle drops by 20
cm.sup.-1 to 6868 cm.sup.-1. It is assumed that, upon temporary
contraction of the mimetic muscle, hydrolysis of ATP occurs and the
proximity frequency between the ionized primary amine and the
.gamma. phosphoryl increases temporarily. In such a case, the
absorbance around 7152 (=7172-20) cm.sup.-1 decreases and the
absorbance around 6540 (=6560-20) cm.sup.-1 increases, as compared
with FIG. 98. It is therefore desirable that the photo detecting
cell 38-.beta. detects detection light (the electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity) around 7152 cm.sup.-1
and the photo detecting cell 38-.delta. detects detection light
(the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity) around 6540 cm.sup.-1 in FIG. 100, in response to the
decrease of the absorption peak wavenumber resulting from the
temperature decrease. When the wavelength range (wavenumber range)
to be detected can be appropriately changed in this way, life
activity detection can be performed in an optimal condition
according to a change in the surrounding environment of the life
object such as an outside air temperature change or a state change
in the life object, with it being possible to improve life activity
detection accuracy and reliability. Though the above describes the
method of removing the influence the absorption peak wavelength
variation of water caused by the outside air temperature change,
this is not a limit, and the "variability/optimization of the
wavelength range (wavenumber range) to be detected" is applicable
to any optical property change caused by, for example, the
influence of another life activity simultaneously occurring with
the life activity to be detected or the influence of external
pressure such as mechanical pressure. For instance, there is a
possibility that the wavelength range (wavenumber range) in which
the absorbance significantly changes with the change in proximity
frequency between the chlorine ion and the choline group in PCLN or
SMLN illustrated in FIGS. 90 and 91 shifts due to a state change
(e.g. small change in content ratio) of cerebrospinal fluid in the
brain or the like. The "variability/optimization of the wavelength
range (wavenumber range) to be detected" is applicable in such a
case, too.
[1579] The "change (or variability/optimization) of the wavelength
range (wavenumber range) to be detected" mentioned here includes
both "movement of the center wavelength (center wavenumber) of the
specific wavelength range (wavenumber range)" and "width change of
the specific wavelength range (wavenumber range)". The following
elements are arranged in FIG. 100:
[1580] [A] an optical device (optical member) for moving the center
wavelength (center wavenumber) of the specific wavelength range
(wavenumber range); and
[1581] [B] an optical device (optical member) for changing the
width of the specific wavelength range (wavenumber range).
As one form of the optical device (optical member) [A] for moving
the center wavelength (center wavenumber) of the specific
wavelength range (wavenumber range), the spectroscopic state of the
spectroscopic (wavelength separation) means for the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity may be changed. In
FIG. 100, the Fresnel grating 922 is used as a concrete example of
the spectroscopic (wavelength separation) means. The grating 922 is
configured to be mechanically inclined, to realize the
spectroscopic state change method. When the incident angle of the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity to
the grating 922 changes, the center wavelength (center wavenumber)
of the wavelength range (wavenumber range) detected by the specific
photo detecting cell 39 is shifted. As the optical device (optical
member) [A] for moving the center wavelength (center wavenumber), a
galvanometer mirror may be placed immediately before the incidence
to the Fresnel grating 922 or immediately after the exit from the
Fresnel grating 922 to change the incident angle to the
photodetector 36, instead of changing the spectroscopic state of
the spectroscopic (wavelength separation) means as mentioned above.
Alternatively, as the optical device (optical member) [A], any
optical device (optical member) capable of shifting the specific
wavelength range (wavenumber range) by, for example, changing a
refractive angle by voltage application to an electro-optical
device may be used in the present exemplary embodiment. The
following describes a method of monitoring the absorption peak
wavelength variation amount (or wavenumber variation amount) of the
absorption band to be detected, which is caused by an outside air
temperature change or the like. The amount of detection light
obtained as a result of being transmitted (or reflected) in the
detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life
activity is smallest at the absorption peak position of the
absorption band mentioned above. Accordingly, the amount of
mechanical inclination of the Fresnel grating 922 is gradually
changed to search for the position where the amount of detection
light detected by the photo detecting cell 38-.gamma. situated at
the center from among the photo detecting cells 38-.alpha. to
38-.epsilon. is smallest. Instead of searching for the position
where the detection light amount of the photo detecting cell
38-.gamma. is smallest, the following method of searching for the
absorption peak position of the absorption band may be used: the
absorption peak position is searched for while each time
calculating the absorbance at the center part after removing the
influence of baseline as mentioned above. In the case where the
absorption peak wavelength variation (or wavenumber variation) of
the absorption band to be detected does not change much with time,
the absorption peak wavelength variation amount (or wavenumber
variation amount) is monitored at time intervals, to perform
correction to an optimal position. In the case where the absorption
peak wavelength variation (or wavenumber variation) constantly
changes with time in a large amount, on the other hand, correction
is repeatedly performed while constantly monitoring the absorption
peak wavelength variation amount (or wavenumber variation amount).
This method is called wobbling. In wobbling, while constantly
changing the amount of mechanical inclination of the Fresnel
grating 922 in a slow cycle, the mechanical inclination angle range
is made to follow the change so that the detection light amount of
the photo detecting cell 38-.gamma. is smallest at the center
position of the mechanical inclination. The above describes the
case where the position where the detection light amount of the
photo detecting cell 38-.gamma. is smallest is searched for in the
method of monitoring the absorption peak wavelength variation
amount (or wavenumber variation amount) of the absorption band to
be detected. However, this is not a limit, and a location of a
characteristic point unchanged before and after life activity in
the absorption spectrum of the absorption band to be detected may
be searched for. For example, in FIG. 89, the peak position of 5982
cm.sup.-1 matches between the absorption spectrum of the choline
chloride (in which the chlorine ion and the choline cation are
proximate) and the absorption spectrum of the choline bromide
(similar to the property of the single choline cation), suggesting
that the peak of 5982 cm.sup.-1 commonly appears before and after
an increase in proximity frequency between the chlorine ion and the
choline group in PCLN or SMLN upon action potential of a neuron
(before and after life activity). This being so, the peak of 5982
cm.sup.-1 may be regarded as a "characteristic point unchanged
before and after life activity", to search for the position of the
characteristic point. In detail, when the amount of mechanical
inclination of the Fresnel grating 922 is changed, the detection
light amount of the photo detecting cell 38-.gamma. changes in
correspondence with the absorption spectrum in FIG. 89. From this
change in detection light amount, the position corresponding to the
peak of 5982 cm.sup.-1 is searched for. The use of such a
characteristic point to change (or vary/optimize) the wavelength
range (wavenumber range) to be detected has an advantageous effect
of enabling stable change/optimization without being affected by
life activity even in the case where life activity occurs
frequently. In normal life activity, the absorption peak wavelength
(or wavenumber) of the absorption band to be detected rarely
changes before and after the life activity. In the case where life
activity occurs very actively and frequently, however, there is a
possibility that the absorption peak wavelength (or wavenumber)
changes as illustrated in the lower part of FIG. 90 or 93. In such
a case, the life activity detection accuracy and reliability can be
improved by changing (or varying/optimizing) the wavelength range
(wavenumber range) to be detected through the use of the location
of the characteristic point unchanged before and after the life
activity as described above.
[1582] As one form of the optical device (optical member) [B] for
changing the width of the specific wavelength range (wavenumber
range), a method of changing the focal length F of the condensing
lens 852-2 is available. The "width of the specific wavelength
range (wavenumber range)" mentioned in relation to [B] means
.delta..lamda. in eq. (A.cndot.70), and the focal length F of the
condensing lens 852-2 relates to the relationship between this
.delta..lamda. and the width W of one photo detecting cell 38 (see
eq. (A.cndot.71)). Hence, by changing the focal length F of the
condensing lens 852-2, it is possible to change the "width
.delta..lamda. of the specific wavelength range (wavenumber
range)". Though not illustrated in FIG. 100, examples of how to
change the focal length F of the condensing lens 852-2 include: the
condensing lens 852-2 is composed of a pair of lenses the distance
between which is variable, and the distance is changed to change
the focal length; and the condensing lens 852-2 is composed of not
a glass lens fixed in curvature but a liquid crystal lens, and the
focal length is changed by voltage application and also the
arrangement position is changed accordingly. As shown in eqs.
(A.cndot.70) and (A.cndot.71), not only the focal length F of the
condensing lens 852-2 but also the pitch Pg of the Fresnel grating
922, the width W of one photo detecting cell 38, and the like
relate to the width .delta..lamda. of the specific wavelength range
(wavenumber range), and so these values may be controlled to change
the width .delta..lamda. of the specific wavelength range
(wavenumber range).
[1583] As described above, in the case of using the optical device
(optical member) [A] or [B], the wavelength range (wavenumber
range) to be detected is changed (or varied/optimized) by optical
means. As an alternative, the following method is also
available:
[1584] [C] method of changing (or varying/optimizing) the
wavelength range (wavenumber range) to be detected by electrical
means.
Though the photodetector 36 is divided into 5 photo detecting cells
38 in FIG. 100, the advantageous effect of detection is ensured up
to 50-division at the maximum as mentioned above. Suppose there are
50 photo detecting cells 38. When the absorption peak wavelength
(or wavenumber) of the absorption band to be detected changes due
to the influence of an outside air temperature change or the like
while the mechanical angle of the Fresnel grating 922 is fixed, a
detecting cell 38 whose detection signal is smallest may shift in
position to its adjacent detecting cell 38. In view of this, the
signal operation section 925 determines the displacement amount and
displacement direction of the detecting cell 38 corresponding to
the smallest detection signal. Based on the determination result, a
detecting cell 38 whose detection signal changes significantly
depending on whether or not a life activity occurs can be switched.
Alternatively, in the case where the wavelength in the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
which is applied to the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity changes through
time as described in section 16.4, the wavelength range (wavenumber
range) to be detected can be changed (or varied/optimized) by an
electrical method. In detail, the timing of switching to an
addition operation (or a cumulative operation) as an input signal
used in the computing process in the signal operation section 925
is controlled. This method will be described in detail in section
16.4.
16.2) Optical Property Change in Present Exemplary Embodiment
[1585] In the description in section 4.7 with reference to FIGS. 18
and 19, section 11.5 with reference to FIG. 61, or section 14.3
with reference to FIG. 73, the location of the detected/controlled
point (measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity is a "fixed
location" in a non-vessel portion in the part (e.g. the examinee's
head or chest) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled, and
the term "optical property change" refers to a situation when "the
optical property changes with time" (or changes temporarily) in
this location.
[1586] However, this is not a limit, and a "difference in optical
property between different locations in the life object" in the
same time (or within a proximate time range) is also included in
the "optical property change". In such a case, the optical property
change is detected by the life activity detection method based on
plural wavelength property described in this chapter 16. In detail,
through the use of any of: a method of detecting optical properties
at neighboring positions by scanning with the electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity concentrated at the part
(e.g. the examinee's head or chest) 600 of the organism to be
detected/controlled by the method in FIG. 20 or the like; and a
method of simultaneously detecting optical properties at multiple
points by the method in FIG. 26 or the like, an absorption spectrum
at each position is input to the signal processing section 925.
After this, the computing process is performed to calculate a life
activity detection signal according to the method described in
section 16.1. Obtained life activity detection signals between
adjacent locations in the detected/controlled point
(measured/controlled point) 845 for life activity are then compared
with each other. As a result of comparison, in the case where the
life activity detection signal changes between adjacent locations,
it is determined that the "optical property changes between
adjacent locations". By such detecting the optical property change
between different detection points using the life activity
detection method based on plural wavelength property, an
advantageous effect of accurately detecting a life activity of a
short time and a small optical property change amount in the same
location can be achieved. For example, detection of a fatigue state
in the life object and extraction of a site with a high degree of
fatigue in the life object as described in section 15.6 can be
performed accurately and reliably by this method.
16.3) Method of Detecting Life Activity while Changing Detection
Light Wavelength Through Time
[1587] The life activity detection method based on plural
wavelength property described in this chapter 16 is not an
exemplary embodiment completely different from the life activity
detection (or control) method using monochromatic light (light
including only a single specific wavelength) described in chapter 6
or 12 but is a more detailed embodiment or an embodiment of small
improvement based on the foregoing exemplary embodiments, as noted
in section 16.1. Accordingly, the method described in this section
16.3 is also an extended technique of the methods described in
section 6.2.2 with reference to FIG. 22 and section 6.3.2 with
reference to FIG. 26.
[1588] The life activity detection method using the photoelectric
conversion method for detection of life activity described in 6.3.2
with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28 is described below with reference
to FIG. 101, mainly from a viewpoint of "detecting the life
activity while changing the detection light wavelength through
time". Two photodetectors 36 illustrated in FIG. 26 are arranged as
photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 in FIG. 101. The internal structures
of the photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 in FIG. 101 are as described in
section 6.3.2 with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. Likewise, two
imaging lenses 57 illustrated in FIG. 26 are arranged as imaging
lenses 57-1 and 57-2 in FIG. 101. Band-pass filters 934-2 and 934-3
have the same optical property as the color filter 60 in FIG. 26.
Here, the term "band-pass filters 934-2 and 934-3" different from
the term "color filter 60" in FIG. 26 is used to emphasize that the
band-pass filters 934-2 and 934-3 in FIG. 101 have the property
"the width of the wavelength range allowed to pass through"
described in section 16.1 (i.e. to indicate that the width of the
wavelength range allowed to pass through is significantly limited
as compared with the typical color filter 60). Though the
arrangement order of the band-pass filters 934-2 and 934-3 and the
imaging lenses 57-1 and 57-2 in FIG. 101 is reversed from that in
FIG. 26 for ease of explanation, this is not a limit. The band-pass
filters 934-2 and 934-3 may be placed before the imaging lenses
57-1 and 57-2 (on the opposite side of the photodetectors 36-1 and
36-2) as in FIG. 26. Imaging sections 933-3 to 933-6 in FIG. 101
have the function of the "position monitoring section 46 regarding
a detected point for life activity" in FIG. 22. Each of the imaging
sections 933-3 to 933-6 includes the camera lens 42-1 and 42-2 and
the two-dimensional photodetector 43-1 and 43-2 as illustrated in
FIG. 22. As described in section 6.2.2 with reference to FIG. 22,
the distance 44 from surface points of an area where the detecting
section for life activity is located is calculated by the imaging
sections 933-3 to 933-6 and, based on the calculation result, the
objective lenses 57-1 and 57-2 mechanically move in the front-back
direction so that the detected point 30 for life activity in which
the detection target part exists and the photodetectors 36-1 and
36-2 are in a confocal relationship (image forming relationship).
The imaging sections 933-3 to 933-6 also have another function
relating to search for "life activity detection target part"
through the use of an image recognition function, as described
later with reference to FIG. 104. CCD cameras may be used as the
imaging sections 933-3 to 933-6.
[1589] The optical arrangement illustrated in FIG. 23 or 100 is
suitable for detection of a life activity in a specific part in one
organism (e.g. one examinee). On the other hand, the optical
arrangement in FIG. 26 is suitable for a method of simultaneously
detecting life activities in respective specific parts in a
plurality of organisms (e.g. a plurality of examinees). FIG. 101
illustrates, for example, a system in which cardiac movements of a
plurality of examinees 936-1 to 936-3 in the same room are
simultaneously measured to find an abnormal life activity such as
arrhythmia. The system in FIG. 101 is, however, not limited to use
in a room, and may perform health problem detection on people out
in the street or simple health checkup on people gathering in front
of a specific sign. Moreover, the purpose of life activity
detection is not limited to detection of an abnormal life activity
or a health problem. For example, the system may be used to "find
an excessive fatigue part" of a person even though he or she does
not have a health problem, as described in section 15.6. In the
case where only one photodetector 36-2 is used to simultaneously
detect life activities of a plurality of examinees, the life
activity detection accuracy decreases when the examinees 936-1 and
936-2 overlap each other as in FIG. 101. A feature of using the
plurality of photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 installed in different
positions is therefore provided to overcome this problem. As a
result, stable life object detection is possible regardless of the
positional relationship between the plurality of examinees. In
detail, when the life object detection accuracy of the
photodetector 36-2 decreases because the examinees 936-1 and 936-2
overlap each other as in FIG. 101, the life object detection result
of the photodetector 36-1 installed at a position where the
examinees 936-1, 936-2, and 936-3 do not overlap each other is also
combined to correct the detection result. In the arrangement of the
light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2 and the photodetectors
36-1 and 36-2 in FIG. 101, life activity detection may be performed
using any detection light 937 transmitted through or reflected off
the examinees 936-1, 936-2, and 936-3. The following describes a
method of using the detection light 937 transmitted through the
examinees 936-1, 936-2, and 936-3 for ease of explanation, where
the detection light 937 emitted from the light emitting component
111-1 is detected by the photodetector 36-1 and the detection light
937 emitted from the light emitting component 111-2 is detected by
the photodetector 36-2. However, this is not a limit, and the
detection light 937 reflected off the examinees 936-1 to 936-3 may
be used for life activity detection. In such a case, the detection
light 937 emitted from the light emitting component 111-1 is
detected by the photodetector 36-2, and the detection light 937
emitted from the light emitting component 111-2 is detected by the
photodetector 36-1.
[1590] In the exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 101, there
is also a feature that a lighting device 931 in the room where the
examinees 936-1 to 936-3 are present is kept from affecting life
activity detection. Illuminating light 938 emitted from the typical
lighting device 931 includes a wide range of wavelengths.
Meanwhile, light of a wavelength greater than or equal to 0.875
.mu.m is used for life activity detection, as described in section
4.7. Accordingly, an optical filter 932 is placed at the exit of
the illuminating light 938 emitted from the lighting device 931 to
cut off light of a wavelength greater than or equal to 0.875 .mu.m,
and also the band-pass filters 934-3 and 934-4 placed immediately
before the photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 cut off light (illuminating
light) shorter than a wavelength of 0.875 .mu.m. This has an
advantageous effect of preventing a decrease in life activity
detection accuracy caused when the illuminating light emitted from
the lighting device 931 enters the photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2.
Thus, the optical filter 932 is required to have an optical
property of at least cutting off light of a wavelength greater than
or equal to 0.875 .mu.m. The property is not limited to such, and
the optical filter 932 is required to cut off the "wavelength range
(wavenumber range) to be detected" which is used for life activity
detection in the photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2. As described in
sections 15.5 and 16.1, the wavelength range of the absorption band
corresponding to the 2nd overtone of telescopic vibration of water
is 1.11 .mu.m to 0.877 .mu.m. In the case of performing life
activity detection with wavelength light except the absorption band
wavelength range corresponding to the 2nd overtone of telescopic
vibration of water, the optical filter 932 desirably has a property
of cutting off wavelength light greater than or equal to 1.11
.mu.m. Moreover, the wavelength upper limit of the detection light
937 used for life activity detection is desirably 110 .mu.m or 2.50
.mu.m, as described in section 4.7. Therefore, a cut-off wavelength
range required of the optical filter 932 is 0.875 .mu.m to 2.50
.mu.m], and desirably 1.11 .mu.m to 2.50 .mu.m. Since a visible
range of humans is about 0.38 .mu.m to 0.68 .mu.m, cutting off the
above-mentioned range of the illuminating light 938 causes no
discomfort on the examinees 936. The provision of the optical
filter 932 having the property described above can stabilize life
activity detection without placing mental strain on the examinees
936.
[1591] Meanwhile, since the detection light 937 (the illuminating
light 115 for life activity detection and the electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity) used for life activity
detection is invisible to each examinee 936, there is a risk that
the detection light 937 (the illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection and the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity) wrongly enters the eyes of the
examinee 936 without the examinee 936 noticing it. There is a
feature that a light-blocking element (light-blocking member) is
placed in the optical path of the detection light 937, in order to
protect the eyes of the examinee 936. As one form of the
light-blocking element (light-blocking member), light-blocking
liquid crystal shutters 935-1 and 935-2 are used in FIG. 101. In
FIG. 101, imaging sections 933-1 and 933-2 are disposed
respectively near the light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2, to
monitor locations of illumination with the detection light 937
emitted from the light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2. Video
obtained by the imaging sections 933-1 and 933-2 are put to image
analysis, and the positions of the eyes of the examinees 936-1 to
936-3 are automatically extracted. The light-blocking liquid
crystal shutters 935-1 and 935-2 automatically block light, to
prevent the detection light 937 from being applied to the extracted
positions of the eyes or faces of the examinees 936-1 to 936-3. CCD
cameras may be used as the imaging sections 933-1 and 933-2. The
light-blocking element (light-blocking member) is not limited to
the light-blocking liquid crystal shutters 935-1 and 935-2
illustrated in FIG. 101, and may be movable light-blocking plates,
movable color filters, or the like. By partially blocking the
detection light 937 by the light-blocking element (light-blocking
member) placed in the optical path based on the image analysis
results of the imaging sections 933-1 and 933-2, an advantageous
effect of ensuring the safety of the examinee 936 (his or her eyes)
can be achieved.
[1592] The wavelength (wavenumber) of the detection light 937
emitted from the light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2
illustrated in FIG. 101 has characteristics of changing with time.
Accordingly, optical property changes can be detected
simultaneously at different multiple points (different photo
detecting cells 38 illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28) in the
photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2. This has an advantageous effect of
detecting life activities in a plurality of parts in the plurality
of examinees 936. For example, consider the case of detecting heart
arrhythmia or an excessive fatigue part of the three examinees
936-1 to 936-3. First, to detect life activities of the examinee
936-1, the imaging lenses 57-1 and 57-2 are moved to locate the
photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 at an image forming position (confocal
position) corresponding to a heart position 962 in the examinee
936-1 or the whole body of the examinee 936-1. Here, a plurality of
photo detecting cells 38 are arranged in each of the photodetectors
36-1 and 36-2 as illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28, and each photo
detecting cell 38 can individually detect a signal. Since the
wavelength of the detection light 937 applied to the examinee 936-1
cyclically changes with time, the optical property in a
corresponding detection target part in the examinee 936-1 can be
detected by each photo detecting cell 38 in one wavelength change
cycle. This wavelength change is repeated cyclically, as a result
of which a temporal change in optical property in the specific part
can be detected by each photo detecting cell 38. Upon myocardial
contraction, the optical property in the heart position 962 changes
temporarily, as described in section 11.3, 14.3, or 15.5 with
reference to FIG. 58, 73, or 98. Hence, myocardial contraction can
be detected from a temporal change in optical property in the heart
position 962. When a myocardial contraction condition is different
from a healthy condition, a possibility of "arrhythmia" is
detected. In the case of detecting an excessive fatigue part, on
the other hand, the optical property in only a specific part
differs from its surroundings, as described in section 15.6 with
reference to FIG. 99. Therefore, the excessive fatigue part can be
detected by detecting the "difference in optical property between
different locations in the life object" as described in section
16.2. After completing life activity detection for the examinee
936-1 in this way, the imaging lenses 57-1 and 57-2 are moved to
locate the photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 at an image forming
position (confocal position) corresponding to the heart position
962 in the examinee 936-2 or the whole body of the examinee 936-2.
Life activity detection for the examinee 936-2 is then performed in
the same way as above. After this, life activity detection for the
examinee 936-3 is equally performed.
[1593] FIG. 102 illustrates an internal structure of each of the
light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2 illustrated in FIG. 101.
A method of changing, with time, the wavelength (wavenumber) of the
detection light 937 emitted from each of the light emitting
components 111-1 and 111-2 is described below, with reference to
FIG. 102. As a light emitting source 941, a tungsten halogen lamp,
a Globar (Siliconit), or a nichrome wire heater is used. However,
this is not a limit, and an InGaAs LED (light emitting diode) with
addition of indium may be used. For example, light emitted from the
light emitting source 941 using a halogen lamp is diverging light.
A pinhole 853-1 is accordingly placed in its optical path to use
only light passing through the pinhole 853-1, as a result of which
the light can be treated as if emitted from a point light source. A
condensing lens 942-1 whose anterior focal point matches the
pinhole 853-1 is placed (the pinhole 853-1 is placed at the focal
position of the condensing lens 942-1) to generate parallel light.
Next, an optical band-pass filter 943 is placed in the optical
path, to extract only light in the wavelength (wavenumber) range
used as the detection light 937. The light then enters an
acousto-optical device 944 in a parallel light state. A
piezoelectric element (not illustrated) is attached to a side
surface of the acousto-optical device 944. By applying an AC
electrical signal to the piezoelectric element, a standing
compressional wave is generated in the acousto-optical device 944.
The travel direction of parallel light after Bragg diffraction in
the standing compressional wave varies according to wavelength.
This being so, only specific wavelength light (or its neighboring
wavelength light) is selected by a condensing lens 942-2 placed at
the exit of the acousto-optical device 944 and a pinhole 853-2
placed at the focal position of the condensing lens 942-2 as
illustrated in FIG. 102, and used as the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937).
The travel direction of parallel light after Bragg diffraction is
such that not only light of a predetermined wavelength but also
light which is n times the predetermined wavelength and light which
is 1/n the predetermined wavelength travel in the same direction.
However, since light which is 2 times or more the predetermined
wavelength and light which is 1/2 or less the predetermined
wavelength are cut off by the optical band-pass filter 943
beforehand, only single wavelength light is included in the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(the detection light 937). The width of the transmission light
wavelength range (wavenumber range) required of the optical
band-pass filter 943 matches the required transmittable wavelength
range width of the band-pass filter 921 described in section 16.1
(i.e. 0.76 .mu.m or less, or 0.31 .mu.m or less). Regarding the
acousto-optical device 944, the cycle of the AC electrical signal
applied to the piezoelectric element is changed to control the
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity (the detection light 937). Though the acousto-optical
device 944 is used for extraction (selection) of the predetermined
wavelength light in FIG. 102, this is not a limit. For example, any
wavelength selection (extraction) method such as use of a Michelson
interferometer is also included the scope of the present exemplary
embodiment. Another modulator may also be used, such as using an
electro-optical device in the Michelson interferometer. Moreover,
an emission wavelength variable semiconductor device may be used as
the light emitting component 111. Though single wavelength light is
used in the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity (the detection light 937) in FIG. 102, this is not a
limit. For example, the Michelson interferometer may be used in the
light emitting component 111 so that light of a plurality of
discrete wavelengths are included in the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937).
In such a case, an absorption spectrum for each detecting cell 38
can be calculated by performing a computing process of FT-NIR
(Fourier Transform Near Infrared Spectroscopy) in the signal
operation section 925 (FIG. 100) (for details on FT-NIR, see
Yukihiro Ozaki and Satoshi Kawata (Ed.): Kinsekigai bunkouhou
(Gakkai Shuppan Center, 1996), p. 79).
[1594] FIG. 103(a) illustrates a time-series wavelength change
property of the detection light 937 (the illuminating light 115 for
life activity detection or the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity) emitted from the light emitting
component 111-1 in FIG. 101. FIG. 103(b) illustrates a time-series
wavelength change property of the detection light 937 emitted from
the light emitting component 111-2. In FIG. 101, the plurality of
photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 are disposed so that the life
activities of the plurality of examinees 936 can be detected at one
time. The detection light 937 (the illuminating light 115 for life
activity detection or the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity) emitted from the light emitting
component 111-1 and passing through the examinee 936 is detected by
the photodetector 36-1, and the detection light 937 (the
illuminating light 115 for life activity detection or the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity)
emitted from the light emitting component 111-2 and passing through
the examinee 936 is detected by the photodetector 36-2. There is a
risk of life activity detection confusion, such as when detection
light emitted from the light emitting component 111-1 and reflected
off the examinee 936 or a wall in the room is erroneously detected
by the photodetector 36-2. To prevent such confusion, there is a
feature that, in the case of performing life activity detection
using the plurality of light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2
and the plurality of photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2, control is
exercised so that the light emission properties of the detection
light 937 (the illuminating light 115 for life activity detection
or the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity) emitted from the different light emitting components
111-1 and 111-2 are different from each other. This prevents
erroneous detection of the detection light 937 emitted from one
light emitting component 111 by a photodetector 36 not
corresponding to the light emitting component 111, and so produces
an advantageous effect of enhancing the life activity detection
reliability. As an example of the difference in light emission
property between the different light emitting components 111-1 and
111-2, the light emission timing is varied. In detail, the light
emission timing (light emission period 951) is changed (switched)
between the different light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2. As
elapsed time t progresses in order of t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4, the
detection light 937 (the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection or the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity) from the light emitting component 111-1 is emitted
only in the period from t0 to t1 and the period from t2 to t3
(light emission period 951) and is not emitted in the period from
t1 to t2 and the period from t3 to t4 (non-light emission period
950), as illustrated in FIG. 103(a). Meanwhile, the detection light
937 (the illuminating light 115 for life activity detection or the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity)
from the light emitting component 111-2 is emitted only in the
period from t1 to t2 and the period from t3 to t4 (light emission
period 951) and is not emitted in the period from t0 to t1 and the
period from t2 to t3 (non-light emission period 950), as
illustrated in FIG. 103(b). In addition, the photodetector 36-1
performs the life activity detection process only in the period
from t0 to t1 and the period from t2 to t3 corresponding to the
light emission period 951 of the detection light 937 emitted from
the light emitting component 111-1, and stops the life activity
detection process in the period from t1 to t2 and the period from
t3 to t4 corresponding to the non-light emission period 950.
Likewise, the photodetector 36-2 performs the life activity
detection process only in the period from t1 to t2 and the period
from t3 to t4 corresponding to the light emission period 951 of the
detection light 937 emitted from the light emitting component
111-2, and stops the life activity detection process in the period
from t0 to t1 and the period from t2 to t3 corresponding to the
non-light emission period 950. Through such control, erroneous
detection of the detection light 937 emitted from one light
emitting component 111 by a photodetector 36 not corresponding to
the light emitting component 111 can be prevented. Note that, in
the case of controlling light emission by the above-mentioned
method, which of the light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2
emits light can be determined according to the elapsed time t, and
accordingly detection may be continuously performed while switching
between reflection light and transmission light, instead of setting
the detection stop period for each photodetector 36 as mentioned
above. In the arrangement illustrated in FIG. 101, for example, the
photodetector 36-1 can detect the detection light 937 emitted from
the light emitting component 111-1 and passing through the examinee
936, and also detect the detection light 937 emitted from the light
emitting component 111-2 and reflected off the examinee 936. Hence,
the photodetector 36-1 can detect the detection light 937 emitted
from the light emitting component 111-1 and passing through the
examinee 936 in the period from t0 to t1, and detect the detection
light 937 emitted from the light emitting component 111-2 and
reflected off the examinee 936 in the period from t1 to t2.
Likewise, the photodetector 36-2 can detect the detection light 937
emitted from the light emitting component 111-1 and reflected off
the examinee 936 in the period from t0 to t1, and detect the
detection light 937 emitted from the light emitting component 111-2
and passing through the examinee 936 in the period from t1 to t2.
When each photodetector 36 continuously performs detection in this
way, the effective amount of detection signal is doubled, thus
producing an advantageous effect of improving the life activity
detection accuracy.
[1595] The method of providing the difference in light emission
property between the different light emitting components 111-1 and
111-2 is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and any control
method that enables identification between the detection light 937
(the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity or the illuminating light 115 for life activity detection)
emitted from the light emitting component 111-1 and the detection
light 937 (the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity or the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection) emitted from the light emitting component 111-2 is
included in the scope of the present exemplary embodiment. For
example, the time length ratio (duty) between the light emission
period 951 and the non-light emission period 950 or the sum period
of the light emission period 951 and the non-light emission period
950 (if the time length is equal between the light emission period
951 and the non-light emission period 950) may be varied between
the different light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2. In such a
case, a frequency separation process is performed on the detection
signal obtained by the photodetector 36, to separate the life
activity detection signal obtained from the detection light 937
(the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity or the illuminating light 115 for life activity
detection). As an alternative method, different modulation schemes
are used for the detection light 937 (the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity or the illuminating light
115 for life activity detection) emitted from the light emitting
component 111-1 and the detection light 937 (the electromagnetic
wave 608 for detection/control of life activity or the illuminating
light 115 for life activity detection) emitted from the light
emitting component 111-2, with the detection signal being
separately detected according to the difference in demodulation
scheme corresponding to each modulation scheme. As another
alternative method, a specific pattern using the light emission
period 951 and the non-light emission period 950 is uniquely
assigned, with the detection signal obtained by the photodetector
36 being separately extracted by synchronous detection
corresponding to each specific pattern.
[1596] The following describes a method of generating the non-light
emission period 950. The present exemplary embodiment has a feature
that the non-light emission period 950 is generated using the
wavelength control method of the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937). As a
concrete example, the wavelength control method of the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(the detection light 937) is combined with the optical property of
an optical member such as the optical band-pass filter 943, to
generate the non-light emission period 950. As mentioned earlier,
the wavelength of the emitted electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937) is
controlled by changing the AC frequency of the AC electrical signal
applied to the piezoelectric element attached to the side surface
of the acousto-optical device 944 in FIG. 102. This AV frequency
applied to the piezoelectric element is changed with the elapsed
time t, to control the wavelength .lamda. of the emitted
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(the detection light 937) as in FIG. 103. Here, the non-light
emission period 950 is generated by controlling the AC frequency
range so that light of a wider wavelength range than the width of
the transmission light wavelength range (wavenumber range) set in
the optical band-pass filter 943 in FIG. 102 is emitted through
time. For example, consider the case where, to find a patient with
heart arrhythmia among the examinees 936-1 to 936-3, the examinees
936-1 to 936-3 are illuminated with the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937)
while changing the wavelength through time at least in the range
from 7500 cm.sup.-1 (1.33 .mu.m in wavelength) to 6100 cm.sup.-1
(1.64 .mu.m in wavelength) according to FIG. 98. In this case, the
transmission light wavelength range (wavenumber range) in the
optical band-pass filter 943 is set to a slightly wider range from
1.20 .mu.m to 1.80 .mu.m than the above-mentioned range. Then the
AC frequency is set so that the wavelength .lamda. of the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(the detection light 937) is 1.20 .mu.m at the elapsed time t2,
according to FIG. 103(a). The AC frequency is gradually shifted
through the elapsed time t, and controlled so that the wavelength
.lamda. of the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity (the detection light 937) is 1.80 .mu.m at the
elapsed time t3. Further, the AC frequency is continuously changed
in the period from t3 to t4, and controlled so that the wavelength
.lamda. of the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of
life activity (the detection light 937) is 2.40 .mu.m at the
elapsed time t4. Here, due to the transmission light wavelength
range (wavenumber range) set in the optical band-pass filter 943,
light in a range exceeding a wavelength of 1.80 .mu.m (up to 2.40
.mu.m) is cut off by the optical band-pass filter 943. As a result,
an AC frequency control period exceeding a wavelength of 1.80 .mu.m
up to 2.40 .mu.m appears as the non-light emission period 950. The
non-light emission period 950 is generated by combining the
transmission light wavelength range (wavenumber range) set in the
optical band-pass filter 943 with the AC frequency control range
applied to the acousto-optical device 944 in this way, with there
being no need to provide a new optical device to generate the
non-light emission period 950. This simplifies the internal
structure of the light emitting component 111 in FIG. 102 and
reduces its cost, thus producing an advantageous effect of
supplying the light emitting component 111 at low price. Though the
AC frequency applied to the acousto-optical device 944 is
controlled to generate the non-light emission period 950 in FIG.
102, this is not a limit. For example, in the case where another
modulator such as an electro-optical device is used in the light
emitting component 111, the non-light emission period 950 may be
generated by controlling the modulator. In the case where the
emission wavelength variable semiconductor device is used as the
light emitting component 111, the injected current or the applied
voltage of the emission wavelength variable semiconductor device
may be controlled to control the emission wavelength and the light
emission intensity.
[1597] Though not illustrated in FIG. 101, the photodetectors 36-1
and 36-2 are connected to respective signal operation sections 925
as in FIG. 100. The detection signal detected by each of the
photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 is put to the computing process in the
corresponding signal operation section 925, and output from the
signal operation section 925 as the life activity detection signal.
The signal operation section 925 performs the same computing
process as described in section 16.1. In the exemplary embodiment
described in section 16.1 with reference to FIG. 100, different
photo detecting cells 38 output detection signals of different
wavelength ranges (wavenumber ranges) in the electromagnetic wave
608 for detection/control of life activity. The exemplary
embodiment described in this section 16.3 differs from the
foregoing exemplary embodiment in that different photo detecting
cells 38 illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28 output detection signals of
wavelengths different in time series as illustrated in FIG. 103.
Thus, in the exemplary embodiment described in this section 16.3, a
large amount of signal data are input to the signal operation
section 925, which causes a significant increase in computing time.
To avoid this, there is a feature that a time-varying detection
signal transferred from each photo detecting cell 38 is grouped for
each specific wavelength range (wavenumber range) .delta..lamda. in
the signal operation section 925, and the grouped result is
submitted to the computing process as signal data of one point, in
the same way as the method described in section 16.1. As a method
of grouping for each specific wavelength range (wavenumber range)
.delta..lamda., the detection signal of each photo detecting cell
38 is added (cumulated) at specific time intervals, and the sum
(addition/cumulative result) is used as signal data of one point
when calculating the life activity detection signal. This
considerably reduces the number of computing processes in the
signal operation section 925 and enables faster processing, and
also reduces random noise included in the detection signal by the
addition process (cumulative process). This is described in detail
below, through comparison with the method described in section 16.1
with reference to FIG. 100. In FIG. 100, the Fresnel grating 922 is
used as an optical device for wavelength separation (spectroscopy)
in the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity, to change the reflection direction for each different
wavelength. Accordingly, in one photo detection cell 38 having a
width W, the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life
activity included in the wavelength range (wavenumber range) width
.delta..lamda. obtained by eqs. (A.cndot.70) and (A.cndot.71) is
detected simultaneously. In the method described in this section
16.3, on the other hand, the wavelength .lamda. in the
electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control of life activity
(the detection light 937) at a specific time is predetermined, and
the wavelength .lamda. changes with the elapsed time t, as
illustrated in FIG. 103. The state of change of the wavelength
.lamda. is in a linear relationship with respect to the elapsed
time t. Therefore, a time interval .delta.t included in the
wavelength range (wavenumber range) width .delta..lamda. where the
wavelength .lamda. is designated in the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937) is
uniquely determined from the property in FIG. 103. Since the
wavelength .lamda. in the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity (the detection light 937) at a
specific time is predetermined, each photo detecting cell 38
illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28 detects the amount of reflection light
or the amount of transmission light only for short wavelength light
(or narrow-band wavelength light) corresponding to each time, and
transmits the result to a sequential detection signal line 62 as
the detection signal. In the signal operation section 925, the
detection signal obtained at each time by each light detecting cell
38 is sequentially added (cumulated or time-integrated) at each
predetermined time interval .delta.t according to a system clock.
The cumulative/addition result for the period of the first time
interval .delta.t is extracted as signal data of one point
corresponding to the wavelength range (wavenumber range) .alpha.,
and temporarily stored in the signal operation section 925.
Further, the cumulative/addition result for the period of the next
time interval .delta.t is extracted as signal data of one point
corresponding to the wavelength range (wavenumber range) P, and
temporarily stored in the signal operation section 925. This
process is sequentially repeated, and signal data of each point
corresponding to a different one of the wavelength ranges
(wavenumber ranges) .gamma., .delta., and .epsilon. is stored in
the signal operation 925. An important point here lies in that
signal data corresponding to the wavelength ranges (wavenumber
ranges) .alpha. to .epsilon. are obtained separately for each photo
detecting cell 38 in FIG. 27 or 28. Accordingly, information of
optical properties as many as the photo detecting cells 38 included
in the photodetector 36 illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28 are obtained
at the maximum, at one time. Thus, life activity detection signals
are obtained in parallel from information of optical change
properties defined in section 16.2.
16.4) Searching Method for Life Activity Detection Target Part
[1598] As described at the beginning of section 16.3, detection of
an abnormal life activity such as arrhythmia or extraction of an
excessive fatigue part can be performed on the plurality of
examinees 936 at one time by the method illustrated in FIG. 101.
The method of arranging the plurality of photodetectors 36-1 and
36-2 to enable stable life activity detection for the plurality of
examinees 936 and the method of avoiding confusion between the
plurality of light emitting components 111-1 and 111-2 are also
described in section 16.3. However, to achieve the stated object,
it is also necessary to automatically detect a position of a part
in a life object for each examinee 936. For this, there are the
following main features:
[1599] [A] detecting the number of organisms existing in a life
activity detected area; and
[1600] [B] associating detected life activity detection signal with
predetermined part for each organism.
This has an advantageous effect that life activity detection can be
performed on a predetermined part of each organism (examinee 936).
A concrete processing method is described below, with reference to
FIGS. 104 and 105. Though a life detecting section 220 in a system
model described in chapter 18 is assumed to execute this process,
this is not a limit, and a cloud server may execute the
process.
[1601] A life activity detection method in FIG. 105 is performed by
combination of the result of image processing (or video analysis)
of video information obtained by the imaging sections 933-3 to
933-6 in FIG. 101 and the result of operation in the signal
operation section 925 (not illustrated) on the detection signal
obtained by the photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2. First, image
processing (or video analysis) is performed on the video
information obtained by the imaging sections 933-3 to 933-6, to
detect the number of organisms existing in the life activity
detection area (step S121). In the example described in section
16.3, the life activity detection area is a "room in which life
activity detection is performed" or the like and, in the case of
people out on the street or people gathering in front of a specific
sign, an "area in which life activity detection is possible".
Though health checkup or detection of an excessive fatigue part for
the examinee 936 is used in the example in section 16.3, this is
not a limit. For example, health conditions of dogs or cats may be
detected simultaneously. Since the life activity detection target
mentioned here is not limited to humans (examinees 936) and may
include other organisms, the expression "the number of organisms"
is used in step S121. Based on the result of step S121, the process
from step S122 is performed for each organism. The shape of each
individually extracted organism is analyzed to detect the posture
of the organism (lying, standing, sitting, etc.) (step S122). A
location of a feature part of each organism is then detected (step
S123). In the case of humans, a face position 961 (FIG. 104)
including the eyes, the nose, and the mouth is easy to detect as
the feature part. However, this is not a limit, and any detectable
part in the body may be set as the feature part. Whether or not a
life activity detection part is predetermined is then determined
(step S124) to specify the next process. For example in the case of
examination for arrhythmia, it is predetermined to detect the
activity of the "heart" as the life activity detection part. In the
case of extracting an excessive fatigue part in the body, on the
other hand, the life activity detection part is not predetermined,
and there is a need to detect the state of the whole body. In the
case where the life activity detection part is predetermined, the
life activity detection part is searched for based on the result of
posture detection of each organism in step S122 and the result of
location detection of the feature part of each organism in step
S123 (step S127). A concrete method for this is described below,
with reference to FIG. 104. Suppose the location of the face
position 961 as the feature part of each organism has been
extracted as a result of step S123, and the standing posture of the
examinee 936 is detected as a result of step S122. If the height of
the examinee 936 is known in step S122, the heart position 962 can
be estimated based on the face position 961. Once the position of
the detection target part (the heart position 962) is known, it is
possible to perform closely-focused life activity detection by the
photodetectors 36-1 and 36-2 (step S125). As described in section
11.3 with reference to FIG. 58 and section 15.5 with reference to
FIG. 98, the optical property changes locally upon myocardial
contraction, and so there is a possibility that the timing of
myocardial contraction can be detected by detecting the optical
property change. This enables data corresponding to an
electrocardiogram to be acquired contactlessly. By analyzing the
data, arrhythmia can be estimated, and easily detect a possibility
of a cardiac defect. Not only detection of a cardiac defect but
also blood pressure estimation is possible. In detail, the total
amount of blood pumped to the body can be estimated from the
myocardial contraction state and the size of the heart. If the
total body vessel volume can be simultaneously calculated by oxygen
concentration measurement in blood vessels using near infrared
light, blood pressure can be estimated. Symptoms of cerebral
infarction (intracerebral hemorrhage or cerebral thrombosis)
include:
[1602] (a) face expression is unbalanced between right and left
(facial muscles on one side are considerably relaxed);
[1603] (b) when trying to raise both arms, one arm does not have
strength and cannot be raised (or fingers on only one side do not
have strength to move);
[1604] (c) unable to speak properly (unable to utter properly);
and so on (see http://www.ncvc.go.jp/cvdinfo/disease/stroke.html/).
A person with cerebral infarction has clearly different muscle
contraction between right and left, when seen by others.
Accordingly, by detecting abnormal muscle contraction in life
activity detection, it is possible to estimate cerebral infarction
condition. In the case where the life activity detection part is
not predetermined as in "extraction of an excessive fatigue part in
the body" (step S124), the life activity of the whole body of each
examinee 936 is detected in FIG. 105 (step S125). In the case where
the excessive fatigue part is detected by the photodetector 36-1 or
36-2, the location of excessive fatigue in the body is specified
from the posture of the examinee 936 obtained in step S122, based
on the detection result of the location (the face position 961) of
the feature part of each organism obtained in step S123. Note that
the control illustrated in FIG. 64 or 65 is performed in the life
activity detection step S125. In this life activity detection step,
as illustrated in FIG. 46, while constantly determining whether or
not to perform life activity detection, the act of life activity
detection is notified to the user (S66).
17] Method of Controlling a Plurality of Parts in Life Object at
One Time
[1605] A method of performing life activity detection on a
plurality of parts at one time has been described in section 16.3.
The following describes a method of performing life activity
control on a plurality of parts at one time. FIGS. 106 and 107
represent a partial extension to FIG. 66, and so only the
differences from FIG. 66 are described below.
[1606] In the case of performing life activity control on a
plurality of parts at one time in the part (e.g. the examinee's
head) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled, a life
activity control position setting device or a light scanning device
is disposed in the optical path of the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity.
[1607] A method of disposing the life activity control position
setting device in the optical path of the electromagnetic wave 608
for detection/control of life activity is described below, with
reference to FIG. 106. In FIG. 106, a liquid crystal pinhole
shutter 971 is used as the life activity control position setting
device as an example. The liquid crystal pinhole shutter 971 is
configured to be capable of appropriately setting the light
transmission section 56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter as in FIG. 25(a), and can control life activity at an image
forming position through the objective lens 31 corresponding to the
light transmission section 56 in the two-dimensional liquid crystal
shutter. The position of the light transmission section 56 in the
two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter on the liquid crystal
pinhole shutter 971 is controlled/set by a liquid crystal shutter
driver 972. Though the liquid crystal pinhole shutter 971 is used
in FIG. 106, this is not a limit, and any other device capable of
setting the life activity control position may be used.
[1608] A method of disposing the light scanning device in the
optical path of the electromagnetic wave 608 for detection/control
of life activity is described below, with reference to FIG. 107. In
FIG. 107, two galvanometer mirrors 972 are used as the light
scanning device. The two galvanometer mirrors 972 have their
rotation axes orthogonal to each other, and so can perform scanning
in a biaxial direction with converging light in the part (e.g. the
examinee's head) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled. The
galvanometer mirrors 972 are controlled by a galvanometer mirror
driver 974. Thus, while scanning in a biaxial direction with
converging light of the electromagnetic wave 608 for
detection/control of life activity in the part (e.g. the examinee's
head) 600 of the organism to be detected/controlled, the amount of
light emission in the light emitting component 111 is temporarily
increased according to control by the light emitting component
driver 114 when the converging light reaches the location in which
life activity is to be controlled, thus performing life activity
control. Though the two galvanometer mirrors 972 are used in FIG.
107, this is not a limit, and any other device available as a light
scanning device, such as a polygon mirror (rotating mirror) or an
acousto-optical device, may be used.
[1609] There is a report that an image seen with the human eye is
reproduced in a part of the occipital lobe in the brain. This
suggests a possibility that a specific image can be provided to the
examinee by externally controlling an action potential pattern of
neurons in the part of the occipital lobe by the method in FIG. 106
or 107. Moreover, the peripheries of olfactory cells reach the back
of the human nose, and so there is also a possibility that smell
can be virtually sensed by performing life activity control
according to the above-mentioned two-dimensional pattern on the
back of the human nose.
18] System Model and Service Provision Method Using
Detection/Control of Life Activity
18.1) System Model Using Detection/Control of Life Activity
[1610] Though a system incorporating a detecting section for life
activity has already been described in chapter 7 with reference to
FIG. 44, the following describes a system model using
detection/control of life activity from a little different
viewpoint. The system described here is mostly similar to that in
chapter 7. In detail, the system is completely the same as that in
chapter 7 in that the mind connection layer 202 (internet area
common to all services using detection/control of life activity) is
set on the internet layer 201, and this area (layer) is commonly
managed/operated and maintained/expanded by the mind communication
provider 211. Various life activity detection/control-related
services 987 are available in this area (layer). The mind service
distributor 212 provides a service to the user 213, and receives a
service charge from the user 213. At the same time, the mind
service distributor 212 pays a toll for use of the mind connection
layer 202 (internet area common to all services using
detection/control of life activity), to the mind communication
provider 211. The detecting section 220 for life activity detects
the life activity of the user 213, and also controls the life
activity of the user 213 through a control section 981 for life
activity. The detecting section 220 for life activity and the
control section 981 for life activity are connected to a cloud
server 982 via the internet layer 201, through the internet network
control section 223. Life activity detection data and life activity
information collected by the cloud server 982 are stored in a
database 986 through a firewall. Meanwhile, a product manufacturer
or seller 987 pays an advertising fee to the mind communication
provider 211, and is provided with appropriate advertising
information for the user 213 from the mind communication provider
211. The cloud server 982 transmits, from among received life
activity detection data and life activity information, necessary
information to an information notifying section 984 according to
need, and notifies a user-related party 983.
18.2) Service Provision Method Using Detection/Control of Life
Activity
[1611] The following describes an example of a service provision
method using the system in FIG. 108. As one form of service, an
example of a virtual overseas travel service using a teleoperator
robot 985 is described below. When the user 213 selects "virtual
overseas travel service" from many life activity
detection/control-related services 987, the corresponding mind
service distributor 212 starts the provision of the service. When
the user 213 notifies the mind service distributor 212 of a
"desirable overseas travel location" while relaxing in front of a
TV (display screen control section 225) in a living room in his or
her home, the teleoperator robot 985 which has been on standby
starts moving to the location. When the user 213, in front of the
TV, thinks of the direction in which he or she wants to move, the
detecting section 220 for life activity automatically detects this,
and operates the movement of the teleoperator robot 985. Video
captured by a camera included in the teleoperator robot 985 is then
displayed on the TV in the home. Simultaneously, a smell in the
environment in which the teleoperator robot 985 is placed is
transferred via the internet, and the control section 981 for life
activity excites the sense of smell of the user 213 so that the
user can sense the smell as described in chapter 17. Instead of
displaying the video of the camera included in the teleoperator
robot 985 on the TV in the home, the control section 981 for life
activity may directly excite the occipital lobe of the user 213,
thus enabling the user 213 to experience the scenery realistically
and stereoscopically. Such a service provides an advantageous
effect of experiencing a virtual overseas travel in a short time at
very low cost.
[1612] The following describes an example of a processing method
from a life activity detection result to execution of a service. A
feature here lies in that service candidates for the user 213 based
on the result of life activity detection (step S125) are presented
to the user 213 or whether or not to execute a service is inquired
of the user 213, and a service is executed in response to reaction
by the user 213. When the user 213 comes close to the detecting
section 220 for life activity, life activity detection (step S125)
is performed according to the procedure in FIG. 46, and the result
is analyzed (step S131) to generate life activity information.
After this, one or more optimal service candidates are
automatically selected based on the life activity information (step
S132). Here, services include adjustment of natural illumination
(brightness of lighting) according to the user 213's mood,
provision of adequate music, and provision of tea or coffee. After
the optimal service candidates are automatically selected in step
S132, a process such as inquiring of the user 213 about whether or
not to execute a service estimated as optimal or presenting a
plurality of service candidates and prompting the user 213 to make
selection is performed (step S133). The inquiry about whether or
not to execute the service estimated as optimal or the presentation
of the plurality of service candidates is made by display on a TV
or a display device by the display screen control section 225,
voice guidance, or the like. Following this, the user 213's
movement (or speech) is detected to receive a service request or a
service execution acknowledgement from the user (step S134). The
service is then executed for the user 213 (step S135). During the
service execution time, too, life activity detection (step S125) is
performed to check the reaction of the user 213, i.e. whether or
not the user is satisfied (step S136).
[1613] FIG. 110 illustrates an example of a notification process
after life activity detection. A main feature here lies in that,
based on analysis of the life activity detection result, whether or
not to notify the result is automatically determined. A scene in
which, for patients waiting in a hospital waiting room, heart
disease, cerebral infarction, or hypertension is automatically and
contactlessly detected before physical examination to help a doctor
make a diagnosis is assumed as an example. When a patient enters
the waiting room, life activity detection (step S125) is performed
according to the procedure in FIG. 46, and the result is analyzed
(step S131) to generate life activity information. In this stage of
generating the life activity information, a possibility of
abnormality such as heart disease, cerebral infarction, or
hypertension can be automatically determined. In the case where
there is no abnormality, the detection result does not need to be
notified to the doctor or the patient (step S141), and so
notification is not made (step S144). In the case where a
possibility of an abnormality is indicated, who is to be notified
of the result is automatically determined (step S142). In the case
where a possibility of an abnormality for the patient in the
waiting room is indicated, the doctor is notified of the result. On
the other hand, for example in the case of performing checkup on
people on the street or in front of a specific sign or in the case
of automatically performing checkup in an office of a company, the
user-related party 983, e.g. the user 213's immediate boss, is
notified via the information notifying section 984 in FIG. 108.
Alternatively, the user 213's family may be directly notified as
the user-related party 983. When checkup is performed on people on
the street or in front of a specific sign, the user is advised on
the sign to seek "medical care". For instance, in the case of a
chronic disease such as hypertension which the user 213 is already
aware of, whether or not to notify related information is
determined (step S143). A medical product manufactured or sold by
the product manufacturer or seller 987 (FIG. 108) which has paid an
advertising fee beforehand may be presented to the user 213 as the
related information (step S144).
[1614] Lastly, a method of communicating (transmitting) a life
activity detection result is described with reference to FIG. 111.
A main feature here lies in that the life activity detection result
is communicated (transmitted) according to a predetermined format
set beforehand. Life activity detection (step S125) is performed
according to the procedure in FIG. 46, and the result is analyzed
(step S131) to generate life activity information. In the system
model illustrated in FIG. 108, the life activity detection result
or the life activity information obtained by analyzing the life
activity detection result is transferred via the internet (step
S152). Therefore, the life activity detection result or the life
activity information is automatically input in the predetermined
format such as an HTML description format (step S151). The cloud
server 982 receives the life activity detection result or the life
activity information (step S153), and executes a predetermined
process (including a service to the user 213) based on the received
information (step S154), and automatically stores the received
information in the database 986 (step S155).
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST
[1615] 1 . . . Neuron cell body, [1616] 2 . . . Axon, [1617] 3 . .
. Numerous bouton (Synaptic knob), [1618] 4 . . . Signal detection
area (Ending) of sensory neuron, [1619] 5 . . . Neuromuscular
junction, [1620] 6 . . . Muscle cell, [1621] 7 . . . Central
nervous system layer (Cerebral cortex layer), [1622] 8 . . .
Nervous relay pathway layer (including thalamus, cerebellum, and
reticular formation), [1623] 9 . . . Reflex pathway layer (Spinal
reflex pathway layer), [1624] 11 . . . Voltage-gated Na.sup.+ ion
channel, [1625] 12 . . . Myelin sheath, [1626] 13 . . .
Extracellular fluid, [1627] 14 . . . Axoplasm, [1628] 15 . . . Node
of Ranvier, [1629] 16 . . . Signal transmission direction in axon,
[1630] 11 . . . Pyramidal cell body, [1631] 18 . . . Stellate cell
body, [1632] 19 . . . Glial cell, [1633] 20 . . . Membrane
potential, [1634] 21 . . . Resting membrane potential, [1635] 22 .
. . Depolarization potential, [1636] 23 . . . Action potential,
[1637] 24 . . . Term of nerve impulse, [1638] 25 . . . During rest,
[1639] 26 . . . Membrane potential changing of neuron, [1640] 21 .
. . Potential changing of muscle fiber membrane, [1641] 28 . . .
Capillary, [1642] 29 . . . Transmission path of oxygen molecule,
[1643] 30 . . . Detected point for life activity, [1644] 31 . . .
Objective lens, [1645] 32 . . . Detection lens, [1646] 33 . . .
Optical path of detection light, [1647] 34 . . . Reflecting mirrors
(galvanometer mirror), [1648] 35 . . . Pinhole, [1649] 36 . . .
Photodetector, [1650] 37 . . . Grating, [1651] 38 . . . Photo
detecting cell, [1652] 40 . . . Marked position on life-object
surface, [1653] 41 . . . Life-object surface, [1654] 42 . . .
Camera lens, [1655] 43 . . . Two-dimensional photodetector, [1656]
44 . . . Distance from surface points of an area where the
detecting section for life activity is disposed, [1657] 45 . . .
Surface points of an area where the detecting section for life
activity is disposed, [1658] 46 . . . Position monitoring section
regarding detected point for life activity, [1659] 47 . . .
Reflection light amount of light having wavelength of 780 nm,
[1660] 48 . . . Reflection light amount of light having wavelength
of 830 nm, [1661] 51 . . . Two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter,
[1662] 52 . . . Condensing lens, [1663] 53 . . . Grating for light
distribution, [1664] 54 . . . Lateral one-dimensional alignment
photo detecting cell, [1665] 55 . . . Longitudinal one-dimensional
alignment photo detecting cell, [1666] 56 . . . Light transmission
section in two-dimensional liquid crystal shutter, [1667] 57 . . .
Imaging lens, [1668] 58 . . . Life activity detection signal,
[1669] 60 . . . Color filter, [1670] 62 . . . Detection signal line
output from front part of detecting circuit, [1671] 63 . . .
Lenticular lenses, [1672] 71 . . . Two-dimensionally arranged cell
array for detecting changes of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property,
[1673] 72 . . . Coil for magnetic field preparation, [1674] 73 . .
. (Superconducting) magnet, [1675] 74 . . . Excitation coil, [1676]
75 . . . Part of organism to be detected (head or the like of
examinee), [1677] 80 . . . One detection cell for detecting changes
of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance property, [1678] 81 . . . Power line
and ground line, [1679] 82 . . . Transmission line of system
clock+time stamp signal, [1680] 83 . . . Output line for life
activity detection signal, [1681] 84 . . . Detecting coil, [1682]
85 . . . Front part of life activity detection circuit, [1683] 86 .
. . Rear part of life activity detection circuit, [1684] 87 . . .
Electromagnetic wave detecting cell (Photo detecting cell or
Detecting coil), [1685] 101 . . . Detecting section for life
activity, [1686] 102 . . . Light emitting section, [1687] 103 . . .
Signal detecting section, [1688] 104 . . . System clock and
modulation signal generating section, [1689] 105 . . . Transmitting
section of life activity detection signal, [1690] 106 . . . Life
activity detection signal, [1691] 111 . . . Light emitting
component, [1692] 112 . . . Light modulator, [1693] 113 . . . Light
modulator driver, [1694] 114 . . . Light emitting component driver,
[1695] 115 . . . Illuminating light for life activity detection,
[1696] 116 . . . Dichroic band pass filter or color filter, [1697]
117 . . . System clock generator, [1698] 118 . . . Modulation
signal generator, [1699] 121 . . . Photo detecting section of life
activity, [1700] 122 . . . Life activity detection circuit, [1701]
131 . . . Preamp, [1702] 132 . . . Band-pass filter, [1703] 133 . .
. Modulating signal component extraction section (synchronous
detection section), [1704] 134 . . . A/D converter, [1705] 135 . .
. Memory section in front part, [1706] 136 . . . Signal processing
operation section of front part, [1707] 137 . . . Signal transfer
section to rear part, [1708] 141 . . . Signal transfer section to
front part, [1709] 142 . . . Memory section in rear part, [1710]
143 . . . Signal processing operation section of rear part, [1711]
144 . . . Signal transfer section to transmitting section of life
activity detection signal, [1712] 151 . . . Counter which generates
incremental counter numbers for transmitting the life activity
detection signal or describes a cumulative duration time to
transmit the life activity detection signal, [1713] 152 . . .
Variable key generator which provides variable keys depending on
incremental counter numbers for transmitting the life activity
detection signal or on a cumulative duration time to transmit the
life activity detection signal, [1714] 153 . . . Variable shifting
position generator which provides and outputs a variable shifting
number in a M-serial cyclic circuit regarding incremental counter
numbers for transmitting the life activity detection signal or
regarding a cumulative duration time to transmit the life activity
detection signal, [1715] 154 . . . Encrypter, [1716] 155 . . .
Signal transfer section to life activity detection circuit, [1717]
156 . . . Memory section in transmitting section of life activity
detection signal, [1718] 157 . . . Internet protocol forming
section which sets the IP address, [1719] 158 . . . Network control
section, [1720] 161 . . . Life activity detected area, [1721] 162 .
. . Life activity level, [1722] 163 . . . Detection time, [1723]
171 . . . Evaluation factor, [1724] 172 . . . Equivalent level,
[1725] 173 . . . Event, [1726] 178 . . . Content of process or
operation to be performed, [1727] 201 . . . Internet layer, [1728]
202 . . . Mind connection layer, [1729] 211 . . . Mind
communication provider, [1730] 212 . . . Mind service distributor,
[1731] 213 . . . User, [1732] 216 . . . User-side drive system,
[1733] 217 . . . User-side control system, [1734] 218 . . . Life
detecting division, [1735] 220 . . . Life detecting section, [1736]
221 . . . Detection section of event information B, [1737] 222 . .
. Signal/information multiplexing section, [1738] 223 . . .
Internet network control section, [1739] 224 . . . Extraction
section of event information A, [1740] 225 . . . Display screen
control section, [1741] 226 . . . User input section, [1742] 227 .
. . Interpretation section of life activity, [1743] 228 . . . Data
base storage area, [1744] 229 . . . Maintenance processing section
of mind connection layer, [1745] 230 . . . Technical support
handling section to mind service distributor, [1746] 231 . . .
Charging/profit-sharing processing section, [1747] 232 . . . Screen
display/change setting section, [1748] 233 . . . Remote operation
section to drive system, [1749] 234 . . . Direct-service content
determination section, [1750] 241 . . . Detection of life activity,
[1751] 242 . . . Event information B, [1752] 243 . . . Event
information A, [1753] 244 . . . Service to be provided, [1754] 245
. . . Specific information provision (including information
provision service), [1755] 247 . . . Direct service (mail/dispatch,
and the like), [1756] 248 . . . Life activity detection signal with
event information, [1757] 249 . . . Life activity information with
event information, [1758] 250 . . . Display screen to user, [1759]
251 . . . Remote control to drive system, [1760] 252 . . . Payment
for tolls, [1761] 253 . . . Profit sharing, [1762] 254 . . . User
input information without detection signal, [1763] 301 . . .
Detection condition datagram, [1764] 302 . . . Event datagram,
[1765] 303 . . . Detection signal datagram relating to detection
wavelength .lamda., [1766] 304 . . . Life activity datagram, [1767]
305 . . . Interpretation condition datagram, [1768] 310 . . .
Interpretation condition packet, [1769] 311 . . . Detection
condition packet, [1770] 312 . . . Event packet, [1771] 313 . . .
Detection signal packet, [1772] 314 . . . Life activity information
packet, [1773] 315 . . . Internet header, [1774] 316 . . .
Detection condition data fragment, [1775] 317 . . . Event data
fragment, [1776] 318 . . . Detection signal data fragment, [1777]
319 . . . Interpretation condition data fragment, [1778] 320 . . .
life activity information fragment, [1779] 326 . . . Location
information of each detected point, [1780] 327 . . . Life activity
distribution map at time T1, [1781] 328 . . . Life activity
distribution map at time T2, [1782] 331 . . . Service type
information, [1783] 332 . . . Corresponding datagram
identification, [1784] 333 . . . Various control of fragment,
[1785] 334 . . . Fragment offset, [1786] 335 . . . Source address,
[1787] 336 . . . Destination address, [1788] 37 . . . Option type
(Type=68), [1789] 338 . . . Identification of life detecting
section or inherent address information for life detecting section,
[1790] 339 . . . Timestamp, [1791] 341 . . . Event source address
information (URL of display screen or the like) [1792] 342 . . .
Number information of events occurring in detection term, [1793]
343 . . . API command set in display screen, [1794] 346 . . . Event
category, [1795] 347 . . . Event continuation time, [1796] 348 . .
. Event content, [1797] 351 . . . User identification, Detected
person identification, or Detected object (member) identification,
[1798] 352 . . . Detection start time which is described in the
form of year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and sub-second,
[1799] 353 . . . Basic frequency of timestamp, [1800] 354 . . .
Measuring items, [1801] 355 . . . Detection method, [1802] 356 . .
. Detection signal category, [1803] 357 . . . Location information
of detected area and Location rule of detected points, [1804] 358 .
. . Detecting resolution of detected area, [1805] 359 . . .
Expressed bit number of quantized detection signal, [1806] 360 . .
. Sampling frequency of detection signal or sampling interval,
[1807] 361 . . . Number information of wave-lengths used for
detection, [1808] 362 . . . Accumulated number information of
detection signal sending, [1809] 363 . . . Version number of
interpretation soft, [1810] 364 . . . Data base version number or
last modified time of data base used for interpretation, [1811] 371
. . . Number information of measuring items, [1812] 372 . . .
Number information of evaluation factors included in measuring item
A, [1813] 373 . . . Evaluation factor list relating to measuring
item A, [1814] 374 . . . Number information of evaluation factors
included in measuring item B, [1815] 375 . . . evaluation factor
list relating to measuring item B, [1816] 377 . . . Equivalent
level values of evaluation factors included in measuring item A
measured at time T1, [1817] 378 . . . Equivalent level values of
evaluation factors included in measuring item A measured at time
T2, [1818] 401 . . . Reflection light amount change, [1819] 411 . .
. Postcentral cerebral cortex, [1820] 412 . . . Thalamus, [1821]
413 . . . Spinal cord, [1822] 414 . . . Vertebral body
(anterioris), [1823] 415 . . . Lamina (posterior), [1824] 416 . . .
Spinal cord gray matter, [1825] 421 . . . X-axis, [1826] 422 . . .
Y-axis, [1827] 423 . . . Z-axis, [1828] 424 . . . Light source for
detecting wavelength of 780 nm, [1829] 425 . . . Color filter
passing light having wavelength of 780 nm, [1830] 426 . . .
Photodetector for light having wavelength of 780 nm, [1831] 427 . .
. Light source for detecting wavelength of 830 nm, [1832] 428 . . .
Color filter passing light having wavelength of 830 nm, [1833] 429
. . . Photodetector for light having wavelength of 830 nm, [1834]
431 . . . Position detecting light source for detected point for
life activity, [1835] 432 . . . Position detecting monitor section
of detected point for life activity, [1836] 433 . . . Beam
splitter, [1837] 434 . . . Photosynthesis element having color
filter characteristic, [1838] 437 . . . Quarter wave length plate,
[1839] 438 . . . Polarized light separation element, [1840] 439 . .
. Light for monitoring, [1841] 440 . . . Term of detection of life
activity, [1842] 441 . . . Inherent information expressing term of
detecting section for life activity, [1843] 451 . . . Synchronous
signal, [1844] 452 . . . ID information for manufacturer
identification of detecting section for life activity, [1845] 453 .
. . Individual identification (production number) of detecting
sections for life activity, [1846] 454 . . . Manufacturer related
information set by manufacturer, [1847] 501 . . . Epicranius
[surprise], [1848] 502 . . . Corrugator [pain], [1849] 503 . . .
Zygomaticus [laughter], [1850] 504 . . . Orbicularis oris
[expression] [1851] 505 . . . Depressor anguli oris (chin deltoid
muscle)[sorrow], [1852] 506 . . . Depressor muscles of lower lip
(musculus quadratus labii inferioris)[amimia], [1853] 507 . . .
Mentalis [doubt and despite], [1854] 511 . . . Before initiation of
muscular contraction activity [1855] 512 . . . During muscular
contraction activity, [1856] 513 . . . Amplitude value, [1857] 521
. . . Detectable range in detecting section for life activity,
[1858] 522 . . . Position of life activity object, [1859] 600 . . .
Part of organism to be detected/controlled (head or the like of
examinee), [1860] 601 . . . Electrode terminal (plate), [1861] 602
. . . Power supply for high voltage and high frequency generation,
[1862] 603 . . . Control section, [1863] 604 . . . Modulation
signal generator, [1864] 605 . . . Objective lens driving circuit,
[1865] 606 . . . Collimating lens, [1866] 607 . . . Beam splitter,
[1867] 608 . . . Electromagnetic wave for detection/control of life
activity, [1868] 609 . . . Optical waveguide, [1869] 610 . . .
Optical waveguide driving circuit, [1870] 611 . . . Outside layer
of cell membrane, [1871] 612 . . . Inside layer facing cytoplasm,
[1872] 613 . . . Cell membrane, [1873] 614 . . . Crack, [1874] 615
. . . Gate, [1875] 616 . . . Charged part, [1876] 621 . . .
Hydrogen bonding part, [1877] 622 . . . Residue of amino acid,
[1878] 623 . . . Principal chain of amino acid, [1879] 701 . . .
Receptor A, [1880] 102 . . . Receptor B, [1881] 703 . . .
Intracellular signal transmission cascade A, [1882] 704 . . .
Intracellular signal transmission cascade B,
711 . . . Phosphorylation process cascade, [1884] 712 . . .
Dephosphorylation process, [1885] 713 . . . Inhibitory action,
[1886] 721 . . . Gene expression (transfer to messenger ribonucleic
acid (mRNA)), [1887] 722 . . . Protein synthesis (translation of
messenger ribonucleic acid (mRNA)), [1888] 723 . . . Exhibition of
specific cellular function, [1889] 724 . . . Control object, [1890]
731 . . . Synaptic cleft, [1891] 732 . . . Glutamic acid bond,
[1892] 733 . . . Glutamic acid bond, [1893] 734 . . . Glutamic acid
bond, [1894] 735 . . . Spine, [1895] 741 . . . Metabotropic
glutamate (mGluR) receptor, [1896] 742 . . .
N-methyl-D-aspartate-type ionotropic glutamate (NMDA) receptor,
[1897] 743 . . . A-amino-3-hydroxy-5-methyl-4-issoxazol propionate
(AMPA) receptor, [1898] 747 . . . In case of high Ca.sup.+ ion
concentration, [1899] 748 . . . In case of low Ca.sup.+ ion
concentration, [1900] 750 . . . Generation of PI(3, 4, 5)P.sub.3,
[1901] 751 . . . Inflow of Ca.sup.+ ions, [1902] 752 . . . Inflow
of Na.sup.+ ions, [1903] 753 . . . Phosphorylation of CaM-kinase,
[1904] 754 . . . Gene expression in cell nucleus, [1905] 755 . . .
Generation of messenger ribonucleic acid (mRNA), [1906] 756 . . .
Translation of messenger ribonucleic acid (mRNA), [1907] 757 . . .
Insertion of a-amino-3-hydroxy-5-methyl-4-issoxazol propionate
(AMPA) receptor, [1908] 758 . . . Phosphorylation cascade, [1909]
759 . . . Activation of protein kinase B, [1910] 761 . . .
Activation of Calcineurin, [1911] 762 . . . Dephosphorylation of
inhibiter 1, [1912] 763 . . . Activation of protein phosphatase
enzyme 1, [1913] 764 . . . Uptake of
a-amino-3-hydroxy-5-methyl-4-issoxazol propionate (AMPA) receptor,
[1914] 771 . . . Memory action, [1915] 772 . . . Obliteration
action, [1916] 780 . . . Substrate, [1917] 801 . . . Preamplifier,
[1918] 802 . . . Switch, [1919] 803 . . . Adder, [1920] 811 . . .
Vibrational excitation by pump light, [1921] 812 . . . Stimulated
light emission by Stokes light [1922] 821 . . . Pump light
wavelength, [1923] 822 . . . Stokes light wavelength, [1924] 823 .
. . Light transmittance, [1925] 824 . . . Wavelength, [1926] 831 .
. . Photonic crystal fiber, [1927] 832 . . . Lens, [1928] 833 . . .
Lens, [1929] 834 . . . Mirror, [1930] 835 . . . Composite color
filter, [1931] 836 . . . Half mirror, [1932] 83 . . . Lens, [1933]
838 . . . Mirror, [1934] 839 . . . Polarizing beam splitter, [1935]
840 . . . Quarter wave length plate, [1936] 841 . . . Member for
preventing light scattering on surface of organism, [1937] 842 . .
. Detecting section of amount of wavefront aberration occurring in
life object [1938] 843 . . . Polarizing plate, [1939] 844 . . .
Wavefront aberration correcting element, [1940] 845 . . .
Detected/controlled point (measured/controlled point) for life
activity, [1941] 851 . . . Color filter, [1942] 852 . . .
Condensing lens, [1943] 853 . . . Bait mirror, [1944] 854 . . .
Aperture, [1945] 856 . . . Beam expander, [1946] 857 . . . Mirror,
[1947] 858 . . . CCD camera, [1948] 861 . . . Detection light
amount increase direction, [1949] 862 . . . Detection time t,
[1950] 863 . . . Signal change direction (signal direction
detection), [1951] 864 . . . Amplitude value, [1952] 871 . . .
Specified voltage, [1953] 872 . . . Preamplifier, [1954] 873 . . .
Detection signal, [1955] 874 . . . Edge (peak/bottom) detection
circuit [1956] 875 . . . Resistor, [1957] 876 . . . Capacitor,
[1958] 877 . . . Diode, [1959] Cl . . . Chlorine ion, [1960] 1H,
2H, 3H, 4H, 5H, 6H, 7H . . . Hydrogen atom, [1961] 1O, 2O, 3O, 4O .
. . Oxygen atom, [1962] C . . . Carbon atom, [1963] N . . .
Nitrogen atom, [1964] 901 . . . Reference tone region, [1965] 902 .
. . Combination region, [1966] 903 . . . 1st overtone region,
[1967] 904 . . . Symmetrically telescopic vibration, [1968] 905 . .
. Anti-symmetrically telescopic vibration, [1969] 903-1 . . . Water
1st overtone region, [1970] 911 . . . Hydrogen bonding part, [1971]
912 . . . Lactic acid, [1972] 913 . . . Arginine, [1973] 921 . . .
Band-pass filter, [1974] 922 . . . Fresnel grating, [1975] 925 . .
. Signal operation section, [1976] 931 . . . Lighting device,
[1977] 932 . . . Optical filter, [1978] 933 . . . Imaging section,
[1979] 934 . . . Band-pass filter, [1980] 935 . . . Light-blocking
liquid crystal shutter, [1981] 936 . . . Examinee, [1982] 931 . . .
Detection light, [1983] 938 . . . Illuminating light, [1984] 941 .
. . Light emitting source, [1985] 942 . . . Condensing lens, [1986]
943 . . . Optical band-pass filter, [1987] 944 . . .
Acousto-optical device, [1988] 950 . . . Non-light emission period,
[1989] 951 . . . Light emission period, [1990] 961 . . . Face
position, [1991] 962 . . . Heart position, [1992] 971 . . . Liquid
crystal pinhole shutter, [1993] 972 . . . Galvanometer mirror,
[1994] 973 . . . Liquid crystal shutter driver, [1995] 974 . . .
Galvanometer mirror driver, [1996] 981 . . . Control section for
life activity, [1997] 982 . . . Cloud server, [1998] 983 . . .
User-related party, [1999] 984 . . . Information notifying section,
[2000] 985 . . . Teleoperator robot, [2001] 986 . . . Database.
* * * * *
References